JP7353678B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display symbols variably and when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played. For example, up to four symbols can be variably displayed as starting memories, and variable display is performed for each starting memory.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the game results are displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, patented (See Reference 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-246964

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display effect is performed only for the starting memory unit, so if the display effect is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the variable display of symbols may be lost, and interest may decline at that point.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to suppress the decline in interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) that performs a variable display of special symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Reservation means (for example, a first special symbol reservation display section 75, a second special symbol reservation display section 76) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information related to the special symbol as a starting memory;
a display control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a variable display of the special symbol for one starting memory stored by the holding means;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of performing a variable display effect while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed;
performance mode determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of determining performance modes for the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means;
Equipped with
The performance mode determining means includes:
If a plurality of starting memories are stored by the holding means, and a predetermined starting memory in which a predetermined expected effect (for example, a reach variation effect) is to be performed is not included in the plurality of starting memories, the above-mentioned For all the starting memories stored by the holding means, it can be determined to perform a specific performance mode that is performed multiple times in the variable display performance (for example, a mode in which temporary fluctuation is performed multiple times),
The performance control means is
The effect that can be displayed in the specific effect mode performed for all starting memories stored by the holding means (for example, a subtraction effect) is replaced by the effect that can be displayed in the specific effect mode performed for one starting memory (for example, the second holding in FIG. 150). The second half of the special symbol fluctuation display (for example, the #4 temporary fluctuation of the second hold in FIG. 150) and the start memory next to the first start memory (for example, the third hold in FIG. 150) of the special symbol. It is possible to perform across variable display and
a predetermined performance that suggests that the predetermined expected performance will be performed even though the last stored start memory among all the start memories stored by the holding means is not the predetermined start memory; For example, it is possible to perform a reach precursor performance),
The performance mode determining means includes:
If a plurality of starting memories are stored by the holding means and a predetermined starting memory in which a predetermined expected performance is to be performed is included in the plurality of starting memories, at least after the predetermined starting memory. With respect to the stored starting memory, it can be determined not to execute a displayable effect in the specific effect mode,
The predetermined performance is
Executed when the performance that is performed across the latter half of the variable display of the special symbol performed for the one starting memory and the variable display of the special symbol performed for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is not performed. The present invention is characterized in that it is an effect that is easy to be executed in a variable display in a starting memory that is earlier than the last stored starting memory and later than the first stored starting memory.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of a diagram showing a group of operation buttons of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example which shows the external appearance perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine based on 1st Embodiment. It is an example which shows the front exploded perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine based on 1st Embodiment seen diagonally from the upper right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit containing the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a diagram showing an example of a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit random number determination table memorize|stored in the main ROM of a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table memorize|stored in the main ROM of a main control circuit. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. It is an example of a front view of the game board unit showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side area when the blade member of the normal electric accessory is opened. , is an example of a front view of the game board unit showing how the game ball flows down the right side area when the blade member of the normal electric accessory is closed. It is an example of the front view of the game board unit showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the left side area when the blade member of the normal electric accessory is opened. It is an example of the front view of a back unit. It is an example of the back view of a back unit. This is an example of a perspective view of the back unit viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. This is an example of a perspective view of the back unit viewed diagonally from the top left of the back. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit viewed diagonally from the top left of the back. FIG. 3 is an example of a rear perspective view of the attacker unit viewed diagonally from above and to the right. It is an example of a front view of an attacker unit. It is an example of a side view of an attacker unit. It is an example of a top view of an attacker unit. FIG. 3 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view showing a base member of the attacker unit. It is an example of the back view which shows the front side plate part 520 of an attacker unit. It is an example of a front sectional view of an attacker unit. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded cross-sectional perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. (a) An example of a plan view showing a big prize opening solenoid, (b) An example of a plan view showing a link arm, and (c) An example of a plan view showing a shutter. (a) An example of a plan view showing an attacker unit when the shutter is in the second position, and (b) Similarly, an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory. (a) An example of a plan view showing an attacker unit when the shutter is in the first position, and (b) Similarly, an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory. It is an example of a top view showing a special electric accessory according to another example. It is an example of a perspective view of a special electric accessory according to another example, viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of a special electric accessory according to another example, viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. (a) An example of a plan view showing the accommodating part, (b) An example of a perspective view of the accommodating part seen from diagonally above the front right, and (c) An example of a rear perspective view of the accommodating part seen from diagonally above the right. (a) An example of a plan view showing the big winning hole solenoid, (b) An example of a perspective view of the big winning hole solenoid seen from diagonally above the front right, (c) A rear perspective view of the big winning hole solenoid seen from diagonally above the right. This is an example of a diagram. (a) An example of a plan view showing a link arm, and (b) an example of a rear perspective view showing the link arm seen diagonally from above to the right. (a) An example of a plan view showing a regulation member, (b) An example of a perspective view of the regulation member seen from diagonally above the right, and (c) An example of a rear perspective view of the regulation member seen from diagonally above the right. It is an example of the front perspective view which showed the assembly structure of a special electric accessory in the state where there is no accommodation part. It is an example of the front perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulation member. It is an example of the back perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulation member. (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the big prize opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member, and (b) an example of a diagram in which illustration of the link arm in (a) is omitted. (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the big prize opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member in the closed state, and (b) an example of a diagram in which illustration of the link arm in (a) is omitted. (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the big winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member when the driving force transmission part of the winning opening solenoid starts moving from the state shown in FIG. 46, (b) It is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omits illustration of the link arm of (a). (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the big winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member when the driving force transmission part of the big winning opening solenoid continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 47, (b) It is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omits illustration of the link arm of (a). (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the big winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member when the driving force transmission part of the big winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 48, (b ) is an example of a diagram in which illustration of the link arm in (a) is omitted; (a) An example of a schematic plan view showing a locked state by a regulating member, and (b) an example of a schematic plan view showing a state released from a locked state by a regulating member. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of a normal electric accessory unit viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of a normal electric accessory unit viewed diagonally from above and to the rear left. It is an example of a figure showing a normal electric accessory, a second starting port switch, and a housing member. This is an example of a rear view of a normal electric accessory. This is an example of a rear view of a normal electric accessory viewed from diagonally above the right side. The state of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is in the closed state (shown by the dashed line) and the state of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade member is in the transition from the closed state to the open state (shown by the solid line) FIG. A rear view showing the state of the normal electric accessory when the blade member is in a transition state (shown by a dashed line) and the state of the normal electric accessory when the blade member is in an open state (shown by a solid line). This is an example. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the blade member and the power transmission mechanism for explaining the function of the flange connection member, (A) a diagram for explaining that the blade member is prevented from opening, (B) opening of the blade member; FIG. It is an example of the front view of an upper front accessory in a normal mode (a mode when it is in an origin position). It is an example of the back view of the upper front accessory in a normal aspect. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory viewed diagonally from above and to the rear left. It is an example of the front view of the upper front accessory in the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the upper front accessory object in which the movable decoration body is moving toward the downward direction. FIG. 7 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory when the movable decorative body moves downward to the operating limit position. It is an example of the front view of an upper back accessory in a normal mode (a mode when it is in an origin position). It is an example of the back view of the upper back accessory in a normal aspect. It is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory seen from diagonally above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory seen from diagonally above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper rear accessory seen from diagonally above and to the rear left. (A) An example of a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 67, and (B) an example of an enlarged view of the X section shown in (A). (A) An example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 67, and (B) an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in (A). It is a figure which shows an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before operation|movement start, ie, a normal mode (a mode when it is in an origin position), Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a back view. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect before the upper left arm and the upper right arm of a pantograph mechanism reach a limit position after the upper rear accessory starts operating, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a front view. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect when the upper left arm and the upper right arm of a pantograph mechanism reach a limit position, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a back view. After the upper left arm and the upper right arm of the pantograph mechanism have operated to the operating limit position, the left motor and right motor further rotate, and the movable decorative body is operated downward in the paper plane by the left transmission arm and the right transmission arm ( FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state in which the covered decorative body starts operating with respect to the movable decorative body, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect in which the covering decoration body moved to the operating limit with respect to a movable decoration body, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a back view. It is an example of the front view of a lower accessory in a normal mode (a mode when it is in an origin position). It is an example of the back view of the lower part accessory in a normal aspect. This is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory seen from diagonally above and to the front right. It is an example of the back perspective view of the lower accessory seen diagonally from the upper left. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory seen from diagonally above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory seen from diagonally above and to the rear left. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory in the aspect when it exists in an origin position, Comprising: (A) is a front view, (B) is a back view. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory when it is operated to an intermediate position, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory when it operates to an operating limit, Comprising: (A.) is a front view, (B) is a back view. It is an example of the front view of an upper corner accessory. It is an example of the back view of an upper corner accessory. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory seen from diagonally above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory viewed diagonally from above and to the rear left. There is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body are at the origin position. FIG. 3 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body start operating from the origin position. 93 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 92. FIG. It is an example of a back view which shows when a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body operate|move to an operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of a lower corner accessory. It is an example of the back view of a lower corner accessory. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory seen from diagonally above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory seen from the diagonally upper left side of the back. It is an example of a back view which shows when a 3rd movable body and a 4th movable body are in an origin position. It is an example of the back view which shows when a 3rd movable body and a 4th movable body start operation|movement from an origin position. It is an example of a back view which shows when a 3rd movable body and a 4th movable body operate|move to an operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of back unit 176 showing a mode when all of the first movable body, the second movable body, the third movable body, and the fourth movable body operate to their operating limit positions. It is an example of the front view of the back unit which shows the aspect when the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body operate|move to an operation limit position, and the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body are waiting at an origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit which shows the aspect when the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body operate|move to an operation limit position, and the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body are waiting at an origin position. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory in a normal aspect. It is an example of the back view of the side accessory in a normal aspect. It is an example of the front view of the exploded perspective view of the side accessory seen from diagonally above the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory seen from diagonally above and to the rear left. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory in which the movable decorative body is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 3 is an example of a rear view of a side accessory in which a movable decorative body is moving toward the front of a display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the front view of a side accessory when a movable decoration body advances toward the front of the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the back view of the side accessory when the movable decorative body advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the rear view of the side accessory when the side accessory motor is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decoration body is advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel viewed from diagonally above and to the rear left. (A) An example of a front view of the second middle panel, and (B) an example of a sectional view taken along the line CC shown in (A). 2 is an example of a flowchart illustrating power-on processing by the main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the switch input detection process by main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing starting opening winning detection processing by the main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern determination processing by the main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing main control main processing by the main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing special symbol control processing by the main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing special symbol storage check processing by the main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the time saving number subtraction process by main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern table setting process by main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing normal symbol control processing by the main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing main processing by a sub CPU. 3 is an example of a flowchart showing command analysis processing by a sub CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing command transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the message setting process by a sub CPU. 3 is an example of a flowchart illustrating a directory table registration process by a sub CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the message transmission process by a sub CPU. It is a block diagram showing an example of state transition of a plurality of gaming state stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the battle performance displayed on a liquid crystal display device in a secret A stage. It is an example of a flowchart which shows an example of scenario presetting processing by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence between a battle attribute and a performance map. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect map used for scenario lottery. This is an example showing provisional fluctuation settings for each of the first to fourth holds, together with a time sequence. This is an example of a flowchart showing a performance determining process (secret A stage) that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the performance mode determining process. This is an example of a variation pattern table. 143 is an example of a flowchart showing the performance determination process (secret A stage) continued from FIG. 142. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of start-up memories held in first to fourth holds. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of start-up memories held in first to fourth holds. 144 is an example of a flowchart showing the production determination process (secret A stage) continued from FIG. 144. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect which blocks three provisional fluctuations. 147 is an example of a flowchart showing the performance determination process (secret A stage) continued from FIG. 147. This is an example of a sequence of temporary fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the third hold are subject to scenario lottery. This is an example of a sequence of temporary fluctuations in a state where the first to fourth holds are subject to scenario lottery. This is an example of a flowchart showing a modification when it is determined in step S326 that there is a scenario performance being executed. It is an example of a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage). It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern when determining the area which performs a look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example of selecting the detail of a prefetch effect. It is a figure which shows an example when the detail of a look-ahead effect is a countdown effect. It is an example of the flowchart which shows background change control processing. This is an example of a flowchart illustrating processing for determining the number of consecutive background changes that can occur. It is an example of the table regarding background change control and a background change scenario. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of background change control processing according to the present embodiment. This is an example of a flowchart showing a fluctuation scenario determination process. It is an example of the flowchart which shows chance up control processing. It is an example of a flowchart which shows pending change determination processing. It is an example of the sequence chart which shows lighting control of a character lamp. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the control process of character lamp production. It is an example of a flowchart showing control of full-screen presentation. It is an example of a screen diagram showing a screen display. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of a big hit of the pachinko game machine based on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol memorize|stored in the main ROM in the pachinko game machine based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table memorize|stored in the program ROM of a sub-control circuit in the pachinko game machine based on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol variation time determination table stored in the main ROM. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing a second modification regarding the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. This is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on in the pachinko game machine based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of game permission processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, (a) a flowchart showing an example of the setting process, and (b) a flowchart showing another example of the setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of backup clear processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a game return process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of abnormality processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process by main CPU in the pachinko game machine based on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of a starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a setting check process by the main CPU 101 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving frequency subtraction processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of command transmission processing by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of message setting processing by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process by a sub CPU in the pachinko game machine based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of message transmission processing by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the limiter number of times in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 1 for each setting value. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation right gate. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate. It is a flowchart showing an example of a hole menu task executed by a sub CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a hall menu screen is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device in a pachinko game machine according to a second embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when the hall menu display process is executed, it is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when the hall menu display process is executed, it is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when hall menu redisplay processing is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. This is an example of a screen in which error details are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and (a) a screen showing that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed. , (b) A screen indicating that a starting port abnormal prize winning error has occurred and that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed; (c) Backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed; and This is the screen after the notification period has elapsed indicating that the backup clear process has been executed in a state where both the starting port abnormal prize winning error and the abnormal prize winning error have occurred. 12 is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, and is a flowchart when the sub CPU 201 executes a setting determination process for determining the appropriateness of setting value information. . It is a flowchart showing an example of hole menu processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 59 is an example of a setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 59. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen of a setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen that allows page updates on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example when "clear" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen where each history data is cleared in the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 7 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. 2 is a diagram illustrating another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when "setting display" is selected; be. This is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, and shows an example when newly added setting values are displayed. It is a diagram. FIG. 7 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected. . A diagram illustrating another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, and an example of a page update screen on which page updates can be performed. It is. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the operation procedure until the setting change/confirmation history screen where the setting values can be confirmed is displayed on the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flow diagram which shows an example. It is a flowchart showing an example of maintenance processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a maintenance screen displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the maintenance screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example when a guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example when a UniMemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a modification example 1 of setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of authentication processing in modification example 1 of setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. In the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example displayed on a display area. This is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in modification example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, the screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the input password is inappropriate. It is a figure showing an example. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, confirming the setting value on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until a setting change/confirmation history screen that allows setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, in modification example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, it is a diagram showing a configuration example of a volume switch that generates a volume password applied to the authentication process. . It is a flowchart which shows an example of an authentication process in modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example displayed on a display area. It is an example of the volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow diagram showing an example of a setting value confirmation procedure for setting change/confirmation history information in a second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming system according to modification example 3 of a setting change/confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history process in the pachinko game machine that constitutes the game system according to modification example 3. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal and server device of the gaming system according to Modification Example 3. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko game machine of the game system according to modification 3. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow diagram showing an example of a setting value confirmation procedure of setting change/confirmation history information in a gaming system according to modification example 3. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen on the mobile wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to Modification Example 3. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen on the mobile wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to Modification Example 3. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen on the mobile wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to Modification Example 3. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. This is an example of a winning random number determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. This is an example of the symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, this is a table stored in the main ROM, and is an example of a variable time determination table for special symbols for a low start. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, this is a table stored in the main ROM, and is an example of a variable time determination table for special symbols for high starts. This is an example of a flowchart showing a small winning performance process executed by the sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of a flowchart of the indicator effect processing executed by the sub CPU 201 in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example which shows the flowchart of the forced standby suppression production process performed by the sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. This is another example of the flowchart of the small winning performance process executed by the sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example which shows the flowchart of the premium performance control process performed by the sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, this is a table stored in the main ROM, and is an example of a variable time determination table for special symbols for high starts. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 and the performance by the sub CPU 201 in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" A time chart showing the relationship with control, (a) In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the results of the second special lottery are derived in the order of "loss" → "small hit" → "big hit" (b) In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the results of the second special lottery are derived in the order of "lose" → "small hit" → "big hit". In the second example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol determination table (first starting hole, second starting hole) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit is This is an example of a table that is referred to in “state” and “low probability time saving gaming state”. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a third example of a pachinko game machine according to a third embodiment. In the third example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the variable time determination table is executed by the main CPU upon transition from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" It is a flowchart which shows setting processing. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the fourth example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. This is an example of a flowchart showing a variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 in response to the end of the small winning game state in the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table stored in the main ROM in a modification of the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, and is a diagram showing a table for determining the variation time of special symbols for medium start. It is a flowchart showing a variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU in a modification of the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the fifth example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the sixth example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. In the sixth example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM, and is a diagram showing another example of the variable time determination table for special symbols for high starts. In the sixth example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing another example of the variable time determination table for special symbols for low start. In the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, this table is stored in the main ROM and is an example of a variable time determination table for special symbols for high starts. In the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the fluctuation time is executed by the main CPU, triggered by the fact that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G). 3 is a flowchart illustrating decision table setting processing. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the seventh example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the eighth example and a modification of the eighth example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of the front view which shows the external appearance of the game board unit in the modification of the modification of the 8th Example of the pachinko game machine based on 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the second example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the third example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a fourth example of a pachinko game machine according to a fourth embodiment. This is an example of the symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

[1. Pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment]
[Configuration of gaming machine]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the external appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a group of operation buttons. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including the first and second special symbol display sections. Further, the directions shown in the drawings are the directions when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, the reason why "left" is written in the right direction in the drawing is because the drawing is a rear view, and "right" on the drawing corresponds to "left" when viewed from the front. Similarly, when "right" is written toward the left in the drawing, "left" in the drawing becomes "right" when viewed from the front for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front and rear directions of the pachinko game machine 1 will be defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front side is the side that is visible when viewed from the player's side, and the back side is the side that is visible when viewed from the side opposite to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2, and 4 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a tray unit 14, a firing device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit. 17, a payout unit 18, and a board unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports a payout unit 18 and a board unit 19 on the back side, and also supports a glass door 13, a tray unit 14, a firing device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit 17 on the front side. support.

The glass door 13 is pivoted to the base door 12 so as to be freely openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and a group of operation buttons 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13 . The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face a game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction with the glass door 13 closed with respect to the base door 12. Furthermore, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged at the top of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is used to make, for example, audio announcements, presentations, error notifications, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light-emitting means for making a light announcement or a performance, and is not limited to an LED, but may be a lamp, etc., as long as it can perform a light-emission performance.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 includes a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select buttons 664 include an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when the select button 664 is referred to, it is a general term for the upper, lower, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hall menu screen, etc., which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Note that the position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the pan unit 14, for example, on the upper tray 26.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which an upper plate 26 and a lower plate 27 are integrated. The pan unit 14 is arranged at the front lower part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

The upper tray 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 26 are fired from the firing device 15 toward a game area 20, which will be described later. The upper tray 26 is provided with a payout opening 61 and a performance button 62. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 onto the upper tray 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The performance button 62 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on the result of a jackpot determination of a special symbol, which will be described later.

The lower tray 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26. A dispensing port 63 is provided in the lower tray 27. The game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26 are paid out from the payout opening 63 to the lower tray 27.

The firing device 15 is for firing game balls stored in the upper tray 26 toward the game area 20. The firing device 15 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the dish unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the firing device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 31, and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, in the firing device 15, when the firing handle 32 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

Although the details will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the results of special symbol jackpot determination (hereinafter, special symbol jackpot determination may simply be referred to as "jackpot determination") and various performance images related to the game. It is something. The various performance images displayed in the display area of the performance display device 16 include, for example, a performance identification pattern (decorative pattern), a performance image according to the result of jackpot determination, a performance image during a jackpot, a demonstration performance image, This includes the pending number of variable displays (variable displays) of special symbols, etc. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged approximately at the center of the game board unit 17 (on the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742, which will be described later).

In this embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided for displaying the various effect images described above, but a plurality of liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images can be displayed using the plurality of liquid crystal display devices. It may also be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9, which will be described later), and a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9, which will be described later). a payout/launch control board 50 that has a payout/launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described below) that controls the payout/launch of game balls, and a power supply circuit 338 that supplies power (described later). A power supply unit 60 having a power source (see FIG. 9), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9, which will be described later) are provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (in this embodiment, six levels from "1" to "6") that differ in various data related to the pachinko game. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the setting value becomes smaller, the degree of advantage to the player becomes progressively lower.

Inside the main board case that houses the main control board 30, there is a setting switch 332 that is operated when changing setting values, a setting key 328 that is operated when changing or confirming setting values, and a performance display monitor. 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both of which will be described later in FIG. 9) are housed therein. The performance display monitor 334 displays, for example, performance display data and setting values, which will be described later. For example, an error code, which will be described later, is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Note that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case by the person in charge of managing the pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "the person in charge of managing the game machine") in consideration of security. ) This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than the player from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. Note that inside the main board case means that the setting switch 332 and/or setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and also that there is a switch in the corresponding location of the setting switch 332 and setting key 328 on the main board case. If there is a chip and the pachinko machine 1 is rotated from the island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed using a key managed by the machine manager to expose the back side, the machine manager It also includes those in which the responsible person has access to the setting switch 332 and/or the setting key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. A game area 20 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 17, in which the fired game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged approximately at the center of the game area 20 and a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which the fired game balls can roll and flow down is formed. It includes a center unit 174, a normal electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the normal electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. This back unit 176 includes various accessories such as an upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Each of these accessories 1000 functions as a performance accessory that can be operated based on the result of the special lottery.

An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a portion where a display area of a liquid crystal display device 16, which will be described later, is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted therein. The game ball fired from the firing device 15 flies out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail, etc., and flows down the game area 20 while changing its traveling direction.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is divided (defined) by guide rails 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the gaming area 20. The inner rail 26b is arranged on the left side of the transparent panel 172 and inside the outer rail 26a.

The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged at the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the downstream area of the game ball in the game area 20 into left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game balls fired by the firing device 15 are divided into left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (more specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to the collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing its direction of travel. The shot game ball is distributed into a falling region according to the amount of operation of the shooting handle 52. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 52 is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 52 is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area of the center rail 1742. Note that the hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method in which the game ball flows down in the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hitting". It is possible to make different bets depending on the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body that integrates the first starting opening 420, the big winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600. The attacker unit 500 is located approximately at the lower right portion of the gaming area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The jackpot opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the big prize opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball enters the big prize opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a big prize opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big prize opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 has an open state in which it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the big winning hole solenoid 620, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to a jackpot game state based on the result of jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (described later). will be carried out if Note that the result of the jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (described later) is displayed as a special symbol in the first special symbol display section 73 or second special symbol display section 74. This is indicated by the stop display mode.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, in this embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting port 420 provides an opportunity to determine a jackpot on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also provides an opportunity to display the result of the jackpot determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display section 73 to be described later. It gives A first starting port switch 421 is provided in the first starting port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball enters the first starting port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421, a jackpot determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are released from the payout port 61. It is dispensed (discharged) to the upper tray 26 or from the dispensing port 63 to the lower tray 27 . Note that the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 420 is performed by hitting the ball to the left.

The normal electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body that integrates a second starting port 440, an outlet 450, and a normal electric accessory 460. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged approximately at the lower left of the gaming area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, with the second starting port 440 being disposed on the right side when viewed from the front, and the out port 450 being disposed on the left side when viewed from the front. Conventionally, the electric accessory unit 400 was often disposed below the first starting port 420, for example. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for the liquid crystal display device 16 to be larger, and it has become difficult to arrange it below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged approximately at the lower left of the game area 20.

The second starting port 440 provides an opportunity to determine a jackpot on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also provides an opportunity to display the result of the jackpot determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display section 74 to be described later. It gives A second starting port switch 441 is provided in the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a jackpot determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are transferred to the payout port 61. The liquid is dispensed (discharged) from the outlet to the upper tray or from the outlet 63 to the lower tray 27 . The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the normal electric accessory 460. Note that the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 is, in principle, performed by hitting the ball to the right.

The normal electric accessory 460 includes a wing member 4620 that can rotate in the right direction, a starting port solenoid 4630 (for example, see FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the wing member 4620. ). The normal electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which a game ball can easily pass through and a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass through by driving the blade member 4620 by the starting port solenoid 4630. It is composed of When a game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball enters the second starting port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 from the out port 450. be done. The opening/closing drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and a predetermined number of times when the normal symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the normal symbol display section 71.

The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is arranged on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9). When a game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). Note that the game ball passes through the passage gate 49 by hitting the ball to the right.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body that integrates the first starting opening 420, the big winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600. Attacker unit 500 is arranged approximately at the lower right portion of gaming area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged approximately at the lower right of the gaming area 20 is because in recent years, there has been a demand for larger LCD devices 16, and various components such as the attacking unit 500 are arranged in the gaming area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

The jackpot opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the big prize opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball enters the big prize opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and a big prize opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big prize opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 has an open state in which it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the big winning hole solenoid 620, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 and shifts to the jackpot game state. It will be held on.

The general winning holes 53, 54, and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning hole 56 is arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17. Further, general winning ports 53, 54, 55, and 56 are provided with general winning ports switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the general winning hole 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning hole switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When game balls are detected by the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27). (excreted).

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls for the first starting hole 420 and the second starting hole 440 is three, the number of prize balls for the general winning holes 53, 54, 55, and 56 is 10, and the number of winning balls for the big winning hole 540 is 3. The number of prize balls is set at 15 each. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the lowest center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the downstream direction of the game ball). When the fired game ball does not enter any starting hole or winning hole, it finally flows into the out hole 57.

The LED unit 70 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body that integrates various display parts. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol reservation display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, and a first special symbol display section 74 as the various display sections. A symbol reservation display section 75 and a second special symbol reservation display section 76 are provided.

The normal symbol display section 71 is for displaying the result of determination for the regular symbol game (normal symbol determination). Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the normal electric accessory 460 to an open state based on the result of determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display section 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start a variable display in which they alternately turn on and off when a start condition for the variable display (variable display) is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) of lighting and turning off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start a variable display and then perform a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed.

If the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as "normal win"), the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (normal symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to open the normal electric accessory 460, the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port is opened and closed. The difficulty of winning the game ball to 440 is changed.

The normal symbol pending display section 72 displays the number of times the normal symbol variable display is executed (hereinafter referred to as "the pending number of normal symbol variable displays"). The normal symbol reservation display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol reservation display section 72 displays the number of pending changes in the normal symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended twice, the display LED 72a lights up and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 are for displaying the results of the determination (jackpot determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of determination (jackpot determination).

The first special symbol display section 73 includes a display LED group 73a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 420 (starting winning), and also displays the result of jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. The display LED group 73a starts a variable display in which each of the eight LEDs repeatedly turns on and off when the start condition for the variable display is satisfied. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of eight LEDs turned on and off is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a starts a variable display and then performs a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed.

If the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and turning off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is changed to a gaming state in which a game ball can enter the big prize opening 540. Become. In addition, in the following explanation, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 420 will be referred to as a first special symbol.

The second special symbol display section 74 includes a display LED group 74a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 440 (starting winning), and also displays the result of jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. The display LED group 74a starts a variable display in which each of the eight LEDs repeatedly turns on and off when the start condition for the variable display is satisfied. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of eight LEDs turned on and off is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a starts a variable display and then performs a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed.

If the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and turning off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a transition to the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is changed to a gaming state in which a game ball can enter the big prize opening 540. Become. In addition, in the following explanation, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 440 will be referred to as a second special symbol.

In this way, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the normal A transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, is determined. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the game is shifted to a jackpot game state in which a round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol reservation display section 75 and the second special symbol reservation display section 76 display the number of executions of the variable display of the reserved special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the number of pending special symbol variable displays"). It is to be displayed. The first special symbol reservation display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol reservation display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol reservation display section 75 and the second special symbol reservation display section 76 display the number of reservations in the variable display of special symbols by turning on and off the display LEDs 75a, 75b and 76a, 76b. The display mode of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 75a, 75b and 76a, 76b is the same as that of the display LEDs 72a, 72b of the normal symbol reservation display section 72.

As shown in FIG. 7, the back unit 176 is for decorating the game board unit 17, and includes an upper front accessory 1000 disposed above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a rear part of the upper front accessory 1000. An upper back accessory 1100 placed on the side and above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 21), a lower accessory 1200 placed at the bottom of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a liquid crystal display. A corner accessory 1300 is arranged so that movable bodies described below are located at four corners of the display area of the device 16 (for example, see FIG. 21), and a corner accessory 1300 is arranged at the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It includes a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attacker ball gutter 1600, a main board case 1700, and a rear box 1800 that houses the above-mentioned accessories and is attached to the main board case 1700 to form a unit. Details of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400 included in the back unit 176 will be described later.

Below, in the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of the internal processing by the main CPU 101 when a game ball enters the first starting hole 5442 or the second starting hole 440 will be explained.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and a starting memory for the first special symbol is generated based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 5442. is suspended (fluctuating display of the first special symbol is suspended). Suspension of starting memory for the first special symbol is performed when both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display section 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display section 74 are executed. It will be canceled on the condition that there is no. That is, if a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed. If a game ball enters the first starting hole 5442 when neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the starting memory is released, the first special symbol display section 73 starts variable display of the first special symbol.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and regarding the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440. The starting memory of is suspended (the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended). Suspension of starting memory for the second special symbol is performed when both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display section 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display section 74 are executed. It will be canceled on the condition that there is no. That is, if a game ball enters the second starting port 440 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed. If a game ball enters the second starting hole 440 when neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the starting memory is released, the second special symbol display section 74 starts variable display of the second special symbol.

Note that in the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change simultaneously with each other. That is, while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on one of the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74, the special symbol is not displayed on the other display section. . In this embodiment, when both the starting memory for the first special symbol and the starting memory for the second special symbol are suspended, the second special symbol is The second special symbol display section 73 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner, giving priority to releasing the suspension of the starting memory.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of times the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended. In this embodiment, the number of times the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended is each set to four times as an upper limit. Therefore, the maximum number of times the variable display of the special symbol is held is 8 times, which is the sum of the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is held due to winnings in the first starting hole 5442 and the second starting hole 440.

Also, while the first or second special symbol is changing in the first special symbol display section 73 and second special symbol display section 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers on the liquid crystal display device 16 changes, except in specific cases. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. In addition, the identification symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 are stopped while the first or second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 is stopped. Is displayed. Note that the identification pattern is also used as identification information for presentation.

In addition, if the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display section 73 and second special symbol display section 74 has a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a win. An effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this embodiment, as described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Further, a specific stop display mode when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed is set corresponding to the type of hit. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes a mode. This allows the player to recognize not only the fact that he has won, but also the type of win. Note that some of the winning types have a specific display mode that is difficult for the player to recognize depending on a specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the fact that he has won and the type of win.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 9.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 200 that controls effects according to the progress of the game, and a payout/fire control circuit 300. and a power supply circuit 338.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read/write memory), and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, etc. are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and retain written information even in a power-off state. Note that in this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the storage medium is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information about the special symbol game is stored as a starting memory. Specifically, the main RAM 103 includes a first special symbol starting storage area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol that is changing is stored as a starting memory, and a first special symbol game information for an upper limit of four times. A first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting storage area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a special symbol is stored as a starting memory. Similarly, the main RAM 103 includes a second special symbol starting storage area (0) in which information about the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol that is changing is stored as a starting memory, and a second special symbol game for up to four times. A second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special symbol starting storage area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a symbol is stored as starting memory.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. Initial reset circuit 104 is connected to main CPU 101 . The I/O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 is for transmitting commands from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off (power OFF).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol reserve display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, a first special symbol reserve display section 75, A second special symbol reservation display section 76, a starting opening solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460, a big winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, etc. are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operations of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. The main control circuit 100 also includes a calling device (not shown) that has functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, and a system for transmitting data to a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board 323 to be used is connected.

In addition, the main control circuit 100 includes a first starting port switch 421, a second starting port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, etc. is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Also connected to the main control circuit 100 is a backup clear switch 330, etc., which clears backup data in the event of a power outage in response to an operation by a manager of the gaming hall.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is a key or a key-like key that triggers the execution of setting change processing and setting confirmation processing, which will be described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and is used to change the set value during a setting change process, which will be described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the person in charge of managing the gaming machine cannot easily access them.

Further, a payout/emission control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 that pays out game balls, a launch device 15 that shoots game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The dispensing device 340 is provided in the dispensing unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370 according to the player's operation.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out game balls. Further, when the firing handle 32 is grasped by the player and rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 300 controls a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). The controller supplies power to the controller and controls the firing of game balls.

Further, a sub-control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control on the liquid crystal display device 16, control regarding the sound generated from the speaker 24, control regarding the light of the LED 25, etc. in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies commands to the sub-control circuit 200, but the sub-control circuit 200 is configured to be unable to supply signals to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that signals can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes effects according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 100. In addition, the sub control circuit 200 includes a production button switch 621 that is turned ON/OFF by operating the production button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned ON/OFF by operating the main button 662, and each of the select buttons 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d, which are turned on and off by operation, are connected. Note that, in reality, select button switches 6641a to 6641d are provided corresponding to each of the select buttons 664a to 664d, but in FIG. 9, for convenience, these are collectively shown as select button switch 6641.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the game effects of the pachinko game machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. If so, another aspect may be used. For example, the storage means may be a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge. Further, the programs, tables, etc. do not have to be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, the programs, tables, etc. may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. Note that in this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for controlling the display in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that buffers image data, and an image signal that converts image data into an image signal. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. for converting the data as follows.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying images on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one piece of audio data from a plurality of pieces of audio data stored in the audio data ROM in response to the audio generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies the audio signal and causes the speaker 24 to generate audio.

The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LEDs 25 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 208 receives commands sent from the main control circuit 100.

The payout/launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine 1, and the payout/launch control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out game balls, a game A firing device 340 for firing a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data in the event of a power outage in response to an operation by an administrator of the game hall, and the like are connected.

The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing games with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, etc. .

The power supply circuit 338 is connected to the power switch 35 and the like. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko game machine 1.

Although the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the person in charge of managing the gaming machine cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. . Even in such a case, being inside a predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and setting key 328 cannot be accessed without opening the case, as well as the correspondence of the setting switch 332 and setting key 328 of the case. There is a notch only in one place, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island equipment where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using a key managed by the game machine management manager to expose the back side. , including those in which a gaming machine manager can access the setting switch 332 and/or the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be explained. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than a jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 60,000 shots), and is also called a base value.

The payout/fire control circuit 300 totals the base value based on past game history, and stores the total result in a specific work area of the work area of the main RAM 103, which will be described later. This specific work area will be described later, but it is an area where data will not be cleared even if the backup clear process described below is performed. Note that the base value may be aggregated based on a predetermined operation being performed, or the base value may be always aggregated so that the base value is always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

The payout/launch control circuit 300 includes a total history aggregation means for aggregating all base values based on the entire game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko game machine 1 was manufactured) to the present; and a setting value-by-setting history aggregation means that executes a setting-value-by-setting base value aggregation based on past game history for each setting value.

For example, when a gaming machine manager or the like performs an operation to display all base values, the all history totaling means executes the above-mentioned totaling of all base values. The total base value totaled by the total history totaling means is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the base value by setting value is performed, the history aggregation unit by setting value executes the aggregation of the base value by setting value. The setting value-specific base values compiled by the setting value-specific history aggregating means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The setting value-by-setting history aggregation means can also aggregate only base values for arbitrary setting values in response to a request (operation). In this case, it is possible to aggregate not only the base value of the set setting value but also the base value of other setting values other than the set setting value. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display base values for other setting values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

In addition, the main CPU 101 calculates both the total base value totaled by the total history totaling means and the base value by setting value totaled by the setting value-specific history totaling means, in response to an operation by, for example, a gaming machine management manager. can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of a specific setting value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display a list of the base values of all setting values. Further, both the total base value and the base value by setting value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all setting values in a list, or when displaying both all base values and base values by setting value in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means. It may also be displayed.

In addition, the main CPU 101 includes a total history aggregation means and a history aggregation means for each setting value, but in addition to these or in place of the history aggregation means for each setting value, the main CPU 101 has a total history aggregation means for each setting value. A post-setting-change history aggregation means may be provided for aggregating the post-setting-change base value based on the game history. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value by set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by displaying all or part of the total base value, the base value by setting value and/or the base value by setting value after setting change on the performance display monitor 334, pachinko games can be improved. It becomes possible to easily confirm information based on the past gaming history of machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total number of game balls paid out is paid by the ball entering the special electric accessory (big prize opening) and the normal electric accessory. The ratio of the number of game balls put out (payout by accessory) may be displayed. Further, it may be displayed in relation to the total number of balls fired, or it may be displayed as a percentage of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric accessory (big winning hole). Also, they may be displayed by setting.

Further, an error code, which will be described later, is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may also display a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., which will be described later. can. Note that during the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the special symbol display device.

Next, a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, a game ball payout control process is performed. Further, pachinko games include special symbol games using special symbols and normal symbol games using normal symbols.

When a "big hit" occurs in a special symbol game or a "normal win" occurs in a regular symbol game, the probability that the game ball will win increases relatively, and the game ball payout control process is performed. It becomes easier.

In addition, various winnings include special symbol start winning, which is one of the conditions for the fluctuating display of special symbols in the special symbol game, and one condition for the fluctuating display of the normal symbols in the regular symbol game. It also includes a certain normal symbol starting prize.

Hereinafter, an outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 101 as control processing.

(1) When there is a special symbol starting prize in the special symbol game, various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination and random numbers for symbol determination) are input from various counters (for example, jackpot determination counter and symbol determination counter). ) are extracted (obtained), and each extracted random number value is stored (see the flow of special symbol start winning processing in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is checked whether various data such as random numbers are stored due to the special symbol starting winning, and one condition is that the various data such as random numbers are stored, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is It is determined that the conditions for starting the process have been met.

Next, when starting the variable display of the special symbols, the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not it is a "jackpot". After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern ) to determine.

Next, performance pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the production pattern determining counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to, A performance pattern to be executed in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols is determined.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the production pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and a variation display control process is performed to control the variable display of the special symbol. , and performance control processing for performing a predetermined performance.

Then, when the fluctuation display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not there is a "big hit". In this determination process, if it is determined that a "jackpot" has been achieved, a jackpot game state control process for performing a jackpot game state is executed. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the possibility of winning the various prizes described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not occurred, the jackpot game state control process is not executed.

If it is determined that a "big hit" has not been achieved, or if the jackpot game state control process is completed, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this gaming state transition control process, the normal gaming state, which is different from the jackpot gaming state, is managed.

The normal gaming state includes, for example, a gaming state in which a "jackpot" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as "normal gaming state") in the jackpot determination described above, and a gaming state in which a "jackpot" is determined with a certain probability. A gaming state that increases more than the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high probability gaming state") and a gaming state in which it is easier to obtain a special symbol starting prize as a result of the normal hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving gaming state") ), etc. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbols is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, when the game ball starts winning while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, various data extracted at the time of the starting winning (random value for jackpot determination, random value for symbol determination, etc.) ) is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is met. In this way, storing various data (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, etc.) until the conditions for starting the variable display of special symbols are satisfied is called "suspension", and the various data that is put on hold is called starting memory.

That is, if the game ball starts winning during the variable display of a special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is suspended, and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is suspended. The changing display of the special symbols that are displayed starts in order. In the following, various data regarding the reserved special symbols are also referred to as "reserved balls."

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol starting winnings are provided (first starting opening winning and second starting opening winning), and a maximum of four winnings are provided for each special symbol starting winning. It is possible to suspend execution of the variable display of special symbols until That is, in this embodiment, the execution of the variable display of special symbols can be suspended for up to a total of eight special symbols, including four first special symbols and four second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines whether the held ball is a hit or lost (whether or not there is a "jackpot" win) based on the above-mentioned information on the held balls, and It has a function of performing a predetermined performance based on the determination result, that is, a pre-reading performance function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start win in the normal symbol game, a random value is extracted from the counter for determining a normal hit, and the random value is stored (normal symbol start during the normal symbol game shown in Figure 10). (See prize winning processing flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether a condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbols is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referenced whether or not a random number value is stored by the normal symbol starting winning, and if the random number value is stored as one of the conditions, the condition for starting the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Discern.

Next, when starting the fluctuating display of normal symbols, the random value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and a normal hit determination is performed to determine whether or not it is a "normal win." After that, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols is determined.

Next, the determined normal hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbols are referred to, and a variation display control process that controls the variation display of the normal symbols and a performance control process that performs a predetermined performance are executed. .

When the fluctuation display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not it is a "normal win". In this determination process, if it is determined that it is a "normal win", a normal win game control process for performing a normal win game is executed.

In the normal winning game control process, the possibility of winning the various prizes mentioned above increases, especially the possibility of winning by starting a special symbol of the game ball in the special symbol game. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "normal win", the normal win game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbols is performed again, and after that, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

As mentioned above, in pachinko games, the payout of game balls depends on conditions such as whether or not there will be a "jackpot" in the special symbol game, the transition status of the gaming state, and whether or not it will be a "normal hit" in the normal symbol game. The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as a method for extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method is used in which random numbers are generated within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if a pachinko game machine is equipped with a random number generator whose random numbers are updated at a predetermined period, a random number is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. A hard random number method for extracting may be adopted as the method for extracting the various random numbers described above.

Note that when using the hard random number method, by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted at the predetermined cycle.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is composed of liquid crystal, and displays various effects in its display area.

Specifically, in this embodiment, an effect image related (corresponding) to a special symbol displayed on a special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) to be described later is displayed in the display area. will be displayed. At this time, for example, when the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74), for example, 1 to 8 are displayed, except in specific cases. A plurality of performance identification patterns (decorative patterns) consisting of numbers, various characters, etc. are displayed in a variable manner in the display area.

Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74), a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. Ru.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) is in a specific manner (the result of the stop display is a "jackpot"), , an effect image is displayed in the display area to make the player understand that he has won the jackpot.

As an effect to make the player understand that it is a "jackpot", for example, first, a plurality of stopped and displayed identification symbols may be displayed in a specific manner (for example, a manner in which the same identification symbols are lined up along a predetermined direction). ), and then an image announcing a "big win" is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, an effect image related to the display contents of a first special symbol reservation display section 75 and a second special symbol reservation display section 76, which will be described later, is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, in the display area, reservation information (for example, the same number of reservation symbols as the number of reservations) is displayed to notify the number of reservations (starting memory number) of the variable display of special symbols. Further, for example, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pre-read effect is performed based on the information of reserved balls of special symbols, and a preliminary notice at this time is also displayed in the display area.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a normal symbol stopped and displayed in a normal symbol display section 71 (to be described later) is in a predetermined manner, an effect image that allows the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A display function may be further provided.

[Special design display section]
The special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) is arranged at the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) is a display device that variably displays special symbols (variable display and stop display) in the special symbol game. In this embodiment, a special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) is configured by a 7-segment display that displays special symbols as symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, etc.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern formed by turning on and off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) is triggered by the fact that the game ball enters the first starting hole 5442 or the second starting hole 440 (special symbol starting prize). , performs a variable display of special symbols (identification information). Then, the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then displays the special symbol in a stopped state.

Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 5442 will be referred to as a first special symbol. Further, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) is in a specific mode ("jackpot" mode) In , the gaming state shifts from a general gaming state, which is not a jackpot gaming state, to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

That is, in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that transitions to the jackpot game state. It was a “big hit.”

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening 53 is in an open state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting hole 5442, and the first special symbol is specified in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74). When the game is stopped and displayed in this manner, the grand prize opening 53 is in an open state.

The open state of each grand prize opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or until a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Then, when any of these conditions is met, the grand prize opening which was in the open state becomes closed.

Hereinafter, a game in which the big prize opening 53 is in a state where it is easy to accept game balls (open state) will be referred to as a round game. The grand prize opening will be closed between round games.

Further, a round game is counted as the number of rounds such as 1 round, 2 rounds, etc. For example, the first round game is called the first round, and the second round game is called the second round.

In addition, in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74), if the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the specific mode ("lose" mode), , the game state does not change unless the player wins the falling lottery.

That is, in the special symbol game, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74), and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game is played based on the result. This is a game in which states are transitioned or maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is variable. Display (holding ball) is held.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the suspended first special symbol is started. In this embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be reserved (so-called "number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls)") is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) will be put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been on hold is started. In this embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbols to be suspended (the number of suspended symbols) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces). Therefore, in this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved special symbols for variable display is 8 in total.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is performed with priority over the variable display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed preferentially than the reserved balls of the first special symbol. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, a variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the order in which they are reserved.

[Normal symbol display area]
The normal symbol display section 71 is arranged at the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display section 71 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) when viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays normal symbols (variable display and stop display) in the normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs). . In the normal symbol display section 71, a display pattern constituted by lighting and extinguishing of each normal symbol display LED is displayed as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display section 71 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs, triggered by the game ball passing through the ball passage detector 43, to display a variable display of the normal symbols. Then, the normal symbol display section 71 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then displays the normal symbols in a stopped state.

In the normal symbol display section 71, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (a "winning" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a "loss" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the normal symbol display section 71, then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 is operated according to the result.

In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the suspended normal symbol is started. In this embodiment, the number of variable displays of normal symbols to be held (ie, the "number of pending items") is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

[Normal symbol retention display device]
The normal symbol retention display device 63 is arranged at the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The normal symbol retention display device 63 is a device that displays the number of reserved symbols in the variable display of normal symbols, and the normal symbol retention display device 63 is equipped with a plurality of ordinary symbol retention display LEDs. , the number of pending normal symbols in the variable display is displayed by lighting and extinguishing each normal symbol pending display LED.

Specifically, in the normal symbol retention display device 63, the normal symbol retention display LED is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols in the variable display of normal symbols, and the normal symbol retention display LED is displayed in accordance with the number of reserved symbols in the variable display of normal symbols. Up to 4 lights will be lit.

[First special symbol holding display device]
The first special symbol reservation display section 75 is arranged at the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The first special symbol reservation display section 75 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol being reserved (the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display section 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol reservation display LEDs.

Specifically, in the first special symbol reservation display section 75, the first special symbol reservation display LED is displayed according to the number of reservations in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol reservation display LED is the first special symbol reservation display LED. A maximum of four special symbols are lit up depending on the number of special symbols on hold.

[Second special symbol holding display device]
The second special symbol reservation display section 76 is arranged at the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The second special symbol reservation display section 76 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol being reserved (second special symbol reservation ball), and the second special symbol reservation display section 76 is , a plurality of second special symbol pending display LEDs.

Specifically, in the second special symbol reservation display section 76, the second special symbol reservation display LED is displayed according to the number of reservations in the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol reservation display LED is 2 A maximum of 4 special symbols are lit up depending on the number of special symbols on hold.

Next, the data structure and the like of the main control circuit 100 will be explained using FIGS. 11 to 13.

[Random number determination table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a winning random number determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The hit random number determination table (first starting port) determines "big hit,""smallhit," and "loss" based on the random number value for jackpot determination obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442. It will be referred to to determine one of them by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second starting port) determines either a "jackpot" or a "loss" by lottery based on the random number value for jackpot determination obtained when a game ball enters the second starting port 440. Referenced when doing so.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value for determining the lottery result that is performed in response to the starting opening winning. More specifically, the random number value for jackpot determination is a value indicating the lottery result of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 5442, one of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening), "big hit" and "small hit" are displayed for each probability variable flag value ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)"). The range (width) of the random numerical value for jackpot judgment that determines the winning of each of "Jackpot Judgment Value Data", "Small Hit Judgment Value Data", and "Loss Judgment Value" data”) is defined. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state." When the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is a "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

In this embodiment, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random number for determining a win is between "0" and "204", a "jackpot" is won. , "jackpot determination value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning the "jackpot" in this case (jackpot probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

In addition, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random number value for winning determination is one of "205" to "409", a "small win" is won and " "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning a "small win" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Furthermore, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the probability change flag is "0" and the random number for determining the winning is neither "0" to "409", the "loser" is won and the "loser" is determined as "loser". "value data" is determined.

On the other hand, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random number for determining the hit is between "0" and "1637", the "jackpot" is won and the "jackpot" is won. ``judgment value data'' is determined. That is, the probability of winning a "jackpot" in this case (jackpot probability (selection rate)) is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

In addition, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random number value for determining a win is one of "1638" to "1842", a "small win" is won and " "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning a "small win" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319), which is the same as when the probability variation flag is "0".

Furthermore, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the probability variable flag is "1" and the random number for winning determination is not between "0" and "1842", the "lose" is won and the "lose" is determined as "lost". "value data" is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 5442, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the "high probability gaming state". Specifically, when the gaming state is "high probability gaming state" and a game ball enters the first starting slot 5442, the jackpot probability is about 8 times that of when the gaming state is not "high probability gaming state". It gets expensive.

Similarly, when the second starting opening 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random number for determining a win is between "0" and "204", a "jackpot" is won and " ``Jackpot judgment value data'' is determined. That is, the probability of winning the "jackpot" in this case (jackpot probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

In addition, when the second starting opening 440 wins, if the probability change flag is "0" and the random number for determining a win is not between "0" and "204", a "loser" is won and a "loser" is determined. "value data" is determined.

On the other hand, when the second starting opening 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random number value for determining a win is between "0" and "1637", a "jackpot" is won, and a "jackpot" is won. "Judgement value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning a "jackpot" in this case (jackpot probability (selection rate)) is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

In addition, when the second starting opening 440 wins, if the probability change flag is "1" and the random number for winning determination is not between "0" and "1637", the "loser" is won and the "loser" is determined as "loser". "value data" is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, there is no possibility of winning a "small hit", and whether the gaming state at the time of winning is a "high probability gaming state" or not. The jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not the game is played, and the jackpot probability when the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state" is about eight times higher than when it is a "low probability gaming state."

[Symbol judgment table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The symbol determination table (first starting hole, second starting hole) is based on the random symbol value obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 5442 or the second starting hole 440 and the aforementioned judgment value data. This is referred to in order to select the "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" which determine the symbols to be stopped. The "select symbol command when winning" is a command to specify the winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when winning, and the "design designation command" specifies the symbol that will be displayed when the special symbols stop changing. This is a command to do this. The symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "9", 10/100 ``z0'' is selected as the winning symbol command and ``zA1'' is selected as the symbol designation command with a probability of . In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "10" to "19", "z1" is selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "20" to "29", "z2" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "30" to "39", "z3" is selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "40" to "49", "z4" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "50" to "95", "z5" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 46/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is "96" or "97", "z6" is selected as the symbol command to select at the time of hit with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol designation is "zA4" is selected as the command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is "98" or "99", "z7" is selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol designation is "zA5" is selected as the command. In addition, when small hit judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random value is one of "0" to "99", "z8" is selected as the symbol selection command at the time of hit, and "z8" is selected as the symbol designation command. "zA6" is selected. On the other hand, if loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random value is one of "0" to "99", the winning selection symbol command is not selected and "zA7" is selected as the symbol designation command. selected.

Furthermore, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "24", 25 With a probability of /100, "z9" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "25" to "49", "z10" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 25/100. , "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "55" to "99", "z11" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "zA9" is selected as the symbol designation command. On the other hand, if loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA10" is selected as the symbol designation command. selected.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The jackpot type determination table determines the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the probability change flag in the game state after the jackpot game ends and the jackpot game state shifts to the general game state, according to the winning selection symbol command related to the jackpot. It is referenced to determine the type of jackpot, such as whether to turn on the flag and whether to turn on the time-saving flag. In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot, the time saving flag is set to "1". The number of time reductions at this time is determined to be one of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100, and the determined number of time reductions is set. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state." When the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is a "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0". Similarly, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is a "time-saving gaming state", the time-saving flag is "1", and when it is a "non-time-saving gaming state", the time-saving flag is "0". The time saving number of times is the number of fluctuations in the special symbol game in which the time saving game state can be continued. That is, when special symbol fluctuations (special symbol lottery) are performed for the number of times (100) of time-saving games without winning a jackpot in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state ends and the state shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state. A gaming state in which both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag are "1" is referred to as a "high-probability time-saving gaming state" in this specification. In this embodiment, the high probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot is won. However, if a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (special symbol lottery) are performed without winning the jackpot, the high probability gaming state may end and the state may shift to a low probability gaming state.

According to the jackpot type determination table of this embodiment, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with variable probability flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with variable probability flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with variable probability flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with a variable probability flag on and a time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is "5", and a jackpot with the variable probability flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z7", the number of rounds is "16", and a jackpot with the variable probability flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z9", the number of rounds is "5", and a jackpot with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z10", the number of rounds is "5", and a jackpot with a variable probability flag on and a short time flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z11", the number of rounds is "16", and a jackpot with the variable probability flag on and the time saving flag on is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot of the time saving flag on is determined regardless of the hit selection symbol command (i.e. jackpot judgment value data), but this is not necessarily the case, and the jackpot judgment value data The jackpot of the time saving flag off may be determined according to the above.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the number of time reductions to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The time saving gaming state may be controlled so as to continue until the next jackpot is won, or the time saving gaming state may be controlled so as to continue as long as the high probability gaming state continues.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 101 controls the high probability gaming state to continue until the next jackpot is won. It may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (and then shifts to the low-probability gaming state), or it may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (and then shifts to the low-probability gaming state), or, in relation to the winning probability of the jackpot, it may be controlled until the next jackpot is won (for example, 10,000 It may be controlled so that the high probability gaming state continues (until the next jackpot is won), or it may be controlled so that the high probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot is won.

[Flow of game balls]
Below, the flow of game balls fired toward the game area 20 will be explained using FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14 is an example of a diagram showing how the game ball flows down the right side area when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 15 is an example of a diagram showing how the game ball flows down the right side area when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 16 is an example of a diagram showing how the game ball flows down the left side area when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened.

As described above, the attacker unit 500 is located approximately at the lower right portion of the gaming area 20 and below the passage gate 49. Therefore, in the jackpot game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed. When the big winning hole 540 is open by the shutter 610, a game ball hit to the right tends to enter the big winning hole 540. In addition, even if the player is not in a jackpot game state, a right-handed hit is performed even during electric support.

However, when the player hits the ball to the right, the game ball that flows down the right side area loses the sense of expectation when it does not enter the big prize opening 540, and is simply waiting for it to flow into the out opening 57. It becomes. Therefore, when the game ball hit to the right does not enter the big winning hole 540, the player feels disadvantaged, causing a decline in interest. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for larger liquid crystal display devices 16, and the current situation is that there are restrictions on where the attacker unit 500 and the like can be placed within the gaming area 20. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for increasing the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, it is necessary to arrange the attacker unit 500 at the lower part of the gaming area 20, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged at the lower part of the game area 20, it becomes more noticeable that if the game ball hit to the right does not enter the big winning hole 540, it will flow directly into the out hole 57.

In this regard, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is disposed approximately at the lower left of the gaming area 20, as described above. Furthermore, the attacker unit 500 is provided with a game ball guiding member 580. This game ball guiding member 580 collects game balls that are hit to the right (flowing down the right side area) and do not enter the big winning hole 540, including the guiding nail 700, in the game area 20 where the out hole 57 is arranged. A member that guides the blade member 4620 beyond the center to the upstream side of the blade member 4620 arranged in the left side area, and forms a path for the game ball that extends on the extension line of the big prize opening 540 in the downstream direction of the game ball. It is. Here, "upstream of the blade member 4620" refers to an area where the game ball can be received into the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter referred to as "second starting port receiving port" in this specification). area). This second starting opening receiving area is, for example, the peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG. 15.

In addition, in the gaming area 20, a gaming ball guiding member is provided as a falling path of a gaming ball that is hit to the right (flowing down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the grand winning opening 540 without entering the grand winning opening 540. A downstream path connecting the exit side of the guide 580 and the outlet 57 is formed by the guide nail 700. The game ball flowing down this flow path always passes through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol determination shifts to the high probability gaming state upon completion of the jackpot gaming state, so during the time-saving gaming state, the power support state is in effect, and the shuttlecock is activated with high frequency. Member 4620 is released.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open, if the game ball hit to the right (flowing down the right area) does not enter the big winning hole 540, the game The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guiding nail 700 to the second starting port receiving area which is upstream of the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460.

Among the game balls that were hit to the right (flowing down the right area), the game balls that did not enter the big prize opening 540 are always guided to the second starting opening receiving area, which is upstream of the blade member 4620. If the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open when the game ball is guided to the starting port receiving area, the game ball will be received by the blade member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the game ball will be received in the second starting port 440. There is a high possibility of winning the prize. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is the most downstream position of the gaming area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the second out port 57 is located in place of the out port 57. Starting port 440 is at the most downstream position. In this way, the blade member 4620 has the function of changing the most downstream position in the gaming area 20.

In this way, even if the game ball hit to the right (flowing down the right side area) does not enter the big prize opening 540, the game ball will always reach the second starting opening receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620). Since the player is guided, the feeling of anticipation of winning a prize in the second starting slot 440 continues, and the player's interest can be increased.

In particular, in the electric support state, right-handed hitting is performed. Therefore, although the big prize opening 540 is not in the open state during electric support, the most downstream position is changed from the out opening 57 to the second starting opening 440 by the blade member 4620, so the game progresses in the electric support state. It can be promoted and increase interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 15, when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big prize opening 540 is Although it is always guided upstream of the vane member 4620, it flows into the outlet 57 through between the vane member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, on the left side of the guide nail 700).

In addition, among the game balls that were hit to the right (flowed down the right side area), game balls that did not reach the big winning hole 540 (for example, game balls that flowed down the flowing path that continues from the right side of the general winning hole 56 to the out port 57) ) may be configured to be guided to the outlet 57. At this time, among the game balls that were hit to the right, game balls that did not enter the big winning hole 540 are game balls that reached the big winning hole 540 but did not win, and those that did not reach the big winning hole 540. Although there are game balls that did not win, either of the game balls may be guided upstream of the feather member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided upstream of the feather member 4620. .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 16, a game ball hit to the left (a game ball flowing down the left side area) generally enters the first starting hole 5442 or the general winning holes 53, 54, 55, or It flows into the out port 57 or the out port 450. After the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball 224 rolling in the flow path 222 heading toward the first starting port 5442 continues to have the expectation of winning a prize toward the first starting port 5442, but it heads toward the first starting port 5442. Regarding game balls 2226 that have come off the flow path 222 and have not won in the general winning ports 53, 54, and 55, in the conventional pachinko machine, the game balls 2226 are placed in the first starting port (corresponding to the first starting port 5442 of this embodiment). The expectation of winning a prize is lost. Further, even if the game ball 224 rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, if it does not win at the first starting port 5442, the expectation of winning will be lost at that point. In this embodiment, a game ball hit to the left (a game ball flowing down the left side area) rolls in the channel 222 toward the first starting port 5442 but does not enter the first starting port 5442; , even if the game ball leaves the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and does not win in the general winning ports 53, 54, and 55, these game balls will In between, it always passes through the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream side of the blade member 4620 is an area (second starting port receiving area) where the game ball can be received into the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open. If you roll in the flow path 222 heading towards the first starting port 5442 but do not win in the first starting port 5442, or if you deviate from the flow path 222 heading towards the first starting port 5442 and further enter the general winning ports 53, 54, 55. Even if the player does not win at the second start opening 440, the expectation of winning at the second starting opening 440 continues, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right side area, there is little expectation that the blade member 4620 of the electric accessory 460 will be opened when the ball is hit to the left. However, immediately after the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state ends, the display of normal symbols may be suspended. Furthermore, even if the player is hitting left-handed, the game ball that flies out into the game area 20 with great force may flow down the right side area. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. Moreover, the guide nail 700 prevents not only game balls that have flown down the right side area but also game balls that have flown down the left side area and rolled to the guiding member 700 side due to excessive momentum to immediately flow into the out port 57. Since it has a suppressing function, if the blade member 4620 is open, there is a possibility of winning at the second starting port 440. Therefore, even if the expectation of winning a prize in the first starting hole 5442 or the general winning holes 53, 54, 55 for a game ball hit to the left is lost, the expectation of winning in the second starting hole 440 continues. , it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In this embodiment, the passage gate 49 is placed in the right side area, but instead of this, the passage gate 49 may be placed in the left side area. In this case, the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened may be increased compared to the case where the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right side area. Therefore, even if the expectation of winning a prize in the first starting hole 5442 with respect to a game ball hit to the left is lost, it is possible to continue with higher expectations regarding winning in the second starting hole 440. .

In addition, among the game balls hit to the left (game balls flowing down the left side area), game balls that did not reach the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or did not reach the first starting port 5442, for example, It may be configured such that there are game balls that have flown down the outlet 450 (for example, see FIGS. 5 and 51) or the outlet 57 that is located below the electric accessory unit 400 or the downstream passage that continues to the outlet 57. At this time, among the game balls hit to the left, game balls that did not enter the first starting port 5442 are game balls that did not reach the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first starting port 5442, and normal game balls that did not reach the first starting port 5442. Although there are game balls that reach above the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first starting port 5442 but do not win, any of the game balls may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620, or Only one of the game balls may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620.

In addition, when a game ball that is hit to the left (a game ball that has flown down the left side area) that rolls in the direction of the big winning hole 540 rolls on the game ball guiding member 580, the game ball falls into the big winning hole 540. The ball collides with the shutter 610 or the rib provided on the game ball guide member 580 and enters the first starting port 5442 or flows into the out port 55 or the out port 450.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning hole 540 is always placed on the left side beyond the center of the game area 20 where the out hole 57 is arranged. It is provided with a game ball guiding member 580 that guides the ball to the second starting port receiving area of the area. However, the game ball guiding member 580 does not necessarily have the function of guiding such a game ball (a game ball that was hit to the right (flowing down the right side area) and did not enter the big prize opening 540) to the second starting opening receiving area. It is not necessary to have the following, and the guide may be limited to leading beyond the center of the gaming area 20 to the left side area. For example, although the game ball guide member 580 has the function of guiding such game balls to the left side area, it has a function such that the game balls guided to the left side area are further distributed to a plurality of areas including the second starting port receiving area. The configuration is equivalent.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big prize opening 540 is guided to the left side area by the game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guide member 580 is not necessarily essential, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball that is hit to the right and does not enter the big prize opening 540 is guided to the left side area only by a guide nail.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball guiding member is used as the falling path of the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the big winning hole 540 without entering the big winning hole 540. 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and the game ball flowing down this downstream path must pass through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57. It is supposed to be done. In this embodiment, since the second starting port 440 is formed in the left side area, the game ball flowing down the above-mentioned downstream path will always be guided to the left side area. However, considering the idea that the game ball flowing down the above path always passes through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57, in such a case, the second starting port 440 is placed in the left side area. It is not necessary that it be placed.

[Configuration of back unit]
The configuration of the back unit 176 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176. FIG. 18 is an example of a rear view of the rear unit 176. FIG. 19 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 20 is an example of a perspective view of the rear unit 176 viewed diagonally from the top left of the rear surface. FIG. 21 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 22 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 176 viewed diagonally from above and to the left of the rear surface.

As described above, the back unit 176 includes the upper front accessory 1000, the upper back accessory 1100, the lower accessory 1200, the corner accessory 1300, the side accessory 1400, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker ball gutter 1600. , a main board case 1700 , and a rear box 1800 . Note that the corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350.

The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and has an opening 1820 formed approximately in the center. The liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are arranged in this opening 1820.

The upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, a base member 1180 (for example, see FIG. 69), which will be described later) is attached and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described later.

The lower accessory 1200 (more specifically, the lower accessory fixing base 1220 (see FIG. 77, for example) which will be described later) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

A side accessory 1400 (more specifically, a mounting plate 1410 (for example, see FIG. 107) which will be described later) is attached and fixed to the right side of the front opening 1820 of the rear box 1800. Details of the side accessory 1400 will be described later.

The upper corner accessory 1320 (for example, see FIG. 88) has a first movable body 1330 attached to the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 such that the first movable body 1330 is located at the front side of the upper back accessory movable decorative body 110. The bodies 1340 are attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. The lower corner accessory 1350 has a third movable body 1355 at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and a fourth movable body 1357 at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the lower corner accessory 1350 is on the front side than the lower accessory object 1200. They are attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be located at the respective positions. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

The upper front accessory 1000 (in detail, the decorative accessory base member 1010 (for example, see FIG. 61) which will be described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be disposed further forward than the upper back accessory 1000. Ru. Details of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described later.

The middle panel 1500 is arranged in an area corresponding to a part of the gaming area 20 on the back side of the transparent panel 172, and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550. The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-like member with a picture or pattern on the front surface, and the picture or pattern on the front side can be visually recognized through the transparent panel 172. Although the details will be described later, the second middle panel 1550 is a plate-like member having an annular opening window 1552, and is configured such that a prescribed picture appears on the opening window when a prescribed condition is met. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

The attacker ball gutter 1600 is a gutter-shaped thing that receives the game balls that have won in the general winning hole 56 and discharges them to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the winning game ball joins the big prize opening 540 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board case 1700 houses a lamp relay board 1710, a main control relay board 1720, and the like.

The back unit 176 further includes a first decorative design 1900 and a second decorative design 1920. The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the right side of the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the left side of the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front, and both have a design function without being movable.

[Attack unit]
Below, the configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be explained in detail using FIGS. 23 to 34.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front plate part 520, a guideway 530, a big prize opening 540, a rear case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

A base member 510 shown in FIGS. 23 to 28, as well as FIGS. 30 and 31 is a member that forms the basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed into an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction and its plate surface oriented in the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

The slit 511 is formed to penetrate the base member 510 in the front-back direction. The slit 511 is formed in the upper part of the base member 510 in a substantially linear shape that extends from the right to the left while being gently inclined when viewed from the front. A shutter 610 (more specifically, a guide portion 611 of the shutter 610), which will be described later, is arranged in the slit 511.

The front plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 23 to 27 and 29 is a member disposed at the front end of the attacker unit 500. The front plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 is arranged to face the base member 510 in the front-rear direction and to be spaced apart from the base member 510 in the front direction. In this way, a gap (hereinafter referred to as "special electric accessory space R2") is formed between the front side plate part 520 and the base member 510, which is large enough to allow a game ball to enter. Note that the special electric accessory space R2 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front side plate part 520 is formed of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to see the rear side of the front side plate part 520.

The guide path 530 shown in FIGS. 23, 25 to 31 is for guiding the moving game ball in a predetermined direction as appropriate. The guide path 530 is formed by the shutter 610 and a substantially plate-shaped member (wall portion) that stands upright from the front side plate portion 520. The guideway 530 includes a first guideway 531 , a second guideway 532 , and a third guideway 533 .

Note that, as described above, the guide path 530 (more specifically, the first guide path 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, the shutter 610 is configured to be movable forward and backward relative to the base member 510 via the slit 511, as will be described later. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first guide path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the following description will be made assuming that the shutter 610 is in a state in which it has advanced forward with respect to the base member 510 (a state in which the first guiding path 531 is formed).

The first guideway 531 is arranged near the upper end of the special electric accessory space R2. The first guideway 531 is formed in a substantially linear shape that extends from the right to the left while being gently inclined. The length of the first guideway 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is formed to be slightly shorter than that of the base member 510. The left end of the first guideway 531 is formed near the left end of the special electric accessory space R2. The right end of the first guideway 531 is formed near the right end of the special electric accessory space R2. The first guide path 531 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side. The first guideway 531 includes a deceleration rib 534.

The deceleration rib 534 is something (deceleration means) that reduces the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531. The deceleration rib 534 includes a plurality of rear protrusions 534a that protrude forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front protrusions 534b that protrude rearward from the front plate portion 520. In this embodiment, six rear protrusions 534a are provided. Furthermore, five front protrusions 534b are provided. The plurality of rear protrusions 534a and front protrusions 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guideway 531, respectively. Note that the appropriate interval is set to be at least longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, these plurality of rear protrusions 534a and front protrusions 534b are arranged so as not to overlap when viewed from the front (not to face each other in the front-rear direction but to be shifted in the left-right direction).

Due to the configuration of the first guiding path 531, the game ball (moved by the first guiding path 531) moves in a zigzag shape in a plan view while colliding with the rear projection 534a and the front projection 534b. (Because the smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), its movement speed will be reduced.

In this way, by reducing the moving speed of the game balls moved by the first guide path 531, it is possible to create a situation where a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531. In this way, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guideway 531, by opening the shutter 610 only once, the plurality of game balls can be guided to the third guideway 533. Then, a prize can be won in the big prize opening 540. That is, it is possible to quickly complete rounds in a jackpot game. Moreover, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls stay on the shutter 610, many winnings can be generated. Moreover, since many game balls can be won at once, it is easy to win more than the possible number of winnings in one round of the jackpot game (so-called over-winning).

The second guideway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first guideway 531 in the special electric accessory space R2. The second guideway 532 is formed in a substantially linear shape that extends from the right to the left while being gently inclined. Note that the inclination angle of the second guideway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first guideway 531. In this way, the second guideway 532 and the first guideway 531 are configured as one substantially linear guideway that gently slopes from right to left. The second guide path 532 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (first guide path 531 side).

The third guideway 533 is arranged approximately at the center of the special electric accessory space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guideway 533 is formed in a substantially linear shape that extends from the right to the left while being gently inclined. The third guideway 533 is arranged below the first guideway 531. The third guideway 533 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the first guideway 531 when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, a wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the left end of the third guideway 533 and the left end of the first guideway 531. Further, a wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the right end of the third guideway 533 and the right end of the second guideway 532. In this way, the third guideway 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

The third guide path 533 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (big winning opening 540 side). The third guideway 533 includes a guide portion 535.

The guide portion 535 is formed at the bottom of the third guideway 533. The guide portion 535 is a plate-like member that is approximately triangular in plan view. The guide portion 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball that has been guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

The big prize opening 540 shown in FIGS. 25, 28, 30, and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The big prize opening 540 is formed behind the lowest part of the third guideway 533 (behind the guide part 535). The big prize opening 540 is equipped with a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 27, the count switch 541 is arranged below the rear of the big prize opening 540.

The rear case 550 shown in FIG. 23, FIG. 25 to FIG. 27, FIG. 31, FIG. 33, and FIG. ). The rear case 550 is formed into a substantially rectangular hollow box shape when viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear case 550 is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by a substantially flat mounting portion 551 that is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed into a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in each of the upper space and the lower space. Specifically, the shutter 610, link arm 630, etc. are arranged in the upper space. Moreover, the big prize opening solenoid 620 etc. are arranged in the lower space. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and outside of the rear case 550 (the front of the base member 510) are communicated through the slit 511.

[Special electric accessory]
Below, the configuration of a special electric accessory 6000 according to another example will be explained in detail using FIGS. 35 to 50.

In addition, the special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state where it is easy to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 540 (open state) and a state where it is difficult to win the game ball into the big winning hole 540 (closed state). However, unless otherwise specified, the arrangement and configuration of various members will be described assuming that they are in a closed state unless otherwise specified.

The special electric accessory 6000, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, includes a housing section 6001, a shutter 6002, a big prize opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005.

The accommodating portion 6001 shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 is a member that accommodates various members (shutter 6002, big prize opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, regulating member 6005, etc.) that constitute the special electric accessory 6000. The accommodating portion 6001 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and front side. The housing portion 6001 is attached to the rear side of the base member 510 (see FIG. 23, etc.) via screws or the like. The housing portion 6001 includes a communication opening 6011, a support shaft 6012, a boss portion 6013, and a guiding opening 6014.

The communication opening 6011 allows the upper side and the lower side of the housing section 6001 to communicate with each other. The communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the housing section 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed to vertically penetrate the housing section 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround a boss portion 6013, which will be described later, from the rear to the right in plan view.

The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports a link arm 6004, which will be described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. The support shaft 6012 is formed to protrude upward. The support shaft 6012 is formed at the right rear part of the accommodating part 6001 and behind the communication opening 6011.

The boss portion 6013 rotatably supports a regulating member 6005, which will be described later. The boss portion 6013 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. Boss portion 6013 is formed to protrude upward. The boss portion 6013 is formed near the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center) in plan view, and on the left front side of the communication opening 6011. Note that in appropriate drawings such as FIGS. 35 to 37, the boss portion 6013 is illustrated with a screw attached thereto to support the regulating member 6005.

The guide opening 6014 allows a guide shaft 6056 of a regulating member 6005, which will be described later, to be inserted therethrough. More specifically, as will be described later, the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is defined. The guide opening 6014 is formed near the center of the housing portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed to vertically penetrate the housing section 6001. The guide opening 6014 is bent halfway from one end to the other end in the longitudinal direction and has a substantially L-shape in plan view. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(a), the guiding opening 6014 includes a first guiding opening 6016 and a second guiding opening 6017.

The first guide opening 6016 is formed to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013. Note that the length of the first guiding opening 6016 in the left-right direction is formed to be approximately the same as the length of the connecting opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later.

The second guide opening 6017 is formed to extend in an arc shape when viewed from above. More specifically, the second guiding opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013 (see the dashed-dotted arrow in FIG. 38(a)). In this way, the second guide opening 6017 is formed in the vicinity of the boss 6013 so as to extend along the outer shape of the boss 6013 in plan view. The rear end of the second guide opening 6017 is connected to the left end of the first guide opening 6016. The front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward of the center P of the boss portion 6013 in the front-rear direction.

The shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is a member (a member that switches between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the large winning opening 540 using power from a large winning opening solenoid 6003 that will be described later. Note that the configuration of the shutter 6002 is approximately the same as the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 (see FIG. 31, FIG. 32(c), etc.). The shutter 6002 includes an elongated plate portion 6021, a connecting plate portion 6022, and a connecting shaft 6023.

The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first guideway 531 (see FIG. 31, etc.). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed into an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed so that its longitudinal direction is oriented in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and is slanted downward to the left when viewed from the front (with its upper surface facing toward the upper left).

The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and a connecting shaft 6023, which will be described later. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed into a substantially rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. The connecting plate portion 6022 is formed to extend rearward from the center portion of the elongated plate portion 6021 in the left-right direction.

The connecting shaft 6023 is connected to a link arm 6004, which will be described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed to protrude upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed near the rear end of the connecting plate portion 6022.

In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 31, etc.) from the rear, and the connecting plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001. It is accommodated in 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front and rear directions with respect to the housing portion 6001.

The big prize opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 36, 37 and 39 is a member for driving the shutter 6002. The big prize opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid housing section 6031, a power generation section 6032, a plunger 6033, a power transmission section 6034, and a spring 6035.

The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is a member that accommodates various members that constitute the big prize opening solenoid 6003. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper side. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is arranged with its longitudinal direction facing in the left-right direction. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is attached to the accommodating portion 6001 from below.

The power generation section 6032 is a member that generates power for the big prize opening solenoid 6003. The power generating section 6032 is composed of a coil, a fixed iron core, etc. (not shown). The power generation unit 6032 can attract a plunger 6033, which will be described later, in response to energization from a predetermined power source. The power generating section 6032 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generation section 6032 is housed inside (left side) of the solenoid housing section 6031 with its longitudinal direction (axial direction) oriented in the left-right direction.

The plunger 6033 is a member (movable iron core) formed in a substantially rod shape. The plunger 6033 is arranged with its longitudinal direction (axial direction) facing in the left-right direction. Plunger 6033 is arranged to extend to the right from power generating section 6032. The plunger 6033 is configured to be able to reciprocate in the left-right direction with respect to the power generating section 6032.

The power transmission section 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the big prize opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission section 6034 is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission section 6034 is housed inside (right side) of the solenoid housing section 6031 and attached to the right end of the plunger 6033. The power transmission section 6034 includes a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037.

The connection opening 6036 is connected to a link arm 6004, which will be described later. The connection opening 6036 is formed on the right side of the power transmission section 6034 in plan view. The connection opening 6036 is formed to vertically penetrate the power transmission section 6034.

The connecting protrusion 6037 is connected to a regulating member 6005, which will be described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-shaped portions that are formed to protrude upward. The pair of plate-like portions are formed to be parallel to each other laterally. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-shaped portions. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission section 6034. In addition, below, the connection protrusion part 6037 shall refer to the said gap.

The spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The plunger 6033 is inserted into the spring 6035, and the spring 6035 is disposed between the power generation section 6032 and the power transmission section 6034 in a constantly compressed state. In this way, the spring 6035 always applies a rightward urging force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission section 6034).

In the big prize opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, when the power generation section 6032 is not energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the right by the urging force of the spring 6035. On the other hand, when the power generation section 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the left against the urging force of the spring 6035 due to the attraction force of the power generation section 6032. In this way, in the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the plunger 6033 can be reciprocated in the left and right direction with respect to the power generation section 6032 by turning on and off the power to the power generation section 6032, thereby generating power.

Note that in this embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generation section 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward and the game ball is moved. It becomes difficult to enter the big prize opening 540 (closed state). On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generation section 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward, and the game ball enters the big prize opening 540. The state is such that it is easy to win a prize (open state).

The link arm 6004 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 and 40 operatively connects the big prize opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002 (interlocking connection), and transmits the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed into a substantially L-shape in plan view by a portion extending generally in the left-right direction (first link extension portion 6041) and a portion extending generally in the front-rear direction (second link extension portion 6042). be done. The link arm 6004 includes a central cylindrical portion 6043, a connecting opening 6044, a connecting shaft 6045, and a regulating protrusion 6046.

The central cylindrical portion 6043 is inserted into the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001. The central cylindrical portion 6043 is formed approximately at the center of the link arm 6004 (the connecting portion between the first link extension portion 6041 and the second link extension portion 6042) in plan view. The central cylindrical portion 6043 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. Note that when the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central cylindrical portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise about the central cylindrical portion 6043 in plan view.

The connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted through the connection opening 6044 . The connection opening 6044 is formed at the left (tip) end of the first link extension 6041. The connection opening 6044 is formed to vertically penetrate the first link extension 6041. The connection opening 6044 is formed in the shape of a long hole that extends linearly from the distal end side to the base end side (center cylindrical section 6043 side). The length of the connecting opening 6044 in the lateral direction in plan view is formed to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002.

The connection shaft 6045 is connected to the connection opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (tip) end of the second link extension 6042. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (length in the left-right direction) of the connecting opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003.

The regulating protrusion 6046 comes into contact with a regulating block 6054 of a regulating member 6005, which will be described later, in a predetermined case. The regulating protrusion 6046 is formed into a plate shape that protrudes downward. The regulating protrusion 6046 is formed near the base end of the first link extension 6041 and on the front left side of the central cylindrical portion 6043 in plan view. The rear side surface of the regulating protrusion 6046 is formed to be a flat surface facing rearward.

A regulating member 6005 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 and 41 is a member for regulating unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in a closed state. The regulating member 6005 includes a central cylinder portion 6053, a regulating block portion 6054, a connecting shaft 6055, and a guide shaft 6056.

The central cylindrical portion 6053 is inserted into the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. The central cylindrical portion 6053 is formed approximately at the center of the regulating member 6005 in plan view. The central cylindrical portion 6053 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. Moreover, the central cylindrical portion 6053 is formed in the shape of a long hole extending in the left-right direction in plan view.

Further, a plate-shaped portion (first regulating extension portion 6051) that extends to widen in plan view is formed on the right rear side of the central cylindrical portion 6053. Further, on the left side of the central cylindrical portion 6053, a plate-shaped portion (second restriction extension portion 6052) that extends so as to widen in plan view is formed. In this way, the central cylindrical portion 6053, the first restriction extension portion 6051, and the second restriction extension portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L-shape in a mutual positional relationship when viewed from above. Note that when the boss portion 6013 is inserted into the central cylindrical portion 6053, the regulating member 6005 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylindrical portion 6053 in plan view.

The restriction block portion 6054 is brought into contact with the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The restriction block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped (block-shaped) portion that projects upward. The restriction block portion 6054 is formed approximately at the center of the first restriction extension portion 6051 (that is, at the right rear of the central cylinder portion 6053) in plan view. The front side surface of the restriction block portion 6054 is formed to be a plane facing forward.

The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the big prize opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction directed in the up-down direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed approximately at the center of the first regulating extension portion 6051 (that is, at the right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. In this way, the axial center of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed to substantially overlap the axial center of the regulating block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed to be smaller than the width of the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission section 6034 (that is, the gap that the connecting protrusion 6037 has).

The guide shaft 6056 is inserted into the guide opening 6014 of the housing section 6001. The guide shaft 6056 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 6056 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed approximately at the center of the second regulating extension portion 6052 (that is, to the left of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed to be approximately the same as the length of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) in the lateral direction in a plan view.

Below, using FIGS. 35 to 37 and 42 to 46, the assembly structure of the storage part 6001, shutter 6002, big prize opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulation member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be explained. do.

In addition, in the drawings after FIG. 45, the accommodating part 6001 is shown by a broken line, but the support shaft 6012, the boss part 6013, and the guide opening part 6014 are shown by a solid line for convenience of explanation. Further, in the drawings after FIG. 45, the link arm 6004 is shown by a broken line, but the regulating protrusion 6046 is shown by a solid line for convenience of explanation. In addition, in the drawings after FIG. 46, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified for convenience of explanation.

First, the outline of the assembly configuration of various members (shutter 6002, big prize opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulating member 6005) to the housing part 6001 will be explained.

The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing section 6001. In this way, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front and rear directions with respect to the housing portion 6001.

Moreover, the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the housing part 6001 from below. In this way, the upper side and the lower side of the housing section 6001 (the power transmission section 6034 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003) are communicated via the communication opening section 6011.

Further, the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted into the central cylinder portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 from below so as to be relatively rotatable. In this way, the link arm 6004 is supported by the accommodating portion 6001 so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view about the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001.

Further, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted into the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the regulating member 6005 is supported with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 so as to be freely rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in plan view about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001.

Next, details of the assembly structure of various members will be explained.

As described above, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing section 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 extends downwardly through the communication opening 6011 of the housing section 6001. It stands out. The connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connecting opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 below the housing part 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the big prize opening solenoid 6003 are operatively connected via the connecting shaft 6045 and the connecting opening 6036.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged so as to come into contact with the left side edge of the connection opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003. That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap left and right in a plan view between the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003.

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted from below into the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are operatively connected via the connection opening 6044 and the connection shaft 6023.

Furthermore, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is brought into contact with the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the rear side surface of the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the regulating block section 6054 of the regulating member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. surface contact (rather than contact).

In addition, when the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating part 6001, the boss part 6013 of the accommodating part 6001 is connected to the center cylinder of the regulating member 6005, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b). It is arranged so as to be in contact with the left side edge of the portion 6053.

Furthermore, in a state in which the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 protrudes downward from the accommodating portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. be done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap that the connecting protrusion 6037 has) of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 below the housing part 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 are operatively connected via the connecting shaft 6055 and the connecting protrusion 6037.

In addition, as shown in FIG.46(b), the connection shaft 6055 of the regulation member 6005 is arrange|positioned in the front part of the connection protrusion part 6037 (namely, the gap which the connection protrusion part 6037 has) of the big prize opening solenoid 6003.

Further, in a state where the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted into the guiding opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001 from above.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is connected to the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the housing section 6001. 6016 (more specifically, so as to abut the right end of the first guiding opening 6016).

In this manner, when the left side edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 as described above, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves toward the first guide opening 6016. It is in contact with the right end of.

46 and 50, the unintended opening of the shutter 6002 by the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state (in more detail) will explain in detail how to prevent unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintentional movement of the shutter 6002.

In addition, in this embodiment, the unintended opening of the shutter 6002 is not an opening in response to the power generated by the big prize opening solenoid 6003, but an external force directly applied to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball applied to the shutter 6002). This refers to the opening of the shutter 6002 in response to a collision or an unauthorized act against the shutter 6002 performed by an unauthorized person.

In the following description, the rotation direction of each member is based on a plan view unless otherwise specified. Furthermore, in the following description, a state in which unintended opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the restriction member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing portion 6001 will be referred to as a "locked state."

In the special electric accessory 6000 that has been assembled as described above, when an external force is applied directly to the shutter 6002 (a force that causes the shutter 6002 to slide rearward), the force is applied through the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023. , a clockwise rotating force is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is in contact with the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005 at the rear (that is, in the direction of movement when the link arm rotates clockwise). be touched. Therefore, when a clockwise rotating force is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004, the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise to the regulating member 6005 via the regulating protrusion 6046 and the regulating block 6054. A rotating force is transmitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, at the right end of the first guide opening 6016). are arranged so that they touch each other). That is, the edge (hereinafter referred to as the front edge) of the first guide opening 6016 is arranged in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 (in the direction of movement when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). Ru. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(a), even if a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is The regulating member 6005 cannot be rotated because it interferes with the front edge of the guiding opening 6016.

In this way, since the regulating member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting force to the regulating member 6005 cannot also rotate. Furthermore, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 that transmits force to the link arm 6004 cannot also move. That is, even if an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain the closed state.

As described above, when the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located within the first guiding opening 6016, the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the housing section 6001 cause the shutter 6002 to move as intended. It is in a state (locked state) in which accidental opening (more specifically, unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted.

Note that in the locked state, when a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the rear surface of the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulating block 6054 The front side surfaces press against each other with a relatively strong force. However, since the rear surface of the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front surface of the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 are in surface contact rather than point contact with each other as described above, the durability of each is improved. can be done.

Below, using FIGS. 46 to 50, when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state, a configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened in accordance with the power generated by the big prize opening solenoid 6003 will be explained in detail.

In addition, as described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the big prize opening solenoid 6003, unlike when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating part 6001 The locked state by the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) will be released.

When the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located within the first guide opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when opening the shutter 6002, the power generating section 6032 of the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is energized. will be held. When the power generating section 6032 is energized, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plunger 6033 starts moving to the left, and the big winning opening solenoid 6003 generates power. Furthermore, when the plunger 6033 starts to move leftward, the power transmission section 6034 (connection opening 6036 and connection protrusion 6037) fixed to the right end of the plunger 6033 also moves leftward.

When the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission part 6034 moves to the left, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the coupling protruding part 6037 and the regulating member 6005. . Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission section 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left. In this way, when the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted, the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the accommodating part 6001.

Specifically, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, and the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 comes into contact with the boss portion 6013. Further, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the housing section 6001, and the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017) ).

In the following, the movement of the power transmission section 6034 until the right edge of the central cylindrical section 6053 of the regulation member 6005 comes into contact with the boss section 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening of the housing section 6001) is explained. 6016) is referred to as the "first movement of the power transmission section 6034". Furthermore, the movement of the power transmission section 6034 after the right edge of the central cylinder section 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss section 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening 6016 of the accommodation section 6001 The movement after contacting the left end portion of the power transmitting portion 6034 is referred to as the “second movement of the power transmitting portion 6034”.

Further, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 moves to the left due to the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the connection opening 6036 moves to the left with respect to the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. However, the right side edge of the connection opening 6036 comes into contact with the connection shaft 6045. Note that during the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 does not press the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 at all during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

In addition, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the timing when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 comes into contact with the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017), The timing at which the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the member 6005 abuts against the boss portion 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 abuts the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are both They are set to be approximately the same.

In addition, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016, and in front of the guide shaft 6056 (the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). The front edge of the first guiding opening 6016 is located in the direction of movement when the first guiding opening 6016 is moved. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, even if a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is Since it interferes with the front edge of the first guiding opening 6016, the locked state by the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 continues.

Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. That is, although the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission section 6034 to the regulating member 6005, it is not transmitted to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). In this way, although the regulating member 6005 moves to the left, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction and maintain the posture when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Become.

In this state, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, when the power transmission section 6034 moves further to the left (when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement), the connecting protrusion of the power transmission section 6034 6037 and the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005. Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission section 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left.

Here, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge of the central cylindrical section 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss section 6013. That is, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001. Therefore, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing section 6001.

When the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 hits the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017) of the housing section 6001. being touched. Note that the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013. That is, in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 (in the direction of movement when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise), an opening is formed along the trajectory of the guide shaft 6056 ( There is no interference when the guide shaft 6056 moves).

In this way, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left and the regulating member 6005 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the boss 6013 of the housing section 6001, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, and moves forward through the second guide opening 6017. Note that when the regulating member 6005 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmitting portion 6034. I will do it.

Note that the regulating member 6005 has a rotation center position that is different in the left-right direction depending on when the power transmission section 6034 makes the first movement and when the power transmission section 6034 makes the second movement as described above. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the first movement, the boss section 6013 of the accommodating section 6001 that is in contact with the left edge of the central cylinder section 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is moved to the rotation center position. shall be. Moreover, when the power transmission part 6034 performs the second movement, the boss part 6013 of the accommodating part 6001 that is in contact with the right edge of the central cylindrical part 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is set as the rotation center position.

In this way, by changing the position of the rotation center, the regulation member 6005 is moved forward of the guide shaft 6056 (in the direction of movement when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise), and to the front of the first guide opening 6016. It is switched whether there is an edge or whether the second guiding opening 6017 is extended.

In this way, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement, the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating section 6001 are unlocked, and the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is accommodated. The second guide opening 6017 of the section 6001 can be moved forward. That is, the connecting projection 6037 of the power transmission section 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, so that the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise around the boss section 6013 of the housing section 6001. do.

Further, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement, the right side edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Specifically, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 presses the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left. In this way, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 presses the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left, the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise.

Note that when the power transmission section 6034 is performing the first movement (in the locked state), when the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise, that is, when the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 When a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005 via the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the first guiding opening. The regulating member 6005 could not be rotated because it interfered with the front edge of the portion 6016.

However, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 can move forward toward the second guide opening 6017 of the accommodating section 6001, so that the regulating member The restriction block portion 6054 of 6005 also moves rearward. Note that when the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005 moves rearward, it moves in a direction away from the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004.

Therefore, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement and the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulating block section 6055 of the regulating member 6005 Do not interfere with That is, link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

Further, when the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 via the link opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the link shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. Specifically, the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 rearward. In this way, when the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts sliding backward.

The second movement of the power transmission section 6034 ends when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing section 6001, as shown in FIG. In this way, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing section 6001, the shutter 6002 is in an open state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened from the closed state has been described, but when the shutter 6002 is closed from the open state, the shutter 6002 is opened after the power supply to the big prize opening solenoid 6003 is stopped. The various members (shutter 6002, big prize opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulating member 6005) will operate in the reverse order of the case in which they are executed.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there is a technique for providing a displacement member that can be displaced to a position where it is easy for a game ball to pass through the passage area and a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the passage area. is publicly known. For example, as described in JP-A No. 2008-307103.

In the technique described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. Further, a solenoid is used as a drive source for displacing the door member (moving it back and forth between an open position and a closed position).

Further, in the technique described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2008-307103, the lock portion provided on the transmission means of the solenoid and the engagement protrusion provided on the door member come into contact with each other, thereby causing the closing. It is possible to restrict (lock) the door member from being opened at the position.

However, since a certain degree of accuracy is required in the positional relationship between the lock part and the engagement protrusion, if the solenoid deteriorates over time or if foreign matter gets into the solenoid drive path, they will not be able to fully interact with each other. no longer comes into contact with. In this way, if the lock part and the engagement protrusion do not come into complete contact, there is a risk that the door member may rattle in the closed position, or the door member may open slightly (unintended displacement may occur). possibility), which was inconvenient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and is intended to more reliably restrict unintended displacement of the displacement member when the displacement member is displaced to a position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass through. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes: the game board 17 having the game area 20 through which game balls roll; and the second starting port 440 provided in the game area 20 and through which the game balls can pass. (passage area), and a displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) that can be displaced between a position where it is easy for a game ball to pass and a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass with respect to the second starting port 440 (passage area). ), a big winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) that drives the displacement member, and a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) that can control the big winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means). The displacement member is controlled to be displaced to a position through which it is difficult for a game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) moves the displacement member to a position through which a game ball can easily pass. comprising a locking means (regulating member 6005 and guiding opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) capable of locking the displacement member at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the displacement member is not controlled to be displaced; The mouth solenoid 6003 (driving means) includes: a power generation section 6032 that generates power; and a power transmission device that can transmit the power generated by the power generation section 6032 to the displacement member by contacting at least a portion of the displacement member. The locking means includes: a regulating member 6005 (regulating section) that regulates displacement of the displacing member by contacting at least a portion of the displacing member; and a regulating member 6005 (regulating section) that defines a displacement path of the regulating section. a guiding opening 6014 (displacement guiding section); the displacement path includes a first guiding opening 6016 (first displacement section); and a first guiding opening 6016 (first displacement section). The displacement member includes a different second guiding opening 6017 (second displacement section), and the displacement member has a position where the game ball can easily pass through with at least a part of the power transmission section 6034 in contact with the power transmission section 6034, and a position where the game ball can easily pass through. The regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) can be displaced along the guiding opening 6014 (displacement guiding portion) in accordance with the displacement of the power transmitting portion 6034, and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) can be displaced along the guiding opening 6014 (displacement guiding portion), The means maintains the locked state of the displacement member when the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) is located in the first guiding opening 6016 (first displacement section), and the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) maintains the locked state of the displacing member. When located in the second guiding opening 6017 (second displacement section), the locking state of the displacement member is released.

With this configuration, the locking means (the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 of the housing section 6001) can be locked only when the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located at the right end of the first guiding opening 6016, for example. Therefore, while the guide shaft 6056 is located within the first guide opening 6016, the displacement members (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) can be maintained in a locked state. That is, even if the relative positions of the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 of the housing section 6001 are slightly shifted (for example, even if the power transmitting section 6034 is not placed in the normal position), the locked state is maintained. can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through, unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably controlled. can do.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) includes movement and rotation, and the locking means is such that the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) When located in the first induction opening 6016 (first displacement section), the rotation of the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) is restricted and locked while the regulating member 6005 (regulating section) remains movable. When the state is maintained and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the second guiding opening 6017 (second displacement section), the rotation center position of the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is changed to the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion). By differentiating the position of the member 6005 (regulating portion) from the case where the member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the first guiding opening 6016 (first displacement section), rotation of the restricting member 6005 (regulating portion) is enabled and the locked state is released. It is something to do.

With such a configuration, the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion), which is one member, can switch between maintaining and releasing the locked state by a combination of two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, the number of parts can be reduced compared to the case where, for example, members that perform two operations (movement and rotation) are provided. Particularly in a special electric accessory like this embodiment, since the space for arranging parts is limited, it is advantageous to have such a configuration.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guide section) that guides the game ball, and a link arm 6004 (link section) that is connected to the game ball guide section. The power transmission section 6034 includes the link arm 6004
(link part).

With such a configuration, the power transmission section 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link section) rather than the shutter 6002 (game ball guide section), so it does not come into direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guide section). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding section) can be placed in a locked state.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various changes can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in this embodiment, the explanation was given using the special electric accessory 6000 as an example of the object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and may be a normal electric accessory, etc. It's okay.

Furthermore, when the first movement of the power transmission section 6034 is completed, the regulation block section 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004. In this manner, when the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 come into contact with each other. The condition can be canceled. That is, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

According to such a configuration, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement and the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 Interference with the regulation block portion 6054 (regulation of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

Furthermore, even when the first movement of the power transmission section 6034 is completed, the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulating block section 6054 of the regulating member 6005 are maintained in contact with each other, and the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise, the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005, thereby assisting the rotation of the restriction member 6005. .

Furthermore, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. For example, the guiding opening 6014 (displacement guiding part) is opened when the link arm 6004 attempts to rotate counterclockwise when the power transmitting part 6034 is performing the first movement (in the locked state). In addition, it is sufficient that the guide shaft 6056 is formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 (in the direction of movement when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056. Note that from the viewpoint of facilitating smooth movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to this embodiment, which is formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056, is desirable.

[Configuration of normal electric accessory unit 400]
The configuration of the normal electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the normal electric accessory unit 400 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 52 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the normal electric accessory unit 400 viewed diagonally from above and on the rear left (left in front view).

The normal electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. The normal electric accessory unit 400 has general winning ports 53, 54, and 55, a second starting port 440, a second starting port switch 441 that detects winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440, and an out port 450. , a housing member 443 that receives game balls that have entered the second starting port 440 and game balls received in the out port 450 and discharges them to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1; and the front surfaces of the second starting port 440 and the out port 450. A front cover 445 provided on the front cover 445 and a normal electric accessory 460 are provided. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in the plate-shaped opening forming member 420. This opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620, which will be described later, passes through.

The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are placed adjacent to each other, with the second starting port 440 being placed on the right side when viewed from the front, and the out port 450 being placed on the left side when viewed from the front.

A wall 4452 that partitions the second starting port 440 and the out port 450 is formed on the back surface of the front cover 445 . This wall 4452 prevents the game ball that has passed through the upper part of the blade member 4620 (the game ball that enters the second starting port 440) when the blade member 4620 is opened from being received in the out port 450, It has a function of preventing the game ball from entering the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

The second starting port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second starting port 440 so that the game ball that has entered the second starting port 440 can be detected.

The housing member 443 is provided with an opening 4434 and an opening 4436 at positions corresponding to the second starting port 440 and the out port 450, respectively. The game ball is accommodated in the opening 4434, and the game ball received in the outlet 450 is accommodated in the opening 4436. The game balls accommodated in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected in a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). Further, the housing member 443 has a hole 4432 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 (described later) passes.

[Configuration of normal electric accessory 460]
The configuration of the normal electric accessory 460 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG. 53 is an example of a diagram showing the normal electric accessory 460, the second starting port switch 441, and the housing member 443. FIG. 54 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. 55 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 viewed diagonally from the upper right.

The normal electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610, a blade member 4620, a starting port solenoid 4630, and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the starting port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620.

The base cover 4610 accommodates the starting port solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 between the housing member 443 and is attached to the back side of the opening forming member 420 . The back side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A guide groove 4612 that is long in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610. Further, a bearing (not shown) is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610 to rotatably support a pin 4648, which will be described later.

The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotating shaft 4622 at the bottom of the page. This rotating shaft 4622 passes through a hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and a hole 4432 formed in the housing member 443, and is rotatably supported by a bearing 46444 of a blade connecting member 4642, which will be described later. The rotary shaft 4622 has a notched portion that is pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power from the starting port solenoid 4630 is transmitted as rotational force to the rotating shaft 4622 by the power transmission mechanism 4640, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotating shaft 4622. In this embodiment, the blade member 4620 is in a closed state when it is upright, and becomes an open state when it rotates from the closed state in the right direction about the rotation axis 4622.

The starting port solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and has a flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 (the tip on the right side when viewed from the front). When the starter solenoid 4630 is normally (non-energized), the plunger 4632 is extended in the right direction when viewed from the front, and when energized, the plunger 4632 moves to the left (retraction direction) when viewed from the front.

The power transmission mechanism 4640 converts the power into rotational force and transmits it to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 as the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. The power transmission mechanism 4640 includes a blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, a flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, a flange connecting member 4646, and a blade connecting member 4642. and a link member 4644 provided between the flange connecting member 4646 and the flange connecting member 4646.

The blade connecting member 4642 has a bearing 46444 that pivotally supports the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620. The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotating shaft 4622 that is supported. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 is configured to rotate together with the rotating shaft 4622 with the rotating shaft 4622 as the rotation center. Further, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 that protrudes toward the back side. This support shaft 46426 can revolve around a rotating shaft 4622 that is supported by a bearing 46424.

The link member 4644 is a dogleg-shaped member when viewed from the front, and has an elongated hole 46442 formed at its lower end when viewed from the front. A support shaft 46426 of the blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the elongated hole 46442. A support shaft 46446 that protrudes toward the back side is formed at the upper end of the link member 4644 when viewed from the front. An engagement shaft 46448 that protrudes toward the back side is formed below the support shaft 46446. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports a pin 4648 is formed in the center portion of the link member 4644 (the portion where the angle of the dogleg changes). The link member 4644 is rotatable around a pin 4648 that is supported by a bearing 46444. When the link member 4644 rotates about a pin 4648 that is supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engagement shaft 46448 also rotate about the pin 4648 that is supported by the bearing 46444.

The flange connection member 4646 has a flange holding portion 46462, a connection hole 46464, and an engagement groove 46466. The flange holding part 46462 holds the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and as the plunger 4632 expands and contracts, the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the direction of expansion and contraction of the plunger 4632. A support shaft 46446 of a link member 4644 is connected to the connection hole 46464 so as to be movable within the connection hole 46464. An engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Here, the engagement shaft 46448 has a droplet-shaped cross section that crosses the longitudinal direction and has a pointed end. The link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at this tip. Further, the flange connecting member 4646 has a guide piece 46468 that is long in the left-right direction formed on the back side (base cover 4610 side). This guide piece 46468 is guided by a guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610.

[Explanation of operation of normal electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the normal electric accessory 460 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 51 to 57. FIG. 56 shows the state of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (indicated by a dashed line), and the state of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition from the closed state to the open state. It is an example of the back view which shows the aspect (illustrated by the solid line) of the electric accessory 460. FIG. 57 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in a transition state (shown by a dashed line) and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in an open state (shown by a solid line). FIG.

When the starting port solenoid 4630 is energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction (leftward in front view (rightward in FIGS. 56 and 57)). When the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 51 and 52) moves in the contraction direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contraction direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that holds the flange 4634 between the flange holding parts 46462 moves in the contraction direction. When the flange connection member 4646 moves in the contraction direction, the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 that is engaged with the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connection member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 that is engaged with the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connection member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 rotates from the front about the pin 4648 that is supported in the pin insertion hole 46444. Rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 56 and 57) when viewed. Note that at this time, the link member 4644 can move downward within the connecting hole 46464 of the flange connecting member 4646. When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the pin 4648 that is pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444, the support shaft 46426 that is slidably connected within the elongated hole 46442 of the blade connecting member 4642 rotates. The blade connecting member 4642 rotates clockwise around the rotating shaft 4622, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

The operation of the vane member 4620 from the open state to the closed state is such that when the starter solenoid 4630 is de-energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the direction of extension, which is the opposite movement to the operation from the closed state to the open state. carried out by. Note that the portion of the engagement groove 46466 that contacts the engagement shaft 46448 is adjusted such that the engagement shaft 46448 is smoothly engaged with the engagement groove 46466 when the blade member 4620 is operated from the open state to the closed state. is inclined diagonally downward to the right (diagonally downward to the left in FIGS. 56 and 57) when viewed from the front.

[Functional explanation of normal electric accessory 460]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be explained. FIG. 58 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connection member 4646, and (A) is a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is prevented from opening. , (B) is a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is allowed to be opened. Note that illustration of the starting port solenoid 4630 is omitted in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B).

When the vane member 4620 is in the closed state (when the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 (both see FIG. 56, for example) is de-energized), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466. 58(a)). Therefore, unless the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (unless the starting port solenoid 4630 is energized except in special circumstances such as failure), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened even if an attempt is made to open it. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to illegally open the blade member 4620 by applying force from the outside, this can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the starting port solenoid 4630 is energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction as described above, the engagement between the engagement shaft 46448 and the engagement groove 46466 is released, and the blade member 4620 is released (Fig. 58(b)).

In this way, the link member 4644 forming the engagement shaft 46448, the flange connection member 4646 forming the engagement groove 46466, and the starting port solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being opened illegally. It functions as a means to prevent unauthorized opening.

[Configuration of upper front accessory 1000]
The configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode (at the origin position). FIG. 60 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. FIG. 61 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 62 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed diagonally from the rear left (left in front view).

The upper front accessory 1000 includes a base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, a decorative plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and is operable with respect to the base plate 1010. A movable decorative body 1040 configured, a drive motor 1050 as a drive source for operating the movable decorative body 1040, and a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040. A force transmitting member 1020 that transmits the power from the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040 via the plurality of gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. , and a photosensor 1080 (see FIG. 62) that detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040. Note that the gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040.

The base plate 1010 is a plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above so as to be located on the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. On the front side of the base plate 1010, a first support shaft 1011, a second support shaft 1012, a third support shaft 1013, and a fourth support shaft 1014, which are connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020, are formed. The base plate 1010 also has a notch 1016 formed at a portion where a bearing 10226 of a first transmission member 1022 (to be described later) is located when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, and A notch 1017 is formed at a position corresponding to a coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower end of the coil spring 1070), which will be described later, formed on the back surface side of the movable decoration body 1040 when the movable decorative body 1040 is in the position. In this specification, the notch 1016 and the notch 1017 are referred to as a first back notch 1016 and a second back notch 1017, respectively. Furthermore, the base plate 1010 includes a bearing 1054 that pivotally supports a hollow boss 10662 formed at the center of a first gear 1062 (described later), and a hole 1015 that corresponds to the movable range of a boss 10672 of a fourth gear 1067 (described later). , and a hole 1018 corresponding to a movable range of a position detection piece 10682 of a position detection gear 1068, which will be described later.

Although not shown, the decorative plate 1030 is decorated on the front side. The decorative plate 1030 is formed at a portion where a bearing 10226 of a first transmission member 1022 (to be described later) is located when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position (a position on the front side corresponding to the first notch 1016 on the back side). A notch 1036 is formed, and a notch 1038 is formed at a portion where the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located (a position on the front side corresponding to the second notch 1017 on the back side). In this specification, the notch 1036 and the notch 1038 are referred to as a first front notch 1036 and a second front notch 1038, respectively.

The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 pivotally supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later. A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 is formed which is rotatably supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026.

Drive motor 1050 is attached and fixed to base plate 1010 via motor attachment member 1054. Further, the drive motor 1050 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotational speed of the drive motor 1050 is reduced and power is output from the motor output shaft 1052.

The gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062, a second gear 1064, a third gear 1066, a fourth gear 1067, and a position detection gear 1068. Among these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have the function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020. Detection gear 1068 does not have such a function.

A hollow shaft 10622 is formed at the center of the first gear 1062. A motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into this hollow shaft 10622. As a result, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates around the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052).

A boss 10672 is formed in the fourth gear 1067 at a portion on the front side that is a predetermined distance away from the center 10674 in the radial direction. A position detection piece 10682 is formed in the position detection gear 1068 at a front side portion that is a predetermined distance away from the center 10684 in the radial direction. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067. Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates in the opposite direction by the same rotation angle in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067. In this way, the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected. In this embodiment, the position of the movable decorative body 1040 is detected by detecting whether it is at the origin position.

The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 to which power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via a gear 1060, a rack 1024 to which the power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member. A second transmission member 1026 to which power from 1022 is transmitted via rack 1024 is provided.

The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate member, and a bearing 10222 is formed at the center in the radial direction. This bearing 10222 pivotally supports a first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010. The first transmission member 1022 moves from the outside in the radial direction to the inside (i.e., from the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the left side 1022a in the front view of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b. An elongated hole 10224 is formed in the direction toward which it is directed. A boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 passing through the hole 1015 is connected to the elongated hole 10224 so as to be movable within the elongated hole 10224. Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022, a bearing 10226 is formed at the radially outer end along the right side 1022b when viewed from the front. This bearing 10226 pivotally supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decorative body 1040. The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 is approximately horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The first transmission member 1022 also includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022.

The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-shaped member that is approximately horizontal when the movable decoration body 1040 is at the origin position, and has a bearing 10262 formed at its left end when viewed from the front, and a bearing 10262 at its right end when viewed from the front. A bearing 10264 is formed. The bearing 10262 pivotally supports the fourth support shaft 1014 of the base plate 1010. The bearing 10264 pivotally supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decorative body 1040. Further, the second transmission member 1026 includes a gear 10266 coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). This gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022.

A rack 1024 that transmits power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 is a rod-shaped member provided approximately horizontally, and has a gear 10244 formed on the right side (first transmission member 1022 side) when viewed from the front, and a gear 10248 formed on the left side (second transmission member 1026 side) when viewed from the front. is formed. The gear 10244 meshes with the gear 10228 and converts the rotational power of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 into the rotational direction and transmits the same to the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 has a substantially horizontally long elongated hole 10242 formed on the right side (gear 10244 side) when viewed from the front, and a substantially horizontally long elongated hole 10246 formed on the left side (gear 10248 side) when viewed from the front. A second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10242, and a third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10246.

The coil spring 1070 urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the original position. The upper end of the coil spring 1070 is attached and fixed to the back side of the base plate 1010, and the lower end is attached and fixed to a coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040. When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the original position, the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located at the front second notch 1038 and the second rear notch 1017.

Photosensor 1080 is provided so as to be located in photosensor placement area 1019 formed on base plate 1010. The photosensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040 by detecting a position detection piece 10682 provided on the position detection gear 1068. In this embodiment, a photosensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decoration body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Operation explanation of upper front accessory 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65. FIG. 63 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 64 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 with the movable decorative body 1040 moving downward. FIG. 65 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 has moved downward to the operating limit position. Note that in FIGS. 63 to 65, constituent members of the force transmitting member 1020 are shown with broken lines so that the movement of each member can be seen.

When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the first gear 1062 accordingly rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1064 that meshes with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1066 that meshes with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1067 that meshes with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the center 10674 of the fourth gear 1067. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise about the center 10674 when viewed from the front, the boss 10672 also rotates circumferentially about the center 10674 and moves clockwise along the inside of the hole 1015. Since the boss 10672 is movably connected within the elongated hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the center 10674, the first transmission member 1022 (that is, the gear 10228) is connected to the first support shaft. 1011 (bearing 10222) as the rotation center and rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise in a front view with the first support shaft 1011 as the rotation center, the support shaft 1044 supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise in the front view with the first support shaft 1011 as the rotation center. Move to.

Further, when the gear 10228 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the first support shaft 1011, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves approximately horizontally to the right when viewed from the front. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the elongated hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the elongated hole 10246 function as a guide for moving the rack 1024 in a substantially horizontal direction. When the rack 1024 moves approximately horizontally to the right when viewed from the front, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as seen from the front. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the fourth support shaft 1014, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the fourth support shaft 1014, the support shaft 1046 supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the fourth support shaft 1014. Move to.

Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, and the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226) and the distance from the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1044 and the support shaft 1046 are synchronized, and the rotation centers are the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014, respectively. operate around. As a result, the movable decoration body 1040 maintains a substantially horizontal state and moves downward (that is, toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while drawing an arc clockwise when viewed from the front.

Note that when the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the position detection gear 1068 that meshes with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise when viewed from the front with the center 10684 of the position detection gear 1068 as the rotation center. Rotate. Although the position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067, the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter and both mesh with the third gear 1066. Therefore, the rotation angle of the fourth gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same, and by detecting the position of the position detection piece 10682 formed on the position detection gear 1068 with the photosensor 1080, the fourth The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected.

When the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, by reversing the above-mentioned movement, the movable decorative body 1040 maintains a substantially horizontal state and arcs counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It moves upward while drawing.

In this way, the movable decorative body 1040 can operate between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body performance) is performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. This is done based on the result of the hit determination performed in On the other hand, the movement from the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable object effect based on the result of the current hit determination is completed, and the movement from the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable object effect based on the result of the current hit determination is completed, and the movement is performed based on the result of the next hit determination. We will prepare for the moving body performance that will be performed.

[Configuration of upper back accessory 1100]
The configuration of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. FIG. 66 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode (at the origin position). FIG. 67 is an example of a back view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode. FIG. 68 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 69 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 70 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed diagonally from the rear left (left in front view). 71, (A) is an example of a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 67, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the X section shown in (A). 72, (A) is an example of a sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 67, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the Y section shown in (A).

Note that line AA shown in FIG. 67 is a vertical line passing through the center of a bearing 11724 (described later) formed in an extension portion 11741 (described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and Line BB is a line that vertically crosses the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172.

The upper rear accessory 1100 is made of a substantially flat metal plate and has the shape of a picture frame without a lower edge, and includes a base member 1180 on which various components are attached, and a left-side drive mechanism that includes a left-side motor 1151 and the like. 1150, a right drive mechanism 1160 having a right motor 1161, etc., a decorative cover 1130 that covers the left motor 1151, etc. from the front so that they cannot be seen from the player, and a decorative cover 1130 that covers the right motor 1161, etc. from the front so that the right motor 1161, etc. cannot be seen from the player. A decorative cover 1140 for covering, a movable decorative body 1110 that can be moved up and down by a left side drive mechanism 1150 and a right side drive mechanism 1160, and a pair of left and right covered decorative bodies 1120 that are pivotally supported by the movable decorative body 1110 and are movable. and a pantograph mechanism 1170 whose one end is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end is connected to the covering decorative body 1120, and which operates (contracts in a substantially diamond shape) as the movable decorative body 1110 moves up and down; A regulating member 1190 which is a member that regulates the operation and is attached to the approximate center of the base member 1180, and a static decoration body 1196 which is a member whose front surface is decorated and which is fixedly attached to the base member 1180. Be prepared.

The base member 1180 includes a center plate portion 1182 extending in the left-right direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end of the center plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end of the center plate portion 1182. 1186.

A static decoration body 1196 is attached to the front surface of the center plate portion 1182 as a decoration body that is decorated on the front surface and that does not operate. A horizontally long rectangular center plate 1188 is provided at the upper end of the center plate portion 1182 at approximately the center thereof, facing upward. The front surface of the center plate 1188 has a pair of left support shafts 11882 and right support shafts 11884 that protrude forward.

A regulating member 1190 is attached to the front surface of the center plate 1188 below the left support shaft 11882 and the right support shaft 11884 to restrict the pantograph mechanism 1170 from operating beyond a certain level. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member, and has a left abutment surface 1192 that slopes toward the lower left and a right abutment surface 1194 that slopes toward the lower right.

The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured to allow attachment of a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached. A hole 11842 is formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor attachment member 1152 is attached. Furthermore, a left driven gear attachment shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm attachment shaft 11848 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184. A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear attachment shaft 11844 when viewed from the front. This hole 11846 is formed to correspond to a locus along which a support shaft 11562 formed in the driven gear 1156 moves when the driven gear 1156 (described later) rotates.

The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured to allow attachment of a right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached. A hole 11862 is formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161 when the right motor mounting member 1162 is attached. Furthermore, a right driven gear attachment shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186. A hole 11866 that is approximately C-shaped when viewed from the front is formed around the right driven gear attachment shaft 11864. This hole 11866 is formed to correspond to a trajectory along which a support shaft 11662 formed in the driven gear 1166 moves when the driven gear 1166, which will be described later, rotates.

The left drive mechanism 1150 includes a left motor 1151, a left motor attachment member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached, a drive gear 1157, a driven gear 1156, a left arm member 1155, and a left transmission arm 1154. Of these, the left arm member 1155, driven gear 1156, and drive gear 1157 function as a left drive transmission member that transmits power from the left motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154. The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the left outer side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. Note that a hollow shaft 11544 formed at one (right side) end of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by a left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 within the installation area of the left drive transmission member.

The left motor 1151 is a motor that can rotate forward and reverse. The left motor 1151 is attached to the left motor mounting member 1152. The left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached is attached to the left vertical plate portion 1184 such that the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the drive gear 1157 and passes through a hole 11842 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. can be attached to. Therefore, when the left motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left motor 1151.

Driven gear 1156 meshes with drive gear 1157. When the drive gear 1157 rotates, the driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation. The driven gear 1156 is a gear having a larger diameter than the driving gear 1157. As a result, the rotational force of the left motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1156 has a bearing 11564 at the center and a support shaft 11562 at a predetermined distance from the center at the front. A bearing 11564 is rotatably supported on the left driven gear attachment shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate around the left driven gear attachment shaft 11844.

The left arm member 1155 is a member that is approximately C-shaped when viewed from the front (approximately C-shaped when viewed from the rear), and has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the end on the upper side of the page), and a left arm bearing 11552 at the other end. It has a left arm support shaft 11554 at the lower end of the drawing. The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156.

The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1157, the driven gear 1156, and the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 protruding forward at one (left side) end, and an elongated hole 11542 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1112 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the left transmission arm 1154 has a left arm bearing 11548 rotatably supported by a left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 that rotates around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 within the installation area of the left drive transmission member, so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (arc movement) about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848. possible to be pivoted. Further, a coil spring 1153 is fitted onto the hollow shaft 11544 as an example of an elastic member that biases the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (left rotation direction).

The right drive mechanism 1160 includes a right motor 1161, a right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached, a drive gear 1167, a driven gear 1166, a right arm member 1165, and a right transmission arm 1164. Of these, the right arm member 1165, driven gear 1166, and drive gear 1167 function as a right drive transmission member that transmits power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164. The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the outer right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. Note that a hollow shaft 11644 formed at one (right side) end of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 within the installation area of the right drive transmission member.

The right motor 1161 is a motor that can rotate forward and reverse. The right motor 1161 is attached to the right motor mounting member 1162. The right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached is attached to the right vertical plate part 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and passes through a hole 11862 formed in the right vertical plate part 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the drive gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161.

Driven gear 1166 meshes with drive gear 1167. When the drive gear 1167 rotates, the driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation. The driven gear 1166 is a gear having a larger diameter than the driving gear 1167. As a result, the rotational force of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the drive gear 1167 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1166 has a bearing 11664 at the center and a support shaft 11662 at a predetermined distance from the center at the front. A bearing 11664 is rotatably supported on the right driven gear attachment shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate around the right driven gear attachment shaft 11864.

The right arm member 1165 is a member having an approximately C-shape when viewed from the front (approximately an inverted C-shape when viewed from the rear), and has a right arm bearing 11652 at one end (the end on the upper side of the page), and a right arm bearing 11652 at the other end. It has a right arm support shaft 11654 at the lower end of the drawing. The right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 11662 of the driven gear 1166.

The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1167, the driven gear 1166, and the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 protruding forward at one (right side) end, and has a long hole 11642 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the right transmission arm 1164 has a right arm bearing 11648 rotatably supported by a right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165. The hollow shaft 11644 rotates around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 within the installation area of the right drive transmission member described above so that the right transmission arm 1164 can rotate (arc movement) around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868. possible to be pivoted. Further, a coil spring 1163 is fitted onto the hollow shaft 11644 as an example of an elastic member that urges the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (right rotation direction).

In this way, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 support the movable decorative body 1110 from both the left and right sides, and transmit the power from the left motor 1154 and the right motor 1161 to the aforementioned left drive transmission member and right drive transmission member. is transmitted through.

Pantograph mechanism 1170 has an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178. The pantograph mechanism 1170 forms approximately diamond-shaped sides with four arms: an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178, and deforms the approximately rhombic shape (the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178). Note that the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of colorless and transparent resin. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin.

Note that the above-mentioned "approximately rhombic shape" means that among the four arms, upper left arm 1172, lower left arm 1174, upper right arm 1176, and lower right arm 1178, two pairs of opposing arms are parallel (for example, upper left (the lower right arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel) and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are of the same length. It is also assumed that it is a shape or a square. Also, among the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, for example, two pairs of arms facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm The arms 1176 may or may not have the same length, and furthermore, for example, the arms of one set of two sets of arms facing each other may have the same length and the arms of the other set may have the same length. They may have different lengths. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to specific lengths, and various variations can be adopted. Furthermore, considering that each arm, that is, the accessory (movable decoration 1110 and covered decoration 1120) operates, it is not always necessary for the arms facing each other to be parallel; The configuration may be such that the opposing arms change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state as the arms are driven, or may change from a parallel state to a non-parallel state. In addition, regarding the above-mentioned "opposing arms are parallel", it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism if the structure in which the accessories (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) are driven is considered. Therefore, if the inclination directions of the opposing arms face in the same direction, they are considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Furthermore, even if the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 have different lengths, the accessories (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) can be moved (for example, from the origin position to the operation limit position). ), the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be varied.

The upper left arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and has a bearing 11722 at the center end and a left end. It has a bearing 11724 in the section. The bearing 11722 is rotatably supported by the left support shaft 11882.

The lower left arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and has a horizontally long flat plate shape along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction, and has a left end at a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion. An extension portion 11741 is formed that extends upward (towards the left upper arm 1172 side). The thickness of this extended portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11741 at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. Further, a hollow shaft 11744 is formed at the center end of the upper left arm 1172 so as to extend in the front-rear direction.

The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other by a bearing 11724 rotatably supported on a support shaft 11742. The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other at the origin position (the position where the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are both in a horizontal state, as shown in FIG. 67, for example). With the exception of the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742), they are arranged substantially parallel to each other vertically without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. Further, the hollow shaft 11744 passes through the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration body 1110 and is pivotally supported by the guide shaft 11224. Note that the vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174.

The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and has a horizontally long flat plate shape along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction, and has a bearing 11762 at the center end and a right end. It has a bearing 11764 in the section. The bearing 11762 is rotatably supported by the right support shaft 11884.

The lower right arm 1178 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and has a horizontally long flat plate shape along an imaginary plane substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and has a right end at a position beyond the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion. An extension portion 11781 is formed that extends upward (toward the lower right arm 1178 side). The thickness of this extended portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11781 at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178. Further, a hollow shaft 11784 is formed at the center end of the lower right arm 1178 so as to extend in the front-rear direction.

The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by a bearing 11764 rotatably supported on a support shaft 11782. The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other at the connecting portion (bearing 11764 and support shaft 11782), they are arranged vertically in substantially parallel fashion without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (excluding the bearing 11764 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161. Further, the hollow shaft 11784 passes through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration body 1110 and is pivotally supported by the guide shaft 11244. Note that the vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178.

Note that in the above description, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged so that the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. The detailed positional relationship between the lower left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction will be described.

In the upper left arm 1172, the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal part is F1, and the rearmost position of the longitudinal part in the longitudinal direction is B1 (see FIGS. 71(B) and 72(B)). reference). Further, in the left lower arm 1174, the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F2, and the rearmost position in the longitudinal direction is B2 (see FIGS. 71(B) and 72(B)). ). Here, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is located rearward than the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction, and the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction is located on the rear side of the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. However, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction is rearward of the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction and the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction. It is located in front of surface position B1 (between the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction and the rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction). That is, when the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are viewed in a cross section perpendicularly crossing the longitudinal portion of each arm 1172, 1174, the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174 is vertical (in the width direction of each arm). ) (a positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side).

Note that in this embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side; The upper left arm 1172 is configured to be located slightly on the rear side. However, instead of this, the upper left arm 1172 may be located slightly further forward than the lower left arm 1174. That is, in the present embodiment, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is located at the rear side of the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174, and the upper left arm The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is located on the rear side of the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174, and the rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction The position B2 is configured to be located behind the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction and forward of the rearmost position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction. , instead of this, the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 is located at the rear side of the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172, and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 The position of the rearmost surface in the longitudinal direction of the upper right arm 1176 is located at the rear of the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the longitudinal direction, and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction of the lower left arm 1174 Behind the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal part and forward of the rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal part of the left lower arm 1174 (the rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal part of the left upper arm 1172 is the rearmost position of the longitudinal part of the left lower arm 1174) 1174 and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is rearward of the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction and Located in front of the rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the part (between the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal part of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction and the rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal part of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction) are doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (from the position of the most forward arm to the position of the most rearward arm of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174) The rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be made substantially flush with each other, within a range where the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 can be made thinner. The frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush with each other. Furthermore, the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction are substantially flush with each other, and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 The front-most position in the front-rear direction and the front-most position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 are configured to be substantially on the same plane (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You may do so.

Note that the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction is the same as the positional relationship between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the longitudinal part of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal part of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal part of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal part of the lower right arm 1178) are connected in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). The total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal direction of the lower right arm 1178) can be The thickness from the frontmost position of the upper right arm 1176 to the rearmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. When a pachinko game machine is installed in a pachinko hall, it is limited by its length in the front and back direction, but by reducing the area that the pantograph mechanism 1170 occupies in the front and back direction, it is possible to It becomes possible to arrange objects, and it becomes possible to perform dynamic moving performances using multiple accessory objects that overlap in the front-back direction.

Furthermore, in the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extension portion 11741 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the lower left arm 1174, so that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in the original position. It will be in a nearly horizontal state. Similarly, since the extending portion 11781 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are in a substantially horizontal state at the original position. Since the extension part 11741 (extension part 11781) is formed, it is possible to further enlarge the movable range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178). Become. Moreover, since each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be made thicker, the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be increased and the stability during operation can be improved. Furthermore, by making it possible to increase the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory that operates with the operation of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. This makes it possible to perform more dynamic moving performances.

In this way, by setting the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) as described above, it is possible to remove multiple accessories that overlap in the front-back direction. It becomes possible to carry out dynamic movable performances by increasing the size of movable accessories, and it becomes possible to further enhance the game's interest through movable performances.

The movable decoration body 1110 is decorated on the front side, and has openings 1101 and 1105 formed at substantially symmetrical positions. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted into these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 is vertically slidable together with the covered decorative body 1120 by a left drive mechanism 1150 and a right drive mechanism 1160. The movable decoration body 1110 has a hole 11102, a long hole 11104, a hole 11106 and a long hole 11108, and a boss 1112 and a boss 1114. The hole 11102 and the hole 11106 are holes provided at substantially symmetrical positions with respect to each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at positions substantially symmetrical to each other, and are elongated holes. The boss 1112 and the boss 1114 are provided at substantially symmetrical positions on the back side of the movable decoration body 1110. Furthermore, the movable decorative body 1110 is configured to have an LED board 1116 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, so that it can emit light as the game progresses. When the LEDs arranged on the LED board 1116 emit light, the light is displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107.

The covering decoration 1120 has a covering decoration 1122 placed on the left side of the movable decoration 1110 and a covering decoration 1124 placed on the right side of the movable decoration 1110. The covering decoration body 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224. The covering decoration 1124 has a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244.

In the covering decoration body 1122, a support shaft 11222 is rotatably supported in a hole 11102 of the movable decoration body 1110, and a guide shaft 11224 is slidably inserted into an elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration body 1110. The covering decoration 1122 is also connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (more specifically, it is rotatably supported by a bearing 11744 at the center end of the lower left arm 1174). Thereby, the covering decorative body 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decorative body 1110, and is arranged to be movable with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 with the support shaft 11222 as the center of rotation.

In the covering decoration body 1124, a support shaft 11242 is rotatably supported in a hole 11106 of the movable decoration body 1110, and a guide shaft 11244 is slidably inserted into an elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration body 1110. The covering decoration 1124 is also connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (more specifically, it is rotatably supported by a bearing 11784 at the center end of the lower right arm 1178). Thereby, the covering decorative body 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decorative body 1110, and is arranged to be movable relative to the movable decorative body 1110 with the support shaft 11242 as the center of rotation.

Note that the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 are arranged so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical to each other.

[Operation explanation of upper back accessory 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 77. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (at the origin position), in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a back view. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a state after the upper back accessory 1100 starts operating and before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions, (A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a state when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. . FIG. 76 shows that after the left upper arm 1172 and right upper arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 have operated to the operating limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 move the movable decoration. 1110 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode when the body 1110 operates downward in the paper (when the covered decorative body 1120 starts operating with respect to the movable decorative body 1110), in which (A) is a front view and (B) ) is the rear view. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the covering decoration 1120 has moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decoration 1110,
(A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the upper back accessory 1100 is at the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is in a closed state (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are all approximately horizontal). be. Here, the members (lower left arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing are shown on the back of the movable decorative body 1110. The members that are difficult to hide with the movable decorative body 1110 (the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) are made of colorless and transparent members. Thereby, there is less possibility that each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 will obstruct the visibility of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it is also less likely to be noticed by the player.

As the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their posture in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 The angle formed by When the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are directed vertically, but until the movable decorative body 1110 exceeds a certain operating range, The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 remain located on the back side of the movable decorative body 1110.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. When driving gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. The support shaft 11562 is located above the plane of the drawing when it is at the origin position (when the movable decoration body 1110 and the covered decoration body 1120 are at the origin position), and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left It revolves clockwise around the driven gear attachment shaft 11844). When the support shaft 11562 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11564 (left driven gear attachment shaft 11844), the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left, a clockwise pressing force around the hollow shaft 11544 (left transmission arm attachment shaft 11848) acts on the left transmission arm 1154. When a clockwise pressing force about the left transmission arm attachment shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise about the left transmission arm attachment shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 moves within the elongated hole 11542 and moves the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. When drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. The support shaft 11662 is located above the plane of the drawing when it is at the origin position (when the movable decoration body 1110 and the covered decoration body 1120 are at the origin position), and when the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( It revolves counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 11662 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (right driven gear attachment shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed down toward the lower right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed down toward the lower right, a counterclockwise pressing force about the hollow shaft 11644 (right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868) acts on the right transmission arm 1164. When a counterclockwise pressing force about the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 is applied to the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise about the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. . When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 moves within the elongated hole 11642 and moves the movable ornament 1110 downward.

Note that when the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 also move downward along with the movement of the movable decoration 1110. This is because the guide shafts 11224, 11244 of the covering decorations 1122, 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104, 11108 of the movable decoration 1110, so when the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the gravity This is because the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 also move downward due to the action.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and in synchronization with this, the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 maintain a substantially horizontal state and move toward the paper surface. Operates downward.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 move downward in the plane of the paper, the lower central hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covered decorative body 1122 moves downward in the plane of the paper. is pushed down towards. As a result, the lower left arm 1174 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 11742, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise about the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 11882). When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 move downward in the page, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covered decorative body 1124 is pushed downward in the page. It will be done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 11782, and the upper right arm 1176 rotates around the bearing 11762.
(Center right support shaft 11884) as a fulcrum and rotates clockwise. In this manner, pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

By the way, when the left upper arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise about the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 11882) as a fulcrum, it eventually comes into contact with the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190. Furthermore, when the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884), it eventually comes into contact with the right contact surface 1194 of the regulating member 1190. The position of the upper left arm 1172 when it contacts the left contact surface 1192 is the operating limit position facing downward in the paper, and the position of the upper right arm 1176 when it contacts the right contact surface 1194 is the operating limit position when it contacts the right contact surface 1194. This is the downward operating limit position.

After the left upper arm 1172 has moved to the operating limit position, when the left motor 1151 further rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the movable decorative body 1110 further moves downward in the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11744 moves into the elongated hole 11104. Move from the bottom position to the top position. Along with this, the covering decoration body 1122 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. Further, when the right motor 1161 further rotates clockwise as viewed from the front after the right upper arm 1176 has moved to the operating limit position, the movable decorative body 1110 further moves downward in the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11784 is inserted into the elongated hole 11108. Move from the bottom position to the top position. Along with this, the covering decoration body 1124 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. In this way, the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 operate together with the movable decorative body 1110 from the origin position downward in the plane of the drawing, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 move downward in the plane of the drawing to perform the above operation. When the movable decorative body 1110 moves to the limit position and further moves downward in the drawing, the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110. When the covering decoration body 1120 moves relative to the movable decoration body 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted into the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and become visible to the player. The amount of exposure of the lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative operating range of the covering decoration 1120 with respect to the movable decoration 1110 increases.

In this way, the upper back accessory 1100 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 73) and the lower end position (see FIG. 75). Specifically, the movable decoration body 1110 is movable between the origin position and the lowering end position, and the covered decoration body 1120 is movable between the origin position and the operation limit position of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. can be moved. The operation limit position is defined as when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 have moved to the lower end position, and the covered decorative body 1120 is at the limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 while the movable decorative body 1110 is at the lower end position. This is the activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decoration body 1110 is the same at the lower end position and at the operation limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they are on standby at a position where they do not obstruct the visibility of the image displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) is at the lower end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 is Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position moves toward the lower end position, the upper rear accessory 1100 (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decoration 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. They will advance forward. The advancement of the upper back accessory 1100 from the origin position forward into the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is caused by the progress of the game (for example, the entry (passing) of a game ball into the first starting port 762 or the second starting port 752). ) is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed under the condition).

Note that when the upper back accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed at a position where they can be seen by the player. Since both upper left arms 1172 are made of transparent resin, they do not obstruct the visibility of the effect images displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) is raised and lowered by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left The fulcrums of the arm 1174 are both on the sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, which not only prevents the player's visual recognition (players tend to focus on the center), but also allows the left drive mechanism to 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160 can be compactly provided in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back accessory 1100. Note that the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, but even if the upper rear accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are difficult to enter the player's field of view. Furthermore, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, the upper back accessory 1100 can be made thinner overall (in this embodiment, the thickness is approximately the same as the width of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161). ing).

In addition, when the movable decorative body 1110 initially starts operating, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 start operating together from the origin position, and from the middle of the operation, the movable decorative body 1110 is connected to the covered decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122 and the covering decoration 1124) will begin to operate relative to each other. That is, since the covering decoration 1120 is not operating with respect to the movable decoration 1110 at the beginning of the movable decoration 1110 starting to operate, the covering decoration 1120 is not operating from the beginning of the movable decoration 1110 starting to operate. Since it is difficult to predict the final form, the movable decorative body 1110 will perform operations that exceed the player's expectations midway through, making it possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts operating, the covering decorative body 1120 (covering decorative body 1122 and covering decorative body 1124) is not operating with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and the movable decorative body 1120 (covering decorative body 1122 and covering decorative body 1124) is not activated from the middle. Although the covering decoration body 1120 is configured to start operating relative to the decoration body 1110, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that the covering decoration body 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decoration body 1110. It may be.

By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, respectively (after reaching the operating limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even if this happens, the postures of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 face) do not change. On the other hand, regarding the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178, even after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut on the left abutment surface 1192 and the right abutment surface 1194, respectively, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm The longitudinal portions of the arms 1178 change their posture in the vertical direction. When the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 will eventually be exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. .

Therefore, in this embodiment, before the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110, the cover decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122) is attached to the movable decorative body 1110. and the covering decoration body 1124) are operated relative to each other. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward in the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their posture in the vertical direction. Then, the lower right arm 1178 appears in a position where it can be seen from the front, and at that timing, the covered decorative body 1120 is moved upward relative to the movable decorative body 1110, and the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm The arm 1178 is positioned on the back side of the covering decoration 1120. When the covered decorative body 1120 moves relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the accessory area that can be seen from the front (the combined area of the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) increases, so this can be utilized. By doing so, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are prevented from being exposed in a natural manner that does not feel strange to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, after the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position starts operating toward the lowering end position, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are moved to the left contact surface, respectively. 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, the covering decoration 1120 (the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124) is actuated upwardly. Here, the operation of the covering decoration body 1122 with respect to the movable decoration body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the left motor 1151 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Similarly, the operation of the covering decoration body 1124 relative to the movable decoration body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the right motor 1161 clockwise when viewed from the front. That is, for both the covered decorative body 1122 and the covered decorative body 1124, only the corresponding motors (the left motor 1151 for the covered decorative body 1122 and the right motor 1161 for the covered decorative body 1124) are rotated in a specific direction. With one simple operation control, it is possible to continue the operation of the movable decorative body 1100 and to operate it independently of the operation of the movable decorative body 1100. In addition, since only one motor is required to rotate each of the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124, the movable decoration body 1100 can continue to operate with a simple configuration and space saving. It becomes possible to operate independently of the operation of In particular, in recent years, it has become mainstream to increase the size of movable accessories and arrange multiple movable accessories, so the contribution to space saving is a big effect.

By the way, conventionally, when operating an accessory in a substantially straight line in the vertical direction, a drive mechanism was provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism performed the linear movement in the vertical direction. When a drive mechanism is provided on both sides of an accessory, it is necessary to provide the drive mechanism over the operational range of the accessory at least in the vertical direction, and a large area is required to install such a drive mechanism. Space can be saved if the accessory can be operated by circular motion, but in this case, the accessory also operates by circular motion. In this regard, in this embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 moves within the elongated hole 11542. At the same time, the movable decorative body 1110 is moved downward. In addition, in synchronization with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise about the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 moves within the elongated hole 11642. At the same time, the movable decorative body 1110 is moved downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, while each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 is moved in an arc with one end as a fulcrum, the movable decoration body 1110 is held in a substantially horizontal position. The movable decorative body 1110 can be moved substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operating range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 perform arcuate motion, the installation area in the vertical direction of the drive mechanism (left drive mechanism 1150, right drive mechanism 1160) that drives the movable decoration body 1110 is limited to the movable decoration body 1110. It can be made smaller than the operating range of , making it possible to greatly contribute to space saving.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120, the decorative cover 1130, the decorative cover 1140, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the static decorative body 1196 have the same type of decoration on the front surface. is applied. Decorations of the same type mean, for example, decorations that evoke the same idea, and if the decorations are visually recognizable as having the same color, pattern, or shape, they can evoke the same idea. In this embodiment, the front surface of each of the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, and 1196 has a shape that has the same color in appearance and constitutes the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). It has decorations that make it recognizable. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 is in the shape of a character related to the concept of the gaming machine, the above-mentioned members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, and 1196, which are decorated with the same type of decoration on the front, are the same. A character shape is formed.

In a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of this embodiment) and a drive member that drives the movable member (a left transmission member of this embodiment) are used. Regarding the arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164), when the movable accessory advances to the front side of the liquid crystal display device, there is a possibility that it will be visible when viewed from the front. In this regard, in this embodiment, unlike such conventional gaming machines, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally made visible from the front, and other members (movable decorative body 1110 , the covering decoration 1120, the decorative covers 1130, 1140, and the static decoration 1196), so that the player recognizes that they constitute the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). Furthermore, no matter where the movable decoration body 1110 is located between the origin position and the operation limit position, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are integrated with the other members (for example, , see (A) in each of FIGS. 73 to 77). To be more specific, the left transmission arm 1154 is decorated with a decoration that provides continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transmission arm 1164 is decorated with a decoration that provides continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130. 1140 is decorated to create continuity. Furthermore, the same type of decoration is applied to the front surfaces of the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the other members mentioned above to form a single character shape. In this way, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 can be seen from the front, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decorative body 1110 and support the movable decorative body 1110. This makes it difficult for players to understand that this is a member that is used to play games. Furthermore, while the movable decorative body 1110 is shaped like an eye, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are shaped to resemble the outer corners of the eyes from the left and right ends of the movable decorative body 1110. . Therefore, it is thought that it is even more difficult for the player to understand that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are the members that drive the movable decorative body 1110.

[Configuration of lower accessory 1200]
The configuration of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. FIG. 78 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode (at the origin position). FIG. 79 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. FIG. 80 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 81 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above and to the left. FIG. 82 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 83 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed diagonally from above and to the rear left (left in front view).

The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixed base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, A left guide 1260 member and a right guide 1270 member that guide the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 on both left and right sides, and an auxiliary member that applies an upward biasing force to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 that moves up and down. An arm 1280, a lower accessory drive motor 1230 as a drive source for operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and a lower accessory drive motor 1230 that uses the power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 to move the lower accessory It includes a gear 1240 that transmits information to the decoration body 1210, and a transparent resin rear cover 1250 that is disposed behind the gear 1240. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. 79 and 81 so that the shape of the rear cover 1250 can be easily understood. The lower accessory fixed base 1220 and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 function as an operating mechanism for vertically moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210.

The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory drive motor 1230 is attached to the lower center of the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220. On the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220, a support shaft 12202 for pivotally supporting the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed facing forward. On the back side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220, a pair of left and right support shafts 12203, 12205 are formed toward the rear. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204 and 12206 that are substantially symmetrical left and right with respect to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outward above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. It is formed. The hole 12204 is formed to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12203. The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12205. A photosensor 12208 that detects the position of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is arranged on the front side of the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory drive motor 1230. In this embodiment, the photosensor 12208 detects whether the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a horizontally long decorative member. It is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to be able to move up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 includes a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of transparent resin that can be moved up and down with respect to a lower accessory fixing base 1220, and a lower accessory fixing base 1220 whose front surface is decorated. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 covers the front surface of the lower accessory movable base 12102 and moves up and down with the lower accessory movable base 12102. This lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to be able to transmit light from the rear toward the front.

A pair of elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are formed on both left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102. The long holes 12106 and 12108 are long holes in the horizontal direction. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 toward the front on the right side of the elongated hole 12106.

Further, the lower accessory movable base 12102 is equipped with an LED board on the front side, on which an LED (not shown) as a light source is arranged. When the LEDs arranged on this LED board emit light, they emit light forward through the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. This makes it possible, for example, to perform a light emitting effect that matches the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210.

The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at attachment portions 12604 and 12606. The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 between the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220. .

The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at attachment portions 12704 and 12706. The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 between the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220. .

The auxiliary arm 1280 is a rod-shaped member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 at the left end that is pivotally supported by the support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a long hole 12802 formed at its right end to engage with a boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102.

An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided as an example of an elastic member between a support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and a bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280. The auxiliary coil spring 1290 biases the auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (left rotation direction) with the bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The counterclockwise biasing force of this auxiliary coil spring 1290 assists the upward movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220.

The lower accessory drive motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207.

The gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The gear 1240 includes a drive gear 12402 provided coaxially with the lower accessory drive motor 1230, a left driven gear 12404, and a right driven gear 12406.

The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, and are rotated left and right so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. They are arranged side by side. Further, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other.

The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a at the center. This bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. The teeth of left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of drive gear 12402. The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a at the center. This bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. The teeth of the right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of the left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the drive gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this way, the drive gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in synchronization.

A boss 12405 is formed on the front surface of the left driven gear 12404 at a predetermined distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 in the radial direction. Similarly, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface of the right driven gear 12406 at a predetermined distance in the radial direction from the center of the right driven gear 12406. Note that the distance from the center of left driven gear 12404 to boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of right driven gear 12406 to boss 12407.

Note that "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter", "the height direction position of the center of the left driven gear 12404 is the same as the center height direction position of the right driven gear 12406", and "the left driven gear 12406 has the same center height direction position". "The distance from the center of gear 12404 to boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of right driven gear 12406 to boss 12407" is not so strict as to require that both values be the same down to the decimal point. Therefore, when transmitting the power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 to the lower accessory movable decoration 1210, the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is stabilized (well-balanced in the left-right direction) while maintaining the same external appearance. It suffices if the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be moved within a range that allows co-workers to travel approximately equally to the left and right sides of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 so that it can move up and down.

The boss 12405 passes through a hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12204 is formed to correspond to the trajectory of the boss 12405 around the support shaft 12203 when the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

The boss 12407 passes through a hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixed base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12206 is formed to correspond to the trajectory of the boss 12407 around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

In the normal state, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 are each located at the lowest position (the position shown in FIG. 84).

Note that the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 also have the function of defining the movement range of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (that is, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406), respectively.

When the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated is the uppermost position, the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 are both at least at the lowermost position and the uppermost position. The bosses 12405 and 12407 must be formed so that they can move between them. In this embodiment, the hole 12404 is formed clockwise from the lowest position (see FIG. 84) to a position exceeding the highest position. Further, the hole 12206 is formed counterclockwise from the lowest end position (see FIG. 84) to a position beyond the highest end position.

Here, of the two positions where the hole 12204 intersects with the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404, the upper position is the uppermost position of the boss 12405, and the lower position is the lowermost position of the boss 12405. Also, of the two positions where the hole 12206 intersects with the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406, the upper position is the uppermost position of the boss 12407, and the lower position is the lowermost position of the boss 12407. (See also Figure 86). However, in FIG. 86, both boss 12405 and boss 12407 have moved to positions slightly beyond the top end positions.

Note that the "position slightly beyond the top end position" of the boss 12405 refers to the position on the right side in front view of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (the right side in FIG. 86(A), FIG. (left side of (B)), and is a position where approximately the uppermost position can be maintained. Further, the "position beyond the top end position" of the boss 12407 refers to the left side in front view of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (left side in FIG. 86(A), FIG. 86(B ). However, it is preferable that the degree of the "exceeding position" is so slight that when the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 moves upward, it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 has descended. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 will fall to a position lower than the uppermost position.

[Operation explanation of lower accessory 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (at the origin position), in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to an intermediate position, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when the lower accessory 1200 is operated to the operating limit, with (A) being a front view and (B) being a rear view. In addition, in FIG. 86, the boss 12407 and the elongated hole 12108 are illustrated so that the shapes thereof can be understood.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 84) and the operation limit position (see FIG. 86). Note that when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is at the operating limit position, it is located in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 moves forward from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The company will expand into the market. Advancement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the front into the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is caused by the advancement of the game (for example, the game toward the first starting port 762 or the second starting port 752). This is executed in accordance with the result of a hit determination executed on the condition that the ball wins (passes).

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405, which is located lowest in the normal state, rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the straight-line distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. Rotate and move. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407, which is located lowest in the normal state, rotates while drawing an arc whose radius is the straight-line distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 rises toward the operation limit position.

While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the origin position (see FIG. 84) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 85), the boss 12405 moves leftward ( The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the right direction in FIGS. 84(B) and 85(B). The boss 12407 moves the lower accessory movable base 12102 upward while moving to the right (leftward in FIGS. 84(B) and 85(B)) within the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Push up. At this time, the holes 12204 and 12206 function as guide grooves that guide the operations of the bosses 12405 and 12407, respectively, and as described above, the operating ranges of the bosses 12405 and 12407 (the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotation range).

Further, while the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 85) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 86), the boss 12405 moves inside the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving to the right (leftward in FIGS. 85(B) and 86(B)), and the boss 12407 is inserted into the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving inside to the left (rightward in FIGS. 85(B) and 86(B)). In addition, since the auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise urging force to the auxiliary arm 1280 with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum, this auxiliary coil spring 1290 exerts a force that pushes the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward. Supported.

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. That is, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 descends toward the origin position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 operates from the operating limit position (see FIG. 86) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 85), the boss 12405 moves leftward inside the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. (To the right in FIGS. 85(B) and 86(B)) while pushing the lower accessory movable base 12102 downward, and the boss 12407 moves inside the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed down while moving rightward (leftward in FIGS. 85(B) and 86(B)). Further, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 85) to the origin position (see FIG. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed down while moving in the left direction in FIGS. While moving to the left (to the right in FIGS. 84(B) and 85(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed down.

As described above, the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same, and the diameter of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are the same. The diameter is the same. Further, the straight-line distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 is the same distance (length) as the straight-line distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Therefore, when the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 become the same. Here, since the LED board is mounted on the lower accessory movable base 12102, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, which is the object to be raised, has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is an accessory that is long in the left-right direction. When raising such accessories, there is a possibility that the power will be biased toward either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the object to be lifted is somewhat heavy or long in the horizontal direction, the rotational force (power) of one lower object drive motor 1230 is enough to lift the object. The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stabilized (well-balanced in the left-right direction) while maintaining the posture at the origin position (see FIG. 84) without biasing the transmission of power to either the left or right side. It is possible to operate in the vertical direction.

By the way, when operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 controls the lower accessory drive motor 1230 to operate from the origin position to the operation limit position. A pulse signal is output so that the motor rotates more than the normal rotation speed (so that it rotates beyond the operating limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, which has started operating due to the rotation of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, is physically moved when the boss 12405 collides with the end of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 collides with the end of the hole 12206. will be stopped. In this way, it becomes possible to quickly operate the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position.

Here, the hole 12204 is formed to the center side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (to the right of the vertical line LL in FIG. 86A). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed to the center side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (to the left of the vertical line LR in FIG. 86A). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 moves to the operating limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the center side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (to the right of the vertical line LL in FIG. The boss 12407 is located on the center side of the line of the vertical ship LR passing through the OR (to the left of the vertical line LL in FIG. 86A).

When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) is applied to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210. Even if this occurs, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is restricted by the holes 12204 and 12206. Therefore, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in any direction, and the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is locked in this position.

In this way, when the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 moves to the operating limit position, it goes without saying that the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 does not descend due to gravity, but also because of external influences such as vibrations on the lower accessory movable decoration 1210. Even if a force is applied, the lower accessory drive motor 1230 does not descend, and is held at the operating limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction (clockwise) toward the original position. As a result, the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 upward with a simple configuration without providing a new member as a locking mechanism, It becomes possible to maintain the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 above.

If the boss 12405 is not on the left side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (if the boss 12407 is not on the right side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406) , the downward movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked. Therefore, when the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the downward Movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 toward the direction is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the gravity is applied in the rotational direction of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406) (at the top end position, the left driven gear 12404 is horizontally leftward and rightward when viewed from the front). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

Note that in this embodiment, when the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The rotation is restricted, but this is because it is desired to hold the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised ( The movement range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be changed as appropriate depending on the position where the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment is desired to be held. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is set to a position further rotated by 90 degrees to the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 86(A), the left side in FIG. 86(B)) from the vertical direction line LL, and If the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated 90 degrees to the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 86(A), right side in FIG. 86(B)) from the vertical direction line LR, the maximum The lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost end position.

In addition, in this embodiment, by rotating the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 are rotated, and the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102 ) is moved up and down, but the manner in which the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is moved up and down is not necessarily limited to this. Any configuration may be used as long as the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is moved up and down by moving the bosses 12405 and 12407 in an arc. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 in this embodiment) to move the force applying member, for example, the above force applying member is placed at a location a predetermined distance away from the center in the radial direction. A rotating member having a force acting member formed thereon may also be used.

Further, the above-mentioned force applying members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 in this embodiment) can be moved in a perfect circular arc by using a gear, but they are not necessarily moved in a perfect circular arc. It is not necessary, and it may be moved by drawing an elliptical arc. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes horizontal, the lower accessory movable ornament 1210 of this embodiment (more specifically, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 of this embodiment The component force of the load of the base (corresponding to the base 12102) becomes 0, and the force applying member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment). Therefore, unless the drive source of the force-applying member (corresponding to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 of this embodiment) is driven in the direction in which the target accessory is lowered, a simple structure is possible without providing a new member as a locking mechanism. Then, in a series of operations for moving the target accessory upward, the target accessory can be locked upward.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (the movement of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407) is not stopped by stopping the drive of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, but by It is physically stopped by 12204 and 12206. For example, if the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 of this embodiment) is stopped above by controlling the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 of this embodiment), then The rotation of the motor has to be decelerated near the desired upper position, and there is a risk that the rising speed of the target accessory near the upper position may decrease. In this regard, as in this embodiment, by physically restricting the movement of the force acting members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 in this embodiment), the target accessory is , it is possible to achieve high-speed movement with a simple configuration without stalling near the upper position where you want to stop. Furthermore, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetrical accessory has a horizontally long shape that is long in the left and right direction, the target character can maintain stability in the left and right direction. Able to lift and lower objects.

Further, in this embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in opposite directions in synchronization with each other. That is, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions in synchronization. As a result, even if an external force (for example, vibration, etc.) is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) in either the left or right direction, the lower accessory drive motor Unless the movable accessory 1230 is driven, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the uppermost position. This is because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend unless the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner accessories 1300]
The corner accessory 1300 includes the upper corner accessory 1320 and the lower corner accessory 1350, as described above. Here, first, the upper corner accessory 1320 will be explained, then the lower corner accessory 1350 will be explained, and then the mode when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operating limit position will be described.

[Configuration of upper corner accessory 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG. 87 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 88 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 89 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 90 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed diagonally from the rear left (left in front view).

The upper corner accessory 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner accessory 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322. A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. and a photosensor 1345 that confirms the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

The fixing plate 1322 is a horizontally long plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the back side of the upper front accessory 1000 and the front side of the upper back accessory 1100, and to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. Support shafts 13222, 13224, and 13226 are formed on the front side of the fixed plate 1322. A hole 13225 is formed between the support shafts 13222 and 13224 in the left-right direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224. A hole 13229 is formed around the support shaft 13226 in approximately the upper half of the circumference of the support shaft 13226.

The first movable body 1330 includes a decorative portion 13302 decorated with letters and the like, and an arm portion 13304 that is integrally formed with the decorative portion 13302. A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the base end of the arm 13304. A support shaft 13308 is formed on the upper right side of the bearing 13306 when viewed from the front. The first movable body 1330 is rotatable around a bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). Further, a long linear slope 13307 is formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 along the moving direction of the first movable body 1330. This slope 13307 has a mountain-like shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The second movable body 1340 includes a decorative portion 13402 decorated with letters and the like, and an arm portion 13404 that is integrally formed with the decorative portion 13402. A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports a support shaft 13228 is formed at the base end of the arm portion 13404. A support shaft 13408 is formed on the upper left side of the bearing 13406 when viewed from the front. The second movable body 1340 is rotatable around a bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). Furthermore, a long linear slope 13407 is formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340. This slope 13407 has a mountain-like shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The motor 1332 is attached and fixed to the fixed plate 1322 via the motor attachment member 1331. Further, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322.

The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334, a second gear 1335, a third gear 1336, a first transmission arm 1337, and a second transmission arm 1338. The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are in mesh with each other, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are in mesh with each other. Power from a motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via gears 1334 and 1335. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via each gear 1334 to 1336.

The first gear 1334 has a hollow shaft 13342 formed at its center. This hollow shaft 13342 is coaxially supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so that it can rotate together with the motor output shaft 13322. A hollow shaft 13342 supported by the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225.

The second gear 1335 has a hollow shaft 13352 formed at its center. This hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13224. Further, a boss 13354 is formed on the front side of the second gear 1335 at a predetermined distance radially outward from the center.

The third gear 1336 has a hollow shaft 13362 formed at its center. This hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13226. Further, on the front side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13364 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. A boss 13366 is formed on the back side of the third gear 1336 at a predetermined distance radially outward from the center. This boss 13366 moves within the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. The boss 13364 and the boss 13366 are formed on opposite surfaces to be substantially diagonal with respect to the center of the third gear 1336. A detection piece 13368 that can be detected by a photosensor 1345 is formed on the front surface of the third gear 1336.

The first transmission arm 1337 has a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a rod-shaped portion 13371. A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13371 side. The bearing 13372 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308. A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. The bearing 13374 is rotatably supported by the boss 13354.

The second transmission arm 1338 has a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a rod-shaped portion 13381. A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13381 side. The bearing 13382 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13408. A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the side of the curved portion 13380. The bearing 13384 is rotatably supported by the boss 13364.

The photosensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and in this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 91 described later). ), the detection piece 13368 is attached so that it can be detected.

[Operation explanation of upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. FIG. 91 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 92 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 93 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 92. FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operating limit position.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position, the first movable body 1330 is located at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 21), so that they are difficult to see when viewed from the front.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 91), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (clockwise in FIGS. 91 to 94). When the first gear 1334 rotates, the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the spindle 13224 (hollow shaft 13352), the boss 13354 (see FIG. 89) rotates clockwise when seen from the front about the hollow shaft 13352 (the spindle 13224). to go around. When the boss 13354 rotates clockwise as seen from the front around the hollow shaft 13352, the bearing 13374 supported by the boss 13354 also rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 as seen from the front. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 91 to 94) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves to the left in front view, the support shaft 13308 is moved to the fixed plate 1322. It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the formed support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) as the center of rotation. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the support shaft 13222 as the rotation center. (in front of).

Furthermore, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the spindle 13224 (hollow shaft 13352), the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise when seen from the front about the hollow spindle 13362 (the spindle 13226). rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the support shaft 13226, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 89) rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the hollow shaft 13362. When the boss 13364 rotates around the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves to the right (leftward in FIGS. 91 to 94) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably fitted onto the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves to the right in front view, the support shaft 13408 is attached to the fixed plate 1322. It rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) as the center of rotation. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves toward the lower left (in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) from the origin position with the support shaft 13228 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be operated synchronously by rotation of one motor 1332.

Further, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other. In other words, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to be sandwiched between each other from the outside of the field of view to the inside of the field of vision when viewed from the front.

Note that when the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in the direction of returning to the original position due to a movement opposite to the above-mentioned movement. do.

By the way, when the first movable body 1330 that has moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the fixed plate 1322 interfere, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a possibility that you may not be able to return. Therefore, in this embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1322, thereby allowing the first movable body 1330 to return smoothly to the original position. ing. Similarly, regarding the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1322, so that the second movable body 1340 can be smoothly moved to the origin position. It is believed that a recovery is possible.

[Configuration of lower corner accessory 1350]
The configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. FIG. 95 is an example of a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 96 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. FIG. 98 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed diagonally from the upper left on the back.

The lower corner accessory 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner accessory 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352. A motor 1354 as a drive source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. and a photosensor 1375 that confirms the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

The fixing plate 1352 is a horizontally long plate-like member that is fixedly attached to the lower part of the rear box 1800 on the back side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200. Support shafts 13522, 13523, 13524, 13525, 13526, 13527, 13528, and 13529 are formed on the front side of the fixed plate 1352. A hole 13530 is formed around the support shaft 13527 in approximately the lower half of the circumference of the support shaft 13527.

The third movable body 1355 includes a decorative portion 13552 decorated with letters and the like, and an arm portion 13554 that is integrally formed with the decorative portion 13552. An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back side of the arm portion 13554. A hole 135592 is formed at the center end of the arm cover 13559. A bearing 13556 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the base end of the arm portion 13554. A support shaft 13558 is formed at the lower right side of the bearing 13556 when viewed from the front. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable about a support shaft 13524 on which a bearing 13556 is supported. Further, a coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559. This coil spring 1395 biases clockwise around the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a biasing force acting clockwise around the support shaft 13524 is applied to the third movable body 1355. Furthermore, a long linear slope 13557 is formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355. This slope 13557 has a mountain-like shape that becomes higher from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decorative portion 13572 decorated with letters and the like, and an arm portion 13574 that is integrally formed with the decorative portion 13572. An arm cover 13579 is provided on the back side of the arm portion 13574. A hole 135792 is formed at the center end of the arm cover 13579. A bearing 13576 that pivotally supports a support shaft 13529 is formed at the base end of the arm portion 13574. A support shaft 13578 is formed at the lower left side of the bearing 13576 when viewed from the front. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable about a support shaft 13529 on which a bearing 13576 is supported. Further, a coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579. This coil spring 1396 is biased counterclockwise around the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation. As a result, a biasing force is applied to the fourth movable body 1357 in a counterclockwise direction around the support shaft 13529 as the rotation center. Furthermore, a long linear slope 13577 is formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357. This slope 13577 has a mountain-like shape that increases from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The motor 1354 is attached and fixed to the fixed plate 1352 via a motor attachment member 1356. The power of the motor 1354 is output from the motor output shaft 13542.

The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1367, and each gear. A third transmission arm 1370 that transmits power from all or part of 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367 to third movable body 1355, and each gear 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366 , 1367 to the fourth movable body 1357.

The first gear 1361 has a hollow shaft 13612 formed at its center. The motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13612 so that it is coaxial with the motor output shaft 13542 and can rotate together.

Power from the motor 1354 is transmitted to a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, and a seventh gear 1367 in this order. The sixth gear 1366 has a hollow shaft 13662 formed at its center, and a boss 13664 formed at a predetermined distance radially outward from the center. Furthermore, a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by a photosensor 1375 is formed on the front surface of the sixth gear 1366 at a predetermined distance radially outward from the center. Further, the seventh gear 1367 has a hollow shaft 13672 that rotatably supports a support shaft 13528 formed at the center, and a boss 13674 formed at a predetermined distance radially outward from the center.

The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a rod-shaped portion 13704. A bearing 13706 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13704 side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355. A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the side of the curved portion 13702. The bearing 13708 rotatably supports the boss 13664 of the sixth gear 1366.

The fourth transmission arm 1372 has a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a rod-shaped portion 13724. A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13724 side. The bearing 13726 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578. A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. Bearing 13728 rotatably supports boss 13674.

The photosensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and in this embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 99 described later). ), the detection piece 13666 is attached so that it can be detected.

[Operation explanation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 99 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. FIG. 100 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 101 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to their operating limit positions.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is located at the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is located at the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located at the lower right corner of the display area. At the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550, so that they are difficult to see when viewed from the front.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 99), the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 13542 rotates clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 99 to 101). When the first gear 1361 rotates, the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 99 to 101) when viewed from the front centering around the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662), the boss 13664 (see FIG. 97) rotates around the hollow shaft 13662. It orbits counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the boss 13664 rotates around the hollow shaft 13662 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 99 to 101) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355, when the bearing 13706 moves to the left in front view, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352. It rotates clockwise when viewed from the front with the pivot shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) as the center of rotation. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise in front view with the support shaft 13524 as the rotation center, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

Furthermore, when the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the spindle 13527 (hollow shaft 13662), the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise when seen from the front about the spindle 13528 (hollow shaft 13672). rotate around. When the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the support shaft 13528, the boss 13674 (see FIG. 97) rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the hollow shaft 13672. When the boss 13672 rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 when viewed from the front, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves to the right (leftward in FIGS. 99 to 101) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the fourth movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves to the right in front view, the support shaft 13578 is attached to the fixed plate 1352. It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the formed support shaft 13529 (bearing 13576) as the center of rotation. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 can be operated synchronously by rotation of one motor 1354.

Further, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. In other words, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to be sandwiched between each other from the outside of the field of vision to the inside when viewed from the front.

Note that when the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 return to their original positions due to a movement opposite to the above-mentioned movement. Operate.

By the way, when the third movable body 1355 that has moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fixed plate 1352 interfere, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a possibility that you may not be able to return. Therefore, in this embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1352, thereby allowing the third movable body 1355 to return smoothly to the original position. ing. Similarly, regarding the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13577 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1352, so that the fourth movable body 13570 can be smoothly moved to the origin position. It is believed that a recovery is possible.

[Aspect when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operating limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, the manner in which the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operating limit position will be described. FIG. 102 is a back unit showing a state when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 operate to the operating limit position. 176 is an example of a front view. FIG. 103 shows a case where the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operating limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect. FIG. 104 shows a case where the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operating limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect. However, in FIGS. 102 to 104, for convenience of explanation, illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker ball gutter 1600 is omitted.

Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355, and fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabet). ) is attached.

As shown in FIG. 102, when the first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355, and fourth movable body 1357 operate to their operating limit positions, the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) In the front, one design (for example, a phrase) is formed by characters attached to each movable body 1330, 1340, 1355, and 1357.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate to the operating limit position and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5), one design (for example, a phrase) is formed by characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 104, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to the operating limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5), one design (for example, a phrase) is formed by characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

In this way, the drive of the motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 89) and the motor 1354 (for example, see FIG. 98) is controlled by the accessory control circuit 207 (both see FIG. 9) included in the sub CPU 201 during the jackpot determination process. By performing control according to the results of 1320
(First movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340) can form one design (hereinafter referred to as "second design") with some (two) characters, or lower corner accessory 1350 (second design) It becomes possible to form one design (hereinafter referred to as "third design") with some (two) characters that the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 have. Thereby, it is possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effects caused by the operation of the accessories, using only a limited number of accessories.

In addition, the design formed by two or more of the first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355, and fourth movable body 1357 includes information related to the progress of the game (for example, jackpot It is also possible to have the player recognize this information as information suggesting execution of a specific reach with high expectations. For example, when a specific reach effect that makes the player expect a jackpot is executed as a result of a jackpot determination by winning a starting prize in the first starting opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440, the specific reach effect is executed. A phrase indicating (or related to) the reach effect of two or more movable bodies (first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355, and fourth movable body 1355) in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It may also be represented by a design (for example, an idiom) that can be recognized when two or more of the movable bodies 1357 are arranged close to each other.

In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to be sandwiched between each other from the upper outer side of the field of view to the lower inner side when viewed from the front.

Further, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to be sandwiched between each other from the upper outer side of the field of view to the lower inner side when viewed from the front.

Here, letters are written on the front surfaces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively. The individual characters placed on each of the numbers 1357 alone have no meaning, and do not indicate information related to the progress of the game to the player.

In addition, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all arranged in positions that are difficult to see at the origin position, and are respectively located at the upper left when viewed from the front and from the front. The upper right side when viewed from the front, the lower left side when viewed from the front, and the lower right side when viewed from the front are located at locations separated from each other. Therefore, two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are directed inward from outside the player's field of vision when viewed from the front. During the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, a phrase) formed by the characters attached to two or more movable bodies that are activated, and the liquid crystal display It can only be recognized when it is stopped in close proximity in front of the display area of the device 16.

In this way, two or more movable bodies among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move inward from outside the field of view when viewed from the front. By doing so, the player's gaze can be moved from the back (the effect image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the front (the characters on the movable body extending forward of the liquid crystal display device 16). As a result, while conventionally, information related to the progress of a game, for example, has been shown to the player by, for example, an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, according to the present embodiment, information related to the progress of the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that have advanced to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 can be It becomes possible to show the player information related to the progress of the game using only the movable body. Thereby, it is possible to not only change the rhythm of the performance but also to perform a performance that has an impact on the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In this embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to their operating limit positions, the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) At the front, it is preferable that one design is formed by the characters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357, but this is not necessarily the case. There is no problem even if one design is formed only by characters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, one design can be created by only the characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355. This corresponds to a case in which the second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (letters may not be attached) do not constitute a design and exist simply as separate movable bodies.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is labeled with one letter, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Two or more characters may be attached to all movable bodies or some movable bodies.

In addition, in this embodiment, although letters are attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, the text is not necessarily limited to this. Any material may be used as long as it forms a design or something meaningful (for example, something that evokes a specific idea) in front of the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are located in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5), Although there is a gap between the movable body and other movable bodies, the movable body is not limited to this, and all or some of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

Further, in this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 89), and the third Although the movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate in synchronization, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body Each body 1357 may be configured to operate independently.

[Configuration of side accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. FIG. 105 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode (at the origin position). FIG. 106 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. FIG. 107 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 108 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed diagonally from the rear left (left in front view) from above. Note that in FIG. 106, various members such as the link member 1420 are shown transparently through the attachment plate 1410 so that they can be easily seen, but they are actually opaque members.

The side accessory 1400 includes a mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, a movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and a movable decorative body 1450 for operating the movable decorative body 1450. The position of the side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, the movable piece 1430 and L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable decoration 1450, and the movable decoration 1450 and a photosensor 1464 for checking.

The attachment plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the right side of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 for pivotally supporting a link member 1420 is formed at the upper part of the front side of the mounting plate 1410. A movable decoration support shaft 1414 for pivotally supporting the movable decoration 1450 is formed at the lower part of the mounting plate 1410.

The movable decoration body 1450 includes a vertically long handle-shaped main body portion 1452 decorated on the front surface, and an independent movable body configured to be able to operate together with the main body portion 1452 and independently to the main body portion 1452. 1454. The main body portion 1452 of the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative bearing 1458 at the lower part of the main body portion 1452, which pivotally supports the movable decorative body support shaft 1414. The movable decoration body 1450 is pivotally supported by the movable decoration support shaft 1414 in a movable decoration bearing 1458, and is configured to be rotatable about the movable decoration support shaft 1414 (movable decoration bearing 1458) as a rotation center. The movable decorative body 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Furthermore, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 that projects rearward on the right side in front view.

The side accessory motor 1440 is attached and fixed to the attachment plate 1410 via a motor attachment member 1444. Further, the side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is reduced and power is output from the motor output shaft 1442.

The movable piece 1430 has a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by pivotally supporting the motor output shaft 1442, and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420. When the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, the movable piece 1430 rotates around the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442).

The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that pivotally supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 1410, a first link 1421 that is long in the horizontal direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and is long in the downward direction. and has. The link member 1420 is rotatable about a link support shaft 1412 that is pivotally supported by a link bearing 1422. The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece elongated hole 1424 to which a link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable piece elongated hole 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422. The second link 1425 is formed with a movable decoration elongated hole 1426 to which the movable decoration boss 1455 of the movable decoration body 1450 is slidably connected. The movable decorative boss 1455 is slidable along the direction of the elongated hole 1426 for movable decorative body when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422.

The photosensor 1464 is fixedly attached to the lower part of the mounting plate 1410 via the photosensor mounting member 1460. Photo sensor 1464 detects the position of movable decorative body 1450. As described above, in this embodiment, the movable decorative body 1450 has the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end, and the photosensor 1464 detects the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 when the movable decoration body 1450 is at the origin position. Piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photosensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decorative body 1450 is at the original position.

[Operation explanation of side accessory 1400]
Next, the operation of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105, 106, and 109 to 113. FIG. 109 is an example of a front view showing the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 110 is an example of a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 111 is an example of a front view showing the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced the most forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 112 is an example of a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 113 is a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decoration body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. This is an example. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position when the movable decoration body 1450 is advanced the most forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be referred to as the "most advanced position."

The degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decoration body 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 106), and the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decoration body 1450 is at the most advanced position is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 106). The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 112). In this embodiment, the reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that the motor output shaft 1442 moves from approximately 1 o'clock to approximately 4:30 when the side accessory motor 1440 rotates once (the movable decorative body 1450 (moves from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the reduction ratio is not limited to this.

In the most advanced position shown in FIG. 112, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426. This is because the direction of rotation around the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative body 1450) and the longitudinal direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 are different. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is restricted by the side surface (longitudinal surface) of the movable decorative boss 1455.

When the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position (the position where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock when viewed from the rear), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. (Counterclockwise in FIGS. 105, 109, and 111, and clockwise in FIGS. 106, 110, 112, and 113), the movable piece 1430 rotates around the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432). Rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the gear bearing 1432 as the rotation center, the link member boss 1434 slides within the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 109, counterclockwise in FIG. 110) when viewed from the front about the rotation center (link support shaft 1412) is applied. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the link bearing 1422, a force is generated to push the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 via the movable decorative boss 1455. act. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 becomes approximately 4:30 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 112) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the most advanced position.

When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 112), the side accessory motor 1440 further rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIGS. 105 and 109). 111 and clockwise in FIGS. 106, 110, 112, and 113), the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the rotation center. Rotate to. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the gear bearing 1432 as the rotation center, the link member boss 1434 slides within the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 109, counterclockwise in FIG. 110) when viewed from the front about the rotation center (link support shaft 1412) is applied. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front about the link bearing 1422, a force is applied to the movable decorative body 1450 via the movable decorative boss 1455 to return the movable decorative body 1450 to its original position. do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 becomes approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 106) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decoration body 1450 stops at the original position.

In this way, by simply rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the same direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front in this embodiment) without rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the normal or reverse direction, the movable decorative object can be rotated. 1450 can be moved back and forth between the origin position and the most advanced position. Note that when the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 106) to approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 112), movable decoration body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 to approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the original position. In other words, movement of the movable decoration body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be achieved by simply moving the link member 1420 from approximately 1 o'clock in rear view to approximately 4:30 in rear view; Movement of the movable decorative body 1450 to the position requires the link member 1420 to move from approximately 4:30 to 1:00 in rear view.

Therefore, not only when the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also as long as the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440 does not vary greatly, from the origin position to the most advanced position. The movable decorative body 1450 moves relatively quickly, and the movable decorative body 1450 moves relatively slowly from the most advanced position to the origin position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position (movable body performance) is a hit determination performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. Although this is done based on the results, such movement of the movable decorative body 1450 is required to be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require rapid movement compared to the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, although it is possible to reciprocate the movable decorative body 1450 between the origin position and the most advanced position by simply rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (the same direction), the movable decorative body The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decorative body 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position is the rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decorative body 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making the angle smaller than the angle, the movement of the movable decoration body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is smaller than the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotational speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It becomes possible to move quickly.

Note that when the movable decoration body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position, the independently movable body 1454 moves together with the movable decoration body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position. 1454 operates in conjunction with the main body portion 1452, it is possible to make the motion performance of the side accessory 1400 more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is waiting at the origin position, the most advanced position, or between the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independently movable body 1454 is attached to the main body part 1452. It may be activated.

[Configuration of second middle panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. 114 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed from diagonally above and to the front right. FIG. 115 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed diagonally from above and to the rear left (left in front view). FIG. 116 is (A) an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and (B) an example of a sectional view taken along the line CC shown in (A).

The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel mounting case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are attached, an LED board 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, and an inner It includes a lens 1583, a decorative sheet 1584, a half mirror 1585, a window frame 1586 having the opening window 1552 described above, and a panel cover 1590.

The panel attachment case 1556 is a case-like member that is fixedly attached to the lower right portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above.

The LED board 1560 is a plate-like member in which an annular protrusion 1561 having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 described above is formed and a flat area 1563 is formed. On the LED board 1560, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) LEDs 1562 are arranged in an annular manner inside the annular projection 1561 in the radial direction, and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in the plane area 1563. The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light radially outward. The LED 1564 is provided so as to emit light forward when viewed from the front.

The light guide lens 1570 is provided to accommodate the LED board 1560 between the panel mounting case 1556 and the light guide lens 1570 . The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing the light emitted forward from the LED 1564 arranged on the LED board 1560 and emitting the light in a planar shape. Further, a hole having a shape corresponding to the aperture window 1552 is formed in the light guide lens 1570.

The black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of the panel cover 1590. The black sheet 1580 has a black front side and a watermark such as letters on the back side. The watermark cannot be seen from the front under normal conditions (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but when a predetermined condition is met and the LEDs 1562 and 1564 emit light, it appears on the panel cover 1590 in a floating manner. The black sheet 1580 has a hole formed therein in a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The half mirror 1585, the decorative sheet 1584, and the inner lens 1583 are stacked in this order from the front and are arranged so as to face the opening window 1552. At this time, the inner lens 1583 is arranged such that the LED 1562 fits inside in the radial direction (located outside in the radial direction of the LED 1562).

The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 116(B)) that protrudes toward the back side when viewed from the front along the outer periphery. A portion of the light emitted radially outward from the LED 1562 is absorbed by the inner lens 1583, and the unabsorbed light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583. Further, the inner lens 1583 is partitioned into five fan-shaped areas 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 (see FIG. 115). Furthermore, in each of these five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839, a plurality of notches are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. In addition, since the boundaries of the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 are inclined so that the height decreases from the periphery toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 is It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the center of the inner lens 1583 in the radial direction. When light enters the inner lens 1583, the intensity of the light is stronger at the outer circumference than at the center in the radial direction, but by concentrating the incident light toward the center in the radial direction, the surface of the inner lens 1583 is It becomes possible to emit surface light more uniformly.

The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmissive sheet with a picture of a character or the like drawn on the front surface. The character drawn on the decorative sheet 1584 cannot be seen from the front due to the half mirror 1585 under normal conditions (when the LED 1562 is not emitting light), but when a predetermined condition is met and the LED 1562 emits light, the character drawn on the decorative sheet 1584 is visible in the area inside the opening window 1552. It appears as if it is floating. In this way, when the LED 1562 emits light, a character appears in the area within the window frame 1552, so in this specification, the LED 1562 is also referred to as a character lamp.

The window frame 1586 is gloss plated and configured to reflect light. Further, the above-mentioned opening window 1552 is formed in the window frame 1586, and the outer periphery thereof is decorated to maintain a beautiful appearance.

The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-like member, and as described above, the black sheet 1580 is attached to the back side. Furthermore, the panel cover 1590 is formed with a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The light emitted from the LED 1562 is emitted radially outward. A portion of the light enters the flange 15832 (see FIG. 116) of the inner lens 1583, a portion of the incident light is absorbed within the inner lens 1583, and the other light passes through the inner lens 1583 and becomes radial. The light is emitted towards the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted radially outward is reflected on the radially inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 116) of the outer peripheral edge of the window frame 1586. The light reflected on the radially inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window frame 1586 changes its traveling direction to the radially inward direction and enters the inner lens 1583. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside, and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. Furthermore, since light, including some of the above-mentioned light, enters the inner lens 1583 from the outer periphery of the inner lens 1583, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583, and the light can be uniformly distributed over the surface. It becomes possible to emit light.

Below, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117 to 135.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 117 shows an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power interruption detection signal is ON (step S12). For example, the power interruption detection signal turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the power outage detection signal is ON, the main CPU 101 determines that the power outage detection state is present, and repeats the process of S12 until the power outage detection signal turns OFF. If the power outage detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 determines that the power outage detection state is present, and proceeds to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 becomes able to accept a signal (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built into the CPU (step S15).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing clearing of the backup contents of the main RAM 103 provided in the main CPU 101 that constitutes the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) that constitutes the payout/fire control circuit 300. . If the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 101 moves to step S23. If the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power outage detection flag is set on. The power outage detection flag is a flag indicating that power outage processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of a power outage. If the power outage detection flag is set on, the main CPU 101 moves to step S18. If the power outage detection flag is set to OFF, the main CPU 101 moves to step S23.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 103 using, for example, a checksum.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 101 moves to step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 101 moves to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 initializes a work area that requires an initial value at the time of recovery from power outage.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs notification settings regarding the high probability gaming state (variable probability gaming state) at the time of power outage recovery (step S21).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a power recovery command (power recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200 (step S22). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 initializes a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub control circuit 200 (step S25).

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows an example of system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. System timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the values of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S31).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process to update various random numbers (step S32).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing to update the values of various timers (step S34).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing to output (send) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S35).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information related to the game that is processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/fire control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer. .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the saved values of each register (step S37). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 119 shows an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a starting opening winning detection process (step S41). The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S42). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning holes 53, 54, and 55 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the grand prize opening passage detection process, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out and the like is set, for example, at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 540.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is acquired in response to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 120 shows an example of the starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472 (step S51). When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52. If the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S59.

In step S52, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the first starting opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening (the number of pending first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the number of pending items is less than four, the main CPU 101 moves to step S54. If the number of pending items is 4, the main CPU 101 moves to step S59.

In step S54, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random value for determining a hit and a random symbol, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 103 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table (first starting opening), symbol determination table (first starting opening), and jackpot type determination table are referred to based on the random number value for hit determination and the random symbol number. , determines a symbol designation command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, judgment value data, gaming state, and table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening (step S58). The command to increase the number of pending winnings for the first starting opening is a command that indicates that the number of pending winnings for the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with the command that indicates the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S57. is sent.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S59). When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60. When the second starting port switch 441 does not detect a game ball, the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection process.

In step S60, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening (the number of pending second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the number of pending items is less than four, the main CPU 101 moves to step S62. When the number of pending prizes is four, the main CPU 101 ends the starting opening win detection process.

In step S62, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for hit determination and a random symbol number value, and performs a process of storing these random numbers in the main RAM 103 (step S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process also uses a hit random number determination table (second starting opening) and a symbol determination table (second (starting opening), refers to the jackpot type determination table, and determines a symbol designation command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the second special symbol that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S65). In this variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the second special symbol is determined by referring to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, judgment value data, gaming state, and table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening (step S66). The command for increasing the number of pending winnings in the second starting opening is a command that indicates that the number of pending winnings in the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with the command that indicates the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S65. is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination process]
FIG. 121 shows an example of a variation pattern determination process by the main CPU 101. The fluctuation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the starting opening winning detection process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting a variation pattern type by referring to a game state transition table and a variation pattern selection table based on a table pattern, a random number value for hit determination, and a symbol random number value, which will be described later. (Step S71).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting first half and second half variation patterns from among the selected variation pattern types based on predetermined lottery probabilities (step S72). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern determination process.

In addition, since the fluctuation pattern is stored in association with the variable display time of the identification symbol, the fluctuation pattern determined in the above fluctuation pattern determination process is essentially information that can represent the fluctuation time. becomes.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 122 shows an example of main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting processing (step S81), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs processes such as the power-on process described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs symbol display section control processing (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, A process is performed in which control signals for driving the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71 are stored in the main RAM 103. As a result, the main CPU 101 sends a control signal to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) and normal symbol display section 71, The symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74), and the normal symbol display section 71 perform variable display and stop display of special symbols and normal symbols based on the received control signals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information data generation processing (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a gaming state command regarding gaming information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout/fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores it in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs storage/gaming state data generation processing (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage/gaming status data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/gaming status data in the main RAM 103. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S82.

[Special pattern control processing]
FIG. 123 shows an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process mentioned above. Note that the numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area within the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether to execute each process of steps S92 to S100, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game and enables execution of any one of steps S92 to S100. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S92 to S100. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, each process is not executed, and processes related to other subroutines are executed. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 118) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the pending number of variable displays of special symbols when the control status flag is a value indicating special symbol memory check processing ("00"), and if the pending number is not "0" (If there is a reserved ball), the winning determination result, the special symbol determination result, the special symbol variation pattern determination result, etc. obtained in the starting opening winning detection process are acquired. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), which will be described later, and uses the variable pattern acquired in the current process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process has elapsed, the special symbol variable display time management process to be described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is "0" (when there are no balls on hold), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process to display a demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 124.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variable display time management processing (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating special symbol variable display time management processing, and when the variable display time of the special symbol has elapsed, A value ("02") indicating symbol display time management processing (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process to be described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines if the control status flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed. It is determined whether the result is a “big hit” or a “small hit”. Then, when the result of the hit determination is a "big hit" or a "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating jackpot start interval management processing (step S95) to be described later in the control state flag. , set the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process to be described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not a "big hit" or a "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S100), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs jackpot start interval management processing (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control status flag is a value ("03") indicating jackpot start interval management processing and if the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, In order to open the winning hole 540, variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the later-described big winning hole opening process (step S96) to the control state flag, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the big winning hole 540 (for example, 30 seconds) to the grand prize opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, the later-described big winning hole opening process is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big winning hole opening process (step S96). In this process, first, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that when the control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the process of opening the big winning opening, the winning opening counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the grand winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). If one of the conditions is met, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big prize opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating a residual ball monitoring process in the big winning opening (step S97) to the control state flag, and sets the waiting time timer to the monitoring time of remaining balls in the big winning opening. do. That is, by this process, after the big winning hole remaining ball monitoring time set in step S97 has elapsed, the later-described big winning hole remaining ball monitoring process is set to be executed. In addition, immediately before the end of this big winning hole opening process, an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a residual ball monitoring process in the big winning hole (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the number of times the grand prize opening counter is set when the control status flag is a value ("05") indicating the process of monitoring remaining balls in the grand prize opening and the remaining ball monitoring time in the grand prize opening has elapsed. It is determined whether the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum value of the number of openings of the big prize opening (this is the final round) is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not met, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the grand prize opening re-opening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the inter-round interval in a waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before the re-opening of the big winning hole, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S97 that the above conditions are met, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("07") indicating jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (jackpot end interval time) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described below is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the grand prize opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of grand prize openings, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before the grand prize opening is re-opened (step S98). In this process, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning hole when the control status flag is a value ("06") indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning hole is re-opened, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so that the value of the number of times counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the big winning hole opening process to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-described big winning hole opening process (step S96) is set to be executed again. In addition, just before the end of the waiting time management process before the grand prize opening is re-opened, a grand prize opening display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of openings of the big winning opening counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of openings of the winning opening, the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot end interval process (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("07") indicating jackpot end interval processing, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("07") indicating special symbol game end processing. 08'') is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, a setting is made such that the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is executed after the process of step S99. In addition, when the above-mentioned hit selection symbol command is any one of "z5", "z6", "z7", "z10", and "z11", the main CPU 101 shifts the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state. When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is any of "z0", "z1", "z2", "z3", "z4" and "z9", the gaming state is changed. Control is performed to bring the game into a non-probability variable gaming state. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (when the random number value for jackpot determination is "small hit determination value data"), the main CPU 101 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game ending process when the jackpot game state or the small win game state ends, or when a "lose" is won (step S100). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the memory so that when the control state flag has a value ("08") indicating special symbol game end processing, the data indicating the number of pending symbols (starting memory information) is decreased by "1". do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to variably display the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing to the control state flag. That is, by this process, the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S92) is set to be executed after the process of step S100. When this special symbol game ending process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither a jackpot gaming state nor a small winning gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is "loss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00", "01", "02" and "08" in that order. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and special symbol game end process (step S100). ) are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

In addition, when the gaming state is neither a jackpot gaming state nor a small winning gaming state, and the result of the winning determination is "jackpot" or "small winning," the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00" or "01." , "02", and "03" in this order. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and jackpot start interval management process (step S95). ) are executed in this order at a predetermined timing to control the transition to the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described big winning hole opening process (step S96), remaining ball monitoring process in the big winning hole (step S57), and waiting time management process before the big winning hole is re-opened (step S98) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing to execute a jackpot game or a small win game.

Note that when the termination condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied during the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described big winning hole opening process (step S96), remaining ball monitoring process in the big winning hole (step S97), jackpot end interval process (step S99), and special symbol game ending process (step S100). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As mentioned above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched depending on the status. In addition, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 129 described later) in step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 122 also branches the processing flow depending on the status, similar to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed using a call instruction when processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in this embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced compared to the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 124 shows an example of special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the read control state flag is a value ("00") indicating special symbol storage check processing (step S112). If it is determined that the control state flag is not "00", the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 101 moves to step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pending number (second starting memory number) of second starting opening winnings (variable display of second special symbols) is "0". If it is determined that the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening is not "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S114. If it is determined that the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S119.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second starting memory number corresponding to the pending number of second starting opening winnings. In this embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as start memory information. The second special symbol starting memory area (1) to the second special symbol starting memory area (4) are stored in the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the four times held (holding ball). data (information) is stored as starting storage information. Note that the starting memory information in each second special symbol starting memory area includes, for example, data indicating a random number value for determining a hit, a random number number for symbols, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. obtained at the time of winning in the second starting hole 440. It will be done.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol memory transfer processing based on the second starting opening winning prize (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating special symbol variable display time management processing. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol presentation start command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot/small hit determination process (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the random number value for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting slot and previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) or the second special symbol starting storage area (0). Based on this, the determination value data is obtained by referring to the hit determination table (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the type of winning starting opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the winning is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" based on the acquired determination value data (win determination).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer (step S118). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of pending first starting opening winnings (variable display of the first special symbol) (second starting memory number) is "0". If it is determined that the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening is not "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S120. If it is determined that the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S122.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first starting memory number corresponding to the pending number of winnings from the first starting opening. In this embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed or on hold. In the first special symbol starting storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being displayed is stored as starting memory information. The first special symbol starting memory area (1) to the first special symbol starting memory area (4) are stored in the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol for the four times held (holding ball). data (information) is stored as starting storage information. Note that the starting memory information in each first special symbol starting storage area includes, for example, data indicating the random number value for winning determination, the random number number of symbols, the determined fluctuation pattern, etc. obtained at the time of winning the first starting port 5442. It will be done.

Next, special symbol memory transfer processing is performed based on the first starting opening winning (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process to display a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 125 shows an example of special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing, the main CPU 101 moves to the processing of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the waiting time after the variable display is confirmed (variable display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has expired. If it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 moves to step S142. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 moves to step S134.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "small win". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "small win", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S137. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "small win", that is, if the special symbol game is a "miss", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs time saving count subtraction processing. This time saving number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating special symbol game end processing (step S136). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set a small hit flag indicating a small hit. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S138.

In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S140). As a result, a jackpot start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 13) and sets the upper limit value for the number of rounds (upper limit value for the number of times the jackpot opening is opened) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command) in the main RAM 103. Then, a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). Note that the round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining round number in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S142, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. After finishing this process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S143.

In step S143, the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the time saving number counter, the time saving flag, and the probability change flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S138.

[Time saving number subtraction process]
FIG. 126 shows an example of the time saving frequency subtraction process performed by the main CPU 101. The time saving number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S151). The time saving number counter is a subtraction function that counts until the set time saving number (in this embodiment, it is determined to be one of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100) becomes 0. It is a counter. If the value of the time saving number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 moves to step S154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S153). If the value of the time saving number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 moves to step S154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set the time saving flag to "0". When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 127 shows an example of the jackpot end interval process by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process mentioned above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval process (step S161). If it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (step S161: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has expired. If it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of openings of the big winning opening. The big winning opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot is displayed by an LED light emitting pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number allocation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not to periodically open and close the grand prize opening 540 a predetermined number of times even during one round. This is the flag. If the big prize opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating special symbol game end processing (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (step S166). If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 moves to step S167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 moves to step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set a jackpot flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot (step S168). If it is a probability variable jackpot, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S169. If it is not a probability variable jackpot, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set the probability change flag to "1".

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the time saving flag to "1" (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions (in this embodiment, 100 times as an example) in the time reduction number counter (step S172).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the value of the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving frequency subtraction process (step S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 128 shows an example of a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The fluctuation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). If the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 moves to step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 101 moves to step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the probability variation flag is "1" (step S183). If the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S184. If the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 129 shows an example of normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical values ("00" to "04") written in parentheses to the left of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 129 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is is stored in a predetermined storage area within. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 129, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196, which will be described later, based on the read value of the normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the gaming state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 118) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the pending number of variable displays of normal symbols when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating normal symbol memory check processing ("00"), and the pending number is "0". If not, processing such as hit determination is performed. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193), which will be described later, and sets the variable time determined in the current process to Set the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the determined normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol variable display time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, after the set post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that if the normal symbol control status flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, the winning occurs. It is determined whether the result of the determination is a "win" or not. Then, if the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory release setting process, and sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ( "03"). That is, through this process, the normal electric accessory opening process described below is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not a "win", the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("04") indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game ending process described below is set to be executed.

Next, if the result of the hit determination is determined to be a "win" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory release process (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the normal electric accessory 460 is being released when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process. It is determined whether one of the conditions and the condition that the upper limit opening time of the normal electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to bring the blade member 4620 (see FIG. 5, for example) of the normal electric accessory 460 into the closed state. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196), which will be described later. That is, through this process, the normal symbol game ending process described below is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101 causes the data indicating the pending number of variable display of normal symbols to be decreased by 1 when the normal symbol control state flag has a value ("04") indicating normal symbol game end processing. Update the memory. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol memory check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is finished, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes sub control circuit main processing. This sub-control circuit main processing will be explained using FIG. 130. Note that this sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 130, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). A reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set for the watchdog timer when it is started, and a power-off process is executed when a service pulse is not written (at time-out).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes production mode determination processing (step S205). The production mode determination processing includes scenario presetting processing, production determination processing (secret A stage 2002), pre-read production selection processing (high precision stage 2004), background change control processing (high precision stage 2004), and possible number of consecutive background changes, which will be described later. Judgment processing (high precision stage 2004), variation scenario determination processing (high precision stage 2004), chance up control processing (high precision stage 2004), pending change determination processing (high precision stage 2004), character lamp effect control processing, full screen It is composed of subroutines such as production control processing. These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 136 to 167.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command transmission processing (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes drawing control processing (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the audio control circuit 205 executes audio control processing (step S208). In this process, the audio control circuit 205 performs audio control to cause the speaker 24 to output audio based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes lamp control processing (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control to turn on or blink the lamp 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes accessory control processing (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (performance designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such sub-control circuit main processing, after the initialization processing of step S201 is completed, each processing of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 131 shows an example of command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 after receiving it from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received, and that there are no errors or omissions in the data.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects a production pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In addition, in the sub-lottery process, all matters related to the performance including the performance pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of performance (presence or absence of dialogue preview, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) may be selected as the performance pattern. The production contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the production may be selected as production information in another process that is separately formed into a subroutine. In this embodiment, a performance pattern indicating the type of performance is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the performance content to be executed based on the performance pattern is selected as performance information in the performance mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command sending process]
FIG. 132 shows an example of command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (performance designation information) based on the performance information obtained in the performance mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a corresponding direct table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and effect information stored in the direct buffer. This directory table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes message transmission processing (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to a predetermined control circuit 204 to 207. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message sending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 135.

[Message setting processing]
FIG. 133 shows an example of message setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command sending process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting whether or not there is system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets stage information and each performance information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, messages indicating destination devices (control circuits 204 to 207), presence or absence of system operation, stage information, each performance information, and preview pattern are stored in the direct buffer. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Directory table registration process]
FIG. 134 shows an example of the directory table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the performance information determined in the performance mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a slave table to be used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S274). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration process.

[Message sending process]
FIG. 135 shows an example of message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends the message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. (step S281).

Next, after the message transmission is completed, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S282). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message sending process.

[Production mode determination processing by sub CPU 201]
Next, details of the performance mode determination process (step S205) of the sub CPU 201 will be explained. The production mode is formed with characteristics for each of the plurality of production stages.

[Production stage]
First, with reference to FIG. 136, state transitions of a plurality of production stages will be described. FIG. 136 is a block diagram showing an example of state transitions of a plurality of game state stages.

In the normal stage 2000, when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440, the winning probability of the winning determination (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination") performed as a process of the main CPU 101 is relatively high. This is a low probability state with no electric support (that is, a normal gaming state). If the production state is the normal stage 2000, the player can understand that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability state).

The high probability stage 2004 is a high probability gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot determination is relatively high, and is a state in which electric support is provided. If the production state is the high probability stage 2004, the player can understand that the gaming state is the high probability gaming state.

Concealment A stage 2002 and concealment B stage 2006 are both high-probability gaming states in which the probability of winning the jackpot determination is relatively high and there is electric support, or the probability of winning the jackpot determination is relatively low. This is a low probability state and a state with electric support. In the concealment A stage 2002 and the concealment B stage 2006, the player cannot or cannot determine whether the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state even by looking at the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Have difficulty. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, whether the secret A stage 2002 is in a high probability gaming state or a low probability state is disclosed depending on the final result of the battle performance described later. . In addition, since the character subtraction performance that will be described later during the battle performance is an intermediate performance towards the final result of the battle performance, it depends on whether it is a subtraction performance for an ally character or an enemy character. It can make the players happy and sad at once.

When an 8R jackpot (a jackpot in which the jackpot 540 opens and closes for 8 rounds) is drawn in the normal stage 2000 (low probability gaming state, no time saving), after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state stage is the secret A stage 2002 (high probability playing state). There is a specified number of electric support in the probability game state, or there is a specified number of electric support in the low probability game state). Note that "with electric support" is a state in which a time-saving game is executed, and "without electric support" is a state in which a time-saving game is not executed.

In the secret A stage 2002, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, or if a prescribed number of time-saving games are played in a high probability gaming state, the performance stage transitions to a high certainty stage 2004. On the other hand, in the secret A stage 2002, when a prescribed number of time-saving games are played in the low probability game state, a transition is made to the normal stage 2000. In the normal stage 2000, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot or a 15R jackpot, the production stage transitions to a high certainty stage 2004.

In the high certainty stage 2004, if the result of the jackpot determination is an 8R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the secret A stage 2002. In the secret A stage 2002, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the secret B stage 2006. In the secret B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is an 8R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the secret A stage 2002. In the secret B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 15R jackpot, the production stage transitions to a high certainty stage 2004. In the high certainty stage 2004, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the secret B stage 2006. In the secret B stage 2006, when the predetermined number of time savings is completed, the production stage transitions to the normal stage 2000.

In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot mentioned above is an example. In the above explanation, when the result of the jackpot determination is an 8R jackpot, the game state is shifted to the secret A stage 2002, but it is not limited to this, and when the result is a 5R jackpot or a 15R jackpot. , the sub CPU 201 may perform a promotion effect during the jackpot game, and may make the transition to the high certainty stage 2004 after the jackpot ends.

For example, the concealment A stage 2002 may have a higher expectation of a high probability gaming state than the concealment B stage 2006. Each of these hidden stages implements a unique presentation form. For example, in the secret A stage 2002, a battle presentation is performed in which a plurality of characters are divided into enemy and ally and compete in a knockout battle.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the secret A stage 2002. In FIG. 137, the ally character CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the enemy character CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen. In addition, the type of ally character currently fighting and the number of ally characters (remaining number) are displayed at the top left of the screen, and the type and number of enemy characters currently fighting are displayed at the top right side of the screen. (remaining number of people) will be displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 137, other information such as variable display information of identification symbols and information on the number of stored starting memories may be displayed as appropriate.

The above battle performance is a performance that serves as an indicator of whether there is a high possibility of being in a high probability game state or a low probability game state in the secret A stage 2002, and if certain requirements are met. It is determined whether the game state is a high probability game state or a low probability game state. For example, when the enemy group is wiped out, a high probability game state is established, and when the friendly group is wiped out, a low probability game state is determined. Therefore, the performance of the process until either enemy or friend group is annihilated becomes an index performance indicating which of the high probability game state and the low probability game state is more likely. For example, when a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of people in the enemy group is reduced, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is a high possibility of a high probability game state, and a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of people in the ally group is reduced. This may give the player the impression that the probability of being in a high probability state is low (the possibility of being in a low probability gaming state is high). In the Hidden A Stage 2002, the rough scenario of such a battle performance is decided in advance before the Hidden A Stage 2002 starts, and in the Hidden A Stage 2002, the predetermined scenario is changed, corrected, etc. The performance continues. The scenario production selection process (secret A stage 2002) will be explained below.

Further, for example, in the secret B stage 2006, a battle effect is executed in which a main character among friendly characters fights one-on-one with an enemy character. When the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, a performance in which the main character wins in the battle performance is executed. In the battle performance in the secret B stage 2006, for example, (a) a performance zone where the main character can always defeat the enemy character if he attacks, and (b) which one of the main character and the enemy character makes a pre-emptive attack. There are two production zones: (c) a production zone where the enemy character makes a pre-emptive attack; In addition, in this secret B stage 2006, whether or not it is a high probability game state is notified by the operation of the movable decorative body 1040 of the upper front accessory 1000. For example, in the final variable display (the final variable display in the time-saving gaming state (special symbol game) or the final variable display in which whether or not it is a high probability gaming state is kept secret (special symbol game)), the upper front If the movable decoration 1040 of the object 1000 falls (moves) toward the operating limit position, the game is in a high probability game state, and if the movable decoration 1040 does not fall, it is in the low probability game state. However, in the final variable display, a fall precursor effect may be performed to make the user expect the movable decorative object 1040 to fall. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, in addition to the falling of the movable decorative body 1040, all of the first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355, and fourth movable body 1357 are activated. By operating to the limit position (for example, see FIG. 102), it is notified that the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the secret B stage 2006, transitions are made between each of the above-mentioned production zones A) to C) at any time depending on the number of executions of the variable display (special symbol game). For example, after the jackpot game state ends, if the special symbol game is executed 1 to 10 times, it will stay in the effect zone (a) above, and if it is 11 to 90 times, it will stay in the effect zone (b) above. However, from the 91st to the 99th time, the player stays in the effect zone c) above, and in the 100th special symbol game, an effect indicating that it is the final game in the secret B stage 2006 is performed. It goes without saying that the performance on the secret B stage 2006 is not limited to the above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned indicator performance is one that can indicate which of the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state is more likely in the secret A stage 2002, but is not limited to this. It can also be used for other performances that show the degree of sophistication. For example, the above index performance can be adopted for the following performance, but the following performance is merely an example, and it goes without saying that it can be adopted for other performances.・When the high probability gaming state is disclosed but the duration of the high probability gaming state is kept secret, a production that shows the length of the duration (expectation that the duration is long) performance that shows the degree).・When the duration of the time-saving gaming state is disclosed but the duration of the time-saving gaming state is kept secret, an effect indicating the length of the duration (indicating the degree of expectation that the duration will be long) direction). - A performance in which a performance section is set for one or more starting memories, and a performance indicating the degree of expectation that a reach variation performance or a jackpot is included in the starting memories included in the performance section.

Furthermore, the degree of expectation (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (i.e., an advantageous state) such as a jackpot or a high probability gaming state for each preview performance is the expectation level (reliability) of a "jackpot" or a "high probability gaming state" when each preview performance is executed. ”, the probability that each preview performance will be executed and the probability will be “jackpot” or “high probability gaming state”, and the probability that each preview performance will be executed and the probability will be “miss” or “low probability gaming state”, etc. This is the number divided by the sum of the probability of the internal state (that is, the unfavorable state). However, the "expectation level" can include cases where the expectation level is 100% and cases where the expectation level is 0%, so strictly speaking, there are cases where the above division does not hold (for example, when the performance is executed It is not appropriate to divide 1 by 0, as it may include cases in which the game status or winning/losing is definitely notified when the expectation level is 100%, 0%, or presence/absence. ).

[Scenario production selection process (Secret A stage)]
The sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the character who lost in the battle between enemy and ally from the number of participating characters, and erases the defeated character from the screen. The performance form related to the secret A stage 2002 will be explained in more detail.

The processing for the performance form includes a step of determining the scenario performance in advance before the secret A stage 2002 starts (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game), and a step in which the scenario performance is determined in advance after the secret A stage 2002 starts. and a step of changing or correcting the scenario in accordance with the performance selected based on the scenario. The "scenario" is the development at which point in the progress of the game (number of time reductions) in the secret A stage 2002, the character is subtracted. Since the "scenario" includes the correspondence between the number of time reductions and character subtraction, it may also be referred to as a "effect map." When the secret A stage 2002 starts, the sub CPU 201 advances the character subtraction process by executing the determined scenario.

The sub-CPU 201 determines the team composition and scenario in advance because the production of the secret A stage 2002 is a team battle. The sub CPU 201 sets the scenario according to a combination of the attributes of the competing teams, the expectation level of the high probability game, and the number of time savings. FIG. 138 is an example of a flowchart showing scenario presetting processing. The sub CPU 201 repeatedly executes this flowchart at a predetermined timing as a subroutine of the production mode determination process (step S205). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the jackpot determination process is an 8R jackpot, it executes the scenario presetting process of FIG. 138. According to FIG. 136, it can be seen that the transition from a stage other than the secret A stage 2002 to the secret A stage 2002 is triggered by the result of the jackpot determination process being an 8R jackpot.

In this embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario presetting process of FIG. 138 when the result of the jackpot determination process is an 8R jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. The scenario presetting process of FIG. 138 may be executed when there is a jackpot other than 8R.

The sub CPU 201 selects a parameter indicating the degree of expectation of a high probability game in the secret A stage 2002 (step S300). This parameter includes, for example, four stages A to D, with A having the lowest probability variation expectation. B has medium probability expectation, and C has high probability variation expectation. D corresponds to confirmation of a high probability game. The sub CPU 201 records the determined parameters in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM (not shown in FIG. 9).

Next, the sub CPU 201 randomly selects the appearance order of the characters in the secret A stage 2002, that is, the order of participation in the battle, for each enemy and ally (step S302). The appearance order of the character ROMs selected by lottery is also recorded in the work RAM 203. Note that when the information on the order of appearance is lost from the work RAM due to a power outage, the sub CPU 201 sets a one-on-one battle performance between specific characters. At this time, the "specific character" to be confronted one-on-one may be set as the character that will ultimately be confronted one-on-one when the normal performance is executed without power outage. For example, the mode of battle production selected by lottery is a battle production between an ally group of "the main character + α" and an enemy group of "the main character's rival character + β", and in the end, the main character and the main character If the information is lost due to a power outage when the main character is in a one-on-one confrontation with a rival character, the sub CPU 201 will not perform a one-on-one confrontation between the main character and the main character's rival. It can be controlled so that a confrontation with a character is set.

Next, the sub CPU 201 randomly selects a combination (2×2, 6×5, etc.) of the number of friendly characters and enemy characters (step S304). Furthermore, the sub-CPU 201 selects the previously described effect map 2102 by lottery based on the attributes of the friendly team and the enemy team. The attributes of the team may be determined by variable probability parameters and combinations, or may be determined by variable probability parameters, combinations, and the number of time reductions. The sub CPU 201 refers to the conversion table based on the attribute, determines a pattern value, and determines the effect map 2102 based on the pattern value.

FIG. 139 shows an example of the correspondence between the battle attribute 2100 and the effect map 2102. The sub CPU 201 determines a pattern value (in the example of FIG. 139, the pattern value is 4) based on the battle attribute 2100, and assigns a performance map 2102 to the battle attribute 2100 using the pattern value as a key. A plurality of pattern values may be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. The sub CPU 201 refers to the table and determines the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100. In determining the pattern value, the sub CPU 201 increases the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by including the number of time reductions in addition to the expectation level parameter and combination, and thereby increases the effect map that can be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. 2102 can be made versatile.

As shown in FIG. 139, the performance map 2102 is made up of a plurality of small maps 2110, and the small maps 2110 are set in the concealment A stage 2002, with a predetermined number (for example, 6) of time saving times as one unit, and a range of the small maps 2110. Based on the information on the number of enemy and ally characters to be subtracted in the variable display (for example, the number of characters in the range of 1 to 3 for each enemy and ally) and which variable display number of the variable display number is to be subtracted. configured. "Friendly-1" indicates that the number of friendly characters is subtracted by "1". "Friendly-0" indicates that ally characters are not subtracted. “Enemy-1” indicates that the enemy character is subtracted by “1”. "Enemy -0" indicates that the enemy character is not subtracted. The number of small maps 2110 combined with the effect map 2102 varies depending on the prescribed number of times (time saving number of times).

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of the effect map 2102 used for the scenario lottery. In this embodiment, the effect map 2102 is made up of a plurality of parts, for example, two combinations of a first half map and a second half map, and the sub CPU 201 uses pattern values as keys, for example, each part has the same pattern value. The first half map and the second half map are each selected (step S306, step S308), and the entire effect map 2102 is formed by combining them. As a result, the sub CPU 201 can form a scenario in which the number of characters corresponding to the combination of players is uniformly subtracted throughout the time-saving game state. In this specification, an effect in which the number of characters is subtracted is referred to as a "subtraction effect."

When the sub CPU 201 completes (or selects) the overall effect map, the sub CPU 201 determines which time reduction number and which character ( Based on the lottery table, it is determined whether to perform a subtraction process (subtraction effect) for an ally character or an enemy character (step S310). The sub CPU 201 combines the number of times the subtraction process is performed and character information with the effect map 2102, and records the effect map 2102 in the work RAM. The sub CPU 201 may switch the lottery table for the small map 2110 depending on the contents of the overall effect map. The map is recorded in work RAM.

For example, the combination of the variable probability parameter, the number of time reductions, and the combination of the number of people is as shown in FIG. 140. The range of this aspect is defined as a table for each category of low, medium, high, and fixed expectations for high probability games in the secret A stage. FIG. 140 shows an example in which a first half map and a second half map are applied to this aspect.

If there is no pattern in the table that combines the variable variable parameter (step S300) and the combination of the number of people (step S302), the sub CPU 201 determines that, for example, the variable variable parameter is "D" and the combination of the number of people is set in the fixed category. In a case other than the mode (2×2, etc.), any one of A to C, which are variable probability parameters other than D, may be determined by re-drawing a lottery. Note that the sub CPU 201 may give priority to variable probability parameters and change the number combination by re-drawing the lottery.

The sub CPU 201 adds these characters to the production map 2102 in order to reduce either the specific character A who appears last on the friendly team or the specific character B who appears last on the enemy team at the end of the time saving count. It is possible to avoid including subtraction processing information. For example, if the combination of numbers is 6x4 (6 allies, 4 enemies), it can be reduced to 5 allies and 3 enemies. The sub CPU 201 makes characters appear at the start of the secret A stage 2002 according to the combination of the number of people, but it is also possible to make the combination of the number of people not match the number of displayed characters. For example, if the number of enemy team members includes a specific character, the number of friendly characters displayed when entering the secret A stage 2002 will be one less if the specific character is to appear in the final variable display without participating in the battle. In addition, it is possible to prevent the specific character from being included in the effect map 2102 as a target of the subtraction process.

When the sub CPU 201 finishes the process of selecting the small map 2110 (step S310), the sub CPU 201 determines the BGM for the game of the secret A stage 2002 (step S312). Depending on which BGM is selected, the degree of expectation regarding the high probability gaming state in the secret A stage 2002 is suggested. With the above steps, the scenario presetting process by the sub CPU 201 is completed.

Next, the processing for determining the effect at the secret A stage 2002 will be explained. In the secret A stage 2002, the enemy and ally characters determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game) are subtracted according to the mode of performance determined for each time saving game. By adjusting and reinforcing the processing scenario, the scenario can be developed in a variety of ways according to the game results at the secret A stage 2002. In the originally determined scenario, the character subtraction process is performed evenly over the entire number of time reductions, and the sub CPU 201 performs the character subtraction process evenly throughout the process of determining the performance mode in the secret A stage 2002. By adjusting the scenario to the extent that it does not impair the story of the character subtraction process that is executed without any changes, the player can enjoy the variety of scenario development while maintaining the outline of the story determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002. can be made aware of.

Furthermore, in the concealment A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 displays the pending information (starting memory information) and displays the time reduction number information on the liquid crystal display, while also displaying the pending multiple starting memories. By executing the scenario, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the continuous development of a series of scenarios during the period of the secret A stage 2002, without the player being aware of the pending information or the number of time reductions. can.

Note that in this specification, the suspended startup memory may be simply referred to as suspended. Furthermore, the variable display of the identification symbol for the suspended starting memory is referred to as suspension extinguishment. Furthermore, up to four starting memories based on winnings in the first starting opening 5442 and starting memories based on winnings in the second starting opening 440 can be held at a maximum, and these four holdings can be held in the first starting memory, respectively. They are referred to as retention, second retention, third retention, and fourth retention, and retention is completed in this order.

In the secret A stage 2002, in order to develop the scenario production in a variety of ways according to the mode of production determined for each time reduction, provisional fluctuations ( A variable display corresponding to one starting memory is converted into one or more blocks, and effects can be set for each block. Note that this variation is hereinafter referred to as a "provisional variation" for convenience, in the sense that it is different from the variable display of pending status.

FIG. 141 is an example showing provisional variation settings for each hold from the 1st hold to the 4th hold, together with the time sequence. Set the number of temporary fluctuations according to the time. For example, if the variable display time is 3.5 seconds, the number of temporary changes is 1. If the variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the number of temporary changes is 2. If the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the number of temporary changes is 1. :Set 3. In this embodiment, the selection ratio of variable display time 3.5 seconds, variable display time 7.5 seconds, and variable display time 11.5 seconds is 1:1:1, but this selection ratio may be changed as appropriate. You may do so.

According to FIG. 141, if the variable display time of the first hold is 3.5 seconds, it is set to 4.0 seconds, which is the sum of the temporary variation of 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0.5 seconds). If the variable display time of the second hold is 7.5 seconds, the first temporary change is 4.0 seconds, the second temporary change is 3.5 seconds, and the interval period (0.5 seconds) is combined. If the variable display time of the third hold is set to 4.0 seconds and the variable display time of the third hold is 11.5 seconds, each of the first and second temporary fluctuations is set to 4.0 seconds, and the third temporary fluctuation is set to 3.5 seconds. and the interval period (0.5 seconds) are set to 4.0 seconds, and if the variable display time of the fourth hold is 3.5 seconds, the temporary variation is set to 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0.5 seconds). 5 seconds) is set to 4.0 seconds. The reason why the interval period is included in the provisional fluctuation is to use this period for processing the effects. Although FIG. 141 shows that the temporary fluctuation number is determined according to the variable display time (fluctuation pattern), this is just an example, and the sub CPU 201 selects an arbitrary temporary fluctuation number for the fluctuation pattern. You can also. Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 can set the fluctuation time of one temporary fluctuation to a predetermined value, and can also set the fluctuation time of a temporary fluctuation not to include an interval period, but it is possible to set the fluctuation time of one temporary fluctuation to a predetermined value. From the viewpoint of making the player aware that this is not a performance, it is preferable to include an interval time in the variation time of the temporary variation.

Next, the process of determining the performance in the secret A stage 2002 will be specifically explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is an example of a flowchart showing the effect determining process (secret A stage 2002) that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the effect mode determining process (step S205). The sub CPU 201 refers to the performance stage flag and checks whether it is the secret A stage 2002 (step S320). Here, if it is not the secret A stage 2002, the performance determination process is ended, and if it is the secret A stage 2002, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 440 (step S322). In step S322, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no game ball entering the second starting port 440, the sub CPU 201 ends the performance determination process, and when determining that a game ball enters the second starting port 440, A temporary variation number is determined, selected, or set based on the variation pattern as a result of analyzing the commands of the main control board (step S324). The number of provisional fluctuations is uniquely determined by the fluctuation pattern (for example, see FIG. 143), but is not limited to this, and may be determined to be any number of provisional fluctuations, as described above. Note that FIG. 143 is an example of a variation pattern table. In this example, this variation pattern table is stored in the program ROM 202 installed in the sub control circuit 200, and the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table in accordance with the variable display time command transmitted from the main CPU 101. Although the fluctuation pattern is determined, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation pattern table may be stored in the main ROM installed in the main control circuit 100, and the main CPU determines the fluctuation pattern table and then outputs the fluctuation pattern table to the sub control circuit 200. You may also send a command to

When the sub CPU 201 selects the temporary variation number, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a scenario performance being executed (step S326). The sub CPU 201 performs a scenario lottery within the range of the pending number. The scenario lottery refers to determining by lottery at which position in the range of the number of reservations the character subtraction process is to be performed. For example, if it is assumed that there are four held start memories, the sub CPU 201 randomly selects which of the first to fourth holds is to perform the character subtraction process. However, in the scenario lottery, in addition to a lottery to decide at which position within the range of reserved numbers character subtraction processing will be performed, a battle production between an enemy character and an ally character without character subtraction processing (battle production resulting in a draw) It may also include a lottery as to which position is to be held.

At the time of this lottery, the sub CPU 201 refers to the performance map 2102, checks whether character subtraction is recorded in the small map 2110 that covers the number of time reductions from the first hold to the fourth hold, and determines whether or not the character subtraction is recorded. If it is determined that the character subtraction is recorded, character subtraction processing is performed within the range of the reserved number, and if it is determined that character subtraction is not recorded, the character subtraction processing is not performed. The sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is a scenario performance being executed until the variable display of the first to fourth holds, which are subject to the scenario lottery, is completed. When the sub CPU 201 finishes the variable display of the first to fourth suspensions that are subject to the scenario performance, it determines in step S326 that there is no scenario performance in progress, and thereafter displays the first to fourth suspensions. It is determined whether starting memory is suspended in any of them (step S328).

If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S328 that the starting memory is held in any of the first to fourth holdings, it performs a scenario lottery for the held starting memory, but based on the fluctuation pattern. As a means of adjusting the character subtraction processing position according to the performance pattern determined by (Step S330). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S330 that there is a starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, it determines the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded as the scenario lottery target (step S332). For example, even if the starting memory is held in all of the first to fourth holdings, if the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is held in the third holding, the sub CPU 201 The starting memories held in the hold to the third hold are determined to be selected as scenario lottery targets (step S332), and the starting memories held in the fourth hold are not selected as scenario lottery targets. Furthermore, for example, if the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is held in multiple places, such as the second hold and the fourth hold, the hold is released first (the variable display is performed first), and the second hold is released first (the variable display is performed first). The starting memories up to the hold (the starting memories of the first hold and the second hold) are determined to be subject to the scenario lottery (step S332), and the starting memories held to the third hold and the fourth hold are not subject to the scenario lottery. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S330 that there is no starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines all of the pending starting memories as scenario lottery targets (step S334). In addition, in step S330, if it is determined that there is no starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the suspended starting memory, control such as preventing the subtraction effect of the character and the reach variation effect from overlapping is carried out. Since this is unnecessary, the control load is smaller than when it is determined in step S330 that there is a starting memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded among the suspended starting memories. ,

The sub CPU 201 performs the processing from step S328 onward as a scenario lottery based on the starting memory held in the first to fourth holdings (when the ball enters the second starting port 440 This is done targeting the starting memory that was originally suspended. In other words, when there is a scenario production in progress, the next scenario lottery will not be held, but once the scenario production in progress is completed, one or more of the starts pending in the first to fourth pending scenarios at that point will be drawn. Since the scenario lottery is conducted based on memories, in the secret A stage 2002, as long as the starting memory is held in any of the 1st to 4th holds, the scenario performance will be executed repeatedly without interruption. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the performance in units of starting memory, and to make the player interested in the scenario performance, making it possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation over a relatively long period of time. Become.

In addition, in this example, the sub CPU 201 is configured not to perform the next scenario lottery when there is a scenario performance being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. If at least one starting memory is held in the pending to fourth pending, scenario lottery may be performed.

The reason why the sub CPU 201 selects the starting memory up to the hold including the reach variation effect as the target of the scenario lottery, and does not select the starting memory of the hold after the reach variation effect as the target of the lottery, is that after the reach variation effect is missed, the character This is because even if the subtraction process is performed, the player's interest in the results of the battle between the characters decreases. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can adjust the subtraction processing position of the character based on the performance of the secret A stage 2002.

Note that the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 440 in step S322, and if it is determined that a game ball has entered the second starting port 440, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing from step S324 onward. However, when it is determined that a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 instead of the second starting port 440, the game ball that was suspended based on the ball entering the first starting port 5442 is Scenario lottery is performed using only one starting memory. In this case, a plurality of temporary fluctuations may or may not be set for one starting memory suspended based on the ball entering the first starting port 5442. If it is determined in the scenario pre-setting process that a subtraction effect is performed in the variable display regarding the starting memory that has been suspended based on the ball entering the first starting port 5442, then the ball enters the first starting port 5442. A subtraction effect may be performed in the variable display regarding the starting memory that has been suspended based on the entry of the ball. However, the variable display for one starting memory suspended based on the ball entering the first starting port 5442 (or the temporary variation set for that one starting memory) and the next one for that one starting memory. The subtraction performance is not performed across the provisional fluctuation set for the starting memory that is suspended based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 440 that is consumed in the second starting port 440. Further, when the starting memory is suspended based on the ball entering the first starting port 5442, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery only when the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, and when it is not a jackpot, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery. For example, it may be controlled so that the identification symbols are only variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 or the screen edge of the liquid crystal display device 16 without selecting the presentation.

The sub CPU 201 processes the pending scenario lottery range as a performance adjustment target, such as determining a character subtraction processing position for each pending range that is the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 checks the degree of expectation of the performance in the last hold in the scenario lottery range, for example, the enthusiasm of the performance (step S336), and reflects the result in the hold performance that belongs to the scenario currently being executed. good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 determines the intensity of the effect for the last hold in the range of the scenario lottery, it may apply a pre-read effect or a continuous preview effect depending on the intensity of the effect to the effect of the hold for the scenario lottery.

After going through the above process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process for allocating a performance such as a character subtraction process performance to a temporary variation regarding the pending performance of the scenario lottery target. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 in order to determine the number of provisional fluctuations required for the character subtraction process, and selects the scenario from the starting memory of the lottery target (for example, the first to fourth pending). It is determined whether there is any starting memory for which the subtraction process is to be performed (step S338).

If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S338 that there is a starting memory for which the subtraction process is to be performed within the range of the scenario lottery target, it counts the characters to be subtracted by dividing them into friends and enemies (step S340). Next, if the total number of subtraction processes for enemy and ally characters is two or more (step S342: Y), the sub CPU 201 records the order of subtraction processes for two or more characters (step S344). Note that the order among enemy and ally characters may be determined in the effect map 2102, or may be determined by lottery.

Next, as a result of determining the scenario lottery target (step S332, step S334), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an overlap between the reach variation performance and the subtraction process performance in the pending scenario lottery target. The determination is made with reference to the effect map 2102 (step S346). Based on this result, the sub CPU 201 can determine the number of temporary fluctuations that can be used for the reach precursor fluctuation, or perform performance adjustment processing such as adjusting the position of the temporary fluctuation where the subtraction process is performed.

FIGS. 145 and 146 are diagrams showing examples of start-up memories held in the first to fourth holds. FIG. 145 shows that the starting memory is held in all of the 1st to 4th holds, and that neither the subtraction process nor the reach variation effect is executed in the 1st hold and the 4th hold, and that the enemy character's subtraction is executed in the 2nd hold. It shows that a process (a process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) will be performed, and that a reach variation effect will be performed in the third hold. FIG. 146 shows that the starting memory is held in all of the 1st to 4th holds, and that neither the subtraction process nor the reach effect is executed in the 1st hold, the 2nd hold, and the 4th hold, and that in the 3rd hold, the enemy This shows that character subtraction processing (processing of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) and reach variation effect are performed in duplicate. If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that there is an overlap between the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect, it sets the overlap flag in the work RAM area (step S348).

When the sub CPU 201 confirms that the duplication flag is set, if the character to be subtracted is an enemy character, the sub CPU 201 allows the overlap of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process, and, for example, changes the effect of the subtraction process to reach. Execute during variable production. On the other hand, although the sub CPU 201 has confirmed the setting of the duplicate flag, if the character to be subtracted is an ally character, performing a performance in which the ally character is defeated in the reach variation performance is not expected from the reach variation performance. To disallow the overlapping execution of a reach variation performance and a subtraction process because it unnecessarily lowers the degree of performance, and to prevent the performance of a subtraction process from being executed in a reach variation performance. In this case, this does not prevent the ally character's subtraction processing performance from being executed as a provisional change immediately before the reach variation performance, but the defeated ally character will revive and perform a compensation performance such as adding an attack to the reach. It may be done by using a variable effect. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may allocate the ally character subtraction process to a provisional variation that is a predetermined number away from the reach variation effect within the pending range of scenario lottery targets. In addition, if the character to be subtracted is an ally character, instead of not allowing the overlap of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process, the overlap of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process is allowed, but the reach If the variation effect and the subtraction process overlap, the subtraction process may be reassigned to another temporary variation.

In order to allocate the reach precursor performance to the temporary fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 assigns the previous scenario lottery target suspension (for example, the third suspension in FIG. 146), including the suspension in which the reach variation performance and the subtraction process overlap (for example, the third suspension in FIG. 146). For example, it can be used as a ready-to-reach precursor effect that can be assigned to the temporary fluctuations (first hold and second hold in FIG. 146) (step S350). This is because the effect of the enemy character's subtraction process is executed as a reach variation effect. That is, the sub CPU 201 can use [(total provisional fluctuation number of pending scenarios to be drawn) - (number of subtraction processes - 1)] as the provisional fluctuation number that can be applied to the reach sign effect. If the character to be subtracted is an ally character, the sub CPU 201 executes step S352, which will be described later, without executing step S350.

If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the reach variation performance and the subtraction processing performance do not overlap, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S352 without setting the overlap flag. The sub CPU 201 generates a temporary change number obtained by subtracting the temporary change number to which the subtraction processing effect of characters (not limited to enemy and ally) is assigned from the total temporary change number determined for the pending scenario lottery target. (residual fluctuation) can be used for reach precursor production. Here, the sub CPU 201 determines that the reach sign performance is performed only when it is determined that the residual fluctuation number is 0 or more, and that the reach sign performance is not performed when the residual fluctuation number is 0. The control process can be made smooth, and this reach precursor performance can be expected to have the effect of making people expect a reach variation performance. Note that when the number of residual fluctuations is 1, it may be determined not to perform the ready-to-reach sign, or it may be determined whether or not to perform the ready-to-reach sign, with one time as the upper limit.

If the starting memories held within the range of the scenario lottery target do not include the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, and the starting memory next to the last starting memory to be consumed among the scenario lottery targets is In the case of a reach variation effect, although the next starting memory is not a scenario lottery target, the sub CPU 201 applies a reach precursor effect to the temporary variation set for the last starting memory to be consumed among the scenario lottery targets. It is also possible to perform a reach variation effect in the variable display of the start memory stored in the next hold by allocating this.

Note that the sub CPU 201 determines the number of executions of the reach sign performance, and subtracts the determined number of executions of the reach sign performance from the total number of temporary fluctuations determined for the pending scenario lottery target. The variation may be used to produce a character subtraction process.

Next, referring to FIG. 147, sub CPU 201 selects a reach precursor effect depending on whether or not the duplication flag is set. Specifically, in step S354, the sub CPU 201 checks whether or not there is a set of duplicate flags, and if it is determined that there is a set of duplicate flags, it determines the reach precursor effect to be a specific effect (step S356), and sets the enemy character. To make a player have a feeling of expectation that he/she will be defeated in a reach variation performance. Here, the specific performance is a performance that can give the player a high sense of expectation. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that there is no duplicate flag set, the ready-to-reach precursor performance is determined to be a performance that gives a smaller sense of anticipation to the player than the specific performance (step S358). The sub CPU 201 may select the ready-to-reach sign performance from among the plurality of performances set in the table. When the sub-CPU 201 performs the reach precursor performance multiple times within the range of the scenario performance target, the sub CPU 201 changes the table so that the same performance does not occur consecutively. However, specific performances may be continued.

Next, the sub CPU 201 selects a temporary change number to be used as a reach sign from the counted temporary change numbers in step S350 or step S352 (step S360). For example, the sub CPU 201 may change the table to select the number of temporary fluctuations, since the required number of temporary fluctuations differs depending on the content of the ready-to-reach sign effect. The sub CPU 201 selects the temporary fluctuations to be used for the reach sign performance from among the temporary fluctuations that are the latest in the order of consumption from among the pending temporary fluctuations that are subject to the scenario lottery. Thereby, the reach precursor performance can be placed at a position close to the reach variation performance. When "0 fluctuation" is selected, the sub CPU 201 does not allocate the ready-to-reach sign performance to the temporary fluctuation and does not perform the reach-to-ready sign performance. This concept of "0 variation" includes both 0 temporary variation and the case where no starting memory is held in any of the first to fourth holds. That is, in both cases where 0 temporary fluctuation is selected and when starting memory is not held in any of the first to fourth holds, the sub CPU 201 assigns the reach precursor performance to the temporary fluctuation. Therefore, the reach precursor performance will not be performed. Further, if there is no reach variation performance in the starting memory of the scenario lottery target, the reach precursor performance is a false reach precursor performance. It should be noted that when the starting memory is not held in any of the first to fourth holds, the false reach precursor performance is not performed.

By the way, as mentioned above, if the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is not held in any of the first to fourth holdings, the sub CPU 201 stores all the held starting memories in the scenario lottery. I try to decide on the target. However, since the secret A stage 2002 is a time-saving game state, the starting memory is often held in all of the first to fourth holds when determining the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, if the player understands that the current scenario performance targets the four starting memories, at that point, there is a possibility that the reach variation performance is not included within the scope of the current scenario performance. There is a risk that players will realize that the price is high and it will be difficult to maintain their expectations. Therefore, when determining the targets for the scenario lottery, if there is no starting memory in which reach variation effects are recorded in any of the 1st to 4th holds, the number of starting memories to be selected for the scenario lottery will be different each time. For example, by randomly determining by lottery, it becomes difficult to detect that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of the current scenario effect. In particular, if a fake reach precursor performance is performed even though the player is aware that there is a high possibility that the target range of this scenario performance does not include the reach fluctuation performance, it may become extremely unpleasant. . However, by making it difficult to detect that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of this scenario production, the fake reach precursor production will maintain the player's sense of expectation, making it an effective production. be able to.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the temporary number of fluctuations to be used for the reach sign performance is greater than 0 (step S362), and if it is determined that the temporary change number to be used for the reach sign performance is greater than 0, the reach sign performance is executed. The number of temporary fluctuations used for this is divided into blocks, and a block pattern to which the reach sign effect is assigned is selected (step S364). Next, the sub CPU 201 allocates a ready-to-reach sign effect to a block to which a reach-like sign effect can be assigned among the selected block patterns (step S366). For example, if the number of temporary fluctuations that can be used for a reach sign is 3, and 2 temporary fluctuations are required for a reach sign performance, the sub CPU 201 blocks the three temporary fluctuations, and (1) 1 block + 1 block. A pattern of +1 block and (2) a pattern of 1 block +2 blocks are formed. The sub CPU 201 can select the pattern (2) and allocate the reach sign effect to the two blocks. FIG. 148 shows a manner in which three temporary fluctuations are divided into blocks in this manner.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S368 that a subtraction process effect is to be performed, it determines, for example, by random lottery, in which block of temporary variation the subtraction process effect is to be performed (step S368). S370). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines, by lottery or the like, a temporary variation to which a subtraction processing effect is assigned from among the temporary variations to which a reach sign effect is not assigned among the pending temporary variations to be selected for the scenario lottery (step S372). If there is an order of subtraction processing for a plurality of characters (step S342), a temporary variation of the subtraction processing effect is determined so as to follow this order. The following is an explanation using an example.

For example, by determining the scenario lottery target (steps S332 and S334), a starting memory in which the subtraction process of an ally character is recorded and a starting memory in which the subtraction process of the enemy character is recorded are created within the range of the scenario lottery target. Suppose that they are held in this order. Then, in step S370, it is assumed that the sub CPU 201 determines that the enemy character's subtraction process is a relatively long medium attack performance, and that the ally character's subtraction process is determined to be a relatively short time weak attack performance. At this time, the sub CPU 201 assigns the medium attack performance to two temporary fluctuations, and the light attack performance to one temporary fluctuation, so that the former temporary fluctuation is digested before the latter temporary fluctuation. The location of the fluctuation can be determined. In this manner, the sub CPU 201 allocates a subtraction effect to one or more temporary fluctuations, for example, depending on the effect content of the subtraction process.

Here, an example in which the effect of one subtraction process is assigned to a temporary change will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is an example of a sequence of temporary fluctuations in a state where the first to third holds are subject to scenario lottery. Regarding the start memory stored in the first hold, since the fluctuation time is 3.5 seconds, the provisional number of fluctuations set is one (#1). Regarding the start memory stored in the second hold, since the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the number of provisional fluctuations set is three (#2 to #4). Regarding the start memory stored in the third hold, since the variable display time is the time of "11.5 seconds + reach variation effect", the number of provisional variations set is three (#5 to #7). Regarding the starting memory stored in the third hold, since the reach variation effect is performed when the variable display is performed, the target of the scenario lottery is the starting memory held in the first to third hold. . In addition, in the example of FIG. 149, the number of subtraction processes in the performance map 2102 determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game) is stored in the starting memory that is held in the first hold. 1 time (light attack performance), 0 times in the starting memory held in the second hold, 2 times in the starting memory held in the third hold (once each in the order of medium attack performance and weak attack performance, total 2) An example is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 150, since the starting memories held in the first to third holds are the targets of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 selects these in the order of light attack performance, medium attack performance, and light attack performance. Redetermine the timing to perform the performance. In the example shown in FIG. 150, the light attack performance recorded in the starting memory held in the first hold is assigned to provisional variation #2, and the medium attack performance recorded in the starting memory held in the second hold. is assigned to the blocked #4 provisional variation and #5 provisional variation, and the weak attack performance recorded in the starting memory held in the third suspension is assigned to #6 provisional variation. In this way, the character's subtraction effect is based on the temporary fluctuation set for one starting memory and the starting memory to be digested next to that one starting memory, regardless of the suspended starting memory unit. It may also span the set temporary fluctuation. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game (lottery result). Furthermore, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time saving is consumed. Moreover, in the concealment A stage 2002, as an indication of the degree of expectation of a high probability gaming state, the production mode to be performed during the execution of the temporary fluctuations divided into predetermined units (blocked) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the subtraction performance rather than the remaining number of times to save time, and it is possible to further suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 150, all three subtraction effects recorded in the starting memory held in the first to third holds are executed in one of the temporary fluctuations (#1 to #7). However, the sub CPU 201 is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 201 may control the last subtraction effect to be executed in a reach variation.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines a performance for the temporary variation to which no performance is assigned (step S374). FIG. 151 is an example of a sequence of temporary fluctuations in a state where the first to fourth holds (for example, see FIG. 141) are subject to scenario lottery. A subtraction process effect is assigned to temporary fluctuations #2 and #4, a reach precursor effect is assigned to temporary fluctuation #7, and temporary fluctuations #1, #3, #5, and #6 to which no effects are assigned, for example. , it is possible to arrange a one-shot performance that leaves a weaker impression on the player than a subtraction processing performance or a reach sign performance. The contents of the effects placed in temporary variations #1, #3, #5, and #6 and the temporary variations to which the effects are assigned may be determined by lottery. The single-shot performance is placed on the temporary fluctuation side of the lower number than the reach precursor performance. The execution position of the subtraction process is determined by assigning effects to all temporary changes in the sequence. The number of provisional fluctuations assigned varies depending on the content of the performance. The sub CPU 201 generates effect designation information including information on sequences in which effects are assigned to all temporary variations.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a reach variation effect exists in the pending scenario lottery target (step S376), and determines the reach effect when a reach variation effect exists in the pending scenario lottery target (step S378). Then, the performance determination process ends. For example, the sub CPU 201 can select a reach effect by referring to the result of the subtraction process. You can select a reach effect in which the characters remaining in the battle appear.

Further, the sub CPU 201 refers to the counter for the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, calculates the combination of remaining number of ally characters and ally characters, and calculates the number combination and/or the number of time reductions consumed (or It is possible to set whether or not to execute the reach effect and the mode of the reach variation effect based on the remaining number of time reductions. For example, if the remaining number of people is less than 2 × 2 and the hold is other than the final rotation of the specified time-saving rotation number, a special type of reach (SP reach) will be executed even if the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. For example, in a battle performance, the boss of the enemy group may be defeated to execute a jackpot game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 may execute a dedicated SP reach effect when the remaining number of people combination is 1×1 and the pending is the final variable display of the specified time and short number.

In addition, if the target range of the scenario production includes the starting memory where the last variable display is performed in the secret A stage 2002 (for example, when the number of time savings is 48, the 48th variable display in the time saving game state is (in the case that the starting memory in which the battle is performed is included), if the reach variation effect or the jackpot effect is not performed in the final variable display of the time-saving game state, the character's A subtraction effect may be performed. In this case, the impression is not that the secret A stage 2002 has ended because the time-saving game state has reached the specified number of times (whether or not it is a high probability game state has been disclosed), but because the victory or defeat of the battle performance has been decided. It is possible to give the player the impression that the stage 2002 has ended.

The sub CPU 201 uses the performance map determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game) through the process of determining the pending range of the scenario lottery target (FIG. 142: S332, S334). The number of times the subtraction process is executed in step 2102 can be changed within a range of ±3 depending on the variation pattern of the concealment A stage 2002. For example, when it is determined to perform a subtraction process when the time saving rotation is 8 in the calculation map, the subtraction process can be moved within the range of 5 to 11 time saving rotations. To be more specific, when the starting memory with the number of time saving times is 8 is held in the fourth hold, it can be moved within the range of the number of time saving times 5 to 8, and the starting memory with the number of time saving times being 8 is held in the first hold. You can move within the range of 8 to 11 time saving times. Therefore, by fluidly changing the execution timing of the subtraction process according to the development of the game in the secret A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 can increase the variation of the production while also performing the subtraction process of the characters associated with the battle between the teams of characters. It can be executed reliably.

In the embodiment described above, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is a scenario effect being executed, it does not draw a new scenario effect until the scenario effect created by the lottery ends. Therefore, in order to diversify the scenario performance that is being executed, the sub CPU 201, for example, reads in advance the pending content within the range of the currently executed scenario production, and uses this as a production that is executed during the variable display of pending completion. May be applied. For example, if a reach variation effect is recorded in the start memory of the scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 performs a pre-read lottery for the start memory up to the reach change effect. Note that if there is no reach variation performance, a suggestion performance that suggests the existence of a specific variation pattern (reach variation performance) is applied to the performance being executed. Note that the sub CPU 201 does not perform the suggestion effect when there is no hold.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 does not pre-read the starting memory that is suspended at the time of winning the starting prize and apply it to the pre-read effect at the time of winning the prize, but also to the effect that is executed during the fluctuation of the pending consumption. good. For example, if the starting memory is held in the fourth holding due to a starting prize while executing the scenario performance for the first to third holding, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the performance of the fourth holding and, for example, The look-ahead effect of the fourth hold can be superimposed on the second hold and/or the third hold.

In addition, in the secret A stage 2002, since the hold is not displayed on the LCD screen, there is no pre-reading effect at the time of starting winning. Since we do not have much time to spare, we have no choice but to create a performance with few processing branches, such as simple processing such as changing the reserved color. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 performs a prefetch performance of the starting memory held in the fourth hold by using part or all of the data (for example, scenario performance data) of the first to third hold prefetch effects. If it is possible to do so, the control load can be reduced, and as a result, the mode of look-ahead performance of the start memory held in the fourth hold can be made more diverse than the monotonous one where the holding color is simply changed. It can be realized as

Note that FIG. 152 is an example of a flowchart showing a modification when it is determined in step S326 (see FIG. 142) that there is a scenario effect being executed. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 152, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is a scenario performance being executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting slot 440 (step S400), and When it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting slot 440, it is determined whether there is a reach variation effect in the starting memory of the scenario being executed (step S402). In step S402, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a starting memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario production being executed, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads a starting memory in which winnings are later than the starting memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded. The prefetch effect is selected as the target (step S404). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is no starting memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, it determines whether or not a look-ahead effect is already being executed (step S406). If the prefetch effect is already being executed, the prefetch effect that is already being executed is continued (step S408), and if the prefetch effect is not being executed, the prefetch effect is suspended within the target range of the currently executed scenario effect. Prefetch effects are selected for all start-up memories (step S410).

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike conventional pachinko machines in which a performance is performed for each starting memory, the number of temporary fluctuations executed once or multiple times for each suspended starting memory. is determined, so even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the temporary fluctuations determined for each starting memory are blocked into predetermined units using a plurality of temporary fluctuations, regardless of the unit of starting memory. Then, the performance mode to be performed during the temporary fluctuations divided into blocks in this predetermined unit is determined. In addition, as described above, some of the plurality of temporary fluctuations determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of temporary fluctuations determined for another starting memory in which variable display is performed next to the one starting memory. It is also possible that a performance mode that spans a part of the temporary variation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In this way, since the performance mode is determined without being limited to the unit of starting memory, it is also possible to determine the performance mode across a plurality of starting memories. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player conscious of the game result for each starting memory.

In addition, for gaming machines that are controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) in addition to the jackpot gaming state, if the period in which the specific gaming state is controlled is lengthened, the jackpot will be determined. The probability of winning in the process has to be lowered, which may reduce interest. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantaged, and in any case, there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one or more temporary fluctuations are set for each starting memory, so while the number of time reductions is suppressed, such suppression is difficult for the player to understand. At the same time, since the probability of winning in jackpot determination can be set to a reasonable value, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or more temporary fluctuations for each starting memory, the player can grasp the period of the secret A stage 2002, that is, the end timing of the time-saving gaming state. can be made more difficult. In other words, the number of time savings is predetermined at the time of winning, for example, and in conventional pachinko machines, even if it is hidden whether the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or not, there is no chance of winning. When a certain number of time savings is completed, it is disclosed whether or not the game is in a high probability gaming state. However, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the period of the secret A stage 2002 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of time savings consumed, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation. Become. Moreover, during the secret A stage 2002, a character subtraction effect is performed as an indicator of the degree of expectation of a high-probability gaming state, so the player's attention is focused on the player's attention rather than the time-saving number of playbacks where it is difficult to grasp the end timing. Rather, the character can be directed to a subtractive presentation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the secret A stage 2002 by setting one or more temporary fluctuations for each starting memory, , a character subtraction effect that can be used as an indicator of whether or not the game is in a high-probability gaming state is performed. In this subtraction performance scenario, the secret A stage 2002 is set so that a high probability game state is established when the enemy group is annihilated in the scenario performance including the final round of time reduction, and a low probability game state is established when the ally group is annihilated. The general framework has already been decided before it becomes a reality. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko game machine 1, where a certain number of time-savings are used up, it is not disclosed whether or not the high-probability game state is in effect, but when the battle performance is decided, the high-probability It becomes possible to perform an effect such as disclosing whether or not the game is in a gaming state.

Next, the effect of changing the BGM will be explained. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, when the jackpot game state ends and the secret A stage 2002 is entered after that, the timing at which the secret A stage 2002 ends (for example, the time reduction of a specified number of times (for example, 48 times)) is At the timing when the game is completed, it is disclosed whether the game is in a high-probability game state or a low-probability state, based on the final result of the battle performance described above. When the disclosed result is a high probability gaming state, the process then moves to a high probability stage 2004 (when the disclosed result is a low probability gaming state, the process then moves to the normal stage 2000).

The sub CPU 201 performs the BGM change lottery during the jackpot game state where the probability change flag is turned on and during the hidden A stage 2002 when the hidden game state is the high probability game state. That is, when winning a jackpot in which the probability change flag is turned on, the BGM change lottery will be held twice from the start of the jackpot game state until the transition to the high probability stage 2004 via the secret A stage 2002. Become. However, when winning the BGM change lottery held in the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the BGM change lottery in the subsequent secret A stage 2002.

When winning the BGM change lottery, the sub CPU 201 outputs a high probability BGM that confirms a high probability gaming state from the speaker 24 through the audio control circuit 205. Therefore, when transitioning from concealment A stage 2002 to high accuracy stage 2004, high accuracy definite BGM was not always output, and even when transitioning from concealment A stage 2002 to high accuracy stage 2004, only a part of it was output. Highly accurate BGM is not output.

Note that although the sub CPU 201 controls the highly accurate BGM to be output in response to winning the BGM change lottery, it also controls the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in response to winning the BGM change lottery. I won't change it. Therefore, even if the highly accurate BGM is output, the flow of the effect images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 remains unchanged.

When the sub CPU 201 wins the BGM change lottery, the sub CPU 201 also determines the timing to output the highly certain confirmed BGM (that is, the timing to change from the normal BGM to the highly certain confirmed BGM). The timing of outputting the highly certain BGM is, for example, during the jackpot game state or during the secret A stage 2002.

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery held in the jackpot gaming state, when outputting highly certain confirmed BGM during the jackpot gaming state, the sub CPU 201 also outputs the BGM when the jackpot gaming state ends and shifts to the secret A stage 2002. Then, control is performed so that highly accurate BGM is output. However, regarding the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 controls so that the effect image normally displayed on the secret A stage 2002 is displayed.

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery held in the jackpot game state, when outputting highly accurate confirmed BGM during the secret A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 determines at which timing in the secret A stage 2002 the BGM should be output in the jackpot game state. Predetermine during. The output timing of the highly certain definite BGM is first determined in increments of a certain number of times of time saving, and then randomly selected within the range of the determined number of times of time saving. To explain in detail, for example, when the number of time saving times is 48 times, 1 to 6 times, 7 to 12 times, 13 to 18 times, 19 to 24 times, 25 to 30 times, 31 to 36 times, 37 to 42 times, 43 Pre-determine one of the 48 groups. Next, it is predetermined at which timing among the determined groups the highly accurate BGM is to be output. For example, when a group of 13 to 18 times is determined, the sub CPU 201 predetermines the timing for outputting the highly accurate BGM within the range of 13 to 18 times. For example, if the 16th time is determined, the sub CPU 201 outputs the highly accurate BGM at the 16th time saving variable display.

Note that, when the starting memory is suspended in the secret A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 sets temporary fluctuations for each starting memory as described above. The sub CPU 201 also determines which provisional variation to output the high-accuracy confirmed BGM in the same way as the character subtraction effect. For example, if the timing to output the highly accurate BGM is predetermined at the 16th time saving, the sub CPU 201 outputs all or part of the provisional variation set for the start memory suspended at the 16th time. , to output highly accurate BGM. At this time, the high-accuracy BGM is similar to the medium attack performance as a character subtraction performance, and is based on the temporary fluctuation set for the first starting memory and the starting memory to be digested next to the first starting memory. It may also be executed across temporary fluctuations set for the target. In this way, the highly accurate BGM can be executed regardless of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit. .

[Ahead production selection processing (high accuracy stage)]
Next, the pre-read effect selection process in the high accuracy stage 2004 will be explained using FIGS. 153 to 156. FIG. 153 is an example of a flowchart showing the pre-read effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the current performance state is the high accuracy stage 2004 (step S500 in FIG. 153). When it is determined that the current performance state is the high accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500), the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a starting prize (winning in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). It is determined (step S502). When it is determined that there is a starting prize (YES in step S502), the sub CPU 201 selects by lottery which type of performance is to be performed for the suspended starting memory (step S504). The effects include, for example, a ready-to-reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a lamp effect, a movable effect of a so-called character, a pseudo lotus effect, a change in a pending image, and a look-ahead effect to be described later.

In step S506, it is determined whether the effect selected in the lottery in step S504 is a pre-read effect (step S506 in FIG. 153). The look-ahead effect in this embodiment is a mode in which a related effect is performed across the starting memory held in the high-accuracy stage 2004 and the starting memory that won a prize before the starting memory (including a plurality of starting memories). It is. Details of the look-ahead performance will be described later. When it is determined that a pre-read effect is to be performed (YES in step S506), a pre-read effect section determination process is performed (step S508). Here, "it is determined that a pre-read effect is to be performed" indicates that the player has won a lottery in which a pre-read effect is performed.

Here, the look-ahead effect section determination process will be explained using FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern when determining a section in which a look-ahead effect is to be performed. Here, the upper frame in FIG. 154(A) indicates a reservation frame, and the numbers 1 to 4 within the reservation frame indicate the first to fourth reservations. The lower frame located below the hold frame indicates the performance type frame, and describes what kind of performance is scheduled to be performed in each hold. In this embodiment, the fourth hold is a hold that won during the high-precision stage 2004 (YES in step S502 in FIG. 153) and for which it has been decided to perform a look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). be. Then, it has been decided that a black effect will be performed in the first hold (FIG. 154(A)). For example, the ink effect is a effect that instantly turns the entire screen dark as if ink has been spilled on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16, or a display that overlaps the spilled ink to create a message of ``opportunity'' or ``opportunity.'' '' and other characters are shown written with a brush.

The look-ahead effect section determination process is performed by lottery for all stored start memories, so in this embodiment as well, as long as start memories are held in the first to fourth holds, all these start It can be done in memory. However, in this embodiment, since it has already been decided that the black effect will be performed in the first suspension, in this case, the corresponding section should not be included in the target section determined in the pre-read effect section determination process. You can also use it as Also, regarding the starting memory that is suspended next to the starting memory in which it is decided that the ink effect will be performed (Fig. 154
(corresponding to the second suspension in (B)), is not included in the target section determined in the look-ahead performance section determination process. This is because the ink effect performed in the variable display for the start memory that is stored as the first hold is an effect that may arouse expectations in the player by itself, so it is stored as the first hold. It is preferable to clearly separate the ink effect performed on the variable display regarding the starting memory of the fourth hold and the look-ahead effect related to the start memory of the fourth hold (the look-ahead effect performed during the third hold and the fourth hold). It is from. In other words, by deciding that the ink effect will be performed in the first hold and no special effect in the second hold, the look-ahead effect related to the fourth hold (the effect performed in the third hold and the fourth hold) will be It can have the effect of increasing expectations and interest.

Furthermore, if a look-ahead effect related to the fourth hold is performed including the ink effect performed during the first hold, that is, a look-ahead effect is performed in the section from the first hold to the fourth hold, it would be difficult for the player to While it is possible to have a sense of anticipation when these performances are performed consecutively, one wonders if these series of performances are consecutive performances of different categories, or whether related performances are performed consecutively as pre-reading performances. This has the disadvantage that it is difficult to determine whether it is being played in advance or not, which may actually end up making it less interesting as a pre-reading performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(C), when it is determined that the sections in which the look-ahead effect is to be performed are the third hold and the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153), the effect scenario to be performed in these holds is set. (Step S510 in FIG. 154). For the performance scenario, a general lottery is performed for each reservation, and the performance scenario is set only for the reservations that win the lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, if a large lottery is won for the third hold (see the third hold in FIG. 154(D)), the production scenario is set for the third hold, and the fourth hold is set for the fourth hold. 3. The performance will be based on the scenario determined during the hold period.

The performance scenario includes a performance that affects the development of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and a performance that does not affect the development of the hold due to the development of the look-ahead. The expression that the development of the prefetch affects the development of the suspension in question means that the same effect as the prefetch effect is also performed in the suspension, and corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned ink effect. An example of a performance that does not affect the development of the pre-reading is a performance that is performed only while the pre-reading development is suspended, such as a moving performance of a character. For the production that affects the development of the pre-reading, a scenario lottery is performed for the suspension before the suspension (corresponding to the third suspension in this embodiment). On the other hand, for an effect that does not affect the development of the pre-reading, a scenario lottery is performed including the suspension (corresponding to the fourth suspension in this embodiment).

When a performance scenario is set for the hold that won the large lottery (step S510 in FIG. 153), details of the pre-read performance are selected (step S512). An example of selecting details of the prefetch effect will be described using FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of selecting details of a look-ahead effect. In FIG. 155(A), a starting prize is won in the fourth hold at the high accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500 and YES in S502 in FIG. 153), and it is determined to perform a look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). , an example of a state in which a look-ahead performance section and a performance scenario have been determined.

To explain in detail the determination of the look-ahead performance section and the performance scenario, the section where the look-ahead performance is performed is drawn by lottery from all stored starting memories, so in this embodiment, the section where the look-ahead performance is performed is the first reservation. ~4th pending (step S508 in FIG. 153). There are at least two types of performance scenarios for the look-ahead performance; the first is a performance that affects the development of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and the second is Depending on the development, there are effects that do not affect the development in question. As a performance that affects the development of the reservation by the development of the look-ahead, reservations other than the reservation (first reservation to third reservation) are drawn by lottery. Here, the hold is drawn by lottery as a variable effect. As a result, in this embodiment, it is decided that the black effect will be performed in the second hold and the third hold. For productions that do not affect the development of the pre-reading, a lottery is drawn for performances including the suspension (first suspension to fourth suspension). As a result, in this embodiment, it is determined that the accessory movement will be performed from the first hold to the fourth hold.

In this case, when the starting memory held in the 1st to 4th holds is digested, the ink effect is performed while the accessory continues to move, and even though the ink effect has ended, the accessory The player will encounter a situation where the player can move. In this case, it is difficult for the player to determine whether these series of performances are individual performances or related performances. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(B), if it is determined that the ink effect like the third hold is not performed in the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment), the fourth hold , effects that do not affect the development of the prefetch (in this embodiment, movable accessories) are canceled (rewritten to "none").

<Countdown performance>
It is determined whether the details of the prefetch effect selected in step S512 of FIG. 153 are a countdown effect (step S514). The countdown effect in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example in which the details of the look-ahead effect are a countdown effect. FIG. 156(A) shows that the fourth pending prize is entered during the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500 and YES in step S502 in FIG. 153), and it is decided to perform a look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). ), an example of a state in which a look-ahead performance section and a performance scenario have been determined.

To explain in detail the determination of the look-ahead performance section and the performance scenario, the section where the look-ahead performance is performed is drawn by lottery from all stored starting memories, so in this embodiment, the section where the look-ahead performance is performed is the first reservation. ~4th pending (step S508 in FIG. 153). There are at least two types of performance scenarios for the look-ahead performance, the first is a performance that affects the development of the relevant (corresponding to the fourth suspension in this embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and the second is a performance that affects the development of the look-ahead. Depending on the development, there are effects that do not affect the development in question. It has been decided that a countdown effect will be performed in the first to third holds as an effect that affects the development of the hold based on the development of the look-ahead. Here, the hold is drawn by lottery as a variable performance. For productions that do not affect the development of the pre-reading, a lottery is drawn for performances including the suspension (first suspension to fourth suspension). As a result, in this embodiment, it is determined that the accessory movement will be performed from the first hold to the fourth hold.

In this case, when the first hold to the fourth hold are completed, a countdown effect is performed while the accessory moves continuously, and even though the countdown effect is not performed in the fourth hold, the accessory is The player will encounter a situation in which the object is movable. If the countdown reaches 0 (zero), it is guaranteed to be a jackpot (win in the main CPU 101), but if the countdown does not reach 0, it is guaranteed to be a loss. When the movement of the role object in the fourth hold is performed, it is not only difficult for the player to judge whether these series of performances are individual performances or related performances, but also because of other performances. (In this embodiment, the movable accessory) may be perceived as meaningless by the player.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S514 of FIG. 153 that the selected effect is a countdown effect (YES in step S514), it is determined whether the result of the selected countdown effect is a fake (step S516). . When it is determined that the result of the selected countdown performance is false (YES in step S516), it is determined whether another performance scenario has been decided to the point of suspension (step S518). If it is determined that other production scenarios have been decided up to the suspension (YES in step S518), the other production scenarios in the suspension are canceled (step S520).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 156(B), when it is determined that the countdown effect that is performed across the first to third holds is not performed in the variation (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment). In the fourth suspension, the effect (in this embodiment, movable accessories) that does not affect the development of the pre-reading is canceled (rewritten to "none").

<Background change control processing>
In the game machine of this embodiment, during a game on the normal stage 2000, a pre-read effect of the suspended starting memory is performed, which involves a change in the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. A look-ahead performance of a suspended starting memory accompanied by a background change is a background change as a performance for a starting memory (the suspension) that was suspended due to a winning start (winning in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). When it is decided by lottery to perform the suspension, a performance based on the background change scenario of the suspension is performed across the starting memory that was suspended before the suspension, giving continuity to the background change of the suspension. It is. Variations of look-ahead effects include, in addition to image previews, lamp previews, accessory notices, and the like. Background change control processing will be explained using FIGS. 157 to 160.

FIG. 157 is an example of a flowchart showing background change control processing. FIG. 158 is an example of a flowchart illustrating a process for determining the possible number of consecutive background changes. FIG. 159 is an example of a table regarding background change control and background change scenarios. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of background change control processing according to this embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting memory (the pending) that was held due to the starting winning (winning in the first starting opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440) has won the background change lottery (Fig. 157 step S530). If it is determined that the relevant hold has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530), a process for determining the number of consecutive possible background changes is performed based on the starting memory of the hold held before the relevant hold until the background change of the relevant hold. It is determined how many variations the performance can span over (step S532). The processing for determining the possible number of consecutive background changes will be described later with reference to FIG. 158.

When the sub CPU 201 determines the possible number of consecutive background changes in the process of determining the number of consecutive background changes, it performs a background change scenario lottery for the suspension (step S534). The background change scenario lottery is selected from the background change scenario table in FIG. 159(A). When a predetermined background change scenario is selected from the background change scenario table in FIG. 159(A) (step S534 in FIG. 157), the sub CPU 201 selects the effect information set in each starting memory related to the background change scenario, for example. , information related to variable effects such as "out of reach" and "out of reach" are rewritten into a background transition table based on the background change scenario (step S536 in FIG. 157). Examples of background change scenarios will be described later.

The process of determining the possible number of consecutive background changes in the background change control process of FIG. 157 will be described with reference to FIG. 158. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S530 in the background change control process that the starting memory that has been put on hold due to the starting prize winning (the said hold) has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530 in FIG. 157), the sub CPU 201 executes the background change in FIG. 158. In the process of determining the number of consecutive performances possible, the number of consecutive performances possible until the pending background change is determined (step S540 in FIG. 158). The consecutive possible number of times refers to the number of starting memories of a section that has not won a separate background change lottery due to a normal fluctuation, going back from the reservation that is the target of the background change (the reservation).

A case where the winning start memory (the pending) is 4 (fourth pending) will be explained using FIG. 160. In Fig. 160(A), when the hold is won, the starting memory is held from the 1st hold to the 3rd hold, and the performance content of "normal loss" is set for each of the 1st hold to the 3rd hold. It is in a state of being In other words, the number of pending items is "4". In the process of determining the number of consecutive possible background changes in FIG. 158, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is possible to perform continuous effects related to the pending background change for three starting memories, excluding the pending starting memory, among these four starting memories. Determine whether

In step S542 of FIG. 158, the sub CPU 201 decrements (subtracts) the number of pending items, resulting in 4-1=3. In other words, it is determined whether or not the third reservation among the first to third reservations can be continued. In step S544, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the number of pending items is not 0 (step S544 in FIG. 158). As described above, since the number of pending items 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), the sub CPU 201 next determines whether or not the third pending item satisfies the continuation possible condition (step S546). The continuation possible conditions are the conditions listed in the continuation possible condition table in FIG. 159(B).

The continuation possible condition in FIG. 159(B) is that the referenced hold (starting memory) is "1" where the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is normal fluctuation, and "2" in the background change scenario of FIG. 159(A). (None) or normal type", or "3" has not won the pending change lottery. In other words, the pending display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner different from the default display mode due to the pending change lottery. This is not to say that the player has not won the "4" pre-reading effect lottery, that is, he has not been the target of another pre-reading effect. The sub CPU 201 determines that continuation is possible only when all of the conditions "1" to "4" above are met.

Here, since the third hold in FIG. 160(A) is a "normal loss", it satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). Therefore, the third hold is a start hold that allows for a look-ahead effect. Then, in step S548 of FIG. 158, the possible consecutive number of times is incremented (added) (step S548 of FIG. 158). In other words, the number of consecutive possible times is 0+1=1. The process of incrementing the number of continuations is repeated until the number of pending items becomes zero or the conditions for continuations can no longer be met.

In this embodiment, when the number of reservations is decremented, 3-1=2 (step S542 in FIG. 158), and it is determined whether or not the second reservation can be continued. Since the number of pending items 2 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether the second pending item satisfies the continuation possible condition (step S546). Since the second hold in FIG. 160(A) is a "normal loss", it satisfies all conditions (1) to (4) for continuation. In other words, since the second suspension can also be prefetched, the possible consecutive number of times is incremented at step S548 in FIG. 158 (step S548 in FIG. 158), so the possible consecutive number of times is 1+1=2.

Furthermore, when the number of reservations is decremented, 2-1=1 (step S542 in FIG. 158), and it is determined whether or not the first reservation can be continued. Since the number of pending items 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the first pending item satisfies the continuation possible condition (step S546). Since the first hold in FIG. 160(A) is a "normal loss", it satisfies all conditions (1) to (4) for continuation. In other words, since the first reservation can also be pre-fetched, the possible consecutive number of times is incremented at step S548 in FIG. 158 (step S548 in FIG. 158), so the possible consecutive number of times is 2+1=3. Next, when the number of pending objects is decremented, 1-1=0 (step S544 in FIG. 158), and the number of pending objects becomes 0 (NO in step S544). Therefore, in the process of determining the possible number of consecutive background changes, it is determined that the possible number of consecutive changes is 3. It is determined that there is.

If it is determined in the background change consecutive possible number of times determination process that the consecutive possible number of times is 3 (step S532 in FIG. 157), a background change scenario is selected by lottery based on the background change scenario table in FIG. 159(A). The number of consecutive possible readings refers to the number of times that pre-reading is possible, so in this embodiment, the number of consecutive readings possible is 3 in FIG. 3.No. 7~No. 9, No. 13~No. 15, No. 19~No. Selected from 21.

For example, background change scenario No. When 3 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are all "normal". Also, for example, background change scenario No. If 20 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, 2 changes before, and 1 change before are sequentially "normal", "evening", and "evening". It has become. This is because by the time the suspension (fourth suspension) changes, the background changes from the normal background to the evening background, and it is expected that some kind of story effect will be performed continuously.

In addition, for example, background change scenario No. When 9 is selected, the background change scenario type is "Japanese style", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, 2 changes before, and 1 change before are all "Japanese style mansion". This can be used as an effect that gives more anticipation than the "normal" background change scenario type. Also, for example, background change scenario No. 13~No. When No. 15 is selected, the background change scenario type is "invasion" and can be used as a production with even higher expectations than the "Japanese style" state described above. In particular, regarding the background change scenario type "Invasion", since an "enemy attack" effect is performed in the background change scenario, it may indicate a transition to some special mode (zone).

The example in FIG. 160(B) will be explained. In Figure 160 (B), when the relevant hold wins, the starting memory is held from the 1st hold to the 3rd hold, and the performance content of "normal loss" is set for the 2nd hold to the 3rd hold, respectively. However, it can be seen that "background change", that is, a background change scenario is set in the first hold. In this case, the number of pending items is "4", and in the process of determining the possible number of consecutive background changes in FIG. Determine whether or not it is possible.

In step S542 of FIG. 158, when the number of pending items is decremented, it becomes 4-1=3, and it is determined whether or not the third pending item can be continued. As described above, since the number of pending items 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the third pending item satisfies the continuation possible condition (step S546). Since the third hold in FIG. 160(B) is a "normal loss", it satisfies all conditions (1) to (4) for continuation. Therefore, since the third suspension can be pre-fetched, the possible consecutive number of times is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158). In other words, the number of consecutive possible times is 0+1=1. The same applies to the second hold, so the possible number of consecutive holds is 1+1=2.

Then, in step S542 of FIG. 158, when the number of reservations is decremented, 2-1=1, and it is determined whether or not the first reservation can be continued. As described above, since the number of pending items 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the first pending item satisfies the continuation possible condition (step S546). The first reservation in FIG. 160(B) is "background change", so in the background change scenario of FIG. 159(A) of (2) among the consecutive possible conditions (1) to (4), ) or normal type.

Then, in step S546 of FIG. 158, it is determined that the continuation possible condition is not cleared (NO in step S546 of FIG. 158), so in the background change continuation possible number determination process, it is determined that the continuation possible number is 2. be done.

<Fluctuation scenario determination process>
The fluctuation scenario determination process performed when the suspended starting memory (for example, the first suspension to the fourth suspension) starts to fluctuate will be described with reference to FIG. 161. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the starting memory that is suspended due to a starting winning (winning at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440) is a background performance change effect related to the starting memory that was held after the suspension. Or, by pre-read presentation, the presentation information may be rewritten to be different from the information at the time of winning. Therefore, a predetermined effect is selected according to the conditions given at the start of the variation.

FIG. 161 is an example of a flowchart showing the variation scenario determination process. In the variation scenario determination process, it is determined whether or not the variation is started at the start of the variation when the starting prize or the suspended starting memory is consumed by the variation (step S550 in FIG. 161). If it is determined that it is the time to start the fluctuation (YES in step S550), it is determined whether the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is normal (step S552). The normal type includes, for example, effects that are different from effects that affect the player's interest in some way, such as attacks and assaults, which will be described later.

If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is the normal type (YES in step S552), it is determined whether or not it is an exception target among the normal types (step S554). The exception target is, for example, among the performances determined by the background change scenario lottery in the background change control process described above, if it is determined that the variation is a production that enters a Japanese-style mansion, "2". ``If it is determined that the change in question is the effect of entering the enemy attack effect, ``3'' If the change corresponds to the next change in the final evening background.

If it is determined that the object is an exception target (YES in step S554), an effect according to the exception condition is executed in normal background exception processing (step S556). For example, if "1" the variation in question is determined to be a production of rushing into a Japanese-style mansion, a scenario lottery with a Japanese-style background is executed, and "2" the variation is a production of entering an enemy attack production. If it is determined that this is the case, set the effect related to enemy attack in the normal background scenario lottery, and do nothing if the change in question corresponds to the next change in the evening background final. It will be done. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not an exception target (NO in step S554), a normal background scenario lottery is performed (step S558).

If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is not normal (NO in step S552), it is determined whether the background is evening (step S560). If it is determined that the background is evening (YES in step S560), an evening background scenario lottery is performed (step S562). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not evening (NO in step S560), it is determined whether the background is Japanese style (step S564). If it is determined that the background is Japanese-style (YES in step S564), a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is performed (step S566).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not Japanese style (NO in step S564), it is determined whether the background is an invasion (step S568). If it is determined that the background is an attack (YES in step S568), a scenario lottery for an attack background is performed (step S570). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not an attack (NO in step S570), an assault background scenario lottery is performed (step S572). The level of expectation for the performances performed as a result of these scenario lottery increases in the following order: normal background, evening background, exception to normal background, Japanese style, attack, and assault.

<Chance up control process>
In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, regardless of whether it is the normal stage 2000 or the high accuracy stage 2004, the chance of generating a performance related to the first performance that occurs as a fluctuating performance that develops into a super reach is increased. Control processing is possible. The chance up control process will be explained using FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an example of a flowchart showing the chance up control process.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect currently being displayed during the change is the effect that is being changed (step S580 in FIG. 162). If it is determined that the effect currently being displayed during the change is the effect that is being changed (YES in step S580), it is determined whether or not to increase the chance (step S582). If it is determined that the chance up is to be executed (YES in step S582), it is determined whether or not the chance up has already been performed in the variation. That is, it is determined whether the chance up flag is not 1 (step S584).

If it is determined in step S584 that the chance up flag is not 1 (YES in step S584), a chance up introduction effect is set (step S586). This means that the chance up flag is not 1, which means that the chance up effect has not yet been performed in the variation. Therefore, a normal performance that can be used as a chance-up performance is selected. When the chance up introduction effect is set in step S586 (step S586), the chance up flag is set to 1 (step S588).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S584 that the chance up flag is 1 (NO in step S584), a chance up performance related to the previously executed performance is set (step S600). For example, if the previously executed performance, that is, the performance performed based on the chance-up introduction performance, was a conversation performance in which character A appears, character A will appear again as a chance-up performance, and the previous conversation Examples include productions in which the conversation is developed while being related to character A, and production in which character O, who is related to character A, appears and develops into a super reach. In this way, by controlling the performance that occurs later to be related to or develops the performance that occurs first, it is possible to increase expectations for the super reach performance.

When the chance-up flag is set to 1 in step S588 (step S588) or a chance-up effect related to the previously executed effect is set in step S600 (step S600), it is determined whether or not the variation has ended (step S590). . If it is determined that the variation has ended (YES in step S590), the character lamp flag is set to 0 (step S592). On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation has not ended (NO in step S590), the chance up control process ends.

<Pending change determination process>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the starting memory is suspended due to a starting prize (winning in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), the player can visually recognize that the starting memory has been suspended. Display (or notify) in the following manner. As a display mode, for example, the number may be displayed on a part of the liquid crystal display device 16. Further, the display (design) of the suspended starting memory can be changed if a predetermined condition is met. A pending change is a change in a pending image. The pending change determination process will be explained using FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is an example of a flowchart showing the pending change determination process.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a pending prize winning (step S610 in FIG. 163). Whether or not there is a pending winning does not mean whether there is a starting winning (a winning in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), but rather, as mentioned above, the starting memory is held and the reservation is made. Indicates that the display can be displayed in a manner that is visible to the user. If it is determined that the winning is pending (YES in step S610), a pending change scenario lottery is performed (step S612).

In the pending change scenario lottery in step S612, scenarios related to pending changes are selected by lottery. Specifically, the scenario regarding pending change is how many times should the showdown be held (the number of battles n decision), whether to make a pending change, etc. The mode of the confrontation may be, for example, a ninjutsu confrontation. Note that in this embodiment, the maximum number of battles is eight. Once a predetermined scenario is determined in the pending change scenario lottery at step S612 (step S612), it is then determined which character to select from the A group (step S614). Depending on the characters selected here, there may be a character that always results in victory for A (pending change confirmed).

Next, in step S616, the character and scenario of B who will face off against A are selected by lottery. Here, in the present embodiment, only one character is selected from the A force in the A character lottery in step S614, but up to eight characters are selected from the B force to face off against. The story, cut-in, and other scenarios for the character's appearance will also be determined by lottery for the character scenario. Depending on the characters selected here, there may be a character that always results in victory for A (pending change confirmed).

Next, a confrontation process is performed in step S618 (step S618). If A wins (YES in step S6620), the pending image is changed in the pending change process. Changes in the pending image include, for example, changing the starting memory image that was displayed as a red shuriken image to a yellow shuriken image, or changing what was displayed as a shuriken image to a ninja book (scroll). The display may be different from the current display. When one battle is completed, 1 is subtracted from the number of battles n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined in step S624 that the number of confrontations after being subtracted is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations becomes 0.

When the number of confrontations subtracted in step S626 becomes 0 (YES in step S626), a development effect process is performed in step S628 (step S628). In the development effect processing, there is an effect that develops into a super reach after the confrontation between Force A and Force B ends.

On the other hand, in step S620, if A is not victorious in the confrontation between A and B (NO in step S620), it is determined whether or not it is a draw (step S630). If it is determined that it is a draw (YES in step S630), 1 is subtracted from the number of confrontations n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined in step S626 that the number of confrontations subtracted is not 0 (NO in step S626), a confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations becomes 0.

When the development effect processing ends in step S628 or it is determined that the game is not a tie in step S630 (NO in step S630), the pending change determination processing ends. In addition, a pseudo-ren may be used in the performance regarding the confrontation between the A force and the O force in the hold change.

[Character lamp]
In this embodiment, when the character lamp (LED 1562) emits light, a picture of a character or the like appears inside the opening window 1552. Note that in the following, the character lamp (LED 1562) will be simply referred to as a character lamp.

The sub CPU 201 selects an effect in which the character lamp lights up when the variable display of the identification symbol starts, and may also draw a lottery to determine whether or not the character lamp lights up in the effect lottery when the effect button 62 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed. .

In this case, there is a timing at which the character lamp selected at the start of the variable display of the identification symbol lights up, and a timing at which the character lamp selected by lottery when the production button 62 is pressed, lights up, so the variable display is performed only once. It is also possible that there are timings in which the character lamp lights up multiple times. For this reason, the earliest timing is adopted for lighting the character lamps, and the sub CPU 201 controls the character lamps so that once they are turned on, they are not turned on again.

FIGS. 164A to 164C are examples of sequence charts showing lighting control of character lamps, respectively. In FIGS. 164(A) to (C), between the start of the variable display of identification symbols and the end of the variable display, the first production lottery is executed at the start of the variable display as a production, and as a result, a conversation preview is announced in the first half. is executed, a second performance lottery is executed in the middle, and as a result, a special reach (hereinafter referred to as "SP reach") is executed in the second half.

The example shown in FIG. 164(A) represents a case where the timing of lamp lighting is selected twice during one variable display. In the illustrated example, there is an executable period for the character lamp effect in the first half of the conversation preview, and there is also an executable period for the character lamp effect in the second half SP reach.

The example shown in FIG. 164(B) represents a case where the effect button 62 is pressed. In the illustrated example, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect upon pressing the effect button 62 in the first half of the conversation preview, and does not execute the character lamp effect in the second half of the SP reach.

The example shown in FIG. 164(C) represents a case where the effect button 62 is not pressed. In the illustrated example, the production button 62 is not pressed in the first half of the conversation preview, while the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp production in the SP reach of the second half.

If it is determined that the character lamp will be lit when the production button 62 is pressed at the start of the variable display, if the production button 62 is not pressed during the button production, the character lamp will be identified without any timing to turn on the character lamp. Although it is conceivable that the variable display of symbols may end, it is possible to separately perform the lottery for the effect in which the character lamps drawn at the start of the variable display are lit, and the lottery for the lighting of the character lamps when the effect button 62 is pressed. Since the character lamps are controlled in this way, various lighting timings of the character lamps can be prepared.

FIG. 165 is an example of a flowchart showing a control process for character lamp effects. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the performance is being displayed in a variable manner (step S801), and if the performance is not being displayed in a variable manner, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807). If the effect is medium, it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S802).

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended if it is not the executable period of the character lamp effect (step S807), while determining whether the character lamp flag is 1 if it is the execution period of the character lamp effect. It is determined whether there is one (step S803).

If the character lamp flag is 1 (the character lamp effect has been executed), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the variable display has ended (step S807), and if the character lamp flag is not 1 (the character lamp effect has not yet been executed), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807). (Execution), it is determined whether the execution conditions for the character lamp effect are satisfied (step S804). The execution conditions for the character lamp effect include, for example, pressing the effect button 62 or elapse of a predetermined variable display time.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended if the execution conditions for the character lamp performance are not met (step S807), while executing the character lamp performance if the execution conditions for the character lamp performance are met. (Step S805).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the character lamp flag to 1 (step S806). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the variable display has ended (step S807). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display has not ended, it ends the process, but if it determines that the variable display has ended, it sets the character lamp flag to 0 (step S808).

The above content has been described as an embodiment with the variable display as an example, but it is not limited to this, and the execution of the character lamp effect is controlled during the look-ahead effect or the look-ahead effect + the effect during the variable display as one period. You may also do this.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164(B), when the production button 62 is operated, a specific notification mode, for example, a conversation preview (first production execution means) and an SP reach (second performance execution means) capable of executing a character lamp performance when the variable display of the identification symbol reaches a predetermined time during the same variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 164(C), in the conversation preview, the character lamp effect is not executed if the effect button 62 is not operated, while in SP reach, as shown in FIG. 164(C), the character lamp effect is not executed. , if the character lamp effect is executed in the conversation preview, the character lamp effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 164(C), if the character lamp effect is not executed in the conversation preview, the character lamp effect is not executed. Execute the performance.

Furthermore, it can be expressed as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a character lamp performance as a predetermined performance, and can perform a lottery in which the character lamp performance is executed under a first condition (for example, triggered by pressing the performance button 62). Each of these can be made executable by a first lottery that can be performed and a second lottery that can be performed under a second condition (for example, time elapsed) that is different from the first lottery. In the case where each of the above becomes executable, the first condition may not be satisfied depending on the gaming situation. If the first condition is met, the character lamp performance can be executed under the first condition, and the second condition is invalidated, and if the first condition is not met, the character lamp effect is invalidated. Only occasionally, when the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect can be executed, for example, at an execution timing different from when the first condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, it can be expressed as follows. That is, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and executes the character lamp effect as a first condition, for example, when the button shown in FIG. 164(A) is pressed. Each of them becomes executable by a first lottery that allows a lottery to be drawn and a second lottery that allows a lottery to be executed at the time shown in FIG. 164(A) as a second condition different from the first lottery. sell. When each of the above becomes executable, if the second condition is satisfied, the character lamp performance is executed, while the first condition is a condition that is not satisfied or becomes invalid depending on the game situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 164(B), if the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed under the first condition, and also when the second condition is satisfied. be invalidated (or discarded).

[Full screen preview]
FIG. 166 is an example of a flowchart showing control of full-screen production, and FIGS.
(C) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen display. In this embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command to execute a full screen effect in the normal effect state shown in FIG. By doing so, the audio control circuit 205 is controlled and the volume of the specific channel (the channel where the sound of the symbol is played) is set to 0.

Note that the audio control circuit 205 controls not to output symbol sounds during full-screen production, but the error screen after power recovery (i.e., the full-screen error screen indicating that variable display is in progress) ) is displayed, the symbol sound is output.

However, in this example, the full-screen error screen is the error screen after the power is restored, but the full-screen error screen does not necessarily have to be the error screen after the power is restored.For example, when an error occurs, The purpose is to include information screens related to gaming machines that are not related to jackpot determination, such as message screens and warning screens when fraud is committed, that are displayed on the full screen in a manner that makes it impossible to see the variable display of identification symbols. .

The audio control circuit 205 has a 4-channel (execution system) sound source for performing audio control such as notification sounds, symbol sounds, sound effects, and BGM, and based on messages (production designation information) from the sub CPU 201. For example, these can be played back on each of four channels (execution systems). In this embodiment, a channel number is assigned to each channel. For example, channel number 1 is a notification sound, channel number 2 is a symbol sound, channel number 3 is a sound effect, and channel number 4 is a BGM. be.

Explaining along the flowchart shown in FIG. 166, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a full screen effect is being executed (step S901), and if it is not a full screen effect, ends the process. On the other hand, if it is a full screen effect, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a power failure recovery as shown in FIG. 167(B) (step S902).

If it is not a power failure recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets a full screen effect (step S903). Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message specifying channel number 2, which is the symbol sound channel, to the audio control circuit 205, and instructs the audio control circuit 205 that received this message to set the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0. (step S904).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(C), in the case of recovery from power failure, the sub CPU 201 sets a screen during recovery from power failure (step S905). This is because the effect is not memorized when the power is restored, so the screen during the power restoration is simply displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message to the audio control circuit 205, and causes the audio control circuit 205 that received the message to output the volume of the symbol channel regarding the symbol sound channel number 2 (step S906). This may be changed to a louder sound than the stop sound of the symbol during the normal performance.

In the process described above, the sound of the symbol is not emitted when full-screen production is performed as a production, but if a power outage occurs after that, the command for full-screen production is sent again when the power is restored. In such a case, by controlling the volume of the symbol sound channel (channel number: 2) to be output, the screen for recovering from a power failure will be covered, and the LCD display 16 will be displayed. Even when the displayed identification pattern cannot be seen, it is possible to understand that the identification pattern has stopped due to the pattern stop sound.

To put the above-mentioned embodiment in other words, during display production, production tones can be output from multiple channels according to the system, and as the mode of display production changes, channels (for example, channel number 2 , 3, 4 symbol sound channels, sound effect channels, BGM channels), while the symbol system channels (for example, channel number 2 symbol channel) are fixed. , the output sound from the channel of the symbol system is muted depending on the mode of symbol display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the performance while reducing unnecessary processing for the performance, so that the processing can be performed smoothly.

In addition, if we look at the embodiments as described above differently, the production can be performed using a plurality of channels, for example, the notification sound channels of channel numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4, the symbol sound channel, the sound effect channel, and the BGM channel. A shared channel that can output tones according to the system and change the production tone output from the channel as the display production mode changes, for example, channels with channel numbers 2, 3, 4, and effects. It has a sound channel, a BGM channel, and each channel for the warning system and symbol system, for example, channels for the notification sound and symbol sound of channel numbers 1 and 2, and the production tones are transmitted through the shared channel according to the mode of display production. On the other hand, when a specific display effect is executed, for example, the full screen display shown in FIG. 167(B), the state of the warning system channel is maintained and the output sound from the symbol system channel is muted. It can also be said that.

In the above-described embodiment, the channel number of the symbol sound channel is fixed to 2 (hereinafter also referred to as "fixed channel method"), but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on a message (performance designation information) from the CPU 201, for example, an empty, unused channel among the four channels (execution system) may be dynamically allocated, and each sound may be reproduced individually.

In this case, the sub CPU 201 stores a specific channel number representing a specific channel on which the symbol sound is being reproduced, and, for example, when executing a full screen effect, the sub CPU 201 instructs the audio control circuit 205 to A message specifying the number is transmitted, and the voice control circuit 205 that receives the message is made to set the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0. Even in this case, the same effect as the fixed channel method can be achieved.

[2. Pachinko gaming machine according to second embodiment]
Although the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, it may also be a pachinko game machine that has a setting function, for example. The principle of a pachinko game machine having this setting function will be explained below as a pachinko game machine according to a second embodiment. Note that the external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is similar to the external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Further, descriptions of the configurations common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

First, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 168 to 171. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the jackpot probability of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 169 shows the hit type (hereinafter referred to as "main 170 is a diagram showing an example of the selection rate (jackpot type determination table) of the special symbol (referred to as "symbol"), and FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table stored in the main ROM 102. be. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in the following description, terms such as main CPU 101 and main RAM 103, which are not shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, are used, but these are shown in FIG.

In explaining the probability of jackpot shown in FIG. 168, first, jackpot in pachinko gaming machines will be briefly explained.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 420 (see FIG. 5, for example), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter, and extracts the random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter. Referring to the first special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), a jackpot determination (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbol jackpot determination") is performed for the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. Note that extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot game state is controlled.

Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects winning of a game ball into the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 5, for example), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. Referring to the second special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), a jackpot determination (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol jackpot determination") is performed for the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. Incidentally, the extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot game state is controlled.

When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, either a "jackpot" or a "loss" is determined. Moreover, when the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is performed, it is determined as either a "jackpot" or a "loss" similarly to the jackpot determination for the first special symbol. The jackpot random number determination table for the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table for the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103 each contain values of probability variable flags (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)”). ), the relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as “jackpot” or “loss” and the corresponding determination value data (“jackpot determination value data” and “loss determination value data”) is stipulated.

In this second embodiment, the total random number for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random numbers for jackpot determination are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot judgment value data for the range of jackpot judgment random numbers. Note that the range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

Note that the probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state" or not. When the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is a "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is a "time-saving gaming state", the time-saving flag is "1", and when it is a "non-time-saving gaming state", the time-saving flag is "0". In addition, in the time saving game state, the number of time saving times is also managed by the main CPU 101, and each time the special symbol changes once, the number of time saving times is subtracted by 1.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined as a normal win in the normal winning determination (normal winning probability) is increased compared to the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, compared to the non-time-saving game state, the frequency at which the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state, that is, the frequency at which the game ball enters the second starting port 440 is increased. However, in the time-saving gaming state, instead of increasing the normal winning probability compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal winning lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbols), The frequency with which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 46 may be changed to make it easier to win a prize with the normal electric accessory 46. Furthermore, two or three of the above three aspects may be combined.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, there is a normal gaming state in which both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are OFF, a probability variable time saving gaming state in which the probability variable flag is ON and the time saving flag is ON, and a probability variable time saving gaming state in which the probability variable flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON. It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 into one of the time-saving gaming states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 extracts the random number for jackpot determination of the extracted first special symbol. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when starting the variable display of the first special symbol, a jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 extracts the random number for jackpot determination of the extracted second special symbol. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when starting the variable display of the second special symbol, a jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

[Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 168, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. When the jackpot probability is relatively low (probability variable flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each setting value is approximately 1/300 for setting 1, approximately 1/290 for setting 2, and approximately 1/290 for setting 3. Setting 4 is about 1/270, setting 5 is about 1/260, and setting 6 is about 1/250. Also, when the jackpot probability is relatively high (probability change flag ON), the jackpot probability for each setting value is about 1/30 for setting 1, about 1/29 for setting 2, and about 1/29 for setting 3. setting is approximately 1/28, setting 4 is approximately 1/27, setting 5 is approximately 1/26, and setting 6 is approximately 1/25.

That is, as mentioned above, in this second embodiment, the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, so the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set. By changing it according to the value, the probability of hitting the jackpot varies depending on the set value. For example, in the low probability game state with the first special symbol, the number of jackpot judgment value data is set to 218 pieces in setting 1 and 226 pieces in setting 2 for the fixed value range of jackpot judgment random numbers (0 to 65535). By setting 234 pieces for setting 3, 243 pieces for setting 4, 252 pieces for setting 5, and 262 pieces for setting 6, the jackpot probability is varied depending on the setting value. In addition, the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high probability gaming state is 21 pieces in setting 1, 22 pieces in setting 2, 23 pieces in setting 3, 24 pieces in setting 4, 25 pieces in setting 5, and 26 pieces in setting 6. It becomes.

Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. When the jackpot probability is relatively low (probability variable flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each setting value is 1/300 for setting 1, 1/290 for setting 2, and 1/280 for setting 3. 1. Setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. In addition, when the jackpot probability is relatively high (probability change flag ON), the jackpot probability for each setting value is 1/30 for setting 1, 1/29 for setting 2, and 28 for setting 3. Setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

That is, regarding the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is varied depending on the setting value by changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the setting value. For example, in the low probability game state with the second special symbol, the number of jackpot judgment value data is set to 218 pieces in setting 1 and 226 pieces in setting 2 for the fixed value range of jackpot judgment random numbers (0 to 65535). By setting 234 pieces for setting 3, 243 pieces for setting 4, 252 pieces for setting 5, and 262 pieces for setting 6, the jackpot probability is varied depending on the setting value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high probability gaming state, 21 pieces for setting 1, 22 pieces for setting 2, 23 pieces for setting 3, 24 pieces for setting 4, 25 pieces for setting 5, and 26 pieces for setting 6. It is individual.

Note that the jackpot probability determined according to the settings is the same for the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, in setting 3, the jackpot probability in jackpot determination for the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability gaming state (1/28 in the high probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is This is the same as the jackpot probability in jackpot determination (1/280 in low probability gaming state, 1/28 in high probability gaming state).

In the second embodiment, the setting values are set in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting values do not necessarily have to be six stages, and can be set arbitrarily as long as they are in multiple stages.

Further, in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a common jackpot probability may be set for a plurality of set values. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability). Setting 6 may have a common jackpot probability (a third probability higher than the second probability).

In addition, in this second embodiment, the range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the random numbers for jackpot determination that is a fixed value is set as a fixed value. In contrast, by changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the setting value, the jackpot probability is varied for each setting value, but the method of varying the jackpot probability for each setting value is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability is different for each setting value. The jackpot probability may be varied depending on the setting value by making the number of judgment value data common to all settings and changing the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment as the total random number according to the setting value. For example, the number of jackpot judgment value data is set to 218, which is common to all settings, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment is in the range of 0 to 65535 (jackpot probability is about 1/300) in setting 1, and in setting 2. Range of 0 to 63219 (probability of jackpot is 1/290), range of 0 to 61039 with setting 3 (probability of jackpot is 1/280), range of 0 to 58859 with setting 4 (probability of jackpot is 1/270) , setting 5 is a range of 0 to 56679 (jackpot probability is 1/260), setting 6 is a range of 0 to 54499 (jackpot probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines a jackpot within the range according to the set value. By generating random numbers, the jackpot probability can be changed depending on the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot judgment), which has more digits than the numerator (number of jackpot judgment value data). Compared to a method in which the range is set to a fixed value and the number of jackpot judgment value data is changed according to the set value, it becomes possible to set the jackpot probability for each set value in detail.

In addition, in the above, the number of jackpot judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment as a total random number is changed according to the setting value, but the number of jackpot judgment value data is the same for all settings. It is not necessarily necessary to make them common. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218, the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment is in the range of 0 to 65535 (jackpot probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, jackpot judgment value data The number of jackpot judgment value data is 219, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment is 0 to 63509 (the probability of jackpot is about 1/290). The range (width) is from 0 to 61,599 (the jackpot probability is approximately 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 221 pieces, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment is from 0 to 59,669. (Jackpot probability is about 1/270), and in setting 5, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 222, and the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment is in the range 0 to 57719 (Jackpot probability is about 1/260). In setting 6, the number of jackpot judgment value data and Even if both the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment are changed according to the set value, the range of random numbers for jackpot judgment is fixed and the number of jackpot judgment value data is changed according to the set value. In comparison, it becomes possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

In addition, when the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as the total random number described above is changed according to the setting value, the main CPU 101 will In addition to or in place of determining whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5", for example, the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination as a total random number is determined as the set value. It may be checked whether the number of jackpot determination value data is within the corresponding range and/or whether the number of jackpot determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, if it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment as total random numbers and/or the number of jackpot judgment value data is outside the range according to the set value) (steps described below If the answer corresponds to NO in S3721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722, which will be described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

[Jackpot distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, a description will be given of the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 169, the distribution of the main symbols is common to all settings. Note that the contents of the table shown in FIG. 169 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 169, when the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 selects the main symbol from special symbol 1-1 (distribution probability 25.0%), special drawing 1-2 (sorting probability 25.0%), special drawing 1-3 (sorting probability 25.0%), and special drawing 1-4 (sorting probability 25.0%) ). Special figure 1-1 is a jackpot with 4 rounds, probability variable flag OFF, and 100 time-savings. In special figure 1-2, the number of rounds is 4, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving continues until the next jackpot gaming state is executed (the time saving flag is set to OFF when the next jackpot gaming state starts). It's a jackpot. Special figure 1-3 is a jackpot with 10 rounds, probability variable flag OFF, and 100 time-savings. Special figure 1-4 is a jackpot where the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 variably displays the first special symbol for a variable time determined with reference to FIG. 170, which will be described later, and then displays the determined main symbol Execute the control to stop it.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is met (in this second embodiment, like special symbols 1-2 and 1-4) This is a so-called ``probability variable loop machine'' in which the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot game state starts after the jackpot game state ends (if it is a jackpot that turns the probability variable flag ON). In such variable rate loop machines, when the result of jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is met, the next jackpot gaming state starts again after the jackpot gaming state ends. The high probability gaming state continues until the game is played. Then, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state is a jackpot, and a predetermined condition is not met (in this second embodiment, like special symbols 1-1 and 1-3), If it is a jackpot that does not turn the probability change flag ON), after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is not controlled to a high probability gaming state but to a low probability gaming state.

When the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 selects either the special symbol 2-1 (allocation probability 50.0%) or the special symbol based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. 2-2 (allocation probability 50.0%) is decided. Special figure 2-1 is a jackpot with 10 rounds, probability variable flag OFF, and 100 time-savings. Special figure 2-2 is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 variably displays the second special symbol for a variable time determined with reference to FIG. 170, which will be described later, and then displays the determined main symbol Execute the control to stop it.

Note that when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the loss symbol and executes control to stop the special symbol at the determined loss symbol.

Further, the number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state. In addition, if the variable probability flag is ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be a high probability gaming state (a gaming state in which the variable probability flag is set to ON), and if the variable probability flag is OFF, the gaming state is controlled to be a jackpot gaming state. After the completion of the game, the gaming state is controlled to be a low probability gaming state (a gaming state in which the probability variable flag is set to OFF). In the following, a jackpot with 4 rounds, probability variable flag OFF, and 100 time-savings (for example, the jackpot of special map 1-1) will be referred to as a "4R normal jackpot", and a jackpot with 4 rounds, probability variable flag ON, and the next jackpot game A jackpot that continues to save time until it is executed (for example, the jackpot of special chart 1-2) is called a "4R fixed variable jackpot", and a jackpot that has 10 rounds, the fixed variable flag is OFF, and 100 times of time savings (for example, the special chart 1-2 jackpot) 3. Jackpot of special figure 2-1) is called "10R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, probability change flag is ON, and the time saving continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, special figure 1-4, The special figure 2-2 jackpot) is called the "10R surefire jackpot".

In addition, in this second embodiment, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but this is not necessarily the case. It may be determined whether the time saving flag is set to ON or OFF depending on the main symbol determined by the main symbol.

[Special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the flow until the special symbol variation time is determined will be explained. Since the special symbol variation time corresponds to the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol variation time and the special symbol variation pattern at the same time. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the performance content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). The pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is configured such that the variation pattern of the special symbols to be determined (that is, the variation time and performance content) can vary depending on the set value. Note that the contents of the table shown in FIG. 170 are stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed depending on the number of reserved special symbols, and the variation time in the normal variation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in Figure 170. .

As shown in FIG. 170, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. Determine the variation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 170, in this second embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variation time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time determination table includes the result of the special symbol jackpot determination, the gaming state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the special symbol jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and the performance selection. The relationship among the random number range, variation pattern (variable display pattern), variation pattern designation command, variation time, and presentation content is defined. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the variable time saving gaming state and the time saving gaming state are not distinguished. In addition, different random number ranges are set according to setting values for the random number range for reach determination and the random number range for production selection when determining the variation time of the special symbol.

The random number range for reach determination is a random number that is used to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss. When a game ball enters the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for reach determination from the reach determination counter, and executes the extracted reach determination. random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot judgment using the random number for jackpot judgment when starting the variable display of special symbols, but when the result of this jackpot judgment is a loss, the It is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect using the random number for reach determination. In this second embodiment, the random number value for reach determination extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

For example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss, the random number range for reach determination in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 in settings 1 and 2. -25, settings 3 and 4 are defined as 0 to 26, and settings 5 and 6 are defined as 0 to 27. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variable time-saving gaming state (the probability variable flag is ON and the time-saving flag is ON) is a loss, the random number range for reach determination in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set to 1. In settings 3 and 4, it is specified as 0 to 11, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 12.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more likely to be executed in settings 3 and 4 than in settings 1 and 2, and furthermore, Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than settings 3 and 4. That is, the execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect differs depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value, the higher the execution frequency of the ready-to-reach effect.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when determining whether or not to perform a reach effect, the random number range for reach determination is common for setting 1 and setting 2, common for setting 3 and setting 4, and common for setting 5. and setting 6, but it is not limited to this, and may be different for all settings.

In addition, the above-mentioned decision on whether or not to execute the reach effect is explained in the case where the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, but if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The random number range for performance selection is a random number used for determining the variation time of the special symbol for each set value. When a game ball enters the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for performance selection from the performance selection counter, and selects the extracted performance selection. random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 selects a random number for effect selection stored in the main RAM 103 according to the gaming state and the result of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect (only when the result of jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss). Determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol using . In this second embodiment, the random number value for effect selection extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol using the random number for performance selection stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is decided to execute the reach effect, the variation time of the special symbol is as follows. It is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20,000 msec (normal reach) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normal medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. For settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for performance selection in which the special symbol variation time is determined to be 40,000 msec (normal medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is decided not to execute the reach effect, the variation time of the special symbol is as follows. determined. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10,000 msec (normal variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variable time-saving gaming state (probability variable flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving gaming state (probability variable flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a loss, and the reach effect is executed. When the special symbol is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (time saving medium normal reach) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. For settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the special symbol variation time is determined to be 45,000 msec (time saving medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variable time-saving gaming state (probability variable flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving gaming state (probability variable flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a loss and the reach effect is not executed. When the special symbol is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortened variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortened variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

In addition, the main symbol is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, so if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined. not involved.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a jackpot is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20,000 msec (normal reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. Settings 5 and 6 are defined as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normal medium super reach A) is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. For settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for performance selection in which the special symbol variation time is determined to be 40,000 msec (normal medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variable time-saving gaming state (probability variable flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or normal time-saving gaming state (probability variable flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a jackpot, This is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (time saving medium normal reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. Settings 5 and 6 are defined as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving medium super reach A) is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. For settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for performance selection in which the special symbol variation time is determined to be 45,000 msec (time saving medium super reach B) is defined as 50 to 99 for settings 1 to 6.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, as long as the game state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect are the same, the special symbol The fluctuation time of Settings 3 and 4 is more likely to be determined to be a short fluctuation time than Settings 1 and 2, and furthermore, it is easier to be determined to be a shorter fluctuation time for Settings 5 and 6 than to Settings 3 and 4. There is. Therefore, the higher the setting value is, the shorter the average period of variation of the special symbol becomes, and the greater the number of variations of the special symbol (namely, the number of lottery draws) per unit time. As a result, the expectation level is high that the number of executions of the jackpot gaming state will increase when viewed per unit time, and the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be executed within the unit time also increases. It becomes possible to play an advantageous game.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when determining the variation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common between setting 1 and setting 2, common between setting 3 and setting 4, and common between setting 5 and setting 6. However, it is not limited to this, and all setting values may be different.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot is determined in common for all main symbols, but is not limited to this, and the variation time of the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured such that the fluctuation times of the values are different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the content of the performance. For example, the fluctuation pattern "02H" represents a normal medium super reach B with a fluctuation time of 40000 msec.

The fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 as data representing the fluctuation time and the content of the performance. For example, if the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is "05H", a variation pattern designation command of "83H05H" is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, the main control circuit 100
A symbol designation command for specifying the main symbol determined by (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to sub-control circuit 200.

[Decorative pattern stop pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, an example of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined with the selection rate shown in FIG. 169 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot will be explained. . Note that the contents of the table shown in FIG. 171 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

When the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) receives the symbol designation command sent from the main control circuit 100, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) sets the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command, regardless of the setting value. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command sent from the main control circuit 100 is special symbol 1-2, the sub CPU 201 determines that all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol (for example, the "7" symbol). Since the distribution probability in the mode is 0%, the mode in which all decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in this second embodiment) are the same even number pattern (distribution probability 30.0%), or all It is determined that the decorative symbols are the same odd numbered symbols (allocation probability 70.0%). In the second embodiment, the specific symbol is the "7" symbol, but it is not limited to this, and if the player can recognize that it is a jackpot with a high degree of profit, other symbols (for example, the "V" symbol) may be specified. It can also be used as a pattern.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 171 is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Therefore, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 171, and when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, A symbol other than the symbol shown in is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than those shown in FIG. 171 correspond to, for example, a symbol in which at least one of all the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

In this way, according to FIG. 171, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the state when all the decorative symbols have stopped is the jackpot determination of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , whether the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a jackpot controlled to a high probability gaming state, and whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state is 10R. It can vary depending on whether

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 169 is Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-3, or Special Figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot where the probability variation flag is not set to ON), Regardless of the setting value, it always stops in a mode in which all the decorative patterns are the same even-numbered pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "first mode").

Also, when the main pattern is special pattern 1-2 (4R guaranteed strange jackpot), regardless of the setting value, the first mode or all the decorative patterns are the same odd-numbered pattern (other than the "7" pattern which is a specific pattern) (hereinafter referred to as the "second mode").

Also, when the main symbol is special pattern 1-4 (10R guaranteed strange jackpot), all decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol, or all decorative symbols are the same specific symbol, regardless of the setting value. (hereinafter referred to as "specific mode").

Furthermore, when the main symbol is special figure 2-2 (10R probability variable jackpot), it stops in a specific manner regardless of the set value. Special figure 1-4 and special figure 2-2 are both 10R guaranteed variable jackpots, but since special figure 1-4 is a jackpot based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 420, it is a jackpot in normal gaming conditions. It is highly likely that he was elected. In addition, since the special figure 2-2 is a jackpot based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 440, there is a high possibility that the jackpot was won in a high probability game state or a time-saving game state.

In this way, if it stops in a specific manner, a 10R probability variable jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is determined, and if it stops in a manner in which all decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol, a probability variation jackpot (4R probability variation jackpot or 10R probability variation jackpot) is determined. (Probable jackpot) is confirmed. On the other hand, when the game stops in the first mode, although it is determined that it is not the 10R probability variable jackpot that provides the highest degree of profit for the player, the possibility of a 4R probability variation jackpot remains.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the player may be informed as to which jackpot the jackpot is when all the decorative symbols have stopped, or the jackpot game The notification may be made while the state is being executed, or may be made when the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, although this is not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, even though the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is a jackpot controlled to a high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming It is also possible to control the game to a so-called "latent probability variable state" without making it clear to the player that the state will be controlled.

[Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko gaming machine according to second embodiment]

Although the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment are as described above, they are not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are changed as appropriate will be described below. However, it goes without saying that the following explanation is just an example, and is not limited to this.
[Variation example of special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, a modification of the special symbol variation time (that is, the special symbol variation pattern) will be described. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol variation time determination table stored in the main ROM 102. As mentioned above, there are cases in which the execution probability of the reach effect is changed depending on the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are also shown in Fig. 172. is omitted.

Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol fluctuation special symbol described with reference to FIG. Counting means (not shown) are provided. This lottery number counting means is reset, for example, at the start of the jackpot game state, and starts counting the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 172, in another example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (the probability variable flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss, the decision as to whether or not to execute the reach effect is as follows: This is done in accordance with both the number of changes in the special symbol, which is counted starting from the point at which the jackpot game state ends, and the set value.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific point in time (for example, the time when the jackpot game state ends) is 0 to 1000, it is determined that the reach effect is executed in the random number range for reach determination. is defined as 0 to 25 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG. 170.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state reaches 1001 times or more, the random number range for reach judgment is determined to execute the reach effect, and in settings 1 and 2, the random number range is 0 to 10. It is defined as 0 to 5 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 1 in settings 5 and 6. In other words, if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is a loss, the probability of executing the reach effect is twice as high in settings 1 and 2 compared to settings 3 and 4, and in settings 3 and 4 compared to settings 5 and 6. The probability of execution of a reach effect is 5 times higher (the probability of execution of a reach effect is 10 times higher in settings 1 and 2 than in settings 5 and 6).

In this way, if the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the point at which the jackpot gaming state ends is 1001 or more, if the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the point at which the jackpot gaming state ends is 0 to 1,000 times. Compared to this, the execution probability of reach effects differs markedly depending on the settings.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is decided to execute the reach effect, the fluctuation time of the special symbol will also be changed to the jackpot game. There is a noticeable difference in settings between when the number of variations of the special symbol starting from the point at which the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and when it is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, when the number of variations of the special symbol starting from the point when the jackpot game state ends is 0 to 1000, the random number range for performance selection is such that the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20,000 msec (normal reach during normal reach). is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normal medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. For settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for performance selection in which the special symbol variation time is determined to be 40,000 msec (normal medium super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG. 170.

On the other hand, when the number of variations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state reaches 1001 times or more, the random number range for performance selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20,000 msec (normal reach during normal reach) is set to 1. -4 are not specified, and settings 5 and 6 are specified as 0-99. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normal medium super reach A) is specified as 0 to 89 for settings 1 to 4, and is not specified for settings 5 and 6. . Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normal medium super reach B) is specified as 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 4, and is not specified for settings 5 and 6. do not have. Therefore, in a situation where the special symbol has changed more than 1001 times starting from the end of the jackpot game state, the set value is suggested to the player by the ready-to-reach effect that is executed. becomes possible.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is decided to execute the reach effect, the starting point is the point at which the jackpot gaming state ends. When the number of variations of the special symbol is 1001 times or more, the higher the setting value is, the lower the execution probability of the ready-to-reach effect is. Furthermore, even if a ready-to-win effect is executed, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of execution of the ready-to-reach effect is, where the variation time of the special symbol is short.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state reaches 1001 times or more, the higher the setting value, the shorter the average time of fluctuation of the special symbol per time, and the unit The number of changes in special symbols per hour (ie, the number of drawings) becomes even greater. As a result, the expectation that the number of times a jackpot game will be executed in a unit time becomes even higher, and the probability that a jackpot game will be executed within a unit time becomes even higher.

In addition, if the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the jackpot game state If the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect will differ markedly depending on the setting value, so when you get so-called a big hit, you can guess the set setting value. There may be room for this. As a result, when a so-called big hit occurs, the setting value set for the player can be changed without causing a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving the game ball to the player). By providing opportunities for guessing, it is possible to give players fun. Furthermore, although the player would normally want a reach effect, in this second embodiment, the lower the frequency with which the reach effect is executed when the player is hooked, the higher the setting value may be. Since the player can have expectations, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the desire to continue playing the game even if the execution frequency of the reach effect is low.

In addition, in this second embodiment, the starting point for counting the number of changes in the special symbol is the point at which the jackpot game state ends, but it is not limited to this, and for example, after a predetermined period has elapsed, a high probability game The starting point can be any point in time, such as when a high-probability game state ends in a pachinko machine called a so-called ST machine, or when a time-saving game state ends.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific point in time becomes 1001 times or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol will differ significantly depending on the setting value. It does not necessarily have to be 1001 times or more. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number of times as long as the player feels addicted to it.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting at a specific time exceeds the specified number of times, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol will differ significantly depending on the setting value, What differs markedly depending on the setting value is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect or the variation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot and when the jackpot game state is actually controlled. ing. The main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "ending time") between the end of the jackpot game state and the start of the variable display of special symbols. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 at the above-mentioned opening time, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 at the above-mentioned ending time. In the opening performance, for example, a performance that shows that the result of the special lottery was a jackpot, a performance that congratulates the fact that the result of the special lottery was a jackpot, a performance that celebrates the fact that the result of the special lottery was a jackpot, and a game technique (such as right-handed hitting) in a jackpot game state. A teaching performance, etc. will be performed. In the ending performance, there is a performance that shows the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state, a performance that shows the number of times the jackpot game state has been continued (number of consecutive games), and a performance that shows the game state after the jackpot game state is a high probability game. A presentation that shows that the pachinko game machine is controlled by the state, a presentation that teaches the gaming method (for example, returning to left-handed hitting) in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended, a presentation that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine, etc. will be held.

Specifically, by decreasing all or at least one of the opening time, interval time, and ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the jackpot gaming state increases as the set value increases. Can be shortened. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the average number of changes in special symbols per unit time (namely, the number of drawings), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

Also, for example, in a pachinko machine where the higher the setting value is, the higher the expected ball payout value (for example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the jackpot probability), a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out in a shorter time compared to a lower setting value. Considering this possibility, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to become longer as the setting value becomes higher. In this case, the higher the expected ball payout value, the longer all or at least one of the opening time, interval time, and ending time will be, ensuring the fun of the game with the higher setting value. At the same time, it becomes possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time.

In addition, the main CPU 101 does not allow the game ball to enter the starting opening (first starting opening 420, second starting opening 440) even when the opening time, ending time and jackpot gaming state are controlled. When detected, various random numbers are extracted, and setting check processing (see FIG. 188) of step S3074 and step S3082, which will be described later, is executed. If it is determined in this setting check process that the setting value data is outside the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S3721, which will be described later), even if the control is in a jackpot gaming state, , the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722, which will be described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

[Modified examples of jackpot distribution and stop patterns of decorative patterns]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175, the first and second modified examples of jackpot distribution (main symbol selection rate) when the result of jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot, and these modified examples. The stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the first modification and the second modification will be explained. In the first modification and the second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol is different depending on the set value. In addition, FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol (jackpot type determination table) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the first modification of the selection rate (jackpot type determination table) of the jackpot determination of the special symbol It is a diagram showing a second modification regarding the selection rate of the main symbol (jackpot type determination table) when the result is a jackpot. Further, FIG. 175 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[First modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 175. Note that the contents of the table shown in FIG. 173 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 175 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the first modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 changes the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. The probability is that Tokuzu 1-1, Tokuzu 1-2, Tokuzu 1-3, Tokuzu 1-4, Tokuzu 1-5, Tokuzu 1-6, Tokuzu 1-7, and Tokuzu 1 Decide on one of -8. However, in this first modification, special map 1-1 and special map 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", special map 1-2 and special map 1-4 are "4R definite strange jackpot", and special map 1 -5, Special Figure 1-7, Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 are "10R regular jackpot", Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-8, Special Figure 2-2 and Special Figure 2- 4 is a "10R surefire jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 selects the main symbols as special symbols 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special symbol 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5%) with a common probability in settings 1 to 4. %), special map 1-3 (distribution probability 12.5%), special program 1-4 (distribution probability 12.5%), special program 1-5 (distribution probability 12.5%), special program 1-6 (sorting probability 12.5%), special drawing 1-7 (sorting probability 12.5%), and special drawing 1-8 (sorting probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 10.0%). (probability of distribution 15.0%), special figure 1-4 (probability of distribution 15.0%), special figure 1-5 (probability of distribution 10.0%), special figure 1-6 (probability of distribution 10.0%) %), special map 1-7
(Distribution probability 15.0%) and special drawing 1-8 (Distribution probability 15.0%). In addition, in setting 6, the main symbols are special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20 .0%), special map 1-4 (distribution probability 20.0%), special diagram 1-5 (distribution probability 5.0%), special diagram 1-6 (distribution probability 5.0%), Decide on either special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 20.0%) or special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 20.0%).

In other words, for Tokuzu 1-2 and Tokuzu 1-4 (both 4R probability variable jackpot), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value ( For example, with settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special drawings 1-4 (15.0% with setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special drawings 1-2 (10.0% with setting 5, 5.0% with setting 6). %, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common for settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, for Tokuzu 1-6 and Tokuzu 1-8 (both 10R probability variable jackpot), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (For example, with settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special drawings 1-8 (15.0% with setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special drawings 1-6 (10.0% with setting 5, 5.0% with setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common for settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Tokuzu 2-2 and Tokuzu 2-4 (both 10R probability variable jackpot), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (For example, with settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special map 2-4 (30.0% with setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special map 2-2 (20.0% with setting 5, 10.0% with setting 6). 0%, setting 6: 40.0%) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201, as shown in FIG. , Special Figure 2-1, Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON), regardless of the setting value, the decorative pattern is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example. is controlled to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is special map 1-2 (4R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 selects the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the setting value. ) is controlled to stop. In addition, when the main symbol is special figure 1-4 (4R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 selects the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75%) regardless of the setting value. .0%). Here, at high setting values (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate for special drawings 1-4 is higher than the selection rate for special drawings 1-2 (10.0% for setting 5, 5.0% for setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5 and 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the jackpot type of special drawings 1-2 and 1-4 is the same (both 4R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative pattern stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher expectation level than the first mode) increases.

Similarly, when it is a special figure 1-6 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the setting value. Also, the main pattern is special figure 1-8
(10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 controls the game to stop in the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or in the specific mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Here, as mentioned above, at high setting values (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special drawings 1-6 is higher than that of special drawings 1-6 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6). The selection rate of 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the jackpot type of special drawings 1-6 and 1-8 is the same (both 10R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbols will stop in a specific manner (the manner in which the player has the highest level of expectation) increases.

Similarly, when it is special map 2-2 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 selects the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the setting value. control to stop at Furthermore, when the main symbol is special figure 2-4 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 controls the game to always stop in a specific manner regardless of the set value. Here, as mentioned above, at high setting values (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-2 is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% at setting 5, 10.0% at setting 6). The selection rate for setting 4 (30.0% for setting 5 and 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the jackpot type of special chart 2-2 and special chart 2-4 is the same (both 10R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative pattern stops in a specific manner increases.

In this way, when the result of jackpot determination for a special symbol is a jackpot, it is possible to make it possible for the decorative symbol to stop in a different manner depending on the set value even if the jackpot type is the same. Become. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 or 6), when the result of jackpot judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot) is the same. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative pattern in a mode (for example, a specific mode) that has a relatively high expectation level for the player with a high probability compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

[Second modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. Note that the contents of the table shown in FIG. 174 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modification, it is determined whether the probability change flag is set to ON or not, depending on the main symbol that is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the second modification, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON depending on the main symbol that is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. do not have. To explain in detail, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a variable probability attacker (not shown) is provided inside the big prize opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 5). For example, when the jackpot game state is being controlled, if the entry of a game ball into the probability variable attacker is detected, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to a high probability game state, and the probability variation attacker is controlled. When the jackpot game state ends without the entry of a game ball being detected, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to a low probability game state. In this way, a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a high probability gaming state based on the entry of a game ball into a variable probability attacker is also a so-called "variable loop machine."

As shown in FIG. 174, in the second modification, the ease with which the game ball enters the probability-variable attacker differs depending on the main symbol that is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. ing. For example, in special figure 1-1, the game ball is controlled to enter the jackpot game state in a manner that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the fixed-rate attacker, and in special figure 1-2, the jackpot game state is controlled in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the fixed-rate attacker. controlled by. In this second embodiment, the number of time saving times when a jackpot is achieved in "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the fixed-variable attacker" is 100, and "a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the fixed-variable attacker" When it is a jackpot, the time saving continues until the next jackpot game is executed.

In this second embodiment, the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability-variable attacker" means that there is almost no possibility that the game ball will enter the probability-variable attacker while the jackpot game state is controlled (almost). This mode is controlled to a low probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%. In addition, "a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the fixed-rate attacker" means that as long as the game ball is fired toward the placement site of the fixed-rate attacker (for example, the jackpot opening 540 (see FIG. 5, for example)), the jackpot game state will be achieved. This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probability-changing attacker while being controlled (it is controlled to a high-probability game state with a probability close to 100%). Therefore, in this second modified example, a jackpot in a manner in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the fixed-variable attacker is referred to as a "normal jackpot," and a jackpot in a manner in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the fixed-variable attacker. A jackpot is called a "probable jackpot."

However, if it is "a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the fixed-variable attacker", it will be controlled to a high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the fixed-variable attacker" Instead of being controlled to a low-probability game state with a probability close to 100%, when the game state is in a state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the fixed-variable attacker, It may be a mode in which the game is controlled to a high-probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the "mode".

As a method for creating modes in which it is difficult and easy for the game ball to enter the fixed-variable attacker, for example, in addition to the big prize opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 5) that includes the fixed-variable attacker inside, there is no fixed-variable attacker. It is conceivable to provide another big prize opening (not shown). Then, the mode in which the game ball can easily enter the fixed attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2 -4), the jackpot game state is controlled in which the jackpot opening 540 is opened, and the state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability-changing attacker (for example, special drawing 1-1, special drawing 1-3, special drawing 1) is controlled. -5, Special Figure 1-7, Special Figure 2-1, Special Figure 2-3), by controlling to a jackpot game state in which other big winning openings are opened without opening the big winning opening 540, It is possible to create modes in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the attacker and modes in which it is easy. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball.

In addition, as described above, when the big winning hole 540 that is equipped with a fixed rate attacker inside and the other big winning hole (not shown) that is not equipped with a fixed variable attacker are provided, the big winning hole that is opened in the jackpot game state. The mouth may have different settings. For example, with a low setting value such as setting 1, a jackpot game state in which other big winning holes are opened is more likely to be selected than the big winning hole 540, and with a high setting value such as setting 6, the jackpot game state is more likely to be selected than the other big winning hole. The higher the set value is, the easier it is to select the jackpot game state in which the jackpot opening 540 is opened, such as the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot opening 540 is opened is more likely to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 174, in such a second modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 changes the main symbol to the set value based on the extracted random number for determining the symbol. With a probability according to Decide on one of special drawings 1-8. However, in this second modification, special map 1-1 and special map 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", special map 1-2 and special map 1-4 are "4R definite strange jackpot", and special map 1 -5, Special Figure 1-7, Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 are "10R regular jackpot", Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-7, Special Figure 2-2 and Special Figure 2- 4 is a "10R surefire jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 selects the main symbols as special symbols 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special symbol 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5%) with a common probability in settings 1 to 4. %), special map 1-3 (distribution probability 12.5%), special program 1-4 (distribution probability 12.5%), special program 1-5 (distribution probability 12.5%), special program 1-6 (sorting probability 12.5%), special drawing 1-7 (sorting probability 12.5%), and special drawing 1-8 (sorting probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 10.0%). (probability of distribution 15.0%), special figure 1-4 (probability of distribution 15.0%), special figure 1-5 (probability of distribution 10.0%), special figure 1-6 (probability of distribution 10.0%) %), special map 1-7
(Distribution probability 15.0%) and special drawing 1-8 (Distribution probability 15.0%). In addition, in setting 6, the main symbols are special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20 .0%), special map 1-4 (distribution probability 20.0%), special diagram 1-5 (distribution probability 5.0%), special diagram 1-6 (distribution probability 5.0%), Decide on either special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 20.0%) or special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 20.0%).

In other words, for Tokuzu 1-2 and Tokuzu 1-4 (both 4R probability variable jackpot), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value ( For example, with settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special drawings 1-4 (15.0% with setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special drawings 1-2 (10.0% with setting 5, 5.0% with setting 6). %, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common for settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, for Tokuzu 1-6 and Tokuzu 1-8 (both 10R probability variable jackpot), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (For example, with settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special drawings 1-8 (15.0% with setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special drawings 1-6 (10.0% with setting 5, 5.0% with setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common for settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for Tokuzu 2-2 and Tokuzu 2-4 (both 10R probability variable jackpot), which have the same jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (For example, with settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special map 2-4 (30.0% with setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special map 2-2 (20.0% with setting 5, 10.0% with setting 6). 0%, setting 6: 40.0%) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201, as shown in FIG. , Special Figure 2-1, Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON), regardless of the setting value, the decorative pattern is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example. is controlled to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is special map 1-2 (4R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 selects the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the setting value. ) is controlled to stop. In addition, when the main symbol is special figure 1-4 (4R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 selects the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75%) regardless of the setting value. .0%). Here, at high setting values (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate for special drawings 1-4 is higher than the selection rate for special drawings 1-2 (10.0% for setting 5, 5.0% for setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5 and 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the jackpot type of special drawings 1-2 and 1-4 is the same (both 4R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative pattern stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher expectation level than the first mode) increases.

Similarly, when it is a special figure 1-6 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the setting value. Also, the main pattern is special figure 1-8
(10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 controls the game to stop in the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or in the specific mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Here, as mentioned above, at high setting values (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special drawings 1-6 is higher than that of special drawings 1-6 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6). The selection rate of 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the jackpot type of special drawings 1-6 and 1-8 is the same (both 10R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbols will stop in a specific manner (the manner in which the player has the highest level of expectation) increases.

Similarly, when it is special map 2-2 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 selects the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the setting value. control to stop at Furthermore, when the main symbol is special figure 2-4 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 controls the game to always stop in a specific manner regardless of the set value. Here, as mentioned above, at high setting values (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-2 is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% at setting 5, 10.0% at setting 6). The selection rate for setting 4 (30.0% for setting 5 and 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the jackpot type of special chart 2-2 and special chart 2-4 is the same (both 10R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative pattern stops in a specific manner increases.

In this way, in the second modification, as in the first modification, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the jackpot type is the same, decorations are applied according to the set value. It becomes possible to make the patterns stop in different ways. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 or 6), when the result of jackpot judgment of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot) is the same. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative pattern in a mode (for example, a specific mode) that has a relatively high expectation level for the player with a high probability compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

In addition, in both the above-mentioned first modification and second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol is varied according to the setting value, so that the stop symbols of the decorative symbols can be different according to the setting value. are doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the set value, but controls the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the main symbol, and as a result, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are controlled according to the set value. The stop symbols can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the stop symbols of the decorative symbols can vary depending on the set value under the control of the sub CPU 201.

According to the first and second variations described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the setting value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the variable entry rate, and the time-saving entry rate. It becomes possible.

[Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 176 to 197. However, in the following explanation (description of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. These are shown in FIG.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power switch 35, the pachinko game machine is powered on. When the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (step S3010), setting processing related to setting values (step S3020), and game return processing (step S3030). ) and execute them in order. Each of these processes will be explained below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and if the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to a power outage or turning off the power switch 35, etc. Performs processing when a power outage occurs, which will be described later.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S3011).

Next, the main CPU 101 allows access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S3012), and then performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 becomes able to accept a signal (step S3013). After that, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built into the CPU (step S3014).

Next, the main CPU 101 activates the switch related to the set value (step S3015). The switches related to setting values are the switches used when performing the setting process in step S3020, and include, for example, the setting key 328 for starting and ending the setting process, the setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, etc. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 validates the switches related to the settings (step S3015), performs a reading process for each switch (step S3016), and then performs a game permission process (step S3017).

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of a game permission process. In the game permission process in step S3017 (see FIG. 177), a game permission flag for permission to play a game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of the game, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. . The game permission process (step S3017) will be explained below.

The main CPU 101 first determines whether the power outage situation identification flag is ON (step S31710). The power outage situation identification flag is a flag that identifies the situation when the previous power outage occurred. In other words, for example, if a power outage occurs during the settings change process described below, there is a high possibility that the power will be cut off before the settings change process is properly completed, so when the power is turned on, the game will be allowed to continue playing. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power outage can be identified. In this second embodiment, for example, when a power outage occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process to be described later, the power outage situation identification flag is set to ON until the power is cut off. On the other hand, when a power outage occurs during a setting change process to be described later, the power outage situation identification flag is set to OFF until the power is cut off. Also, when a power outage occurs during an abnormal state in steps S3722 to S3727, which will be described later, the power outage situation identification flag is set to OFF. Note that in the initial state where the power has not been turned on yet or when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long period of time, the power failure situation identification flag is OFF. The above-mentioned "normal gaming" means a gaming state in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean the normal gaming state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF. (same as below).

In step S31710, the main CPU 101 determines that the power outage situation identification flag is ON.
If (YES in step S31710), the process moves to step S31720, and if the power outage situation identification flag is OFF (NO in step S31710), the game permission flag is turned OFF (step S31750), and then the process moves to step S31720.

In step S31720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. This checking of the work area also includes checking whether the set value data is within a specified range (in the second embodiment, within the range of "0" to "5").

Note that the work area of the main RAM 103 includes a general work area where data is cleared when a backup clear process is performed, which will be described later, and a general work area where data is generally retained without being cleared even if a backup clear process is performed, which will be described later. It is divided into specific work areas. This specific work area stores, for example, performance display data, set value data, and the like. This is data indicating the setting value. In this second embodiment, setting value data of "0" to "5" correspond to each of the six levels of setting values "1" to "6". That is, for example, if the set value is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S31730, the main CPU 101 determines whether the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal or not, and if it is normal (YES in step S31730), the process moves to step S31740, and if it is not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S31730). If so, the game permission flag is turned OFF (step S31760) and then the process moves to step S31740. For example, when the set value data is not within a specified range (in the second embodiment, within the range of "0" to "5"), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S31740, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game permission flag is ON. In this step S31740, if a power outage occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process to be described later (YES in step S31710), and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S31730), the game permission flag is turned ON. It is determined that On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during the setting change process or in an abnormal state (NO in step S31710), and if the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S31730), the game permission flag is OFF. It is determined that Then, if the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31740), the game permission process is ended. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31740), the process moves to step S31770.

In this specification, power outages that occur during normal gaming, power outages that occur during setting confirmation processing, and power outages that occur during setting change processing are referred to as normal power outages, and are referred to as step S3722 to step S3727, which will be described later. A power outage that occurs in this case is considered an abnormal power outage.

In step S31770, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON (the power switch 35 is turned ON), that is, whether the setting key switch signal is ON. The setting key switch signal turns ON.
If (YES in step S31770), the process moves to step S31780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S31770), the process moves to step S31810.

In step S31780, the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup clear switch 330 has been pressed, that is, whether the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780). Then, the process moves to step S31790, and if the backup clear signal is OFF, the process moves to step S31810.

In step S31790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and moves to step S31800.

In this way, the main CPU 101 turns the setting key switch signal ON ( YES in step S31770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S31790. That is, if both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the game permission flag is turned ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag will not be set from OFF to ON.

In step S31800, main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON, and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag that indicates whether or not it is necessary to perform backup clear processing, which will be described later. When it is necessary to perform backup clear processing, the backup clear flag is set to ON, and when backup clear processing is performed, The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S31810, the main CPU 101 sets a notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. After performing the process of step S31810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission process. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the person concerned with the hall can check the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 and confirm that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF). ). In this second embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, only when the setting key switch 328 is turned on and both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed, the game is started. It is possible to set the permission flag to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag will not be turned ON unless a power cut operation is performed to temporarily stop the power supply and a setting change process described later is executed. In addition, in the above, the game permission process is ended when the process of step S31810 is performed, but instead of this, after the process of step S31810 is performed, the process returns to step S31740 and the condition for turning on the game permission flag is set. The processing from step S31740 to step S31810 may be looped until the following is satisfied (in FIG. 178, until YES is determined in step S31780).

[Setting process]
FIG. 179(a) is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process in step S3020 (see FIG. 176), and FIG. 179(b) is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process in step S3020. The only difference between FIG. 179(a) and FIG. 179(b) is the processing when it is determined in step S3021 that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3021), and the other processing (step The processing from S3022 to S3028) is common to both. The setting process will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the game permission flag is ON in step S3021. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S3021), the main CPU 101 moves to step S3022, and if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3021), the main CPU 101 executes a setting change process (step S3024) and a setting confirmation process ( The setting process ends without executing any of step S3026).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S3023), the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S3024), and turns the setting key switch signal ON (YES in step S3022). ) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S3023), a setting confirmation process (step S3026) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S3024) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S3024) is executed if the backup clear signal is OFF. S3026) is executed.

Note that when the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S3027), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S3028), and performs the setting change process (step S3028). The setting process ends without executing either step S3024) or setting confirmation process (step S3026). Furthermore, if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S3027), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process (setting change) without executing the process in step S3028. The processing (step S3024) and setting confirmation processing (step S3026) are also not executed).

That is, if the previous power outage was a normal power outage that occurred during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process to be described later, and if the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, YES is determined in step S3021. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S3024) and a setting confirmation process (step S3026) depending on the operation status of the setting key 328 and the press operation status of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. Alternatively, backup clear flag processing (step S3028) is executed. Note that when the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S3024), the setting confirmation process (step S3026), and the backup clear flag process (step S3028) are performed. Without executing any of the above, the process moves to the game return process (step S3030), and after the game return process (step S3030) is executed, the game can be played.

On the other hand, if the previous power outage was an abnormal power outage, or even if the previous power outage was a normal power outage, it was determined to be NO in step S3021. . At this time, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S3024) and a setting confirmation process (step S3026) regardless of the operating status of the setting key 328 or the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. The setting process is ended without executing either of the setting process and the backup clear flag ON (step S3028). Therefore, if a power outage occurs during the setting change process or if the previous power outage was an abnormal power outage, the setting key switch signal is turned ON (YES in step S31770) and the backup clear signal is turned ON (YES in step S31780). When it is determined that the setting value is fixed (that is, when the setting key 328 is turned on, both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed, and the setting is changed). Only then, the setting change process (step S3024) is executed and the process moves to the game return process of step S3030, and after this game return process (step S3030) is executed, the game can be played. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S3024) and the setting confirmation process (step S3026) ) and the backup clear flag process (step S3028) are not executed, and the process moves to the game return process (step S3030). However, in this game return process (step S3030), an abnormality process (see step S3038 in FIG. 183, which will be described later) is executed, and the game cannot be played and the game is stopped.

In this way, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 179(a), if a power outage occurs during the setting change process or if the previous power outage was an abnormal power outage, the power is turned on. Regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of pressing the backup clear switch 330 at the time, either the setting change process (step S3024), the setting confirmation process (step S3026), or the backup clear flag ON (step S3028) is executed. The setting process has ended without executing either. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S3024) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. You can do it like this. If a power outage occurs during the setting change process or if the previous power outage was an abnormal power outage, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on will be changed. By forcibly executing the setting change process (step S3024) regardless of the situation, if you forget to operate the setting key 328 or backup clear switch 330 and turn on the power, you will not be able to turn on the power again. This makes it possible to reduce the hassle of having to make a decision.

Note that in the flowchart shown in FIG. 179(a), if NO is determined in step S3021, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. It's finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 179(b), if NO is determined in step S3021, the setting is made without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. A change process (step S3024) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and/or the operation status of pressing the backup clear switch 330 is determined, and regardless of the determination result, the setting process is terminated or the setting change process (step S3024) You may also execute

[Settings change process]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing. The setting change process in step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is a process for changing the set setting value, but it is also possible to end the setting change process with the same setting value as the set value. . Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag will not be turned ON unless a power cut operation is performed to temporarily stop the power supply and a setting change process is executed.

Main CPU 101 first determines whether the game permission flag is ON in step S32410. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S32410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Note that even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, step S31790 is executed.
Since the game permission flag is set to ON (see FIG. 178), the setting change process is executed.

If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S32410), the main CPU 101 moves to step S32420 and executes backup clear processing. This backup clearing process will be described later.

After executing the backup clear process in step S32420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S32430, stores the setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 in a register, and moves to step S32440. Note that the backup clearing process may be executed at any timing after the setting change process is started until it ends.

In step S32440, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting change security signal is output for a certain period of time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

In step S32450, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On this performance display monitor 334, the setting value data stored in the register is converted into a setting value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays a set value "4" corresponding to the set value data "3". However, as long as the setting value data stored in the register and the set value correspond, the numbers do not necessarily need to be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, setting value data "0" to "5" are respectively associated with "A" to "F", and when the setting value data stored in a register is, for example, "3", the corresponding "D" is set. may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In this step 2450, the setting value data stored in the register is converted to a setting value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but as the previous data is discarded, the predetermined value is displayed. The initial value (for example, "1") may be displayed. Also, when the power is turned on to this pachinko game machine for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, "1"), a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8"), etc. on the performance display monitor 334. It may be controlled so that it is displayed in When displaying a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S32510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. You can also do this.

In step S32460, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that a setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336, the hall personnel can understand that the setting change process is in progress.

In step S32470, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S32470), the process moves to step S32510.

In step S32510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 has been pressed. If the setting switch 332 has been pressed (YES in step S32510), the process moves to step S32520, and the setting value stored in the register After updating the data, the process returns to step S32440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S32510), the process returns to step S32440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S32470), steps S32510, S32520, and steps S32440 to S32470 are looped (step S32510, step S32520, The processes from S32440 to S32470 are repeated).

Note that when the setting switch 332 is pressed (determined as YES in step S32510), the main CPU 101 sets a notification so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in the subsequent step S32450. .

Furthermore, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the main CPU 101 changes the setting value data stored in the register from "0" to "5". ” (if the setting switch 332 is pressed when the setting value data is “5”, it returns to “0”). Thereby, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cycled. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased from "5" to "0", or the setting value data may be cyclically increased or cyclically reduced depending on the manner in which the setting switch 332 is pressed. It may be possible to perform both the reduction and the reduction.

In step S32470, if the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), the process moves to step S32480. Moving to step S32480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of steps S32510, S32520, and steps S32440 to S32470.

In step S32480, main CPU 101 stores the setting value data stored in the register in main RAM 103. When the process of step S32480 is executed, the set value is finalized. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is determined based on the execution of an operation that turns the setting key switch signal OFF (YES in step S32470), and the setting value is determined based on the execution of an operation that turns the setting key switch signal OFF. If the setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (steps S32510, S32520, and steps S32440 to S32470 are simply looped), the setting value data stored in the register is simply updated. The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Note that even if you return the setting key 328 again after it is determined in step S32470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), the operation will not be detected (the setting key switch signal will be detected as ON). The set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (turning off the power switch 35). Note that at that time (when the setting key 328 is returned again after it is determined in step S32470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470)), the main CPU 101 returns the setting stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that settings can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when performing the setting confirmation process), the main CPU 101 may keep the game permission flag OFF until the setting key switch signal is turned OFF.

By the way, if a power outage occurs during the setting change process or the previous power outage was an abnormal power outage, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the backup when the power is turned on afterwards (at the time of recovery from a power outage) When the setting change process (see FIG. 180) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the clear switch 330 pressing operation (the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal) (see FIG. 179(b)) In this case, the setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned on (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). In this way, when the setting key 328 is not turned ON and the setting change process (step S3024) is executed, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so the main CPU 101 changes the setting key switch signal in step S32470. Instead of immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is turned ON and then turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S32470. Proceed to S32480 (determine the setting value). In this case, the main CPU 101 may determine YES in step S32480 upon detecting that the setting key switch signal has turned ON and further detecting that the setting key switch signal has turned OFF. Alternatively, the determination in step S32480 may be YES based on the detection that the setting key switch signal has changed from ON to OFF, without detecting that the setting key switch signal has turned ON. In addition, in the above, if a power outage occurs during the setting change process or the previous power outage was an abnormal power outage, the power outage will be forcibly canceled regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power outage. Although it has been described that the setting change process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power recovery. Also, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power outage recovery, power outage recovery is performed with the settings changed at the time of power outage (in other words, the state is maintained at the time of power outage, and the subsequent At the time of recovery from power failure, processing for returning to the maintained state may be executed, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and backup clear signal at the time of recovery from power failure.

In step S32490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S32500 sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the settings. Finish the process.

Note that when it is determined in step S32470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), a command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, a command indicating that the setting change process has ended, is executed. An initialization command will be sent to the sub CPU 201.

When the setting change process in step S3024 (see FIG. 179) ends, the setting process in step S3020 (see FIG. 176) ends, and the process moves to the game return process in step S3030 (see FIG. 176).

In addition, if it becomes possible to play the game through the game return process described later after the setting change process in step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is executed, the Information suggesting that a setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of the process, information suggesting that a setting value may have been changed to a higher value by the setting change process, Information that suggests that the setting value may have been changed to a lower value by the setting change process, or information that the setting value has been changed by more than one level by the setting change process (for example, the setting value has been changed by two or more levels, such as from setting 6 to setting 4). Furthermore, information related to the setting change process, such as information suggesting that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example. For example, the variation pattern of effects and decorative patterns performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 etc. may be made different depending on when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or the setting value may be changed to a higher value by the setting change process. It is possible to make it different when the setting value is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, or when the setting value is changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed by multiple steps or more. It's okay.

Furthermore, the output period of the setting change security signal described above and the period during which the setting change in progress code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process until the completion process of the setting change process. It has become. However, it is not necessary that these periods match completely.

Note that the above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the internal game permission flag is ON or OFF. Additionally, a command is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S3024 is started, each time the setting switch is pressed in step S32510, and when executing the process in step S32480. Accordingly, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, etc. may be configured to notify that settings are being changed, to notify that setting values have been changed, to notify that setting changes have been completed, etc. .

[Backup clear processing]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the backup clearing process in step S32420 (see FIG. 180). This backup clearing process is a process for clearing information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clearing process, as described above, although the information stored in the general work area is cleared, the information stored in the specific work area is not, in principle, cleared.

Main CPU 101 first determines whether the backup clear flag is OFF in step S32421. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S32421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S32421), the main CPU 101 completes the process in step S32422. Move to.

In step S32422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power outage occurred during the setting change process, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear process was executed during the setting change process in which the previous power outage occurred. Therefore, if the previous power outage occurred during the setting change process, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared along with the backup clear process executed during the setting change process when the previous power outage occurred. In this backup clearing process, it may be possible to only partially clear the data.

Note that in the process of step S32422, as described above, the performance display data and setting value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, if it is determined that the setting value data stored in RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set value data is outside the specified range), the setting value data will also be cleared. Ru. Furthermore, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. Note that when the setting value data is abnormal, the setting value data is also cleared, but in that case, the gaming permission flag is turned OFF and unless the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 180) is performed, gaming is not permitted. The flag may not be turned on.

In step S32423, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that information indicating that the backup clearing process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. Thereafter, in step S32424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear process. Note that the above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is sent as a command to the sub control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example.

Note that when the backup clearing process is executed in conjunction with the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 180), in step S32450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the setting value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Set notification. Similarly, even when the backup clearing process is executed without the setting change process, notification settings may be made so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[Settings confirmation process]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. The setting confirmation process in step S3026 (see FIG. 179) is a process for confirming the set setting values. The set value is stored in the main RAM 103.

Main CPU 101 first determines whether the game permission flag is ON in step S32610. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S32610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S32610), the main CPU 101 moves to step S32620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain period of time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

In step S32630, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The setting value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set value data. For example, when the setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3", "4" corresponding to the setting value data "3" is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 as information indicating the setting value.

In step S32640, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that a setting confirmation code indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the hall personnel can understand that the setting confirmation process is in progress by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336.

In step S32650, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S32650), the process returns to step S32620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S32650), the process from step S32620 to step S32650 is looped (the process from step S32620 to step S32650 is repeated). That will happen.

In step S32650, if the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32650), the process moves to step S32660. Moving to step S32660, the main CPU 101 ends each process from step S32620 to step S32650.

Note that when it is determined in step S32650 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32650), a power failure recovery command is sent to the sub CPU 201 in step S37, which will be described later, as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended. It will be done.

In step S32660, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S32670 sets the notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and performs the setting confirmation process. end.

When the setting confirmation process in step S3026 (see FIG. 179) ends, the setting process in step S3020 (see FIG. 176) ends, and the process moves to the game return process in step S3030 (see FIG. 176).

[Game return processing]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176), on the premise that the game permission flag is ON, a process of returning to a state where a game can be executed is performed. The game return process will be explained below.

First, in step S3031, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3031), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormality process in step S3038. This abnormality processing will be described later.

If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S3031), the main CPU 101 moves to step S3032 and performs processing to enable all switches.

In step S3033, the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup clear signal is OFF. If the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S3033), the main CPU 101 moves to step S3034.

In step S3034, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power outage situation identification flag is ON. If the power outage situation identification flag is ON (YES in step S3034), the main CPU 101 moves to step S3035. As mentioned above, the power outage status identification flag is set to ON when a power outage occurs during normal gaming (during gaming where neither setting change processing nor setting confirmation processing is being performed) or during setting confirmation processing. If a power outage occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power outage occurred during the normal game or during the setting confirmation process, the process of step S3035 is performed.

In step S3035, the main CPU 101 initializes a work area that requires an initial value at the time of recovery from power outage.

Next, in step S3036, if the gaming state at the time of recovery from the power outage is a high probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification settings indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state.

Next, in step S<b>3037 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a power recovery command (power recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200 . This command also includes setting value information about the setting values that have been set. When this process is finished, the main CPU 101 finishes the game return process in step S3030 (see FIG. 176), and the series of power-on processes ends. This allows the game to be played. The power failure recovery command described above functions as a command indicating that it is time to recover from a power failure, or a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed.

In step S3033, the main CPU 101 turns on the backup clear signal.
If it is determined (NO in step S3033), the process moves to backup clear processing in step S3039. This backup clearing process is similar to the backup clearing process in step S32420 shown in FIG. 180 (the backup clearing process shown in FIG. 181), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear process in step S3039 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S3040 and initializes a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S3041, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is finished, the main CPU 101 finishes the game return process in step S3030 (see FIG. 176), and the series of power-on processes ends. This allows the game to be played. Note that the above initialization command can be used as a command to indicate that the settings change process has ended (backup clear process has also been executed), or as a command to indicate that backup clear process without setting change process has been executed. Function.

Furthermore, the output period of the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process until the completion process of the setting confirmation process. It has become. However, it is not necessary that these periods match completely.

[Abnormality processing]
FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an example of abnormality processing. As described above, the abnormality process in step S3038 (see FIG. 183) is executed when it is determined that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3031) in the process in step S3031 (see FIG. 183). It is processing.

First, in step S3381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting to the sub control circuit 200 an abnormality command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be played. When the sub CPU 201 receives the abnormal command, it determines that there is a backup failure, and can display information that the pachinko game machine is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

Note that the main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to send the abnormal command. For example, if the sub CPU 201 cannot receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. You may also do so.

In step S3382, the main CPU 101 performs output settings for the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above.

In step S3383, the main CPU 101 sets a notification so that an error code indicating that the game is not permitted to be played (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336, the hall personnel can understand that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF).

In step S3384, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power interruption detection signal is ON. The power interruption detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. If the main CPU 101 determines that the power outage detection signal is ON (YES in step S3384), the process moves to step S3385, and a power outage process is executed. On the other hand, if the power interruption detection signal is OFF (NO in step S3384), the main CPU 101 loops steps S3382 to S3384 (the processes of steps S3382 to S3384 are repeated).

[Processing when power outage occurs]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power outage occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, performs a power-off event process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition settings so that interrupt processing is not executed (step S33851). Then, a checksum is calculated in the work area of the main RAM 103, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S33852). This checksum is used to check whether the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power outage are properly retained when the power is restored. In this way, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to retain various game data stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power outage situation identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S33853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 identifies the situation at the time of power outage if the power outage occurs during normal gaming (during gaming where neither setting change processing nor setting confirmation processing is performed) or setting confirmation processing. The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change process, it is set to OFF.

When the main CPU 101 finishes the processing of steps S33851 to S33853, the process moves to step S33854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and enters an infinite loop in preparation for stopping the power supply.

When the game permission flag is OFF in this way, as described above, the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation, and the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the setting change process described later is executed. It has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power outage (hereinafter referred to as an "instantaneous power outage") and the power outage process is started, it is not possible to recover from the infinite loop. There is a risk that it will disappear. In order to avoid such a problem, the main CPU 101 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined period of time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the process is being performed normally, but it is no longer updated when the process starts when a power-off occurs. As a result, even if the power interruption process is entered due to an instantaneous power failure and the infinite loop shown in FIG. 185 is entered, a reset will be performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the main CPU 101 will start up in the same process as when the power is turned on.

Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as EEPROM) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that constant power supply is not required to back up data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area where data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, there is no need to save data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is turned off. Further, even when the power is restored, there is no need to read the saved data to the processing area, so the load required for these processes is reduced.

[Flow of power-on processing from the operator's perspective]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, and the flow of the power-on process from the perspective of the person performing the operation (for example, a person involved in the hall) will be briefly explained.

[Settings change process flow]
First, a description will be given of the setting change process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting values. In order to change the set value, it is first necessary to perform a power-off operation (turning off the power switch 35). Then, while the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, all switch operations are disabled, and only settings-related operations (for example, setting key 328 operation, setting switch 332 operation) are enabled, and settings cannot be changed. Processing will start and you will be in a state where you can change settings.

When the setting change process is started, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Furthermore, after the power switch 35 is turned on, the display on the performance display monitor 334 switches from a light-off state to information indicating the set value.

In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands at the time of RWM initialization) When the backup clearing process is executed, a sound indicating that the backup clearing process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. Note that, as will be described later, there is no display to the effect that the backup clear process has been executed, but instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24, a display to the effect that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. It may also be displayed in an area.

In the setting change process, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is displayed in a cyclical manner. That is, the information indicating the setting value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the setting value is "1" to "5", but the information indicating the setting value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. When you press , the display returns to "1".

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state ends and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display on the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting changing code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operations of all switches are enabled.

In this way, during the setting change process, only the settings-related operations (for example, operation of the setting key 328 and operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches are enabled, and all other switches remain disabled. . Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are enabled.

[Flow of settings confirmation process]
Next, a description will be given of a setting confirmation process, that is, a flow for confirming the set setting values. The setting confirmation process is a process that is executed on the condition that the game permission flag is internally ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

In order to check the set value, on the condition that the game permission flag is ON internally, turn on the setting key 328 with the power turned off, and turn on the backup clear clear switch 330. Turn on the power switch 35 without pressing the button.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, all switch operations are disabled, only the setting key 328 operation is enabled among all the switches, and the setting confirmation process is started, allowing the set settings to be confirmed. becomes.

When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Furthermore, after the power switch 35 is turned on, the display on the performance display monitor 334 switches from a light-off state to information indicating the set value.

Note that during the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If you turn off the setting key 328 during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation state ends, the display on the error notification monitor 336 changes from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display monitor 334 shows the performance display (base value). will be displayed and all switch operations will be enabled.

In this way, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 among all the switches is enabled, and all other switches remain disabled. Therefore, setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are enabled. Note that, as described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[Flow of abnormality processing]

As described above, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, although the setting change process can be executed, the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the operation to execute the setting change process (turning on the setting key 328 and pressing the backup clear clear switch 330 while the power is not turned on) is necessary. If you perform an operation to confirm the settings without turning on the power switch 35), if you perform a backup process that does not involve changing settings (details will be described later), or if you simply If the user simply turns on the power, the abnormality process is executed. The flow of abnormality processing will be explained below.

After turning on the power switch 35, all switch operations are disabled, and only settings-related operations (for example, setting key 328 operation, setting switch 332 operation) are enabled (internal (In this case, abnormality processing will be started). The reason why operations related to settings are enabled is to enable the game permission flag to be turned on by executing the settings change process.

When the abnormality processing is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be played is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. This allows the operator to confirm that the game cannot be played. Further, information indicating an error is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Furthermore, when abnormality processing is started, operations related to settings are also disabled. In other words, all switch operations are disabled. Therefore, once the abnormality process is started, no matter what operation is performed, the pachinko game will not respond, and unless the power switch 35 is turned OFF and the above setting change process is performed, the pachinko game will not be able to play the game. Unable to restore the machine. Note that disabling the operation of all switches means that each device controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 is also completely stopped, making it impossible to play the game at all, and disabling each device controlled by some of the sub-control circuits 200 (e.g. The LEDs 25) include those that are in a controllable state.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. System timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the values of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S3051).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing to update various random numbers (step S3052).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing to detect input signals from various switches (step S3053. The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing to update the values of various timers (step S3054).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing to output (send) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S3055).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S3056). The game information is information related to the game that is processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/fire control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700. Ru.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the saved values of each register (step S3057). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes the starting opening winning detection process (step S3061). The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 188.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S3062). In the general winning hole passage detection process, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out and the like is set when a winning is made to the general winning holes 53, 54, 55, and 56, for example.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S3063). In the grand prize opening passage detection process, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out and the like is set, for example, at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 540.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S3064). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game ( Random value) is extracted. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (step S3071). When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (YES in step S3071), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3052. If the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 421 (NO in step S3071), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3081.

In step S3072, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S3073, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first starting hole winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening (the number of pending first special symbols) is less than four (step S3074). If the number of pending items is less than four (YES in step S3074), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3075. When the number of pending balls is 4 (NO in step S3074), the main CPU 101 discards the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and moves to the process of step S3080.

In step S3075, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 420 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. (Step S3076). As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the starting condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S3077). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the jackpot random number determination table, symbol determination table, and jackpot type for the first special symbol are determined based on the random value for jackpot determination and the random value for symbol determination extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, a symbol designation command, a hit selection symbol command, etc. related to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process (step S3078). The fluctuation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the starting opening winning detection process described above. In addition, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172), and selects a variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the reach determination random value, and the production selection random value. , perform the processing to determine.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 170 and 172, since the fluctuation pattern is stored in association with the fluctuation display time of the decorative pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the above fluctuation pattern determination process is The pattern designation command essentially becomes information that can represent variation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening (step S3079). The command for increasing the number of pending winnings in the first starting opening is a command that indicates that the number of pending winnings in the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with a command that indicates the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S3078. is sent.

In step S3080, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold number overflow command for first starting opening winnings, and moves to step S3081. The first starting opening winning number overflow command is a command that indicates that there is a first starting opening winning when the number of holding first special symbols is at the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces), and is sent to the sub control circuit 200. is sent.

Note that, as is clear from FIG. 188, the overflow command for the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 when the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process of step S3072, which will be described later. The premise is that

In step S3081, the main CPU 101 determines whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S3081). When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S3081), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3082. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 441 (NO in step S3081), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection process.

In step S3082, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as step S3072.

In step S3083, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening (the number of pending second special symbols) is less than four (step S3084). If the number of pending items is less than four (YES in step S3084), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3085. If the number of pending balls is 4 (NO in step S3084), the main CPU 101 discards the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 440, and ends the starting hole winning detection process.

In step S3085, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. (Step S3086). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol with respect to the extracted random number is suspended until the starting condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S3087). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process also uses the second special symbol based on the extracted jackpot determination random value and symbol determination random value extracted for the second special symbol. A symbol designation command, a jackpot selection symbol command, etc. related to the main symbol (second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined by referring to the jackpot random number determination table, symbol determination table, and jackpot type determination table.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process (step S3088). Similar to step S3078, this fluctuation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the starting opening winning detection process described above, and the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). Then, as a result of the jackpot determination, a process is performed to select a variation pattern based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening (step S3089). The command to increase the number of pending winnings in the second starting opening is a command that indicates that the number of pending winnings in the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with a command that indicates the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S3088. is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In addition, if the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 and the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check process of step S3072 or the setting check process of step S3082 is performed. You may perform only one of them.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S3081), the number of pending winnings in the second starting port is 4 (NO in step S3084). Even if the main CPU 101 discards the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second starting opening 440 without transmitting the overflow command for the pending number of winnings to the second starting opening 440 to the sub-control circuit 200. The starting opening winning detection process has ended. This is because it is in the non-time-saving gaming state that the setting value suggestion effect, which will be described later, can be effectively performed.

[Settings check process]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting check process by the main CPU 101, and this setting check process is the same process in step S3072 and step S3082 (both see FIG. 188). The setting check process is a process of checking whether the set setting values are normal. In this setting check process, for example, a process similar to the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S31720 (see FIG. 178) may be performed, but in this second embodiment, the set settings The emphasis is on checking whether the values are normal or not.

As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first checks in step S3721 whether the setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As mentioned above, in this second embodiment, since "0" to "5" are stored in the main RAM 103 as setting value data corresponding to setting values "1" to "6", here, setting value data It is determined whether or not the value is within the range of "0" to "5". If the setting value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S3721), the setting check process ends. If the set value data is outside the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S3721), the process moves to step S3722.

In step S3722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and moves to step S3723.

In step S3723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (YES in step S3723), the process proceeds to step S3724, and if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a variable display (NO in step S3723), the process proceeds to step S3725.

In step S3724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the special symbols being displayed in a variable manner from stopping. That is, even if the special symbol variation time determined in step S3078 or step S3088 (both see FIG. 188) with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172) has elapsed, The special symbol continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the special symbol does not stop displaying. After that, the process moves to step S3726.

For example, if a game ball enters the starting hole 5442, 440 while the main CPU 101 is performing a variable display of a special symbol, a step will be taken during the variable display of the special symbol (before the variable display of the special symbol ends). Setting check processing in S3072 (or step S3082) may be executed. If the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S3721), even if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is not displayed). ), the game permission flag is turned OFF and abnormality processing is executed. In this case, the game cannot be played unless the power is turned off once and the setting change process is executed, so the jackpot determination result of the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, including pending data, will be cleared in the backup clear process. The Rukoto.

In step S3726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the shooting of game balls. That is, the dispensing/firing control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) is controlled not to supply power to the firing solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player grasps the firing handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game ball will not be fired, making it impossible to play the game.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of game balls in step S3726, the main CPU 101 moves to abnormality processing in step S3727.

In step S3725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol and prevents the next new variable display from starting. For example, even if the special symbol's fluctuating display is put on hold when the special symbol is not being fluctuated, or even if the special symbol's fluctuating display has stopped and you are waiting for the next fluctuating display to start, the special symbol's fluctuating display will start. Not done. When the main CPU 101 finishes the process in step S3725, the process moves to step S3726.

In the abnormality process in step S3727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormality process in step S3038 (see FIG. 183). That is, the processes from step S3381 to step S3384 shown in FIG. 184 are performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence process of step S3385, that is, the process shown in FIG. The processes from step S33851 to step S33854 shown in 185 are performed.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the setting check process is performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 420 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, and the settings are checked in the main RAM 103. If the set value data stored in the game is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even if the game is in progress, if the setting value data is not normal, it will be impossible to continue playing the game, and unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to change the settings, Unable to play games. As a result, it is possible to prevent, for example, a game from being played continuously in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the set value data is not appropriate in step S3721, even if the variable display of the special symbol has not started yet and is on hold, the main CPU 101 temporarily turns off the power and then turns the power back on as described above. Since the game cannot be played unless the game is inserted and the settings are changed, all of the various data related to the suspension stored in the main RAM 103 (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, etc.) are cleared. In other words, regardless of whether the various types of data that are withheld are based on the winning of game balls in the first starting port 420 or the winning of game balls in the second starting port 440, all cleared. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the various data related to the above-mentioned suspension from being processed based on incorrect setting values, and it is possible to improve security.

Furthermore, as described above, the same setting check process is performed in step S3072 and step S3082 (both see FIG. 188). Therefore, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S3072) that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S3721) performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 420, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stopping of the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S3721) in the setting check process (step S3082) performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, in step S3724, The main CPU 101 prohibits stopping of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner not only when the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S3072) performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 420 (NO in step S3721), in step S3725 , the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S3721) in the setting check process (step S3082) performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, in step S3725, The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

In addition, in this second embodiment, the setting check process is performed not only when the power is turned on (see step S31730 in FIG. 178) but also when a game ball enters the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, during the setting confirmation process (see step S3024 in FIG. 179), during the setting change process (see step S3026 in FIG. 179), when executing the backup clear process (see FIG. 181), and when changing the special symbol. The settings are checked at predetermined timings, such as when the special symbol stops changing, when passing is detected by the passing gate switch 49a (see Fig. 9), when the normal pattern starts changing, and when the normal pattern stops changing. Processing may also be performed. Note that the above predetermined timings are listed as examples. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing, but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or some of the above timings). Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the settings are not normal.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when it is determined in the setting check process that the setting value data is not normal, the game permission flag is immediately turned OFF and the game proceeds regardless of whether or not the jackpot game state is in progress. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process may be shifted from the timing at which the execution of the game is made impossible. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has entered the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable to perform various judgment processes (for example, jackpot judgment process, etc.) in a state where the set value data is not normal, various judgment processes are not performed, and after the special symbol is displayed fluctuating for a predetermined period of time, the corresponding It is preferable that the special symbol is stopped when the special symbol is lost.

Although not shown in FIG. 189, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S3722, it is preferable that stopping of the normal symbol is also prohibited if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. . Further, when the normal symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbols.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting processing as shown in the figure (step S3091). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs processes such as the power-on process described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial value random number update processing (step S3092). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing (step S3093). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 191.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S3094). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 197.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs symbol display section control processing (step S3095). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, A process is performed in which control signals for driving the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71 are stored in the main RAM 103. As a result, the main CPU 101 sends a control signal to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) and normal symbol display section 71, The display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) and normal symbol display section 71 perform variable display and stop display of special symbols and normal symbols based on the received control signals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information data generation processing (step S3096). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a gaming state command regarding gaming information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout/fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores it in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs storage/gaming state data generation processing (step S3097). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage/gaming status data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/gaming status data in the main RAM 103. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S3092.

[Special pattern control processing]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process mentioned above. Note that the numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area within the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 191, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S3101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether to execute each process of steps S3102 to S110, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game and enables execution of any one of steps S3102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S3102 to S110. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, each process is not executed, and processes related to other subroutines are executed. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 186) is also executed at a predetermined period.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S3102). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the pending number of special symbol fluctuation displays when the control status flag is a value indicating special symbol memory check processing ("00"), and if the pending number is not "0" (If there is a reserved ball), the jackpot determination result obtained in the starting opening winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the special symbol variation pattern, etc. are obtained. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S3093), which will be described later, and applies the variable pattern acquired in the current process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection processing has elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing to be described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is "0" (when there are no balls on hold), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process to display a demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 192.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol fluctuation time management processing (step S3103). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a special symbol, which will be described later, when the control state flag has a value ("01") indicating special symbol variation time management processing and the special symbol variation display time has elapsed. A value ("02") indicating the display time management process (step S3104) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S3103 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process to be described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing (step S3104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the jackpot is determined if the control status flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S3103 has elapsed. Determine whether the result is a "jackpot" or not. Then, when the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating jackpot start interval management processing (step S3105), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and sets the jackpot start interval to "03". Set the corresponding time in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S3104 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process to be described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is not a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S3110), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs jackpot start interval management processing (step S3105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control status flag is a value indicating jackpot start interval management processing ("03") and if the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S3104 has elapsed, In order to open the winning hole 540, variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the later-described big winning hole opening process (step S3106) to the control state flag, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the big winning hole 540 (for example, 30 seconds) to the grand prize opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, the later-described big winning hole opening process is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the big winning hole opening process (step S3106). In this process, first, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that when the control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the process of opening the big winning opening, the winning opening counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the grand winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). If one of the conditions is met, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big prize opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("05") indicating a residual ball monitoring process in the big winning opening (step S3107) to the control state flag, and sets the waiting time timer to the monitoring time for remaining balls in the big winning opening. do. That is, by this process, after the remaining ball monitoring time in the big winning hole set in step S3107 has elapsed, the later-described big winning hole remaining ball monitoring process is set to be executed. In addition, immediately before the end of this big winning hole opening process, an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a residual ball monitoring process in the big winning hole (step S3107). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the number of times the grand prize opening counter is set when the control status flag is a value ("05") indicating the process of monitoring remaining balls in the grand prize opening and the remaining ball monitoring time in the grand prize opening has elapsed. It is determined whether the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum value of the number of openings of the big prize opening (this is the final round) is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not met, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the grand prize opening re-opening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the inter-round interval in a waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before the re-opening of the big winning hole, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the above conditions are met, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("07") indicating jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (jackpot end interval time) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described below is set to be executed.

Next, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the grand prize opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of grand prize openings, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before the grand prize opening is re-opened (step S3108). In this process, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning hole when the control status flag is a value ("06") indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning hole is re-opened, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so that the value of the number of times counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the big winning hole opening process to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-described big winning hole opening process (step S3106) is set to be executed again. In addition, just before the end of the waiting time management process before the grand prize opening is re-opened, a grand prize opening display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of times the big winning hole is opened is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times the big winning hole is opened, the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot end interval process (step S3109). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("07") indicating jackpot end interval processing, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("07") indicating special symbol game end processing. 08'') is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the process of step S3109. In addition, when the above-mentioned main symbol is any of the special symbols 1-2, 1-8, and 2-2, the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the gaming state to a high probability gaming state. , If the above-mentioned main symbol is any of the special symbols 1-1, 1-3, and 2-1, control is performed to set the gaming state to a low probability gaming state (probability variable flag OFF). conduct.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game ending process when the jackpot gaming state ends or when the jackpot determination result is a "loss" (step S3110). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the memory so that when the control state flag has a value ("08") indicating special symbol game end processing, the data indicating the number of pending symbols (starting memory information) is decreased by "1". do. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the next special symbol in a variable manner. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing to the control state flag. That is, by this process, the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S3102) is set to be executed after the process of step S3110. When this special symbol game ending process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not a jackpot gaming state and the result of jackpot determination is "loss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00", "01", "02", or "08". Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (step S3102), special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S3103), special symbol display time management process (step S3104), and special symbol game end process (step S3110). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

In addition, if the gaming state is not a jackpot gaming state and the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "03". do. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (step S3102), special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S3103), special symbol display time management process (step S3104), and jackpot start interval management process (step S3105). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing to control the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, when the transition control to the jackpot gaming state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06". As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned process during opening of the grand prize opening (step S3106), residual ball monitoring process in the grand prize opening (step S3107), and waiting time management process before the grand prize opening is re-opened (step S3108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing to execute a jackpot game state.

Note that when the termination condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied during the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described big winning hole opening process (step S3106), remaining ball monitoring process in the big winning hole (step S3107), jackpot end interval process (step S3109), and special symbol game ending process (step S3110). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As mentioned above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched depending on the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 197 described later) in step S3094 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 190 also branches the processing flow according to the status, similar to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the second embodiment is programmed in such a way that pure return processing from a small module to a parent module is possible using a call instruction when processing is branched depending on the status. As a result, compared to the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing, the program capacity can be reduced in this second embodiment.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage check processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S3111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the read control status flag is a value ("00") indicating special symbol storage check processing (step S3112). If it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S3112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S3112), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3113.

In step S3113, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pending number (second starting memory number) of second starting opening winnings (fluctuating display of second special symbols) is "0". If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening is "0" (YES in step S3113), the process moves to step S3114, and if the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening is not "0". If it is determined (NO in step S3113), the process moves to step S3121.

In step S3114, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pending number (first starting memory number) of the first starting opening winnings (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is "0". If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening is not "0" (NO in step S3114), it moves to the process of step S3115, and determines that the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening is "0". If determined (YES in step S3114), the process moves to step S3120.

In step S3115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first starting memory number corresponding to the pending number of winnings from the first starting opening. In this second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner or is on hold. The data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) as starting memory information. The first special symbol starting memory area (1) to the first special symbol starting memory area (4) are stored in the special symbol game corresponding to the four pending first special symbol variable displays (holding balls). data (information) is stored as starting storage information. The starting memory information of each first special symbol starting memory area includes, for example, data indicating a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for symbol determination, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning in the first starting hole 420. is included.

Next, in step S3116, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing based on the first starting opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data in the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4), respectively, to the first special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (4).
Shift to (3). At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3117.

In step S3117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating special symbol variation time management processing. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol presentation start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S3118, the main CPU 101 performs jackpot determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the random number value for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting slot and previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) or the second special symbol starting storage area (0). Based on this, a jackpot determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of winning start opening is referred to to obtain determination value data. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "loss" (jackpot determination) based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S3119, the main CPU 101 sets the waiting time timer to the variable display time corresponding to the special symbol variable pattern determined in the variable pattern determination process of step S3078 or step S3088 (see FIG. 188). . When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S3120, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process to display a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S3121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second starting memory number corresponding to the pending number of second starting opening winnings. In this second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner or is on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as start memory information. Then, the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are stored in the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the four times held (holding ball). data (information) is stored as starting storage information. The starting memory information in each second special symbol starting storage area includes, for example, data indicating random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, and determined fluctuation patterns extracted at the time of winning in the second starting opening 440. is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol memory transfer processing based on the second starting opening winning prize (step S3122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3117, executes the processes of step S3118 and step S3119, and then ends the special symbol memory check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing (step S3131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S3131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing (YES in step S3131), the main CPU 101 moves to processing in step S3132.

In step S3132, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time after the fluctuation display is confirmed (the fluctuation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has expired. If it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S3132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S3132), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3133.

In step S3133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (YES in step S3133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3134. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "jackpot" (NO in step S3133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3140.

In step S3134, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3135.

In step S3135, the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the time saving number counter, the time saving flag, and the probability change flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3136.

In step S3136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating jackpot start interval management processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S3137).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S3138). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 169, FIG. 173, or FIG. 174), and determines the round number upper limit (big winning hole opening number upper limit) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command). ) is set in the main RAM 103, and a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S3139). Note that the round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining round number in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S3140, the main CPU 101 performs time saving frequency subtraction processing. This time saving number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating special symbol game end processing (step S3141). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[Time saving number subtraction process]
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the time saving frequency subtraction process performed by the main CPU 101. The time saving number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S3151). The time saving number counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time saving number becomes 0. If the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (YES in step S3151), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S3151), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process. Although details will be described later, in this second embodiment, the number of times set as the time saving number counter is 100 or 10,000.

In step S3152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S3153). If the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (YES in step S3153), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S3153), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S3154, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set the time saving flag to "0". When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end interval process by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process mentioned above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval process (step S3161). If it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (NO in step S3161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S3161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3162.

In step S3162, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has expired. If it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S3162), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S3162), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3163.

In step S3163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of openings of the big winning opening. The big winning opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot is displayed by an LED light emitting pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S3164). This round number allocation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not to periodically open and close the grand prize opening 540 a predetermined number of times even during one round. This is the flag. If the big prize opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating special symbol game end processing (step S3165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (step S3166). If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (YES in step S3166), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "jackpot" (NO in step S3166), the main CPU 101 moves to step S3174.

In step S3167, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set a jackpot flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to ON.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot (step S3168). If it is a probability variable jackpot (YES in step S3168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3169. If it is not a probability variable jackpot (NO in step S3168), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3171.

In step S3169, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set the probability change flag to "1".

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set the time saving flag to "1" (step S3171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of time reductions in the time reduction number counter (step S3172). In this second embodiment, with reference to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 169, FIG. 173, or FIG. -1, etc.), the time saving number counter is set to 100 times, and the time saving continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. -2, etc.), the time saving number counter is set to 10,000 times. However, the time saving number counter that is set when the time saving continues until the next jackpot game state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game continues from the opening of the hall to the closing. It is fine as long as it is a number of times that cannot realistically occur. In this way, by setting the time saving number counter to a number of times that would not realistically occur even if the game continues from opening to closing of the hall, time saving will continue until the next jackpot game state is executed. I will do it. Furthermore, if it is a jackpot with 100 times of time saving, it performs counter processing (sets 100 times in the time saving number counter), and if it is a jackpot that will continue to save time until the next jackpot game state is executed, flag processing is performed. (The time-saving gaming state may be continued as long as the time-saving flag is ON).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S3173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 196. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S3174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF.

In step S3175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time reduction number subtraction process (step S3175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The fluctuation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S3181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S3181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3182. If the power is not turned on (NO in step S3181), the main CPU 101 moves to step S3183.

In step S3182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). Table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are ON (both jackpot and loss) in the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). .

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time saving flag is ON (step S3183). If the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S3183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3184. If the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S3183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S3185.

In step S3184, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is OFF (both jackpot and loss) in the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172).

In step S3185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. Table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is ON (both jackpot and loss) in the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172).

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical values ("00" to "04") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 197 indicate normal symbol control state flags, and this normal symbol control state flag is is stored in a predetermined storage area within. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S3191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether to execute various processes of steps S3192 to S196, which will be described later, based on the read value of the normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the gaming state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S3162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S3162 to S166. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 186) is also executed at a predetermined period.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S3192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating normal symbol memory check processing ("00"), the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending symbols in the fluctuating display of normal symbols, and if the pending number is "0". If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S3193), which will be described later, and sets the fluctuation time determined in the current process to Set the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S3192, after the determined normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing (step S3193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag is set to the normal symbol control state flag. A value ("02") indicating normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S3194) is set, and a waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S3193, after the set post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process to be described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S3194). In this process, the main CPU 101 detects a jackpot when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S3193 has elapsed. It is determined whether the result of the determination is a "big hit" or not. Then, when the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot", the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory release setting process, and sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ( "03"). That is, through this process, the normal electric accessory opening process described below is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is not a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("04") indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S3195), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game ending process described below is set to be executed.

Next, if the result of the jackpot determination is determined to be a "jackpot" in step S3194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory release process (step S3195). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the normal electric accessory 460 is being released when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process. It is determined whether one of the conditions and the condition that the upper limit opening time of the normal electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to bring the blade member 4620 (see FIG. 5, for example) of the normal electric accessory 460 into the closed state. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S3196), which will be described later. That is, through this process, the normal symbol game ending process described below is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol game end processing (step S3196). In this process, the main CPU 101 decreases the data indicating the pending number of fluctuating displays of normal symbols by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag has a value ("04") indicating normal symbol game end processing. Update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the normal symbols. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process. That is, after the process of step S3196, the above-described normal symbol memory check process (step S3192) is set to be executed. When this process is finished, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes sub control circuit main processing. This sub-control circuit main processing will be explained using FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the sub CPU 201. Note that this sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 198, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. (step S3201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S3202). A reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set for the watchdog timer when it is started, and a power-off process is executed when a service pulse is not written (at time-out).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S3203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S3204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes production mode determination processing (step S3205). The performance mode determination process is a process for determining the performance mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands sent from the main control circuit 100.

The presentation mode determined in the above presentation mode determination process (step S3205) also includes a setting suggestion presentation that suggests the set setting value. This setting suggestion effect will be explained using a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion performance is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 420 (see FIG. 5, for example) exceeds the reservation upper limit. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the first starting winning slot overflow point, and when the first starting winning opening pending number overflow command is sent from the main control circuit 100, 1 is added to the first starting winning opening overflow point. do. Then, when this first starting prize opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines to execute the setting suggestion performance in the above performance mode determination process. In a non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is OFF, such as the normal gaming state, it is not easy to enter the game ball into the first starting opening 420, so if the first starting winning opening overflows, the player will be extremely disappointed. . Therefore, by performing a setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first starting winning hole overflow occurs in the non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress player disappointment without directly causing a loss to the hole. It becomes possible. Furthermore, some players interrupt the firing of game balls when the number of game balls entered into the first starting port 420 is at the pending upper limit. In this regard, it is also possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion performance on the condition that the winning number of game balls in the first starting opening 420 exceeds the reservation upper limit.

In addition, in the first example of the above-mentioned setting suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performance is performed when the first starting winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the pending number overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the setting suggestion effect is executed more frequently, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect be difficult to guess by performing the setting suggestion effect only once. For example, it is difficult to infer the setting from only the information obtained from one setting suggestion performance, but it becomes possible to infer the setting by collecting multiple pieces of information obtained from multiple setting suggestion performances. It is possible to do so.

Furthermore, as described above, the reason that the first starting slot prize pending number overflow command is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is on the premise that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process of step S3072. be. Therefore, if the setting value data is not determined to be normal in the setting check process, even if the game ball is placed in the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) beyond the reservation upper limit. , the sub CPU 201 does not add to the first starting winning slot overflow point. Therefore, if the winning of game balls to the first starting opening 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the reservation upper limit, the first starting winning opening overflow point will reach a predetermined point (for example, a predetermined point 49 points compared to 50 points), when the winning of game balls to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the pending upper limit, the setting check process of step S3072 (see FIG. 188) If it is determined that it is not normal in (see), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722, which will be described later), without the sub CPU 201 performing a setting suggestion effect, making it impossible to proceed with the game. .

In addition, in the first example of the setting suggestion performance, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the reservation upper limit, the setting suggestion performance is not performed ( (see FIG. 188), on the condition that the winning of game balls to the second starting port 440 exceeds the pending upper limit, the settings are made in the same way as when the winning of game balls to the first starting port 420 exceeds the pending upper limit. Suggestive effects may be performed.

(Second example)
A second example of the setting suggestion performance is performed when a game ball enters a specific winning hole during execution of the ready-to-win performance. For example, at the start of the ready-to-win performance, the sub CPU 201 selects a specific winning hole from among the first starting hole 420, the second starting hole 440, and the general winning holes 53, 54, and 55 (all of which are shown in FIG. 5, for example). Randomly determined by lottery. Then, when the winning command of the game ball to the determined winning hole is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 during execution of the ready-to-win effect, it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect. For example, some players interrupt the firing of game balls when a reach effect with a long variable time is executed. Therefore, by executing a setting suggestion effect based on the detection of a winning of a game ball in a specific prize opening while executing a reach effect, it becomes possible to encourage the firing of game balls even during a reach effect. . In addition, there are cases in which it is immediately obvious that the level of expectation for a reach effect is low at the time the reach effect is started. In such a case, for the player, the next variable display will not start until the ready-to-win effect ends, which may reduce the player's interest. In this regard, by executing the setting suggestion performance based on the winning detection of the game ball in a specific winning opening during the execution of the ready-to-win performance, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest. Moreover, if the setting values can be set by the gaming machine manager, players may become suspicious that the setting values of the pachinko machines they play are low. According to the above example, such fear can be alleviated, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the above-mentioned specific winning hole is randomly determined from among the first starting hole 420, the second starting hole 440, and each general winning hole 53, 54, and 55 (for example, see FIG. 5), for example, by lottery, It is preferable to keep it secret without disclosing which is the specific winning opening. This makes it more interesting for the player to decide which winning opening to aim for.

In addition, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning opening is set to the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53, 54, and 55 (for example, see FIG. 5). From among these, for example, it is randomly determined by lottery, but the specific winning opening is not necessarily determined at random, and a fixed winning opening may be used as the specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the sub CPU 201 decides to execute the setting suggestion effect, but the main CPU 101 may also make the decision.

In addition, when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning hole during execution of the reach effect, if the specific winning hole is the starting hole, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 (both refer to FIG. 188) is performed. be exposed. The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the settings are normal in the above setting check process (YES in step S3721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the above setting check process (NO in step S3721), it not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect, but also prohibits the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner from stopping by the process in step S734. do. Furthermore, even if the sub-CPU 201 is in the process of performing a fluctuating display of decorative symbols accompanied by a ready-to-reach performance, the sub CPU 201 continues to perform the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the audio control circuit 205, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command transmission processing (step S3206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes drawing control processing (step S3207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the audio control circuit 205 executes audio control processing (step S3208). In this process, the audio control circuit 205 performs audio control to cause the speaker 24 to output audio based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes control processing regarding the light emission mode of the LED 25 (step S3209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control to turn on or blink the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes accessory control processing (step S3210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (performance designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such sub-control circuit main processing, after the initialization processing of step S3201 is completed, each processing of steps S3202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 after receiving it from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) (step S3241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S3242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received, and that there are no errors or omissions in the data.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs sub lottery processing (step S3243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects a production pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In addition, in the sub-lottery process, all matters related to the performance including the performance pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of performance (presence or absence of dialogue preview, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) may be selected as the performance pattern. The production contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the production may be selected as production information in another process that is separately formed into a subroutine. In this second embodiment, a performance pattern indicating the type of performance is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the performance content to be executed based on the performance pattern is selected as performance information in the performance mode determination process described later. It has become.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, during the execution of the game, a setting check process is performed in step S3072 and step S3082 (see FIG. 188), and in this setting check process, the setting value data is "0" to " 5'' (NO in step S3721 in FIG. 189), the processes in steps S3722 to S3726 are executed, and then the abnormality process in step S3727 is executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the setting check process in step S3072 or step S3082 will not be executed. Further, in the case where the set value is changed due to input of an unauthorized signal, there is a possibility that the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, there are cases where the setting check process is not executed in step S3072 or step S3082, or when the setting value data is "0" even though the setting value may have been changed illegally. ” to “5” (for example, when the determination is YES in step S3721), the sub CPU 201 executes a setting determination process to determine whether or not the setting value information is appropriate. This setting determination process will be explained below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbol at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball enters the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440, and while the variable display of the special symbol is on hold). (e.g., when the main RAM 103 is sent), a command indicating the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the sub CPU 201 that has received this command determines whether the setting value information (hereinafter referred to as "current setting value") indicated by the currently received command is appropriate. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether setting value information (hereinafter referred to as "previous setting value") indicated by the previously received command matches the current setting value.

Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting value is normal if the previous setting value and the current setting value match, and determines that the setting value is abnormal if the previous setting value and the current setting value do not match. It is determined that

Furthermore, when the received setting value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes a setting value abnormality process. This abnormality execution processing may, for example, display an image in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to notify that the set value is abnormal, or alternatively or in addition to this, display an image to notify that the set value is abnormal. This is a process of outputting a notification sound.

Note that the above-mentioned determination of the suitability of the setting value information is not limited to determining whether the previous setting value and the current setting value match. Alternatively, it may be determined whether some of the setting value information received multiple times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received two times before and the current setting value) match. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not there is one. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a settings change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the settings change process (see step S3024 in FIG. 179) has been executed, the current setting value is stored in the work RAM 203. However, it is not determined whether or not the past setting values including the previous setting value match the current setting value.

Further, it is preferable that the above-mentioned setting determination process (determining the suitability of setting value information) is executed not only during the game, but also when the power is turned on after a power outage, as long as the setting change process is not executed. . The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 213.

The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed during the command analysis process (step S3204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[Command sending process]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S3251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (performance designation information) based on the performance information obtained in the performance mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a directory table registration process (step S3252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a corresponding direct table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and effect information stored in the direct buffer. This directory table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 202.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes message transmission processing (step S3253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to a predetermined control circuit 204 to 207. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message sending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 203.

[Message setting processing]
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing message setting processing by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command sending process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S3261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting whether or not the system is operating (step S3262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets stage information and each performance information (step S3263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S3264). As a result, messages indicating destination devices (control circuits 204 to 207), presence or absence of system operation, stage information, each performance information, and preview pattern are stored in the direct buffer. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Directory table registration process]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the directory table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a single table (step S3271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the performance information determined in the performance mode determination process (step S3272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a slave table to be used in the master table (step S3273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S3274). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration process.

[Message sending process]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends the message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. (Step S3281).

Next, after the message transmission is completed, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S3282). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message sending process.

[Extensibility of gaming machine according to second embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the variation time of special symbols, the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the variable entry rate, However, it is not necessarily necessary to change all of these according to the set value, and only one or a plurality of these may be changed according to the set value.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 71 is in a predetermined mode (the mode of "normal win"), the normal electric accessory 46 is displayed. It changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the player may be informed of the timing at which the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state or from the open state to the closed state (that is, the timing at which the game ball is fired). In this case, the frequency at which the game ball launch timing is notified may be changed depending on the setting value (the higher the setting value, the higher the launch timing notification frequency).

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S3039) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work areas of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clearing process is always performed when the setting change process (step S3024) is executed, so when the backup clearing process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 where data is cleared can be determined by the backup clear process performed when the settings change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the settings change process. It may be made to be different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, the high-probability game state remains until a predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed fluctuating a predetermined number of times), and after the predetermined number of games are completed, the high-probability game state remains In a pachinko game machine (a pachinko game machine called a so-called "ST machine") that shifts to a probability game state, when it is controlled to a high probability game state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is finished), a setting change process is performed. When the backup clear process is performed without the setting change process, the probability change flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear process is performed with the execution of the setting change process, the probability change flag is continued to be set to ON (remaining high probability gaming state). The memory of the number of games may be retained). Furthermore, when the backup clear process is performed with the execution of the setting change process, the probability change flag continues to be set ON when the setting value is the same as the previous one, and when it is set to a different setting value from the previous time. The probability variation flag may be set to OFF.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, in each round game in the jackpot game state, the big winning hole 540 is opened when the count of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 540 reaches 10 balls, and when the big winning hole 540 is opened. When either one of the following conditions is satisfied: when the state time reaches 30 seconds, the closed state is entered. Therefore, in each round game in the jackpot game state, the conditions under which the jackpot 540 changes from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions are prepared in which the grand prize opening 540 changes from an open state to a closed state (for example, a plurality of conditions are prepared in which the expected value of the number of game balls that can enter the grand prize opening 540 during one round is different). By preparing conditions) and changing the conditions according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the above-mentioned expected value is likely to be selected. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the grand prize opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the setting value, so that the higher the setting value is, the longer the opening time of the grand prize opening 540 is likely to be. It will be done. In addition, by changing the count of game balls when the grand prize opening 540 changes from an open state to a closed state in a round game according to the setting value, the higher the setting value, the more likely the number of gaming balls to enter the grand prize opening 540 will increase. It is also possible to do so.

Further, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a normal winning mode, the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period; The time during which the electric accessory 46 is in the open state (opening time) may be varied depending on the setting value, so that the higher the setting value, the longer the opening time of the normal electric accessory 46 tends to be.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when the jackpot is such that the probability change flag is turned on, as in special drawings 1-2 and 1-4, the next jackpot game is started after the jackpot gaming state ends. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is executed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440, a variable display of special symbols may be displayed. When the special symbol is on hold or when the variable display of special symbols is started, a transition lottery may be executed to determine whether to transition from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state. In this case, by varying the probability of transition from a high probability gaming state to a low probability gaming state depending on the setting value, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of continuation of the high probability gaming state (from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state) (lower the transition probability). Note that in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, a setting check process (step S3072, step S3082) is performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440, for example. When it is determined in the check process that it is not normal (NO in step S3721), the result of the transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S32420) by executing the setting change process (step S3024) (the probability change flag is also OFF). ).

As mentioned above, in this second embodiment, the jackpot probability, reach probability, special symbol variation time, main symbol selection rate (number of rounds, variable entry rate, short time entry rate) are determined according to the set values. Although a pachinko game machine in which the settings are changed has been described, the provision of setting differences is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and a part of the configuration may be changed. Another example of expansion in which the configuration is partially changed will be described below. Note that the configurations that are not particularly mentioned in the explanation of other expansion examples below are the same as the configuration of the second embodiment, but in the following, except for the step numbers, reference numerals are intentionally used for each component such as the main CPU. Not attached.

[Extension example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 1, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is met, a high probability game is played after the jackpot gaming state ends until the next jackpot gaming state starts. This will be explained by taking as an example a so-called "variable loop machine" in which the state continues. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set on the number of times that the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number"), and when the loop number reaches this upper limit, the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition to controlling the subsequent gaming state to a low probability gaming state, the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") can vary depending on the set value (such a gaming machine is called a "limiter number"). (also called machine). This will be explained with reference to FIG. 204. Note that FIG. 204 is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the limiter number of times in the Pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1 for each setting value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to expansion example 1 includes a loop number checking means that checks the number of loops when the result of jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot, and a limiter number of times that performs a limiter number lottery when the number of loops is 0. A lottery means, a loop number counting means that increments the number of loops when the number of loops is within a prescribed range (in the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and a loop number counting means that increments the number of loops when the number of loops is a prescribed value (in this example, the limiter upper limit is 5). This includes a game state control means for controlling the game state to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, and a loop number reset means for resetting the number of loops when the number of loops is a specified value. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, at the start of the jackpot gaming state, during the jackpot gaming state, or at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 204, in setting 1, the limiter number is determined to be once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, three times with a probability of 25%, There is a 15% probability that it will be determined 4 times, and a 5% probability that it will be determined 5 times. In setting 2, the limiter number of times is determined to be once with a 25% probability, twice with a 25% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 20% probability. 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, the limiter count is determined to be once with a 15% probability, twice with a 25% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 20% probability. 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, the limiter number of times is determined to be 1 time with a 15% probability, 2 times with a 20% probability, 3 times with a 25% probability, and 4 times with a 25% probability. 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, the limiter number of times is determined, for example, once with a 5% probability, twice with a 20% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 25% probability. 5 times with a probability of 25%. In setting 6, the limiter number is determined to be once with a 5% probability, twice with a 10% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 30% probability. 5 times with a probability of 25%. That is, the higher the set value is, the higher the expectation is that the limiter count will be determined to be larger.

In this way, the degree of expectation for the number of limiters is varied depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value, the more likely the jackpot gaming state and high probability gaming state will be repeated. It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls given to the player in each opportunity (until the game is controlled to a low-probability gaming state when the player wins once) in accordance with a set value. Furthermore, although the expected value for the limiter count is different depending on the set value, the limiter count is determined by lottery, so it is possible to prevent players from guessing the set value based on the limiter count. It has become.

In addition, in the above expansion example 1, the limiter count is determined by lottery according to the set value, but the lottery is not necessarily essential, and although there is a concern that the set value may be guessed by the player, The limiter number may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for settings 1 and 2, 4 times for settings 3 and 4, and 5 times for settings 5 and 6.

In addition, the above limiter count may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, if the above limiter count is determined separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the first limiter count for the first special symbol is set. is determined, and when a jackpot game state is controlled during the loop based on the jackpot determination result of the first special symbol, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the jackpot determination result of the second special symbol during the above loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is not incremented, and the second limiter number for the second special symbol is set. Determine. In this case, the loop may be ended (controlled to a low probability gaming state) when either the first limiter number of times or the second limiter number of times reaches the limiter number, or the first limiter number of times and the second limiter number of times The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number of times.

Also, for example, if the above limiter count is set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When it is a jackpot, the limiter number of times is determined, and during the loop, when it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the loop Increment the count. Then, when the number of loops reaches the limiter number, the loop ends.

Further, although the pachinko game machine of expansion example 1 described above is a so-called fixed variable loop machine, it does not necessarily have to be a fixed variable loop machine. For example, the above technical idea can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called "ST machine". You can also. "ST machine" is a machine that controls the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state to a high probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and maintains the high probability gaming state a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number of times"). This pachinko game machine continues until the variable display of the special symbols is performed, and when the variable display of the special symbols is performed the predetermined number of times, the high probability game state is ended and the control is controlled to the low probability game state. Even in such a "ST machine", the degree of expectation regarding the limiter number can be varied depending on the setting value. In other words, the higher the setting value, the more times the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state can be repeated. ), it is possible to vary the amount of prize balls given to the player according to a set value.

In addition, in the so-called "ST machine", it is possible to set the "ST number" to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but it is also possible to set the ST number to vary depending on the set value. . For example, the main CPU of the "ST machine" can determine the number of STs by lottery, and the expected value of the number of STs determined according to a set value can be set to be different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times for setting 1, 63 times for setting 2, 66 times for setting 3, 69 times for setting 4, 72 times for setting 5, and 60 times for setting 6. By setting the number of times to 75, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of STs can be. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to a set value. Note that when the number of STs is set to differ depending on the setting value, it is preferable to make the number of time saving times common to all setting values. For example, when the ST number or the expected value of the ST number is 60 times for setting 1, 63 times for setting 2, 66 times for setting 3, 69 times for setting 4, 72 times for setting 5, and 75 times for setting 6. It is conceivable to set the number of time saving times to 60 times, for example, in common to all settings. Then, the sub-CPU performs, for example, on the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect that allows the user to understand that a high-probability gaming state is in effect until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games), and when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games. Regardless of whether or not the game is in a high-probability gaming state, it is preferable to use, for example, a liquid crystal display device to provide an effect that makes it difficult to recognize that the game is in a high-probability gaming state. This makes it possible to vary the number of STs and the expected value of the number of STs depending on the set value while preventing the player from noticing the set value.

Further, in the pachinko game machine of the first extended example, a setting check process (step S3072, step S3082) is performed, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole. Then, when it is determined in this setting check process that it is not normal (NO in step S3721), even if it is in a loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state are being repeatedly executed), Without the loop count reaching the limiter count, the loop count is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S32420) by executing the setting change process (step S3024) (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[Extended example 2-1]
The pachinko game machine of expansion example 2 has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is separated from the downstream area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is normally difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the jackpot, a small win is also prepared as a result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to a set value, and determines a small hit when the result of this jackpot determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small win determination is a small win, a small win game is executed. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot is a hit that involves the operation of a conditional device, but the above-mentioned small hit is not a hit that involves the operation of a conditional device.

In addition, in this expansion example 2, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state where the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole, and the second The first special symbol game is mainly played among the second special symbol game based on winning of the game ball in the starting hole. On the other hand, in a probability variable time saving game state such as a time saving game state where the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the player wins a small hit with a predetermined probability. Note that when the result of the jackpot determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, there is no need to perform a small hit determination.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol, which is performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting hole, is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. A small winning game execution means that executes a small winning game that changes from the small winning game to an open mode, and a payout/launch control circuit based on a game ball winning a prize in a specific area that becomes an open mode by executing the small winning game. and a payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

In addition, in this second expansion example, the number of time saving times is set to, for example, five times, and a specific opening is provided in a specific area. For example, in the time-saving game state 5 times, when a game ball enters the starting hole as a result of a normal win, and a small win is achieved, a predetermined movable piece is activated and a specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific opening, the main CPU executes the jackpot game. Further, if the game does not normally win in the time-saving game state five times, the main CPU ends the time-saving game state and controls the game to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the game is played by right-handed hitting, in which the game ball is fired towards the right side area of the gaming area, and in the non-time-saving gaming state, the game is played in left-handed hitting, in which the game ball is fired towards the left side area of the gaming area. A game is played.

In such a pachinko game machine, in this expansion example 2, the small hit probability in at least the second special symbol game is varied according to a set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly played, for example, in a time-saving game state. In this case, it is possible to vary the opening frequency of a specific area, and thus the number of balls to be released, depending on the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 with setting 1, 1/8 with setting 2, 1/7 with setting 3, 1/6 with setting 4, 1/5 with setting 5, and 1/5 with setting 6. Make it 1/4. In this case, the higher the setting value is, the longer the variation time of the normal symbol is, or the higher the setting is, the longer the normal symbol fluctuation time is, or the higher the setting is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to enter the starting hole. It becomes easier for game balls to enter the starting slot. As a result, the higher the setting value is, the higher the frequency of winning of game balls in the specific area becomes, and by extension, it becomes possible to provide a difference in the speed of ball release depending on the setting value.

In addition, in this extended example 2, in the time-saving gaming state, the probability change flag may be set to ON, but it is not necessarily necessary to set the probability change flag to ON.

Additionally, if a game ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole while the main CPU is displaying the special symbols in a variable manner, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is executed in this case as well. . If the main CPU determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S3721), it turns off the game permission flag even if the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is a small hit. Execute abnormality processing. Therefore, even if the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol being displayed as a variable is a small hit, if it is determined in the setting check process that it is not normal, the main CPU executes the small win game based on the above small win. The game permission flag is turned OFF without any problem, and abnormality processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data, including the fact that the result of jackpot determination for the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a small hit, are cleared in the backup clear process.

[Extended example 2-2]
The pachinko game machine of expansion example 2-2 includes a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU determines the jackpot of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole, and determines the winning of the game ball in the second starting hole. Based on this, a jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed.

In addition, the main CPU operates in a first gaming state (for example, a probability variable flag and a normal gaming state where both the time saving flag and time saving flag are set to OFF), and a second gaming state where the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is set to ON). The present invention includes a gaming state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of gaming states including an advantageous gaming state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF and the time saving flag is set to OFF. In this pachinko game machine, when a jackpot is won with a specific symbol in the first game state, after the jackpot game ends, the machine is controlled to the second game state.

Further, a regular game ball gate is provided in the right side area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the regular gate, a regular lottery is held. If the result of this normal lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal win), the main CPU releases a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), thereby facilitating the entry of the game ball into the second starting slot. be done. Therefore, when a game is played by firing a game ball towards the right side area of the game area, the second starting port The frequency of winning of game balls is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of this jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is opened for multiple rounds. A first jackpot game execution means is provided for executing a jackpot game that is opened over several numbers.

Furthermore, in the second special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of this jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is opened. A second jackpot game execution means is provided for executing a jackpot game that is opened over a plurality of rounds. In addition, in the second special lottery, when the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the main CPU determines a small hit, and when the result of the small hit determination is a small hit. Also provided is a small winning game execution means for executing a small winning game.

Note that the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are the same. The jackpot probability in the first gaming state where the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 for setting 1, 1/290 for setting 2, 1/280 for setting 3, and 1/270 for setting 4. , setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. In addition, the jackpot probability in the second gaming state where the variable probability flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 for setting 1, 1/29 for setting 2, 1/28 for setting 3, and 27 minutes for setting 4. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

The main CPU includes a first jackpot game execution means that executes a jackpot game in which a predetermined big prize opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when the result of the first special lottery is a jackpot; and a second jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game in which a predetermined jackpot opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when a jackpot is won. Even if the big winning hole that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a jackpot and the big winning hole that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot are the same big winning hole, It's fine, and it can be a different big prize opening.

Further, the small winning probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the variable probability flag is ON or OFF. In addition, the small winning probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 with setting 1, 1/8 with setting 2, and 1/7 with setting 3, regardless of whether the variable probability flag is ON or OFF. , setting 4 is 1/6, and setting 5 is 1/6. In this way, the small winning probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set value, but any set value is higher than the small winning probability in the first special lottery.

Further, the main CPU has a small winning game execution means for executing a small winning game when the result of the second special lottery is a small winning. The small winning game is a game in which the same big winning hole as the big winning hole that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot is opened. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the payout/launch control circuit operates the payout device and controls so that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize. However, in the small winning game, the number of game balls that can be entered into the big winning slot is smaller than in the jackpot game, so the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small winning game than in the jackpot game.

Furthermore, as described above, the small winning probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, the main CPU performs a small hit determination with a small hit probability of 0 when the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

Note that the above-mentioned jackpot is a hit accompanied by the operation of a conditional device, but the above-mentioned small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of a conditional device.

The main CPU also includes a first special symbol fluctuation display control means that displays a variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole, and a first special symbol fluctuation display control means that performs a fluctuating display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole. and a second special symbol fluctuation display control means for variably displaying the second special symbol. The first special symbol fluctuation display control means causes the first special symbol to be variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol fluctuation display control means causes the second special symbol to be variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed.

The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means are configured to be able to be performed at the same timing. That is, if a game ball enters the second starting port while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port, the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the second special symbol also starts. If a game ball enters the first starting port while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port, even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Moreover, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF, but the second special symbol The average time of the variation time of the second special symbol executed by the variation display control means is significantly different between when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds in the first game state and 10 seconds in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 seconds in the first game state, In the second game state, the time is 1 sec. The special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is held when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) starts, but the results of the special lottery are not displayed. is when the variable display of the special symbol has stopped. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second starting slot in the first gaming state, although the second special lottery has already been held, it takes a considerable amount of time until the results of the second special lottery are displayed. becomes.

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area and the game ball enters the second starting hole, the second special symbol It takes time for the variable display to stop. Moreover, since the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in one of a plurality of patterns with different variation times, even if the second special symbol stops in a manner indicating a small hit (it may not be a small hit). Even if the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is confirmed as a small win. For this reason, it is difficult to perform so-called targeted hitting, such as placing a game ball in the big winning hole at the timing when it is confirmed that the second special symbol is a small win. Furthermore, in the first game state, when a game ball is launched toward, for example, the right side area of the game area, a warning sound is output from the speaker under the control of, for example, the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by firing a game ball toward, for example, the left side area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, by passing the game ball through the normal pattern gate, not only is it easier to enter the game ball into the second starting slot through the normal lottery, but also the fluctuation time of the second special pattern is It is as short as 1 sec, and in the second special lottery, the probability of winning a small hit is higher than 1 in 10 no matter which setting value is used. It will be done.

The average time of fluctuation of the second special symbol in the first gaming state (for example, 1000 seconds) is, for example, 50 times or more of the average time of fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first gaming state (for example, 10 seconds). is preferable, but preferably at least 10 times or more.

In addition, the sub-CPU is a decorative symbol fluctuation display control means that controls the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Equipped with However, in the first gaming state, this decorative symbol fluctuation display control means does not display the decorative symbols fluctuating in synchronization with the second special symbol in a conspicuous manner even if a game ball enters the second starting hole. When a game ball enters a first starting hole, a variable display of a decorative pattern synchronized with a first special pattern is displayed in a conspicuous manner.

To explain in detail the example of the above-mentioned "conspicuous aspect", the liquid crystal display device displays, for example, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) approximately at the center of the display area. It is possible to display the results of the special lottery by changing the display. In addition, in a small area, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (such as ○ or △) that can be displayed variably (for example, blinking) in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. shape) can be displayed. Since the proportion of the display area occupied by the first to third symbols is extremely large compared to the proportion of the display area occupied by the fourth symbol, the player's attention is more focused on the first to third symbols than on the fourth symbol. I will be heading towards it. For example, in the first gaming state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole, the sub CPU does not variably display the first to third symbols, but only variably displays the fourth symbol; When a game ball enters the first starting hole, the first to third symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the fourth symbol is also displayed in a variable manner. In this way, in the first gaming state, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole, the decorative pattern synchronized with the second special symbol is not displayed in a conspicuous manner, and the game ball enters the first starting hole. It is possible to realize a variable display of the decorative pattern synchronized with the first special pattern in a conspicuous manner when the player wins a prize.

According to the pachinko game machine of expansion example 2-2 described above, in the first game state, even if a game ball enters the second starting slot, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed, but in the second game state In this case, not only is it easier to enter the game ball into the second starting hole, but also the average time of fluctuation of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second game state, when a game ball enters the second starting slot, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a jackpot. Since the probability is higher (1/30 to 1/25 depending on the setting), the opening of the big prize opening by the small winning game is performed with high frequency, without setting the time saving flag (in other words, the opening of the big prize opening by the small winning game is (without increasing the frequency of execution), it is possible to increase the chances of game balls being paid out as prizes. Moreover, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit differs depending on the set settings, so even if a jackpot game is not being executed, the balls will be paid out according to the set value. It is possible to make them different.

Additionally, if a game ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole while the main CPU is displaying the special symbols in a variable manner, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is executed in this case as well. . Therefore, the main CPU performs the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082, for example, in the second game state, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole during the variable display of the second special symbol. If the main CPU determines in this setting check process that the setting is not normal (NO in step S3721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormality process. That is, in the second gaming state, even if the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol that is being fluctuated and displayed is a small hit, if it is determined that it is not normal in the setting check process, the main CPU executes the above small hit. To turn off a game permission flag and execute abnormality processing without executing a small winning game based on a winning. Therefore, even if the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol that is being fluctuated and displayed in the second gaming state is a small hit, the information that it is the second gaming state and the information that it is a small hit are also included. Unless the various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[Extension example 3]
The pachinko game machine of expansion example 3 is a pachinko game machine that has two routes for being controlled to a jackpot game state, and therefore has a specific area where a specific opening is provided. This specific area is separated from the downstream area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is normally difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the jackpot, a small win is also prepared as a result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to a set value, and determines a small hit when the result of this jackpot determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small win determination is a small win, a small win game is executed. That is, the above-mentioned jackpot is a hit that involves the operation of a conditional device, but the above-mentioned small hit is not a hit that involves the operation of a conditional device.

In addition, in this expansion example 3, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state where the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole, and the second The first special symbol game is mainly played among the second special symbol game based on winning of the game ball in the starting hole. On the other hand, in a probability variable time saving game state such as a time saving game state where the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the player wins a small hit with a predetermined probability. Note that when the result of the jackpot determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, there is no need to perform a small hit determination.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol, which is performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting hole, is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to move the inside of the specific area. A small winning game execution means is provided for executing a small winning game that allows a game ball to enter the game ball. When the predetermined movable piece operates in this way, a game ball enters the specific area, and when the game ball that has entered the specific area is detected to have entered (accepted) into the specific opening, the main The CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting slot is a jackpot, the main CPU executes a first jackpot game in which a round game in which the jackpot is opened is played over multiple rounds. a first jackpot game control means that controls the state, and a round game that operates the predetermined movable piece over a plurality of rounds based on the fact that a game ball enters the specific opening when the small win game is executed. and second jackpot game control means for controlling the second jackpot game state to be played.

In this type of pachinko game machine, in this expansion example 3, the ease of winning a game ball into the starting hole (for example, the frequency of execution of small winning games, the opening pattern of normal electric accessories) is set to a set value. It differs depending on the situation. In addition, in this expansion example 3, the main CPU also determines that the result of the normal symbol determination, which is performed based on the fact that the game ball passes through a gate that can be passed when the player hits the right ball, is a normal hit. Sometimes, normally electric accessories are controlled from a closed state to an open state. When the normal electric accessory is in the open state, it becomes easier to put the game ball into the starting hole. As a method of varying the execution frequency of small winning games depending on the set value, for example, the probability of a normal hit in normal symbol judgment may be varied depending on the set value, or the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be varied depending on the set value. This can be achieved by

As a method for varying the ease with which a game ball enters a starting hole in accordance with a set value, a method for varying the probability of a normal win in normal symbol determination according to a set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of winning normally is 1/60 with setting 1, 1/50 with setting 2, 1/40 with setting 3, 1/30 with setting 4, 1/20 with setting 5, and 1/20 with setting 6. So it is 1/10. In this case, the higher the setting value is, the longer the variation time of the normal symbol is, or the higher the setting is, the longer the normal symbol fluctuation time is, or the higher the setting is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to enter the starting hole. It becomes easier for game balls to enter the starting slot. As a result, the higher the setting value is, the higher the frequency of execution of the small winning game becomes, and the chance of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the second jackpot game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in ball delivery speed depending on the set value.

In addition, also in this extended example 3, if a game ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole while the in-CPU 101 is displaying the special symbols in a variable manner, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is executed. executed. If the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S3721), it turns off the game permission flag even if the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is a small hit. Execute abnormality processing. Therefore, even if the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a small hit, if it is determined in the setting check process that it is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small win game based on the small win. The game permission flag is turned OFF without any problem, and abnormality processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data, including the fact that the result of jackpot determination for the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a small hit, are cleared in the backup clear process.

[Extension example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the control is not immediately controlled to the jackpot gaming state just because of that, but the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. The condition device is activated based on the condition device, and the accessory continuous activation device is activated based on the game ball passing (or entering) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device is activated. This will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the right gate for continuous action of the accessory, and FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the left gate for continuous action of the accessory.

As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the pachinko game machine of this expansion example 4 is equipped with a left gate 3100 for continuously operating an accessory and a right gate 3110 for continuously operating an accessory in the game area. Further, a sorting device 3120 capable of sorting the game balls flowing down the game area to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110 is configured to include the accessory continuous operation gate 3100 or the right gate 3110. 3110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110 are each provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (both not shown) that can detect passage of a game ball. Normally, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are disabled in detecting passage of a game ball, but are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, and then the game ball moves either of the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110. Disabled based on detection of passing.

When the left gate sensor detects passage of a game ball to the left gate 3100 of continuous operation of the accessory, the main CPU controls the game to an 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of 8 rounds is executed, for example. In addition, when the right gate sensor detects passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110 that continuously operates the accessory, the main CPU selects the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which 2 rounds of round games are executed, and 16 rounds. Which of the 16R jackpot game states (selection rate 50%) in which round games are executed is determined by lottery, and the jackpot game state determined by the lottery is controlled.

In addition, a jackpot occurs when the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the left gate 3100 of continuous action of the accessory and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110 of the continuous action of the accessory. The expected value of the amount of prize balls paid out in the game state is the same.

In addition, the game ball that passes through the left gate 3100 for continuous action of the accessory or the right gate 3110 for continuous action of the accessory flows down the gaming area as it is, but instead is ejected to the outside of the pachinko game machine from the exit port. It may be configured as follows.

The sorting device 3120, by regular operation, sorts the game balls that have arrived above the sorting device 3120 to either the accessory continuous action left gate 3100 or the accessory continuous action right gate 3110. In the first position where the sorting device 3120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the right gate 3110 (see Fig. 205), and in the second posture where the sorting device 3120 is tilted to the right, the game ball is easy to pass through the right gate 3110 (see Fig. 205). It is easy for objects to pass through the continuous operation left gate 3100 (see FIG. 206).

In this extended example 4, the ease with which game balls can pass is made different between the left gate 3100 for continuous action of the accessory and the right gate 3110 for continuous action of the accessory, depending on the set value. For example, in setting 1, the operation of the sorting device 3120 is such that the first posture repeats 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds, and in setting 2, the first posture repeats 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1.3 seconds. In setting 3, the action repeats 0.9 seconds in the first posture and 1.1 seconds in the second posture, and in setting 4, the action repeats 1.1 seconds in the first posture and 0.9 seconds in the second posture. In setting 5, the first posture is repeated for 1.3 seconds and the second posture is 0.7 seconds, and in setting 6, the first posture is repeated for 1.5 seconds and the second posture is repeated for 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to change the aspect of the jackpot game state according to the set value.

In addition, in this expansion example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the left gate 3100 of continuous action of the accessory, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110 of the continuous action of the accessory. The expected value of the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state is the same. In other words, although it is possible to change the aspect of the jackpot game state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state according to the set value, but the left gate sensor is paid out in the jackpot game state when detects the passing of the game ball to the left gate 3100 of the continuous action of the accessory and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110 of the continuous action of the accessory. The expected value of the amount of prize balls may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of a game ball to the left gate 3100 with continuous action of the accessory, it is possible to select one of the 2R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 70%) and the 16R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 30%). is determined by a lottery held at the selection rate mentioned above, and when the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the right gate 3110 that continuously operates the accessory, the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%) It is also possible to decide which of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) to be executed by a lottery conducted at the above-mentioned selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state according to the setting value, and the higher the setting value, the higher the expected value of the jackpot game state in which a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls. This makes it possible to increase the possibility of

In addition, in this expansion example 4, when the game ball passes either of the two gates (accessory continuous activation left gate 3100, accessory continuous activation right gate 3110) under the condition that the condition device is activated, the accessory continuous activation occurs. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. However, even if the conditional device is activated based on the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the starting gate, the game ball does not hit either of the above two gates. A game ball may land in the starting slot before passing through. In this case, under the condition that the condition device has been activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the two gates, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process (for example, (see step S3072 in FIG. 188), and the setting check process may determine that the setting is not normal (for example, NO in step S3721 in FIG. 189). In this case, even if the conditional device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722, which will be described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

In addition, in this expansion example 4, below the sorting device 3120, there are two gates (accessory continuous activation device) that activate the accessory continuous activation device when the passing of a game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is activated. Although a left gate 3100 and a right gate 3110 for continuous operation of accessories are provided, what is provided below the sorting device 3120 is not necessarily limited to the continuous operation gate for accessories, for example, a starting opening and a general winning opening. Also good. In other words, in this case, the sorting device 3120, through regular operation, divides the game balls that have reached the upper part of the sorting device 3120 into the starting hole, which is the trigger for determining the jackpot of the special symbol, and the general winning hole, which is not the trigger for determining the jackpot. Divide between mouth and mouth. Then, the operation of the sorting device 3120 is, for example, in setting 1, the operation of repeating the first posture for 0.5 seconds and the second posture for 1.5 seconds, and in the setting 2, the operation of repeating the first posture for 0.7 seconds and the second posture for 1. In setting 3, the action repeats 0.9 seconds in the first posture and 1.1 seconds in the second posture, and in setting 4, the action repeats 1.1 seconds in the first posture and 0.9 seconds in the second posture. Setting 5 is an action that repeats the first posture for 1.3 seconds and second posture 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an action that repeats the first posture for 1.5 seconds and the second posture for 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to vary the winning rate in the starting slot depending on the set value. Moreover, according to such pachinko gaming machines, although it is possible to vary the winning rate in the starting slot depending on the set value, no matter what the set value is, the timing at which the game ball is launched by the player may vary. It is possible to add the fun of being able to aim for winning the starting slot.

[Extension example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 5 does not change the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine depending on the setting values, but allows the game performance of the pachinko gaming machine to be changed depending on the setting values. . In addition, in this extended example 5, the configuration is such that the setting value can be set to any one of the five stages from setting 1 to setting 5, but it does not necessarily have to be five stages, and it can be set to multiple stages. It can be determined arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the setting value is set to 1, the main CPU performs a jackpot judgment for a special symbol with a probability of, for example, 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, the main CPU executes, for example, 5 rounds. Control to a jackpot gaming state. In other words, when the setting value is set to 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high at less than 1/100, but the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is relatively small, which is called a sweet digital game. It becomes possible to play a game-like game.

In addition, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the main CPU performs a jackpot judgment of a special symbol with a probability of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, the main CPU performs a jackpot judgment, for example, for 12 rounds (e.g., The game is controlled to a jackpot game state of approximately 1,500 pieces. In other words, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1,500, which is a game with a general game style called DigiPachi. It becomes possible to execute. In this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state to a high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and when a predetermined period has elapsed, the high-probability gaming state ends and changes to a low-probability gaming state. Control. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 2, it becomes possible to play a game with a so-called ST machine.

In addition, when the setting value is set to setting 3, the main CPU performs a jackpot judgment of a special symbol with a probability of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, the main CPU executes a jackpot judgment, for example, for 12 rounds (e.g., (approximately 1,500 pieces) is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In other words, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1,500, which is a game with a general game style called DigiPachi. It becomes possible to execute. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag to ON using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the jackpot game After the state ends, the game state is controlled to a high probability game state until the next jackpot game state is executed. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 3, it becomes possible to play a game with a so-called fixed loop machine.

In addition, when the setting value is set to setting 4, the main CPU performs a jackpot judgment of a special symbol with a probability of 1/300, for example, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, the main CPU performs a jackpot judgment for example 12 rounds (for example, (approximately 1,500 pieces) is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In other words, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1,500, which is a game with a general game style called DigiPachi. It becomes possible to execute. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag to ON using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the jackpot game After the state ends, the game state is controlled to a high probability game state until the next jackpot game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set on the number of times that the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned "loop number"), and when the loop number reaches this upper limit, the main CPU will notify that the jackpot gaming state has ended. The current gaming state is controlled to a low probability gaming state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 4, it becomes possible to play a game with a so-called limiter game. In addition, in the above game, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a so-called ST machine in which a high probability gaming state after a jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to a low probability gaming state after a predetermined period has elapsed.

In addition, when the setting value is set to setting 5, the main CPU performs a jackpot judgment of a special symbol with a probability of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, the main CPU executes, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is put out). The game is controlled to a jackpot game state of approximately 1,500 pieces. In other words, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1,500, which is a game with a general game style called DigiPachi. It becomes possible to execute. In this gaming machine, when the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU always or with a certain probability sets the probability variation flag to ON, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the main CPU sets the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , control to a high probability gaming state. In addition, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when determining a jackpot for a special symbol in a high probability game state, and when it is determined to change the game state in the game state transition lottery, it sets the probability change flag to OFF. , executes control to shift from a high probability gaming state to a low probability gaming state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 5, it becomes possible to play a game in which a lottery for transition to a low probability game state is performed in a high probability game state.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of expansion example 5, the game play of the pachinko machine can be changed according to the setting value, rather than the specifications such as jackpot probability, and pachinko with a rich variety of game plays can be achieved. It becomes possible to run the game on one device.

In addition, in the above, in setting 1, it is possible to play a game with a so-called sweet digital game, in setting 2, it is possible to play a game with a so-called ST machine game, and in setting 3, a game with a so-called ST machine can be played. It is possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called a variable loop machine, and with setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called a so-called limiter machine, and with setting 5, it is possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called a limiter machine, and with a setting 5, it is possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called a limiter machine. Although it is possible to play a game with a game feature in which a lottery for transition to a probability game state is performed, it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game features in accordance with set values. However, it is preferable to be able to switch between a so-called ST game style and a so-called fixed variable loop game style depending on the setting value. The so-called ST machine game and the so-called fixed loop machine have a common feature in that they may be controlled to a high probability game state after the end of the jackpot game state, but the high probability game state is It makes a big difference whether the game continues until the next jackpot game state or ends midway. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game features, it allows game machine managers and others to have more flexibility in how they utilize pachinko machines. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can improve the player's interest at the same time.

[Other expansion examples]
The present invention can be applied to the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention to all types of game machines in which a game is played using game media and a benefit is awarded based on the result of the game. That is, not only is the game played by ejecting or inserting game media through the physical actions of the player, and the game media are paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit 100 itself It may also be possible to electromagnetically manage game media owned by a player, and to enable games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. Further, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media owned by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 100 and manages the game media.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the gaming media management device is a device that has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is installed in the gaming machine, It is connected to a two-way communication function via a media handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides the gaming media necessary for the gaming media lending operation (i.e., when the player performs the gaming media insertion operation). operation) or the payout operation of the game media when a prize is won (the role is established) related to the payout of the game media (i.e., payout of the game media to the player and win the necessary game media) It may be possible to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of owned gaming media on the front of the pachinko gaming machine based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be executed with respect to the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes out the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be launched from above as a game medium into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that the player obtains game media in terms of data management. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmitted signal at the source and determining whether or not they are the same, the signal transmitted from the source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message has been sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device could be read. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts.

[Hole Menu Task]
First, the hole menu task will be explained with reference to FIGS. 207 to 210. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hole menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 at a predetermined period, which is every 33 msec in the second embodiment.

FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 207, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S3301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, that a setting operation command has been received (YES in step S3301), the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu display process in step S3302. This hall menu display process (step S3302) is a process in which a hall menu screen, which will be described later, is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. Note that the hall menu screen is also displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the process of step S3310, which will be described later, is executed, but the hall menu screen displayed in step S3302 and the hall menu screen displayed in step S3310 are There are some differences from the menu screen, which will be discussed later.

The image (screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process in step S3302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210. FIG. 208 is a diagram illustrating an example of when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S3302 is executed. 209 and 210 are diagrams showing examples of hall menu screens displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S3302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, when the hall menu display process (step S3302) is executed, a hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 209 and 210, the hole menu screen includes a hole menu item display area 31610 on the left side of the screen, an operation explanation area 31620 at the bottom of the screen at approximately the center in the horizontal direction, and a preview located at approximately the center of the screen. It has a display area 31630.

In the hall menu item display area 31610, each item of the hall menu is displayed. For convenience, only the time setting, prize ball information, setting history/setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hall menu items in FIGS. 208 to 210, but these items In addition, items such as notification settings, power saving settings (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation confirmation, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal confirmation, volume adjustment setting, etc. may be displayed. However, since step S3302 is a process during the setting change process or setting confirmation process, it is not possible to end the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, among the items on the hall menu, there is no item for ending the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 31620, images corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the upper, lower, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d are displayed. Note that, on the hall menu screen, the activated operation buttons and the deactivated operation buttons of the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be distinguishable. For example, in FIGS. 208 to 210, enabled operation buttons are displayed in white (main button 662 and up/down select buttons 664a, 664b are enabled), and disabled operation buttons are displayed in white. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

By operating the enabled select buttons (upper and lower select buttons 664a and 664b), the operator can select any one of the multiple hall menu items. In FIGS. 208 and 209, the hole menu items surrounded by solid lines are the selected hole menu items. For example, FIG. 208 shows that "time setting" surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, FIG. 210 shows that "setting change/confirmation history" surrounded by a solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item. However, the display is not necessarily limited to highlighted display as long as the selected item is easily understood by the operator. Note that the screen on which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 208 and 209) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

The preview display area 31630 displays a preview screen for the item selected from among the multiple hall menu items. For example, when the "Time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see Figures 208 and 209), and when the "Setting change/confirmation history" item is selected, the time setting screen is displayed as a preview. A preview of the change/confirmation history screen is displayed (see FIG. 210). However, it is preferable that the setting values not be displayed on the preview screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. Note that no operations can be performed within the above preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is displayed as a preview, it is not possible to set the time on the previewed time setting screen, and the time setting displayed as a hall menu item is selected and confirmed. You can perform operations to set the time on the time setting screen displayed by .

Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 displays "Settings changing in progress" or "Confirm settings" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, in addition to the hall menu screen, in a very small area at the bottom right, for example, so as not to interfere with operations on the hall menu screen. "Inside" is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the speaker 24 to output a voice such as "Settings are being changed" or "Settings are being confirmed" via the audio control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to cause all of the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) to turn on in white via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator can know whether the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed without interfering with the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 207, the sub CPU 201 executes hall menu processing in step S303. Details of this hall menu processing (step S3303) will be described later.

After executing the hall menu process (step S3303), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting change process or setting confirmation process has ended, that is, sends a command (initialization command) or setting confirmation indicating that the setting change process has ended. It is determined whether a command indicating that the process has ended (power failure recovery command) has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S3304). If the sub CPU 201 has not received either the initialization command or the power failure recovery command (NO in step S3304), the sub CPU 201 continues to execute the hall menu process in step S3303.

Furthermore, when transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

Note that the changed setting value information does not necessarily need to be sent at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be sent at different timings if it can be associated with the setting change process.

Furthermore, when transmitting a power failure recovery command, the main CPU 101 does not need to transmit the setting value information to the sub CPU 201 because the setting value has not been changed; You can also do this.

When the sub CPU 201 completes the setting change process or the setting confirmation process in step S3304, that is, receives the initialization command or the power failure recovery command from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S3304), the sub CPU 201 updates the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. It is determined whether the number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number N (step S3305). This is to record history while preserving as much history data as possible by appropriately determining whether to overwrite data or write data to free space depending on the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. This is designed to prevent situations in which recording is not possible in some cases. Note that the predetermined number N can be set as appropriate depending on the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, and is set to 500, for example, in this second embodiment.

If the number of histories of history information stored in the work RAM 203 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number N (YES in step S3305), the process moves to step S3306, and an overwriting process of history information (step S3306) is executed. In the overwriting process of history information in step S3306, the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is overwritten in order from the history stored first (the oldest history information).

Note that in the history information overwriting process in step S3306, the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is eventually erased by overwriting the history information already stored in the work RAM 203 with new history information. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received, if storing new history information in the work RAM 203 may exceed a predetermined upper limit, at least part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 The history information may be stored after erasing the information. In addition, even if no initialization command or power failure recovery command has been received, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 may exceed the upper limit if stored in the work RAM 203. It is also possible to delete the section.

If the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is less than the predetermined number N (NO in step S3305), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3307 and performs a history information recording process (step S3307) is executed.

Note that in this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S3306 and the history information recording process in step S3307 may be collectively referred to as history recording process.

Note that history information refers to time information measured by the RTC 209 when an initialization command or power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101, operation type information (information indicating that a setting change process has been executed, or setting confirmation). information indicating that the process has been executed), setting value information, etc. Specifically, when an initialization command is received, information on the time when the initialization command was received, information that the setting change process was executed, and setting value information after the setting change sent from the main CPU 101. Information that associates these with each other is history information. In addition, when a power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command was received, the information that the setting confirmation process was executed, and the current setting value information sent from the main CPU 101 are correlated. The information added is historical information. When a power failure recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information sent from the main CPU 101 in the history information; Preferably, current setting value information is included in the history information. In addition, the browsing history is also included in the above history information, and if the setting change/confirmation history is viewed in the hall menu process (step S3303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S3306, or Alternatively, in step S3307, the viewing history is recorded in the free area of the work RAM 203 as history information.

Note that under normal conditions, when the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 will immediately send some commands (for example, a power failure recovery command, a setting operation command, etc.) after the sub CPU 201 starts up. When the sub CPU 201 does not receive a command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since starting, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is an abnormality, and the sub control circuit 200 puts the game in a halt state. Each aspect of the display output, audio output, and LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub-control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the work RAM 203, not only store date and time information, but also information up to the hour and minute, or information up to the hour, minute, and second.

After executing the process of step S3306 or step S3307, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3308.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether the settings have been changed in step S3308, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S3304 (step S3308). Note that when the setting operation command received in step S3301 is a setting change start command, a power failure recovery command is not received in step S3304, and when the setting operation command received in step S3301 is a setting confirmation start command. does not receive the initialization command in step S3304. In addition, in the process of step S3308, since it is only necessary for the sub CPU 201 to determine that the settings have been changed, for example, instead of determining whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command, It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed upon reception of the value information.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that a setting change has been made (YES in step S3308), it performs a setting change initialization process (step S3309), and moves to step S3310.

Sub CPU 201 executes hall menu redisplay processing in step S3310. At this time, the hole menu screen that is redisplayed is different from the hole menu screen that is displayed while changing or confirming the settings (the hole menu screen that is displayed in step S3302), and the hole menu screen that is redisplayed is different from the hole menu screen that is displayed while changing the settings or confirming the settings. This is a screen that is displayed when execution is possible (or during the game return process in step S3030), and for example, as shown in FIG. 211, one of the items in the hole menu is an item for ending the hole menu. be done. Note that FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an example of the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu redisplay process of step S3310 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen displayed while changing settings or confirming settings (the hall menu screen displayed in step S3302), although the operator cannot end the display of the hall menu screen at his/her will, the setting change process The hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the end of the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S3310) is configured so that the operator can end the display of the hall menu screen at his or her will. Note that the hall menu screen displayed in step S3302 (for example, see FIG. 209) and the hall menu screen displayed in step S3310 (see FIG. 211) can be operated by selecting one of the items. These functional aspects (for example, the ability to view settings change/confirmation history screens), etc. are common.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 determines that a setting change has been made in step S3308 (YES in step S3308), in the hall menu redisplay process of step S3310, the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen as well as the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. , for example, the words "Settings have been changed" are displayed in a very small area at the bottom right so as not to obstruct operations on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when the screen for the selected hall menu item (for example, the settings change/confirmation history screen) is displayed, a message such as "Settings have changed" is displayed in the very small area at the bottom right so as not to interfere with operations on the screen. ” will be displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the speaker 24 to output a voice saying "Settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized" via the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). This allows the operator to know that the settings have been changed (and that the backup clear process has been executed) without interfering with operations on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. becomes. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to cause all of the LEDs 25 (see FIG. 1, for example) to light up in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S3308), that is, when the command received in step S3304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 executes step S3309. ~Execute the game screen return process of step S3315 without executing the process of step S3314. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process ends, the hall menu redisplay process (step S3310) is not executed. Furthermore, no characters are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to indicate that the setting confirmation has been completed. Furthermore, no sound is output indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the sub CPU 201 executes control to cause all of the LEDs 25 (see FIG. 1, for example) to light up in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

By the way, when the process of step S3302 is executed and when the process of step S3310 is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the process of step S3302 is not executed. When the process of step S3310 is executed, the game cannot be played because the settings are being confirmed or the settings are being changed, whereas the game can be played when the process of step S3310 is executed. However, as described above, when the process of step S3302 is executed and when the process of step S3310 is executed, the mode of character display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not displayed at the end of setting confirmation) ), the manner of sound output from the speaker 24, and the manner of light emission from the LED 25 are significantly different. Therefore, even if the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, operations on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the screen of the hall menu item It is easy to understand from the appearance whether the pachinko machine is in a state in which it is possible to execute a game or in a state in which it is not possible to play, without interfering with the operation to select a page, the operation to update a page, etc. It is now possible.

After executing the process in step S3310, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3311 and executes the hall menu process. The hall menu process in step S3311 is basically the same process as step S3303, but the process when YES in step S33072 in FIG. 217, which will be described later, is different, which will be described later.

In step S3312, the sub CPU 201 determines whether "end hall menu" has been selected on the redisplayed hall menu screen. If it is determined that "end hall menu" has been selected (YES in step S3312), the sub CPU 201 performs a game screen return display process (step S3315). In this game screen return display process, the sub CPU 201 displays, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image to be displayed when playing a game, and a pachinko game machine (for example, the firing handle 32) that has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. Display the initial video that will be displayed in the case. After executing the game screen return process in step S3315, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3312 that "end hall menu" is not selected (NO in step S3312), the sub CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed (step S3313). ). Although not shown in FIG. 207, when the setting change process or setting confirmation process is completed (YES in step S3304), when the hall menu redisplay process (step S3310) is executed, the hall menu process (step S3311) The time measurement is started based on some operation performed by the operator, such as when any hall menu item is selected in the step S3313, and the process in step S3313 determines whether the measured time has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. This is a process for determining whether or not the operation is performed, and if the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined period of time or longer, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S3313.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S3313), the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen and executes the game screen return display process in step S3315. Execute.

Further, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S3313), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command to generate a production control object has been received (step S3314). . Commands that generate performance control objects are commands that can be received when a game is executed, such as a symbol fluctuation start command, a symbol fluctuation confirmation (fluctuation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game execution command. A round interval command in a jackpot game, a jackpot game end command, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, etc. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3314 that any one of the commands for generating these production control objects has been received, the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and returns to the game screen in step S3315. Execute processing. As a result, a game screen corresponding to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and for example, even though the game by the main CPU 101 is in progress, an image unrelated to the game may be displayed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as by being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command to generate the production control object has not been received (NO in step S3314), the process returns to step S3311.

After executing the game screen return display process (step S3315), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3316 and executes the hall menu display prohibition process. This hall menu display prohibition process is a process that prohibits the hall menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) is executed, the hall menu screen will not be displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, and the setting change process or setting confirmation process is executed by turning the power OFF. The hall menu display process (step S3302) cannot be executed unless the hall menu is displayed.

In this way, the hall menu screen is basically a screen that is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 during execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if this setting change process ends, the operator must not select the "End Hall Menu" item on the hall menu screen (NO in step S3312), Under certain conditions such as the operation time not passing for a predetermined period of time (NO in step S3313) and the command to generate the production control object not being received (NO in step S3314), the processes of steps S3311 to S3314 are repeatedly executed. The hall menu screen will continue to be displayed. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen), the display of the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item will change. It will continue to be displayed without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, the operator can have some time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "End Hall Menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the Hall Menu screen or the screen of the selected Hall Menu item will end and the game will end. Since the screen return process (step S3315) is executed, unauthorized persons (for example, hall staff who are not game machine managers or players) can easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, viewing history, etc. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In addition, in this second embodiment, when it is determined in step S3314 that a command to generate an effect control object has been received, a game screen return process (step S3315) and a hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) are performed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and based on, for example, receiving a specific command that becomes receivable when the game starts, such as receiving a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated, A game screen return process (step S3315) and a hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) may be performed.

Here, the notification mode when an error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 212, including backup clear processing that does not involve setting change processing. FIG. 212 is an example of a screen in which error details are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, including (a) a screen indicating that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed, and (b) a starting port. (c) A screen indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred and that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed; FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a screen after a notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that backup clear processing has been executed has elapsed in a state where both of the above have occurred.

As shown in FIG. 212, when multiple errors occur, the sub CPU 201 displays all the errors that have occurred in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and also displays the errors in the audio control circuit 205 ( Sound is output from the speaker 24 via the speaker 24 (see FIG. 9), and light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

When the backup clearing process that does not involve setting change processing is executed, if no other error has occurred, the sub CPU 201 clears the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, as shown in FIG. 212(a). The LED control circuit 206 (Fig. 9 (see FIG. 1), the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) is controlled to be fully lit in red. Note that the text "RAM has been cleared" is displayed using a larger area than the above-mentioned extremely small area (see FIG. 211) in which the text "Settings have been changed" is displayed.

That is, in this second embodiment, when performing the setting change process, the backup clear process is always executed (see FIG. 180), and in the hall menu redisplay process of step S3310, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, as described above, , "Settings have been changed" are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 16, but there is no indication that the backup clear process has been executed, and "Settings have been changed. RAM is initialized." The only thing that is output from the speaker 24 is a voice saying, ``This has been changed.'' On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the sub CPU 201 uses an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 211) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Control is performed so that characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed, and a voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 212(a)). Here, the main purpose of backup clear processing that involves setting change processing is to change the setting value (not backup clear processing), whereas the main purpose of backup clear processing that does not involve setting change processing is backup clear processing. It is thought that. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the execution of the backup clear process is discreetly announced in a manner that does not interfere with the operation of the hall menu screen that is redisplayed. On the other hand, when backup clear processing that does not involve setting change processing is executed, the fact that backup clear processing has been executed is notified in a more conspicuous manner than when backup clear processing that involves setting change processing is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the backup clearing process from being executed illegally.

In addition, after the backup clear process is executed, if another error, for example, a starting opening abnormal prize winning error has also occurred, as shown in FIG. 212(b), it is assumed that the starting opening abnormal winning error has occurred. , and that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. At this time, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed has a higher priority than the abnormal start-up winning error, so the text indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed at the top regardless of the order in which it occurred. . Further, a sound notifying that the backup clearing process with a high priority has been executed is outputted from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 emits light in a manner indicating that the backup clearing process has been executed.

In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed in a state where both the backup clear process and the starting port abnormal winning error have occurred, the backup clear process The characters indicating that the error has been executed are deleted from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other errors have occurred, only the characters indicating the abnormal starting port winning error are displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Ru. In addition, the sound output from the speaker 24 changes from the sound notifying that the backup clear process has been executed to the sound notifying that a starting port abnormal prize winning error has occurred, and the lighting mode of the LED 25 also changes. The mode changes from the mode indicating that the process has been executed to the mode indicating that a starting port abnormal prize winning error has occurred. In this way, it is possible to easily understand the details of the error that has occurred.

Note that in the above, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, when it is determined that a setting operation command has been received (YES in step S3301), the hall menu display process (step S3302) is executed. Although this has been described, it is preferable to also execute the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process. Backup clear processing without setting change processing is performed when both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. is executed (see Figure 179). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the sub CPU 201, so the sub CPU 201, which has received the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command, performs the backup clear process without setting change processing. can be determined to have been executed, and hall menu display processing (step S3302) and hall menu processing (step S3303) can be executed.

[Other examples of hole menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 177). (see step S31730 in FIG. 178), and for example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the range of "0" to "5" in this second embodiment), the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. (NO in step S31730), the game permission flag is turned OFF (see step S31760), and the game is disabled. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the RAM 103 work area check process (step S31720) will not be executed. Further, in the case where the set value is changed due to input of an unauthorized signal, there is a possibility that the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, similar to the above-mentioned setting determination process that is executed during the execution of the game, there are cases where the work area check process is not executed in step S31720, or the setting value is Setting determination processing (steps 317 and The process in step S3318) may also be executed. FIG. 213 shows the hole menu task in this case. FIG. 213 is another example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart when the sub CPU 201 executes a setting determination process for determining the suitability of setting value information. Other examples of hole menu tasks will be described below. However, a description of processes common to those in FIG. 207 will be omitted, and only the setting determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 transmits the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used to proceed with the game, even when transmitting a power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 that has received the power failure recovery command determines that the settings have not been changed (NO in step S3308), and moves to step S3317. In this step S3317, the sub CPU 201 executes a setting value check process. This setting value checking process (step S3317) includes current setting value information (setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power outage and stored in the work RAM 203) and setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 ( This is a process of checking the setting value information sent from the main CPU 101 after the power is cut off. Note that when it is determined in step S3308 that the settings have not been changed (NO in step S3308), the processes in steps S3309 to S3314 are not executed.

After checking the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the setting value checking process (step S3317), the sub CPU 201 performs a setting value appropriateness judgment process, that is, determining whether the setting value is appropriate. (Step S3318). At this time, if the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined that the setting value information is appropriate (YES in step S3318), and the process moves to step S3315. The processing after step S3315 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined that the setting value information is inappropriate (NO in step S3318), and the process moves to step S3319. Execute processing.

The above set value abnormality process is a process of displaying an image on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to notify that the set value is abnormal. In this setting value abnormality processing (step S3319), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image notifying that the setting value is abnormal, a sound is output to notify that the setting value is abnormal. Processing may also be executed.

In this way, when the command sent from the main CPU 101 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process (the process of step 317 and step S3318), and When it is determined that the set value is not appropriate (NO in step S3318), the setting value abnormality process (step S3319) is executed, thereby making it possible to notify the gaming machine manager that the set value is inappropriate.

Note that although the above-mentioned setting determination process (processing in steps S3317 and S3318) is executed when the setting confirmation process is completed, the setting change process is executed without executing either the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. If a backup process is executed that does not involve a backup operation (pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 without turning on the setting key 328 when the power is not turned on), or simply turning on the power It is also preferable to carry out this procedure even when only inputting . Unless a setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value information is appropriate by determining whether or not the setting value information received before the power outage matches the setting value information received after the power outage. This is because it is possible to determine.

[Hole menu processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the hall menu processing (step S3303) in the hall menu task (see FIGS. 207 and 213) will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hole menu process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 selects a hole menu item for checking various information/settings or changing various settings based on the operator's operation of the select button 664 or/and main button 662. A selection process is performed (step S33001). In addition, in the hole menu selection process of FIG. 214, the hole menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history/setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, Although the case of accessory operation confirmation, liquid crystal brightness setting, and volume adjustment setting will be described, the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "time setting" (step S33001). If it is determined in step S33002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S33002), the sub CPU 201 performs time setting processing (step S33003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, allowing the operator to check and change the set time.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S33002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "prize ball information". (Step S33004). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hole menu is "prize ball information" (YES in step S33004), it performs prize ball information processing (step S33005). In this prize ball information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to confirm the prize ball information. Prize ball information includes, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, information on the difference between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of prize balls paid out each day in the past few days. information, difference information (daily) between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of prize balls fired in the past few days.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "prize ball information" (NO in step S33004), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "setting change/confirmation history". It is determined (step S33006). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "setting change/confirmation history" (YES in step S33006), it performs setting change/confirmation history processing (step S33007). In this setting change/confirmation history process, the sub CPU 201 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described below) to be described later in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the operator It is possible to check the history, change history, and viewing history.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 has been operated and "setting change/confirmation history" has been selected, the sub CPU 201 displays the settings in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A change/confirmation history screen (for example, see Figure 218 described later) is displayed, and the operator can check the change history of settings (setting values), confirmation history of settings (setting values), viewing history, and confirmed settings (setting values). and the changed settings (setting values) can be confirmed. Note that details of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "setting change/confirmation history" (NO in step S33006), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "error information history". It is determined (step S33008). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "error information history" (YES in step S33008), it performs error information history processing (step S33009). In this error information history process, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (for example, see FIG. 215) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to check and change the error information history. do.

Note that the error history displayed in the error information history process is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as an error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective when it receives an abnormal command from the main CPU 101, or when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. ) may not be able to receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after power supply to the main CPU 101 is started.

As shown in FIG. 215, an error information history table is arranged approximately in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which the error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a cancellation date and time column in which the date and time when the error was canceled is displayed. Furthermore, the operation method for the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved vertically and horizontally by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and that it can be determined by operating the main button 662. It has been shown that it is possible.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "error information history" (NO in step S33008), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "monitoring history" ( Step S33010). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is "monitoring history" (YES in step S33010), the sub CPU 201 performs monitoring history processing (step S33011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to enable the operator to check the monitoring history.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "monitoring history" (NO in step S33010), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "warning display setting" ( Step S33012). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is "warning display setting" (YES in step S33012), the sub CPU 201 performs warning display setting processing (step S33013). In this warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to confirm and change the warning display settings.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "warning display setting" (NO in step S33012), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "notification setting" ( Step S33014). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is "notification settings" (YES in step S33014), the sub CPU 201 performs notification setting processing (step S33015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to confirm and change notification settings.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "notification setting" (NO in step S33014), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "power saving mode" ( Step S33016). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is in "power saving mode" (YES in step S33016), sub CPU 201 performs power saving mode processing (step S33017). In this power saving mode process, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to check and change the settings of the power saving mode. .

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "power saving mode" (NO in step S33016), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "maintenance" (step S33018). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S33018), the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance processing (step S33019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 229.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "Maintenance" (NO in step S33018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "Accessory object operation confirmation" ( Step S33020). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is "accessory object operation confirmation" (YES in step S33020), the sub CPU 201 performs accessory object operation confirmation processing (step S33021). In this accessory operation confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to enable the operator to confirm the operation of the accessory.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "Accessory object operation confirmation" (NO in step S33020), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "LCD brightness setting". (Step S33022). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is "liquid crystal brightness setting" (YES in step S33022), the sub CPU 201 performs liquid crystal brightness setting processing (step S33023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to check and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. shall be.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "LCD brightness setting" (NO in step S33022), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "volume adjustment setting". (Step S33024). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S33024), the sub CPU 201 performs volume adjustment setting processing (step S33025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16, and allows the operator to confirm and change the setting of the volume of the sound output from the speaker 24. shall be.

After the processing of steps S33003, step S33005, step S33007, step S33009, step S33011, step S33013, step S33015, step S33017, step S33019, step S33021, step S33023, step S33025, and the hall menu selected in step S33001 is If it is determined that it is not "adjustment setting" (NO in step S33024), the sub CPU 201 ends the hall menu process and returns the process to step S3304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 207).

[Aspects of various devices when changing/confirming settings, etc.]
The aspects of various devices (liquid crystal display 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) when changing or confirming settings are as described above, but are summarized below for ease of understanding. explain.

First, the time of changing settings will be explained in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and sends a setting operation command (setting change start command). . Based on receiving the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has been controlled (the setting change state has started). When the setting is changed, the game cannot be played, and the display control circuit 204 causes the sub CPU 201 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display 16 and display the text "Settings are being changed". Display. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the audio control circuit 205 to output a voice saying "Settings are being changed" from the speaker 24, and causes the LED control circuit 206 to turn on all of the LEDs 25 in white. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the performance display monitor 334 displays set values by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, at this stage, the set values have not yet been determined. The updated setting values are displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Further, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a hall menu screen is displayed, and the words "Settings are being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a voice saying "Settings are being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 continues to be fully lit in white. In this second embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is only stored in the register and not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is finalized. The value may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the second embodiment, the set value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the set value is updated by operating other operating means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). It is also possible to do so.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and sends an initialization command. Based on receiving the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended. When the setting change state is completed, the game becomes ready to be played. However, even if the setting change state ends, unless the execution of the game is started (for example, unless a command to generate an effect control object is received), the sub CPU 201 will not operate the display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). 204 displays the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and also displays the text "Settings have been changed" on the LCD. It is displayed on the display area of the display device 16. However, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the audio control circuit 205 to output a voice such as "Settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized" from the speaker 24 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the LED The control circuit 206 lights up all the LEDs 25 in red. The display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the output from the speaker 24, and the red lighting of the LED 25 continue as long as any operation is performed on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. , the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period, or ends when the game starts. Note that the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, it is not displayed that the backup clearing process has been executed, but the sub CPU 201 also displays the message "RAM has been cleared" in addition to the message "Settings have been changed." You may also do so.

In this way, even if the settings change state is finished, the text display saying "Settings have been changed", the voice output saying "Settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized", and the LED 25 all red. By keeping the lights on for at least a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent unauthorized third parties from committing unauthorized acts such as viewing the settings change/confirmation history screen, etc. Become. Furthermore, since the light emitting manner of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the end of the setting change state, it is possible to easily understand from the appearance whether or not the game is in a state where a game can be executed.

The above are the aspects of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) when changing settings.

Next, the time of setting confirmation will be explained in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned on), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and issues a setting operation command (setting confirmation start command). Send. Based on receiving the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has been controlled (the setting confirmation state has started). When controlled to the settings confirmation state, the game cannot be played, and the sub CPU 201 uses the display control circuit 204 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and displays a message such as "Settings confirmation in progress". Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the audio control circuit 205 to output a voice such as "Setting confirmation in progress" from the speaker 24, and causes the LED control circuit 206 to turn on all of the LEDs 25 in white. Main CPU 101 also transmits a setting confirmation security signal to hall computer 700 via external terminal board 323. Note that the performance display monitor 334 displays set values by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and sends a power failure recovery command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has ended based on receiving the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the game becomes ready to be played. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes a game screen return display process (step S3316) based on receiving the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display characters indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed, nor does it output audio indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the sub CPU 201 lights up the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and stops lighting the LED 25 in red when the game starts. Note that the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the settings confirmation state has ended, by keeping the LED 25 fully lit in red for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), unauthorized activities such as viewing the settings change/confirmation history screen, etc. can be prevented. This makes it possible to prevent third parties who do not have the Further, since the light emitting manner of at least the LED 25 is clearly different between during the setting change state and when the setting change state is finished, it is possible to easily understand from the appearance whether or not the game is in a state where the game can be executed.

As described above, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is an abnormality because no command is received from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the sub CPU 201 is started, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state, the display control circuit 204 and the audio control circuit 205 display and output the message "Please determine the setting value", and the LED control circuit 206 causes the LED 25 (for example, (see 1) is set to full white flashing. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to a setting change state, and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command based on the end of this setting change state.

The above are the aspects of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[Setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change/confirmation history process (step S33007) in the hall menu process (see step S3303 in FIG. 207) will be explained. In the setting change/confirmation history process, the setting change/confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, including the history of setting changes of setting values, the history of setting value confirmations, and the viewing history of setting changes and confirmations. (general term for "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information"). In the following, before explaining the setting change/confirmation history process, first, setting change, setting confirmation, and viewing will be explained.

In this second embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process, as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328, pressing down the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. For example, by pressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of "1" to "6", and when the desired setting value is reached, the setting key switch signal is activated. When the setting value is turned OFF, one of the plurality of setting values used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process ends.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, as described above, after executing the setting change process, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has ended and the changed setting value information. It is sent to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has been completed, the sub CPU 201 includes operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed), setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, Then, the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command was received, is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 3" and "No. 4" columns on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218, which will be described later. do.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, when confirming the setting values, the main CPU 101 needs to execute the setting confirmation process, as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the setting values are displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated to turn OFF, the setting confirmation process ends. Note that, as mentioned above, when the setting key switch signal is operated to turn OFF and then the setting key switch signal is operated to turn ON again, the setting confirmation process may be executed again. As I said.

In addition, in order to display the setting confirmation history, as described above, after executing the setting confirmation process, the main CPU 101 sends a power failure recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended. do. At this time, although the setting value has not been changed, the setting value information is also sent from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (processing of steps S3317 and S3318, see FIG. 213). It is preferable that

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives a power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed, the sub CPU 201 receives operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed), and the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209. That is, the date and time data when the power failure recovery command was received is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the "No. 1" column on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218, which will be described later. In addition, as shown in the "No. 1" column on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in Figure 218, setting value information is may also be displayed at the same time.

Note that the work RAM 203 of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment constitutes a storage storage area that can store and hold written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even if the power to the pachinko game machine is cut off by the operator or the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the storage of, for example, setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

In this second embodiment, viewing means that the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change/confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 209 and 210), and This refers to the display of a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) that shows setting change/confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203.

In order to display the browsing history (browsing history), the sub CPU 201 executes the following process. That is, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (YES in step S3301), the sub CPU 201 displays a hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S3301). Then, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), the sub CPU 201 highlights "setting change/confirmation history" (see FIG. 210). ). In this state, when the main button 662 is pressed, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and displays the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) on the LCD. In addition to being displayed in the display area of the display device 16, operation type information indicating that the browsing has been performed (information indicating that the browsing has been performed), and date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, when the browsing was performed ( The date and time data (when the main button 662 was pressed) are stored in the work RAM 203 in association with each other. This is the process when the viewing history is recorded in the history recording process (steps S3306 and S3307) described above. That is, the viewing history is recorded in the work RAM 203 when the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, whether during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. When the sub CPU 201 stores the browsing history in the work RAM 203, for example, the sub CPU 201 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change/confirmation history information and stores it in the work RAM 203. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, information displayed in the "No. 2" and "No. 5" columns on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218, which will be described later.

Here, the history recording processing in steps S3306 and S3307 is summarized as follows. First, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The sub CPU 201 records both the setting change history and the viewing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S3303), "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At this time, the sub CPU 201 performs both setting confirmation history and viewing history. Further, if "setting change/confirmation history" is not selected in the hall menu process (step S3303) (NO in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 Among the setting change history and browsing history, only the setting change history is performed without checking the browsing history. Furthermore, if "setting change/confirmation history" is not selected in the hall menu process (step S3303) (NO in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is a power failure recovery command, the sub CPU 201 Of the setting confirmation history and browsing history, only the setting confirmation history is performed without checking the browsing history. Therefore, in the history recording process in steps S3306 and S3307, regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, in the hall menu process (step S3303) When "history" is selected (YES in step S33006), viewing recording is performed.

In addition to the settings change processing or setting confirmation processing, when the backup clear processing that does not involve setting change processing is executed as described above, the hall menu display processing (step S3302) or the hall menu processing (step S3302) is performed. When step S3303) is executed, the above-mentioned viewing record is performed, which also serves to monitor fraud by the game store clerk. In other words, in order to perform setting change processing or setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key that has a cutout only at the location corresponding to the setting key 328 and is managed by the gaming machine manager) is required. For example, an ordinary store clerk who does not have a special key cannot view the data, but backup clear processing that does not involve changing settings can be viewed by a general game store clerk or unauthorized player who does not have a dedicated key. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, by making the sub CPU 201 record the viewing even when backup clearing processing that does not involve setting change processing is executed, the security camera corresponding to that time (security camera usually installed in the store) It becomes possible to identify the person who viewed the video by comparing it with other videos such as

Note that in the history recording process of steps S3306 and S3307, regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), the viewing record is performed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is a power failure recovery command, the sub CPU 201 Both the setting confirmation history and viewing history are performed, but "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is initialized. When it is a command, only the setting change history among the setting change history and browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. This makes it possible to minimize the number of times the browsing history is recorded, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from increasing unnecessarily and making it difficult to detect fraud. To explain this, when fraud involving setting changes is committed, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the gaming machine manager, but it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud by checking the setting confirmation history. It is difficult to detect the possibility of fraud by simply looking at the configuration confirmation history. Therefore, when a setting change is made, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it was viewed, but when the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is recorded if the setting is viewed (at least setting value information is viewed). It was designed to be recorded. This is because it is thought that those who commit fraud mainly view the information after confirming the settings, rather than viewing the information after changing the settings. In other words, if there is no browsing history and only the setting confirmation history during the same time period, there is a low possibility of fraud, but if the number of times both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are large, there is a possibility of fraud. . Note that regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (step S3303), (YES in S33006), both the setting change history or setting confirmation history and viewing history are recorded, and when displaying the setting change/confirmation history screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the setting confirmation process is performed. When the operation type information indicates that a setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may also be displayed, and when the operation type information indicates that a setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

In addition, the history recording process in steps S3306 and S3307 is performed when viewing is performed multiple times between the start of the hall menu display process in step S3302 and the execution of the game screen return display process in step S3315. However, the viewing record is executed only once in step S3306 or step S3307, which is executed when the setting change processing or setting confirmation processing is completed. For example, if you select and confirm "setting change/confirmation history" on the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 210) (YES in step S3046), the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) is displayed. However, if you select and confirm "Return" on this setting change/confirmation history screen, you will be returned to the hall menu screen again. Then, when the user selects and confirms "setting change/confirmation history" on this hall menu screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change/confirmation history screen is viewed multiple times between steps S3302 and S3315, the viewing record will be one time.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the number of viewing records performed between steps S3302 and S3315 to one time is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes settings, confirms settings, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase the number of viewing records to increase the number of histories, thereby making it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an action is performed, even if settings are changed, checked, or viewed multiple times between steps S3301 and S3312, the history of these changes is recorded only once, and the power is turned off. By not recording the history unless it is turned off and turned on again, it is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the hole menu redisplaying process (step S3310) is executed after the setting change process is finished, and the hall menu redisplaying process is not executed after the setting confirmation process is finished. The game screen return process (step S3315) is executed, but for example, even after the setting key 328 is turned OFF and the setting change process or setting confirmation process is completed, if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, the hole is returned. If the specification is such that a menu screen is displayed, the hole menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, each time you select and confirm "Setting change/confirmation history" on the hall menu screen that is displayed again, or repeatedly turn the setting key 328 on and off, you will be viewing the information. Even if there is, it is preferable to record the viewing only once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko game machine has operation means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330. There is. Among these, the main button 662, select button 664, and firing handle 32 are operation parts that can be operated by the player, but the power switch 35, volume switch 108, setting switch 332, setting key 328, and backup clear switch 330 is an operation section that cannot be operated by the player and can only be operated by a specific person such as a gaming machine administrator.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the display of a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) that allows setting values to be confirmed is stored as a viewing history, but the setting values are not displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which the display of a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 223 described later) is stored as a viewing history.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216, 217, and 218 to 222, the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 and the display of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. This will be explained while comparing it with the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

Note that FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 217 is an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 216. FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen (screen when transitioning to the setting change/confirmation history screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of a page update screen that allows page updates on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing an example when "Clear" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 222 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen where each history data is cleared on the setting change/confirmation history screen.

When "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 214) (YES in step S33006 of FIG. 214), the sub CPU 201 performs a setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S33051). At this time, the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the initial screen of this setting change/confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted.

Note that the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 218) includes a setting change/confirmation history display area 31640, an operation explanation area 31650, a first selection area 31660a, and a second selection area 31660b. In FIG. 218, an example is shown in which "Page" is displayed in the first selection area 31660a, and "Clear" and "Back" are displayed in the second selection area 31660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 218, the setting change/confirmation history display area 31640 displays a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information in association with each other. The date and time column displays the date and time when settings were changed, settings were confirmed, and viewed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, viewing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, when a setting change is made, the setting value after the change is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In addition, in the operation type column, in the case of setting change, it is simply displayed as "change", and in the case of setting confirmation, it is simply displayed as "confirmation".

In this way, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, time information and operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, viewing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. Ru. Further, when the operation type is a setting change, the setting value after setting is displayed, and when the operation type is a setting confirmation, the setting value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type.

The sub CPU 201 executes a setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S33051), and then executes a time measurement process (step S33052). This time measurement process is a process for starting time measurement by a timer built in the sub CPU 201. Here, the timer starts counting after the setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S33051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. This is to display the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) when no processing is performed within a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the screen (see FIG. 209) is displayed.

Sub CPU 201 determines whether select button 664 has been operated in step S33053. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33053), the process moves to step S33071, which will be described later, and it is determined whether "return" has been selected on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218). On the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, "Back" is determined. be done.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33053), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S33054). For example, if you operate the upper select button 664a on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) where "Back" is highlighted, the highlight will move from "Back" to "Page" ( (See Figure 219).

After highlighting the selected item (step S33054), the sub CPU 201 executes a time measurement process (step S33055). This time measurement process is a process of clearing the time measurement of the timer started in step S33052 and restarting the time measurement of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. The purpose of clearing the timer and restarting the time measurement is when no processing is performed within a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item is highlighted on the setting change/confirmation history screen (step S33054). This is to allow the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) to be displayed when the selection is not performed.

In step S33056, the sub CPU 201 determines whether "Page" has been determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with "Page" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 selects "Page" and presses the main button 662. It is determined that "Page" has been determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "Page" has been determined (YES in step S33056), the sub CPU 201 executes page update screen display processing (step S33057). When the page update screen display process is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the page update screen of this setting change/confirmation history screen, images imitating left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, as well as "next page" and "previous page" are displayed on the left and right sides of the notation "Page". This allows the operator to understand that operating the left select button 664c will update the setting change/confirmation history screen to the previous page, and operating the lower select button 664d will update the setting change/confirmation history screen to the next page. can do. Note that if you operate the left select button 664c while the first page of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, the last page will be displayed, and if you operate the right select button 664d while the last page is displayed, the first page will be displayed. Convenience can be improved by cyclically displaying the eyes.

On the other hand, if "Page" has not been determined (NO in step S33056), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S33065, which will be described later, and determines whether "Clear" has been determined on the setting change/confirmation history screen.

After executing the page update screen display process (step S3057), the sub CPU 201 executes a time measurement process (step S33058). This time measurement process is a process of clearing the time measurement of the timer started in step S33055, and restarting the time measurement of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Clearing the timer's time measurement and starting time measurement again is after the page update screen display process (step S33057) is executed (after the page update screen (see Figure 220) on the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed). ), this is to display the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S33059, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S33059), the process moves to step S33062, which will be described later.

When sub CPU 201 determines that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33059), it executes page update processing (step S33060). When the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 220) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 determines that the page update process has been performed. The setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated and displayed as the next page or previous page's setting change/confirmation history screen. Note that illustration of the setting change/confirmation history screen when updated to the next page or previous page's setting change/confirmation history screen is omitted.

In this second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 operates the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Although the page update process is performed with this, the operations for performing the page update process are not limited to this. For example, by operating the upper and lower select buttons 664a and 664b, one of "No. 1" to "No. 5" on the setting change/confirmation history screen can be selected, and by operating the lower select button 664b, In addition, the page update process may be performed when it is determined that the row is the last row. The same applies to page update processing in a modification of the setting change/confirmation history processing to be described later.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process (step 3060), the sub CPU 201 executes a time measurement process (step S33061). This time measurement process is a process of clearing the time measurement of the timer started in step S33058, and restarting the time measurement of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. The timer clears the timer and starts counting again after the page update process (step S33060) is executed (after the setting change/confirmation history screen for the next or previous page is displayed), and after a predetermined period of time ( This is to display the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) when no processing is performed within 30 seconds, for example.

After executing the time measurement process in step S33061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S33059 and determines whether a page update operation has been performed.

Sub CPU 201 determines whether select button 664 has been operated in step S33062. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33062), the process moves to step S33072, which will be described later. In this case, the reason for moving to step S33072 instead of step S33071 is that "Back" is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the settings change/confirmation history screen, as in the initial screen of the settings change/confirmation history screen. That's because there aren't any.

When sub CPU 201 determines that select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33062), it highlights the selected item (step S33063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 220), the highlighted display moves from "Page" to "Clear" (see FIG. 221).

After highlighting the selected item (step S33063), the sub CPU 201 executes timekeeping processing (step S33064). This time measurement process is a process of clearing the time measurement of the timer started in step S33061 and restarting the time measurement of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Clearing the timer and restarting the timer is only possible if no action is taken within a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item is highlighted on the setting change/confirmation history screen. This is so that the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) may be displayed at times.

After executing the time measurement process in step S33064, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S33065 and determines whether "clear" has been determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with "Clear" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 selects "Clear". Clear.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" has been determined (YES in step S33065), the sub CPU 201 executes a setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066). This setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing all data of the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all of the history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 31640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see FIG. 222). When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process in step S33065 is executed, the "Back" item is highlighted.

In addition, in the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066) described above, all the data of the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history stored in the work RAM 203 is erased, but not all data is necessarily deleted. It is not limited to erasing data, but it may be possible to erase only a part of the data. As a mode of erasing some data, for example, No. 221 in FIG. 1~No. A mode in which time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. , setting confirmation, viewing), how to delete date and time information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, and among time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information. A mode may be considered in which only specific information (for example, setting value information) is deleted.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066) be executed only by those who meet specific conditions. For example, when "Clear" is selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen, inputting a password may be used as a condition for enabling pressing of the main button 662, for example. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without entering a password, a screen requesting a password will be displayed, and only if the correct password is entered, the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process will be executed. You can do it like this. This can prevent data on setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history from being cleared by mistake. Furthermore, for example, a person who has performed setting change processing or viewing for the purpose of fraud may erase the data of the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history in order to hide his or her own fraud. Therefore, by making it possible for only specific people, such as those who know the password, to execute settings change/confirmation history data clearing, it is possible to prevent settings changes or viewing for fraudulent purposes. It becomes possible.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066), the sub CPU 201 executes a timekeeping process (step S33067). This time measurement process is a process of clearing the time measurement of the timer started in step S33064 and restarting the time measurement of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Clearing the timer's time measurement and starting time measurement again is after the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066) has been executed (each history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 31640 has been cleared). This is to display the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all data have been deleted.

Sub CPU 201 determines whether select button 664 has been operated in step S33068. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33068), the process moves to step S33072, which will be described later. In this case, the reason why the process moves to step S33071 instead of step S33072 is because "Back" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen where each history data is cleared unless the select button 664 is operated. . Therefore, if the specifications are such that "Return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen where each history data is cleared, the process moves to step S33072.

When sub CPU 201 determines that select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33068), it highlights the selected item (step S33069).

After highlighting the selected item (step S33069), the sub CPU 201 executes timekeeping processing (step S33070). This time measurement process is a process of clearing the time measurement of the timer started in step S33067 and restarting the time measurement of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Clearing the timer's time measurement and starting time measurement again means that no processing is performed within a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item is highlighted on the setting change/confirmation history screen (step S33069). This is to ensure that the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed when the selection is not made.

In step S33071, the sub CPU 201 determines whether "return" has been determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with "Back" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 It is determined that "Return" has been selected.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" has been determined (YES in step S33071), the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S33073), and ends the setting change/confirmation history process. This hall menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen of the hall menu screen (see FIG. 209) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change/confirmation history screen.

Note that if "return" is not determined in step S33071 (NO in step S33071), the sub CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S33072).

If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S33072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S33072), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S33073, closes the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and displays the hall menu. The initial screen (see FIG. 209) is displayed. In other words, even if the operator does not select and decide on the "return" item, if the period of no operation continues for a predetermined period, the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen will end and the initial screen of the hall menu screen will be displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S33072 (NO in step S33072), the sub CPU 201 returns to step S33053 and continues the processing from step S33053 onward.

In this way, on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while changing settings or confirming settings, if a predetermined period of time elapses without any operations being performed, the setting change/confirmation history screen ends. The system is configured so that the hall menu screen is displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, even if no operation is performed, the hall menu screen does not end as long as settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed, and the sub CPU 201 controls the hall menu screen to continue to be displayed. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

Note that the process of moving to step S33073 when it is determined in step S33072 that a predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S33072) is the whole menu process (i.e., during the setting change or This is a process during the setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S3311 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S33007) in the hall menu process in step S3311 (when a predetermined time has elapsed in step S33072 in the hall menu process in step S3311) (step S33072 YES), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3315 (see FIGS. 207 and 213), ends the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen return display process (step S3315) and returns to the hall. A menu display prohibition process (step S3316) is executed. In other words, on the setting change/confirmation history screen while changing settings or checking settings, if no operation continues for a predetermined period of time, the screen simply returns to the hall menu screen (you can view the setting change/confirmation history screen again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, if no operation continues for a predetermined period of time, the setting change/confirmation history screen will be displayed again. be unable to do so.

Furthermore, regarding the process of returning to step S33053 when it is determined in step S33072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S33072), the whole menu process (i.e., the setting This process is performed during the change or confirmation of settings), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hall menu process of step S3311 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) (that is, after the setting change or confirmation is completed). Specifically, even if the no-operation period has not reached the predetermined period in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S33007) in the hall menu process in step S3311 (NO in step S33072), for example, a production control object is generated. Based on the fulfillment of a predetermined termination condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received, a game screen return process (step S3315) and a hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) are executed. In other words, on the setting change/confirmation history screen while changing settings or checking settings, if no operation continues for a predetermined period of time, the screen simply returns to the hall menu screen (you can view the setting change/confirmation history screen again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change/confirmation history will be displayed again even if the inactivity time has not reached the specified time. You will be unable to view the screen. In other words, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the period of no operation continues for a predetermined period, and the above predetermined end condition is met. Unless the following holds true, the processes from step S33053 to step S33072 will be repeatedly executed.

In this way, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator is allowed time to view confidential information such as the history of setting changes and setting confirmations, and the process is performed for a predetermined period of time ( For example, if there is no operation for a period of 30 seconds, the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen will end and the game screen return process (step S3315) and hall menu prohibition process (step S3316) will be executed. (For example, a hall attendant who is not a game machine manager or a player) cannot easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, viewing history, etc., making it possible to ensure security.

In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, for example, on the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218, regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, viewing), time information, operation type information, and setting A list screen showing all the value information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 218) displays the time information and setting value information when the settings are changed, and the time information and setting value information when the settings are confirmed are displayed. The second information displayed (for example, No. 3, No. 4 in FIG. 218), and the third information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 218) in which the time information and setting value information when viewed are displayed. 2, No. 5) are displayed in a list. However, an operator (for example, a gaming machine manager) may want to narrow down the target to display specific operation type information. Therefore, a screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list (for example, see FIG. 218), the above first information, the above second information, and the above third information It is preferable that a narrowing-down screen narrowed down to only specific information can be selectively displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the operator's intention. This makes it possible to improve convenience for the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is highly convenient for business because it not only allows fraud to be detected but also information such as how many days the business was conducted with the set value. The above-mentioned narrowing-down screen may display information unrelated to the operation type (for example, current time information, etc.) because it is sufficient to narrow down the target to specific operation type information and display it.

[Other examples of display screens displayed during setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, other examples of display screens displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 227. However, since the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 is similar to that shown in FIGS. 216 and 217, in this other example, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be explained A description of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the CPU 201 will be omitted.

FIG. 223 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. FIG. 224 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when "setting display" is selected. FIG. 225 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when newly added setting values are displayed. FIG. 226 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected. FIG. 227 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram illustrating an example of a page update screen on which page updates can be performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 223, the setting change/confirmation history screen includes a setting change/confirmation history display area 31670, an operation explanation area 31680, a first selection area 31690a, and a second selection area 31690b.

In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 223, time information and operation type information are displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 31670, but setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 223 is a screen in which only time information and operation type information among the time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed. Note that the date and time column where time information is displayed displays the date and time when settings were changed, settings confirmed, or viewed, and the operation type column where operation type information is displayed displays the operation type (settings change, (Setting confirmation, viewing) will be displayed.

Further, in the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, in addition to "clear" and "back", "setting display" is also displayed in the second selection area 31690b. In addition, on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history, "Back" is selected and displayed (highlighted). In this other example as well, by operating the select button 664, it is possible to select an item to be highlighted.

When "setting display" is selected by operating the select button 664, "setting display" is highlighted (see FIG. 224). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "setting display" is selected (highlighted), time information and operation type information are displayed, but setting value information is not displayed. In place of the initial screen of the settings change/confirmation history screen that is not displayed, a settings change/confirmation history screen (list screen) is displayed that displays time information, operation type information, and setting value information in a list (see Figure 225). ). In this way, in this other example, although the setting values are not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, by selecting and confirming "Setting display", you can associate them with the date and time and operation type. A new list of setting values will be displayed. Note that when the setting change/confirmation history screen on which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. Back” will be highlighted.

If you operate the select button 664 and select "Page" on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see Figure 225) that displays time information, operation type information, and setting value information, "Page" will be highlighted. (See Figure 226). When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes page update processing. When this page update process is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 227) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this page update screen, it is possible to update to the next page or previous page by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d.

Also, if you select "Page" and press the main button 662 on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen (see Figure 223) where time information and operation type information are displayed but setting value information is not displayed, Also, page update processing is executed by the sub CPU 201. However, when this page update process is executed, although time information and operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the page update screen on the setting change/confirmation history screen where setting value information is not displayed. is displayed. On this page update screen, by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which setting values are not displayed. However, the configuration may be such that the page update process cannot be executed on the setting change/confirmation history screen where time information and operation type information are displayed but setting value information is not displayed.

Note that in other examples, only the time information and operation type information among the time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 223, and the time information and operation type information are displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. Although it is possible to selectively display a screen displaying a list of information and setting value information, the screen in FIG. 223 displays one or two of the time information, operation type information, and setting value information. Any screen that displays only information will suffice.

Additionally, the settings change/confirmation history screen, which displays a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information, can only be viewed by those who meet certain conditions (for example, those who have entered the correct password). However, this will be described later.

FIG. 228 shows a setting change/confirmation history screen on which setting values can be checked on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing an example of the operating procedure until As shown in FIG. 228, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, as a first step for viewing setting change/confirmation history information, when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed, a hall menu Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch signal can be turned on by turning the setting key 328 in one direction, and the setting key switch signal can be turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured to allow.

Note that in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation that is performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, but the operation is not limited to this. The operation may be performed when executing at least one of a setting change process and a setting confirmation process. The same applies to any of the modified examples described below.

As a second step, the pachinko game machine selects and confirms "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 210). A preview screen of the settings change/confirmation history screen that includes setting change/confirmation history information with highlighted and only date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among settings change, confirmation, and viewing) displayed. (see Figure 210) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third step, the pachinko game machine presses the main button 662 with "setting change/confirmation history" highlighted on the hole menu screen displayed in the second step (see Figure 210). As a result, a setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this setting change/confirmation history screen, date and time data, operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and viewing) and setting values are associated with each other.

Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (person with authority) cannot change the settings or change the settings on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) that is displayed after the first to third steps above. By viewing the confirmation history, you will be able to see at a glance the history of setting changes, confirmation of setting changes, and viewing of setting changes and confirmations and the corresponding setting values that define the ball payout rate. . It should be noted that the person with authority is a person who has been given authority to change settings, confirm changes in settings, etc., and means a manager of a hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authorized person" may also be referred to as the "administrative authority person."

As described above, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, a group of operation buttons 66 such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and controls related to the game. The control unit includes a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control section includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting means for enabling the display, and a data transmitting means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201, and a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain written information even when the If the data received by the data receiving means is a setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 sends the setting change or setting confirmation to the work RAM 203 and changes the setting value and date and time data from the RTC 209. - Equipped with a setting display function that displays setting changes or setting confirmations and date and time data stored as confirmation history information and stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and setting changes or setting confirmations and date and time data are displayed. In this state, when the main button 662 is operated, the setting values stored in the work RAM 203 are displayed.

With this configuration, setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change/confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, so when setting changes or setting confirmations and date and time data are displayed, the main button When 662 is operated, the setting values stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu is selected, it is possible to check each history related to setting values, and it is possible to determine whether or not unauthorized setting changes or setting confirmations have been made. It becomes like this.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment may have a configuration in which the date and time data on which the setting value is received is acquired from the RTC 209, and the setting value, the date and time data, and information representing a setting change are stored in association with each other. good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information representing the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can identify the date and time when the setting value was changed. This makes it possible to identify fraud in the event that fraud, such as changing setting values, has been carried out.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. Good too.

With this configuration, the date and time data when setting values were confirmed and the information representing setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so an authorized person can specify the date and time when setting values were confirmed, and If fraud, such as checking a value, has been carried out, it becomes possible to identify the fraud.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data are displayed among the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data are displayed in the setting change/confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history and viewed. History can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where setting values are not displayed, in addition to displaying setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data among setting change/confirmation history information, Since the history can be displayed, it can be determined whether or not the viewing history for setting changes or setting confirmations has been viewed for fraudulent purposes such as cheating.

With the above configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to save and display setting change/confirmation history information that associates setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data, so that each history related to setting values can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can confirm whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been made.

Further, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit that performs control related to the game. The control unit includes a main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit includes a setting unit that allows setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) to be changed or confirmed. The display control unit includes a setting switch 332, a data transmitting means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201, and a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a data transmitting means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and retaining information, and an RTC 209 that measures date and time. If the data received by the data receiving means is a setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value, and date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change/confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. It has a setting display function that displays setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data are displayed. is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. I can do it. Therefore, it is not only possible to determine whether an unnatural operation has been performed, but also whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time data when the setting change/confirmation history information was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC 209, and associates the date and time data with information representing the viewing history. It may also be configured to store the information.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the viewing history are stored in association with each other, so it is possible to identify the date and time when information related to setting values was viewed, and to prevent fraud such as changing setting values. This makes it possible to identify fraud if it has been committed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data are displayed among the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data are displayed in the setting change/confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the display The viewing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where setting values are not displayed, in addition to displaying setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data among setting change/confirmation history information, Since the history can be displayed, it can be determined whether or not the viewing history for setting changes or setting confirmations has been viewed for fraudulent purposes such as cheating.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to save and display viewing history information that associates the viewing history of viewing setting change confirmation/history information with date and time data, thereby preventing unnatural operations regarding setting values. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can not only determine whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed, but also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate a fraudulent act.

[Maintenance processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 229 to 231, the maintenance process (step S33019) executed by the sub CPU 201 and the maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed are explained. Explain by comparing. Note that FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing an example of maintenance processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 231 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 201 displays a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this maintenance processing, devices connected to the sub CPU 201 (e.g., various sensors, various operating accessories, etc.), such as performance accessories such as the production button switch 621 and the upper accessory 1000, are subject to maintenance processing, The operator can confirm whether these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation status display table of various devices (such as various sensors and various accessories) approximately in the center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231). This operating status display table includes, for example, a name column in which the names of 28 various devices are displayed, and a number column in which serial numbers (1 to 28) assigned to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. and an operation status column indicating the operation status of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When input is received from various devices, the display in the operation state column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, when the performance button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the performance button 1 from "OFF" display to "ON" display. Note that the "ON" display is displayed in red. The above-mentioned "input from each device" is based on the detection of input ports, etc. by the sub CPU 201. In addition, each performance accessory has at least a sensor that detects its presence in the normal position (standby position), and when the sensor that detects the normal position is ON, the display is turned OFF, and the sensor that detects the normal position When it is OFF, that is, when the performance accessory moves, the display is turned ON.

Further, the sub CPU 201 displays the operation method on the maintenance screen at the bottom of the maintenance screen. Specifically, if the main button 662, upper select button 664a, and lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, a message is displayed indicating that the initial screen of the hall menu screen (see FIG. 209) will be returned to (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 231, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 229), the sub CPU 201 first obtains sub device input information (step S33081). The sub-device input information is the detection results of the operating states of various devices numbered 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices described above are in an on state, which is a state in which there is an input, or an off state, which is a state in which there is no input.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs sub input state information editing processing to read sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (step S33082).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance screen display processing to display a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub input status information read out in step S33082 (step S33083). ). In this process, the maintenance screen is displayed and the display is updated (for example, the "OFF" display is changed to the "ON" display).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (step S33084). If it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b have been operated at the same time (YES in step S33084), the sub CPU 201 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 214), and continues the process. The process returns to step S3304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 207).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S33084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S33081.

By the way, some of the recent pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines have multiple functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the performance button 62 has the functions of an operation button and a performance button. The function of the production button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the lottery result of a special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" with the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 231 is selected, the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance regarding the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "effect button 2" with the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 231 is selected, the sub CPU 201 moves the effect button 62 upward to perform maintenance on the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is determined to be normal, the sub CPU 201 executes a maintenance screen display process (step S33083), and executes a maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display). Note that the production button 62 that protrudes upward when the "main button 2" is selected is determined to be normal, for example, when the selection button 664 is operated to select the item with the other serial number shown in FIG. 231. When the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time and the maintenance mode ends, the sub CPU 201 returns to the normal state (the state before protruding upward). Ru.

In addition, some recent pachinko and pachislot machines are equipped with multiple performance accessories with different drive means, and in such game machines, multiple performance accessories with different drive means can be operated at the same time. Maintenance may be performed, or maintenance may be performed by operating each of a plurality of performance accessories having different drive means at different timings, or maintenance may be performed by operating each of the performance accessories individually. For example, in a game machine including performance accessories 1 to 3 with different driving means, when "performance accessory 1+2" with the serial number 14 shown in FIG. 231 is selected, the sub CPU 201 controls the performance accessory Maintenance is performed by simultaneously operating an object 1 and a performance accessory 2. Further, for example, when "performance accessory 1 → 2" with serial number 17 shown in FIG. Perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the "performance accessory 1" with the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 operates the performance accessory 1 independently and performs maintenance. In addition, for example, if production 1 and production 3 are activated at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, for example, "performance accessories 1 + 3" with serial number 15 in Fig. 231 cannot be selected, or even if selected, it cannot be determined. (The operation of the main button 662 is not enabled). In FIG. 231, "performance accessory 1+3" with serial number 15 is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, if, for example, production 1 and production 3 are activated at the same time, they will interfere with each other and become inoperable, but if they are activated at different timings (for example, first production accessory 1 is activated, then If this does not interfere with the operation of performance accessory 3), it is preferable to allow selection of "performance accessory 1→3" with serial number 18 shown in FIG. 231, for example. In this way, it is possible to operate multiple performance accessories, to operate them at different timings, or to operate them independently, and in cases where they would interfere if they were activated at the same time, they can be operated simultaneously. By disabling the operation, it is possible to improve maintainability while avoiding troubles.

Although not shown in FIG. 231, there are enclosed sensors such as a payout sensor for game balls and medals, a payout security ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a return button for a CR card, a payment button for a pachislot machine, and a payout sensor for game balls and medals. In a pachinko game machine that enables games by circulating game balls, it is preferable that the game ball launch detection sensor and the like be subject to maintenance as well. In addition, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the maintenance processing has been described for devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201, but the invention is not limited to this. Devices (for example, the power switch 35, the first starting port switch 421, the second starting port switch 441, etc.) may be subjected to maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card, a pseudo Alternatively, the normal state of the signal communication may be detected, and if it is normal, a maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from "OFF" display to "ON" display).

[Mobile device linkage function]
Next, referring to FIGS. 232 to 234, a mobile terminal cooperation function of a pachinko game machine will be described as an example.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko game machine is a function that allows the pachinko game machine and the mobile terminal to cooperate. By using the pachinko machine's mobile terminal linkage function, you can record detailed information about the games played by the player, and customize functions that do not affect the pachinko machine's game results by meeting certain conditions. can do.

Examples of the predetermined conditions include, for example, that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, or that a specific performance has been executed. In addition, customizing functions that do not affect the game results of the pachinko game machine includes, for example, changing the music output during jackpot games or high probability game states to special songs, and Examples include changing the costume of the character displayed on the screen.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, a guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. If, for example, the main button 662 is pressed in a state where the decorative patterns displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 16 are not displayed in a variable manner, a guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 16.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The initial guide image includes the words "UNIMEMO (registered trademark)", the words "Please choose your favorite menu", and a guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 232, the items of the guide menu include "Start Unimemo", "Jackpot symbol/Number of rounds", "Model site", and "Return to game". In the initial guide image, "Start Unimemo" is highlighted. The highlighted item among the plurality of guide menu items can be selected by operating the upper and lower select buttons 664a and 664b. Furthermore, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 232, each item is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted item "Start Unimemo" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "Start UniMemo" is selected from the guide menu, an initial UniMemo image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Further, when the "jackpot symbol/number of rounds" is selected, the jackpot symbol/number of rounds is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). When "model site" is selected, a model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to Game" is selected, the display of the initial guide image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, there are displayed images for effects displayed when playing a game, information on whether the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period, whether the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 has been opened, etc. Also, a demo video that will be displayed if you do not win for a predetermined period of time is displayed. Furthermore, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without selecting any of the items on the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will display the performance images displayed when playing the game and the above-mentioned demo video. Is displayed.

FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example when the UniMemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The UniMemo initial image displays the words "UniMemo", the words "Customize your favorite character", and the UniMemo menu. Items on the UniMemo menu include "password input," "record," "record and exit," "membership registration," "return to game," and "return." In the UniMemo initial image, "Password input" is highlighted. The highlighted item among the plurality of UniMemo menu items can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. Furthermore, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 233, each item is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “Password Input” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "password input" is selected and determined, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 234).

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example when a password request screen is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The password display image includes the text "Please enter your password" and a password input menu.

A plurality of password input menu items are displayed in the password input menu. The password input menu items are "Confirm", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Back". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and by operating the main button 662. , determined by the highlighted number or alphabet. The determined numbers or alphabets are displayed on the password display image. When "Determination" in the password input menu is selected and determined, the plurality of characters displayed in the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected in the password input menu, each character from the last input character is deleted from the password display image.

When "Return to Game" is selected in the password input menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will display the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, as well as the presentation images to be displayed when playing the game, and if the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period or if the A demonstration video that is displayed when no prize is won in either the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, when "Return" in the password input menu is selected, the UniMemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

[Modified example of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described below.
[Modification example 1 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
First, modification example 1 of setting change/confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 240.

The setting change/confirmation history process in this modification 1 is substantially the same as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, except that it includes an authentication function for viewing setting values. . In the following, points different from the setting change/confirmation history process described above will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. In addition, in the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, if no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) It has been explained that the timing process (see step S33052 in FIG. 216, etc.) is performed in order to display the . In this modification example 1 as well, when the time measurement process is performed in the same way as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), Although the hall menu screen may be displayed at the same time, the explanation of the time measurement process will be omitted in the following explanation.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing a first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. This setting change/confirmation history process is performed in step S33006 of FIG. 214 when "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hall menu screen being displayed (see FIGS. 209 and 210). The process is started on the condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change/confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication process to authenticate administrator authority (step S33100). This authentication process will be explained with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a flowchart illustrating an example of authentication processing in modification example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 236, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 where the hall menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 237 and 238. A password request screen is further displayed (step S33101). FIG. 237 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in modification example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 238 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in modification example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

In this modification example 1, when the setting change/confirmation history process is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). For example, as shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is being displayed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when the settings change/confirmation history is started, the settings change/confirmation history screen displays only time information, operation type information, and setting value information (setting values are not displayed). , and the password request screen may be displayed while this setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request screen may be displayed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change/confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the sub CPU 201 executes password input processing (step S33102), and moves to step S33103.

In step S33103, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the input password is appropriate or not, and if the input password is appropriate (YES in step S33103), the authentication process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is incorrect (NO in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 executes authentication NG display processing (step S33104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, the screen shown in FIG. 239, for example, is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Here, FIG. 239 shows an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the input password is inappropriate in modification example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication process in step S33100, if it determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is appropriate (YES in step S33103), it determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S33110), and proceeds to step The process moves to S33120. On the other hand, if it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S33110), and ends the setting change/confirmation history process.

Note that, for example, when the main button 662 is pressed after a password is input on the password request screen, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the input password is appropriate. If the entered password is inappropriate or if the main button 662 is pressed without entering a password, the authentication NG process in step S33103 described above is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and, for example, the main button 662 is pressed, a setting change/confirmation history screen on which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed is displayed. I can do it. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value history information from being viewed for fraudulent purposes.

The sub CPU 201 performs a setting change/confirmation history screen display process in step S33120. At this time, a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, in which date and time data, operation type, and setting value are shown in association with each other.

After the setting change/confirmation history screen display process in step S33120, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a page update operation has been performed (step S33130). If it is determined that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33130), the page update process is executed (step S33140), and then the process moves to step S33130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S33130), the process moves to step S33150.

Sub CPU 201 determines whether "clear" has been determined in step S33150. The operator presses the main button 662 with "Clear" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 221). Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" has been determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" has been determined (YES in step S33150), the sub CPU 201 executes a setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33160), and moves to step S33180. The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process described above is a process for erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history data stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (for example, see FIG. 222). On the other hand, if "clear" is not determined (NO in step S33150), the process moves to step S33170.

In step S33170, the sub CPU 201 determines whether "return" has been determined. The operator presses the main button 662 with "Back" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 218). Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" has been determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" has been determined (YES in step S33170), the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S33180), and ends the setting change/confirmation history process. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S33170), the process moves to step S33130 and continues the processing from step S33130 onward.

FIG. 240 shows setting change/confirmation that allows confirmation of setting values on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in modification example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a flow diagram showing an example of an operation procedure until a history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 240, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, as a first step for viewing setting change/confirmation history information, when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed, a hall menu Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch signal can be turned on by turning the setting key 328 in one direction, and the setting key switch signal can be turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured to allow.

As a second step, the pachinko game machine selects and confirms "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 210). A preview screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen that includes setting change/confirmation history information with highlighted and only date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and viewing) displayed. (see Figure 210) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third step, the pachinko gaming machine requests input of a password (see FIGS. 237 and 238), and determines whether the input password is appropriate.

As a fourth step, if the password entered in the third step is correct, the pachinko machine will provide setting value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, viewing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 225) in which the setting value and the type of operation to be performed are associated with each other is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (person with authority) can change the settings and confirm the settings on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) that is displayed after the first to fourth steps above. By viewing the confirmation history, you will be able to see at a glance the history of setting changes, confirmation of setting changes, and viewing of setting changes and confirmations and the corresponding setting values that define the ball payout rate. . It should be noted that the person with authority is a person who has been given authority to change settings, confirm changes in settings, etc., and means a manager of a hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authorized person" may also be referred to as the "administrative authority person."

As described above, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, a group of operation buttons 66 such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and controls related to the game. The control unit includes a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control section includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting means for enabling the display, and a data transmitting means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201, and a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain written information even when the If the data received by the data receiving means is a setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 sends the setting change or setting confirmation to the work RAM 203 and changes the setting value and date and time data from the RTC 209. - Equipped with a setting display function that displays setting changes or setting confirmations and date and time data stored as confirmation history information and stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and setting changes or setting confirmations and date and time data are displayed. In this state, when the main button 662 is operated, the setting values stored in the work RAM 203 are displayed.

With this configuration, setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change/confirmation history information, so when setting changes or setting confirmations and date and time data are displayed, the main button When 662 is operated, the setting values stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu is selected, it is possible to check each history regarding setting values, and it is possible to determine whether or not unauthorized setting changes or setting confirmations have been made. It becomes like this.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment may have a configuration in which the date and time data on which the setting value is received is acquired from the RTC 209, and the setting value, the date and time data, and information representing a setting change are stored in association with each other. good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, changed date and time data, and information representing the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can identify the date and time when the setting value was changed. This makes it possible to identify fraud, such as changing setting values, if it has been committed.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. Good too.

With this configuration, the date and time data when setting values were confirmed and the information representing the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so an authorized person can specify the date and time when setting values were confirmed, and If fraud, such as checking a value, has been carried out, it becomes possible to identify the fraud.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data are displayed among the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data are displayed in the setting change/confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history and viewed. History can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where setting values are not displayed, in addition to displaying setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data among setting change/confirmation history information, Since the history can be displayed, it can be determined whether or not the viewing history for setting changes or setting confirmations has been viewed for fraudulent purposes such as cheating.

With the above configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to save and display setting change/confirmation history information that associates setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data, so that each history related to setting values can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can confirm whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been made.

Further, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit that performs control related to the game. The control unit includes a main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit includes a setting unit that allows setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) to be changed or confirmed. The display control unit includes a setting switch 332, a data transmitting means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201, and a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a data transmitting means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and retaining information, and an RTC 209 that measures date and time. If the data received by the data receiving means is a setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value, and date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change/confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. It has a setting display function that displays setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data are displayed. is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. I can do it. Therefore, it is not only possible to determine whether an unnatural operation has been performed, but also whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time data when the setting change/confirmation history information was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC 209, and associates the date and time data with information representing the viewing history. It may also be configured to store the information.

With this configuration, the date and time data and information representing the viewing history are stored in association with each other, so it is possible to identify the date and time when information related to setting values was viewed, and to prevent fraud such as changing setting values. This makes it possible to identify fraud if it has been committed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data are displayed among the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data are displayed in the setting change/confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the display The viewing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where setting values are not displayed, in addition to displaying setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data among setting change/confirmation history information, Since the history can be displayed, it can be determined whether or not the viewing history for setting changes or setting confirmations has been viewed for fraudulent purposes such as cheating.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to save and display viewing history information that associates the viewing history of viewing setting change confirmation/history information with date and time data, thereby preventing unnatural operations regarding setting values. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can not only determine whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed, but also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate a fraudulent act.

[Modification example 2 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, a second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 245.

The setting change/confirmation history process in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process has substantially the same basic configuration as that in the first modification except for the configuration of the authentication function. In the following, differences from Modification Example 1 will be explained in detail.

The pachinko game machine according to the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process is equipped with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjustment means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, the volume "high". , "Medium", and "Small", as well as switching to a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined order, and the order of the switching operations is set in advance. When the order matches, the user is authenticated as a user with administrator privileges. Note that the volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to a slide switch, and may be configured such that, for example, the volume is adjusted by rotating a jog dial, and the volume is determined by pressing the jog dial.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process has an authentication processing function that performs authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the order of changing the volume position. In this second modification, for example, a control program to which the above-mentioned authentication processing function is added is stored in the audio control circuit 204, and the sub CPU 201 executes an authentication process based on the volume password in accordance with the control program.

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the volume switch 108 that generates the volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 242) in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The volume switch 108 is arranged, for example, in the circuit board of the sub-control circuit 200, and can be slid to set an initial setting value. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter also referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to volume "low," "medium," and "high." In addition to the switching operation, the switching operation is also performed sequentially to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined order of operations. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 from "large" to "medium" to "small" to "medium". That is, the sub CPU 201 constitutes a position detection unit that detects volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user with administrator authority (person with administrator authority), according to a prescribed administrator setting procedure, the volume switch 108 is operated in a different order from the initial setting, and a prescribed authentication operation is performed via multiple volume positions. A plurality of volume positions and the order of operations are stored in a memory by performing operations in a pattern. When administrator authority is required to view the change history of setting values, etc., the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable viewing of the change history of setting values.

The authentication operation pattern may be, for example, an operation pattern representing a change in position from volume position 2 (volume "medium") to volume position 1 (volume "low") in FIG. 241, or from volume position 2 to volume position 3 (volume position 3). An operation pattern or the like representing a change in position to "loud" volume can be stored in advance.

As a result, the sub CPU 201 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and determines whether or not the operation pattern matches a preset authentication operation pattern. It can be determined whether or not.

In this manner, in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting a volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, setting key 328, power switch 35, and backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, etc. are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 242 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this authentication process, "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected from the hall menu being displayed (see FIG. 209) in step S33006 of FIG. 214 (YES in step S33006), and "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected on the hall menu screen. The process is started by pressing the main button 662 while "History" is highlighted (see FIG. 210).

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 201 executes a volume password request display process (step S33201) that displays a screen prompting the input of a volume password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 where the hall menu screen is displayed. Execute.

FIG. 243 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 244 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, in the volume password request display process of step S33201 in FIG. Please enter the password. The settings will be displayed after entering the password.'' is displayed along with the setting change/confirmation history information.

In this modification example 2, when the setting change/confirmation history process is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen) For example, as shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is being displayed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when the settings change/confirmation history is started, the settings change/confirmation history screen displays only time information, operation type information, and setting value information (setting values are not displayed). You can display the volume password request screen while displaying the settings change/confirmation history screen, or change the volume password without displaying either the hall menu or the settings change/confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes an operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern (step S33202).

When volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts an operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and compares it with a preset authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether the correct operation was performed based on whether the two match (step S33203). Here, if it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S33203), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing from step S33120 in FIG. 235.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S33203), the sub CPU 201 performs authentication NG display processing to display a message indicating that the authentication is NG in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. (Step S33204). Thereby, the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process and proceeds to the process of step S33110 in FIG. 235. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example.

Although FIG. 241 shows an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention, the operation switch is not limited to this. It may also be a switch that can assume different positions. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function that can detect each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information (volume position information) detected by this position detection function is acquired, and the acquired order and the work RAM 203 are stored in advance. The configuration may be such that setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the condition that it matches a predetermined stored operation order.

FIG. 245 is a flow diagram illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation procedure for setting change/confirmation history information in modification example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. 245, in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process, as the first step for confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information, when the setting change process or setting confirmation process is executed, Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch signal can be turned on by turning the setting key 328 in one direction, and the setting key switch signal can be turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured to allow.

As a second step, the pachinko game machine selects and confirms "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 210). A preview screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen that includes setting change/confirmation history information with highlighted and only date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and viewing) displayed. (see Figure 210) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third step, the pachinko game machine requests input of a volume password (see FIGS. 243 and 244), captures the input volume password, and determines whether the captured volume password is appropriate. The appropriateness of the volume password is determined by comparing the imported volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password). If the two match and authentication is OK, the volume password is determined to be appropriate. to decide.

As the fourth step, if the volume password entered in the third step is correct, the pachinko machine will process the setting value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, viewing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 225) in which the corresponding operation type) and setting values are associated is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko game machine constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, a main button 662 and a select button 664 that are operation units that receive at least operations from a player. It includes a non-gaming operation section that is not operated by the player, a main CPU 101 that is a control section that performs control related to games, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control section that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, The control section includes a setting switch 332 that allows setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) to be changed or confirmed, and data transmission means that sends various data to the display control section. The main CPU 101 is equipped with a receiving means for receiving various data from a transmitting means, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and retaining written information even in a power-off state, and an RTC 209 for measuring date and time. When the data received by the data receiving means is a setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and setting value to the work RAM 203. Equipped with a setting display function that stores the value and date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information, and displays the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, The configuration is such that setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the condition that the operations are performed in this order.

With this configuration, setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed on the condition that the non-gaming operation sections are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only authorized persons who know the predetermined operation order can save and display setting change/confirmation history information, making it easy to determine whether or not unnatural operations have been performed regarding setting values. It will be possible to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate misconduct.

Furthermore, when the setting change/confirmation history information in the work RAM 203 is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment stores the displayed date and time data in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and displays the displayed date and time data on the liquid crystal display device 16. It may also be configured to display the browsing history.

With this configuration, when setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Therefore, it is not only possible to determine whether an unnatural operation has been performed, but also whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the non-gaming operation section may be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, the volume switch 108.

With this configuration, authentication can be performed using an operation order known only to an authorized person, so it is not necessary to add an operation switch to identify an authorized person, and costs can be reduced. Note that this order of operation is shown when the pachinko game machine is delivered to the hall, and is used only by those with authority when changing or confirming the settings.

Further, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the operation switch is a switch that can take at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 can detect each volume position of the operation switch. The setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and performs the setting display function on the condition that the order of the acquired volume position information matches a predetermined operation order stored in advance. Additionally, the configuration may be such that setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is made known to the authorized person in advance, so that the authorized person can be identified. There is no need to add any operation switches, and authentication can be performed using an operation order known only to an authorized person.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, only an authorized person can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, so it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, when displaying setting change/confirmation history information, only a person who has authority regarding setting values in the hall can be authenticated by operating the volume switch 108. Although the configuration has been explained, when displaying setting change/confirmation history information, as in the pachinko gaming machine according to modification example 3 of setting change/confirmation history processing described below, input from the input section of the pachinko gaming machine is required. It may also be configured to authenticate using a password.

[Variation example 3 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, modification example 3 of setting change/confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 to 253.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming system 3210 according to modification example 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. This gaming system 3210 includes a pachinko gaming machine A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and a server device 3240 arranged in a network 3230. In the gaming system 3210, as will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and the server device 3240 cooperate to perform authentication processing related to setting changes and confirmation of confirmation history information.

In the gaming system 3210, the pachinko gaming machine A has, in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine described above, a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change/confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), and the two-dimensional code. It has a function of displaying on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 249). Specifically, the setting change/confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is information content as displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218, for example, and includes setting values. The sub-CPU in the pachinko game machine A constitutes a generation means for generating a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The portable wireless communication terminal 3220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control section 3221, a display operation section 3222, a camera section (not shown), and the like. The display/operation unit 3222 has the functions of a display unit and an operation unit, and is configured with a touch panel or the like. The camera section is a functional section that reads (takes an image of) the two-dimensional code 3161a etc. (see FIG. 249) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A. The display/operation section 3222 and the camera section constitute an operation/display section and an imaging means in the present invention, respectively.

The control unit 3221 includes a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, etc., and the CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in the storage device or RAM, for example. I do. In this embodiment, the control unit 3221 includes an extraction unit that analyzes a captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change/confirmation history information and a URL, and a password input screen (see the figure below) that inputs a password to the display operation unit 3222. an authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the input password entered on the password input screen to the server device 3240 based on the above URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 3240. , has a history information display control unit that displays setting change/confirmation history information including setting values on the display operation unit 3222 when the acquired authentication result is correct. The extraction unit, display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application installed in advance in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, input screen display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit, which are the components of the control unit 3221 according to the present embodiment, are the extraction unit, input screen display control unit, and authentication result control unit in the present invention, respectively. It constitutes an acquisition means and a history information display control means.

The server device 3240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for the authentication service identified by the above URL, receives an input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 that accesses the above URL, and inputs a preset password. The authentication service function is provided to determine whether the password is correct by checking the password, and to notify the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the authentication result. The server device 3240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in pachinko gaming machine A that constitutes gaming system 3210 according to modification 3. This setting change/confirmation history process is performed by selecting "setting change" from among the multiple hall menu items displayed on the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 208) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of pachinko game machine A. -Confirmation history" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed while "Setting change/confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 210).

In addition, in the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, if no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) It has been explained that the timing process (see step S33052 in FIG. 216, etc.) is performed in order to display the . In this modification 3 as well, when the timing process is performed in the same way as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), Although the hall menu screen may be displayed on the screen, the description of the third modification omits the description of the timekeeping process.

When this setting change/confirmation history process starts, the sub CPU reads the setting change/confirmation history information from the work RAM, and creates a two-dimensional code containing this setting change/confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. 3161a (see FIG. 249) is performed (step S33301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a two-dimensional code display process to display the setting change/confirmation history information read in step S33301 and the generated two-dimensional code 3161a in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A in the manner shown in FIG. 249, for example. Execute (step S33302).

After executing the two-dimensional code display process in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 is in a ready state in which it can accept data clear requests, cursor movement (page break) requests, and process return requests based on the operations of the main button 662 and select button 664. to move to. The main button 662 is a button for requesting processing return. The select button 664 is a button for requesting cursor movement (page change). Furthermore, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be issued.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the sub CPU 201 performs steps S33303 to S3305. Note that in FIG. 247, the processes from step S33056 to step S33064 shown in FIG. 216 are omitted, but in order to perform these processes, the process shown in FIG. The processing of steps S33056 to S33064 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 247, after the two-dimensional code display process in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S33303 whether "clear" has been determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with "Clear" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 249), , the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" has been determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" has been determined (YES in step S33303), the sub CPU 201 executes a setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33304), and moves to step S33306. The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process described above is a process for erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history data stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see FIG. 222). On the other hand, if "clear" is not determined (NO in step S33303), the process moves to step S33305.

In step S33305, the sub CPU 201 determines whether "return" has been determined. The operator presses the main button 662 with "Back" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 249). Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" has been determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" has been determined (YES in step S33305), the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S33306), and ends the setting change/confirmation history process. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S33305), the process moves to step S33303 and continues the processing from step S33303 onwards.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" has been determined (YES in step S33303), the sub CPU 201 displays the setting change/confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 3161a (see FIG. 249). You may also clear it. In this case, pachinko game machine A is displaying the two-dimensional code 3161a, but since it has not obtained the authentication result, it is not possible to clear the setting change/confirmation history information regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. It is now possible to do so.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 and server device 3240 of the gaming system 3210 according to Modification 3. This process is started on the condition that the two-dimensional code 3161a displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220.

When the two-dimensional code 3161a is photographed with the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, the control unit 3221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing, and displays two images on the display operation unit 3222 based on the image data in the manner shown in FIG. 251, for example. Two-dimensional code reading and display processing for displaying the dimensional code 3222a is performed (step S33401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, the control unit 3221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and URL contained therein, and temporarily stores the information in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. A two-dimensional code acquisition process to be held in a specific manner is executed (step S33402). Next, the control unit 3221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays a password input screen (see FIG. 252), and executes a password input display process to accept a password (step S33403).

After executing the password input display process in step S33403, the control unit 3221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 cooperates with the server device 3240 and performs the password authentication process through the following steps S33404 and S33405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 first monitors whether or not a password has been entered in the password display field 3222c (see FIG. 252) (step S33404), and then presses the button from the numeric keypad 3222b. Performs processing to accept password input. Here, if a password is input (YES in step S33404), control unit 3221 transmits the input password to server device 3240.

The server device 3240 compares the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 with a registered password registered in advance, and determines whether authentication is OK or NG depending on whether the two match. The server device 3240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of the above determination result. In this way, in this embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 3240. In other words, server device 3240 returns only the authentication result to portable wireless communication terminal 3220.

In response, after transmitting the input password accepted in step S33404, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 waits for notification of the authentication result from the server device 3240, and determines whether the notified authentication result is OK or NG. It is determined whether the password is correct depending on whether the password is correct or not (step S33405).

Here, if it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S33405), the control unit 3221 performs authentication NG display processing to display a message etc. indicating that the password is NG on the display operation unit 3222 ( Step S33410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "Your password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the message field 3222d.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the password is correct (YES in step S33405), the control unit 3221 sets the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily held in step S33402 to be displayed on the display operation unit 3222. Change/confirmation history display processing is performed (step S33406). In this setting change/confirmation history display process, the control unit 3221 displays display information in which the setting change/confirmation history information held in step S33402 is embedded (arranged) in accordance with a preset display format. Based on this display information, setting change/confirmation history information is displayed on the display operation unit 3222 (see FIG. 253).

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in pachinko gaming machine A of gaming system 3210 according to modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 249, in the pachinko game machine A, the sub CPU 201 displays setting change/confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S33302) in FIG. A setting change/confirmation history screen including the two-dimensional code 3161a is displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 3161a displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen 116g is a combination of the setting change/confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. Contains.

Note that when displaying the two-dimensional code 3161a in the two-dimensional code display process of step S33302 (see FIG. 247), the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, "*Two-dimensional code on a mobile terminal" in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A. It may also be configured to display a message prompting the user to switch to the authentication service, such as "Please scan and access the authentication service."

FIG. 250 is a flow diagram illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation procedure for setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to modification 3. This setting value confirmation procedure will be explained at the end of this embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 251 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to Modification 3. The portable wireless communication terminal 3220 displays a two-dimensional code 3222a as shown in FIG. 251 on the display operation unit 3222 in the two-dimensional code reading and display process of S1101.

FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to the third modification. In the password input display process in step S33403 (see FIG. 248), the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 252 on the display operation unit 3222.

As shown in FIG. 252, the password input screen includes a numeric keypad 3222b having keys "0" to "9", "*", and "#", and a password display field 3222c that displays the password input using the numeric keypad 3222b. , a message field 3222d is displayed. The message field 3222d displays a message prompting the user to enter a password, such as "*Please enter your password. After entering the password, the setting value will be displayed." In the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, on the password input screen shown in FIG. 252, a password converted to hidden characters "*" can be displayed in the password display field 3222c in which the password has been entered by operating the numeric keypad 222b.

FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. 253, the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g displays the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily held in step S1102 in a manner similar to the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218, for example. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 253, in the setting change/confirmation history information, setting values are displayed in correspondence with the setting change/confirmation date and time.

In the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the above-mentioned display format, the display format of the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. Supported. As a result, the control unit 3221 operates the enter button and select button displayed on the display operation unit 3222 together with the setting change/confirmation history information during the setting change/confirmation history process in FIG. 248 and after the setting change/confirmation history process. Transition to a receptive state in which page update requests based on the page can be accepted.

After transitioning to the receivable state, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 determines whether a page update operation has been performed (step S33407). To determine whether a page update operation has been performed, if it is determined that the select button has been operated and the last row has been reached, it is determined that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33407), and the page update operation is performed. The process is executed (step S33408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button has been operated and a page update operation has been performed (that is, as long as the select button has been operated and it is determined that the last row has been reached), the page continues scrolling. Update processing is performed (step S33408).

If the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S33407), that is, if it determines that the operation of the select button has been stopped and the determination button has not been pressed, the process moves to step S33409. If it is determined in this step S33409 that "return" has been determined (YES in step S33071), the control unit 222 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S33410) and ends the setting change/confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" has not been determined (NO in step S33409), the control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine A side converts the setting change/confirmation history information as so-called raw data into a two-dimensional code and displays it in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A. (See steps S33301 and S33302 in FIG. 247), the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 side photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A, and displays setting change/confirmation history information. Processing to return to raw data is being performed (see steps S33401 and S33402 in FIG. 248).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped with a function to read and analyze two-dimensional codes as standard equipment.

Regarding this point, in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, a dedicated application is installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and this dedicated application enables display in the same display format as the pachinko gaming machine A side. .

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, even if the setting change/confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it cannot be viewed in the same display format as on the pachinko machine A side. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize setting change/confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, by installing and using a dedicated application on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, sufficient confidentiality is maintained such that only authorized persons can view the setting change/confirmation history information with setting values. It is possible to ensure sex.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained is imported into the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, but the data is displayed in the display format shown in FIG. 253 according to the display format of the dedicated application. It will be displayed as follows. Therefore, unless you have a dedicated application that has the display format, even if you read it with a general-purpose barcode reader, you will not be able to understand what kind of display the character string read from the two-dimensional code is. A certain level of confidentiality can be ensured. The application is distributed at the time of delivery of the pachinko gaming machine A, and can only be obtained by authorized persons.

In the second embodiment, the password is authenticated by receiving notification of the authentication result from the server device 3240, and determining whether the password is correct or not depending on whether the notified authentication result is OK or NG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 may receive a password from the server device 3240, and determine whether the input password is correct by determining whether the input password matches the password received from the server device 3240. In addition, if you want to further ensure confidentiality, the pachinko gaming machine A side encrypts the setting change/confirmation history information, generates and displays a two-dimensional code, and sends it to a dedicated application installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. The configuration may be such that a function for decrypting setting change/confirmation history information corresponding to the above encryption is added.

Next, a procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 250.

As shown in FIG. 250, as a first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine A performs a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. Displays the hall menu screen when executed. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and pressing both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. Note that the setting key switch signal can be turned on by turning the setting key 328 in one direction, and the setting key switch signal can be turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured to allow.

As a second step, pachinko gaming machine A selects and determines "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 210). ” is highlighted, and a preview of the settings change/confirmation history screen containing the settings change/confirmation history information with only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among settings change, confirmation, and viewing) displayed. Display the screen (see Figure 210) (setting values are not displayed).

As the third step, pachinko gaming machine A is operated as When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code containing the setting change/confirmation history information and URL held in the work RAM 203 is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change/confirmation history information (see FIG. 249). ).

As a fourth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko game machine A (see FIG. 251). After photographing the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 accesses a dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and enters a password from the password input screen (see FIG. 252) provided by this dedicated site. Make input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed in an instruction manual or the like by the manufacturer of the gaming system 3210 and registered in association with the gaming system 3210 or each pachinko gaming machine A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 3240 accepts the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and performs password authentication by comparing it with the registered password. Here, if the authentication is OK, the server device 3240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of this fact.

As a sixth step, if the authentication is OK in the fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 displays the setting change/confirmation history information extracted in the fourth step on a screen in a predetermined display format (Fig. 253). (Reference) is displayed on the display operation section 3222 with the content including the set value. Thereby, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm this setting change/confirmation history information along with the setting values on the screen displayed on the display operation section 3222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220.

As described above, the pachinko game machine A according to the second embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 16A that displays various images, a main button 662 and a select button 664 that are operation sections that accept various operations, and controls related to the game. The control unit includes a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16A, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16A. The display control section includes a setting switch 332 that enables the data transmission, and a data transmission means that transmits various data to the display control section. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that can store and hold written information, and an RTC 209 that measures date and time. When the data received by the data receiving means is a setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, setting value, and date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information, and Equipped with a setting display function that displays the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A, and with the setting display function displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data, It has a configuration in which setting change/confirmation history information is displayed as a two-dimensional code when a certain main button 662 is operated.

With this configuration, setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date and time data from the sundial and time means are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change and confirmation history information, so that settings changes or setting confirmations and date and time data are displayed. , when the main button 662 is operated, the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed using a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 reads the two-dimensional code and allows display after password authentication, only authorized persons who know the specified password can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, it is not only possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also whether or not there is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine A according to the second embodiment, when the setting display function displays the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the sub CPU 201 stores the displayed date and time data in the work RAM 203 as the viewing history. The browsing history may be stored in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A and displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A.

With this configuration, when setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. Can be done. Therefore, it is not only possible to determine whether an unnatural operation has been performed, but also whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine A according to the second embodiment uses a mobile wireless communication terminal based on information from a predetermined server device 3240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. A configuration may be adopted in which setting change/confirmation history information is displayed on the communication terminal 3220.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from the predetermined server device 3240, such as a predetermined password, and the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 Setting change/confirmation history information can be displayed on the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 on the condition that the passwords entered match. Therefore, since authentication can be performed using a password known only to an authorized person, there is no need to add an input means for identifying an authorized person to the pachinko gaming machine A side, and costs can be reduced. Note that this password is shown when the pachinko game machine A is delivered to the hall, and is used only by authorized persons when changing or confirming the settings.

Furthermore, the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine A and a server device 3240 that is connected to the network 3230 and manages a site for authentication, and the pachinko gaming machine A includes: The server device 3240 further has a generation function that generates a two-dimensional code of the setting change/confirmation history information and the site URL stored in the work RAM 203, and the server device 3240 combines the password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 with a preset password. The mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 has an authentication service device that performs comparison and authentication, and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the authentication result. a camera unit that captures an image of the two-dimensional code displayed on the screen; an extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change/confirmation history information and URL; and an input unit that displays a password input screen for entering a password. a screen display control unit, an authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the password entered on the password input screen to the server device 3240 based on the URL and obtains the authentication result notified from the server device 3240, and when the obtained authentication result is correct. , and a history information display control section that displays setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation section 3222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the second embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine A with the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and after authentication by the server device 3240, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 You can display setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, only an authorized person who knows the specified password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, which not only makes it possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also allows unauthorized persons to You will be able to judge whether or not there is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the second embodiment, only an authorized person can save and display setting change/confirmation history information, so it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding setting values has been performed. Moreover, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine A and a game system 3210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

The gaming machines according to each embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including their functions and effects. However, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and includes various embodiments without departing from the gist of the present invention as described in the claims.

[Example of application to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the second embodiment can also be applied to pachi-slot. When the invention according to the second embodiment is applied to a pachislot machine, the procedure for executing the setting change process and the setting confirmation process is different from that of a pachinko game machine.

In the pachislot machine, when the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is OFF, the setting change process is started and the setting value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or the setting key is turned from ON to OFF, the setting change is finalized.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachislot machine inputs the signal generated from the setting switch by operating the setting key when the above-mentioned setting change has been made, and then inputs the signal generated by the setting switch when the start lever is operated. When the sub CPU receives a signal indicating that the setting has been changed, it transmits data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value to the sub CPU. Note that the main CPU of the pachi-slot machine constitutes a control unit that performs control related to the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes data transmitting means for transmitting various data to the display control section.

On the other hand, if the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that a setting change has been made, the sub CPU receives operation type information indicating a setting change (information indicating a setting change) and an RTC. The date and time data that is currently being clocked, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command was received, is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change confirmation history information. The pachi-slot sub CPU constitutes a display control section that controls the display on the display section. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means that receives various data from the data transmitting means.

In Pachislot, checking the setting value means operating the setting key (rotating it to the right) and displaying the current setting value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. . In this manner, the pachi-slot machine 1 moves to the setting confirmation process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is ON, and the setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The pachi-slot setting switch constitutes a setting means that allows setting values to be changed or confirmed together with the main CPU.

In order to be able to display the history of confirmation of setting values, the main CPU confirms the setting values by the above-mentioned operation, and when the signal generated from the setting switch is input by operating the setting key, the main CPU confirms that the setting values have been confirmed. data representing the current setting value and a setting confirmation command that is the current setting value are sent to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, if the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, the sub CPU receives operation type information (information indicating setting confirmation) indicating that the setting value is confirmed; The date and time data currently measured by the RTC, that is, the date and time data at which the setting confirmation command representing that the setting value was confirmed was received, is stored as setting change confirmation history information in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory. This work RAM 203 is capable of storing and retaining written information even in a non-energized state.

The sub CPU that receives the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. When the sub CPU determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hall menu display process to display a hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device included in the pachislot machine. The hole menu screen displayed in the pachislot machine replaces the "prize ball information" displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Although there are some minor differences such as the display of "total medal information," the screen is basically the same as the hall menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. be.

In Pachislot, viewing refers to operating the settings key (turning to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the LCD device. On the condition that the main button is pressed in the state where the main button is pressed, setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed as, for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen.

Note that the sub CPU of the pachislot machine executes the same processes as those executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, such as hall menu processing, setting change/confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. be able to. In addition, when the embodiment of the pachinko game machine is applied to a pachislot, the hole menu screen, setting change/confirmation history screen, error information history screen, guide menu screen, password request screen, input A screen similar to the screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate or the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal is displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device or on the mobile wireless communication terminal.

Note that in pachislot, when a "bonus win" is determined by a bonus lottery, one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by a bonus distribution lottery. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by a bonus allocation lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursor game. You can.

Furthermore, in pachislot, when a precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played, a "BB precursor flag" is turned on. In other words, the "SBB" and "BB" precursor games are managed by the "BB precursor flag." However, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB" are provided. In this case, the effect of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" may be different from the effect of the precursor game corresponding to "BB".

In addition, in pachislot, the first ART ("SBB", "BB", "RB") and the second ART end on the condition that the number of stay games has been played, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in pachislot, the number of staying games for "SBB" in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, "100", and similarly to "BB", the number of games added to the number of staying games during "SBB" may be fixed. A configuration in which the values are added (added) may also be used.

Furthermore, in pachi-slot, the number of games in which additional effects A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to "2", for example. That is, when the additional effects A, B, and C are determined, the additional effect game number counter may be set to "2." However, the number of games in which the additional effects A, B, and C are performed may be made variable. For example, the value set in the additional bonus game counter may be set differently depending on the type of additional bonus effect (additional bonus A, B, C).

In addition, in the case of pachislot, the number of staying games for the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games, such as "50", or alternatively, a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, , 1 set "50 games"), the number of games of the second ART may be set as a plurality of sets determined by a lottery. For example, the number of staying games for the second ART may be set to two sets of ``50'' games in one set, ie, a total of ``100'' games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets in which the stop order is not notified and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. Further, a lottery for the number of additional games may be performed for each game during this predetermined period. Then, before this predetermined period ends (if this predetermined period is to end when the number of games reaches a predetermined number of games, before this predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the sequential push If a stop operation (irregular press) is performed in , the predetermined period is forcibly ended, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by 1 for each game from the game following the game in which the irregular press was performed. You may.

Furthermore, in the case of pachislot, the rotary accessory unit 122 having the rotating accessory 123 rotated by the driving of a stepping motor has been described as an example of an accessory provided in a pachinko game machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, up-down direction, or front-back direction by, for example, driving a stepping motor or a solenoid.

[3. Pachinko gaming machine according to third embodiment]
[Example of expanding game play using small winning games, etc.]
The pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention and the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment have been described above, but the game properties are expanded as follows using, for example, a small winning game. Also good. That is, both the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment basically have a game feature that increases the number of balls paid in the jackpot game state, but in addition to this, Alternatively, the game may be such that the frequency of execution of the small winning game is increased in a specific gaming state to increase the number of balls put out. Below, a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment will be described in which the execution frequency of small winning games is increased in a specific gaming state to increase the number of balls put out.

The pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment includes a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see, for example, FIGS. 5 to 7 and FIGS. 14 to 17), and a block diagram showing the main control circuit (see, for example, FIG. 9). , a winning random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 (for example, see FIG. 11), a symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 (for example, see FIG. 12), and Although it has a structure that is partially different from the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment described above, such as the jackpot type determination table (for example, see FIG. 13) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100, the following points are not particularly mentioned. is almost the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. Further, the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment may have a setting function similarly to the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

Note that the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment can adopt various variations of embodiments, so the explanation will be divided into the first to eighth embodiments. However, regarding the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, the explanation will focus on the different configurations from the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment described above, and unless otherwise mentioned, the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment It has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment. Therefore, a description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

In this specification, the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be referred to as the pachinko game machine of the first example of the third embodiment (the second example to the eighth example will also be referred to as the pachinko game machine of the first example of the third embodiment). The same shall apply).

In addition, regarding each of the pachinko gaming machines of the second to eighth embodiments, the explanation will focus on the configurations that are different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and unless otherwise mentioned, the pachinko gaming machines of the first embodiment It has a similar configuration. Therefore, a description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted.

In addition, in explaining each of the pachinko machines of the first to eighth embodiments, the same members as those of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals even if the arrangement positions are different. are doing. For example, a large winning opening 540 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (for example, see FIG. 5) and a large winning opening 540 provided in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (for example, see FIG. 254 described later) Although the placement positions are different, since both are big winning openings, they are given the same symbol.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment]
FIG. 254 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

(Exterior configuration)
The pachinko game machine of the first embodiment includes an attacker unit 5000 in place of the attacker unit 500 of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment. This attacker unit 5000 includes a first starting opening 5442, a small winning opening 5400, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small winning opening that drives the small winning shutter 6100. While it is equipped with a solenoid (not shown), it is not equipped with the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600. As shown in FIG. 254, the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20 and on the upstream side of both the attacker unit 5000 and the passage gate 49. It is provided. The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the small winning prize opening 5400 is, for example, 15 balls.

Similar to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the special electric accessory 600 allows (or easily) allows a game ball to enter the big winning hole 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the big winning hole solenoid. ), and a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the big prize opening 540 (or difficult).

The game ball hit to the right collides with the buffer member 950, thereby weakening the momentum of the game ball. Then, the game ball whose momentum is weakened by colliding with the buffer member 950 falls above the shutter 610.

In addition, the first starting opening 5442, the small winning opening 5400, the small winning shutter 6100, and the small winning opening solenoid (not shown) do not necessarily need to be integrated into a unit, and each may be a separate body. Alternatively, only some of these (for example, the small hit winning opening 5400, the small winning shutter 6100, and the small winning winning opening solenoid) may be unitized.

Further, the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is configured such that all or most of the game balls pass through the passage gate 49 when the game balls are fired toward the right side area (hit to the right). Similar to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, the passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball passes through, and in the time-saving game state, the passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination. The player enters an electric support state in which it becomes easier to win the game ball. On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, unlike the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, even if it is in a non-time-saving game state that is not an electric support state, it is not as strong as the time-saving game state. However, a game ball hit to the right is relatively configured to enter the second starting port 440 (at least, a game ball hit to the left that is fired toward the left side area enters the first starting port 440). (It's much easier than winning 5442). However, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the number of prize balls paid out is one ball.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20 (for example, see FIG. 5). In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, a normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged between the big winning opening 540 and the small winning opening 5400 (that is, between the shutter 610 and the small winning shutter 6100). . This normal electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body that integrates a second starting port 440, an out port 450, and a normal electric accessory 460, similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. They do not necessarily need to be unitized; each may be separate, or some of them (for example, only the second starting port 440 and the normal electric accessory 460 may be unitized).

The normal electric accessory 460 replaces the blade member 4620 of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above and is movable forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 to move the game ball to the second starting port 440. It is equipped with a movable shutter 4650 that can change the ease of winning a prize, or change the mode in which it is impossible to win a game ball into the second starting port 440 and the mode in which it is possible. The normal electric accessory 460 also includes a starting port solenoid (not shown) and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starting port solenoid to the movable shutter 4650.

Note that, similarly to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, the winning of a game ball into the first starting port 5442 is performed by hitting the game ball to the left, and the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 440 is, in principle, performed by hitting the game ball with the left hand. It is performed by hitting right-handed.

(Hit judgment table)
FIG. 255 is an example of a winning random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. The result of the jackpot determination using the random number value for jackpot determination obtained in the above is not determined to be a "small hit", but is determined to be a "jackpot" or a "loss" (see FIG. 255(a)). In addition, in the jackpot determination using the random number value for jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 outputs the results of the jackpot determination as "jackpot", "small hit", and " 255 (b)).

More specifically, in the jackpot determination using the random value for jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 5442, the main CPU 101 subtracts the number of jackpot determination value data from the acquired random value for jackpot determination. However, if a digit borrowing (becomes negative) occurs, it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if a digit borrowing does not occur, it is determined to be a loss. In addition, in the jackpot determination using the random value for jackpot determination acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 first calculates the number of jackpot determination value data from the acquired random value for jackpot determination. If a digit is borrowed, it is determined as a "jackpot", and if a digit is not borrowed, the number of small hit judgment values is subtracted, and if a digit is borrowed, it is determined as a "small hit". If there is no debt, it will be determined as a loss. For example, in a high probability game state (probability variable flag on), if the random number value for jackpot determination obtained when a game ball enters the second starting port 440 is 13200, then "13200 (obtained random number value for jackpot determination) - 1311 (Number of jackpot judgment value data) = 11889 ≠ digit borrowed, so the result of jackpot judgment is not judged as a “jackpot”, and is “11889 (difference between the acquired random number for jackpot judgment and the number of jackpot judgment value data)” -13107 (number of small hit determination value data) = -1218 = digit borrowed'', and the result of the jackpot determination is determined to be a "small hit". In addition, if the result of the jackpot judgment is not determined to be a "jackpot", the obtained random number for jackpot judgment will be used without using the difference between the obtained random number for jackpot judgment and the number of jackpot judgment value data (11889 above). Using the numerical value (13200 in the above example), "13200 (obtained random value for jackpot judgment) - 14418 (sum of jackpot judgment value data number and small hit judgment value data number) = -1218 = digit borrow", and jackpot The result of the determination may be determined as a "small hit."

In addition, in FIGS. 255 (a) and (b), the value of the jackpot determination data is 0-204 when the probability variation flag is 0, and 0-1310 when the probability variation flag is 1.
In (b), the values of the small hit judgment value data are 205-13311 and 1311-14417 depending on the value of the probability change flag, and although the number of data remains the same, the data values vary. However, it is not limited to this, and as an example of how to hold another data, the small hit judgment data is set to 0-13106 regardless of the value of the variable probability flag, and the value of the jackpot judgment data is 13107-13311 when the variable probability flag is 0, and the value of the variable probability flag is 1. In this case, by setting it to 13107-14417, the random number value that becomes a small win does not change depending on the state, and it is possible to reduce the types of constant data in the program, so this may be done.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the jackpot determination by the main CPU 101 using the random number value for jackpot determination acquired when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442, it is determined to be a "small hit". However, it is not necessary to set the probability of being determined as a "small hit" to 0%. For example, in jackpot determination using the random number value for jackpot determination acquired when a game ball enters the first starting slot 5442, the main CPU 101 determines that the probability is extremely low compared to the second special lottery (for example, in the normal gaming state). If the probability is within a range that it is not possible to increase the number of balls played in the game, it may be determined that it is a "small win".

(Design judgment table)
FIG. 256 is an example of a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. First, regarding the symbol determination table (first starting port), the major difference between FIG. 256 and FIG. 12 is that there is no "small hit determination value data" in the determination value data, and "jackpot determination value data" is not obtained. The problem is that the number of hit selection symbol commands that are selected when Regarding the symbol determination table (second starting port), the major difference between FIG. 256 and FIG. 12 is that the determination value data includes "small hit determination value data" and that "jackpot determination value data" is not obtained. The problem is that the number of hit selection symbol commands that are selected when

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 257 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. 13, the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the jackpot game state and the normal game state after the jackpot game ends and the jackpot game state. (Game state that is not a jackpot gaming state, the same shall apply hereinafter.) Refer to this to determine the type of jackpot, such as whether to turn on the probability change flag and whether to turn on the time saving flag in the gaming state after transitioning to the gaming state that is not a jackpot gaming state. It's a table. The major difference between FIG. 257 and FIG. 13 is that even if the main CPU 101 sets the variable probability flag to "1", it does not necessarily determine the number of time reductions to be "100"; , 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times may be determined as the prescribed number of times, and even if the probability change flag is set to "0", the time saving number of times is determined to be "100". There is a certain point.

In addition, in the pachinko game machines of the first embodiment, including the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to "1", the main CPU 101 changes from the jackpot game state. The game state after shifting to the general game state is controlled to a ``probability variable time-saving game state'' which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. In this case, the high-probability gaming state is maintained until the next jackpot is won (by the main CPU 101 using the random value for jackpot determination obtained when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). However, the time-saving game state ends when a predetermined number of time-saving games are played. Therefore, if the next jackpot is not won during the transition from the jackpot gaming state to the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state and the specified number of time-saving games have been played, the main CPU 101 will be able to determine whether the specified number of time-saving games have been played. The later gaming state is controlled to a "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" which is a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, in this specification, the low probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are referred to as the "low-probability time-saving gaming state." In addition, "time-saving game" is a variable display of special symbols, and the number of time-savers is used up regardless of whether the first special symbol is variable or the second special symbol is variable. .

(Special symbol variation time)
Next, see FIG. 258 and FIG. 259 for the variation time of the first special symbol or second special symbol performed in the first special symbol display section 73 or second special symbol display section 74 (both see FIG. 8). and explain. Although the variation time of the special symbols is not explained in detail in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, it is an important matter in the pachinko game machine of the first example.

FIG. 258 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variable time (variable display time) determination table for special symbols for a low start. FIG. 259 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variable time (variable display time) determination table for special symbols for a high start. The expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is that when determining the variation time of special symbols by referring to the variation time determination table for special symbols for low starts, It is larger when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the fluctuation time determination table of.

In the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by referring to the variation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. ). In addition, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the special Determine the variation time of the symbol.

In addition, the "Nth time" shown in the column of the number of changes of the special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. Sometimes, it is a variable display of a special symbol that may be the last in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state." In other words, it is a variable display of the special symbol of the time saving number that may be determined. For example, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, as described above, the number of time reductions is determined to be one of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100, so the 24th special Variable display of symbols, 30th variable display of special symbols, 36th variable display of special symbols, 42nd variable display of special symbols, 48th variable display of special symbols, and 100th variable display of special symbols. , the Nth special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner. Then, the variable display of the special symbol other than the Nth time is "Other than the Nth time".

When the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation time to the sub CPU 201, and also sends a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation time. The first special symbol and/or the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner over time, and the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is determined based on the symbol designation command determined with reference to FIG. 256. Execute control to stop. As a result, a jackpot determination (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") made based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 5442 or/and based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting hole 440. The result of the jackpot determination (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is derived. The control to fluctuate display and stop the first special symbol and/or second special symbol performed by the main CPU 101 corresponds to the process of step S85 (see FIG. 122) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

In this specification, the display of the special lottery result by the main CPU 101 on the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 is referred to as "derivation", and the display of the result of the special lottery by the sub CPU 201 on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example. The result of the special lottery is referred to as a "display".

The sub CPU 201 that receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101 determines whether the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Then, when the gaming state at the start of the variation of the special symbol (when the variation pattern command is received) is the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 201 determines that the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command of the first special symbol. If there is, the display control circuit 204 is controlled so that the performance content determined based on the received variation pattern command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the received variation pattern command is changed to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. If it is a command, the control (control for displaying the content of the effect determined based on the received variation pattern command on the liquid crystal display device 16) is not executed. In addition, when the gaming state at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol (when receiving the variation pattern command) is "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the sub If the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the CPU 201 controls the display control circuit 204 so that the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the control (control for displaying the performance content determined based on the received variation pattern command on the liquid crystal display device 16) is performed. Not executed.

Note that the "normal gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" were also explained in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but here again, the "normal gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" ``Time-saving gaming state'', ``High-probability non-time-saving gaming state'', and ``Low-probability time-saving gaming state'' will be explained. "Normal gaming state" is a state in which the probability of a "jackpot" symbol combination being derived by a fluctuating display of special symbols (the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a "jackpot") is relatively low, and the The game is in a gaming state without support. In the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the probability of a "jackpot" symbol combination being derived by a variable display of special symbols (the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a "jackpot") is relatively high, and the electric support is This is the game state. The "highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state" is a gaming state in which the probability of a "jackpot" symbol combination being derived by variable display of special symbols is relatively high, and there is no electric support. The "low-probability time-saving gaming state" is a gaming state in which the probability of a "jackpot" symbol combination being derived by variable display of special symbols is relatively low, but it is an electric support state. When in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" which are electric support states, the main CPU 101 outputs power from the command output port 106 to the hall computer (see FIG. 9) via the external terminal board 320. , the time-saving signal and the command are output as external output signals. Thereby, the hall computer can manage whether or not each pachinko game machine 1 is in short-time mode (during electric support). Furthermore, for example, a data display machine that is directly or indirectly connected to the pachinko machine is placed above the pachinko machine, and this data display machine also displays that the time is being shortened. is possible.

The first feature of the variation time of the special symbols in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is that when the gaming state at the start of the variation of the special symbols is the "normal gaming state", the first special symbol is The point is that the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely longer than the average time of the fluctuation time. In addition, when the gaming state at the start of the variation of the special symbol is "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the average of the variation time of the first special symbol The point is that the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is extremely shorter than the time. This characteristic point is particularly brought out by the fluctuation time when the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit" or a "loss".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, in the "normal gaming state" in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off, the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "loss". At this time, the main CPU 101 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner (long variation A, long variation B, or long variation C) for an extremely long period of time, such as 580000 msec to 600000 msec.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the pattern of the variable display of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "loss" in the "normal gaming state" is Although only three patterns, long variation A to long variation C, with different variation times are prepared, this is not possible from the viewpoint of preventing the action of firing the game ball with a right-handed shot only at the timing when the small hit prize opening 5400 is in the open mode. For example, it is preferable to prepare more patterns (for example, 10 patterns) in the range of, for example, 500,000 msec to 600,000 msec.

On the other hand, the gaming state at the start of the special symbol fluctuation is a "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" where the probability change flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF, a "high-precision time-saving gaming state" where the probability variation flag is ON and the time-saving flag is ON, or a "high-precision time-saving gaming state" where the probability variation flag is ON and the time-saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON in the "low probability time saving gaming state", when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "loss", under certain conditions, the main CPU 101 will The second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for an extremely short period of time (super-fast variation).

It should be noted that the "normal gaming state", "high probability non-time saving gaming state", "high probability time saving gaming state" and "low probability time saving gaming state" are all normal gaming states.

The second feature of the special symbol variation time in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is that the special symbol variation is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time table for high starts. In "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state,""high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," as shown in FIG. 259, when the number of changes in the special symbol is the Nth, the reach effect This is the point where a normal reach for a high start, a super reach for a high start A, and a super reach for a high start B) are performed. Incidentally, such a ready-to-reach effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 which has received the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 using a variable display of a plurality of identification symbols.

(Fluctuating display control of the first special symbol and the second special symbol)
By the way, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when both the starting memory for the first special symbol and the starting memory for the second special symbol are suspended, which starting memory is held first. Regardless of whether the second special symbol has been suspended, priority is given to canceling the suspension of the starting memory for the second special symbol (the establishment of the starting condition for the second special symbol), and the second special symbol is changed by the second special symbol display section 73. (While the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner), but in this point, the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is significantly different.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the starting conditions for the first special symbol are that even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the starting memory for the first special symbol is suspended; This is established on the condition that the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the game is in a normal gaming state (a gaming state that is neither a jackpot gaming state nor a small winning gaming state). In addition, the starting conditions for the second special symbol are that even if the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the starting memory for the second special symbol is suspended, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed. This is true on the condition that the game is not in a normal game state (a game state that is neither a jackpot game state nor a small win game state). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, even if the main CPU 101 is displaying a variable display of either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 is unable to display the start of the other special symbol. When the condition is satisfied, the variable display of the other special symbols is started, and in this case, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU 101 selects a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol represent a jackpot symbol. Processing is carried out so that it does not stop at any time.

To be more specific, when the main CPU 101 is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 displays the other special symbol. The special symbols are forcibly stopped at a symbol combination indicating a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state as described above, but in this jackpot gaming state, the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are set. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU 101 does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU 101 controls the general game. Based on the transition from the small winning gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the termination of the small winning game, a process of restarting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol starting conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU 101 does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small hit symbol, the main CPU 101 will display the variable display. Regarding the other special symbol, the LED group 73a or the LED group 74a (see FIG. 8) is displayed in a manner similar to that during the variable display, but the measurement of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

In addition, the small winning game state includes a waiting period (opening interval period) until the execution of the small winning game starts, an execution period of the small winning game of less than 1800 msec, and a waiting period after the small winning game is executed. This is a gaming state of approximately 5000 msec consisting of (ending interval period).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the main CPU 101 is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, one of the special symbols is a symbol indicating a jackpot symbol. If the combination stops, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped with a symbol combination that indicates a loss, and if one special symbol stops with a symbol combination that indicates a small hit, the other special symbol The process of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol and restarting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the small winning game state to the general gaming state (the end of the small winning game) is performed. I can't. For example, when both the first special symbol fluctuating display and the second special symbol fluctuating display are performed, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the fluctuation time of the other special symbol The timing of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the timing of the other special symbol is restarted based on the transition from the jackpot game state to the general game state (the end of the jackpot game), and one special symbol When the game stops with the symbol combination shown, control may be performed to forcibly stop the other special symbol with the symbol combination that shows a loss. Also, when both the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, one of the special symbols stops at either a symbol combination that represents a jackpot symbol or a symbol combination that represents a small win symbol. Even in this case, the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is restarted based on the transition from the jackpot game state or the small win game state to the general game state. Processing may also be performed. Furthermore, when both the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, one of the special symbols may be a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol or a symbol combination indicating a small win symbol. Even if it is stopped, control may be performed to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a symbol combination that indicates a loss.

In addition, the main CPU 101 may be configured such that if the result of either the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a "jackpot" and the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner based on the "jackpot", even if the other one is Even if the starting condition of the special symbol is established, the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit". This non-winning process is performed using the jackpot determination value in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 255) even if the random value for jackpot determination is acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. Since the data is excluded (replaced with loss judgment value data) and the judgment is made, the result of the other special lottery will be a "small win" or a "loss". For example, in a high probability gaming state, if the random number value for jackpot determination obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 440 is "650", according to the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 255), , which would normally be a "jackpot" is determined to be a "loss." However, the non-winning process is not limited to this mode, and the result of jackpot determination using the random number value for jackpot determination obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 is Even if it is a "jackpot", the process may clear the "jackpot" and make it a "loss".

Furthermore, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special lottery and the second special lottery are Both cannot be elected at the same time. For example, as shown in the special symbol memory check process in FIG. This is because no special lottery will be held based on winnings.

However, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines that the gaming state is the "normal gaming state". , "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," both the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the starting condition of the second special symbol. If this holds true, both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in this order within the same interruption process. In this way, by making it possible to perform both the second special lottery and the first special lottery in a predetermined order within the same interrupt process regardless of the gaming state, the control load on the main CPU 101 can be reduced. It becomes possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel while reducing the amount.

By the way, since it is rare that both the starting condition of the first special symbol and the starting condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the first special lottery and the second special lottery are usually executed within the same interrupt process. Only one of them (the special lottery for which the starting conditions are met) is performed by the main CPU 101. Further, when neither the starting condition of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is satisfied, the main CPU 101 does not perform either the first special lottery or the second special lottery. However, for example, in the jackpot game state, both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are stopped (that is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are stopped). In either case, the timing of the variable time is not interrupted), and if both the starting memory of the first special symbol and the starting memory of the second special symbol are suspended at the time the jackpot game state ends, the jackpot game After the state ends, both the starting condition of the first special symbol and the starting condition of the second special symbol can be satisfied simultaneously. In this case, the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery conducted within the same interrupt process may become a "big hit" at the same time. In particular, when the jackpot gaming state ends and shifts to the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" or the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state," the probability that the results of the first special lottery and the second special lottery will be a "jackpot" Since this is relatively high, it is possible that the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery conducted within the same interruption process become a "big hit" at the same time. Also, although the possibility of establishment is extremely rare compared to the above example, for example, there is no reservation in both the starting memory of the first special symbol and the starting memory of the second special symbol, and the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 When a game ball enters at the same time, or when there is a hold in both the starting memory of the first special symbol and the starting memory of the second special symbol, and after the first special symbol and the second special symbol are derived at the same time, etc. Also, it is possible that the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery conducted within the same interrupt process become a "big hit" at the same time.

Therefore, if both the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the main CPU 101 first performs the second special lottery, regardless of the gaming state, as described above. After that, processing is performed so that the first special lottery will be held, but if the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot", a jackpot flag will be set, and in the first special lottery that will be held after that, the jackpot flag will be set. I try to judge whether or not it is. At this time, if the jackpot flag is set, the main CPU 101 executes the same interruption process by executing the first special lottery as the above-mentioned non-winning process so that the result of the first special lottery does not become a "jackpot". This is to prevent the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery held within the game from becoming a "big hit" at the same time. However, instead of this, if the result of the second special lottery conducted earlier in the same interrupt process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot flag is set, the first special lottery itself is not executed and the jackpot is executed. If the flag is not set, the first special lottery may be executed. However, when the result of the second special lottery conducted earlier in the same interrupt process is a "small win", the other first special lottery is performed normally instead of as a non-winning process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a "big hit" with a relatively high profit from being canceled out by a "small win" with a relatively low profit.

In this way, even if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol. We are trying to prevent this from happening.

In addition, if the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery held in the same interrupt process become a "jackpot" at the same time, it means that after the jackpot gaming state ends, the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" There is a relatively high possibility that this will occur when transitioning to the "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state." Therefore, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the game is played by mainly winning the second starting opening 440 rather than the first starting opening 5442. It is preferable to perform the second special lottery and the first special lottery in this order within the same interrupt process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special lottery and the second special lottery may be performed in this order within the same interrupt process.

(Game flow)
In the "normal gaming state" where both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off, when the game ball that the player operates the firing handle 32 to launch toward the gaming area 20 enters the first starting port 5442. Unless a reach effect (normal reach for low start, super reach A for low start, super reach B for low start) is performed, normal fluctuations (normal fluctuation A, normal fluctuation B) of 5000 msec or 10000 msec are performed. On the other hand, if the game ball that the player operates the firing handle 32 to fire toward the gaming area 20 in the "normal gaming state" enters the second starting slot 440, the second special lottery will be held as described above. Unless the result is a "jackpot", the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (Long Variation A, Long Variation B, or Long Variation C) for an extremely long time of 580,000 msec to 600,000 msec (see FIG. 258). In the second special lottery, unlike the first special lottery, there is a relatively high probability of winning a "small hit" of about 1 in 5, but the second special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner for an extremely long time. Therefore, in a "normal gaming state," a typical player plays the game with a left-handed ball that can land in the first starting hole 5442 than a right-handed ball that can land the game ball in the second starting hole 440. I will do it.

In the "normal gaming state", when a game ball launched toward the gaming area 20 enters the first starting slot 5442, the main CPU 101 performs a first special lottery. This first special lottery has a probability of approximately 1 in 319 of winning the jackpot; otherwise, it is a loss. Then, if the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 activates the condition device and activates the accessory continuous activation device. The condition device operates on the condition that the result of the special lottery is a "big hit", and does not operate when the result of the special lottery is a "small win" or a "loss". The accessory continuous actuation device operates on the condition that the conditional device is actuated. The main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the general gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the activation of the accessory continuous operating device.

When the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. As explained in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, this jackpot game is a game in which a round game in which the jackpot 540 is in an open mode is executed over a plurality of rounds. When a game ball enters the grand prize opening 540 which is in the open state, the prize ball is paid out as explained in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. The number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game is determined by the control of the main CPU 101 based on the jackpot type determination table in FIG. 257 when the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot" as described above. Ru.

When the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 determines whether the jackpot game will be executed after the jackpot game ends based on the jackpot type (select symbol command at the time of winning) determined with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. Determine the gaming state. For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z7", when the execution of the jackpot game ends, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the jackpot gaming state to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state".

In the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," when a game ball enters the second starting slot 440, the main CPU 101 determines the result of the second special lottery. Unless there is a "jackpot", the fluctuation time is extremely high speed fluctuation of 1000 msec. In addition, in the second special lottery, there is a relatively high probability of winning a "small prize" of about 1 in 5. Therefore, in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state," and "low-accuracy, time-saving gaming state," a typical player can play the game ball to the left where the fired game ball can enter the first starting slot 5442. Rather than hitting, the game is played with right-handed hitting, which can win a prize in the second starting opening 440.

Here, for each of the general gaming states "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", special symbols are displayed for each gaming state. Expected value of the number of prize balls paid out while the number of game balls paid out is divided by the number of game balls fired (expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time [(the number of prize balls per unit time) Expected value of number of balls)/(number of balls fired per unit time)]) will be explained. Note that among the parameters that affect the "expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time", the "number of balls fired per unit time" is 100 balls per minute. Another parameter, ``the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time,'' will be described later.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned enclosed type gaming machine, the game ball as the game medium is configured to be able to be played without being ejected to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize ball is not paid out but is instead used as the game medium. data (referred to as "prize ball data" in this specification) is provided. For example, if a player enters a winning slot with 15 prize balls, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, 15 will be given as prize ball data corresponding to the 15 prize balls.

First, in the "normal gaming state", the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired is significantly higher than in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state." Needless to explain, it is obvious to those skilled in the art that the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time is much lower than 1.

Next, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the electric support state is established as described above, and it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 440 compared to the "normal gaming state". be converted into Furthermore, in the second special lottery, which is frequently executed based on winnings in the game entered into the second starting slot 440, as described above, the probability of winning a "small win" is approximately 1/5. Therefore, the main CPU 101 controls the small winning game state in which the small winning prize opening 5400 is in an open mode at an extremely high frequency compared to the "normal gaming state". However, since all or most of the game balls hit to the right pass through the passage gate 49, the second starting port 440 is almost in an open state. Therefore, all or most of the game balls hit to the right end up in the second starting port 440, and some of the game balls that reach the small hit winning port 5400 located downstream of the second starting port 440 are Although there are some loose balls, there are almost no. Moreover, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the prize ball is only one ball. Therefore, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving game state," even if the ball is hit to the right, the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of fired balls will not exceed 1 (it is less than 1). However, since winning into the second starting port 440 is facilitated, the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of fired balls does not fall significantly below 1, as in the "normal gaming state".

Next, in the "highly accurate non-time saving game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of fired balls can exceed 1. Although this is not as bad as a) "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the game ball hit to the right is configured so that it relatively enters the second starting port 440. (b) Unless the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot," the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable display (variable display) with a super-fast fluctuation time of 1000 msec; c) In the second special lottery, approximately Winning a "small win" with a relatively high probability of 1 in 5, d) When a small win game is executed, a game ball that does not enter the second starting opening 440 enters the small winning opening 5400. This is realized by the following factors: e) the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the small winning prize opening 5400 is relatively large (for example, 15 balls).

In addition, in this specification, explanations will be made assuming that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", but this is not necessarily the case. It is sufficient that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per time is the highest when controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" among the general game states.

It should be noted that it is obvious to those skilled in the art that in a jackpot game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time greatly exceeds 1.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time in the normal gaming state exceeds 1 in the "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state"; for example, In the "highly accurate time-saving game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is set to be less than 1. However, this is not limited to this, and as a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the probability that a special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" symbol combination will be derived (probability that the result of the special lottery will be a "jackpot") is It is relatively high and is in an electric support state, and the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1, the "first high-accuracy time-saving game state", and the special symbol is displayed as a variable display. The probability of deriving a "jackpot" symbol combination is relatively high, there is no electric support, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is made shorter than in the "normal gaming state", thereby awarding the number of balls fired per unit time. A "second highly accurate time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of balls exceeds 1 may be provided. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a "highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state".

As mentioned above, the main CPU 101 outputs the time-saving medium signal to the hall computer as an external output signal, but when transitioning from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," the time-saving medium signal is output to the hall computer as an external output signal. It is necessary to turn it from ON to OFF. Therefore, if the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 when the time saving signal is OFF, from the hall computer's perspective, it may be considered a "normal gaming state". Regardless of whether the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 (in this case, fraud is suspected), it is a "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state", so the number of balls fired per unit time. It is not possible to determine whether the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1. However, if a "first high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and a "second high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" are provided as the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," from the "first high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "second high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," Even if the main CPU 101 shifts to the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state of 2, it is not necessary to turn off the time-saving signal. Therefore, from the hall computer side, even if the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1, if the time-saving signal is ON, the "second high-accuracy time-saving game state" ”. In addition, if the specifications are such that the "first high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "second high-accuracy time-saving game state" occur continuously, the time-saving signal is ON in both cases. Also on the data display side described above, it is possible to notify that a series of consecutive channels are in effect. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the data display machine for the player compared to the case where the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is used.

Of the parameters that affect the "expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time," the "expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time" is based on the unit to the winning slot from which the prize balls are paid out. The expected winning value per time and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the winning slot are important factors.

The expected prize winning value per unit time to the winning hole from which the prize balls are paid out is 100 balls/minute if all of the fired game balls are won in the winning hole. However, for example, in the case of a winning opening such as the small winning opening 5400, where a prize can be won after the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the time required for the variable display of the special symbol, the winning probability of the "small winning", and The time when the small winning opening 5400 is in an open mode (a mode in which winning is possible) affects the expected winning value per unit time.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the time required for the variable display of the special symbols is as described above with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259, but the time for the small hit prize opening 5400 to be in the open mode is 1800 msec. (for example, 1700 msec).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when entering the winning hole is 3 balls for the first starting hole 5442 (same as the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment), The secondary start opening 440 has 1 ball (3 balls in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment), and the small winning opening 5400 has 15 balls (the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the small winning opening 5400). (not provided), and the general winning holes 53, 54, 55, 56 (for example, see FIG. 14) are 10 balls (same as the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment).

Returning to the flow of the game, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" after the jackpot game ends, if the time-saving game is completed without a special symbol combination indicating a "jackpot" being derived (the determined time-saving game When the variable display of the special symbols of the number of times is performed), the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state." For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z7", the number of time-saving games is 30, so when 30 time-saving games are played, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to the "high-accuracy time-saving game state". do.

Here, as shown in FIG. 257, the number of time reductions is set to one of a plurality of number of time reductions such as 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times under the control of the main CPU 101. It is determined. However, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the determined number of time-saving games may be kept secret without being disclosed by either the main CPU 101 or the sub-CPU 201 until the time-saving games of the number of time-saving games have been completed. . Therefore, the player can change from a "high-precision time-saving gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired is less than 1 to a "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls exceeds 1. ”, it is difficult to know at what timing the main CPU 101 controls the transition until the transition is made to the “high-precision non-time-saving gaming state.” Although we have described an example of transitioning from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," the above-mentioned "first high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "second high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" It goes without saying that the above-mentioned number of time saving times may be applied as the number of times electricity support is performed. In this case, even if the electric support ends, the time saving state does not change and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In this way, when the gaming state after the jackpot game is over is the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," from the player's perspective, the shorter the determined number of time-savings, the "high-accuracy non-existence gaming state." Since the game shifts to a "time-saving gaming state," the game becomes more interesting.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 257, the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", and the winning selection symbol command is one of "z0" to "z11". In either case, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a "high probability time saving gaming state" or "low probability time saving gaming state".

In the “high-accuracy time-saving gaming state,” “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state,” or “low-accuracy time-saving gaming state,” when a variable display of the first special symbol is performed and a jackpot symbol combination is derived (i.e., the first (When the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot"), as shown in FIG. 259, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time to be one of "05H" to "07H" based on the random number value for symbol determination. do. Similarly, when a variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a combination of jackpot symbols is derived in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" ( In other words, when the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot"), as shown in FIG. Decide on the crab. The main CPU 101 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation time determined in this way to the sub CPU 201. When the sub CPU 201 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101, the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, or super reach B for high start) is performed based on the received variation pattern command. It is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the combination of jackpot symbols is not derived, and the small winning symbols Even if a combination or losing symbol is derived (i.e., when the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" or "losing"), if the number of changes in the special symbol is the Nth time, then the number of variations of the special symbol is the Nth time. When the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the sub CPU 201 controls the liquid crystal display device 16 to display the same reach effect as the reach effect performed when the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot", After performing the reach effect, an image indicating a "small hit" or "loss" is displayed. However, as mentioned above, the "Nth time" shown in the column of the number of changes in the special symbol in Figure 259 is the variation display of the special symbol for the number of time savings that may be determined, so the time savings will not be used up. In the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the column "other than the Nth time" is always referred to.

In this way, when the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the sub CPU 201 displays the information on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the Nth special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. After the reach effect is displayed, if an image indicating a jackpot is displayed, the game will transition to a jackpot gaming state, and even if an image indicating a jackpot is not displayed, there is a possibility that the game will transition to a "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state." It becomes possible to perform so-called inciting performances such as this. Regarding the Nth reach performance, even if the win is a loss, for example, if a confrontation reach is executed in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other, and the current game state is "low probability time saving game state" If the current gaming state is a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," it executes a performance that ultimately results in a win, and informs the player that the gaming state to be started is " It is desirable to notify whether the game is in a "normal gaming state" or a "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state." In this case, the "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state" is the most advantageous gaming state (the most advantageous gaming state among the general gaming states) in which the player can play until the next jackpot while increasing the number of gaming media, and is the most advantageous gaming state among the general gaming states. Since a jackpot is guaranteed, a performance similar to the performance at other jackpots may be performed. Even if a jackpot has not been won, even if the performance is executed as if the jackpot has been won, the degree of advantage is higher than that of a simple jackpot, so the player does not feel uncomfortable. Needless to say, it is also possible to use a special performance that is different from the jackpot performance. Furthermore, in the variation time determination table, the variation pattern may be different between the last N-th time and the N-th time other than the last time. For example, for the Nth game other than the last one (such as the 24th game when the 48th game has been determined), whether the current gaming state is "low probability time saving gaming state" or "high probability time saving gaming state", Since it is certain that the gaming state will continue, a variation pattern is selected to display a "draw" result as a result of the performance, and at the last Nth time (such as the 48th time when the 48th time has been determined). The final performance differs depending on whether the current gaming state is "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" ("win" or "defeat"), so it is displayed. A variation pattern may be selected for this purpose.

Usually, the execution of the ready-to-win effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is determined by lottery, so there is no guarantee that the ready-to-win effect will always be executed in the "high probability time-saving game state" or the "low-probability time-saving game state." However, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the Nth special symbol variation display in the "high accuracy time-saving game state" or "low-accuracy time-saving game state" after the jackpot game ends, the sub CPU 201 Since the reach effect is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, if a reach effect is executed in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," there is a possibility that the reach effect was performed based on the result of the special lottery being a "jackpot." It has a function to indicate that there is a special symbol, and a function to indicate that it is a variable display of a special symbol that may be the last in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". In this way, the interest in the game can be increased.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the jackpot game ends, the jackpot game state is controlled to shift to the "low-probability time-saving game state." Therefore, in addition to the number of time-saving games, at least the sub CPU 201 does not disclose which of the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" and "low-probability time-saving gaming state" the gaming state will be controlled after the jackpot game ends. (For example, it cannot be determined from the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.) By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the transition destination after the time-saving game is completed is the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" or the "normal state". It is also difficult for the player to grasp whether the game is in a "gaming state" or not. If the transition destination when the time-saving game is exhausted is "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state," it is preferable for the player to have a smaller number of time-saving games, but the transition destination when the time-saving game is exhausted is "normal gaming state." In this case, it is preferable for the player to have a larger number of time reductions. Therefore, not only is it possible to save time, but also by making it difficult to grasp the destination of the game state after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to give the player an unprecedented level of interest.

In addition, as a lottery result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 enables a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as a "2R jackpot game" in this paragraph) in a manner that is difficult for the player to understand, and such a 2R jackpot game When the player wins the 2R jackpot game, it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 executes a specific performance that suggests that the player has won the 2R jackpot game. In this case, when the number of changes in the special symbol is the Nth time, when the Nth special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub CPU 201 controls the number of variations in the special symbol when the result of the special lottery is a 2R jackpot game. The liquid crystal display device 16 is controlled to display a performance that is the same as the specific performance or is difficult to grasp from the outside, and after performing the performance, an image indicating a "small hit" or a "loss" is displayed. It's okay.

By the way, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," as mentioned above, even though the small hit prize opening 5400 is in an open state with extremely high frequency, the game ball hit to the right is Since all or most of them enter the second starting hole 440 (the number of prize balls when entering the second starting hole 440 is one ball), it is almost impossible for a game ball hit to the right to enter the small hit winning hole 5400. There will be none. However, when the small winning game state is controlled, approximately 5000 msec is required for the opening interval period, the execution period of the small winning game, and the ending interval period. In other words, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," even though it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win, the game state is controlled to be a small winning gaming state with high frequency, and each time the game is This may cause discomfort to some people.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, when the small winning game state is controlled in the "high accuracy time saving game state" and the "low accuracy time saving gaming state", the small winning gaming state is changed to the small winning gaming state in this small winning gaming state. In order to reduce the player's awareness of being controlled, a ceiling suggestion performance that suggests the remaining number of time reductions is performed. This ceiling suggestion effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 260.

FIG. 260 is an example of a flowchart illustrating the small winning performance process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the performance mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 130). As explained in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, this performance mode determining process includes the scenario presetting process (see FIG. 138) and the performance determining process (see FIGS. 142, 144, 147, and 149). , advance look effect selection process (see Figure 153), background change control process (see Figure 157), background change possible number of consecutive changes determination process (see Figure 158), variation scenario determination process (see Figure 161), chance up control process (see Figure 157), 162), pending change determination processing (see Fig. 163), character lamp effect control processing (see Fig. 165), and full screen effect control processing (see Fig. 166). In the gaming machine, the performance processing at the time of winning a small hit also constitutes the above-mentioned subroutine processing.

Referring to FIG. 260, sub CPU 201 determines the current gaming state when the result of the special lottery is a "small win", and when the current gaming state is "normal gaming state" (YES in step S1001). ), no special performance indicating that the result of the special lottery is a "small win" is performed, and the small win winning performance process is ended. In addition, when the current gaming state is a "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" (YES in step S1002), a small winning effect indicating that the result of the special lottery is a "small winning" (step S1003) is executed. At this point, the small hit winning presentation process is completed. In addition, when the current gaming state is neither the "normal gaming state" nor the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", that is, the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "small It is determined whether the variable display of the special symbol performed based on "hit" is the above-mentioned variable display of the N-th special symbol (step S1004). In the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving game state," when the number of changes in the special symbol is other than the Nth time (NO in step S1004), the sub CPU 201 performs a ceiling suggestion effect (step S1005). This ceiling suggestion performance is a performance that suggests the remaining number of time reductions. On the other hand, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving game state," when the number of changes in the special symbol is the Nth time (YES in step S1004), the sub CPU 201 performs a ceiling suggestion effect (step S1005). Without doing so, the performance processing when winning a small hit is ended. By the way, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving game state," when the number of variations of the special symbol is other than the Nth time, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time to be "19H" and performs corresponding operations. The variable pattern command "83H19H" is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for 1000 msec, thereby deriving that the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit". Therefore, the sub CPU 201, which has received the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101, executes the above-mentioned ceiling suggestion effect after displaying a super fast fluctuation effect of 1000 msec on the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, the sub CPU 201 executes the above-mentioned ceiling suggestion performance during the small winning game state of 5000 msec.

As a result, even if the game is frequently controlled to a small winning game state in which winning of the game ball is hardly expected, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that may be given to the player each time.

In addition, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," when the number of changes in the special symbol is the Nth time, when the Nth special symbol variation display ends, "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming There is a possibility of transitioning to "state". Then, when the Nth special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special lottery is determined to be a "small win", the small win game is activated under the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". There is a possibility that it will be executed. In addition, even if the Nth special symbol fluctuating display is finished, even if it does not shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", when the Nth special symbol fluctuating display is being performed, the reach Since the effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, or super reach B for high start) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the player's awareness of the fact that the game is controlled to a small winning gaming state is reduced. It is thought that Therefore, in the ``high-accuracy time-saving game state'' and the ``low-accuracy time-saving game state'', when the number of changes in the special symbol is the Nth time, ceiling suggestion performance suggesting the remaining time-saving number is not executed. However, it is not always necessary to do this, and regardless of whether the number of changes in the special symbol in the "high accuracy time saving gaming state" and "low accuracy time saving gaming state" is the Nth time, the remaining time saving number is indicated. A ceiling suggestion effect may be executed.

In addition, the remaining number of time-saving games can be calculated by the difference between the number of time-saving games determined based on the winning selection symbol command (see Figure 257) and the number of time-saving games that have been completed. The calculation may be performed by the main CPU 101 and a command sent to the sub CPU 201, or may be performed by the sub CPU 201.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, regardless of whether it is controlled in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," when it is controlled in the small winning gaming state, In this small winning game state, a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests the remaining number of time savings is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is either one of the "high probability time saving gaming state" and the "low probability time saving gaming state". It may be configured to be executed only in.

In addition, the above-mentioned effect that suggests the remaining number of time reductions may be a confirmation effect that determines the remaining number of time reductions, for example, "There is an 80% possibility that the remaining number of time reductions is 10." , it may be a performance that shows the possibility.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the probability of winning a "small hit" in the second special lottery is about 1/5, so it is possible to enter the "high probability time saving game state" or/and the "low probability time saving game state". In the "state", if an effect suggesting the number of remaining time reductions is performed every time the small winning game state is controlled, the player may feel annoyed.

Therefore, when the small winning game state is controlled, the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery in which, for example, you win at 1/3, and only when you win this lottery, a performance that suggests the number of remaining time reductions is performed. The processing may be performed by the sub CPU 201. In addition, if you use up the number of time-saving games in the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", you will transition to the disadvantageous "normal gaming state", so there is a ceiling in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". The execution probability of the performance may be changed. For example, if it is a ``high-accuracy time-saving game state'', the ceiling suggestion effect is executed at one-fifth of the time when a small winning game is executed, and when it is a ``low-accuracy time-saving gaming state'', the ceiling suggestion effect is executed at one-twentieth of the time when a small winning game is executed. In that case, the probability that a ceiling suggestion effect will occur in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is four times that of the "low-accuracy time-saving game state", and if If the transition ratio is, for example, 50%, the expected level of staying in the "highly accurate time-saving gaming state" when the ceiling suggestion effect occurs is 80%, and even if the ceiling suggestion effect occurs and the number of time savings is exhausted. However, the frequency of transition to the "normal game state" can be reduced, and it is possible to enjoy the game with interest when the ceiling suggestion performance occurs. In addition, since ``ceiling suggestion effect occurrence = ``high-accuracy time-saving gaming state'' is not confirmed'', a jackpot occurred during the ``high-accuracy time-saving gaming state'' without transitioning to the ``high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state''. It is also possible to achieve the effect of not giving a sense of loss.

In addition, the winning probability of the above-mentioned production lottery is changed according to the number of time reductions (hereinafter simply referred to as the "number of time reductions" in this paragraph) determined based on the winning selection symbol command (see Figure 257). You can do it like this. For example, if the number of time reductions remaining is 24, a performance that suggests the number of time reductions remaining will be executed with a 1/5 probability, and if the number of time reductions is 30, it will be executed with a 1/6 probability, and the number of time reductions remaining will be If the number of time savings is 36 times, it will be executed with a 1/7 probability, if the number of time savings is 42 times, it will be executed with a 1/8 probability, and if the number of time savings is 48 times, it will be executed with a 1/9 probability. , if the number of times of time saving is 100, it may be executed with a probability of 1/10. In this way, by making the execution frequency of the effect that suggests the remaining number of time reductions change depending on the number of time reductions remaining, the reliability of the suggested remaining number of time reductions can be increased from the execution frequency of the effect that suggests the remaining number of time reductions. It becomes possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing, and it becomes possible to further reduce the player's awareness of being controlled to a small winning game state.

In addition, when the time-saving games determined in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" are completed, the transition to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is made, especially when the number of time-saving games is different each time, at what timing? Since the player does not know whether the game will be shifted to the first advantageous gaming state, the player may become suspicious and lose interest. Therefore, when controlling the main CPU 101 to enter the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," it transmits a command indicating the determined number of time-savings to the sub-CPU 201, and the sub-CPU 201, which has received this command, switches to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state." It is preferable to display on the liquid crystal display device 16 the timing of transition from the state to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state." The timing of transition from the "highly accurate time-saving gaming state" to the "highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state" may be displayed by displaying the determined number of time-savings, but in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, , the approximate timing of transition from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is displayed as an index. That is, the number of time savings may be displayed as is, but the number of time savings may not be displayed as is, but a rough estimate may be displayed. Below, with reference to FIG. 261, an index production process that indicates the approximate timing of transition from the "highly accurate time-saving gaming state" to the "highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state" will be described.

FIG. 261 is an example of a flowchart of the index rendering process executed by the sub CPU 201.

Referring to FIG. 261, sub CPU 201 first determines whether the jackpot gaming state has ended, that is, whether or not it has received a jackpot gaming state end command from main CPU 101 (step S2001). If it is determined that the jackpot gaming state has not ended, including the case where the jackpot gaming state is not controlled (NO in step S2001), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S2008, which will be described later.

When it is determined that the jackpot gaming state has ended (YES in step S2001), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the destination gaming state is the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or not. ” (step S2002).

On the other hand, if the destination gaming state is not the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" (NO in step S2002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the indicator flag is on (step S2015), and the indicator flag is on. If so (YES in step S2015), the index flag is turned off (step S2016), and the index rendering process ends. Further, if the index flag is not on (NO in step S2015), the index rendering process is ended after performing the process in step S2016.

The indicator flag is a flag that is turned on when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived. The reason why such an indicator flag is provided is that when a "jackpot" is derived, the system is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, but when this jackpot gaming state ends and the system is controlled to a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" again. This is to ensure that the continuation starts from the indicator that was displayed when the "jackpot" was derived in the previous "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", but there is a method of processing using such an indicator flag. is an example, and is not limited to this.

If the destination gaming state is the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" (YES in step S2002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command indicating the number of time-savings has been received (step S2003). Upon receiving the command indicating the number of time reductions (YES in step S2003), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the index flag is on (step S2004).

If the indicator flag is on (YES in step S2004), the indicator stored in the main RAM 103, that is, the indicator that was displayed when the "jackpot" was derived in the previous "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is displayed. is displayed (step S2005), and the index flag is turned off (step S2006). Once the index flag is turned off, the process moves to step S2008.

On the other hand, if the index flag is not on (NO in step S2004), the initial index is displayed (step S2007), and the process moves to step S2008. The initial index may display the determined number of time savings, but here, the number determined by lottery is displayed as a guideline for the determined number of time savings, rather than the determined number of time savings itself. Note that the initial index may uniformly display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) instead of the number of times determined by lottery.

In step S2008, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the specific condition is satisfied (step S2008). The specific condition may be, for example, a mission that is given to the player (for example, a mission such as "generate reach twice within 3 minutes"), and the specific condition is satisfied when the player clears the mission. However, a specific condition may be established when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the general winning hole, and the condition can be arbitrarily determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S2008), the sub CPU 201 subtracts a predetermined number from the current index, and updates and displays the index (step S2009). Here, the number to be subtracted may be 1, or the number to be subtracted may be changed depending on the difficulty of satisfying the specific condition, such as subtracting 3 if the specific condition is difficult to satisfy. You can do it like this. After performing the process in step S2009, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S2010. Note that even if the specific condition is not satisfied (NO in step S2008), the process moves to step S2010. However, if the specific condition is not satisfied in step S2008, a process of adding an index may be performed. For example, an index may be added when a mission given to a player is not accomplished.

However, in the process of step S2009, it is necessary to change the form of the indicator to be displayed according to the remaining number of time savings. For example, an index that is far from the remaining number of time savings should not be displayed, such as displaying 20 times even though the remaining number of time savings is 80. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 performs control to display a value close to the remaining number of time reductions. Furthermore, in the process of step S2009, the sub CPU 201 controls the index so that it becomes 0 when the determined number of time saving games are completed.

In step S2010, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol was displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 was received (step S2010).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special symbol has been variably displayed (YES in step S2010), it subtracts 1 from the current indicator and updates and displays the indicator (step S2011). When the sub CPU 201 finishes the process in step S2011, the process moves to step S2012. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display of special symbols is not performed (NO in step S2010), the process also moves to step S2012.

In addition, in the process of step S2011, by subtracting 1 from the current index even though the determined number of time-savings has not been used, the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" is changed to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state". It is not possible to display "0" to indicate a transition to . It is necessary to subtract 1 from the current index and update the display every time a variable display of a special symbol is performed, in order to let the player understand that the remaining time saving number is approaching 0, but the sub CPU 201 It is necessary to perform the process in step S2009 so that 0 is not displayed even though the remaining time saving number is not 0.

In step S2012, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived, that is, whether or not a jackpot command is received from the main CPU 101 (step S2012).

When the variable display of the special symbol is performed and a "jackpot" is derived, that is, when the sub CPU 201 determines that a "jackpot" has been derived based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S2012), the sub The CPU 201 stores the currently displayed index in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM (step S2013). Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 turns on the index flag (step S2014), and ends the index rendering process. On the other hand, if a "jackpot" is not derived (NO in step S2012), the index effect processing is ended without performing the processing in steps S2013 and S2014.

In this way, each time the variable display is performed, the indicator is subtracted and updated so that the remaining number of time-savings approaches 0, thereby changing the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to suggest to the player the timing of the transition, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 not only subtracts and displays the indicator when variable display is performed, but also adds and subtracts the indicator when a specific condition is met. It becomes possible to increase the interest in the game until the transition to the "highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state".

In addition, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," a "jackpot" is derived before the determined number of time-saving games are exhausted, and the jackpot gaming state based on this "jackpot" ends and the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state is completed again." When the main CPU 101 is controlled to the "gaming state", the main CPU 101 does not execute the control to shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" unless the determined number of time-saving games are completed, but the sub CPU 201 Displays an index when a "jackpot" is derived in the "accurate time-saving gaming state". Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the mode of the indicator changes from the continuation of the indicator that was displayed in the previous "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state." As a result, although internally the determined number of time-saving games will not be transferred to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" until the determined number of time-saving games are completed, externally, the time-saving game determined in the previous "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" will be changed. When a "jackpot" is derived without the number of time-saving games being played, it can be made to appear as if the game is continuing from the time-saving game that was played last time, and the game does not shift to a "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state." This makes it possible to reduce the sense of loss that may arise due to this.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the starting memory is based on winning in the first starting opening 5442 and the starting is based on winning in the second starting opening 440. Up to four memories can be held in each memory. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming state when the special symbols start changing is the "normal gaming state" and the gaming state when the special symbols start changing is the "high-accuracy time-saving game". The fluctuation time of the second special symbol differs significantly depending on whether the game is in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state."

Therefore, in the "normal gaming state", if the starting memory based on winning in the second starting opening 440 is suspended, unless the result of the second special lottery executed for this starting memory is a "jackpot", the winnings will be 580,000~ After the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for an extremely long time of 600,000 msec, the result of the second special lottery is derived.

As mentioned above, in the "normal gaming state", the general player plays left-handed, so the possibility that the game ball will land in the second starting hole 440 is low. However, if the gaming state shifts from the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "normal gaming state," the starting memory of four second special symbols will be suspended at the time the gaming state shifts to the "normal gaming state." This may occur. If the "jackpot" is not included in these four pending items, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol for all four items will end approximately 40 minutes later (the second special symbol Even if the starting memory (the starting memory of the fourth second special symbol) in which the variable display of is performed is "Jackpot", it will be about 31 minutes later).

Then, for example, the gaming state shifts from the "low probability time-saving gaming state" to the "normal gaming state" with four starting memories of the second special symbol pending, and the first to third symbols are pending. If the starting memory is a "lose" and the fourth pending starting memory is a "jackpot", this "jackpot" is derived from the first pending starting memory. A situation may occur in which more than 30 minutes have passed since the variable display of the second special symbol was started. It is not preferable to make the player wait for such a long time.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, similarly to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 has a look-ahead function that determines the result of the special lottery based on the information in the suspended startup memory. We are prepared. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 controls the start memory of the second special symbol when a specific condition is met while the start memory is on hold. It is determined whether or not a "big hit" and/or "small hit" is included in the starting memory of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ahead determination of the second special symbol"), and this second special symbol A command is sent to the sub CPU 201 to determine the result of pre-reading the symbols. The sub CPU 201, which has received the result of the pre-read determination of the second special symbol, based on the result of the pre-read determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101, in order to prevent the player from having to wait for a long time, It is configured to perform a forced standby suppression performance process capable of executing a forced standby suppression performance that indicates whether or not a "jackpot" is included in the starting memory of the suspended second special symbol. The forced standby suppression effect processing will be described below.

FIG. 262 is an example of a flowchart of the forced standby suppression performance process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. This forced standby suppression performance processing also constitutes a subroutine process of the performance mode determination process.

Referring to FIG. 262, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the pre-read determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101 has been received (step S1011). When the sub CPU 201 receives the result of the pre-read determination of the second special symbol (YES in step S1011), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (step S1012). If the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (YES in step S1012), it is determined whether a specific condition is satisfied (step S1013). If the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S1013), it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" is included in the starting memory of the second special symbol that is on hold (step S1015). Here, if a "big hit" or a "small hit" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that has been put on hold (YES in step S1015), a forced standby suppression performance is executed (step S1016). This forced standby suppression performance is a performance that indicates that a “big hit” or a “small hit” is included in the starting memory of the suspended second special symbol, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. This may be performed as a performance, a sound performance outputted from the speaker 24, or both a display performance and a sound performance. In this way, by performing the forced waiting suppression effect based on the establishment of a specific condition, the player is prevented from waiting for a long time, for example, 30 minutes or more after the fluctuating display of the second special symbol starts. This makes it possible to eliminate situations where people are forced to do something.

In addition, in the above, in the "normal gaming state", the forced standby suppression performance is performed when a specific condition is met, but this specific condition is such that, for example, a game ball hit to the left enters the general winning slot 53. , 54, 55, etc., it is preferable from the viewpoint of promoting gaming to set the condition to be satisfied by hitting left-handed. For example, the conditions for performing the forced waiting suppression performance may be satisfied based on one game ball hit to the left winning one of the general winning slots 53, 54, and 55. Alternatively, for example, the game may be established based on a plurality of game balls hit to the left winning one of the general winning holes 53, 54, and 55. Furthermore, in addition to winning in any of the general winning holes 53, 54, and 55, weighted conditions (for example, a game ball hit to the left wins in all general winning holes 53, 54, and 55) The above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression performance may be performed based on the establishment.

In addition, the above-mentioned forced standby suppression performance is a performance that indicates that the starting memory of the suspended second special symbol includes a “big hit” or “small hit”; The effect may be such that it is possible to distinguish whether it contains a "small win" or a "small win", or it may be an effect that cannot be distinguished.

By the way, the above-mentioned standby compulsion suppression performance is a performance that indicates that a "jackpot" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that has been put on hold by the pre-reading function of the main CPU 101. That is, this "jackpot" and the starting memory of the pre-read second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "specific second starting memory") are performed at a stage where the variable display of the second special symbol has not yet started. . Therefore, even though the sub CPU 201 performs a forced standby suppression effect indicating that the starting memory of the second special symbol includes a "jackpot", the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot". When this is the case, the "jackpot" for a specific second starting memory may be canceled out. For example, if the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" and the variable display of the first special symbol based on this "jackpot" starts and before the variable display of the first special symbol ends, a specific This is a case where the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the second start memory is started.

Therefore, after a forced standby suppression effect is performed for a specific second starting memory, a reach effect is executed by the sub CPU 201 based on the result of the first lottery being a "jackpot", and during the execution of this reach effect. When the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the specific second starting memory is started, the sub CPU 201 performs the following effect. First, the reach effect that is currently being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss. Then, after temporarily stopping and displaying the currently executed ready-to-win effect in a loss mode, the effect as if a new symbol variation was started due to the establishment of the starting condition is performed. At this time, the sub CPU 201 creates a performance that suggests that the result of the first special lottery was a loss, so that it is difficult to detect that the performance is about the same starting memory, such as a re-variation performance or a pseudo-continuation performance. It is preferable to also do this. At the same time, in performing an effect as if a new symbol variation has started, it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 perform an effect as if a variable display of the second special symbol regarding the specific second starting memory has started. . In this case, it is preferable to perform a reach effect different from the above-mentioned reach effect. For example, if the reach performance before the temporary stop is super reach performance A, the reach performance performed after the temporary stop may be super reach performance B or normal reach performance, which is completely different from the super reach performance A. This reduces the disappointment that may be caused to the player due to the "jackpot" being cancelled, even though a waiting forced suppression effect indicating that a specific second starting memory is a "jackpot" has been performed. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, after temporarily stopping and displaying the reach effect for the first special symbol that is being executed in a manner that indicates a loss, instead of performing an effect as if a new symbol variation has started, the display is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The sub CPU 201 may perform an effect as if the effect image has been switched from the ready-to-reach effect for the first special symbol to the ready-to-reach effect for the second special symbol. In other words, although the reach effect for the first special symbol is actually continuing internally, by making it appear as if the image has been switched to the reach effect for the second special symbol, It is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player due to the "jackpot" for a specific second starting memory being canceled.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled in the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 201 displays an effect image mainly based on the result of the first special lottery on the liquid crystal display device 16. Ru. Regarding the effect image based on the result of the second special lottery, it is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when controlled in the "normal gaming state", or even if it is displayed, it is not displayed in a manner that is not noticed by the player (e.g. , only displayed in a small form at the corner of the liquid crystal display device 16). On the other hand, when the control is in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the liquid crystal display device 16 mainly displays information based on the results of the second special lottery. The effect image is displayed by the sub CPU 201, and the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, or even if it is displayed, it is only displayed in a manner that is not noticed by the player. be.

Therefore, even if the result of the second special lottery is a special result when the game is controlled in the "normal gaming state", it is extremely difficult for the player to notice it. Therefore, in the "normal gaming state", when the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot", the sub CPU 201 visually recognizes the performance image based on the result of the first special lottery displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Suggestion performance is performed to suggest to the player that the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit" in a manner that does not interfere with the player's understanding. "A mode that does not obstruct the visibility of the performance image based on the result of the first special lottery displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16" means, for example, displaying it using a display device other than the liquid crystal display device 16 or emitting light. By causing the LED to emit light in a specific manner (for example, emitting rainbow light), the player is notified that the result of the second special lottery is a "big win."

However, even if the result of the second special lottery is originally a "jackpot", when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the "jackpot" in the second starting memory may be canceled. . For example, when starting the variable display of the second special symbol, a variable display of the first special symbol is being performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is a variable display based on a "jackpot". At this time, in the second special lottery for the second starting memory from which the "jackpot" was supposed to be derived, the main CPU 101 performs a non-winning process, or even if the "jackpot" is won, the "jackpot" is ” will be deleted. Therefore, even though the result of the second special lottery was originally a "jackpot", if this "jackpot" is cancelled, the suggestion effect should have been performed, but this In such a case, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of not executing the suggestion effect so that the suggestion effect is not always performed. This makes it possible to prevent the "jackpot" from being cancelled, even though a suggestive effect indicating that the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" has been performed. In addition, it is possible to execute a jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" without the player realizing that the result of the second special lottery was originally a "jackpot". becomes.

In addition, the above-mentioned forced standby suppression performance is performed only when the starting memory of the suspended second special symbol includes a "big hit" (it is not performed when only a "small hit" is included). Alternatively, it may be performed only when a "small win" is included (not performed when only a "big win" is included).

Further, the above-described forced standby suppression performance does not necessarily have to be executed under the control of the sub CPU 201; for example, the lighting mode of the second special symbol reservation display section 76 (see FIG. 8) controlled by the main CPU 101 may be changed. It may also be executed by

By the way, in the "normal gaming state", if a standby forced suppression performance indicating that a "small hit" is included in the starting memory of the suspended second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol Since the variable display is performed for a long time, approximately 10 minutes each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the small win shutter 6100 will operate and the small win opening 5400 will be in the open state. It is. Therefore, even though it is clear that a "small win" is included in the starting memory of the suspended second special symbol, when the small win game is executed, the small win prize opening 5400 is opened. A situation may arise in which the game ball cannot be placed in a prize, which may reduce interest.

Therefore, in the "normal gaming state", if the starting memory of the suspended second special symbol includes a "small hit", the sub CPU 201 recognizes that the "small win" is included. When performing the forced waiting suppression performance shown in FIG. 1, it is preferable to always perform a timing suggestion performance that suggests the timing at which the small win shutter 6100 is activated (the timing at which the small win opening 5400 becomes open). In this case, the sub CPU 201 performs the small hit winning performance process shown in FIG. 263 instead of the small hit winning performance process shown in FIG. 260. FIG. 263 is another example of the flowchart of the small winning performance process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. In the small hit winning performance process in FIG. 263, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the forced waiting suppression performance (see step S1016 in FIG. 262) has been performed in the "normal gaming state" (YES in step S1002). It is different from the small hit winning performance process in FIG. 260 in that if the judgment is made (step S1006) and the forced waiting suppression performance is performed (YES in step S1006), the timing suggestion performance (step S1007) is executed. However, everything else is the same.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability of winning a "small hit" in the second special lottery is relatively high, about 1/5, so in the "normal gaming state", the reserved second special symbol It is possible that the starting memory of a player often includes multiple "small wins." Therefore, by performing the timing suggestion effect in step S1007, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. In particular, when the gaming state shifts from the "low probability time-saving gaming state" to the "normal gaming state" with the starting memory of four second special symbols suspended, the four second special symbols that have been suspended If all of the symbols in the starting memory are "small wins", the game's interest can be greatly increased.

Note that the timing suggestion performance in step S1007 is always performed when a forced standby performance indicating that a "small win" is included (when it is determined as YES in step S1006). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a forced standby performance indicating that a "small win" is included is performed, a timing suggestion performance may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, in the "normal gaming state", if a "small hit" is included in the starting memory of the second special symbol that is on hold, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to execute a timing suggestion effect, and The timing suggestion performance may be performed only when the player wins the lottery. When performing a timing suggestion performance execution lottery in this manner, a performance may be performed that makes the player expect whether or not he or she will win the timing suggestion performance execution lottery.

Further, the timing suggestion performance described above is performed at the timing when the small win shutter 6100 is activated, but is not limited to this as long as it is possible to win a prize in the small win winning opening 5400. For example, in consideration of the time it takes for the fired game ball to reach the small hit prize opening 5400, the sub CPU 201 suggests the timing to fire the game ball before the timing when the small hit shutter 6100 operates. It is also possible to perform a performance to do so.

By the way, the sub CPU 201 performs the forced standby performance (step S1016) indicating that the starting memory of the second special symbol that is on hold includes a "small hit" while the second special symbol is on hold, and adjusts the timing. Since the suggestion performance (step S1007) is performed after the variable display of the second special symbol is started, a time difference occurs between the timing of performing the forced standby performance and the timing of performing the timing suggestion performance. Therefore, by utilizing this time difference, the sub CPU 201 performs a standby compulsory performance indicating that a "small win" is included until the small win game is executed under certain conditions (for example, general The timing suggestion effect (step S1007) may be performed only when a win (such as winning a prize in the winning openings 53, 54, 55, etc.) is established. As a result, it is possible to not only give the player a sense of tension from the time the forced standby effect indicating that a "small win" is included until the small win game is executed, but also to It is possible to increase interest by playing mini-games that try to achieve the goal.

Furthermore, as described above, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided with a look-ahead function that determines the result of the special lottery based on the information in the suspended start-up memory. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the sub-CPU 201 utilizes the look-ahead function provided in the main CPU 101, and the sub-CPU 201 executes a plurality of games (for example, a small winning game and a jackpot game) that are executed as a result of a plurality of special drawings. The game is configured to perform a premium performance control process that can execute a premiere performance as if it were one game. The premier performance control process will be explained below.

FIG. 264 is an example showing a flowchart of the premium performance control process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. This premium performance control process also constitutes a subroutine process of the performance mode determination process.

In addition, when the sub CPU 201 executes this premium production control process, the main CPU 101 selects the results of the second special lottery in the "high probability time saving gaming state", "high probability non time saving gaming state" and "low probability time saving gaming state". The variable display time of the second special symbol when is a "small hit" is determined by referring to the table of FIG. 265 instead of the variable time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259. FIG. 265 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a variable time determination table for special symbols for a high start. The variable time determination table of FIG. 265 is a table that is referred to in the "high probability time saving gaming state", "high probability non time saving gaming state" and "low probability time saving gaming state", and is a table in which the result of the second special lottery is When it is a "small hit", the variable pattern (16H, 17H, 18H) in which the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) is performed is determined with a 50% probability. , is a table in which a variation pattern (19H) in which ultra-fast variation is performed is determined with a probability of 50%.

Referring to FIG. 264, sub CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is not the "normal gaming state" (step S1021). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is not the "normal gaming state", that is, the gaming state is one of the "high-probability time-saving gaming state", "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-probability time-saving gaming state" ( (YES in step S1021), it is determined whether the variable display of the special symbol to be performed from now on is the variable display of the second special symbol (step S1022). Note that when the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (NO in step S1021), the sub CPU 201 ends the premium performance control process. The reason why the premium performance control process is not performed when the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" is because the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for about 10 minutes in the "normal gaming state", so multiple This is because there is little practical benefit in presenting games (for example, small winning games and jackpot games) as if they were one game.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol to be performed from now on is the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in step S1022), the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display from which a "small hit" has been derived. It is determined whether the display is a variable display (that is, whether the result of the second special lottery is a "small win") (step S1023). Note that if the variable display of the special symbol to be performed from now on is not the variable display of the second special symbol (NO in step S1022), the sub CPU 201 ends the premium performance control process. If the variable display of the special symbol that will be performed from now on is not the variable display of the second special symbol, the premium production control process will not be performed in the "high accuracy time saving gaming state", "high accuracy non time saving gaming state" or "low accuracy time saving gaming state". In the "gaming state", the effect mainly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is based on the result of the second special lottery, and even if the special symbols of the first special lottery are displayed in a variable manner, it is difficult for the player to be aware of it. This is because it is carried out in a manner that does not allow

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol to be performed from now on is a variable display from which a "small hit" is derived (YES in step S1023), the sub CPU 201 performs a reach effect (normal reach for high start, It is determined whether the variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which super reach A, high start super reach B) is performed is based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 (step S1024). If it is not the variable pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the ready-to-win effect is performed (NO in step S1024), the sub CPU 201 ends the premium effect control process.

When the variable pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) is in which the reach effect is performed (YES in step S1024), the sub CPU 201 stores the start memory of the second special symbol that will be displayed in a variable manner from now on, as well as the start memory of the second special symbol. It is determined whether storage is on hold (step S1025).

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the starting memory of the second special symbol is pending in addition to the starting memory of the second special symbol that will be displayed in a variable manner from now on (YES in step S1025), the sub CPU 201 will display the second special symbol that will be displayed in a variable manner from now on. Regarding the starting memory of the second special symbol that is held next to the starting memory of the symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a "jackpot" based on the result of the pre-read determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101. (Step S1026). In addition, if the starting memory of the second special symbol is not held in addition to the starting memory of the second special symbol that will be variably displayed from now on (NO in step S1025), the sub CPU 201 ends the premium performance control process.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the look-ahead determination regarding the starting memory of the second special symbol that is pending after the starting memory of the second special symbol that will be displayed in a variable manner from now on is a "jackpot" (YES in step S1026) ), and sets the premiere performance flag to on (step S1027). That is, when the results of the second special lottery are consecutive in the order of "small win" → "big win", the premium performance flag is set to on. It should be noted that if the result of the pre-reading determination regarding the starting memory of the second special symbol that is pending after the starting memory of the second special symbol that will be variably displayed from now on is not a "jackpot" (NO in step S1026), the second Since the results of the special lottery are not consecutive in the order of "small win" → "big win", the sub CPU 201 ends the premium performance control process.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol that will be performed from now on is performed, the sub CPU 201 executes the premium performance process (step S1028), and ends the premium performance control process. This premium production processing is a production that makes the small winning game state and the next jackpot gaming state after this small winning gaming state appear as if they were one advantageous gaming state (in other words, the number of winnings is higher than that of a normal jackpot game). This is a process of executing a production that makes it appear as if it is a jackpot game in which a round game is played.

When this premium production process is executed, it becomes possible to pay out the prize balls that are the sum of the prize balls that can be obtained in the small hit game state and the prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state, so in one jackpot game state A larger amount of prize balls can be paid out than the prize balls that can be acquired, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display of the second special symbol to be performed from now on is not a variable display from which a "small hit" is derived (NO in step S1023), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the variable display for the second special symbol to be performed is a variable display from which a "big hit" is derived. It is determined whether or not (step S1029).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display of the second special symbol to be performed from now on is not a variable display from which a "jackpot" is derived (NO in step S1029), it performs a loss effect (step S1032), and performs a premium effect control process. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbol that will be performed from now on is a variable display from which a "jackpot" is derived (YES in step S1029), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the premium production flag is on. It is determined (step S1030). In the process of step S1030, the result of the second special lottery changes from "small hit" to "big hit" between the previous variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol that will be performed from now on. This is a process for determining whether or not the order is consecutive.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the premier production flag is not on (NO in step S1030), the sub CPU 201 changes the second special symbol between the previous variable display of the second special symbol and the upcoming variable display of the second special symbol. It is determined that the results of the special lottery are not consecutive in the order of "small win" → "big win", a normal jackpot performance is executed (step S1031), and the premium performance control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the premium production flag is on (YES in step S1030), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S1028, executes a premium production process that is clearly different from the jackpot production in step S1031, and The production control process ends. In this premier performance processing (step S1028), the sub CPU 201 performs a performance that is connected to the performance performed in the previous variable display of the second special symbol, so it is clearly different from the jackpot performance performed in step S1031. are different.

In this way, as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," a "jackpot" is derived independently. (If a "small hit" is not derived in the previous variable display of the second special symbol), a jackpot effect is performed. On the other hand, in the "high-probability time-saving gaming state," "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-probability time-saving gaming state," the results of the second special lottery are consecutive in the order of "small hit" → "big hit." Sometimes, a premier performance is performed as if it were one game by varying the display of the second special symbol from which a "small win" is derived and the fluctuating display of the second special symbol from which a "jackpot" is derived. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it appear as if a game with a higher degree of profit than a normal jackpot game has been executed.

Although not shown in FIG. 264, after the sub CPU 201 finishes the premium performance (after the main CPU 101 finishes the jackpot game state), the sub CPU 201 turns off the premium performance flag.

Next, the control by the main CPU 101 such as the fluctuation control of the second special symbol and the control to the jackpot gaming state in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state." The relationship between the sub-CPU 201 and the control of the variation effect of decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 will be explained with reference to FIG. 266. In addition, FIG. 266 is a time chart showing the relationship between the control by the main CPU 101 and the performance control by the sub CPU 201 in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state". (a) An example of a conventional pachinko gaming machine in which the results of the second special lottery are derived in the order of "loss" → "small hit" → "big hit", (b) first embodiment This is an example of a pachinko game machine in which the results of the second special lottery are derived in the order of "lose" → "small hit" → "big hit".

As shown in FIG. 266(a), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as a "loss" under the control of the main CPU, in response to this, the control of the sub CPU 201 For example, an effect image indicating a "lose" is displayed on a liquid crystal display device. Similarly, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as a "small win" under the control of the main CPU, an effect image indicating a "small win" is displayed under the control of the sub CPU 201 in response to this. Moreover, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as a "jackpot" under the control of the main CPU, an effect image indicating a "jackpot" is displayed under the control of the sub CPU 201 in response to this. Then, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as a "jackpot", the main CPU controls the game to a jackpot gaming state. In this jackpot game state, a round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. Further, when the main CPU 101 is controlling the small winning game state, the sub CPU 201 displays a small winning effect on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the main CPU 101 is controlling the jackpot gaming state, the sub CPU 201 The jackpot effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this manner, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the control by the main CPU and the control by the sub CPU 201 correspond on a one-to-one basis.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, control by the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 266(b), for example. Specifically, when the result of the second special lottery is determined to be a "lose" under the control of the main CPU, correspondingly, the sub CPU 201 controls, for example, to display an effect indicating "lose" on the liquid crystal display device. The image is displayed.

However, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as a "small hit" under the control of the main CPU, the starting memory of the second special symbol from which the "jackpot" is derived is suspended by the pre-reading function of the main CPU 101. On this premise, under the control of the sub CPU 201, for example, an effect image indicating a "premium win" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. For example, the performance image indicating this "premier hit" indicates that more rounds are executed than the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) of the round game executed in one jackpot game state (i.e., one jackpot game state). This is an effect image indicating that there is a possibility that a larger number of prize balls will be paid out than the expected value of the number of prize balls that will be paid out in a gaming state.

Further, when the main CPU 101 is controlling the small winning game state, the sub CPU 201 performs a pseudo round effect as if a round game is being executed. This pseudo round performance is the same as or extremely similar to the performance performed during the round game of the actual jackpot game.

By the way, when executing the premiere performance, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner between the small win game state and the jackpot game state, so if this time is long, it may give an unnatural feeling to the player. The problem arises that there is no such thing. Therefore, it is important how the sub CPU 201 performs the performance between the small hit game state and the jackpot game state, that is, while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, while the main CPU 101 is displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner, the sub CPU 201 displays the second special symbol as if it were an interval between two round games. A pseudo-interval performance will be performed. This pseudo interval performance is a performance that is the same as or very similar to the performance that is actually performed during the interval between round games. As a specific example of this pseudo-interval production, for example, when the sub CPU 201 performs a "premium win display", the jackpot derived thereafter (pre-read jackpot) is, for example, a probability-variable jackpot (after the jackpot gaming state ends). Performing an effect that appears to be a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the probability variable flag is not turned on in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends), even though it is a jackpot in which the probability variable flag is turned on in the gaming state. Based on this assumption, the pseudo-interval performance corresponds to a performance that indicates whether or not a normal jackpot will be promoted to a probability-variable jackpot. By performing such a promotion effect, it is possible to attract the player's consciousness to the effect, and even if the fluctuating display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 101 is somewhat longer than the interval time, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort that may be given to the player. It becomes possible to reduce the

Then, after the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 performs a round performance that is normally performed. However, in this round production, even if the round game being executed by the main CPU 101 is actually the first round game, the sub CPU 201 does not clearly indicate that it is the first round game. It is preferable to do this.

In this way, if the results of the second special lottery in the "high probability time saving gaming state", "high probability non time saving gaming state" or "low probability time saving gaming state" are consecutive in the order of "small hit" → "big hit" In addition, by performing a series of performances in which the small win game state and the jackpot game state are controlled as if they were controlled into one premium jackpot game state, the number of round games that are normally performed in one jackpot game state is increased. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he has won a jackpot game state in which a round game is played, and to increase his interest in the game.

In addition to the above-mentioned pseudo-interval performance, as a method to solve the unnaturalness that may occur between the small hit game state and the jackpot game state (while the second special symbol fluctuates and is displayed). For example, the following methods can be considered.

For example, the opening performance indicating that a "jackpot" has been won is normally performed after the result of a special lottery is determined to be a "jackpot," but the main CPU 101 controls the opening performance to be a small-win game state. The sub CPU 201 performs an opening performance indicating that a "jackpot" has been won at a stage where the jackpot game state has not yet started, spanning both when the second special symbol is being displayed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed. You can also do this. That is, the reach effect is not performed during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the "jackpot". Even with such a method, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the small winning gaming state and the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, as a method for solving the above problem, when the result of the second special lottery in the "high probability time-saving gaming state", "high probability non-time saving gaming state", or "low probability time-saving gaming state" is a "jackpot" For example, instead of the variation time determined by the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, or super reach B for high start) (see Fig. 259), for example, reach with a probability of 50% is possible. The variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the production (Normal reach for high start, Super reach A for high start, Super reach B for high start) is performed is determined, and the variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which super fast fluctuation is performed with a 50% probability 19H). Then, when the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" and the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation is super fast, by executing the above-mentioned premium performance, there will be a gap between the small winning gaming state and the jackpot gaming state. It becomes possible to reduce unnaturalness that may occur.

In addition, although the case where the "small win" and "big win" are consecutive in the second special lottery has been explained above, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur between the small win gaming state and the jackpot gaming state. If possible, it is not necessarily limited to this, and there may be a "loss" between the "small win" and the "big win" in the second special lottery. In this case, compared to the case where "small win" and "jackpot" occur consecutively, there is a high possibility that the time between the small win gaming state and the jackpot gaming state will be longer; The difference between the small winning gaming state and the jackpot gaming state can be improved by performing the above-mentioned pseudo-interval effect or by displaying a super fast fluctuation when the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot". It is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that may occur. In addition, while the main CPU 101 is performing a variable display of the second special symbol regarding a "loss" between a "small hit" and a "big hit", it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 not display an image indicating a loss. .

In addition, in the above, a series of performances were explained as if the small hit game state and the jackpot game state were controlled as one premium jackpot game state, but this is because, for example, the performance of the special symbol corresponding symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display. This does not negate displaying the information on the display device 16. That is, normally, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays effects to be shown to the player, such as fluctuating displays of decorative symbols and performances by characters, and, apart from these, special symbols that are displayed in correspondence with fluctuating displays of special symbols. Effects such as corresponding symbols that are not conscious to the player are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The above-mentioned series of performances in which the small win game state and the jackpot game state are controlled as if they were controlled into one premium jackpot game state is a performance to be shown to the player, so it is different from such a performance. Even if the effect of the symbol corresponding to the displayed special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, there is no problem because this is an effect that the technician is not aware of.

By the way, when executing the above-mentioned premium performance control process, when the main CPU 101 controls the small hit game state, even though the sub CPU 201 has started the premium performance, the pre-reading function of the main CPU 101 may cause a "big hit". There is a possibility that the first special symbol is variably displayed and the "jackpot" is derived before the "jackpot" is derived for the starting memory of the second special symbol that is pre-read and determined to be present. In this case, the "jackpot" regarding the starting memory of the second special symbol pre-read by the pre-read function of the main CPU 101 is canceled and a "loss" is derived, which may disappoint the player. Furthermore, the display control of the already started premiere performance becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the control load on the sub CPU 201 increases. Therefore, when starting the premiere production, the sub CPU 201 uses the stored first starting memory (the first starting memory stored in step S55 (see FIG. 120)) based on the command sent from the main CPU 101. It is determined whether or not there is a starting memory that has been determined by the pre-reading function of the main CPU 101 to be capable of deriving a "jackpot". Then, when the stored first starting memories do not include a starting memory that is determined to be capable of deriving a "jackpot", the sub CPU 201 executes the premiere performance. This makes it possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player and the burden of display control.

In addition, above, we explained an example where the "small win" is derived before the "big win" as the result of the second special lottery, but if the "big win" is derived before the "small win" , it is possible to perform the following effects using the sub CPU 201.

First, the pre-reading function by the main CPU 101 is such that when the jackpot game state is controlled, " It is determined whether or not a "small hit" is included. This determination is performed by the sub CPU 201 based on a command sent from the main CPU 101. Here, if it is determined that a "small win" is included in the stored second starting memory, after this jackpot game state ends, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed and " A small hit is derived.

Therefore, before the jackpot game state ends, the sub CPU 201 performs a round-up effect that suggests that the number of rounds has increased in a pseudo manner. That is, although the number of rounds to be executed in the round game executed in the jackpot game state does not change, a round-up performance is performed to make it appear as if the number of rounds has increased due to the execution of the small win game. For example, when a jackpot game with 15 rounds is being played, if the pre-reading function of the main CPU 101 determines that the stored second starting memory is a "small win", the sub CPU 201, for example, "Plus 1 round" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

However, the above-mentioned round-up performance is performed when the game is controlled to a "high-probability time-saving gaming state", "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-probability time-saving gaming state" after the jackpot gaming state ends. This is because when controlled to these gaming states, the variable display time of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start. In other words, when the jackpot gaming state ends and is then controlled to the "normal gaming state", the variable display time of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the special symbol variable time determination table for low start. This is because it takes a long time until the "small win" is derived.

Such a round-up performance may be performed when it is determined that among the stored second starting memories, the second starting memory in which the starting condition is satisfied first is a "small hit". , Even if the second starting memory where the starting condition is satisfied first after the jackpot game state ends is "Lose", if the stored second starting memory includes "Small win", the round-up will start. It is also possible to perform a performance. Even if the second starting memory in which the starting conditions are first met after the jackpot gaming state ends is "Loss", the "high-probability time-saving gaming state", "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-probability time-saving gaming state" ”, as mentioned above, the variable display time of the second special symbol can be determined to be a super fast variable by referring to the special symbol variable time determination table for high start, so the effect on the round-up effect is It is thought that there are few.

Further, as a result of pre-reading the stored second starting memory, if "small wins" are consecutive, the sub CPU 201 may display "plus 2 round" on the liquid crystal display device 16, or may display "plus 1 round" on the liquid crystal display device 16. Round" may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and after one small winning game is played, the liquid crystal display device 16 may further display "plus one round." In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, it is possible to look ahead to a maximum of five hit determination results, including the four that are the maximum pending number in the second start memory and one that is currently changing, and at least one of them is a jackpot. , and if the other four are small wins, it is possible to display "plus 4 rounds" at most. Furthermore, if there are two or more jackpots out of five, it is possible to further increase the value of the "plus round". For example, if all of the five pending second starting memories are 16R jackpots, a maximum of 80R can be displayed.

By the way, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the sub CPU 201 performs an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, when performing the round-up performance, it is preferable not to perform the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state, but to perform the ending performance after the small-win game that is the target of the round-up performance ends. In this way, by performing the ending effect after the small winning game that was the subject of the round-up effect has ended, it is possible to increase the credibility of the round-up.

[Pachinko gaming machine of second embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to a second embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot, similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. As explained in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the type of jackpot includes the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game, the jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends, and the normal gaming state (game state that is not the jackpot gaming state, below) The same applies to whether or not to turn on the variable probability flag and whether to turn on the time-saving flag in the gaming state after transitioning to (the same), and these are determined according to the winning selection symbol command related to the jackpot. . As explained in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, this winning selection symbol command includes judgment value data and symbols acquired when a game ball hits the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. It is determined based on random numbers (see FIG. 256 for both).

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, when determining the winning selection symbol command, the main CPU 101 selects "normal gaming state," "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," and Any gaming state of the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is determined with reference to the symbol determination table (first starting opening, second starting opening) in FIG. 256.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when determining the winning selection symbol command, the main CPU 101 does not operate in the "normal gaming state" which is not in the electric support state and in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". , are the same in that they are determined by referring to the symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) in FIG. ” is determined by referring to the symbol determination table (first starting hole, second starting hole) in FIG. 267 instead of the symbol determining table (first starting hole, second starting hole) in FIG. 256. different.

FIG. 267 shows a symbol determination table (first starting opening, second starting opening) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, and shows the "high accuracy time saving gaming state". ” and “low-probability time-saving gaming state”.

As shown in the symbol determination table (first starting port) of FIG. 267, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving game state" which is the electric support state. ”, when the judgment value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 5442 is “jackpot judgment value data” (the first judgment value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 5442 When the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot"), the winning selection symbol command is determined to be "z14" with a 100% probability. When the selection symbol command at the time of winning is determined to be "z14", as can be seen from the jackpot type determination table in FIG. 257, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is always controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". be done.

That is, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" which are electric support states, the jackpot gaming state can be achieved by hitting the game ball to the left that allows the game ball to enter the first starting hole 5442. After the game ends, the game state is always controlled to be a "high-precision, non-time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1. However, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," you can benefit from electric support when you hit right-handed, but you cannot benefit from electric support even if you hit left-handed. I can't.

Therefore, when the game is controlled to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," which is the electric support state, a game played by the player playing left-handed will not benefit from the electric support. Although there is a disadvantage that it is not possible, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the right-handed game described below is always controlled to the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is a thrilling game with a high risk and high return compared to games played in the same way.

In addition, as shown in the symbol determination table (second starting port) of FIG. 267, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is in the "high accuracy time saving gaming state" which is the electric support state and the "low accuracy time saving gaming state". When the judgment value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is the “jackpot judgment value data” in the “gaming state” (the judgment value data is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) When the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot"), the winning selection symbol command is determined to be one of "z15" to "z21". That is, as can be seen from FIGS. 256 and 257, the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to be a "high-probability time-saving gaming state" with a probability of 80%, and a "low-probability time-saving gaming state" with a 20% probability. controlled by the state. In the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", if a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the determined number of time-saving games are completed without a "jackpot" being derived, the control is changed to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". Although it may happen, after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is not immediately controlled to the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state."

That is, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" which are electric support states, the jackpot gaming state can be achieved by hitting the right hand that allows the game ball to enter the second starting hole 440. The game state after the game ends is not immediately controlled to a "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1, and it is different from a general fixed variable loop game. Become.

Therefore, when the player is controlled to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" that is the electric support state, the game played by the player hitting right-handedly will be delayed after the jackpot gaming state ends. Although it is not immediately controlled to a ``high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state,'' it is possible to benefit from electric support, and compared to games played by left-handed hitting, it is a stable game with lower risks and lower returns.

In this way, according to the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, which game is to be executed: a thrilling game with relatively high risk and high return, and a stable game with relatively low risk and low return. It becomes possible to give the player the right to choose depending on the firing mode of the game ball (hitting right or left). However, it is preferable that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the final number of fired balls be the same when the player hits right-handed and when he hits left-handed.

In addition, a pachinko machine having a setting function like the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, that is, the setting of any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 6 levels) with different probabilities of "big hit" in the special lottery. For gaming machines that perform special drawings based on values, if the probability of a "big hit" is relatively low at a low setting value, or if the probability of a "jackpot" is a high setting value is relatively high. Compared to this, the expected value of a "jackpot" derived from the variable display of special symbols is low. Although it is preferable to make the expected value of the number of prize balls for the final number of balls fired the same when hitting right-handed and when hitting left-handed, the expectation that a "jackpot" is derived in this way When the value is a low setting value, the expected value of the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" is larger than when the value is a high setting value. Therefore, when the set value is low, it is better to hit left-handed than to hit right-handed when controlled to "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" which is the electric support state. , the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is high relative to the number of balls fired. On the other hand, when the set value is high, it is better to hit right-handed than to hit left-handed when controlled to "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" which is the electric support state. , the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is high relative to the number of balls fired. In this case, simply giving the player the right to choose between a thrilling game with relatively high risk and high return, and a stable game with relatively low risk and low return. Instead, it is possible to provide a new game experience in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is different depending on the set value when the ball is hit right-handed and when the ball is hit left-handed. Furthermore, by providing an effect that allows the setting value to be guessed, in combination with the above, it is possible to provide an even more interesting game experience.

As described in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that plays a game based on any one of the plurality of setting values is briefly described as follows. That is, in this type of gaming machine, the main CPU 101 includes a non-volatile storage means in which a plurality of set values having different probabilities of deriving a "jackpot" by varying the display of special symbols are stored. In addition, the main CPU 101 executes a special lottery based on any one of the plurality of setting values stored in the storage means, displays a variable display of the special symbol, and a symbol from which the result of the special lottery is derived. A variation control means is provided. The above setting value 1 is used to start and stop the supply of power from the power supply circuit to the operating means called setting keys that can be operated by the gaming machine administrator, and to the main control circuit 100 and sub-control circuit 200. The setting value can be changed by operating the power supply operating means, the backup clear switch 330, and the setting operating means for changing the set value. Specifically, it is first necessary to perform a power-off operation. Then, when the power is not turned on and the operating means called the setting key is turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch is turned on, the main CPU 101 can change the set value. Control the settings change state. In the setting change state, the main CPU 101 repeatedly displays information indicating the setting value on a predetermined display monitor each time the setting operation means is pressed. When the operating means called a setting key is turned off in the setting change state, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and sets the setting value displayed on a predetermined display monitor as the first setting value. A game is executed by the main CPU 101 based on one setting value set in this way.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to a third embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko game machine of the first example (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 268). Furthermore, the trigger for changing the special symbol variable time (variable display time) determination table is also different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

FIG. 268 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 268, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, unlike the pachinko game machine of the first example, is equipped with a passage gate 49 in the left side area (there is no passage gate 49 in the right side area). . Further, on the downstream side of the passage gate 49, in addition to the conventionally provided first starting port 5442, there is provided another first starting port through which a game ball hit to the left can win a prize. In order to distinguish between the two, for convenience, the other first starting port mentioned above is referred to as the first starting port 54421, but when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 and when a game ball enters the first starting port 54421. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same in both cases.

In addition, by making it possible to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the ease with which a game ball can enter the first starting port 54421 can be changed, or the ease with which a game ball can enter the first starting port 54421 can be changed. It is provided with a movable member 54422 that can be changed between modes and possible modes.

The movable member 54422 is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and when the normal symbol reaches a specific stop display mode (hit) in the normal symbol display section 71, it operates in the forward direction, and this movable member It is configured to guide the game ball on 54422 to the first starting port 54421 (rearward direction). In this way, the movable member 54422 changes the first starting port 54421 from a mode where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to a mode where it is possible or easy. In the electric support state, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 54422 in the forward direction to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 54421.

In the pachinko game machine of this third embodiment, the passage gate 49, the first starting port 5442, and the first starting port 54421 are configured so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through or win a prize.

Also, similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), a large prize opening 540 and a special electric accessory 600 are arranged at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20, By driving the shutter 610 by the winning hole solenoid, there is an opening mode in which it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 540, and an opening mode in which it is impossible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 540. It is configured so that it can be moved (driven) into a closed mode (difficult).

A second starting opening 4401 is arranged at the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, that is, on the downstream side of the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600. The game ball that is hit to the right and does not enter the big prize opening 540 is configured so that approximately one out of every five balls enters the second starting opening 4401.

Further downstream of the second starting opening 4401, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small winning shutter 6100 can be driven by a small winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the front direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit prize opening 5400 becomes closed, and when the small win shutter 6100 operates in the backward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit prize opening 5400 closes. It becomes an open mode. If the small hit winning hole 5400 is in the open mode, most of the game balls that do not win in the second starting hole 4401 are configured to win in the small hit winning hole 5400.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the large winning opening 540, the second starting opening 4401, and the small winning opening 5400 are configured so that a game ball hit to the right can pass through or win a prize.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the main CPU 101, like the pachinko game machine of the first example, sets the normal game state, which is not the jackpot game state, and the "high-accuracy time-saving game". The gaming state is controlled to one of the following: "state", "high probability non-time saving gaming state", and "low probability time saving gaming state". Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state to a "high-probability time-saving gaming state" or "low-probability time-saving gaming state" based on the winning selection symbol command (see FIG. 257). to control. Similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", when the time-saving time is exhausted without a special symbol combination indicating a "jackpot" being derived, the main CPU 101 executes " Control is executed to shift from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state."

Here, FIG. 269 shows the variable time determination executed by the main CPU 101 in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, upon transition from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". 3 is a flowchart showing table setting processing. This variation time determination table setting process is another example of the flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process of step S173 (see FIG. 127) executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 269, a description will be given of the variable time determination table setting process that is executed upon transition from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state." The main CPU 101 first determines whether the gaming state has shifted (step S1811). If the gaming state has not shifted (NO in step S1811), the main CPU 101 ends the variation time determination table setting process without changing the variation time determination table that is referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol. . When determining that the gaming state has shifted (YES in step S1811), the main CPU 101 determines whether the gaming state to which the gaming state has been shifted is the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" (step S1812). When the destination gaming state is the "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state" (YES in step S1812), the main CPU 101 sets the variation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 259. A special symbol for a high start is set in the variable time determination table (step S1813), and the variable time determination table setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the destination gaming state is not the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" (NO in step S1812), the main CPU 101 sets the variation time determination table to be referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol in FIG. 258. The indicated special symbol for low start is set in the variable time determination table (step S1814), and the variable time determination table setting process is ended.

In this way, a combination of special symbols indicating a "jackpot" is derived in the "normal gaming state" and transferred to the jackpot gaming state, and when this jackpot gaming state ends, a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or a "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is entered. Even if the state shifts to the “time-saving gaming state”, the main CPU 101 does not change the special symbol fluctuation time determination table, but refers to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Determine the variation time of. Then, when the time saving is completed without a special symbol combination indicating a "jackpot" being derived in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 changes the gaming state from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state". At the same time, the special symbol fluctuation time determination table to be referred to is changed from the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258 to the high start special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 259. Execute control to change to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table.

(Game flow)
Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be explained. The main CPU 101 controls the gaming state to be one of the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state";"Time-saving gaming state" is not an essential gaming state. In these gaming states, a typical player plays the game by hitting left-handed. In gaming states other than the "high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state," that is, the "normal gaming state,""high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state," and "low-accuracy, time-saving gaming state," even if you hit right, the result of the second special lottery is Unless there is a "jackpot", the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 4401 will be carried out for a long period of time, approximately 10 minutes (long variations A to C), and the player will only lose. be.

In the "normal gaming state" where players are left-handed, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" symbol combination is derived, the main CPU 101 selects the hit time selection as shown in FIG. 257. Based on the symbol command, the number of time saving times is determined to be one of a plurality of time saving times such as 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times. Further, when a variable display of the first special symbol or a variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a "jackpot" symbol combination is derived, the main CPU 101 controls to a jackpot game state. In this jackpot game state, it is possible to win a game ball into the jackpot opening 540, so a typical player plays the game by hitting the ball to the right.

When the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift the game state to a "high-accuracy time-saving game state" unless the symbol designation command is "zA5" which is selected with an extremely low probability. When the gaming state shifts to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," a typical player will play the game by switching from right-handed to left-handed. In this "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", as described above, the main CPU 101 controls the low start mode shown in FIG. The variation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA5", the main CPU 101 changes the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" without shifting to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". Control.

In the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," when the determined number of time-saving games are played without a special symbol combination indicating a "jackpot" being derived, the main CPU 101 changes the gaming state to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state." In addition to controlling the transition from "state" to "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," as described above, the fluctuation time determination table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol is changed to the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. The variable time determination table is changed to the variable time determination table for special symbols for high starts shown in FIG. 259.

In this way, in the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, and even if the player hits right, the first 2. Since the variable display of the special symbols is performed for a long period of time, such as about 10 minutes, the frequency that the small hit winning hole 5400 becomes open so that the game ball that enters the small winning winning hole 5400 becomes a prize is relatively small.

On the other hand, in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", when a game ball enters the second starting port 4401, most of the variable display of the second special symbol not only changes super fast, but also changes about one-fifth of the time. It is possible to win a game ball into the small winning prize opening 5400 with probability, and a specific state is reached in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the number of time-saving games determined based on the winning selection symbol command is not performed by either the main CPU 101 or the sub-CPU 201 until the time-saving game of the number of time-saving games is completed. will be kept secret without being disclosed. It should be noted that not only the number of time reductions but also the game state with high probability, such as the secret A stage 2002 or the secret B stage 200, as explained with reference to FIG. 136 for the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, It is preferable that the player cannot or has difficulty in determining whether the game state is a gaming state or a low probability state by looking at the display performance performed by the sub CPU 201 on the liquid crystal display device 16. The player then moves from a "high-accuracy time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls is less than 1 to a "high-precision non-time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls exceeds 1. The system is configured such that it is impossible or difficult to determine at what timing the main CPU 101 controls the transition to the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" until the transition is made to the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state." Then, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", when the time-saving game is completed without a special symbol combination indicating a "jackpot" being derived, the sub CPU 201 determines that the ceiling has been reached (the time-saving has been completed). A ceiling effect showing this is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, with an extremely low probability (when the symbol designation command is "zA5"), the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state may always be controlled to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state."

Further, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment described above, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, 54421, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 4401, In any case where the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the winning of the winning game, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is almost controlled to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", but the invention is not limited to this, for example, When the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442, 54421, there is a 10% probability that the control is set to the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state", and the second starting port 4401 When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the winning of a game ball, the game may be controlled to a "high-precision non-time-saving game state" with a probability of 50%. In this way, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 4401, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 5442, 54421. By controlling the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" with a higher probability than when Not only is a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 (high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state), but the probability that such a specific state will loop is also increased, making the game highly entertaining. becomes possible.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment and the first modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth example, a first start port 54421 is provided separately from the first start port 5442, and the movable member 54422 is connected to the transparent panel 172. Although the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 54421 is changed by allowing the game ball to move back and forth in the front and rear directions, the invention is not limited thereto. For example, a so-called electric chew such as the blade member 4620 is provided above the first starting port 5442, and in the electric support state, the so-called electric chew is activated to facilitate winning at the first starting port 5442. You may also do so. In this case, regardless of whether it is in the electric support state or not, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high starts. It is sufficient if a certain amount of game balls can enter the second starting slot so that the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1. In addition, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol will be displayed for an extremely long time (long fluctuation A, long fluctuation B, or long fluctuation C). ), even if a certain amount of game balls can be won in the second starting slot, the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of balls fired per unit time will never exceed 1.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to a fourth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment has a configuration that is partially different from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 270). Furthermore, the trigger for changing the special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table is also different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

FIG. 270 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 270, the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, unlike the pachinko game machine of the first example, is equipped with a passage gate 49 in the left side area (there is no passage gate 49 in the right side area). . Further, on the downstream side of the passage gate 49, there is a second starting port 4401, and the transparent panel 172 is made to be able to advance and retreat in the front and rear directions, thereby changing the ease with which a game ball enters the second starting port 4401. Alternatively, it is provided with a movable member 4651 that can change between a mode in which it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 4401 and a mode in which it is possible. Furthermore, on the downstream side of the second starting opening 4401, there is a small winning opening 5400, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small winning shutter that drives the small winning shutter 6100. A mouth solenoid (not shown) is provided.

The movable member 4651 is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and when the normal symbol reaches a specific stop display state (hit) in the normal symbol display section 71, it operates in the forward direction. It is configured to guide the game ball on 4651 to the second starting port 4401 (backward direction). In this way, the movable member 4651 changes the second starting port 4401 from a mode in which it is difficult to win a game ball to a mode in which it is easy to win. In the electric support state, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 4651 in the forward direction to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 4401. In addition, when the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 4401 is not facilitated (when the winning of a game ball is difficult), the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 4401 is not made easy. It is about the same level as winning a game ball to the opening 5442, or slightly more difficult to winning a game ball than the first starting opening 5442.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the passage gate 49, the first starting opening 5442, the second starting opening 4401, and the small winning opening 5400 all allow a game ball hit to the left to pass through or It is configured to be able to win prizes. Moreover, the big prize opening 540 is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize.

In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 creates a special symbol variation time determination table to be referred to when determining the special symbol variation time, as shown in FIG. Control is executed to change from the low start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 259 to the high start special symbol variation time determination table. The processing by the main CPU 101 at this time will be explained with reference to FIG. 271.

FIG. 271 is an example of a flowchart showing a variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, triggered by the end of the small winning game state.

Referring to FIG. 271, the variable time determination table setting process executed upon completion of the small winning gaming state will be described. The main CPU 101 first determines whether the small winning game state has shifted (step S1821). If the small winning game state is not being executed or if the small winning gaming state is being executed (NO in step S1821), the main CPU 101 changes the fluctuation time determination table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variable time determination table setting process is ended without any change. When determining that the small winning game state has ended (YES in step S1821), the main CPU 101 selects the set variable time determination table, that is, the variable time determination table currently used for reference, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the table is a variable time determination table for a special symbol for a low start (step S1822). If the set fluctuation time determination table is a fluctuation time determination table for special symbols for low start (YES in step S1822), the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol. is set in the variable time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 (step S1823), and the variable time determination table setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the set fluctuation time determination table is not the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 (NO in step S1822), the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol. To end the variable time determination table setting process without changing the variable time determination table to be referred to at the time. In step S1822, if the set variable time determination table is not the variable time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, the currently set variable time determination table is This is a variable time determination table for special symbols for the start.

Therefore, while the special symbol fluctuation time is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 4401, the result of the second special lottery will not be determined. Unless there is a "jackpot", the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for an extremely long time (long variations A to C), so the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the frequency that the small hit winning hole 5400 becomes open so that the game ball entering the small winning winning hole 5400 becomes a prize is relatively small.

On the other hand, after the end of the small hit game state is changed to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. When you win a prize, most of the fluctuation displays of the second special symbol not only change super fast, but also make it possible to win a game ball into the small winning prize opening 5400 with a probability of about 1 in 5, and the number of balls fired per unit time. A specific state occurs in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls exceeds 1.

In addition, in the above, the state where the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 is defined as a specific state, but the expected value of the number of prize balls does not exceed 1 but is a design value extremely close to 1 ( For example, a state of 0.99) may be set as the second specific state. In this case, it is desirable that the expected value is higher than the expected value (for example, 0.90) when hitting left-handed during the time saving state (during electric support). During the time-saving state of left-handed hitting, a small hit triggers the transition to the second specific state, starting right-handed hitting, and then moving to a more advantageous specific state by completing the number of time-savings, increasing the expected value by three levels. It becomes possible to do this. Note that this modification example in which the fluctuation pattern changes depending on the small hit is not limited to the fourth embodiment, but can be applied to other embodiments to the extent that it is applicable.

In addition, in the modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, as described above, when the small winning game state ends, the special symbol for a high start is selected from the variable time determination table for the special symbol for a low start (see FIG. 258). Since the symbol fluctuation time determination table (see FIG. 259) is changed, when the special symbol fluctuation time is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start (in this modification, the player It is desirable to be able to win a "small hit" when the player is hitting left-handed). For example, in the first special lottery, there is a probability that you will win a small hit in the first special lottery with a probability that does not exceed the expected value range (for example, 55% to 60%) of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time in the "normal gaming state". When winning or hitting left-handed, game balls enter the second starting port 4401 at a frequency that does not exceed the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time in the "normal gaming state". You should try to win a prize.

In this way, the main CPU 101 changes the variation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol, to the variation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, based on the completion of the small winning game state. By changing the variable time determination table to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example, it is possible to insert a game ball into the small hit prize opening 5400 even though the small winning gaming state is controlled. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game that may occur when it is not possible to win a prize.

In addition, the main CPU 101 changes the variation time determination table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol from the variation time determination table for the special symbol for a low start to the special symbol for a high start with the end of the small winning game state as an opportunity. After changing to the symbol fluctuation time determination table, the high The variation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation time determination table for the special symbol for starting. The main CPU 101 may change the table to determine the variation time of the special symbol for low start based on the elapse of the period, or change the variation time of the special symbol for low start based on the elapse of the period. It may be determined whether to change to the determination table or continue to refer to the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start.

By the way, in the above, when the small winning game state ends when the special symbol variable time determination table for low start is set, the table is always changed to the special symbol variable time determination table for high start. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the small winning game state ends when a special symbol variable time determination table for low start is set, the main CPU 101 determines whether the main CPU 101 changes the table or not. A lottery is held and the lottery is won, and whether there are multiple small winning symbols and if the small winning symbol is 1, the table is changed, but if the small winning symbol is 2, the table is not changed, etc.) has been established. If the predetermined condition is not met, the table for determining the variation time of the special symbol for a low start is continued, and the table for determining the variation time of the special symbol for the high start is determined based on the predetermined condition being met. You may also change it to .

[Modified example of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment will be explained. The external configuration of this modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 270). That is, the passage gate 49, the first starting opening 5442, the second starting opening 4401, and the small hit winning opening 5400 are all configured so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through or win. Moreover, the big prize opening 540 is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize.

In this modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbols, as a general rule, in the "normal gaming state", the variation of the special symbols for a low start shown in FIG. 258. This is done by referring to the time determination table, and in the “high accuracy time saving gaming state”, “high accuracy non time saving gaming state” or “low accuracy time saving gaming state”, the variable time determination table of special symbols for high start shown in FIG. 259 However, only during a predetermined period after the backup is cleared, the process is performed by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for medium start shown in FIG. 272.

FIG. 272 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in a modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, and is a diagram showing a variable time (variable display time) determination table for special symbols for medium start. The table shown in FIG. 272 shows the fluctuation display of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" or "loss", and the fluctuation display of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. The time is shorter than the time specified in the time determination table (58000msec to 60000msec) and longer than the time specified in the variable time determination table for special symbols for high starts (1000msec) shown in Figure 259. It is something.

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 in a modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 273, a variable time determination table setting process in a modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described.

The main CPU 101 first determines whether the backup clear switch 330 has been operated to clear the backup (step S1824). If the backup has been cleared (YES in step S1824), the main CPU 101 creates a fluctuation time determination table, as shown in FIG. It is set in the variable time determination table for the special symbol for starting (step S1825). On the other hand, if the backup has not been cleared (NO in step S1824), the main CPU 101 moves to step S1826. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the jackpot gaming state has ended (step S1826). If the jackpot gaming state has not ended (NO in step S1826), the main CPU 101 ends the variable time determination table setting process. Even when the jackpot gaming state is not yet controlled, the main CPU 101 determines NO in step S1826. When the jackpot gaming state ends (YES in step S1826), the main CPU 101 determines whether to shift to the "normal gaming state" (step S1827). When the transition destination of the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is the "normal gaming state" (YES in step S1827), the main CPU 101 selects the special symbol based on the transition to the "normal gaming state". The variable time determination table to be referred to when determining the variable time is set to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 (step S1828), and the variable time determination table setting process is ended. On the other hand, the destination of the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is not the "normal gaming state", that is, the destination is "high-probability time-saving gaming state", "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", or "low-probability time-saving gaming state". state" (NO in step S1827), the main CPU 101 selects the special symbol based on the transition to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state." The variable time determination table to be referred to when determining the variable time is set to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 (step S1829), and the variable time determination table setting process is ended.

In this way, in the modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when the backup clear is performed, the main CPU 101 changes the variable time determination table of the special symbol to be referred to to the special symbol for medium start shown in FIG. Execute control to change to the variable time determination table.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time determination table to be referred to is changed to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for medium start shown in FIG. The time is determined with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table for medium start shown in FIG. 272. In other words, when the special symbol fluctuation time determination table is changed to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for medium start shown in FIG. 272 due to backup clearing, this table remains unchanged until the jackpot gaming state ends. is not changed. That is, once changed to the special symbol variation time determination table for medium start shown in FIG. 272, this table will not be changed unless the special symbol is variably displayed and a "jackpot" is derived.

In addition, in the above, when the table is changed to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for medium start, this table is not changed until the jackpot game state ends, but this is not necessarily limited to this. When the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the reference to the variation time determination table for the special symbol for a medium start is finished, and the variation time determination table for the special symbol for a low start is determined, for example, as shown in FIG. 258. You may also refer to a table. In this case, for example, for a predetermined period of time after the opening of the hall (until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50)), the gaming machine manager will make the state advantageous to the player. becomes possible.

Although not shown in FIG. 273, when the backup clear is performed (step S1824), the main CPU 101 selects the medium value shown in FIG. 272 from the low start special symbol variable time determination table shown in FIG. 258. Although the process of changing to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for the start is performed, the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for the medium start shown in FIG. 272 is changed from the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for the high start shown in FIG. 259. Processing to change the table may not be performed.

In this way, the main CPU 101 changes the variation time determination table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol to the variation time of the special symbol for medium start shown in FIG. 272 based on the backup clearing. By changing to the determination table, it becomes possible to adjust the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time at the gaming machine manager's will, for example, when the hall opens.

In addition, in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, among the plurality of setting values (for example, six levels) with different probabilities of "jackpot" in the special lottery, It may also be a gaming machine in which a special lottery is executed based on any one of the set values. Then, only when the first setting value is a specific setting value (for example, setting value 6), for example, the sub CPU 201 executes a specific effect that allows the first setting value to be guessed. It becomes possible to provide more interesting gameplay.

As mentioned above, in the case of a gaming machine in which a special lottery is executed based on one of multiple setting values with different probabilities of a "big win" in a special lottery, one setting value is specified. Not only is there a performance that allows you to guess that the setting value is , for example, the setting value of 1 is an odd number (e.g., setting value 1, 3, 5) or an even number (e.g., setting value 2, 4, 6). You may perform a performance that allows you to guess. For example, in the modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the second special lottery is a "lose", the determination is made with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table for the middle start in FIG. 272. The average of the variable display time of the second special symbol is uniformly 60,000 msec regardless of the first setting value. Instead, a table in which the average variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60,000 msec and a table in which the average is 610,000 msec are stored in the main ROM, and the main CPU 101 stores a table in which one set value is an odd number (for example, set value 1, 3 , 5), refer to the table in which the average variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60000 msec, and when the first setting value is an even number (for example, setting value 2, 4, 6), The variable display time of the second special symbol may be determined by referring to a table in which the average of the variable display time of the second special symbol is, for example, 61000 msec. This allows the player to guess the first set value based on the variable display time of the second special symbol, thereby making it possible to further increase the interest in the game.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 274). The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment also differs from the pachinko game machine of the first example in the probability that a "small win" is derived by displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner.

FIG. 274 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 274, in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located in the gaming area 20. The shutter 610 is located at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the opening mode, and when the shutter 610 is driven by the grand prize opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening 540. , and a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 540 (or difficult). The pachinko game machine of this fifth embodiment is configured such that all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the grand prize hole 540 when the big prize hole 540 is in the open mode.

Further, on the downstream side of the big prize opening 540 and on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, a normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body that integrates the second starting port 440 and the normal electric accessory 460, but it does not necessarily need to be unitized and may be separate units.

Similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the normal electric accessory 460 changes the ease with which a game ball enters the second starting port 440 by being movable forward and backward relative to the transparent panel 172. Alternatively, a movable shutter 4650 is provided that can change the mode between a mode in which it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 440 and a mode in which it is possible. Further, the normal electric accessory 460 includes a starting port solenoid 4630 (for example, see FIGS. 53 and 54) and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the movable shutter 4650.

In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, when the game ball is in the open mode in which winning into the second starting hole 440 is facilitated, among the game balls that are hit to the right, the game balls that do not land in the big winning hole 540 are All or most of the winnings are configured to enter the second starting port 440.

A receiving member 3000 is formed on the upper right side of the normal electric accessory 460 to temporarily catch game balls that are hit to the right but do not enter the big prize opening 540. This receiving member 3000 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the game ball flowing down, and then causing the game ball to fall to the upstream side (right side) of the movable shutter 4650.

The movable shutter 4650 is a plate-like member on which the game ball can roll in the left and right directions on its upper surface, and as described above, is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front and rear directions with respect to the transparent panel 172. When the movable shutter 4650 is advanced forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second start port 440 is in the open state, and when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second start port 440 is in the open state. The starting port 440 is in a closed state.

When the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive the game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side); The game ball is configured to roll with the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 facing downstream (left side).

The second starting port 440 is disposed on the most downstream side of the movable shutter 4650, and is opened so that the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 can receive a game ball rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. . However, if the movable shutter 4650 retreats backward while there are game balls that are rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 but have not yet reached the second starting port 440, the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 will be rolled. The moving game ball falls into the second starting port 440 without winning a prize.

Below the normal electric accessory unit 400, a downstream path forming part 5500 that forms a downstream path for game balls that do not win in the second starting port 440 is arranged. This downstream path forming part 5500 has a first downstream path 5501 through which a game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3000 flows down when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted backward, and a first downstream path 5501 where the game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3000 flows down when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted backward. It is configured to form a second downstream path 5502 through which the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 flow downward.

Note that the downstream path forming section 5500 is not necessarily configured so that when the movable shutter 4650 retreats in the rear direction, all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 flow down the second downstream path 5502. For example, the game ball on the most upstream side of the movable shutter 4650 (the game ball that has just fallen from the receiving member 3000) is configured to flow down the first downstream path 5501. You can.

A small hit unit 5300 is arranged below the downstream path forming section 5500. The small winning unit 5300 includes a small winning opening 5400, a plate-shaped small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small winning opening solenoid that drives the small winning shutter 6100. (not shown). When the small winning shutter 6100 is activated and the small winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, game balls flowing down the first flow path 5501 (among the game balls hit to the right, game balls that have reached the small winning unit 5300) It is configured such that all or most of the balls (balls) enter the small winning prize opening 5400.

The pachinko game machine of the first embodiment includes a first starting opening 5442, a small winning opening 5400, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small winning shutter 6100. Although the attacker unit 5000 was constituted by the small winning opening solenoid to be driven, in the small winning unit 5300 of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, the first starting opening 5442 is separate.

A passage gate 49 is arranged downstream of the small winning opening 5400. Similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball passes through, and in the time saving state, the game ball enters the second starting port 440 and does not enter the prize. It becomes an electric support state where it becomes easier. All or most of the game balls that flowed down the first downstream route 5501 but could not enter the small hit prize opening 5400 because the small hit prize opening 5400 was closed, and the game balls that flowed down the second downstream route 5502. It is configured to pass through a passage gate 49.

In addition, between the big prize opening 540 and the second starting opening 440, a downstream path 2500 through which the game ball can flow down is formed, but this downstream path 2500 cannot be blocked by obstacles such as nails or objects. It is configured such that it takes more than a certain amount of time for game balls that have not won a prize in the prize opening 540 to flow down the first flow path 5501 and reach the small winning unit 5300. This certain period of time is at least longer than the sum of the interval time when the jackpot game ends and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol that first started fluctuating after the jackpot game state ended. It is preferable that The reason will be explained later.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the probability that a "small hit" was derived by performing a variable display of the second special symbol was about 1/5, but in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, In the machine, when a "big hit" is not derived when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a "small hit" is always derived. That is, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a "lose" is 0, and all other than the "big hit" are "small wins." It should be noted that when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is not limited to the case where a "small hit" is always derived, but the probability is extremely low compared to when a "small hit" is derived. A "loss" may be derived.

(Game flow)
First, in the "normal gaming state", a typical player plays left-handed. When the game ball hit to the left enters the first starting hole 5442, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner. When the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the "normal gaming state" to the jackpot gaming state.

The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is configured as a gaming machine that can be controlled to a "normal gaming state" that is not in an electrically supported state, or a "time saving state" that is in an electrically supported state. In this "time saving state", when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a "big hit" being derived may be higher or lower than in the "normal gaming state".

In a jackpot game state, a typical player plays the game by hitting right-handed. Further, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to the "normal gaming state" or the "time saving state". When the main CPU 101 executes the control to shift to the "normal gaming state", a typical player returns to playing the game with the left hand, but the main CPU 101 executes the control to shift to the "time saving state". The game is played with a right-handed hit.

In the jackpot game state, all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the big prize opening 540, so it is difficult to pass the game ball through the passage gate 49 or enter the second starting opening 440. It is. Therefore, it is difficult to suspend the starting memory of the second special symbol in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the game is not in the jackpot game state and the game is played by hitting right, the starting memory of the second special symbol can be suspended unless the game ball hit right enters the small hit prize opening 5400. There is. However, in the "normal gaming state", since a typical player plays the game by hitting left-handed, the starting memory of the second special symbol is not suspended.

Therefore, when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot gaming state ends, there is a possibility that the starting memory of the second special symbol has not been suspended at the time the jackpot gaming state ends. expensive. On the other hand, when the state shifts from the "time saving state" to the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot gaming state ends, the starting memory of the second special symbol is suspended up to the upper limit of four at the time the jackpot gaming state ends. Probability is high.

When the jackpot game state ends and the control to shift to the "time saving state" is executed, and the starting memory of the second special symbol is not suspended at that point, the game ball that is first hit to the right follows the falling path 2500. After it flows down and is once caught by the receiving member 3000, it flows down the first flow path 5501 without rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and does not enter the small hit prize opening 5400, but passes through the passage gate 49. pass through. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol determination. When the normal symbol judgment is performed, the main CPU 101 displays the normal symbol in a very short period of time, and outputs the result of the normal symbol judgment to the normal symbol display section 71 (see FIG. 8). The result of normal symbol determination is a hit with a probability of 100% or close to 100%, so when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, there is an almost 100% probability that the movable shutter 4650 will move forward with respect to the transparent panel 172. The second starting port 440 becomes open.

When the second starting port 440 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down the flow path 2500 is once caught by the receiving member 3000, and then falls to the upstream side of the movable shutter 4650, and the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 is It rolls from the upstream side to the downstream side, and then enters the second starting port 440.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 440, the main CPU 101 performs a second special lottery and derives the result of the second special lottery after displaying a second special symbol in a variable manner. In the "short game state", the main CPU 101 displays the second special symbol in an extremely fast manner with a variation time of 1000 msec. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the main CPU 101 always outputs " Derive the small hit. That is, the main CPU 101 performs the second special lottery so that if the result of the second special lottery is not a "big win", the result is always a "small win". However, this is not limited to the manner in which a "small win" is always derived when a "big win" is not derived, and the probability that a "small win" is derived when a "big win" is not derived. It is also possible to have a "loss" result very rarely, with an extremely lower probability than the above.

When the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "small hit" is derived, the movable shutter 4650 moves forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the second starting port 440 becomes open. However, as described above, when the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3000 fall onto the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and the game balls fall to the first flow path 5501. The game ball does not reach the small hit prize opening 5400.

Further, the game ball that has fallen onto the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 enters the second starting port 440 or flows down the second flow path 5502 and passes through the passage gate 49. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the movable shutter 4650 moves forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 again with almost 100% probability, and the second starting port 440 becomes open. Then, all or most of the game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3000 fall onto the top surface of the movable shutter 4650, preventing the game balls from entering the first downstream path 5501, and falling onto the top surface of the movable shutter 4650. The game ball enters the second starting port 440 or flows down the second downstream path 5502 and passes through the passage gate 49. Therefore, when a game is played in the "time saving state", the starting winning of the second special symbol can be held up to the upper limit by the main CPU 101.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, a "small hit" is almost always derived when a "big hit" is not derived, so the right-handed player is In the "time saving state", the small hit prize opening 5400 is almost fully open. However, in this "time saving state", all or most of the game balls hit to the right pass through the second starting port 440 or pass through the passage gate 49, so the game ball enters the small hit prize port 5400. This will prevent you from winning a prize. Note that the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the outlet 57.

At the timing when the movable shutter 4650 retreats backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3000 may flow down the first flow path 5501 and enter the small hit prize opening 5400. , the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is set such that it never exceeds 1.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a "jackpot" is derived while the starting prize of the second special symbol is suspended by the main CPU 101, for example, up to the upper limit, the main CPU 101 enters the jackpot game state. to move to. Since neither the first special symbol starting condition nor the second special symbol starting condition is satisfied in the jackpot gaming state, the suspension of the starting memory of the second special symbol, which has been suspended to the upper limit, is maintained until the jackpot gaming state ends. do.

In the jackpot game state, as described above, all or most of the game balls hit right enter the jackpot 540. Even if there is a game ball that is hit right in the jackpot game state and does not enter the big winning hole 540, the main CPU 101 will perform normal symbol determination regardless of whether or not it is in the jackpot game state. Since the normal symbols are displayed in a very short period of time, the starting memory of the normal symbols is rarely suspended when the jackpot game state ends.

Therefore, when the start memory of the second special symbol is suspended at the time when the jackpot game state ends, the start condition of the second special symbol is established when the jackpot game state ends, and the main CPU 101 enters the small win game state. (The small winning shutter 6100 is operated to control the small winning opening 5400 to be opened). At this time, as mentioned above, since the starting memory of the normal symbol is not held, the movable shutter 4650 has retreated backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3000 is It flows down the path 5501, and it becomes possible to enter the small winning prize opening 5400, and temporarily enters a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1. This specific state is maintained for the number of second special symbols whose starting memories are stored. However, in this specific state, all or most of the game balls hit to the right flow down the first downstream path 5501 and enter the small hit prize opening 5400, so it is difficult for the game balls to reach the passing gate 49. Since the second starting port 440 is not in an open state, the starting memory of the second special symbol is not newly held, but the held starting memory is simply digested. Then, when the suspension of the start memory of the second special symbol is completely exhausted, the specific state ends.

When the specific state ends, the main CPU 101 no longer controls the small winning game state, and the game ball can pass through the passage gate 49. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, as described above, with almost 100% probability, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the second starting port 440 becomes open. Then, all or most of the game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3000 fall onto the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, preventing the game balls from entering the first downstream path 5501, and winning the small hit prize opening 5400. becomes difficult.

The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment is configured such that when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a "small win" is derived unless it is a "big win"; '', the main CPU 101 displays the second special symbol in one of the long variations A to C (for example, see FIG. 258), so there is no advantage to playing the game by hitting right.

In this way, by setting the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time to exceed 1 during a limited period such as a specific state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to obtain in the jackpot game state. In addition to the prize balls that can be won, prize balls can also be won in a specific state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. In particular, if the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one small winning game state is, for example, 100 balls, if the starting memory of the second special symbol is suspended up to the upper limit of 4 at the time the jackpot playing state ends, Approximately 400 prize balls can be won, making it possible to greatly stimulate the player's desire to play. At this time, as in the first embodiment, by showing the four small hits as a series of effects with the previous jackpot, it is possible to notify that more prize balls can be obtained than the jackpot prize balls that can be obtained originally. good. This special state is difficult to occur in the "normal gaming state" and is likely to occur in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" that are electric support states, so it is called "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state". It is possible to create high expectations for a jackpot that can occur in the "low-probability time-saving gaming state." Further, as in other embodiments, a jackpot type may be provided in which a specific state is continued as a "probability-variable non-time-saving state" not only four times after a jackpot but until the next jackpot.

In addition, in the "time saving state", when the holding of normal symbols is interrupted, the period during which the movable shutter 4650 is closed increases, and the number of prizes entered into the small hit prize opening 5400 increases, contrary to the designer's intention. things can happen. In that case, it is desirable to open and close the movable shutter 4650 so as not to interrupt the retention of normal symbols. For example, in one winning of a normal symbol, it is desirable to define an opening pattern such that opening for 1000 msec, closing for 50 msec, opening for 1000 msec, and closing for 50 msec is repeated so that the total opening time becomes 6000 msec. At this time, the 50 msec of closing is long enough to ensure that the game balls rolling on the movable shutter 4650 are not caught in the next opening, and even if the game balls directly above the movable shutter 4650 fall naturally, etc. It is desirable that the time does not flow into 5501. By doing this, one out of every few balls will pass through the passing gate 49 via the second downstream path 5502, and the normal symbols will continue to be held without interruption and will proceed to the first downstream path 5501. This makes it possible to suppress the influx of game balls.

Note that the above specific state can be realized in the "time saving state" which becomes the electric support state after the jackpot gaming state ends, but it is not necessarily only possible to realize it only in the "time saving state" which becomes the electric support state. In other words, the "time saving state" which is the electric support state is a state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting port 440 compared to the "normal gaming state", but the "normal gaming state" Compared to this, if it is not easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 440, it is not an electric support state. Therefore, even in the "normal gaming state", the result of the normal symbol judgment performed based on the fact that the game ball hit to the right passes through the passage gate 49 is made to be a hit with a probability of 100% or close to 100%. The number of prize balls paid out based on winnings in the second starting slot 440 is set to one ball, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a long fluctuation in the "normal gaming state", and after the jackpot gaming state ends. By making ultra-fast fluctuations in the gaming state, it is possible to realize a specific state without changing the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state to a "time saving state" which becomes an electric support state.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to a sixth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 275). Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to a "normal gaming state" which is not an electric support state, or a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" which is an electric support state. . In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the variable time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbol referred to in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is also changed from the first embodiment. It is different from the pachinko machine in the example.

FIG. 275 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 275, the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), has a large prize opening 540 and a special electric accessory 600 in the gaming area 20. The shutter 610 is located at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the opening mode, and by driving the shutter 610 by the grand prize opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening 540. , and a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 540 (or difficult). The pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment is configured such that all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the jackpot 540 when the jackpot 540 is in the open mode.

Furthermore, a passage gate 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the big prize opening 540 and on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball passes through.

Furthermore, in addition to the conventionally provided first starting port 5442, the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment also includes a first starting port on the downstream side of the passage gate 49 through which a right-handed game ball can win. There is. In order to distinguish between the two, for convenience, the first starting port located on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be referred to as the first starting port 5443, but when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 and the first starting port. Control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when a game ball enters the opening 5443.

Above the first starting port 5443, there is a movable member 4652 that can be changed between a mode in which it is impossible to enter the game ball into the first starting port 5443 (closed mode) and a mode in which it is possible (open mode). ing. In the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 operates this movable member 4652 more frequently than in the "normal gaming state" based on the fact that the result of normal symbol determination is a hit, and activates the first starting port. 5443 is made easy to win.

A second starting port 440 is arranged on the lower left side of the first starting port 5443. When a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 displays a variable display of the second special symbol, but as with the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the probability that a "small hit" will be derived is about 5 minutes. This is number 1.

Below the first starting opening 5443, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small winning shutter 6100 can be driven by a small winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the front direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit prize opening 5400 becomes closed, and when the small win shutter 6100 operates in the backward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit prize opening 5400 closes. It becomes an open mode. If the result of the second special lottery is a "small win", the main CPU 101 displays a variable display of the second special symbol, and derives the result that it is a "small win". When a result indicating a "small win" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the small win game state to operate the small win shutter 6100 so that the small win winning opening 5400 is in an open mode.

On the upper right side of the first starting port 5443, an out port 5444 is arranged for discharging the game ball outside the machine without winning a prize.

In addition, the game ball hit to the right can flow down any one of the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443, the downstream path 5451 toward the second starting port 440, and the downstream path 5452 toward the out port 5444. For example, it is configured by an obstacle nail to flow down the path. Of these three flow paths, the flow path 5450 heading toward the first starting port 5443 has the highest flow rate of game balls, followed by the flow path 5451 heading toward the second start port 440, which has the highest flow rate of game balls. The lower flow path 5452 toward the outlet 5444 has a lower flow rate.

The game balls flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 are configured so that all or most of the game balls enter the first starting port 5443 when the first starting port 5443 is in an open mode. . Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit winning port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 will hit the small hit winning port. It is difficult to win 5400.

On the other hand, when it is impossible for a game ball to enter the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small winning opening 5400. At this time, if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, a game ball will be won in the small winning winning opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 will send the game ball to the small winning winning opening 5400 via the payout/launch control circuit 300. Prize balls are paid out based on winnings. The game balls that have reached the small hit winning opening 5400 but have not won the small winning winning opening 5400 flow further downstream and are eventually discharged out of the machine from the out opening 57. Therefore, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" in which it is easier to win the first starting opening 5443 more frequently than in the "normal gaming state", even if the small winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, the small winning opening 5400 is in the open mode. Although it is difficult for game balls to enter the winning opening 5400, in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" where winnings are less frequent in the first starting opening 544 compared to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" A large amount of game balls will flow down towards the small hit prize opening 5400 compared to when the small hit prize opening 5400 is open, and these large amount of game balls will be won in the small hit prize opening 5400 if the small hit prize opening 5400 is in the open mode. It is possible.

(Game flow)
Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment will be explained. The main CPU 101 controls the gaming state to any one of the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". However, in addition to this, although it is not essential, it may be controlled to a "low probability time saving gaming state".

In the "normal gaming state", when a game ball launched toward the gaming area 20 enters the first starting slot 5442, the main CPU 101 performs a first special lottery. If the result of this first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to a jackpot gaming state. In this "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Determine the time.

When the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot according to the winning-time selection symbol command related to the jackpot, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and executes the jackpot according to the determined jackpot type. Then, control is executed to shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state to a "normal gaming state" or a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state."

The main CPU 101 controls the pachinko game of the first embodiment in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" which is controlled after the time-saving game is completed in this "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state". Unlike the machine, the variation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 276.

FIG. 276 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, which is another example of the variable time (variable display time) determination table for special symbols for high starts (another example of FIG. 259). ). The difference between the variation time determination table for special symbols for high starts shown in FIG. 276 and the variation time determination table for special symbols for high starts shown in FIG. 259 is that the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot". At some point, the first special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner for an extremely long period of time, for example, from 300,000 msec (long variation F) to 600,000 msec (long variation D). In addition, when the result of the second special lottery is a "lose", the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is extremely fast fluctuating in an extremely short time such as 1000 msec, for example.

As explained in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the result of either the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a "jackpot", and the special symbols change based on the "jackpot". During the display, even if the starting conditions for the other special symbol are met, the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "jackpot". Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", during the variable display of the first special symbol based on the "jackpot", even if the starting conditions for the second special symbol are met, the main CPU 101 The second special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit".

However, even if the main CPU 101 executes a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit" in the second special lottery, the probability of winning a "small win" is approximately 1/5 in this non-winning process. In the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", all or most of the game balls that flow down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 enter the first starting port 5443, so it is difficult to enter the small hit winning port 5400. It is. However, when transitioning from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," the electric support state is no longer present, so the game ball that has flowed down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is The frequency of winning in the small hit prize opening 5400 without winning in 5443 increases, and the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of balls fired per unit time increases.

That is, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating over an extremely long period of time, for example 600,000 msec (long fluctuation D). The time-saving game is completed by displaying the second special symbol fluctuating in an extremely short period of time (until the result indicating a "jackpot" is derived), for example, 1000 msec (super-fast fluctuation). When the determined number of time-saving games are completed, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state." The result of the second special lottery will not become a "jackpot" until the fluctuating display of the first special symbol ends and a "jackpot" result is derived, and during this time, for example, 1000 msec (super fast fluctuation) The second special symbol is displayed in an extremely short period of time, and by winning a "small hit" with a high probability of about 1 in 5, you can win as many prize balls as you like, and the number of balls fired per unit time is increased. A specific state occurs in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by realizing a game feature that creates a specific state in which players can win as many prize balls as they like. In addition, it is preferable that the gauge structure is such that when the player plays right-handed, the number of holds in the second starting memory is always at the upper limit (for example, four).

Note that the number of time saving times may always be a fixed number of times (for example, 100 times). However, if the number of times saved in the ``high-accuracy time-saving game state'' is made different each time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a ``jackpot'' is derived, it is possible to further increase the interest. For example, by making the number of time savings in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" different each time a "jackpot" is derived, the result of the first special lottery in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" will be a "jackpot" ( In relation to the timing (the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a long variation), the following interesting points occur. That is, the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes a "big hit" (the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a long variation) in the "highly accurate time-saving gaming state" is not always good. For example, when the number of time reductions is 100, if the first special symbol changes to a long one at an early timing, the period of the specific state may be shortened, and in some cases, the period of the specific state may be shortened. 1. There is also a possibility that the variable display of the special symbols will stop and the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Also, when the number of time-savings is relatively short (for example, 24 times), if the first special symbol changes to a long change at an early timing, you can enjoy the benefits of the specific state for a longer period of time. . In this way, by being able to vary the number of time savings each time a "jackpot" is derived, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. You may do so.

However, even if the number of time-savings is not disclosed under the control of either the main CPU 101 or the sub-CPU 201 until at least transition to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," the player can '' to a ``highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state'', it is difficult to grasp whether the state will transition from ``to a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state.'' Therefore, it is necessary to increase gaming interest from a different perspective than when performing a performance that suggests or clearly indicates the determined number of time-saving games. becomes possible.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 276, the result of the first special lottery in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" was a "jackpot". At this time, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol as any of the long variation D to long variation F by lottery. Since the long fluctuations D to F have different fluctuation times, the long fluctuation D with the longest fluctuation time is the most advantageous to the player, and the long fluctuation F with the shortest fluctuation time is the most disadvantageous to the player. . In this way, by determining the variation time of the first special symbol to be one of the plurality of different variation times, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game. Moreover, if the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 do not disclose which one of the long fluctuations D to F has been determined, the player will not be able to know the end timing of the specific state, and will not be able to enjoy the game. can be further increased.

In addition, in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 is configured to decide on one of long fluctuations D to long fluctuations F, but with a predetermined probability In this case, the variable time may be determined to be low (for example, 10,000 msec) in which the degree of profit for the player is low.

Furthermore, in the above description, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the control is performed through the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and then into the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," but this is not necessarily the case. After the state ends, the control may be immediately changed to the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state." In particular, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the normal jackpot is controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" via the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is controlled. In a special lottery executed by the main CPU 101, a premium jackpot is won with a predetermined probability according to the winning selection symbol command. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be one of the fluctuation times from long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F. However, it is not necessarily necessary to make the fluctuation time of the first special symbol a long fluctuation for all "jackpots". The variation time may be determined to be the variation time of long variation D to long variation F.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" as in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 controls the variation time of the first special symbol. is configured to determine one of long fluctuations D to long fluctuations F, but instead of this, in the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state", a fluctuation time determination table different from that in FIG. 276 is provided, When the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit" in the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", a variable time (for example, 1000 msec) with a low degree of profit for the player may be determined with high probability. That is, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the time-saving game is exhausted by performing the fluctuation time of the second special symbol with ultra-fast fluctuation, and the time-saving game is exhausted. Later, in the "high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state," the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is increased, while in the "high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state," the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot." If this occurs, the first special symbol may be changed at a super high speed of, for example, 1000 msec, thereby immediately transitioning to the jackpot game state. In this case, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" in which the number of possible executions is predetermined, the game will be more advantageous to the player than in other states. It is now possible to award premium winnings, and players in the ``high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state,'' which is originally at a disadvantage in the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time, compared to the ``high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state''. You can increase your expectations for hitting the jackpot.

Note that, as described above, the main CPU 101 is common not only to the pachinko gaming machine of this sixth embodiment but also to all of the first to eighth embodiments of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Since both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in a predetermined order within the same interrupt process, the control load on the main CPU 101 is reduced, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second It has a configuration that allows the variable display of special symbols to be displayed in parallel.

By the way, as described above, it is rare that both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in a predetermined order within the same interrupt process. However, in order to prevent the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery conducted within the same interrupt process from becoming a "jackpot" at the same time, the main CPU 101 selects one of the results (the first special lottery was held first). If the result of one special lottery is a "jackpot", the other special lottery will be executed as a non-winning process, and the first special lottery and second special lottery held in the same interruption process will be This is to prevent both results from becoming a "jackpot" at the same time. However, as mentioned above, in the same interrupt process, if the result of one of the special drawings (the one whose special drawing was held first) is a "small win", the other special drawing will be treated as a non-winning Instead, a special lottery is held as usual, so it is possible to prevent a "big win" with a relatively high profit from being canceled out by a "small win" with a relatively low profit.

In such a gaming machine, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is controlled to be a "highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1, and the result of the first special lottery is "Jackpot". ", and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for an extremely long time such as 600,000 msec (long variation D in FIG. 276), the variable display of the first special symbol is During this time, the result of the second lottery will not be a "jackpot", so it is a new game that guarantees a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1. can provide sex.

In particular, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 determines that the variation display of the first special symbol is, for example, one of the long variations D to F (see FIG. 276) with different variation times. By doing so, the time during which a specific state is guaranteed will be different, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. In particular, when it is determined that the long variation D has the longest variation time, the sub CPU 201 may perform a special performance to excite the player. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines which one of the long variations D to F is not disclosed by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201, the player will not be able to grasp how long the specific state will last. In this case as well, interest can be increased.

In addition, in this way, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is In a gaming machine that has more than one specific state, it is preferable to perform the special lottery in the order of the first special lottery and the second special lottery within the same interrupt process. This is because if the first special lottery is held first and the result is a "jackpot", the second special lottery is treated as a non-winning process and a specific state is established. However, this is not an essential requirement, and the special lottery may be conducted in the order of the second special lottery and the first special lottery.

[Modified example of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the conventionally provided first start port 5442, a first start port is also provided on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The modified example differs in configuration in that it does not include the first starting port 5442. That is, in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the game is played with the left hand in the "normal game state", and the game is played with the right hand in the "high accuracy time saving game state" or the "high accuracy non-time saving game state". However, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the game can be played with right-handed players in any of the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". This is a configuration that performs the following.

Note that, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, also in this modification of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the game balls flowing down the downstream path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 are When 5443 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls are configured to enter the first starting opening 5443. Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit winning port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 will hit the small hit winning port. It is difficult to win 5400. Furthermore, when it is impossible for a game ball to enter the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small winning opening 5400. At this time, if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, a game ball will be won in the small winning winning opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 will send the game ball to the small winning winning opening 5400 via the payout/launch control circuit 300. Prize balls are paid out based on winnings. The game balls that have reached the small hit winning opening 5400 but have not won the small winning winning opening 5400 flow further downstream and are eventually discharged out of the machine from the out opening 57.

In the modification of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbols in the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". In either case, unless a specific condition described later is satisfied, the determination is made with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 277.

FIG. 277 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, which is another example of the variable time (variable display time) determination table for special symbols for low start (another example of FIG. 258). ). The difference between the table shown in FIG. 277 and the table shown in FIG. 258 is that when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for example 300,000 msec (long variation G). The point is that a variable display can be performed over an extremely long period of time.

(Game flow)
Next, the flow of the game in a modification of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment will be explained. As described above, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state to any one of the "normal gaming state", the "high-probability time-saving gaming state", and the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state". However, in addition to this, although it is not essential, the game may be controlled to a "low-probability time-saving gaming state" in which the game is played with right-handed players.

In the "normal gaming state", "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", when a game ball launched toward the gaming area 20 enters the first starting port 5443, the main CPU 101 1 special lottery is carried out, and based on the result of this first lottery, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by referring to the variation time determination table for special symbols for low start shown in FIG. 277.

In the "high accuracy time-saving gaming state" which is the electric support state, all or most of the game balls that are hit to the right and flow down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 enter the first starting port 5443. Therefore, it is difficult to win a prize in the small winning prize opening 5400. However, when transitioning from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," the electric support state is no longer present, so the game ball that has flowed down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is It is possible to reach the vicinity of the small winning prize opening 5400 without winning 5443. However, in the modification of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, as described above, when determining the variation time of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol in FIG. 277 unless a specific condition is satisfied. Make a decision by referring to the decision table. In other words, even if the electric support state is no longer present, unless the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot", the second special symbol will be displayed fluctuating for an extremely long time of 580,000msec to 600,000msec, so the small hit prize opening 5400 will be There is no or almost no open mode.

Therefore, in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 101 operates based on the fact that the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long variation pattern (long variation G) as the above-mentioned specific condition. Therefore, control is executed to change from the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 277 to the fluctuation time determination table for special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278. The variation time determination table for special symbols for high starts in FIG. 278 differs from the variation time determination table for special symbols for low starts in FIG. 277 when the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit" and " In the event of a loss, the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner for an extremely short period of time, such as 1000 msec (ultra-fast variation).

FIG. 279 shows a variation executed by the main CPU 101 in a modification of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, in response to the fact that the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern (long variation G) that is extremely long. It is a flowchart which shows time determination table setting processing.

Referring to FIG. 279, a description will be given of the fluctuation time determination table setting process that is executed when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G). The main CPU 101 first determines whether the first special lottery has been executed (step S1831). If the first special lottery is not being executed (NO in step S1831), the main CPU 101 performs the fluctuation time determination table setting process without changing the fluctuation time determination table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol. finish. When determining that the first special lottery has been executed (YES in step S1831), the main CPU 101 determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be long fluctuation G (step S1832). If the variation pattern of the first special symbol is not determined to be the long variation G (NO in step S1832), the main CPU 101 does not change the variation time determination table that is referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol. The variable time determination table setting process ends. When the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be long fluctuation G (YES in step S1832), the main CPU 101 determines that the set fluctuation time determination table, that is, the fluctuation time determination table currently used for reference, is , it is determined whether or not it is the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 277 (step S1833). If the set fluctuation time determination table is the fluctuation time determination table for special symbols for low start (YES in step S1833), the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time determination table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol. is set in the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278 (step S1834), and the variable time determination table setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the set fluctuation time determination table is not the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277 (NO in step S1833), the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variable time determination table setting process is ended without changing the variable time determination table that is referred to at the time. In step S1833, if the set fluctuation time determination table is not the fluctuation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 277, the currently set fluctuation time determination table is not the high start fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. This is a variable time determination table for special symbols for the start.

Therefore, while the special symbol variation time is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Unless the result of the special lottery is a "big hit", the variable display of the second special symbol (long variations A to C) is performed for an extremely long time, so the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, the frequency with which the small hit winning hole 5400 becomes open so that the game ball entering the small winning winning hole 5400 becomes a prize is relatively small.

On the other hand, as the first special symbol's fluctuation time was determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G), the table was changed to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high starts shown in Figure 278. Later, when the game ball hit to the right enters the second starting opening 4401, most of the fluctuation displays of the second special symbol not only change super fast, but also enter the small winning opening 5401 with a probability of about 1 in 5. It becomes possible to win prizes with game balls, and a specific state is reached in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

In this way, the main CPU 101 sets the variation time determination table to be referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol based on the fact that the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long variation pattern (long variation G). By changing from the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 277 to the fluctuation time determination table for high start special symbol shown in FIG. 278, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be changed. While the game continues, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is not derived. Therefore, the prize balls that can be obtained in the above-mentioned specific state and the prize balls that can be obtained in the subsequent jackpot game state can be used to create a premium jackpot in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out to the player, increasing the interest in the game. becomes possible.

In addition, when such a premium jackpot is determined, the sub CPU 201 enters the above-mentioned specific state before it is derived that the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" (before being controlled to the jackpot gaming state). If a premium effect indicating that a premium jackpot is executed in succession between the above and the jackpot game state is executed on the liquid crystal display device 16 via the display control circuit 204, for example, the game interest can be increased.

Furthermore, as a lottery result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 makes it possible to execute a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as a "2R jackpot game" in this paragraph) in a manner that is difficult for the player to understand, and such a 2R jackpot game When the second special symbol is won, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner with a long variation G, and after the 2R jackpot game is finished, if the game state is controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", the game state is The game moves in the order of state, 2R jackpot game, and specific state. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to make the player think that the specific state has been continuously executed. Note that the 2R jackpot game is a jackpot game in which, for example, a round game in which the jackpot 540 is kept open for about 18,000 msec is executed for only two rounds. However, other jackpot games may be used instead of the 2R jackpot game as long as they can be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp.

In addition, the main CPU 101 takes advantage of the fact that the variation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long variation pattern (long variation G), and selects a special symbol for a high start from the variation time determination table for the special symbol for a low start. After changing to the variable time determination table, high start The fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table. The main CPU 101 may change the table to determine the variation time of the special symbol for low start based on the elapse of the period, or change the variation time of the special symbol for low start based on the elapse of the period. It may be determined whether to change to the determination table or continue to refer to the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start.

By the way, in the above, when the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G), Although the table is always changed to the variable time determination table of the special symbol for a high start, the table is not limited to this. For example, when the fluctuation time determination table for special symbols for low start is set and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be an extremely long fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation G), the main CPU 101 It is determined whether a condition (for example, the main CPU 101 conducts a change lottery to determine whether or not to change the table and wins the change lottery) is met, and if the predetermined condition is not met, the low start It is also possible to continue referring to the special symbol variation time determination table and change to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Moreover, instead of the above-mentioned change lottery, a long variation G-1 in which the variation time determination table is changed and a long variation G-2 in which the variation time determination table is not changed may be provided, each having a selection rate of 50%.

In addition, in the modification of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the game is configured to be played with the right hand in any of the "normal game state", "high-accuracy time-saving game state", and "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". However, instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which the game is played with left-handed players in any of the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". In this case, the game ball hit to the left can win in both the first starting hole and the second starting hole (in the sense that one game ball can win in both the first starting hole and the second starting hole) However, when the first special symbol is fluctuating based on the result of the first special lottery being a "jackpot", by making the fluctuating display of the second special symbol more likely to fluctuate super quickly, Even in the "normal game state", it is possible to create a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 before shifting to the jackpot game state.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 280). Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be a "normal gaming state" which is not an electric support state, or a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" which is an electric support state. . When a fixed number of time-saving games (for example, 100) are played without a ``jackpot'' being derived in this ``high-accuracy time-saving gaming state'', the state shifts to a ``high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state'' which is not an electricity support state. This is different from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment in that the number of times of time saving is constant, but like the pachinko game machine of the first example, one of the number of times of time saving is determined from a plurality of times of time saving. It may be something that is done. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, the special symbol variable time (variable display time) determination table in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is also the same as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. This is different from the variable time (variable display time) determination table for special symbols for high starts of gaming machines (see FIG. 259).

FIG. 280 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 280, in the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located in the gaming area 20. The shutter 610 is located at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the opening mode, and by driving the shutter 610 by the grand prize opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening 540. , and a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 540 (or difficult). The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment is configured such that all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the jackpot 540 when the jackpot 540 is in the open mode.

Further, a passage gate 49 is arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. This passage gate 49 is configured so that most of the game balls that are hit to the right and do not enter the big prize opening 540 can pass through. The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball passes through.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, like the pachinko game machine of the sixth example, has a right-handed game in addition to the conventionally provided first starting port 5442 on the downstream side of the passage gate 49. It is equipped with a first starting port that allows balls to enter prizes. This first starting port is referred to as a first starting port 5443, similar to the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment. Also, like the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 is the same when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 and when a game ball enters the first starting port 5443. .

A movable member 4653 is provided above the first starting port 5443 and is constantly operated at a constant cycle under the control of the main CPU 101. This movable member 4653 can be opened and closed many times according to many opening patterns, for example, "closed for 3000 msec → opened for 100 msec → opened for 10000 msec → opened for 200 msec → closed for 7000 msec → opened for 300 msec → closed for 10000 msec → closed for 700 msec → opened for 300 msec". By setting the operation to one cycle, it is difficult to determine the opening timing even though it operates constantly at a constant cycle.

When the movable member 4653 is open, all or most of the game balls hit to the right that pass through the passage gate 49 are configured to enter the first starting port 5443. On the other hand, if the movable member 4653 is closed, the game ball hit right flows downstream from the first starting port 5443 without entering the first starting port 5443.

A second starting port 440 is arranged downstream of the first starting port 5443. When a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 displays a variable display of the second special symbol, but as with the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the probability that a "small hit" will be derived is about 5 minutes. This is number 1.

Above the second starting port 440, a second starting port shutter 4654 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The second starting port shutter 4654 can be driven by a second starting port solenoid (not shown). When the second starting port shutter 4654 operates in the front direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 becomes the closed state, and when the second starting port shutter 4654 operates in the backward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 closes. The starting port 440 is in an open state. In the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the main CPU 101 operates the second starting port shutter 4654 in the "normal" state so that the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, based on the fact that the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit. It is operated at a higher frequency than in the "gaming state" to facilitate winning into the second starting opening 440.

On the downstream side of the second starting opening 440, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small winning shutter 6100 can be driven by a small winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the front direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit prize opening 5400 becomes closed, and when the small win shutter 6100 operates in the backward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit prize opening 5400 closes. It becomes an open mode.

In addition, when the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 440, and when the second starting port 440 is in the closed mode, the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 440. It is configured such that the game balls that are played reach the small winning shutter 6100.

Further, when the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that have reached the small winning shutter 6100 enter the small winning winning opening 5400, and when the small winning winning opening 5400 is in the closed mode. is configured to be discharged from the machine through an outlet 57.

(Game flow)
Next, the flow of the game in the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment will be explained. The main CPU 101 controls the gaming state to any one of the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". However, in addition to this, although it is not essential, it may be controlled to a "low probability time saving gaming state".

In the "normal gaming state", when a game ball launched toward the gaming area 20 enters the first starting slot 5442, the main CPU 101 performs a first special lottery. If the result of this first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to a jackpot gaming state. In this "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Determine the time.

When the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot according to the winning-time selection symbol command related to the jackpot, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and executes the jackpot according to the determined jackpot type. Then, control is executed to shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state to a "normal gaming state" or a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state."

The main CPU 101 executes the pachinko game of the first embodiment in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" which is controlled after the time-saving game is completed in this "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state". Unlike machines, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for an extremely long period of time, such as 300,000 msec (long variation F) to 600,000 msec (long variation D). After that, the variation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol from which a "jackpot" can be derived. This point is similar to the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment. Furthermore, when the result of the second special lottery is a "lose", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol changes extremely quickly in an extremely short period of time, for example 1000 msec, which is similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is.

In the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", this "jackpot" ” During the variable display of the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 executes the second special lottery as a non-winning process that does not result in a “jackpot” even if the starting conditions for the second special symbol are met.

However, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, even if the main CPU 101 executes a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit" in the second special lottery, the probability of winning in this non-winning process is about 1/5. Win a small prize. In the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," all or most of the game balls that did not enter the first starting port 5443 enter the second starting port 440 (the number of prize balls when entering the second starting port 440 is 1 ball), it is difficult to win a prize in the small winning prize opening of 5400. However, when transitioning from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," the electric support state is no longer present, so the game ball that did not enter the first starting port 5443 enters the second starting port 440. The frequency of winning in the small hit prize opening 5400 increases without playing, and the expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of balls fired per unit time increases.

That is, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the game will last for an extremely long time, such as 600,000 msec (long fluctuation D). While the first special symbol is being fluctuated (until the result indicating a "jackpot" is derived), the second special symbol is being fluctuated in an extremely short period of time, such as 1000 msec (super fast fluctuation). When the determined number of time-saving games are completed, the main CPU 101 controls the transition from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". Execute. The result of the second special lottery will not become a "jackpot" until the fluctuating display of the first special symbol ends and a "jackpot" result is derived, and during this time, for example, 1000 msec (super fast fluctuation) The second special symbol is displayed in an extremely short period of time, and by winning a "small hit" with a high probability of about 1 in 5, you can win as many prize balls as you like, and the number of balls fired per unit time is increased. A specific state occurs in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by realizing a game feature that creates a specific state in which players can win as many prize balls as they want. It should be noted that, when the player plays right-handed, the number of reservations stored in the second starting memory is always at the upper limit (for example, four).

Note that the number of time saving times may always be a fixed number of times (for example, 100 times). However, if the number of time-savings in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is made different each time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived, it will be more interesting, similar to the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment. It becomes possible to increase the For example, by making the number of time savings in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" different each time a "jackpot" is derived, the result of the first special lottery will be a "jackpot" (the fluctuating display of the first special symbol will be Due to the relationship with the timing (which results in long fluctuations), the following interesting points arise. That is, the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes a "big hit" (the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a long variation) is not always good. For example, when the number of time reductions is 100, if the first special symbol changes to a long one at an early timing, the period of the specific state may be shortened, and in some cases, the period of the specific state may be shortened. 1. There is also a possibility that the variable display of the special symbols will stop and the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Also, when the number of time-savings is relatively short (for example, 24 times), if the first special symbol changes to a long change at an early timing, you can enjoy the benefits of the specific state for a longer period of time. . In this way, by making the number of time savings different each time a "jackpot" is derived, it is possible to increase the interest in the game, so the determined number of time savings is suggested or specified, for example, by control by the sub CPU 201. You may also perform a performance.

However, even if the number of time-savings is not disclosed under the control of either the main CPU 101 or the sub-CPU 201, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the player can enter the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" at any timing. Since it is difficult to grasp whether the game will shift from a state to a "highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state," it is necessary to increase gaming interest from a different perspective than when performing a performance that suggests or clearly indicates the determined number of time-saving games. becomes possible.

Note that, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 calculates the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, It will be decided by lottery at which variation time from long variation D to long variation F. In this way, by determining the variation time of the first special symbol to be one of the plurality of different variation times, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game. Moreover, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, if either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 does not disclose which of the long fluctuations D to F is determined, the player can: Since the end timing of the specific state is not known, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 is configured to decide on one of the long fluctuations D to F. As described in the example pachinko game machine, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that the degree of profit for the player is a low variable time (for example, 10,000 msec).

Furthermore, in the above description, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the control is performed through the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and then into the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," but this is not necessarily limited to this. As described in the pachinko game machine of the embodiment, after the jackpot game state ends, the control may be immediately changed to the "high-precision non-time-saving game state." In particular, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the normal jackpot is controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" via the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is controlled. In a special lottery executed by the main CPU 101, a premium jackpot is won with a predetermined probability according to the winning selection symbol command. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be one of the fluctuation times from long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F. However, it is not necessarily necessary to make the fluctuation time of the first special symbol a long fluctuation for all "jackpots", and as described in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, for example, when The variation time of the first special symbol may be determined to be the variation time of long variation D to long variation F only when there is a "jackpot".

[Pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to an eighth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment has a partially different configuration from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254) in the board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 281). Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be a "normal gaming state" which is not an electric support state, or a "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" which is an electric support state. Ru. It should be noted that although it may be controlled to a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or a "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," this is not essential in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. In addition, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, when one of the plurality of time saving times is determined and the determined number of time saving games are completed in the "highly accurate time saving game state", It may be controlled to a "highly accurate non-time-saving gaming state". The external configuration of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 281.

FIG. 281 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 281, in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located in the gaming area 20. The shutter 610 is located at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the opening mode, and when the shutter 610 is driven by the grand prize opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to enter the game ball into the grand prize opening 540. , and a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 540 (or difficult). The pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment is configured such that all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the jackpot 540 when the jackpot 540 is in the open mode.

Further, on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, an accessory device 3500 is arranged on the downstream side of the big prize opening 540, and a game ball hit to the right is configured to be able to enter into this accessory device 3500. There is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the accessory device 3500 may be arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can enter.

Accessory device 3500 has an entry port 3502 through which a game ball can be taken into the interior, and a rolling surface 3530 on which a game ball that enters the interior through the entrance port 3502 can roll. The rolled game ball is temporarily retained inside the accessory device 3500 by rolling on this rolling surface 3530.

An interference member 3520 is provided approximately in the center of the rolling surface 3530, which constantly rotates and changes the movement of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 3530. If the game ball only rolls on the rolling surface 3530, it will just roll around the interference member 3520, but if it interferes with the interference member 3520, it will be thrown away. This thrown game ball can be received in the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550. The game ball once taken into the accessory device 3500 rolls on the rolling surface 3530 until it is received in the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550, so it is retained inside the accessory device 3500. The time will vary each time. Further, the first receiving port 3540 and the second receiving port 3550 are not limited to openings that can receive game balls, but may be areas through which game balls can pass.

A movable member 3510 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 is provided above the entrance 3502, and this movable member 3510 normally does not allow the game ball to enter the inside of the accessory device 3500. It is located in the front direction with respect to the transparent panel 172 so as to prevent entry. Then, only when a specific condition described later is satisfied, the movable member 3510 operates backward to open the entry port 3502, and it becomes possible to take only one game ball into the accessory device 3500. ing. Although not shown in FIG. 281, when a plurality of game balls enter the entrance 3502 when the movable member 3510 is activated, only one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500, Other game balls are ejected outside the machine. Further, if no game ball is fired, the main CPU 101 maintains the entrance port 3502 in an open state until one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500.

The above-mentioned big prize opening 540 provided above the accessory device 3500 allows the game ball to win when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, it will be referred to as the first big winning hole 540. This first big prize opening 540 has an open mode in which it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball by driving a shutter 610 by a first big winning hole solenoid (not shown), and a mode in which the game ball can win a prize. It is configured to have a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to move to (drive).

A passing gate 49 which is a trigger for normal symbol determination is arranged below the accessory device 3500, and when a game ball passes through this passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol determination. If the result of normal symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the blade member 4620 in an open state for, for example, about 5900 msec, and then sets it in a closed state. While the blade member 4620 is in the open state, it is facilitated to enter the game ball into the second starting port 440. Note that the second starting port 440 is configured so that a prize can be won when the pachinko game is played to the right, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 5).

On the downstream side of the passage gate 49, there is a second special symbol that allows the game ball to win when controlled to a jackpot gaming state on the condition that a second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived. Two major prize openings 5403 are provided. The second grand prize opening 5403 has an open mode in which it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball by driving a shutter 6103 by a second big prize opening solenoid (not shown), and a mode in which the game ball can win a prize. It is configured to have a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to move to (drive).

On the downstream side of the second large winning opening 5403, a small winning opening 5400 is provided. This small hit prize opening 5400 has an open mode in which it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball by driving a small win shutter 6100 by a small hit winning hole solenoid (not shown), and an open mode in which it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize.

If the game ball hit to the right does not win in any of the first big prize opening 540, accessory device 3500, second big prize opening 5403, small hit prize opening 5400, and second starting opening 440, it will enter the out opening 57. is ejected from the aircraft.

The pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment differs greatly from the pachinko game machines of the first to seventh embodiments in the process until it is controlled to a jackpot game state. The process until the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment is controlled to a jackpot game state will be explained.

First, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258. Therefore, since there is no advantage of placing a game ball in the second starting port 440, the game is played by hitting to the left, which allows the game ball to enter the first starting port 5442. When the game ball hit to the left enters the first starting slot 5442, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery. Then, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the first special lottery is derived. In this "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258. At this time, when a "jackpot" is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 to move the first jackpot 540 between the open mode and the closed mode. Control a special gaming state that takes place over a round. In this way, when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442, the process until the jackpot gaming state is controlled is not significantly different from the pachinko gaming machines of the first to sixth embodiments.

Next, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the control is changed to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 uses the end of the jackpot gaming state as an opportunity to control the special The symbol fluctuation time determination table is changed to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. 259. Then, in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by referring to the variation time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259. In addition, similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the second special lottery held based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 440, the probability of winning a "small hit" is approximately 1 in 5. However, in the first special lottery, which is conducted based on the winning of game balls in the first starting slot 5442, the probability of winning the "small win" is not high, or even if it is, the probability of winning is extremely low compared to the second special lottery. Only. Therefore, in this "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state," the game is played by hitting to the right. When the game ball hit right enters the second starting hole 440, the main CPU 101 executes a second special lottery. Then, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the second special lottery is derived. In this "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is a specific state, similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1. Therefore, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the game is controlled to a "high-precision, non-time-saving gaming state," the sub CPU 201 provides an effect that indicates that the control is to a specific state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. , displays on the liquid crystal display device 16 a joyful image that makes the player happy.

Even if a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 and a "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 does not immediately control the jackpot game state. First, the first condition, which is one of the conditions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, is simply to operate the condition device. After activating the condition device, the main CPU 101 also refers to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. 2. Since the variation time of the special symbol is determined and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on this, the small winning game is executed with high frequency, and the frequency of winning of the game ball to the small winning prize opening 5400 is increased. . When a game ball enters the small winning prize opening 5400, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out, and the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in the above, when the condition device is activated due to the "jackpot" being derived based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is determined. The small winning game is executed with high frequency so that prize balls can be won, but when the condition device is activated based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the condition device is activated. Generally, the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 until the jackpot game state ends. Therefore, instead of the above, when the conditional device is activated due to the "jackpot" being derived based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, for example, based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49, A winning opening (in this embodiment, the second starting opening 440) is facilitated by the opening/closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (the blade member 4620) to increase the probability that the result of the ordinary symbol determination to be performed is determined to be a hit. The expected value of the number of prize balls relative to the number of balls fired per unit time may be increased by increasing the frequency of winning of game balls. In this case, when a game ball enters a prize opening facilitated by the opening/closing drive by the electric accessory 460 (wing member 4620), it is necessary to make sure that at least two or more game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, in order to prevent the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time from increasing when the condition device is not activated, the main CPU 101 operates for a relatively long time before the condition device is activated. It is preferable to change the variation time of the normal symbols to a relatively short time based on the fact that the condition device has been operated.

When the conditional device is activated, the main CPU 101 activates the movable member 3510 to take only one game ball into the accessory device 3500. Then, when the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received into the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550, the main CPU 101 sets a second condition, which is a further condition for controlling the jackpot game state. As a result, the accessory continuous operation device is activated. The main CPU 101 plays a round game in which, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, when the accessory continuous operating device is activated, the shutter 610 is driven to shift the second grand prize opening 5403 between an open mode and a closed mode. is controlled to a special game state that is played over multiple rounds. In this way, when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the process until the jackpot game state is controlled is greatly different from the pachinko game machines of the first to seventh embodiments.

In addition, when the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received into the first reception port 3540 and when it is received into the second reception port 3550, for example, a round game executed in a jackpot game state is determined. It is better to provide different degrees of advantage, such as different numbers of rounds. However, it is not necessarily necessary to provide a plurality of receiving ports that function as a condition for operating the accessory continuous device, such as the first receiving port 3540 and the second receiving port 3550. The main CPU 101 may operate the accessory continuous operation device when the game ball is accepted.

In addition, in the above, in the jackpot game state that is controlled based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 5442, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 to change the first winning opening 540 into an open mode and a closed mode. In a jackpot game state that is controlled based on winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 440, the shutter 6103 is driven to change the second winning opening 5403 into an open mode and a closed mode. A round game is played using different big winning openings, such as playing a round game that transfers the game. However, the invention is not limited to this, and there is a jackpot gaming state that is controlled based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 5442, and a jackpot gaming state that is controlled based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 440. Then, a round game may be played using the same big winning opening.

In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived, the game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500 and accepted into the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550. The game is controlled to a jackpot game state without going through any process, but this is because the main CPU 101 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device when the result of the first special lottery is derived. .

By the way, as described above, the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is temporarily retained inside the accessory device 3500 until it is received in the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550. . Thereby, a time difference can be created between when the condition device occurs and when the accessory continuous operation device operates. In other words, even though the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a "jackpot" is derived, the jackpot game state is not controlled until the accessory continuous actuation device is activated, so the number of balls fired per unit time is The specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 will be extended. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived, the sub CPU 201 performs the following as an effect indicating that the specific state is extended: A joyful image that makes the player happy is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition, since the specific state described above is for a limited period of time and does not last for an unknown period of time after the condition device is activated, the sub CPU 201 prevents game balls from being received in the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550. A cheering performance to support the player is displayed on a liquid crystal display device 16.

In this way, when a prize is won in the second starting port 440, not only the condition device is operated (the first condition is satisfied) such that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived, but also the condition On the premise that the device is activated, by setting a time lag and controlling the jackpot game state when the accessory continuous activation device is activated (the second condition is met), the prize is awarded for the number of balls fired per unit time. It becomes possible to extend the specific state in which the expected value of the number of pitches exceeds 1, and it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.

Moreover, since the time from the activation of the conditional device as the first condition to the activation of the accessory continuous activation device as the second condition differs each time, the number of prize balls compared to the number of balls fired per unit time is It becomes difficult for the player to predict how long the specific state in which the expected value exceeds 1 will last, and it becomes possible to further increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory successive device were set as the first condition and the second condition for being controlled to the jackpot game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, in a so-called type 1 type 2 type multifunction machine, type 1 winning and type 2 winning may be used as the first condition and second condition for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, in a so-called 1 type 2 type compound machine, the same accessory device 3500 as the accessory device 3500 described in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment is provided. The main CPU 101 normally determines the variation of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Determine the time. Then, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "win" is derived, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 3510 to take only one game ball into the accessory device 3500. let In addition, on the premise that the special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner even after winning one type, the main CPU 101 refers to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. 259, for example, and displays the special symbol. Determine the variation time of. On the other hand, one game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 rolls on the rolling surface 3530 and is repelled when it comes into contact with the interference member 3520. When the game ball bounced by the interference member 3520 is received, for example, in the first receiving port 3540, it becomes a two-type hit, and the main CPU 101 controls the game to be in a jackpot game state. In such a so-called 1 type and 2 type compound machine, it is not possible to have a concept that a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 will extend, but The winning type can be the first condition and the second condition for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and after the first condition is the first type winning, the second condition is the second condition. Since the time required to reach a hit differs each time, it becomes difficult for the player to predict how long the specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time will exceed 1 will continue, thereby increasing the interest in the game. becomes possible.

[Modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment will be explained. This modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment differs greatly from the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment in that the special symbol variation time determination table that is referred to when determining the special symbol variation time, for example, This is an opportunity to change from the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258 to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example. In the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol variation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the special symbol variation time, with the end of the jackpot game state as a trigger. In a modification of the pachinko game machine of the embodiment, the operation of the condition device is used as an opportunity to change.

In addition, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol fluctuation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the special symbol fluctuation time, based on the activation of the condition device, for example, for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258. If the variable time determination table is changed to the variable time determination table of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. It becomes possible to create a time difference between when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated and when the accessory continuous actuation device is activated.

Further, in the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the grand prize opening may be only one of the first grand prize opening 540 and the second grand prize opening 5403 shown in FIG. 281. Similarly, as for the shutter, only one of the shutter 610 and the shutter 6103 may be used. Therefore, in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the second big prize opening 5403 and the shutter 6103 are not provided, and the first big prize opening 540 and the shutter 610 are provided. Therefore, since there is no need to distinguish the first big winning hole 540 from other big winning holes, it is simply referred to as the big winning hole 540 in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment.

Specifically, first, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258 to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The game is played by hitting. When the game ball hit to the left enters the first starting slot 5442, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery. Then, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 immediately controls the jackpot game state as in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. Instead, first, the condition device is activated as the first condition for controlling the jackpot game state.

Further, in response to the activation of the conditional device, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol variation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. 259 to be referred to when determining the special symbol variation time. Change to time determination table. Here, in the second special lottery conducted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440, there is a probability of about 1/5 of winning a "small hit", and the game ball entering the first starting port 5442 In the first special lottery, which is held based on the winnings of The game is played by hitting to the right. When a game is played by hitting the ball to the right, a specific state occurs in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

Furthermore, even after activating the condition device, the main CPU 101 refers to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined based on this and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed based on this, the small winning game is executed with high frequency, and the frequency of winning of the game ball to the small winning prize opening 5400 is reduced. be enhanced. When a game ball enters the small winning prize opening 5400, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out, and the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in this modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, as well as the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the winning opening is facilitated by, for example, opening/closing drive by a normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 4620). It is also possible to increase the frequency of winning of game balls to the second starting port 440 (in this embodiment) to increase the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls fired per unit time.

Further, the accessory device 3500 is also configured so that a game ball hit to the right can enter, similar to the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this. The ball may be placed so that it can enter.

After the conditional device is activated, the main CPU 101 activates the movable member 3510 in the same way as when the second special symbol is displayed variably in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment and a "jackpot" is derived. Then, only one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500. Then, when the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received into the first reception port 3540 or the second reception port 3550, the main CPU 101 sets a second condition, which is a further condition for controlling the jackpot game state. As a result, the accessory continuous operation device is activated. On the premise that the conditional device is operating, the main CPU 101 operates a plurality of round games in which the shutter 610 is driven to shift the grand prize opening 540 between an open mode and a closed mode when the accessory continuous operating device operates. Control a special gaming state that takes place over a round. In this way, in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, even when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442, the condition is first set as the first condition for controlling the jackpot game state. On the premise that the device is activated and the conditional device is activated, the second condition, the accessory continuous activation device, can be activated by creating a time difference. In this case, the main CPU 101 does not stop measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol just because the condition device is activated, but starts measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the activation of the accessory continuous activation device. Execute control to stop.

Therefore, after the condition device is activated, it is possible to create a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 for a limited period of time for which it is unknown how long it will last, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, if the jackpot game state is ended and then the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" is controlled, the number of prize balls is calculated based on the number of balls fired per unit time, similar to the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. A specific state can be set in which the expected value exceeds 1, and a time difference can be created between when the condition device is activated and when the accessory continuous activation device is activated.

[Modification of the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment]
Note that the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment can be further modified as follows. In this modification of the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the board configuration of the game board unit 17 is, for example, the board configuration shown in FIG. 282 instead of the board configuration shown in FIG. 281. The external configuration of a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 221.

FIG. 282 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a modification of the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment.

The board configuration shown in FIG. 282 is a combination of the board configuration shown in FIG. 275 and the board configuration shown in FIG. 281. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282, the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20. The grand prize opening 540 has an open mode in which it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball by driving a shutter 610 by a grand prize opening solenoid (not shown), and a mode in which the game ball enters the grand prize opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize. When the big winning hole 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls hit to the right are configured to enter the big winning hole 540.

On the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 and on the downstream side of the big prize opening 540, there is a role device similar to the accessory device 3500 described in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment and the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. A physical device 3500 is arranged.

A passage gate 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the big prize opening 540 and on the right side of the accessory device 3500. The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball passes through.

Also, similar to the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment and the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 281), in addition to the first starting port 5442 provided conventionally, a , a first starting hole 5443 in which a right-handed game ball can win a prize (the number of prize balls when entering the first starting hole 5443 is, for example, one ball), and the number of winning balls of a game ball to this first starting hole 5443. A movable member 4652 that can change the ease of play, and a second starting port 440 located below the left side of the first starting port 5443 (the number of balls awarded when entering the second starting port 440 is, for example, one ball). It is equipped with The main CPU 101 moves this movable member 4652 at a higher frequency in the "high accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" than in the "normal gaming state" based on the fact that the result of normal symbol determination is a hit. It is operated to facilitate winning into the first starting port 5443. Note that when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 displays a variable second special symbol, but here, unlike the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, a "small hit" is derived. The probability that a "small hit" will be derived is the probability that a "small hit" will be derived for all or most of the times when a "big hit" is not derived, but the probability that a "small hit" will be derived is not limited to this.

Also, unlike FIG. 281, and similar to FIG. 254, below the first starting opening 5443 there is a small hit winning hole 5400 (the number of balls won when winning the small winning winning hole 5400 is, for example, 15 balls) and a transparent A small hit shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the panel 172 is arranged. The small winning shutter 6100 can be driven by a small winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small hit shutter 6100 operates in the front direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit prize opening 5400 becomes closed, and when the small win shutter 6100 operates in the backward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit prize opening 5400 closes. It becomes an open mode. If the result of the second special lottery is a "small win", the main CPU 101 displays a variable display of the second special symbol, and derives the result that it is a "small win". When the result of "small win" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the small win game state to operate the small win shutter 6100 so that the small win winning opening 5400 is in an open mode.

At the upper right side of the first starting port 5443, an out port 5444 for discharging game balls to the outside of the machine is arranged, as in FIG. 254, but this is not necessarily an essential configuration.

In addition, similarly to FIG. 281, among the game balls hit to the right, game balls that did not enter the big prize opening 540 and did not enter the accessory device 3500 are connected to the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting opening 5443. , a downstream path 5451 toward the second starting port 440, and a downstream path 5452 toward the out port 5444, for example, so as to flow down either of the downstream paths 5452 and 5444. Among these three flow paths, the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 has the highest flow rate of game balls, followed by the flow path 5451 toward the second startup port 440, which has the highest flow rate of game balls. The downstream path 5452 toward the outlet 5444 has a low flow rate.

In addition, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls flowing down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 fall into the first starting port 5443. It is designed to win prizes. Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small hit winning port 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball flowing down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 will hit the small hit winning port. It is difficult to win 5400. On the other hand, when it is impossible for a game ball to enter the first starting port 544, the game ball flowing down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first starting port 5443. He reaches the small winning opening 5400. At this time, if the small hit winning opening 5400 is in the open mode, a game ball will be won in the small winning winning opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 will send the game ball to the small winning winning opening 5400 via the payout/launch control circuit 300. Prize balls are paid out based on winnings. The game balls that have reached the small hit winning opening 5400 but have not won the small winning winning opening 5400 flow further downstream and are eventually discharged out of the machine from the out opening 57.

Further, as in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table for special symbols for low start shown in FIG. 258, for example. The variation time of the special symbol is determined, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 5442 where the game ball hit to the left can win, and a message indicating that it is a "jackpot" is displayed. When the result is derived, only the condition device of the condition device and the accessory continuous actuation device is activated. The main CPU 101, triggered by the operation of the conditional device, changes to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example. In this way, in the "normal gaming state", even if a conditional device occurs based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 5442, from the time the conditional device occurs until the accessory continuous operation device is activated. It is possible to create a time difference between the two. Then, during the period from when the condition device is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 until the accessory continuous operation device is activated, the second special symbol will fluctuate while the condition device is activated. Even if the display is performed, the result of "jackpot" will not be derived, and the main CPU 101 will control the small winning gaming state with high frequency based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. Therefore, by placing a game ball in the small winning prize opening 5400, the player can win as many prize balls as he wants. In this way, from the occurrence of the conditional device until the activation of the accessory continuous operation device, a state where prize balls can be won as much as possible due to the small winning gaming state without a result indicating a "jackpot" being derived. is guaranteed, and a specific state can be established in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in the "normal gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by referring to the variation time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258, for example, and after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, when controlled to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the end of the jackpot gaming state is used as an opportunity to change to the variable time determination table for special symbols for a high start shown in FIG. 259, for example. Good too. In this case, the main CPU 101, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" after the end of the jackpot gaming state, selects the first game ball based on the winning of the right-handed game ball into the first starting opening 5443 where the game ball can win. When the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the result of a "jackpot" is derived, only the condition device is activated between the condition device and the role item continuous activation device, and the role is activated after the condition device occurs. It becomes possible to create a time difference until the continuous operation device operates. Then, when the determined number of time-saving games are completed in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the gaming state to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state." In this "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", it becomes a non-electric support state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the first starting port 544, so the ball flows down the downstream path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443. The game ball will reach the small hit prize opening 5400. That is, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", the second special symbol was displayed in a variable manner while the conditional device was operating, from when the conditional device occurred until the accessory continuous operation device was activated. Even if the game is controlled to a small winning gaming state based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, the result of "jackpot" will not be derived. It becomes possible to enter prize balls, and you can win as many prize balls as you like. In this way, even if the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" after the jackpot gaming state ends, the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is maintained from the time the conditional device occurs until the accessory continuous operation device operates. On the condition that the transition to the "non-time-saving gaming state" is made, the state in which you can receive as many prize balls as you like in the small winning gaming state without deriving a "big hit" result is guaranteed, and the number of balls fired per unit time is guaranteed. A specific state can be set in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls exceeds 1.

In addition, in both the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment and the modified example of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the condition device is activated based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 5442. Therefore, on the premise that the condition device is in operation, a role object is displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the role object continuous activation device can operate even if the player hits left-handed. Preferably, a continuously actuated gate 3560 is provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 executes control to operate the accessory continuous operation device based on the game ball passing through the accessory continuous operation gate 3560 on the premise that the condition device is operating. In this way, by providing the accessory continuous activation gate 3560 through which the game ball can pass when the game ball is launched in a different firing mode than the accessory device 3500, for example, only the condition device is activated just before the closing time of the hall. By intentionally allowing the game ball to pass through the accessory continuous operation gate 3560 without entering the accessory device 3500 during operation, it is possible to quickly shift to the jackpot game state.

[4. Pachinko gaming machine according to fourth embodiment]
[Example of expanding game playability by arranging various parts in the game area, etc.]
The pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention and the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention have been described above. Therefore, the gameplay may be expanded as described below. A pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described below.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment has configurations not mentioned in the following description (for example, various members arranged in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine (particularly the left side area), control by the main CPU 101, and control by the sub CPU 201). The basic configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 (see FIG. 5) is the same as the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 5). However, it may have the same basic configuration as the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment (see FIG. 254). Further, the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment may have a setting function similarly to the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

Further, since the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment can employ various variations of embodiments, it will be explained separately in the first to fourth embodiments.

Note that some of the members constituting the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment are also included in the pachinko machines according to the first to third embodiments (for example, the big prize opening, etc.). For the pachinko machines according to the fourth embodiment, some are given the same reference numerals and some are given different numbers for convenience.

In this specification, the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment will be referred to as the pachinko game machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment (the second example to the fourth example will also be referred to as the pachinko game machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment). The same shall apply). On the other hand, the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be simply referred to as the pachinko game machine of the first example (the same applies to the second to seventh examples). That is, an example in which "of the fourth embodiment" is written before the example means an example of a pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, and "of the fourth embodiment" is written before the example. An example in which is not described means an example of a pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 283 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 283, in the pachinko game machine according to the first example of the fourth embodiment, a special game member 4000 is arranged on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. This special game member 4000 is composed of a large prize opening 5401, a special electric accessory 6010, a general prize opening 560, and a downstream path forming member 590 that forms a downstream path for a game ball hit right. In the special game member 4000 shown in FIG. 283, various members constituting this special game member 4000 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

Similar to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, the special electric accessory 6010 is operated by driving a shutter 6020 by a big prize opening solenoid (not shown). Transition (drive) to an open mode that makes it possible (or easy) to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 5401 and a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to enter a gaming ball into the grand prize opening 5401. configured as possible.

Note that a receiving member 3001 is formed on the upper right side of the shutter 6020 to temporarily catch a game ball hit to the right. This receiving member 3001 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the game ball flowing down, and then causing the game ball to fall to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6020.

The shutter 6020 described above is a plate-like member on which a game ball can roll in the left and right directions on its upper surface, and is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front and rear directions with respect to the transparent panel 172. When the shutter 6020 is advanced forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the big winning opening 5401 is in an open state, and when the shutter 6020 is retreating backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the big winning opening 5401 is in an open state. It becomes a closed state. When a game ball enters the big prize opening 5401, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, 15 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 300.

When the shutter 6020 is advancing forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive the game ball that is hit to the right and falls from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side). The game ball received on the side is configured to roll with the upper surface of the movable shutter 6020 facing downstream (left side).

The big prize opening 5401 is arranged at the most downstream side of the shutter 6020, and the upper surface of the shutter 6020 is opened so as to be able to receive game balls rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. However, if the shutter 6020 retreats backward in a state where there is a game ball that is rolling on the top surface of the shutter 6020 but has not yet reached the big prize opening 5401, the game ball is rolling on the top surface of the shutter 6020. The game ball falls without winning the big prize opening 5401.

Below the special electric accessory 6010, more specifically below the shutter 6020, a downstream path forming member 590 that forms a downstream path for game balls that do not win in the big prize opening 5401 is arranged. This downstream path forming member 590 has a first downstream path 5901 along which a game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3001 flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward, and a first downstream path 5901 where a game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3001 flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward. It is configured to form a second downstream path 5902 along which the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the ball 6020 flow down.

Note that the downstream path forming member 590 may be configured such that when the shutter 6020 retreats in the rear direction, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second downstream path 5902. It is not necessarily necessary that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flow down the second flow path 5902 when the shutter 6020 retreats backward. Therefore, among the game balls that were rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020, some of the game balls on the upstream side (for example, game balls that have just fallen from the receiving member 3001) follow the first downstream path 5901. It may be configured to flow downward.

The game ball that has flowed down the first downstream path 5901 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 57 without entering any winning port.

A general winning hole 560 is arranged on the downstream side of the second downstream path 5902, and all or most of the game balls flowing down the second downstream path 5902 are configured to enter the general winning hole 560. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, four prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 300.

Further, the pachinko game machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment has a first special symbol or a second special symbol, similar to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. When the variable display of is performed and a "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the jackpot 5401 is opened in a predetermined manner over a plurality of rounds. A round game of one round is a game in which the grand prize opening 5401 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30000 msec), or the grand prize opening 5401 is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls are won. That is, the big prize opening 5401 repeats opening and closing every round.

Therefore, each time the shutter 6020 retreats backward after one round of round gaming ends, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second downstream path 5902 and enters the general winning slot 560. do. For example, if a 15-round round game is executed in a jackpot game state, the number of times the shutter 6020 is retracted backward is 15 times in one jackpot game state. If the average number of game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward is, for example, 3 balls, then about 45 game balls will win the general prize in one jackpot game state. This means that there is a chance of winning 560 prizes. In this case, if the number of prize balls when one game ball enters the general winning hole 560 is four balls, there is a possibility that about 180 prize balls will be paid out.

In this way, by arranging the special game member 4000 in the game area 20 as described above (just by devising the placement positions of various structural members), a payout can be made by a jackpot game (winning into the jackpot 5401). In addition to the number of prize balls, the prize balls are paid out based on winnings in the general prize opening 560, so it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the opening mode of the big prize opening 5401 in the round game (that is, the operating mode of the shutter 6020) is not necessarily limited to opening and closing once per round, but may be performed multiple times per round, as long as there is regularity. It may also be one that performs opening and closing operations. For example, it is conceivable that one round of the game is a game in which the opening is repeated three times for 10,000 msec. In this way, in one round game, if the opening/closing operation of the grand prize opening 5401 (operating mode of the shutter 6020) is performed multiple times, there is a possibility that a larger amount of game balls will be paid out, and the game It is possible to further increase interest.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 284 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 284, in the pachinko game machine according to the second example of the fourth embodiment, a special game member 4100 is arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. This special game member 4100 includes a large winning opening 5401, a special electric accessory 6010, a general winning opening 560, a plate-shaped movable member 5602 that can change the general winning opening 560 between an open state and a closed state, and a second It is composed of a starting opening 440, a passing gate 49, a small winning opening 5400, a small winning shutter 6100, and a small winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the small winning shutter 6100. In the special game member 4100 shown in FIG. 284, various members constituting this special game member 4100 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

The special electric accessory 6010 is arranged at the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, and, like the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, the special electric accessory 6010 is located in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is connected to the big prize opening solenoid (Fig. By driving the shutter 6020 (not shown), there is an opening mode in which it is possible (or easy) to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 5401, and an opening mode in which it is impossible (or easy) to enter a gaming ball into the grand prize opening 5401. It is configured so that it can be moved (driven) into a closed mode (difficult).

The game ball hit to the right collides with the buffer member 950, thereby weakening the momentum of the game ball. Then, the game ball whose momentum is weakened by colliding with the buffer member 950 falls to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6020.

The shutter 6020 described above is a plate-like member on which a game ball can roll in the left and right directions on its upper surface, and is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front and rear directions with respect to the transparent panel 172. When the shutter 6020 is advanced forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the big winning opening 5401 is in an open state, and when the shutter 6020 is retreating backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the big winning opening 5401 is in an open state. It becomes a closed state.

The shutter 6020 is capable of receiving on the upstream side (right side) a game ball that has been hit to the right and whose momentum has been weakened by the buffer member 950 when it is advancing forward with respect to the transparent panel 172. The game balls received on the upstream side are configured to roll with the upper surface of the shutter 6020 facing the downstream side (left side).

The big prize opening 5401 is arranged at the most downstream side of the shutter 6020, and the upper surface of the shutter 6020 is opened so as to be able to receive game balls rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. However, if the shutter 6020 retreats backward in a state where there is a game ball that is rolling on the top surface of the shutter 6020 but has not yet reached the big prize opening 5401, the game ball is rolling on the top surface of the shutter 6020. The game ball falls without winning the big prize opening 5401.

Below the special electric accessory 6010, more specifically below the shutter 6020, a downstream path forming member 591 that forms a downstream path for game balls that do not win in the big prize opening 5401 is arranged. This downstream path forming member 591 forms a first downstream path 5903 through which a right-hit game ball flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward, and a first downstream path 5903 where a game ball hit to the right flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward. It is configured to form a second downstream path 5904 through which the game balls that have been rolling will flow down. The first downstream path 5903 and the second downstream path 5904 are separated by a partition wall 594 so that game balls cannot cross each other.

Note that the downstream path forming member 591 may be configured such that when the shutter 6020 retreats in the rear direction, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second downstream path 5904. It is not necessarily necessary that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flow down the second flow path 5904 when the shutter 6020 retreats backward. Therefore, among the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020, some of the game balls on the upstream side may be configured to flow down the first downstream path 5903.

In the first downstream path 5903, a general winning opening 560, a second starting opening 440, and a small winning opening 5400 are arranged in this order from the upstream side to the downstream side. Note that the small winning opening 5400 is not an essential component in the pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment.

The general winning opening 560 is movable between a closed mode in which it is closed by the movable member 5602 and it is impossible to win a game ball, and an open mode in which it is possible to win a game ball by operating the movable member 5602. There is. When the general winning hole 560 is in the open mode, it is configured such that all or most of the game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 560 and flow down the first downstream path 5903 can win.

Above the second starting port 440 are game balls that were hit to the right and flowed down the first downstream route 5903 without entering the grand prize opening 540, and also did not enter the general prize opening 560. A receiving member 3002 is formed to temporarily receive it. This receiving member 3002 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the game ball flowing down, and then causing the game ball to fall above the second starting port 440.

A guide nail that guides the game ball to the second starting port 440 is installed above the second starting port 440, and the game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3002 above the second starting port 440 is guided to the second starting port 440. It is configured so that the player is guided by the nail and wins at the second starting port 440 with a probability of about three-quarters. Note that by setting the prize ball to one when the game ball enters the second starting port 440, the expectation level will be less than 1 even if the ball is hit to the right in a normal gaming state.

The small winning opening 5400 is configured to be movable between a closed state and an open state by a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. That is, when the small hit shutter 6100 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small hit winning opening 5400 becomes closed, and when the small winning shutter 6100 retreats backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning opening 5400 closes. 5400 is the open mode. Incidentally, the game ball that falls above the second starting port 440 from the receiving member 3002 but does not enter the second starting port 440 flows down to the upstream side (right side) of the small winning shutter 6100.

Although the game ball that was hit to the right flowed down the first downstream route 5903 without entering the big winning opening 5401, it did not enter any of the general winning opening 560, the second starting opening 440, and the small winning opening 5400. The game ball is discharged from the machine through the outlet 57.

A passing gate 49 that is a trigger for normal symbol determination is arranged in the second downstream path 5904, and when the game ball passes through this passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol determination. In this normal symbol determination, a hit is determined with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%. If the result of normal symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 in an open state for, for example, about 5900 msec, and then sets it in a closed state. While the movable member 5602 is in the open state, it is facilitated to enter the game ball into the general winning hole 560. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, 15 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 300. No, the general winning hole 560 only serves as an opportunity to pay out prize balls even if a game ball wins, and does not serve as an opportunity to start variable display of special symbols (an opportunity to execute a special lottery), for example.

The pachinko game machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment includes the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, and the pachinko game machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment. Similarly to the machine, when a "jackpot" is derived by variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 controls to a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the jackpot 5401 is opened in a predetermined manner over a plurality of rounds. A round game of one round is a game in which the grand prize opening 5401 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30000 msec), or the grand prize opening 5401 is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls are won. That is, the big prize opening 5401 repeats opening and closing every round.

In addition, in a jackpot game state in which a round game is executed over a plurality of rounds, an interval period is provided between the round games, and during this interval period, the shutter 6020 is moved backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. , and the big prize opening 5401 becomes closed.

When one round of the round game ends and the shutter 6020 retreats backward, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second downstream path 5904. The game ball that has flown down this second flow path 5904 passes through the passage gate 49, and the main CPU 101 displays a fluctuating normal symbol for a very short period of time, and as a result of the normal symbol determination, it returns 100% or 100% as described above. Derive a hit with a probability close to %. When a win is derived as a result of normal symbol determination, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 in an open state for about 5900 msec so that it is possible to enter the game ball into the general winning hole 560, and about 5900 msec time elapses. Then, it becomes a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 controls the movable member 5602 so that the general prize opening 560 is in an open state during the interval period between round games. Activate. That is, at least while the general winning hole 560 is in the open mode due to the operation of the movable member 5602 (approximately 5900 msec), the big winning hole 5401 is in the closed mode, so the game ball hit to the right will be in the first downstream path 5903. Flowing down, all or most of them enter the general winning hole 560, and in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the jackpot game (winning into the big winning hole 5401), prize balls are awarded based on the winning into the general winning hole 560. is paid out, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. Note that the condition for ending the opening of the movable member 5602 is 5900 ms, but in addition to this condition, it may be closed immediately when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 balls) are made to the general winning school 560 in one opening. good. In that case, if the firing continues, there is a higher possibility of winning a predetermined number of prizes before 5900 ms elapse, so the interval period may be set shorter than 5900 ms. Alternatively, up to four normal symbols can be held, the interval period is set to 5900 ms, and after a predetermined number of wins, the movable member 5602 is opened by winning the normal symbol again, making it possible to win more prizes.

In this way, by simply arranging the positions of various structural members placed in the gaming area 20, in addition to the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game (winning into the big winning hole 5401), the number of balls paid out to the general winning hole 560 can be increased. It becomes possible to pay out prize balls based on winnings.

For example, suppose that an average of about 7 game balls enter the general winning hole 560 during one interval period, and when one game ball enters the general winning hole 560, the number of prize balls is 15 balls as described above. If so, there is a possibility that about 105 prize balls will be paid out during one interval period. If the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is, for example, 15 rounds, approximately 1575 prize balls will be paid out in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the jackpot game (winning into the jackpot 5401). It will be.

Although it is preferable that the main CPU 101 not suspend the starting memory of the normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 49, there is no problem even if the main CPU 101 suspends the starting memory of the normal symbols.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 285 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment. The pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment is what is called a type 1 type 2 type multifunction machine, and not only when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived, The main CPU 101 also controls the jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific area opened due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and is accepted into a specific opening called a V attacker. .

As shown in FIG. 285, in the pachinko game machine according to the third example of the fourth embodiment, a special game member 4200 is arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. This special game member 4200 changes the passing gate 49, the big winning opening 5402, the special electric accessory 6015, the specific opening 777, the non-specific opening 778, the general winning opening 560, and the general winning opening 560 into an open mode and a closed mode. It is composed of a plate-shaped movable member 5602 that can be moved, a second starting port 440, and the like. In the special game member 4200 shown in FIG. 285, various members constituting this special game member 4200 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

A passing gate 49, which serves as a trigger for normal symbol determination, is arranged at the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 16. When a game ball passes through this passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number, and displays the normal symbol. Make a judgment. In this normal symbol determination, a hit is determined with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%. Further, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern of the normal symbols based on the extracted normal symbol random numbers. Then, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the determined variation pattern, and the result of the normal symbol determination is derived.

On the downstream side of the passage gate 49, a large prize opening 5402 and a special electric accessory 6015 are arranged. The special electric accessory 6015 is similar to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, and the pachinko game machines of the first and second examples of the fourth embodiment, By driving the shutter 6030 by a grand prize opening solenoid (not shown), there is an opening mode in which it is possible (or easy) to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 5402, and a mode in which a game ball enters the grand prize opening 5402. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize.

More specifically, on the downstream side of the shutter 6030 than on the downstream side of the big prize opening 5402, a specific opening 777 and a non-specific opening 778 are arranged. The main CPU 101 operates the opening/closing member 5603 to open the specific opening 777 or the non-win when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "small win" is derived (the result of the special lottery is a "small win"). The game ball can enter the specific opening 778.

However, when the opening/closing member 5603 operates so that the game ball can be received into the specific port 777 or the non-specific port 778, the game ball is rarely received into the non-specific port 778, and 100% or extremely 100% of the time, A game ball enters the specific opening 777 with a probability close to %. The specific opening 777 is an opening that triggers the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters, and the non-specific opening 778 is an opening that does not trigger the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state even if a gaming ball enters. Further, the specific opening 777 and the non-specific opening 778 are not limited to openings that can accept game balls, but may be areas through which game balls can pass.

When a game ball enters the specific opening 777, the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state. On the other hand, even if a game ball is accepted into the non-specific opening 778, it will not be an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

A general winning opening 560 is arranged downstream of the specific opening 777, the non-specific opening 778, and the opening/closing member 5603. This general winning opening 560 is closed by a movable member 5602. Then, if the result of the normal symbol determination is a win, the main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 to an open state, and the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 560 is facilitated. The main CPU 101 sets the movable member 5602 to the closed state after a certain period of time has elapsed. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, one prize ball via the payout/launch control circuit 300. This general winning hole 560 only serves as an opportunity to pay out only one prize ball even if a game ball wins, and does not serve as an opportunity to start variable display of special symbols (a trigger for executing a special lottery), for example. do not have.

A second starting opening 440 is arranged downstream of the general winning opening 560. However, when the movable member 5602 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that are hit to the right and reach the movable member 5602 enter the general winning hole 560, so the game balls enter the second starting hole 440. It is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the movable member 5602 is in the closed state, the game ball that is hit to the right and reaches the movable member 5602 does not enter the general winning opening 560 and is guided above the second starting opening 440. However, even if the game ball hit to the right reaches the vicinity of the movable member 5602, not all of the game balls that have reached the movable member 5602 will fall onto the movable member 5602, but will come off the right side of the movable member 5602, There are also game balls that do not win in any of the winning ports and are ejected from the machine from the out port 57.

In the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol determination such that the probability of winning is determined to be 100% or extremely close to 100%, and the fluctuating display time of the regular symbol is Since the movable member 5602 is short, the movable member 5602 is almost fully open. Therefore, all or most of the game balls that are hit to the right and reach the movable member 5602 enter the general winning hole 560, and almost never reach the second starting hole 440.

(Game flow)
Next, the flow of the game will be explained. When the player hits right when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the game ball first passes through the passage gate 49. The main CPU 101 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 49, and derives the result of the normal symbol determination.

When the result of the normal symbol determination is derived, there is a probability of 100% or very close to 100% that the winning will be normal and the movable member 5602 will be in the open mode. Normally, even if the movable member 5602 is in the closed state when the game ball falls on the upstream side of the movable member 5602, the game ball will pass through the movable member 5602 because the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is short. During this period (until the game ball that fell on the upstream side of the movable member 5602 rolls toward the downstream side and passes the movable member 5602), the movable member 5602 becomes open and the second starting port 440 opens. Since the winning of the game ball in the second start opening 440 is inhibited, the possibility of the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 is extremely low. In other words, it can be said that the movable member 5602 is in a nearly fully open state.

By the way, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs variable display of the normal symbols based on this, but the variable display of the normal symbols is based on the opening interval time, the time during which the normal symbols are variably displayed, It consists of an ending interval time. The main CPU 101 operates the movable member 5602 based on the fact that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols has been performed and a hit has been derived (the ending interval time has also elapsed and the fluctuating display of the regular symbols has ended) to set it to the open mode. , after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the device is placed in a closed state. Therefore, for example, by setting the opening interval time and ending interval time longer, the fluctuating display time of the normal symbol can be changed to the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602 (a game ball that has fallen to the upstream side of the movable member 5602 If the time required for the ball to roll toward the downstream side and pass through the movable member 5602 is set to be longer than the time required for the ball to pass through the movable member 5602, there is a possibility that the game ball that has passed through the movable member 5602 will enter the second starting port 440. arise.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 440, the main CPU 101 performs a second special lottery and derives the result of the second special lottery after displaying a second special symbol in a variable manner. In the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, the probability that a "big hit" is derived by displaying a variable display of the second special symbol is, for example, 1/319, and a "small hit" is derived. The probability of winning is, for example, 318/319, and there is no chance of "losing". However, it may be possible to "lose" with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/319).

When the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 5602. When the movable member 5602 is in the open state, as described above, a game ball will enter the specific opening 777 with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%, and a gaming ball will hardly enter the non-specific opening 778.

When the game ball enters the specific opening 777, the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state and executes the round game over a plurality of rounds.

As described above, not all game balls that are hit to the right and reach the vicinity of the movable member 5602 head toward the movable member 5602, and some game balls head toward the out port 57. In addition, since the movable member 5602 is in an almost fully open state, the game ball hardly enters the second starting port 440 and enters the general winning port 560. However, even if a game ball wins in the general winning hole 560, the number of prize balls is one ball. Therefore, even if the player always hits to the right, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time will not exceed 1 during normal times when the player is not in a jackpot game state.

By the way, as mentioned above, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer by setting the opening interval time or the ending interval time, for example, there is a possibility that the game ball that has passed through the movable member 5602 will enter the second starting hole 440. .

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, the first pattern in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is relatively short and the first pattern in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is relatively long as the normal symbol fluctuation patterns. Two patterns are available. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern is stored, for example, in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 9). The above first pattern is shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602, and the above second pattern is shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602. It's also a long time. Then, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number based on passing through the passage gate 49, determines a fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol using the extracted normal symbol random number, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the determined normal symbol. A variable display of normal symbols is performed in a variable pattern. Therefore, if the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols is the first pattern, there is almost no possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting hole 440, and if the determined fluctuation pattern of the regular symbols is the second pattern, There is a possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting slot 440.

The main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols as the first pattern with a probability of 299/300, and determines the second pattern with a probability of 1/300, for example. When the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the second pattern and the game ball enters the second starting hole 440, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, and as mentioned above, the probability of "jackpot" is 1/319. is derived, and even if a "big hit" is not derived, a "small hit" is derived with a probability of 318/319. When the "small hit" is derived, the main CPU 101 executes control to operate the opening/closing member 5603 so that the game ball can enter the specific opening 777 or the non-specific opening 778. When the opening/closing member 5603 operates, the game ball will enter the specific opening 777 with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%, so the main CPU 101 will control the jackpot game state.

In this way, according to the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine with unprecedented new playability.

In addition, a large number of variation patterns may be prepared for the variation patterns of the normal symbols. However, it is preferable that most of the variation patterns be shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602. If a large number of variation patterns with a time longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602 are prepared, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 will increase, and the jackpot game state will occur more frequently. This is because it may end up being executed.

Furthermore, if the probability that the normal symbol variation pattern is determined as the second pattern is too low, there is a risk that the game will be less interesting because almost no game balls will pass through the opening/closing member 5603. Therefore, in the variable display of the second special symbol, which is based on the winning rate of the game ball passing through the opening/closing member 5602 and the winning rate of the game ball entering the second starting port 440, and the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440, a "small hit" is displayed. is derived, and at least one of the probability that the game ball enters the specific opening 777 when the opening/closing member 5603 is activated based on the fact that a "small hit" is derived in the variable display of the second special symbol. By appropriately changing one or more of the patterns, it is possible to increase the probability that the second pattern is selected. Then, you can not only look forward to whether or not the game ball will simply pass through the opening/closing member 5603, but also check whether the game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member 5603 will enter the second starting port 440. It is possible to entertain the player in multiple stages, such as whether or not a "small win" is derived when winning a prize, and whether the game ball enters the specific opening 777 when a "small win" is derived. Become.

[Pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 286 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 286, the pachinko game machine according to the fourth example of the fourth embodiment includes a first starting port on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in addition to the first starting port 5442 provided conventionally. ing. In order to distinguish between the two, for convenience, the first starting port located on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be referred to as the first starting port 5443, but when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442 and the first starting port. Control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when a game ball enters the opening 5443. However, the difference is that when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442, the number of prize balls is four balls, whereas when a game ball enters the first starting port 5443, the number of prize balls is one ball.

A special game member 4300 is arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. This special game member 4300 is composed of a large prize opening 540, a special electric accessory 600, a passage gate 49, the above-mentioned first starting opening 5443, a second starting opening 440, a normal electric accessory 6300, and the like.

The big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the gaming area 20.

The special electric accessory 600 has an opening mode in which it is possible (or easy) to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 540 by driving a shutter 610 by a big winning hole solenoid (not shown), and a big winning hole. It is configured to be able to be displaced (driven) into a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to enter the game ball into the mouth 540. When the game ball is in the open mode where it is easy to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 540, all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the big winning hole 540. In addition, this big prize opening 540 has a variable probability attacker (not shown) inside, and when it is detected that the game ball enters the variable probability attacker when the jackpot game state is being controlled, the main The CPU 101 controls the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state to a "high-probability time-saving gaming state" or "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state," and the jackpot is achieved without the entry of the game ball into the probability-changing attacker being detected. When the gaming state ends, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability time-saving gaming state."

On the downstream side of the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600, a passage gate 49 that is a trigger for normal symbol determination is arranged. When the game ball passes through this passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number and performs a normal symbol determination.

In addition, in normal symbol judgment, in the "normal gaming state" or "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" that is not in the electric support state, it will not be more advantageous when hitting the right hand than when hitting the left hand. Although it is determined to be a hit only with a relatively low probability, it is determined to be a win with a probability of 100% or extremely close to 100% in the "high probability time saving gaming state" or "low probability time saving gaming state" which is the electric support state.

On the downstream side of the passage gate 49 and on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, a first starting port 5443 and a normal electric accessory 6300 are arranged. The normal electric accessory 6300 includes a plate-shaped shutter 6310, a solenoid (not shown), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the solenoid to the shutter 6310.

In the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, when the game ball is in the open mode in which winning into the first starting opening 5443 is facilitated, out of the game balls hit to the right, winning into the big winning opening 543. It is configured such that all or most of the game balls that have been won enter the first starting opening 5443.

In addition, a receiving member 3000 is formed on the upper right side of the normal electric accessory 6300 to temporarily catch game balls that did not enter the big prize opening 540 among the game balls hit to the right. This receiving member 3000 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the game ball flowing down, and then causing the game ball to fall to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6310.

The shutter 6310 described above is a plate-like member on which a game ball can roll in the left and right directions on its upper surface, and as described above, is configured to be able to advance and retreat in the front and rear directions with respect to the transparent panel 172. When the shutter 6310 is located in the front direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the first starting port 5443 is in the closed state, and when the shutter 6310 is located in the rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the first starting port 5443 is in the closed state. 5443 is the open mode. When the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner and a win is derived, the main CPU 101 operates the shutter 6310 to change the first starting port 5443 from the closed state to the open state.

When the shutter 6310 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive the game ball that has fallen from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side); The game ball is configured to roll with the upper surface of the shutter 6310 facing downstream (left side).

A second starting port 440 is arranged downstream of the first starting port 5443 and the shutter 6310. However, when the first starting port 5443 is set in the open mode by the shutter 6310, all or most of the game balls that are hit to the right and reach the shutter 6310 enter the first starting port 5443, so the second starting port 440 It has become difficult to win games with game balls. On the other hand, when the first starting port 5443 is closed by the shutter 6310, the game ball that is hit to the right and reaches the shutter 6310 does not enter the first starting port 5443, but is placed above the second starting port 440. be guided to. However, even if the game ball hit to the right reaches the vicinity of the shutter 6310 (the game ball falls from the receiving member 3000), not all of the game ball will be guided to the shutter 6310, and will escape from the right side of the shutter 6310. There are also game balls that do not win in any of the winning holes and are ejected out of the machine from the out opening 57. In addition, even if the ball is guided above the second starting port 440, there are game balls that do not win in any of the winning ports including the second starting port 440 and are ejected out of the machine from the out port 57.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol determination to 100% or Since a hit is determined with a probability of extremely close to 100%, and the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is short, the shutter 6310 is almost fully open. Therefore, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," all or most of the game balls that are hit to the right and reach the shutter 6310 enter the first starting port 5443 and reach the second starting port 440. It is almost never reached. Note that when a game ball enters the first starting port 5443, the main CPU 101 pays out the prize ball via the payout/launch control circuit 300, but the number of prize balls at this time is one ball. In addition, since there are game balls that pass through the right side of the shutter 6310 and head toward the out port 57, in the "high accuracy time-saving game state" and "low-accuracy time-saving game state", the prize is awarded for the number of balls fired per unit time by right-handed hitting. The expected value of the number of pitches never exceeds 1. In the "normal gaming state" or "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" which is not the electric support state, the main CPU 101 controls the normal symbol pattern so that right-handed hitting is not more advantageous than left-handed hitting. Judgment is performed so that a hit is judged only with a relatively low probability.

On the other hand, if you move from the "high accuracy time saving gaming state" to the "high accuracy non time saving gaming state" or from the "low accuracy time saving gaming state" to the "normal gaming state", you will no longer be in the electric support state, so normal symbol judgment will not work. A hit will be determined only with a relatively low probability, and the shutter 6310, which was almost fully open, will close. This prevents the game ball from entering the first starting port 5443, and allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 440.

In the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101, in the "normal gaming state", refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258, for example. to determine the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the main CPU 101 executes a variable time determination table for special symbols for a high start as shown in FIG. 259, for example. Refer to this to determine the variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, general players play left-handed games in the "normal gaming state," and in any of the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state." In the gaming state, the game is played by hitting the ball with the right hand. In the "normal gaming state", even if you hit right, the shutter 6310 is closed, so the game ball almost never hits the first starting port 5443, and even if the game ball hits the second starting port 440. This is because, unless the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot", the variable display of the second special symbol is carried out for a long period of time, approximately 10 minutes (long variations A to C), and the player only loses.

By the way, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101, based on the jackpot type (select symbol command when winning) determined with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288, The number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game, etc. are determined.

FIG. 287 is an example of a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 288 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment. 13 and 257, the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the jackpot game state after the jackpot game is finished, To determine the type of jackpot, such as whether to turn on the variable probability flag and whether to turn on the time-saving flag in the gaming state after transitioning to the general gaming state (gaming state that is not a jackpot gaming state, the same applies hereinafter). This is the table to be referenced. Further, similarly to FIG. 257, the number of time reductions is also configured to be determined to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times.

287 and 288 differ from FIGS. 12, 13, 256, and 257 in the method of determining whether to turn on the probability change flag. In other words, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, even if the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot", the probability variation flag is turned on based on the result of the special lottery (select symbol command when winning). Rather than determining whether or not to do so, as described above, the determination is made based on whether or not the entry of the game ball into the probability-variable attacker is detected in the jackpot game state.

As shown in the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 288, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is "jackpot", the ease with which the game ball enters the probability-changing attacker is determined according to the hit selection symbol command. It's different. For example, if the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z3", the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state in a manner that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the probability-changing attacker; For example, the jackpot game state is controlled in a manner that allows the game ball to easily enter the attacker.

In the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker" is the case where the game ball enters the variable probability attacker while the jackpot game state is controlled. This is a situation where there is almost no possibility. In addition, "a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker" means that the game ball almost enters the variable probability attacker while being controlled in the jackpot gaming state (with a probability close to 100%, the game ball enters the high probability gaming state). controlled) mode.

The ease with which the game ball enters the variable attacker can be changed, for example, by the operating mode of the movable piece provided in the big prize opening 540. That is, if the winning selection symbol command is, for example, "z3", the main CPU 101 operates the movable piece in a jackpot game state in such a manner that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability-changing attacker. On the other hand, if the selected symbol command at the time of winning is, for example, "z10", the main CPU 101 operates the operating mode of the movable piece in a jackpot game state so that the game ball can easily enter the probability-changing attacker.

Note that the method of creating a mode in which it is difficult and a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the variable attacker is not limited to this. For example, it is conceivable to provide another big winning hole (not shown) that is not equipped with a variable probability attacker, in addition to the large winning hole 540 that includes a variable probability attacker inside. Then, when the game ball enters the variable probability attacker in a manner that is easy (for example, the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z10"), the jackpot game state is controlled to open the big prize opening 540, and the game to the variable probability attacker is controlled. By controlling the game to a jackpot game state in which other jackpots are opened without opening the jackpot 540 when the ball enters in a difficult manner (for example, the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z3"), It is possible to create modes in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the attacker and modes in which it is easy. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball.

Further, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, as can be seen from FIGS. 287 and 288, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the game ball is sent to the probability-changing attacker. The probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is 50% in a manner in which it is easy to enter (selected symbol commands at the time of winning are "z6" to "z11", "z13"). On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot", the jackpot game is played in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the fixed attacker (selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z20" to "z25", "z27"). The probability of being controlled by the state is 80%.

Therefore, when the jackpot gaming state ends and shifts to the "high probability time saving gaming state" or "low probability time saving gaming state", it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 440 in these gaming states. Therefore, when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in these gaming states and a "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 has a 50% probability of changing the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The game state in which the flag is turned on (“high-accuracy time-saving gaming state”, “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state”) is controlled.

Then, when the determined number of time-saving games are played without a "jackpot" being derived as a result of the special lottery in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the main CPU 101 changes the time-saving gaming state from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to " Execute control to shift to a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state. In this "high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state," when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 has an 80% probability of determining the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , the game state is controlled such that the probability change flag is turned on ("high probability time-saving gaming state", "high probability non-time saving gaming state").

As described above, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the game state is such that the probability change flag is turned on when the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot" without changing the firing mode of the game ball. It is possible to provide new game features such as being able to change the probability (hereinafter referred to as "variable probability") that is controlled according to becomes.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot gaming state shifts to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state," the timing at which the probability change probability changes (from the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state") Since the number of time-savings required before shifting to the ``definitely non-time-saving gaming state'' differs each time, the game can be more interesting.

Furthermore, by not disclosing the determined number of time savings by either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the probability of change changes, which further increases the interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, when the jackpot gaming state ends and shifts to the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-probability time-saving gaming state," it is determined whether the state is the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-probability time-saving gaming state." By not disclosing this information to either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201, it is possible to provide more interesting gameplay. That is, when in the "high probability time-saving gaming state", it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the "high probability non-time saving gaming state" (the probability of variation is increased) at an early stage. On the other hand, when the game is in the "low-probability time-saving gaming state", it is more advantageous for the player to be controlled in the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" for as long as possible. Therefore, depending on whether the current gaming state is a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or a "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," it is better to end the time-saving game earlier or later. It is possible to increase it.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot", the time saving number may be 0 (the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z12"). , "z13", [z26], "z27"). In this case, even if the number of time-savings is the same 0, after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is immediately controlled to the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" or to the "normal gaming state". It is possible to provide a unique gameplay experience. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state ends, regardless of whether it is the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is immediately entered. (the probability that the selected symbol command at the time of winning is selected as "z13" or "z27") and the probability that it is immediately controlled to the "normal gaming state" (the probability that the selected symbol command at the time of winning is selected as "z12" or "z27") The probability of being selected as "z26" is the same, but this is not limited to this, and the probability of being immediately controlled to the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" can be changed between the first special lottery and the second special lottery. You can also do this.

In addition, what can be said in common with all the above-mentioned embodiments, examples, and modified examples is that when the game ball is launched in a specific manner (for example, right-handed hitting), the game ball can win prizes with high frequency. Regarding the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 440 in FIG. 284), regardless of whether it is a winning opening with an electric support function or a winning opening without an electric support function, when a game ball wins, the main It is preferable that the number of prize balls paid out by the CPU 101 (payout/launch control circuit 300) is one. As a result, even if a player fires game balls in a specific manner during the "normal gaming state," for example, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time will not exceed 1. You can make it impossible.

[Other expansion examples, etc.]
Each embodiment, each example, and each modification example described above is an illustration, and each configuration shown in each embodiment, each example, and each modification example may be used in other embodiments, other examples, and other modification examples. It goes without saying that it is possible to partially replace or combine them. That is, each component described in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Additional note 1]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 1 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored in , the variable display and stop display of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory after the first starting memory. A display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) to perform control so that the above-mentioned symbol production (for example, A pattern performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions (temporary variation), and a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) among one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. is included, a presentation mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a presentation mode for the starting memory until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed; The performance mode determining means divides the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means into predetermined units for the starting memory until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed, A specific performance determining means (for example, step S372, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, until the variable display regarding this specific starting memory is performed. The presentation mode for the starting memory (that is, the starting memory for which variable display has not yet been performed) can be determined before variable display starts, so even if the data capacity is large, smooth display can be performed. It becomes possible to perform processing. Moreover, since the number of executions of one or more symbol performances is determined for each starting memory stored by the holding means, although it is a variable display for one starting memory, it appears that there are multiple starting memories. It appears as if a variable display is being performed on the memory, which can enhance the presentation effect. In addition, the determined number of executions of the symbol production is divided into predetermined units, and the production mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units is determined, so while further enhancing the production effect, This enables smooth processing.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), when the variable display is performed in a specific manner, Nevertheless, when the result of the win/loss judgment is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high expectation level is performed afterwards (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), the performance mode for such production mode is Players' interest decreases. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the earliest among the plurality of specific starting memories is The presentation mode is determined for starting memories up to the earliest specific starting memory that are variably displayed, and the presentation mode is not determined for starting memories that are variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. shall be.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the presentation mode determining means determines whether the particular starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. If there is no starting memory, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the starting memory that is stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means is determined. has a suggestion performance determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines a performance mode that suggests that the fluctuation performance of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though the identification symbol is not in the specific starting memory; The suggestive performance determining means is configured so as not to determine a performance mode that suggests that a fluctuating performance of the identification symbol will be performed in the specific mode when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the performance mode, so the control Although it is unlikely that the burden on players will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the expectations of players regarding the display performance. Therefore, the presentation mode for the last starting memory stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means suggests that the fluctuating presentation of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though it is not a specific starting memory. By determining the performance mode, it becomes possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation regarding the display performance. Moreover, when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, no performance mode is determined that suggests that the identification symbol variation performance will be performed in a specific manner, so that the control load does not increase.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 1, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 2]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button is displayed as a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot is displayed. There is a system in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 2 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs a variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored in , the variable display and stop display of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory after the first starting memory. A display control means (e.g., sub CPU 201) that controls the display control means (for example, sub CPU 201) to perform the display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) and a symbol performance (for example, temporary display) in which the fluctuation performance and stop performance of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. a symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions (variation); and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the performance mode determining means executes the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. A specific performance determining means (for example, a character subtraction performance) that is divided into predetermined units and determines a performance mode (for example, a character subtraction performance) to be performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. , step S370, etc.), and when the specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the performance is performed for all starting memories stored by the holding means. At the same time, the performance mode for the last starting memory stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It has a suggestion production determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines a production mode that suggests that a variation production of the identification symbol will be performed (for example, a false reach precursor production), and the suggestion production determination means When the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, the present invention is characterized in that it is configured not to decide on a performance mode that suggests that the fluctuating performance of the identification symbol will be performed in the specific mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display starts, the data capacity is large. Even if this happens, it is possible to perform the process smoothly. Moreover, since the number of executions of one or more symbol performances is determined for each starting memory stored by the holding means, although it is a variable display for one starting memory, it appears that there are multiple starting memories. It appears as if a variable display is being performed on the memory, which can enhance the presentation effect. In addition, the determined number of executions of the symbol production is divided into predetermined units, and the production mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units is determined, so while further enhancing the production effect, This enables smooth processing.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), the player's sense of expectation regarding the display effect is maintained. This may become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the starting memory stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means is determined for the starting memory. Even though the memory is not a specific starting memory, by determining a performance mode that suggests that a fluctuating display of identification symbols will be performed in a specific manner, the player's sense of expectation for the display performance is maintained. ing.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a starting hole (for example, the second starting hole 440) in which a game ball can be won, and a winning of the identification symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole. It further includes a fluctuation pattern determining means (e.g., main CPU 101) that determines a fluctuation pattern when variable display is performed, and the holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) determines when a game ball enters the starting hole. The starting memory is configured to be able to be held on hold based on the starting memory, and the symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) is configured to suspend the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball enters the starting hole. The number of executions of the symbol production for each of the symbols is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol performance determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances will be increased, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances will be decreased. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol presentation becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to understand that one or more symbol presentations are being executed for one starting memory. In addition, the number of symbol performances determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, so the number of symbol performances for each starting memory can be executed without increasing the load on the master. The number of executions can be easily determined.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 etc.), and the holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 2, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 3]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can perform processing smoothly while enhancing the presentation effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 3 includes a starting port (for example, second starting port 440) provided in the gaming area, and a display means that variably displays identification symbols based on reception of a game ball into the starting port. (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) as a starting memory in a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to , a first performance mode determining means for setting performance data related to the determined first performance mode; and a first performance mode determining means for setting performance data related to the determined first performance mode; a second performance mode determining means for determining a second performance mode and setting performance data related to the determined second performance mode; The present invention is characterized in that the second performance mode is determined using the performance data related to the determined first performance mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second performance mode is determined based on the starting memory stored by the holding means when the game ball is received in the starting slot. Although there is not enough time to display the identification symbol immediately when the identification symbol is displayed, the first performance mode is determined based on the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed. Since it is determined using performance data, it is possible to perform smooth processing even if the data capacity is large.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol presentation (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation presentation and a stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. The first performance mode determining means determines the number of symbol performances to be executed based on the starting memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol performances determined by the above is divided into predetermined units, and the performance mode to be carried out during the execution of the symbol performances divided into the predetermined units is determined regardless of the unit of the starting memory. It is characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one starting memory, From the outside, it looks as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, the determined number of executions of the symbol production is divided into predetermined units, and the production mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units is determined, so it is possible to further enhance the production effect. becomes.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 3, it is possible to perform processing smoothly while enhancing the performance effect.

[Additional note 4]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 4 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A predetermined number of display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) on which the display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as a starting memory. (For example, up to 4 items) can be stored in the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the variable presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol using the presentation time until the variable display regarding the next starting memory is performed; a special game state execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) based on a specific result; Advantageous state control means capable of controlling a subsequent gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state over different periods each time; and the display means. performance control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the display performance displayed on the screen, and the performance control means controls the number of executions of an index performance (character subtraction performance) having a predetermined level of expectation regarding the game state. and at least information related to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example, information on whether or not it is a high probability gaming state) to determine the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous gaming state the indicator performance is to be executed in. and effect predetermining means (for example, scenario presetting processing (FIG. 138)) that determines before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state according to the period (for example, the number of time reductions) during which the advantageous gaming state is controlled. , a specific performance determining means (for example, step S370, etc.) for determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state; When one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include an indicator starting memory in which the indicator effect is to be executed, the means may cause the indicator effect to be determined by the effect pre-determining means. Instead of the execution timing, the present invention is characterized by having an effect re-determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining execution in a variable display related to any one of the one or plurality of starting memories.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, although the indicator performance having a predetermined expectation level regarding the gaming state is executed in the variable display in the advantageous gaming state, the execution timing of the indicator performance is determined depending on the advantageous gaming state. Determined before being controlled. Therefore, even if the data volume is large, there is time to spare before the index performance is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the starting memory related to the indicator performance has not yet been reserved, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, the decision may be made before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. It is not always possible to perform the index effect at the specified execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when an indicator starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the indicator performance is set to one or more starting memories. The execution is re-determined in the variable display related to any of the starting memories. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index performance can be performed through smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the execution timing of the index performance determined by the performance advance determination means is displayed in the Mth variable display in a gaming state after the special game is executed. When the predetermined number that can be stored as a starting memory by the holding means is N, the performance re-determination means replaces the execution timing of the index performance determined by the performance advance determination means. In the game state after the special game is executed, in the variable display at any timing within the range of [M-(predetermined number N-1)] to [M+(predetermined number N-1)]. This is a decision to perform an index performance.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution timing of the index performance determined by the performance re-determination means is determined without being significantly deviated from the execution timing of the index performance determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include a specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner. The effect re-determining means further includes specific start determining means (for example, step S330, etc.) for determining whether or not the specific start memory is stored in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. When it is determined that the specific start memory includes a variable display, it is determined that the variable display is performed in any one of the start memories until the variable display related to the specific start memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), the control The index performance can be performed through smooth processing without excessively increasing the burden on the operator. That is, if the specific starting memory is included in the starting memory stored by the holding means, it will be necessary to re-determine the performance mode, which may increase the burden on control. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is included in the starting memory stored by the holding means, the starting memory is stored until the variable display regarding the specific starting memory is performed. Since the performance mode is determined for each, the control burden can be reduced as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 4, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 5]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to suppress the decline in interest. To provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 5 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A predetermined number of display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) on which the display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as a starting memory. When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the display for the next starting memory after the one starting memory is performed. a display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the identification symbol to perform a variable presentation and a stop presentation using a presentation time until the variable display is performed; A special game state execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) based on a certain fact; Advantageous state control means that can control advantageous gaming states (for example, time-saving gaming states and high-probability gaming states) that are advantageous to players over different periods each time, and an indicator effect (character subtraction effect) that has a predetermined level of expectation regarding the gaming state. ) and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous gaming state the indicator effect is to be executed at least based on information related to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example, whether it is a high probability gaming state or not). information) and the period during which the advantageous gaming state is controlled (for example, the number of time reductions), the performance predetermining means (for example, the scenario presetting process (Fig. 138)) and the number of executions of symbol presentations that can determine the number of executions of symbol presentations (for example, temporary variations) in which the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identified symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. a determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state. ), and the presentation mode determining means determines whether one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include an indicator starting memory in which the indicator presentation is executed. The indicator effect execution determining means (for example, step S338, etc.) and the indicator effect execution determining means determine that the indicator starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. At this time, instead of the execution timing determined by the performance predetermining means, the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbol performance is divided into the predetermined units. The present invention is characterized by comprising a performance re-determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines in which of the symbol performances the index performance is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, although the indicator performance having a predetermined level of expectation regarding the gaming state is executed in the gaming state after the special gaming state has been executed, the execution timing of the indicator performance is , is determined before being controlled to an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, even if the data volume is large, there is time to spare before the index performance is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the starting memory related to the indicator performance has not yet been reserved, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, the decision may be made before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. It is not always possible to perform the index effect at the specified execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when an indicator starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the indicator performance is set to one or more starting memories. The execution is re-determined in the variable display related to any of the starting memories. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index performance can be performed through smooth processing.

Moreover, since the number of executions of one or more symbol performances is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, although the display is variable for one starting memory, it appears that there are multiple starting memories. It appears as if a variable display is being performed, which can enhance the presentation effect. Furthermore, since the determined number of executions of the symbol presentation is divided into predetermined units and the index presentation is executed in any of the symbol presentations divided into the predetermined units, it is possible to further enhance the presentation effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the indicator performance execution determining means may include an indicator start memory in which the indicator performance is executed in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. Although it is determined whether or not it is included, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, it is not determined which starting memory among the plurality of starting memories the index effect is executed. It is characterized by being configured so that it does not occur.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not an index starting memory is included; Since it is not determined whether the index performance is executed based on the starting memory, the performance effect can be enhanced without increasing the control load. The reason why it is not determined which starting memory among the plurality of starting memories is used to execute the index performance is that even if the index starting memory is included among the plurality of starting memories, it is determined by the performance advance determination means. This is because the execution timing is determined again.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the performance mode determining means may include a specific start in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. When a memory (reach or jackpot) is included, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine the performance mode for the starting memory until a variable display regarding the specific starting memory is performed. .

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the interest It is possible to suppress the decrease in In other words, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), when the variable display is performed in a specific manner, Nevertheless, when the result of the win/loss judgment is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high expectation level is performed afterwards (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), the performance mode for such production mode is Players' interest decreases. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Since the presentation mode is determined for the starting memory until the variable display is performed, and the presentation mode is not determined for the starting memory that is variably displayed after the specific starting memory, the interest decreases. can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 5, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 6]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 6 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A predetermined number of display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) on which the display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as a starting memory. When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the display for the next starting memory after the one starting memory is performed. a display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the identification symbol to perform a variable presentation and a stop presentation using a presentation time until the variable display is performed; A special game state execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) that can execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) based on a certain fact, and a game state after the special game is executed. It has an advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high probability gaming state) over a different period each time, and has a predetermined degree of expectation regarding the gaming state. The number of executions of the indicator effect (character subtraction effect) and the execution timing for executing the indicator effect in which variable display in the advantageous gaming state are determined based on at least information related to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example, high (information on whether or not it is a probability gaming state) and the period during which the advantageous gaming state is controlled (for example, the number of time reductions). , scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) and the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identified symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Determinable symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and performance mode determination capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state. means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the index performance includes a first index performance that has a relatively high expectation level (for example, a subtraction performance of an enemy character), and a first index performance that is higher than the first index performance. At least a second index performance having a relatively low expectation level (for example, a subtraction performance of an ally character) is included, and the performance advance determination means is configured to determine the performance of each of the first index performance and the second index performance. The execution timing is determined, and the effect mode determining means includes a first indicator start memory and/or in which the first indicator effect is executed in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. indicator performance execution determining means (for example, step S338, etc.) for determining whether or not a second indicator start memory in which the second indicator performance is executed is included; and one or more start-ups stored by the holding means. When the indicator effect execution determining means determines that the memory includes the first indicator starting memory and/or the second indicator starting memory, the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means. Instead, the number of executions of the symbol production determined by the number of symbol production executions determining means is divided into predetermined units, and in any of the symbol productions divided into the predetermined units, the first index production or/and the The present invention is characterized by comprising a performance re-determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining whether to execute the second index performance.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as the indicator effects having a predetermined level of expectation regarding the gaming state, there is a first indicator effect having a relatively high level of expectation, and a first indicator effect having a relatively lower level of expectation than the first indicator level. A second indicator effect having a certain degree is provided. Although both the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance are executed in the variable display in the advantageous gaming state, the execution timing of the first indicator performance and/or the second indicator performance is different from that in the advantageous gaming state. determined before being controlled by. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is time to spare before the first indicator effect and/or the second indicator effect is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the starting memory for the first indicator performance and/or the second indicator performance has not yet been suspended, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, the advantageous gaming state may be It is not always possible to perform the first indicator performance and/or the second indicator performance at the execution timing determined before the game state is controlled. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when an indicator starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the first indicator effect and/or the second indicator effect is changed. , the execution is re-determined at the variable display associated with any one of the one or more starting memories. Thereby, even if the data capacity is large, the index performance can be performed through smooth processing. In addition, when re-determining the execution timing of the first indicator performance and/or the second indicator performance, it is preferable that the execution order of the first indicator performance and/or the second indicator performance determined by the performance advance determination means is maintained. .

Moreover, since the number of executions of one or more symbol performances is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, although the display is variable for one starting memory, it appears that there are multiple starting memories. It appears as if a variable display is being performed, which can enhance the presentation effect. In addition, the number of executions of the determined symbol production is divided into predetermined units, and the first indicator production and/or second indicator production is executed in any of the symbol productions divided into the predetermined units, so that further production is possible. It becomes possible to enhance the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the indicator performance execution determining means may include the first indicator starting memory and/or the first indicator starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. Although it is determined whether or not a two-index starting memory is included, when there is a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, in which one of the plurality of starting memories is the first indicator performance or / and is configured such that it does not determine whether the second indicator effect is executed, and the first indicator start memory and the second indicator start memory are stored in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. When both memorizations are included, the execution order of the first indicator effect and the second indicator effect is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there is a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether the first indicator starting memory and/or the second indicator starting memory is included. However, since it is not determined in which of the plurality of starting memories the first index performance and/or the second index performance will be executed, the performance effect is enhanced without increasing the control load. be able to. The reason why it is not determined in which of the plurality of starting memories the first indicator effect and/or the second indicator effect is executed is because the first indicator memory and/or the second indicator effect is executed in the plurality of starting memories. This is because even if the memory is included, the execution timing determined by the performance advance determination means will be re-determined. However, if both the first indicator starting memory and the second indicator starting memory are included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the execution order of the first indicator effect and the second indicator effect I'm trying to make a judgment about that. This is because when re-determining the execution timing of the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance, the execution order of the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance determined by the performance advance determination means is maintained. It is.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the production mode determining means selects a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) from one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. is included, the present invention is characterized in that it is configured to determine the performance mode for the starting memory until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), the interest It is possible to suppress the decrease in In other words, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), even if the variable display is performed in a specific manner, Nevertheless, when the result of the win/loss judgment is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high expectation level is performed afterwards (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), the performance mode for such production mode is Players' interest decreases. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Since the presentation mode is determined for the starting memory until the variable display is performed, and the presentation mode is not determined for the starting memory that is variably displayed after the specific starting memory, the interest decreases. can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 6, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 7]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 7 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A predetermined number of display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) on which the display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as a starting memory. (For example, up to 4 items) can be stored in the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the variable presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol using the presentation time until the variable display regarding the next starting memory is performed; a special game state execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) based on a specific result; Advantageous state control means (for example, step S171, etc.) capable of controlling a later gaming state to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high probability gaming state); Symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state, The presentation mode determining means divides the pattern presentation of the number of executions determined by the pattern presentation execution number determining device into predetermined units, and generates pattern presentations divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Specific performance determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the game, timing determining means (for example, scenario The presetting process (FIG. 138), step S370, etc.) and the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include a specific starting memory in which a specific effect (for example, reach variation) is executed, and When the execution timing of the specific performance and the execution timing of the index performance do not overlap, the symbol performance (for example, temporary variation) determined for each of one or more starting memories stored by the holding means ), the number of executions of the symbol presentation in which the index presentation is performed is subtracted from the number of executions of the pattern presentation until the specific presentation is executed, and the specific presentation is performed prior to the specific presentation. The present invention is characterized by having a suggestive performance execution determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines the number of symbol performances that can be executed with a suggestive performance (ready-to-reach sign) that suggests that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display starts, the data capacity is large. Even if this happens, it is possible to perform the process smoothly. Moreover, since the number of executions of one or more symbol performances is determined for each starting memory stored by the holding means, although it is a variable display for one starting memory, it appears that there are multiple starting memories. It appears as if a variable display is being performed on the memory, which can enhance the presentation effect. In addition, the determined number of executions of the symbol production is divided into predetermined units, and the production mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units is determined, so while further enhancing the production effect, This enables smooth processing.

Further, although the specific starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the specific effect related to the specific starting memory and the execution timing of the index effect do not overlap. In this case, the number of symbol performances that can carry out the suggestive performance (ready-to-reach sign) is determined by subtracting the number of executions of the index performance from the total number of executions of the symbol performance until the specific performance is executed. Therefore, the execution timing of any of the specific performance, index performance, and suggestion performance can be determined before the variable display starts, so that smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the index performance and the suggestion performance can be executed at suitable timing, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the suggested performance execution determining means includes the specific starting memory among one or more starting memories stored by the holding means and the specific starting memory. If the execution timing and the execution timing of the index performance overlap, the execution of the symbol performance (for example, temporary variation) determined for each of the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. From the total number, subtract 1 from the number of executions of the symbol presentation in which the index presentation is performed to determine the number of pattern presentations in which the suggestive presentation (ready-to-reach sign) performed prior to the specific presentation can be executed. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the execution timing of the specific performance and the execution timing of the index performance overlap, the index performance is executed while the specific performance is being executed, so the above-mentioned Since the specific performance and the indicator performance are performed overlappingly due to the flow of the suggestive performance, the performance effect can be enhanced.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means, The holding performance control means is characterized in that it controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 7, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 8]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 8 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; and a display means. A special game execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) that can execute a special game advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed, and an effect executed in a gaming state after the special game is executed , a first index performance that has a relatively high expectation level (for example, a subtraction performance for an enemy character) and a second index performance that has a relatively lower expectation level than the first index performance (for example, a subtraction performance for an ally character). At least an indicator effect (effect) is prepared, and an indicator effect timing determining means (for example, scenario presetting processing (FIG. 138), step S370, etc.) that determines the execution timing of each of the first indicator effect and the second indicator effect. , determining whether a specific effect (for example, a reach effect) in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner and the first indicator effect and/or the second indicator effect are performed in the same variable display. a duplication determining means (for example, step S346, etc.); and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; The presentation mode determining means determines that the first indicator presentation is performed in the variable display where the specific presentation is performed when it is determined that the specific presentation and the first indicator presentation are performed in the same variable display. a first performance mode determining means (e.g., step S350, etc.) to perform the specific performance, and when it is determined that the specific performance and the second index performance are performed in the same variable display, the first performance mode determining means (for example, step S350, etc.); The present invention is characterized by comprising a second performance mode determining means for determining not to perform the second indicator performance.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as the indicator effects having a predetermined level of expectation regarding the gaming state, there is a first indicator effect having a relatively high level of expectation, and a first indicator effect having a relatively lower level of expectation than the first indicator level. A second indicator effect having a certain degree is provided. Further, it is determined whether the first indicator performance and/or the second indicator performance is executed when a specific performance (for example, a reach performance) is being performed. Here, when the index performance executed while the specific performance is being performed is the first indicator performance, the specific performance and the first indicator performance are performed in the same variable display. On the other hand, when the index performance executed while the specific performance is being performed is the second indicator performance, the specific performance and the second indicator performance are not performed in the same variable display. In other words, if the first index effect is performed during execution of a variable display performed in a specific manner, both effects can give the player a relatively high sense of expectation. We are trying to make sure that the index performance is performed. On the other hand, even if the second indicator performance is performed during execution of a variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with even higher expectations, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the specific effect and the second indicator effect are not performed in the same variable display. In this way, the presentation effect is suitably enhanced.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one. Furthermore, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification symbol that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification symbol that is performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol presentation (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation presentation and a stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. A symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) that can determine the number of executions, and the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means are divided into predetermined units, and the unit of the starting memory is divided into predetermined units. The performance mode determining means further includes a specific performance determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units, regardless of the performance, and the performance mode determining means Prior to the performance, the present invention is characterized by having a suggestive performance execution determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines the number of symbol performances that can execute a suggestive performance (ready-to-reach sign) that suggests that the specific performance will be performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since a suggestive performance (ready-to-reach sign) indicating that a specific performance will be performed is executed prior to the specific performance, the performance effect can be further enhanced.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means, The holding performance control means is characterized in that it controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 8, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 9]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the production effect can be enhanced by increasing the types of production, for example, data such as video has a large data volume, so if the production is not performed effectively, not only will the interest decrease, but the control load will increase. Undesirable.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively perform performances.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 9 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) on which variable display is performed, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as starting memory. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) and a starting memory stored by the holding means before the specific starting memory, It is determined whether or not to execute a first effect (for example, a black effect) having a predetermined expectation level with respect to the winning/losing determination result regarding the starting memory, and the first effect is also executed for the specific starting memory. A first effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) that determines whether or not to execute the first effect, and a start memory that is a different effect from the first effect and stored by the holding means, A second performance (for example, a movable accessory performance) having a predetermined degree of expectation with respect to the winning/losing judgment result for the last stored specific starting memory is transferred to all starting memories stored by the holding means. a second performance execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for determining whether or not to execute the first performance; is characterized by comprising a second effect non-execution determining means for changing the second effect not to be executed for the specific starting memory when it is determined to execute the second effect for the specific starting memory. shall be.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if it is determined to execute the second effect for a specific starting memory, it is determined not to execute the first effect for the specific starting memory. When the game is running, the second effect is not performed for a specific starting memory, so there is no need to perform a meaningless effect, which not only suppresses the loss of interest but also makes the effect more effective. becomes possible. In other words, even if it has been decided that the second effect will be executed for a specific starting memory, if it has been decided that the first effect will not be executed for the specific starting memory, then the second effect will not be executed for the specific starting memory. Expectations aren't that high. Therefore, even if it is determined that the second effect is to be executed for a specific starting memory, the execution of the meaningless effect can be omitted by changing the second effect so that it is not executed. This is to ensure an effective performance.

Note that "performing the first effect (second effect) on the starting memory" means executing the first effect (second effect) that changes the suspended effect image itself indicating that the starting memory is stored. executing the first effect (second effect) on a pending effect image indicating that the starting memory is stored; (2nd performance).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a winning or loss of a starting memory other than the specific starting memory with respect to a starting memory stored by the holding means before the specific starting memory. Further comprising a third effect confirmation means (for example, step S205, etc.) for confirming whether or not it has been decided to execute a third effect having a predetermined degree of expectation based on the result of the determination, and the first effect is executed. When it is determined that the third effect is to be executed for the earlier start memory stored by the holding means before the specific start memory, the determining means is configured to perform the third effect on the earlier start memory stored by the holding means before the specific start memory. The present invention is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to execute the first effect on the starting memory between the memory and the memory.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for a starting memory in which it has been determined that the third effect is to be executed, the specific starting memory and the previous effect are processed without determining whether to execute the first effect. Since the first effect is executed for the starting memory between the starting memory and the starting memory, an effective effect can be performed without unnecessarily increasing the control load.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 9, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can effectively perform performances.

[Additional note 10]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the production effect can be enhanced by increasing the types of production, for example, data such as video has a large data volume, so if the production is not performed effectively, not only will the interest decrease, but the control load will increase. Undesirable.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively perform performances.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 10 includes a lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a win/loss determination (e.g., jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a win/loss determination (e.g., jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; A display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display is performed and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) are stored in a predetermined starting memory. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a number (for example, 4), and a winning/losing judgment regarding a specific starting memory that was held last among the starting memories held by the holding means. A first effect (for example, a countdown effect) that can suggest the result of is continuously executed from a variable display for a starting memory stored before the specific starting memory to a variable display for the specific starting memory. A first effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) that determines whether or not to perform a winning or losing operation, and at least when a variable display is performed regarding the specific starting memory, the result of the winning/losing judgment regarding the specific starting memory is displayed. a second performance execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) that determines whether or not to execute a second performance that may be suggested (for example, a movable accessory performance) separately from whether or not to execute the first performance; , wherein the first effect executed from a variable display for a starting memory stored before the specific starting memory continues until the variable display for the specific starting memory. When executed, the winning/losing judgment result for the specific starting memory is determined to be a winning or is likely to be a winning, and the execution continues until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed. If not, it is determined that the result of the win/fail judgment for the specific starting memory is a failure or there is a high possibility that the result is a failure, and the above-mentioned variable display for the specific starting memory is When it is determined not to continue to execute the first effect and it is determined to execute the second effect in the variable display for the specific starting memory, in the variable display for the specific starting memory. The present invention is characterized in that it further includes second performance non-execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for changing the second performance not to be performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is determined that the first effect will not be continuously executed until the variable display regarding the specific starting memory is performed, and the second effect is executed at the variable display regarding the specific starting memory. When it is decided to do so, the variable display for the specific starting memory is changed so as not to perform the second effect, so there is no need to perform meaningless effects, and this not only suppresses the loss of interest, but also It becomes possible to perform the performance effectively. In other words, if the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display for the specific starting memory, the result of the win/loss determination for the specific starting memory is determined to be a loss, or there is a high possibility that it is a loss. . Even in such a case, if the second effect is performed in the variable display for a specific starting memory, not only will the effect be meaningless, but there is a risk that the interest will be diminished. Therefore, even if it has been decided to execute the second effect in the variable display for a specific starting memory, by changing the second effect not to be executed, the execution of meaningless effects can be omitted and the effect It was designed so that a similar performance could be performed.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can effectively perform performances.

[Additional note 11]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 11 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning/losing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that displays a predetermined effect image. , a display control means (e.g., display control circuit 204) capable of executing control related to the variation presentation of the identification symbol and control related to the expected presentation image based on the result of the win/loss determination, and a predetermined presentation sound. a sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) that controls the output of the sound output control means, the display control means controlling a sound output control means to output an effect that has a predetermined expectation level for the result of the win/loss determination. a specific effect control means (for example, step S903) that controls the expected effect image to be displayed without displaying the variable effect of the identification symbol; The information image display control means (for example, step S905) controls the information image related to the display means to be displayed on the display means, and the sound output control means controls when the specific effect control means causes the variation effect of the identification symbol to be displayed on the display means. When the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol is not displayed, the muting means does not output the fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating performance of the identification symbol (for example, step S904), and when the fluctuating performance of the identification symbol is not displayed by the information image display control means, the fluctuation of the identification symbol. The present invention is characterized by having a variable sound control means (for example, step S906) that outputs a variable sound related to the effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and to perform processing smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. Note that information images related to gaming machines include, for example, information that is desired to be communicated to players and hall attendants, regardless of the result of winning or losing determination. Specific examples include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, and a recovery screen after a power outage.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the information image display control means cuts off the power when the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol is displayed as an information image related to the gaming machine, and then restores the power. The restored image (for example, FIG. 167(C)) is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the recovery image after a power outage, even if the recovery image is displayed and the variation effect of the identification symbol cannot be visually recognized, it is possible to understand that the variation effect of the identification symbol is being performed. .

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 11, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 12]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary note 12 displays a variable display of an identification symbol when a predetermined starting condition is met, and displays a winning/losing result when the identification symbol stops (e.g., a liquid crystal display device). 16), an operation means (performance button 62) that can be operated by the player, and based on the operation of the operation means within a predetermined period, perform a lottery for execution of a specific performance based on the result of the win/loss determination; a first performance execution means (FIG. 164(B)) that executes the specific performance based on the execution lottery; and a second performance execution means (FIG. 164(C)) that executes the specific performance, and the first performance execution means executes the specific performance when the operating means is not operated within the predetermined period. First, the second effect execution means does not execute the specific effect when the first effect execution means executes the specific effect within the same variable display, and the second effect execution means does not perform the specific effect when the operation means operates within the predetermined period. If the specific performance is not executed by the first performance execution means because the specific performance is not executed, the specific performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the operating means is not operated, the specific notification mode is not executed, and when the specific notification mode is executed, the specific notification mode is further executed. It will never be executed. On the other hand, if the specific notification mode has not been executed yet, the specific notification mode can be executed. This makes it possible to omit unnecessary processing without causing any discomfort, and to perform processing smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 12, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 13]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display symbols variably, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played. For example, up to four symbols can be variably displayed as starting memories, and variable display is performed for each starting memory.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the game results are displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, a special game may be played). (Refer to Publication No. 2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display effect is performed only for the starting memory unit, so if the display effect is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the variable display of symbols may be lost, and interest may decline at that point.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to prevent the player from becoming conscious of the display performance in units of starting memory, and to preferably suppress a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 13 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored in , the variable display and stop display of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory after the first starting memory. a display control means for controlling such that the above is performed, and a display control means for controlling the starting memory stored by the holding means to determine the number of executions of a symbol presentation (for example, a temporary variation) in which a variation presentation and a stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed. Determinable symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) and a specific starting memory (for example, a starting memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) among one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. ), a presentation mode determining means (for example, step S332, etc.) capable of determining a presentation mode for the starting memory until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed; The performance mode determining means is configured to perform a variable display first among the plurality of specific starting memories when a plurality of the specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. The method determines the presentation mode for the starting memory until the variable display is performed for the earliest specific starting memory that is displayed, and the presentation mode for the starting memory until the variable display for the earliest specific starting memory is performed. On the other hand, by dividing the number of executions of the symbol production (for example, temporary fluctuation) determined by the number of symbol production execution determination means into predetermined units, the symbols are divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. The present invention is characterized by having a specific performance determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) that determines the performance mode (for example, character subtraction performance) to be performed during the execution of the performance.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific manner. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is a failure, even if a production mode that can give the player a high sense of expectation is performed afterwards (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), such production The player's interest in the aspect decreases. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the earliest among the plurality of specific starting memories is The presentation mode is determined for starting memories up to the earliest specific starting memory that are variably displayed, and the presentation mode is not determined for starting memories that are variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. That is.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. I can do it.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the presentation mode determining means determines whether the particular starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. If there is no starting memory, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the starting memory that is stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means is determined. Although it is not the specific starting memory, a performance mode (for example, a false reach precursor performance) that suggests that a variation performance of the identified symbol will be performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation performance) is determined. It has a suggestive effect determining means (for example, step S366, etc.), and the suggestive effect determining means is configured to perform a fluctuating effect of the identification symbol in the specific manner when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured so that it does not decide on a presentation mode that suggests.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the performance mode, so the control Although it is unlikely that the burden on players will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the expectations of players regarding the display performance. Therefore, the presentation mode for the last starting memory stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means suggests that the fluctuating presentation of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though it is not a specific starting memory. By determining the performance mode, it becomes possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation regarding the display performance. Moreover, when the starting memory is not memorized by the holding means, an increase in control load is also suppressed because a presentation mode that suggests that a variation presentation of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner is not determined. .

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 13, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the display performance in units of starting memory, and to suitably suppress a decline in interest.

[Additional note 14]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that display symbols variably, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played. For example, up to four symbols can be variably displayed as starting memories, and variable display is performed for each starting memory.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the game results are displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, a special game may be played). (Refer to Publication No. 2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display effect is performed only for the starting memory unit, so if the display effect is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the variable display of symbols may be lost, and interest may decline at that point.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to prevent the player from becoming conscious of the display performance in units of starting memory, and to preferably suppress a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 14 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs a variable display of identification symbols based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored in , the variable display and stop display of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory after the first starting memory. A display control means (e.g., sub CPU 201) that controls the display control means (for example, sub CPU 201) to perform the display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) and a symbol performance (for example, temporary display) in which the fluctuation performance and stop performance of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. a symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions (variation); and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the performance mode determining means executes the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. a specific performance determining means that divides into predetermined units and determines a presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory; Or, when a specific starting memory (for example, a starting memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) is not included in the plurality of starting memories, the performance mode is determined for all starting memories stored by the holding means. At the same time, the presentation mode for the last starting memory stored by the holding means is changed to the presentation mode of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. The present invention is characterized by having a suggestive performance determining means (for example, step S356, etc.) that determines a performance mode that suggests that a variable performance will be performed (for example, a false reach precursor performance).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may become difficult to do so. Therefore, in this case, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode is determined for all starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode is determined for the starting memory stored last by the holding means (variable display is performed last). By determining the presentation mode for the starting memory to be a presentation mode that suggests that a fluctuating presentation of identification symbols will be performed in a specific manner even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, the player can We are trying to maintain a sense of expectation.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a starting hole (for example, the second starting hole 440) in which a game ball can be won, and a winning of the identification symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole. It further includes a fluctuation pattern determining means (e.g., main CPU 101) that determines a fluctuation pattern when variable display is performed, and the holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) determines when a game ball enters the starting hole. The starting memory is configured to be able to be held on hold based on the starting memory, and the symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) is configured to suspend the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball enters the starting hole. The number of executions of the symbol production for each of the symbols is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol performance determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances will be increased, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances will be decreased. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol presentation becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to understand that one or more symbol presentations are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means, The holding effect control means is characterized in that it controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. I can do it.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 14, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by using the movable body performance and suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 15]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that determine wins and losses, and execute games advantageous to the player according to the results of this determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/loss determination is displayed, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body is activated to make the player expect that the result of the win/loss determination is an advantageous result. There is something that can be enhanced.

As such a movable object effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable object is moved by the expansion and contraction movement of a pantograph and the movable object is tilted at the same time as the expansion and contraction movement of the pantograph begins (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229582 reference).

However, for example, in the game machine of Patent Document 1, multiple operations by the movable body, such as movement and tilting of the movable body, can be grasped at the time the movable body starts operating, and there is a limit to improving the performance effect. There was a risk that interest would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and its purpose is to suppress the decline in interest by enhancing the presentation effect by using movable body presentation.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 15 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored in , the variable display and stop display of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory after the first starting memory. a display control means for controlling such that the above is performed, and a display control means for controlling the starting memory stored by the holding means to determine the number of executions of a symbol presentation (for example, a temporary variation) in which a variation presentation and a stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed. Determinable symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and performance mode determining means that can determine the performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means (for example, step S372). etc.), and the production mode determining means includes a specific starting memory (for example, a starting memory in which a reach variation production is recorded) among the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. when not, a performance target number determining means for determining the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined, such that the number is different each time; In doing so, the number of executions of the symbol production (for example, temporary fluctuation) determined by the number of symbol production execution determination means is divided into predetermined units, and is divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. A specific performance determining means for determining a performance mode (for example, character subtraction performance) to be performed during the execution of the symbol performance, and a performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means, Suggestion performance determination that determines a performance mode that suggests that a fluctuating performance of the identification symbol will be performed in the specific mode (for example, a false reach precursor performance) even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. The method is characterized in that it has a means (for example, step S356).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the starting memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation), the player's sense of expectation regarding the display performance is maintained. This may become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is determined is determined to be a different number each time, and the last stored starting memory (last variable display By determining the presentation mode for the starting memory to be a presentation mode that suggests that a fluctuating presentation of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, the display To maintain the players' sense of expectation regarding the performance.

In addition, the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is determined is determined to be a different number each time. So that it is not easily understood that the variable display is not performed (even if a production mode that suggests that a variable display of the identification symbol will be displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggested production mode is false). This is for the purpose of

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a starting hole (for example, the second starting hole 440) in which a game ball can be won, and a winning of the identification symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole. It further includes a fluctuation pattern determining means (for example, step S57, etc.) that determines a fluctuation pattern when the variable display is performed, and the holding means selects the starting memory based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting hole. is configured to be able to hold the number of executions of the symbol production, and the symbol production execution number determining means determines the number of executions of the symbol production for the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball enters the starting hole. This is characterized in that the determination is made based on the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol performance determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances will be increased, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances will be decreased. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol presentation becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to understand that one or more symbol presentations are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means, The holding effect control means is characterized in that it controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. I can do it.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 15, it is possible to enhance the performance effect through the movable body performance and suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 16]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 16 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs a variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; and a display means. A special game execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) that can execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) when a specific result is displayed, and a game after the special game is executed. An indicator performance timing determining means (for example, scenario presetting processing (FIG. 138), etc.) that determines in advance the execution timing of an index performance (subtraction performance) having a predetermined degree of expectation regarding the gaming state as a performance executed in the state. , performance mode determining means (for example, step S374, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, and one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. performance information determining means (e.g., , step S346, etc.), and when the indicator start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the effect mode determining means sets the indicator effect to the Instead of the execution timing determined by the index performance timing determining means, performance re-determination means (for example, step S372 etc. ), and the performance re-determination means determines the performance information to the effect that the specific starting memory and the index starting memory are included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When determined by the means, it may be determined that the indicator effect for the indicator start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the specific start memory, regardless of the execution timing determined by the indicator effect timing determining means. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, since the execution timing of the index performance is determined in advance, even if the data capacity of the index performance is large, there is time leeway before the index performance is performed, so the execution timing is determined in advance. It becomes possible to perform various processing. Furthermore, when one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include a specific starting memory and an indicator starting memory, regardless of the execution timing determined by the indicator presentation timing determining means, the specific starting memory and the indicator starting memory are included. Since it is determined that the index performance regarding the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display regarding the start memory, the performance effect can also be enhanced. In other words, if an indicator effect is performed during execution of a variable display performed in a specific manner, if the level of expectation for the indicator effect is relatively low, the player may It is difficult to have a sense of expectation. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with even higher expectations, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, when a specific starting memory and an index starting memory are included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, an indicator effect is performed before the variable display of the specific starting memory. By doing so, the performance effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance mode determining means may include the specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. The present invention is characterized in that the present invention is configured to determine an effect mode for the starting memory until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed when the specific starting memory is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect), It is possible to suppress a decline in interest. That is, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific manner. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is a failure, even if a production mode that can give the player a high sense of expectation is performed afterwards (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), such production The player's interest in the aspect decreases. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (2) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Since the performance mode is determined for the starting memory until the variable display is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 16, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 17]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 17 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; and a display means. A special game execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) that can execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) when a specific result is displayed, and a start memory stored by the suspension means. On the other hand, a symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of a symbol performance (for example, temporary variation) in which a fluctuation performance and a stop performance of the identification symbol are performed; As a performance executed in the game state after being executed, a first index performance with a relatively high expectation level (for example, a subtraction performance of an enemy character) and a relatively lower expectation level than the first index performance. At least a second indicator effect (e.g., a subtraction effect of an ally character) is prepared, and an indicator effect timing determining means (e.g., , scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) and a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the identification symbol is varied in a specific manner, the first indicator effect or/and the first indicator effect is performed. A duplication determining means (for example, step S346) that determines whether or not a two-index performance is to be performed; and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) that can determine the performance mode for the starting memory stored by the holding means. ), and the performance mode determining means determines the performance mode determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means in determining the performance mode for the one or more starting memories that are the target of determining the performance mode. a specific production determining means for dividing the number of symbol productions into predetermined units and determining a presentation mode to be performed during execution of the pattern production divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory; When the duplication determination means determines that the second indicator presentation will be performed when the presentation is performed, it is determined that the second indicator presentation is performed in a symbol presentation before the specific presentation is performed. Accordingly, the present invention is characterized in that it includes an indicator performance timing re-determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) that prevents the second indicator performance from being performed when the specific performance is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of each of the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance is determined in advance, even if the data capacity of the first indicator performance and/or the second indicator performance is large, Also, since there is sufficient time before the first indicator effect and/or the second indicator effect is performed, it is possible to perform the process smoothly. In addition, when it is determined that the second indicator effect will be performed when a specific effect (for example, a reach variation effect) is performed, the second indicator effect will be performed in a symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. By determining this, the second index performance is not performed when the specific performance is performed, so that the performance effect can also be enhanced. That is, if the second indicator performance is performed during execution of a variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with even higher expectations, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, by performing the second indicator performance in the symbol performance before the specific performance, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Note that if the first indicator effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before all enemy characters are annihilated) before the second indicator effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before all friendly characters are annihilated), an advantageous state is created. (for example, a high probability gaming state). In addition, if the second indicator performance is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before all enemy characters are annihilated) before the first indicator performance is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before all enemy characters are annihilated), the second indicator performance becomes relatively It has a function to notify that it is a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a low probability gaming state).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the indicator performance timing determining means determines the execution timing of each of the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance during execution of the special game, and The performance mode determining means is characterized in that the performance mode is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed in a game state after the special game is executed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timings of each of the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance are determined during the execution of the special game, it is possible to perform the processing even more smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means, The holding performance control means is characterized in that it controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 17, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 18]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 18 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs a variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; and a display means. special game execution means that can execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) when a specific result is displayed; A symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of a symbol performance (for example, temporary variation) in which a fluctuation performance and a stop performance are performed, and a game state after the special game is performed. (For example, in a time-saving game state), the first index performance has a relatively high expectation level (for example, a subtraction performance of an enemy character) and the first index performance has a relatively lower expectation level than the first index performance. At least a second indicator effect (for example, a subtraction effect of an ally character) having the following is prepared, and an indicator effect timing determining means for determining in advance execution timings of each of the first indicator effect and the second indicator effect; Determining whether or not the first indicator effect and/or the second indicator effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, a reach variation effect) in which the identification symbol is varied in a specific manner is performed. The production mode determining means includes a duplication determining means (for example, step S346, etc.) and a production mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a production mode for the starting memory stored by the holding means. divides the pattern performance of the number of executions determined by the pattern performance execution number determining means into predetermined units when determining the performance mode for the one or more starting memories that are the targets for determining the performance mode; and a specific performance determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) that determines a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory, and the specific performance is performed. When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the second indicator performance is to be performed, the second indicator performance is determined to be performed in a symbol performance before the specific performance is performed. The index performance timing re-determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) prevents the second index performance from being performed when the specific performance is performed, and the first index performance is set when the specific performance is performed. It is characterized in that, when the duplication determination means determines that the specific performance is performed, the first indicator performance is performed when the specific performance is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of each of the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance is determined in advance, even if the data capacity of the first indicator performance and/or the second indicator performance is large, Also, since there is sufficient time before the first indicator effect and/or the second indicator effect is performed, it is possible to perform the process smoothly. In addition, when it is determined that the second indicator effect will be performed when a specific effect (for example, a reach variation effect) is performed, the second indicator effect will be performed in a symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. By determining this, the second index performance is not performed when the specific performance is performed, so that the performance effect can also be enhanced. That is, if the second indicator performance is performed during execution of a variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with even higher expectations, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, by performing the second indicator performance in the symbol performance before the specific performance, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Note that if the first indicator effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before all enemy characters are annihilated) before the second indicator effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before all friendly characters are annihilated), an advantageous state is created. (for example, a high probability gaming state). In addition, if the second indicator performance is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before all enemy characters are annihilated) before the first indicator performance is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before all enemy characters are annihilated), the second indicator performance becomes relatively It has a function to notify that it is a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a low probability gaming state).

Further, when it is determined that the first indicator effect is to be performed when the specific effect is performed, the first indicator effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. This is because if the first indicator effect is performed during execution of a variable display that is performed in a specific manner, there is a high possibility that the player will have expectations for the variable display, and the first indicator effect and This is because the presentation effect can be enhanced by any of the variable displays.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the indicator performance timing determining means determines the execution timing of each of the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance during execution of the special game, and The performance mode determining means is characterized in that the performance mode is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed in a game state after the special game is executed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timings of each of the first indicator performance and the second indicator performance are determined during the execution of the special game, it is possible to perform the processing even more smoothly.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 etc.), and the holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Appendix 18, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 19]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 19 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; and a display means. A special game execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) that can execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) when a specific result is displayed, and a start memory stored by the suspension means. On the other hand, a symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of a symbol performance (for example, temporary variation) in which a fluctuation performance and a stop performance of the identification symbol are performed; An indicator effect determining means (for example, a scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) that determines in advance the execution timing of an indicator effect that has a predetermined degree of expectation regarding the gaming state as an effect to be executed in the gaming state after being executed; , duplication determination means (for example, step S346, etc.) for determining whether or not the indicator performance is performed when a specific performance (for example, reach variation performance) in which the identification symbol is displayed variably in a specific manner is performed; ), and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for the starting memory stored by the holding means, and the performance mode determining means is configured to determine a performance mode to be determined for the performance mode. In determining the production mode for the one or more starting memories, the symbol productions of the number of executions determined by the number of symbol production executions determining means are divided into predetermined units, regardless of the unit of the starting memory. a specific performance determining means for determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units; and a duplication determining means that determines that the index performance is not performed when the specific performance is performed. When it is determined, the number of executions of the symbol production is calculated by subtracting the number of executions of the index production from the total number of executions of the symbol production determined for the one or more starting memories for which the production mode is determined. The present invention is characterized by comprising a suggestive performance execution determining means that determines to execute a suggestive performance that suggests that the specific performance will be performed, only if the specific performance exists.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, since the execution timing of the index performance is determined in advance, even if the data capacity of the index performance is large, there is time leeway before the index performance is performed, so the execution timing is determined in advance. It becomes possible to perform various processing. In addition, when it is determined that the index performance will not be performed when a specific performance (for example, a reach variation performance) is performed, the pattern performance determined for one or more starting memories for which the performance mode is determined Only when the number of executions of the symbol performance that is obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index performance from the total number of executions exists (in other words, only if it is greater than 0), a suggestive performance that suggests that a specific performance will be performed is specified. Since the execution is performed prior to the performance, it is possible to perform effective performance such as making people expect a specific performance through suggestive performance while performing smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the suggested performance execution determining means is configured to perform execution of the specific performance (for example, reach fluctuation) in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. each of the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means when the overlap determining means determines that the index performance is performed when the specific performance is performed; Subtract 1 from the number of executions of the symbol production in which the index production is performed, from the total number of executions of the symbol production (for example, provisional variation) determined for , and subtract 1 from the total number of executions of the symbol production (for example, temporary variation) that is performed prior to the specific production. The present invention is characterized by determining the number of symbol performances that allow the above-mentioned suggestion performance (ready-to-reach sign) to be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, if the overlap determination means determines that the index performance will be performed when the specific performance is performed, the suggestion performance is performed at an appropriate timing prior to the specific performance. This makes it possible to perform more effective performances.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means, The holding performance control means is characterized in that it controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 19, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 20]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, the execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-192817.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 20 includes a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) on which a predetermined effect image is displayed, and a display control means (e.g., display a control circuit 204), and a sound output control means (for example, an audio control circuit 205) that controls the output of a predetermined sound effect, and the sound output control means systematically outputs the effect sound through a plurality of channels. The effect tone to be outputted from the channel is changed in accordance with the change in the form of the effect image displayed on the display means, while the channel of the system of the identification symbol is fixed. The present invention is characterized in that the output sound from the channel of the system of the identification symbol is muted in accordance with the mode of the variation presentation of the identification symbol.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and to perform processing smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. Note that information images related to gaming machines include, for example, information that is desired to be communicated to players and hall attendants, regardless of the result of winning or losing determination. Specific examples include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, and a recovery screen after a power outage.

Note that the present invention can also employ, for example, the following configuration as an effect that can give the player a sense of anticipation regarding the result of the win/loss determination. That is, the gaming machine is configured to be able to proceed with the game when supplied with power, and includes a lottery means for determining winning or losing based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display means for displaying a predetermined performance image. a display control means capable of executing control related to a variation presentation of the identification symbol as a main character and control related to other presentations as a sub presentation; a speaker from which a presentation sound is output; sound output control means for controlling the speaker to output a performance sound that matches the performance image, and the display control means as a performance that has a predetermined expectation level for the result of the win/loss determination. a specific performance control means that executes control related to the character presentation as a main character, and executes control related to a variation presentation of the identification symbol as a sub-performance; When the power supply is stopped while the power supply is being turned on, and the power supply is then restored, the control related to the fluctuation performance of the identification symbol is executed as a sub-performance, It has a return performance control means for controlling the performance image to be mainly displayed, and the sound output control means is configured to perform a fluctuation performance of the identification symbol when the fluctuation performance of the identification symbol is not displayed by the specific performance control means. The game machine has a fluctuating sound output control means which outputs a fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating performance of the identification symbol when the fluctuating performance of the identification symbol is not displayed by the returning performance control means, although the fluctuating sound is not outputted. Even with such a gaming machine, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and to perform processing smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. Note that the main character is the side that is the main part of the performance and the side where the player's attention is directed, and the sub-direction is the side that is displayed on the display means along with the main character, but is the side that the player's attention is directed to. This is a performance that is difficult to approach.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 20, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 21]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in the starting slot, execution of a symbol variation game is put on hold, and when the suspended symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a jackpot is displayed. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect is a jackpot notice that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and the possibility that a pending symbol variation game will become a jackpot. There is a device in which a second button effect that suggests the following is performed (for example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, there has been a trend to increase the types of performances and enhance the performance effects, as in the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although the effect of the performance can be enhanced by increasing the number of types of performances, such performances must be processed in a short time in order to progress the game. In particular, processing large amounts of data such as video data requires more time than a specified amount of time, but even in such cases, it is necessary to ensure that the processing can be executed smoothly. It is being

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 21 is a gaming machine that outputs a warning sound when a predetermined error occurs, and includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that makes a winning/losing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which a predetermined effect image is displayed, and control related to a variation effect of the identification symbol, as well as control related to an expected effect image based on the result of the win/loss determination. An executable display control means (e.g., display control circuit 204), a speaker (e.g., speaker 24) from which the effect sound is output, and a display device including the warning sound, in accordance with the effect image displayed on the display means. sound output control means (for example, the sound control circuit 205) for controlling the performance sound to be outputted from the speaker, and the sound output control means is configured to set a predetermined expectation level for the result of the win/loss determination. The present invention further includes a specific output control means (for example, step S904) that maintains the output of the warning sound while muting the output of the variation display of the identification symbol when a specific production of the identification symbol is executed. This is a characteristic feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and to perform processing smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest. Note that information images related to gaming machines include, for example, information that is desired to be communicated to players and hall attendants, regardless of the result of winning or losing determination. Specific examples include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, and a recovery screen after a power outage.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect tones can be outputted according to the system through a plurality of channels, and the effect tone output from the channels can be output in accordance with the effect image displayed on the display means. A changeable shared channel, a warning system channel, and a channel of the identification symbol system are provided, and the specific output control means changes the performance tone through the shared channel in accordance with the performance image displayed on the display means. When the specific performance is executed, the state of the warning system channel is maintained, and the output from the identification symbol system channel is muted.

The gaming machine described in (2) above is a more specific example of (1) above, and eliminates unnecessary processing without making the player feel uncomfortable, and smoothly performs processing while suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do this.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 21, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 22]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known in which a winning/losing determination is made and symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is shown when the variablely displayed symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the winning/losing determination result is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display performance is performed only for each win/loss determination unit, so if the display performance is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the fluctuating display of symbols may be lost, and at that point, interest may decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to prevent the player from becoming aware of the display performance for each winning/losing determination unit, thereby suppressing a drop in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 22 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs a variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that displays an identification symbol in a variable manner based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) that controls the variation presentation and the stop presentation of the identification symbols until the variable display is performed; Symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol performance in which the performance and stop performance are performed, and performance mode determining means capable of determining the performance mode for a plurality of variable displays. (for example, step S372, etc.), and the performance mode determining means divides the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means into predetermined units, and divides into the predetermined units. The present invention is characterized by having a specific performance determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) that determines the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the selected symbol performance.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined for each variable display. In other words, normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each variable display, but since the number of executions of one or more symbol presentations is determined for each starting memory, one variable display ( Even though the game is played only once, it looks as if multiple variable displays (multiple games) are being played. Furthermore, each symbol presentation is divided into predetermined units regardless of the game unit. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to perform a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display for each game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the time when the variable display of identification symbols starts until the display stops for one game. On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance mode determining means determines one or more variable displays as a performance section, and selects the section performance to be performed in the performance section as being included in the performance section. It determines the production mode for the variable display, and divides the symbol production of the number of executions determined by the symbol production execution number determining means for the variable display included in the production section into predetermined units. The present invention is characterized in that it has a section performance mode determining means for determining the performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units, regardless of the units of the variable display.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the number of symbol performances to be executed is determined for a plurality of variable displays included in the production section, so that it is possible to further reduce the player's awareness of the variable displays for each game. It can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the presentation mode determining means may select a part of the pattern presentation of the number of executions determined for one variable display included in the presentation section, and a part of the pattern presentation of the number of executions determined for one variable display included in the presentation section It is characterized by being configured such that a part of the pattern presentation of the number of executions determined for other variable displays included in the variable display can be divided into a predetermined unit spanning a plurality of variable displays. .

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, a part of the symbol presentation determined for one variable display included in the presentation section and a plurality of symbol presentations determined for the other variable display included in the presentation section. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to perform a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display for each game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 22, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination.

[Additional note 23]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known in which a winning/losing determination is made and symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is shown when the variablely displayed symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the winning/losing determination result is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display performance is performed only for each win/loss determination unit, so if the display performance is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the fluctuating display of symbols may be lost, and at that point, interest may decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to prevent the player from becoming aware of the display performance for each winning/losing determination unit, and to suitably suppress a decline in interest. .

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 23 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; (For example, step S54, step S55, etc.)) When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored in step S54, step S55, etc., the presentation time is until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory after that one starting memory. display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the fluctuation performance and stop performance of the identification symbol using the display control means (for example, step S205, etc.); A symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of a symbol performance (for example, temporary variation) in which a stop performance is performed, and one or more start memories stored by the suspension means. When a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included, a performance mode determining means (e.g. , step S372, etc.), and the performance mode determining means determines the number of executions determined by the number of symbol performance executions determining means for the starting memory until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed. a specific performance determining means for dividing the symbol performance into predetermined units and determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory; The performance determining means, in determining the performance mode performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units, selects a starting memory stored before the specific starting memory and the specific starting memory. Although it is possible to determine a presentation mode that straddles, the present invention is characterized in that it is configured not to determine a presentation mode that straddles the specific starting memory and a starting memory stored after the specific starting memory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in a specific manner. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning/losing judgment is wrong, even if a production mode that can give the player a high sense of expectation is performed afterwards (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), Players' interest in the production mode decreases. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the earliest among the plurality of specific starting memories is The presentation mode is determined for starting memories up to the earliest specific starting memory that are variably displayed, and the presentation mode is not determined for starting memories that are variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in determining the presentation mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units, the presentation mode that spans the starting memory stored before the specific starting memory and the specific starting memory is determined. I can do it. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. On the other hand, a performance mode that spans a specific starting memory and a starting memory stored after the specific starting memory is not determined. As a result, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the fluctuating performance of the identification symbol performed in a specific manner rather than the performance mode performed during the execution of the symbol performance, and to create a sense of expectation for the fluctuating performance. I can do it.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, and the hold effect control means The means is characterized in that it controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. I can do it.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the presentation mode determining means determines whether the particular starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. If there is no starting memory, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the starting memory that is stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means is determined. The present invention is characterized by having a suggestive performance determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines a performance mode that suggests that the fluctuating performance of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though the symbol is not in the specific starting memory. That is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the performance mode, so the control Although it is unlikely that the burden on players will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the expectations of players regarding the display performance. Therefore, the presentation mode for the last starting memory stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means suggests that the fluctuating presentation of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though it is not a specific starting memory. By determining the performance mode, it becomes possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation regarding the display performance.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 23, by not making the player aware of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 24]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known in which a winning/losing determination is made and symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is shown when the variablely displayed symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the winning/losing determination result is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display performance is performed only for each win/loss determination unit, so if the display performance is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the fluctuating display of symbols may be lost, and at that point, interest may decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, and to suitably suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 24 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number as a starting memory (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the starting memory, the variable display and the stop display of the identification symbol are controlled using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed after the first starting memory. a display control means for displaying, and a symbol production execution capable of determining the number of executions of a symbol production (for example, a temporary variation) in which a variation production and a stop production of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit; a performance mode determining means stage (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; The production mode determining means includes, when the specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, all starting memories stored by the holding means. At the same time, in determining the performance mode for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, the number of executions of the symbol performance determined by the number of executions determining means is set to a predetermined number. The present invention is characterized in that it has a specific performance determining means for determining the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol performances divided into units (regardless of the unit of the start memory).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

By the way, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect), the starting memory stored by the holding means The burden on control is lower than when a specific starting memory is included in the memory, and the performance mode can be determined based on more starting memories. The mode of performance is determined based on this.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A starting hole (for example, second starting hole 440) in which a game ball can win a prize, and a fluctuation pattern that determines a fluctuation pattern when the identification symbol is variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole. It further comprises a determining means (for example, step S173, etc.), and the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the game ball winning in the starting hole, and the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole, The determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) determines the number of executions of the symbol performance for the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball enters the starting hole, as determined by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized by making decisions based on fluctuation patterns.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol performance determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances will be increased, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances will be decreased. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol presentation becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to understand that one or more symbol presentations are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 etc.), and the holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. I can do it.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 24, by not making the player conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 25]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known in which a winning/losing decision is made and symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is shown when the variablely displayed symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the winning/losing determination result is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display performance is performed only for each win/loss determination unit, so if the display performance is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the fluctuating display of symbols may be lost, and at that point, interest may decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, and to suitably suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 25 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number as a starting memory (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the starting memory, the variable display and the stop display of the identification symbol are controlled using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed after the first starting memory. display control means (e.g., step S205, etc.), and the number of executions of symbol presentations (e.g., provisional variation) in which variation presentations and stop presentations of the identification symbols are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. (e.g., step S324, etc.); and effect mode determining means (e.g., step S324) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. S372, etc.), and the production mode determining means includes a specific starting memory (for example, a starting memory in which a reach variation production is recorded) among the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. If not, the performance mode (for example, character subtraction performance) is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means. In determining this, the number of executions of the symbol performances determined by the number of executions determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the presentation mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol productions divided into the predetermined units is determined. A specific performance determining means for determining a performance, and a performance mode for a starting memory that is stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means, in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. The present invention is characterized by having a suggestive performance determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines a performance mode (for example, a false reach precursor performance) that suggests that a fluctuating performance of the identification symbol will be performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the starting memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation), the player's sense of expectation regarding the display performance is maintained. This may become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the starting memory stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means is determined for the starting memory. Even though the memory is not a specific starting memory, by determining a performance mode that suggests that a fluctuating display of identification symbols will be performed in a specific manner, the player's sense of expectation for the display performance is maintained. ing.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), when the variable display is performed in a specific manner, Nevertheless, when the result of the win/loss judgment is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high expectation level is performed afterwards (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), the performance mode for such production mode is Players' interest decreases. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the earliest among the plurality of specific starting memories is The presentation mode is determined for starting memories up to the earliest specific starting memory that are variably displayed, and the presentation mode is not determined for starting memories that are variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a starting hole (for example, the second starting hole 440) in which a game ball can be won, and a winning of the identification symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole. It further includes a fluctuation pattern determining means (e.g., main CPU 101) that determines a fluctuation pattern when variable display is performed, and the holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) determines when a game ball enters the starting hole. The starting memory is configured to be able to be held on hold based on the starting memory, and the symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) is configured to suspend the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball enters the starting hole. The number of executions of the symbol production for each of the symbols is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol performance determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances will be increased, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances will be decreased. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol presentation becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to understand that one or more symbol presentations are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 etc.), and the holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. I can do it.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 25, by not making the player conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 26]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known in which a winning/losing determination is made and symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is shown when the variablely displayed symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the winning/losing determination result is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display performance is performed only for each win/loss determination unit, so if the display performance is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the fluctuating display of symbols may be lost, and at that point, interest may decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, and to suitably suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 26 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number as a starting memory (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the starting memory, the variable display and the stop display of the identification symbol are controlled using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed after the first starting memory. a display control means for displaying, and a symbol production execution capable of determining the number of executions of a symbol production (for example, a temporary variation) in which a variation production and a stop production of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding unit; a number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means , the presentation mode determining means determines the number of starting memories for which the presentation mode is to be determined when the specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; A performance target number determining means that determines the number to be a different number each time, and when determining a performance mode for the starting memory that is the target for determining the performance mode, the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means. A specific performance determining means that divides the symbol performance into predetermined units and determines a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units, and a starting memory stored by the holding means, the last of which is stored in the starting memory. Suggestive performance that determines a performance mode for a stored starting memory to be a performance mode that suggests that a fluctuating performance of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having a determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the starting memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation), the player's sense of expectation regarding the display performance is maintained. This may become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the presentation mode is determined is determined to be a different number each time, and the presentation mode is determined for the starting memory that is stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means. is determined to be a presentation mode that suggests that the identification symbol variation presentation will be performed in a specific manner even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, thereby maintaining the player's sense of expectation regarding the display presentation. I'm trying to make it happen.

The reason why the number of starting memories for which the production mode is determined is determined to be a different number each time is that the identification symbol is displayed in a specific manner based on the number of starting memories for which the production mode is determined. (Even if a production mode suggesting that the identification symbol is displayed in a specific manner is displayed, the suggested production mode is false) should not be easily understood. It's for a reason.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), when the variable display is performed in a specific manner, Nevertheless, when the result of the win/loss judgment is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high expectation level is performed afterwards (for example, character subtraction processing is performed), the performance mode for such production mode is Players' interest decreases. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the earliest among the plurality of specific starting memories is The presentation mode is determined for starting memories up to the earliest specific starting memory that are variably displayed, and the presentation mode is not determined for starting memories that are variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance target number determining means determines the number of starting memories to be determined as the performance mode by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of starting memories for which the production mode is determined is determined by lottery, so the number of starting memories for which the production mode is to be determined can be easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, a sub-CPU 201 ), the hold performance control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed. It is something.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. I can do it.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 26, by not making the player aware of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 27]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

Among this type of gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that control the gaming state after a special game ends to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006 - (See Publication No. 122447).

However, in the case of gaming machines that are controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player in addition to special games, if the period in which the specific gaming state is controlled is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win/loss determination will inevitably be lowered. Interest may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantaged, and in any case, there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and to suppress a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 27 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. a gaming machine, the lottery promotion control means is capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state; a probability changing means that can set the probability to be higher (for example, a high probability gaming state) compared to Concealing performance execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) that can execute the concealment A stage 2002) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored as a starting memory up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display are performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for the starting memory next to the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (e.g., display control circuit 204) that controls the variation performance and stop performance of the identification symbol using the performance time until the winning/losing performance is executed, and at least control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is executed. In the gaming state, symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) determines the number of executions of the symbol performance in which the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. ); and performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode determining means is configured to A presentation mode that divides the pattern presentation of the number of executions determined by the pattern presentation execution number determining means into predetermined units, and is performed during execution of the pattern presentation divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. and the specific performance determining means indicates the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the win/loss determination is the high probability when the secret performance is being executed. The present invention is characterized in that the presentation mode (for example, character subtraction presentation) to be performed during the execution of the symbol presentation divided into the predetermined units is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a gaming state in which control for promoting win/loss determination is being executed, the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbols are stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effects (for example, temporary variations) to be performed is determined. That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the period is suppressed, and it is possible to keep the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment to be moderate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to players, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the symbol effects determined for each starting memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Furthermore, since display effects can be executed that do not make the player aware of the variable display in starting memory units, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the control for promoting winning/losing judgment is being executed. Moreover, when the secret performance is being executed, the performance that is performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units is used as an indication of the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-mentioned presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress a decline in interest. becomes.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. That is.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol performance is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment (i.e., the number of games that have been executed in the starting memory while the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is being executed) number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning/losing judgment, and the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judging can be made more This can be made even more unconscious to the player.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means may cause the variable display to be set in one or more start-up memories stored by the holding means in a specific mode. When a specific starting memory to be performed is not included, the production mode is determined for all starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode is determined for all starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode is determined for the last starting memory stored by the holding means. Suggestion performance determining means (for example, , step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the performance mode, so the control Although it is unlikely that the burden on players will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the expectations of players regarding the display performance. Therefore, the presentation mode for the last starting memory stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means suggests that the fluctuating presentation of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though it is not a specific starting memory. By determining the performance mode, it becomes possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation regarding the display performance.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 27, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect by using the movable body presentation and to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 28]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

Among this type of gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that control the gaming state after a special game ends to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006 - (See Publication No. 122447).

However, in the case of gaming machines that are controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player in addition to special games, if the period in which the specific gaming state is controlled is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win/loss determination will inevitably be lowered. Interest may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantaged, and in any case, there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and to suppress a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 28 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. a gaming machine, the lottery promotion control means is capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state; a probability changing means that can set the probability to be higher (for example, a high probability gaming state) compared to Concealment effect execution means (e.g., step S205, etc.) capable of executing (conceal A stage 2002); and retention means (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the production time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the one starting memory is performed. display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the fluctuation performance and stop performance of the identification symbols using the display control means (for example, step S205 etc.); symbol performance execution number determining means for determining the number of executions of a symbol performance (for example, a temporary variation) in which a fluctuation performance and a stop performance of the identified symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means in the state); (for example, step S324, etc.); and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, The mode determining means divides the pattern presentation of the number of executions determined by the pattern presentation execution number determining means into predetermined units, and executes the pattern presentation divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. The specific performance determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) determines the performance mode to be performed during the execution, and when the specific performance memory is stored by the holding means, the specific performance determining means Although it is possible to determine the performance mode that spans the starting memory stored before the memory and the specific starting memory, the performance that straddles the specific starting memory and the starting memory stored after the specific starting memory. It is configured so that the mode is not determined, and when the secret performance is executed, the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is set to be the high probability, and as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is the high probability. This is to determine the presentation mode to be performed during the execution of the divided symbol presentations. .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a gaming state in which control for promoting win/loss determination is being executed, the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbols are stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effects (for example, temporary variations) to be performed is determined. That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the period is suppressed, and it is possible to keep the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment to be moderate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to players, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the symbol effects determined for each starting memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Furthermore, since display effects can be executed that do not make the player aware of the variable display in starting memory units, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the control for promoting winning/losing judgment is being executed. Moreover, when the secret performance is being executed, the performance that is performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units is used as an indication of the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-mentioned presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress a decline in interest. becomes.

In addition, when determining the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units, it is necessary to remember (variably display first) the specific starting memory (for example, the reach variation performance). It is possible to determine an effect mode that straddles the starting memory and the specific starting memory. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. On the other hand, a performance mode that straddles a specific starting memory and a starting memory stored after the specific starting memory (variably displayed later) is not determined. As a result, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the fluctuating performance of the identification symbol performed in a specific manner rather than the performance mode performed during the execution of the symbol performance, and to create a sense of expectation for the fluctuating performance. I can do it. Here, "specific starting memory" means, for example, a starting memory in which a variable display is performed that can give the player a sense of expectation that the result of winning or losing judgment is a specific result, such as a change in the reach. do.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, further comprising a hold effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls an image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means. , the holding performance control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol performance is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment (i.e., the number of games that have been executed in the starting memory while the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is being executed) number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning/losing judgment, and the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judging can be made more This can be made even more unconscious to the player.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the presentation mode determining means determines whether the particular starting memory is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. If there is no starting memory, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the starting memory that is stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means is determined. The present invention further includes a suggestive performance determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining a performance mode that suggests that the fluctuation performance of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though the symbol is not in the specific starting memory. It is something.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the performance mode, so the control Although it is unlikely that the burden on players will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the expectations of players regarding the display performance. Therefore, the presentation mode for the last starting memory stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means suggests that the fluctuating presentation of the identification symbol will be performed in a specific manner even though it is not a specific starting memory. By determining the performance mode, it becomes possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation regarding the display performance.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 28, it is possible to suitably perform a specific gaming state that is performed separately from the special game, so it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[Additional note 29]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

Among this type of gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that control the gaming state after a special game ends to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006 - (See Publication No. 122447).

However, in the case of gaming machines that are controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player in addition to special games, if the period in which the specific gaming state is controlled is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win/loss determination will inevitably be lowered. Interest may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantaged, and in any case, there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and to suppress a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 29 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. a gaming machine, the lottery promotion control means is capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state; a probability changing means that can set the probability to be higher (for example, a high probability gaming state) compared to Concealing performance execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) that can execute the concealment A stage 2002) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored as a starting memory up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display are performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for the starting memory next to the one starting memory is performed. A game in which a display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol to be performed using the performance time until the winning/losing performance is executed, and at least control that promotes the winning/losing determination is executed. In the state, symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) determines the number of executions of the symbol performance in which the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. and performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the suspension means, and the performance mode determining means is configured to determine the performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the suspension means. When a specific starting memory is not included in the starting memories stored by the holding means, the presentation mode is determined for all starting memories stored by the holding means, and all the starting memories stored by the holding means are determined. In determining the presentation mode for the starting memory, the pattern presentation of the number of executions determined by the pattern presentation execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the pattern presentation divided into the predetermined units is executed. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific performance determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) that determines a performance mode (for example, character subtraction performance) to be performed during the game.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a gaming state in which control for promoting win/loss determination is being executed, the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbols are stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effects (for example, temporary variations) to be performed is determined. That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the period is suppressed, and it is possible to keep the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment to be moderate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to players, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the symbol effects determined for each starting memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Furthermore, since display effects can be executed that do not make the player aware of the variable display in starting memory units, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the control for promoting winning/losing judgment is being executed. Moreover, when the secret performance is being executed, the performance that is performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units is used as an indication of the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-mentioned presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress a decline in interest. becomes.

By the way, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation), the starting memory stored by the holding means The burden on control is lower than when a specific starting memory is included in the memory, and the performance mode can be determined based on more starting memories. The mode of performance is determined based on this.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a starting hole (for example, the second starting hole 440) in which a game ball can be won, and a winning of the identification symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole. It further includes a fluctuation pattern determining means (e.g., main CPU 101) that determines a fluctuation pattern when variable display is performed, and the holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) determines when a game ball enters the starting hole. The starting memory is configured to be able to be held on hold based on the starting memory, and the symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) is configured to suspend the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball enters the starting hole. The number of executions of the symbol production for each of the symbols is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol performance determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances will be increased, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances will be decreased. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol presentation becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to understand that one or more symbol presentations are being executed for one starting memory. As a result, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 etc.), and the holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol performance is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment (i.e., the number of games that have been executed in the starting memory while the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is being executed) number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning/losing judgment, and the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judging can be made more This can be made even more unconscious to the player.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 29, it is possible to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 30]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

Among this type of gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that control the gaming state after a special game ends to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006 - (See Publication No. 122447).

However, in the case of gaming machines that are controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player in addition to special games, if the period in which the specific gaming state is controlled is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win/loss determination will inevitably be lowered. Interest may decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantaged, and in any case, there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and to suppress a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 30 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. a gaming machine, the lottery promotion control means is capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state; a probability changing means that can set the probability to be higher (for example, a high probability gaming state) compared to Concealing performance execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) that can execute the concealment A stage 2002) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored as a starting memory up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display are performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for the starting memory next to the one starting memory is performed. A game in which a display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol to be performed using the performance time until the winning/losing performance is executed, and at least control that promotes the winning/losing determination is executed. In the state, symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) determines the number of executions of the symbol performance in which the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. and performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the suspension means, and the performance mode determining means is configured to determine the performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the suspension means. When a specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the presentation mode is determined for all starting memories stored by the holding means, and the holding means In determining the presentation mode for all stored starting memories, the pattern presentations of the number of executions determined by the pattern presentation execution number determining means are divided into predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the starting memory). 1) A specific performance determining means that determines the performance mode (for example, character subtraction performance) to be performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units, and the last of the starting memories stored by the holding means. The performance mode for the stored starting memory is set to be a production mode that suggests that the variation performance of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory (for example, a fake effect). The present invention is characterized in that it includes a suggestive performance determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining a reach sign performance).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a gaming state in which control for promoting win/loss determination is being executed, the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbols are stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effects (for example, temporary variations) to be performed is determined. That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the period is suppressed, and it is possible to keep the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment to be moderate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to players, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the symbol effects determined for each starting memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, the degree of progress after the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is started (i.e., the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the remaining period of execution). Moreover, when the secret performance is being executed, the performance that is performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units is used as an indication of the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-mentioned presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress a decline in interest. becomes.

In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may become difficult to do so. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode for the starting memory stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means is determined for the starting memory. Even though the memory is not a specific starting memory, by determining a performance mode that suggests that a fluctuating display of identification symbols will be performed in a specific manner, the player's sense of expectation for the display performance is maintained. ing.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a starting hole in which a game ball can win, and a variation pattern when the identification symbol is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole. The game apparatus further includes a fluctuation pattern determining means (for example, step S173, etc.) for determining the starting memory, and the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the game ball winning in the starting opening, The symbol performance execution number determining means determines the number of executions of the symbol performance for the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball enters the starting hole according to the variation determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means. This method is characterized by making decisions based on patterns.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol performance determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances will be increased, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances will be decreased. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol presentation becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to understand that one or more symbol presentations are being executed for one starting memory. As a result, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to grasp the period in which the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 etc.), and the holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol performance is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Coupled with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the start of the control that promotes the win/loss determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control that promotes the win/loss determination is executed). As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning/losing judgment, and the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judging can be made more This can be made even more unconscious to the player.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 30, it is possible to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 31]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

Among this type of gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that control the gaming state after a special game ends to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006 - (See Publication No. 122447).

However, in the case of gaming machines that are controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player in addition to special games, if the period in which the specific gaming state is controlled is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win/loss determination will inevitably be lowered. There is a risk that interest will decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific gaming state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantaged, and in any case, there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and to suppress a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 31 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. a gaming machine, the lottery promotion control means is capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state; a probability changing means that can set the probability to be higher (for example, a high probability gaming state) compared to Concealing performance execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) that can execute the concealment A stage 2002) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored as a starting memory up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display are performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for the starting memory next to the one starting memory is performed. A game in which a display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol to be performed using the performance time until the winning/losing performance is executed, and at least control that promotes the winning/losing determination is executed. In the state, symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) determines the number of executions of the symbol performance in which the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. and performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the suspension means, and the performance mode determining means is configured to determine the performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the suspension means. When one or more starting memories stored by the means do not include a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) in which the fluctuation performance of the identification symbol is performed in a specific manner, the holding means stores the starting memories. A production target number determining means for determining production modes for a different number of starting memories each time among the starting memories; The pattern presentation of the number of executions determined by the execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the presentation mode is carried out during the execution of the pattern presentation divided into the predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the starting memory). (for example, a character subtraction effect), and the effect mode for the last stored starting memory among the number of starting memories that differ each time, even if the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. Regardless, it is preferable to have a suggestive performance determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines a performance mode (for example, a false reach precursor performance) that suggests that the fluctuation performance of the identification symbol will be performed in the specific manner. Features.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a gaming state in which at least control for promoting winning/losing determination is being executed, the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbols are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effects (for example, temporary variations) to be executed is determined. That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the period is suppressed, and it is possible to keep the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment to be moderate. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to players, and in turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, the symbol effects determined for each starting memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, the degree of progress after the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is started (i.e., the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the remaining period of execution). Moreover, when the secret performance is being executed, the performance that is performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units is used as an indication of the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-mentioned presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress a decline in interest. becomes.

In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, a reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may become difficult to do so. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the presentation mode is determined is determined to be a different number each time, and the presentation mode is determined for the starting memory that is stored last among the starting memories stored by the holding means. is determined to be a presentation mode that suggests that the identification symbol variation presentation will be performed in a specific manner even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, thereby maintaining the player's sense of expectation regarding the display presentation. I'm trying to make it happen.

The reason why the number of starting memories for which the production mode is determined is determined to be a different number each time is that the identification symbol is displayed in a specific manner based on the number of starting memories for which the production mode is determined. (Even if a production mode suggesting that the identification symbol is displayed in a specific manner is displayed, the suggested production mode is false) should not be easily understood. It's for a reason.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance target number determining means determines the number of starting memories to be determined as the performance mode by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of starting memories for which the production mode is determined is determined by lottery, so the number of starting memories for which the production mode is to be determined can be easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 etc.), and the holding effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. I can do it.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 31, it is possible to suitably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 32]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game ends is set to a specific gaming state, such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high is kept secret. A gaming machine is known in which it is disclosed whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played has been played (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As mentioned above, some gaming machines that keep secret whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, with gaming machines where a specific gaming state ends when a predetermined number of games have been played, the player can easily know when the specific gaming state will end just by knowing the number of games that have been played. Put it away. As the end of a specific gaming state approaches, even if a performance that suggests high probability is expected, expectations for high probability may fade and interest may decline. .

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to make it difficult to grasp the end timing of a specific gaming state and to suppress a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 32 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. A gaming machine comprising: a lottery promotion control means capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state until the winning/losing determination is performed a predetermined number of times; a probability changing means capable of setting the winning probability in the determination to a higher probability (for example, a high probability gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state, at least while the control for promoting the winning/losing judgment is executed; Concealing performance execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) capable of executing a concealing performance (for example, concealment A stage 2002) that does not clearly indicate whether or not the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is set to be the high probability; holding means (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of information about the variable display that is not displayed as starting memory; and one starting memory stored by the holding means. When the variable display is performed for the starting memory, the display controls so that the fluctuating display and the stopping display of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed after the first starting memory. A control means (e.g., sub CPU 201) and at least a control means to determine the fluctuation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means in a gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning/losing judgment is being executed. A symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) that determines the number of executions of the symbol performance to be performed, and a performance that can determine the performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the presentation mode determining means divides the pattern presentation of the number of executions determined by the pattern presentation execution number determining means into predetermined units, and stores the pattern presentation in the starting memory. The present invention is characterized by having a specific performance determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) that determines the performance mode performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a gaming state in which control for promoting win/loss determination is being executed, the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbols are stored in the starting memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effects (for example, temporary variations) to be performed is determined. That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, even if the end timing of the period in which the control for promoting win/loss determination is executed is determined in advance, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the execution period.

Further, the symbol effects determined for each starting memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, the degree of progress after the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is started (i.e., the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the remaining period of execution). Moreover, when the secret performance is being executed, the performance that is performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units is used as an indication of the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the above-mentioned performance mode rather than the remaining period in which the control to promote the winning/losing judgment is executed, and it is possible to further suppress a decline in interest. becomes.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means, and the hold effect control means The present invention is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is controlled not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol performance is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Coupled with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the start of the control that promotes the win/loss determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control that promotes the win/loss determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make players interested in the indicator effect that allows them to guess the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning/losing judgment, and it is possible to make the end timing of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment more This can make it even more difficult for players to understand.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the storage holding means, the performance mode determining means selects one of the plurality of starting memories. A part of the pattern presentation with the number of executions determined for the starting memory and a portion of the pattern presentation with the number of executions determined for the other starting memory are divided into a predetermined unit that spans the plurality of starting memories. The present invention is characterized by having a specific performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the performance mode across a plurality of starting memories without being limited to the result of a single game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in starting memory units, and it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the control that promotes winning/losing judgment.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 32, by making it difficult to grasp the end timing of a specific gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[Additional note 33]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game ends is set to a specific gaming state, such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high is kept secret. A gaming machine is known in which it is disclosed whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played has been played (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As mentioned above, some gaming machines that keep secret whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state perform a high-certainty suggestion performance that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in a specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine that hides whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state and also performs a high-certain suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state, When this is not the case, a performance with a low level of expectation is likely to be selected, so if such a performance with a low level of expectation is performed, there is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, if a performance with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it will only give the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment that will be given to the player when the specific game state ends will be immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to make the display performance performed in a specific game state more interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 33 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. a gaming machine, comprising: a lottery promotion control means (for example, step S171, etc.) capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) over a predetermined period of time compared to a normal gaming state; Probability changing means capable of setting the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment to a higher probability (for example, a high probability gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state, at least while the control for promoting the winning/losing judging is executed; A concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) is provided in which a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is set to be the high probability is provided, and during the concealing period, the winning probability in the winning/losing judging is set as the high probability. an indicator performance execution means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing an indicator performance that can give a sense of expectation that the probability is high; A scenario determining means (for example, a scenario pre-setting process (FIG. 138)) is provided for determining a scenario in advance before the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is executed, and the scenario determining means is configured to perform the control for promoting the winning/losing determination. At the end of the game, the scenario of the indicator performance is determined so as to clearly indicate whether or not the probability of winning in the win/loss determination is set to be the high probability.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, the scenario of the indicator performance performed as the overall performance during the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting win/loss determination is executed. You can advance the scenario of the performance. That is, if it is determined whether the player is advantageous or disadvantageous based on the indicator performance before the concealment period ends, the player may be disappointed. In this regard, according to the present invention, it is possible to maintain interest in the indicator performance until the end of the concealment period, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not been performed yet as a starting memory; Symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means (for example, step S372, etc.), The means divides the number of executions of the symbol effects determined by the number-of-executions determining means into the starting memory stored by the holding means into predetermined units, and divides the number of executions of the symbol effects determined by the number-of-executions determining means into predetermined units, regardless of the unit of the starting memory. The apparatus includes a specific performance determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) that determines the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol performances divided into units of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol production (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation production and stop production of the identification symbol are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the retention means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, "variable display" means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol for one starting memory to the stop display, and the variation of the identification symbol for one starting memory. Even if the performance and the stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, a further comprising a CPU 201), the suspension effect control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol performance is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Coupled with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the start of the control that promotes the win/loss determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control that promotes the win/loss determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the indicator performance that can give a sense of expectation that the probability of winning in the win/loss determination is high.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 33, it is possible to make the display performance performed in a specific gaming state more interesting, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 34]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game ends is set to a specific gaming state, such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high is kept secret. A gaming machine is known in which it is disclosed whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played has been played (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As mentioned above, some gaming machines that keep secret whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state perform a high-certainty suggestion performance that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in a specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine that hides whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state and also performs a high-certain suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state, When this is not the case, a performance with a low level of expectation is likely to be selected, so if such a performance with a low level of expectation is performed, there is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, if a performance with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it will only give the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment that will be given to the player when the specific game state ends will be immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to make the display performance performed in a specific game state more interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 34 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. a gaming machine, the holding means (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not been performed yet as a starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory after the first starting memory. a display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that performs control to perform such control (for example, step S205, etc.); a lottery promotion control means that can perform control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) over a predetermined period of time compared to a normal gaming state; probability changing means capable of setting the probability of winning in the winning/losing determination to a higher probability (for example, a high probability gaming state) compared to a normal gaming state, at least while the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is being executed; , a concealment period is provided in which a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the probability of winning in the winning/losing determination is the high probability is provided, and during the concealing period, the probability of winning in the winning/losing determination is the high probability; An indicator performance execution means (for example, step S370, etc.) that can execute an indicator performance that can give a sense of expectation, and a control that promotes the win/loss determination by controlling a scenario of the indicator performance performed as the overall performance during the concealment period. Before execution, a scenario determining means (for example, a scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) is determined in advance, and at least during the concealment period, changes in the identification symbol are determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. A symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) determines the number of executions of a symbol performance in which a performance and a stop performance are performed, and the indicator performance execution means is determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means. The number of executions of the symbol performances that have been executed is divided into predetermined units, and the index performance is determined to be performed as a performance that is performed during the execution of the symbol performances divided into the predetermined units, regardless of the unit of the start memory. The scenario determining means is configured to clearly indicate whether or not the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is set to be the high probability when the control for promoting the winning/losing judging ends. The present invention is characterized in that a scenario for the indicator performance is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least during the concealment period, a symbol presentation (for example, temporary variation) is executed in which a variation presentation and a stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. number is determined. That is, whereas normally a symbol performance would be performed once for each starting memory stored by the holding means, at least during the concealment period, the symbol presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number of executions of the symbol presentation is determined, even though the display is variable for one starting memory, it looks as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period. Furthermore, since the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of starting memory, it is even more difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

Further, as a performance performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units, an indicator performance that can give a sense of expectation that the probability of winning in the win/loss determination is high is determined. This indicator performance is determined in advance before the scenario performed as the overall performance during the concealment period is executed before the control to promote the winning/losing judgment is executed, and when the control to promote the winning/losing judgment ends, the winning/losing judgment in the winning/losing judgment is It is now clearly indicated whether the probability is considered to be high probability or not.

In this way, an indicator performance is performed that can give players a sense of expectation that the probability of winning in the win/loss determination is high, while not making the player aware of the end timing of the concealment period and, by extension, the end timing of the control that promotes the win/loss determination. At the same time, when the control for promoting the winning/losing judgment ends, it is clearly indicated by an indicator effect whether or not the probability of winning in the winning/losing judging is set to be high. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines in which it is disclosed whether or not the probability of winning in winning/losing determination is high when the concealment period has passed for a certain period of time, the end timing of the concealment period and the end of the control that promotes winning/losing determination. It is possible to perform a performance in which it is clearly shown whether or not the probability of winning in winning/losing judgment is set to be high based on the outcome of the index performance without making the player conscious of the timing. For example, if the indicator performance is a battle performance between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize a performance in which a high probability is determined when the ally wins.

In addition, the "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one starting memory; On the other hand, even if the identification symbol variation performance and stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

Furthermore, ``When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variation presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbol are performed using the presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory after the first starting memory is performed. "is performed" is intended to include not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display is performed for the next starting memory. Therefore, "a symbol performance in which a fluctuating display and a stop display of identification symbols are performed" means that if it is in the middle of the variable display, it is until the stop display of the identification symbol is performed, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also performed. The purpose is to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, further comprising a hold effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls an image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means. , the holding performance control means controls so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed. do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol performance is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Coupled with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the start of the control that promotes the win/loss determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control that promotes the win/loss determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make players interested in the indicator performance that gives them a sense of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is high. It is possible to give the player the impression that whether or not there is a game will be disclosed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the special effect determining means selects one of the plurality of starting memories. A part of the pattern presentation with the number of executions determined for the starting memory and a portion of the pattern presentation with the number of executions determined for the other starting memory are divided into a predetermined unit that spans the plurality of starting memories. The present invention is characterized by having a specific performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the performance mode across a plurality of starting memories without being limited to the result of a single game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, making it even more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period and, by extension, the end timing of the control that promotes the winning/losing judgment. be able to.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 34, it is possible to make the display performance performed in a specific gaming state more interesting, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Additional note 35]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special game ends is set to a specific gaming state, such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high is kept secret. A gaming machine is known in which it is disclosed whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played has been played (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As mentioned above, some gaming machines that keep secret whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state perform a high-certainty suggestion performance that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in a specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine that hides whether or not there is a high probability in a specific gaming state and also performs a high-certain suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state, When this is not the case, a performance with a low level of expectation is likely to be selected, so if such a performance with a low level of expectation is performed, there is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, if a performance with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it will only give the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment that will be given to the player when the specific game state ends will be immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to make the display performance performed in a specific game state more interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 35 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/loss determination (for example, jackpot determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the win/loss determination. A special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) can be executed based on the result of the winning/losing determination being a specific result. a gaming machine, comprising: a lottery promotion control means capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) over a predetermined period of time compared to a normal gaming state; and a winning probability in the winning/losing determining; At least while the control for promoting the winning/losing judgment is executed, a probability changing means capable of setting the probability to be higher than a normal gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state); A concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) is provided in which a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether the probability is high or not is provided, and whether the winning probability in the win/loss determination is the high probability during the concealment period. An indicator performance execution means capable of executing an indicator performance (for example, a subtraction performance of a character) that allows the user to guess whether the game is true or not, and a control that promotes the win/loss determination by controlling the scenario of the indicator performance performed as the overall performance during the concealment period. a scenario determining means for predetermining a scenario before the lottery is executed, and the lottery promotion control means selects one of the plurality of periods so that the period for executing the control for promoting the win/loss determination is different each time. The promotion period determination means (for example, step S172, etc.) determines the period, and the scenario determination means terminates the control for promoting the win/loss determination according to the period determined by the promotion period determination means. In this case, the scenario of the indicator performance is determined so as to clearly indicate whether or not the probability of winning in the win/loss determination is set to be the high probability.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, the scenario of the indicator performance performed as the overall performance during the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning/losing judgment is executed, and the scenario for promoting the winning/losing judgment is determined in advance. When the control ends, it is clearly indicated whether or not the probability of winning in the winning/losing determination is set to be high. Here, the indicator performance is a performance that allows the player to guess whether or not the winning probability in the win/loss determination is the above-mentioned high probability. Furthermore, since the execution period of the control that promotes the winning/losing determination is determined differently each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

In this way, an indicator effect is performed that allows the player to guess whether or not the probability of winning in the win/loss determination is high or not while keeping the player from being aware of the end timing of the concealment period and, ultimately, the end timing of the control that promotes the win/loss determination. At the same time, when the control for promoting the winning/losing judgment ends, it is clearly indicated by an indicator effect whether or not the probability of winning in the winning/losing judging is set to be high. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines in which it is disclosed whether or not the probability of winning in winning/losing determination is high when the concealment period has passed for a certain period of time, the end timing of the concealment period and the end of the control that promotes winning/losing determination. It is possible to perform a performance in which it is clearly shown whether or not the probability of winning in winning/losing judgment is set to be high based on the outcome of the index performance without making the player conscious of the timing. For example, if the indicator performance is a battle performance between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize a performance in which a high probability is determined when the ally wins.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not been performed yet as a starting memory; Symbol performance execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means (for example, step S372, etc.); divides the symbol production of the number of executions determined by the symbol production execution number determining means into the starting memory stored by the holding means into predetermined units, and stores the symbol effects in the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the starting memory. It is characterized by having a specific performance determining means (for example, step S370, etc.) that determines the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol performances divided into units.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol presentation (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation presentation and stop presentation are performed is determined with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. . That is, whereas normally one symbol presentation would be performed for each starting memory stored by the holding means, the pattern presentation is performed once or multiple times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it appears from the outside as if variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol performance determined for each starting memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, the presentation mode to be performed during execution of the symbol presentation divided into predetermined units is determined. Therefore, some of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory, and a plurality of symbols determined for another starting memory where a variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory. It is possible that a presentation mode that spans part of the symbol presentation may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Further, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, "variable display" means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol for one starting memory to the stop display, and the variation of the identification symbol for one starting memory. Even if the performance and the stop performance are repeated multiple times, the number of variable displays is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern refers to the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop effect of the identification pattern performed when one variable display ends. The purpose is to include both production (for example, main stop).

(3) The gaming machine according to (2) above, further comprising a hold effect control means for controlling so that an image related to the starting memory stored in the hold means is displayed in a predetermined display area, and the hold effect control means The means controls so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol performance is determined with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Coupled with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the start of the control that promotes the win/loss determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control that promotes the win/loss determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the indicator performance that allows the player to guess the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the win/loss determination is high.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 35, it is possible to make the display performance performed in a specific gaming state more interesting, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 36]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachi-slot machines are known that perform win/loss determination and display symbols in a variable manner, and when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, if the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is played.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the winning/losing determination result is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that a special game may be played, thereby increasing the effect of the effect (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the display performance is performed only for each win/loss determination unit, so if the display performance is not such that one can expect a special game to be played, the changing There is a risk that a sense of expectation regarding the fluctuating display of symbols may be lost, and at that point, interest may decline.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and its purpose is to prevent the player from becoming conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, thereby suppressing a drop in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 36 includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs a variable display of identification symbols based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (e.g., random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol determination, etc.) up to a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as a starting memory; (For example, step S54, step S55, etc.) When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored in step S54, step S55, etc., the effect time is used until the variable display for the next starting memory after that one starting memory is performed. a display control means for controlling the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol to be performed, and a symbol performance for performing the fluctuation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means; A symbol production execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions (for example, provisional variation), and one or more starting memories stored by the holding means are determined as a production section. and a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for the starting memory included in the performance section as a section performance to be performed in the performance section, and determining the performance mode. The means determines whether or not the section performance is being performed, and when it is determined that the section performance is not being executed, the means determines the performance section again and performs the section performance to be performed in the performance section. The present invention is characterized in that by determining the mode, the section performance is repeatedly performed without interruption.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, one or more of the starting memories stored by the holding means are determined as the effect section. Since such section performance is repeated without interruption, the player is not made conscious of the fact that the performance is in starting memory units, and the sense of anticipation can be maintained for a long period of time.

Note that the manner in which the above-mentioned section performance is "repeatedly performed without interruption" includes, of course, the manner in which it is performed without interruption as long as there is a retained starting memory; Even if, for example, a demo performance is executed in the middle of a demo performance, if the start memory is suspended after that and the section performance is executed, it is included in the above ``repeat without interruption''. . In addition, when there are multiple starting ports (for example, when there is a first starting port 5442 and a second starting port 440), if a game ball enters one starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442), This also includes a mode in which the section performance is not performed, but when a game ball enters the other starting port (for example, the second starting port 440), the section performance is repeatedly performed without interruption.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance mode determining means may execute the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means with respect to the starting memory included in the performance period. It is divided into predetermined units and has a section performance mode determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines the performance mode performed during the execution of the symbol production divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. It is.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the performance mode is determined without being limited to the unit of starting memory, it is also possible to determine the performance mode so as to span a plurality of starting memories. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player conscious of the game result for each starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the section performance mode determining means may select a part of the symbol performance of the number of executions determined for one starting memory included in the performance section, and the performance It is configured such that it is possible to divide part of the symbol performance of the number of executions determined for other starting memories included in the section into a predetermined unit spanning a plurality of starting memories.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it becomes possible to determine the performance mode without being limited by the result of a single game. Furthermore, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, the range of effects can be expanded and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 36, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Regarding the "expectation level" described in each supplementary note above, the expectation level (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (i.e., advantageous state) such as a jackpot or high probability gaming state of each preview performance is the The probability of a "jackpot" or "high probability gaming state" when a performance is executed, the probability of a "jackpot" or "high probability gaming state" when each preview performance is executed, and the probability of a "jackpot" or "high probability gaming state" when each preview performance is executed. It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of being in a predetermined internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) such as the probability of "losing" or "low probability gaming state". However, the "expectation level" can include cases where the expectation level is 100% and cases where the expectation level is 0%, so strictly speaking, there are cases where the above division does not hold (for example, when the performance is executed It is not appropriate to divide 1 by 0, as it may include cases in which the game status or winning/losing is definitely notified when the expectation level is 100%, 0%, or presence/absence. ).

[Appendix 37-1 to Appendix 37-8]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is met, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is started and the jackpot opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability gaming state.

As this type of gaming machine, game setting values are input in advance by a predetermined setting input means to determine the state of gaming elements (structural elements and control elements) that affect the rate of balls entering the entrance and the tendency of balls to come out. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above has been disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2015-065977, the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine can be arbitrarily set, making it impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent the ball payout tendency from becoming uniform from game to game parlor or from game to game machine to game machine.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the tendency of balls to come out for each gaming machine, there are structural factors that affect the rate of balls entering the ball opening and the tendency of balls to come out. Alternatively, it is only possible to change the state of a control element according to a set value, but it cannot necessarily be said that the degree of contribution to improving gaming interest is large.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably change the state of gaming elements according to settings while improving the enjoyment. be.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 37-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 37-1 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of predetermined conditions;
Display means (e.g., first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) that displays symbols (e.g., special symbols) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time;
a fluctuation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3078) that determines the fluctuation pattern to be performed on the display means based on the result of the lottery;
fluctuation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern;
A symbol display control means (for example, a fluctuating display of a special symbol) of the symbols for a varying period of time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means, and that stops displaying the symbols in a manner indicating the result of the lottery. For example, a main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S3093,
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means includes:
A variation pattern table (for example, in FIG. 170) is stored.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the setting value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the higher the setting value, the more the number of drawings per unit time, and the more the result of the drawing The level of expectation is increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) that counts the number of times the lottery has been executed from a specific time, and
The fluctuation pattern table storage means includes:
Another variation pattern table (for example, as shown in FIG. It further stores a special symbol fluctuation time determination table when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more,
The fluctuation pattern determining means includes:
When the number of lottery executions counted by the lottery frequency counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a special symbol jackpot lottery is held 1001 times or more after the jackpot game state ends), The variation pattern may be determined using the other variation pattern table.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, when the number of lottery executions counted by the lottery frequency counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, a variable pattern can be determined using another variable pattern table. Therefore, the higher the setting value, the more significantly the number of drawings per unit time, and when the number of drawings is executed a certain number of times, the player's expectation level is increased, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Note that the "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, when a special symbol jackpot lottery is held a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 or more times) after the jackpot game state ends, but is not limited to this.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, a lottery for the variable display of the symbols is held. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed even if the symbols are not stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the result;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display of symbols (for example, the variable display of special symbols) is performed, it is determined whether the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. may be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the result of the lottery regarding the fluctuating symbol display, if it is determined to be inappropriate in determining whether the game information is appropriate or not, The game is configured so that the game cannot be played. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 37-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 37-2 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of predetermined conditions;
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which a pattern effect using a predetermined pattern (for example, a variable effect of a decorative pattern) is performed, and the result of the lottery can be shown depending on the stopping state of the pattern;
A stop mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3205) that determines a stop mode of the symbol that can be shown on the display means based on the result of the lottery;
Stop mode table storage means (for example, program ROM 202) for storing a stop mode table (for example, the decorative pattern determination table of FIG. 171) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determination means;
A symbol presentation control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3207) that controls the symbol to be stopped in the stopping manner determined by the stopping manner determining means;
When the symbol is displayed in a manner (for example, first aspect, second aspect, specific aspect) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a jackpot), multiple benefits advantageous to the player may be generated. (For example, a profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 10) that gives any profit from among (for example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R probability strange jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability strange jackpot),
Equipped with
The profit giving means is
When the symbol is displayed in a stopping mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a jackpot), and the stopping mode is a specific stopping mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits are It is configured to be able to grant specific profits that are relatively advantageous (for example, 10R guaranteed variable jackpot),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a jackpot), as the setting value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the probability that the pattern stops in the specific stopping pattern increases. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured such that the manner in which the symbol stops can be determined so as to increase the height of the symbol.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the more the symbols are stopped in a specific stopping mode that is relatively more advantageous among multiple profits. It becomes possible to increase the probability that the game will occur, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a jackpot), the setting value set by the setting change control means even though the probability of receiving the specific profit is the same regardless of the setting value. The present invention is characterized in that the stopping manner of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the symbol will be stopped in the specific stopping manner increases as the symbol becomes higher.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a jackpot), the probability of receiving a specific profit is the same regardless of the setting, but the setting is changed. As the setting value set by the control means becomes higher, the probability that the game will be stopped in a specific stopping manner increases, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable display, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Appropriateness determination means (main CPU 101 that processes steps S3072 and S3082) that determines whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means while the symbol production is being performed, the result of the lottery may be determined to be the specific result. Even if the stop mode determining means determines that the pattern is stopped in the specific stopping mode, the game control means (for example, executes the process of step S3722) controls the game so that the game cannot proceed. main CPU 101),
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol presentation (for example, a variation presentation of decorative symbols) is being performed, it is determined whether the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. Sometimes. In this case, even if the lottery result is a specific result and it is determined that the pattern stops in a specific stopping manner, it is inappropriate to determine whether the game information is suitable or not. If it is determined that this is the case, the game is configured such that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 37-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 37-3 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of predetermined conditions (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118, including both a jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery);
a lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used in the lottery (for example, a table indicating the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in FIG. 173 or 174 is a jackpot);
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) that displays at least a variable symbol;
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that displays the symbols in a variable manner and stops displaying them in a manner that indicates the result of the lottery;
The above-mentioned pattern is in a manner (for example, special drawing 1-1 to special drawing 1-8, special drawing 2-1 to special drawing 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a jackpot). When displayed, a benefit giving means (for example, the one shown in FIG. A main CPU 101) that executes jackpot game control;
Equipped with
The lottery table storage means includes:
Stores a plurality of lottery tables in which lottery probabilities for relatively more advantageous specific profits (for example, 10R variable jackpot) among the plurality of profits differ according to set values,
The said lottery means is
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured such that the lottery can be performed using a lottery table according to the setting values set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables with different lottery probabilities for specific profits that are relatively advantageous depending on the setting value, the lottery is set by the setting change control means. It becomes possible to vary the degree of profit given to the player according to the set value set, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The profit giving means are:
As the specific profit, at least a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a high probability gaming state in which the profit is provided with a relatively high probability in the gaming state after the special gaming state ends are provided. and
The lottery table storage means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized in that a plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the high probability gaming state differs depending on a set value.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the probability of being controlled to a high probability gaming state varies depending on the set value, so it is possible to improve gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The profit giving means are:
As the specific benefit, a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) in which the lottery is promoted is further provided,
The lottery table storage means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized in that a plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state differs depending on a set value.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, since the probability of being controlled to a specific gaming state varies depending on the set value, it is possible to improve gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
If the suitability determining means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the lottery concerning the variable display of the symbols is determined to be inappropriate. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed even if the result is that the specific profit is granted;
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, it may be determined whether the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, the game is configured so that the game cannot proceed even if the result of the lottery based on the variable display of symbols is that a specific profit will be awarded. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 37-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 37-4 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
a plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the gaming area;
A special lottery means (for example, a main unit capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118 CPU101) and
A special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a jackpot);
A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that can execute a specific game with a lower advantage than the special game based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small win);
Equipped with
The special lottery means is
When performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting slot, the probability of the special lottery resulting in the specific result is determined according to a setting value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to do it differently depending on the
The specific game execution means is
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, when a game ball enters the second starting port more frequently than when the game ball enters the first starting port. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute the specific game.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of a particular outcome can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means, and the probability of a specific result can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means. A specific game is executed more frequently when a game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port. In other words, when a game ball is placed in the second starting hole, on the premise that a specific game will be executed with high frequency, it becomes possible to vary the execution frequency of the specific game according to the set value, and the game It becomes possible to improve interest.

In addition, "the specific game can be executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting port than when the game ball enters the first starting port" means that the first When the game ball enters the second starting port, a winning/losing judgment is made for a specific result (including a probability of 0), but the probability of a specific result in the winning/losing judgment is that the gaming ball enters the second starting port. This includes not only a mode in which the game ball enters the first starting port, but also a mode in which a win/loss determination situation regarding a specific result is not performed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal starting port (for example, passage gate 49) provided in the gaming area;
A normal lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a normal winning determination in the normal game in FIG. 10) that performs a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of a game ball into the normal starting port;
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (e.g., normal win), variable start control means (e.g., variable start control means) capable of facilitating entry (e.g., acceptance) of game balls into the start opening; , main CPU 101) and
A first special symbol is displayed variably based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), and the game ball enters the second starting port (first starting port 440). A special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) that displays a variation of the second special symbol based on the entry;
A first game state in which the period of variable display of the second special symbol (for example, an average time of 1000 seconds) is long enough to affect the progress of the game (for example, a normal game in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to OFF) state), or a second gaming state (e.g., in which the fluctuating display time of the second special symbol (for example, an average time of 1 sec) is shorter than the fluctuating display time of the first special symbol (for example, an average time of 10 sec) A gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF;
It is characterized by further comprising:

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the second gaming state, the variable display time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game can be executed with high frequency. , it becomes possible to vary the execution frequency of a specific game according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Display means for displaying the results of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74);
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
Although a game ball enters the starting port (for example, the second starting port), before the result of the special lottery is displayed, the suitability determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate. If it is determined that, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the game cannot be played without executing the specific game by the specific game execution means. a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722),
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if a game ball enters the starting port (for example, the second starting port), a special lottery (for example, Before the result of the second special lottery is shown (for example, during the variable display of special symbols), it may be determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole (for example, the second starting hole) is a specific result (for example, a small hit), Even so, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in determining whether it is appropriate or inappropriate, the game is configured such that the game cannot proceed before a specific game (for example, a small winning game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above first problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 37-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 37-5 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting port provided in the gaming area;
special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on entry (for example, acceptance) of game balls into the starting port;
a first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a jackpot);
A normal starting port (for example, passage gate 49) provided in the gaming area;
A normal lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a normal winning determination in the normal game in FIG. 10) that performs a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of a game ball into the normal starting port;
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (e.g., normal win), variable start control means (e.g., variable start control means) capable of facilitating entry (e.g., acceptance) of game balls into the start opening; , main CPU 101) and
Within a specific area where a specific opening is provided based on the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting opening being a specific result (for example, a small win). a specific area variable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece to facilitate the entry (for example, reception) of a game ball into the game ball;
a second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on a game ball being received in the specific opening provided in the specific area;
Equipped with
The specific area variable control means
The predetermined movable piece is configured to be able to be operated so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area may vary depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means. Features.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the probability of a particular result can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means, the predetermined result is changed according to the set setting value. It becomes possible to vary the operating frequency of the movable piece and, in turn, to vary the opportunity to receive a benefit depending on the set value, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means is as follows:
The ease of entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting hole is varied according to the setting value set by the setting change control means (for example, by changing the probability of a normal hit, By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different depending on the set value (such as shortening the variation time), the ease of entry of game balls into the specific area can be increased by the set value. It is characterized by being carried out differently depending on the situation.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the ease with which the game ball enters the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is normally controlled so that it can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means. Since a lottery is held, the amount of benefits awarded based on the entry of the game ball into a specific area will vary depending on the set value, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means is as follows:
By varying the probability of the specific result (for example, a small win) in the special lottery depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific area. The method is characterized in that it is performed in such a way that it can vary depending on the set value.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the ease with which the game ball enters the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) is normally controlled so that it can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means. Since a lottery is held, the amount of benefits awarded based on the entry of a game ball into a specific area will vary depending on the set value, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Display means for displaying the results of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74);
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When a game ball enters the starting port but before the result of the special lottery is displayed, the suitability determining means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate; Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means (for example, the process of step S3722) controls the specific area variable control means so that the game cannot be played without operating the predetermined movable piece. The main CPU 101) that executes
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, even if a game ball enters the starting port, the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is not displayed (for example, the special symbol (during the variable display), it may be determined whether the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the starting slot is a specific result, if it is determined to be inappropriate in determining whether the game information is appropriate or inappropriate. The game is configured such that the game cannot proceed until a predetermined movable piece is activated. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 37-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 37-6 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of predetermined conditions;
A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a jackpot) (for example, executing the jackpot game control of FIG. main CPU101) and
Game state control means (for example, probability change in step S3169) that can control the game state after the special game state is ended to an advantageous game state (for example, a high probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a main CPU 101) that proceeds with the game after setting the flag;
After being controlled to the special gaming state, the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated (for example, the number of loops) without being controlled to the normal gaming state. CPU101) and
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, it is configured to be controllable to the special gaming state, and
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times, controlling the gaming state after the special gaming state ends to the normal gaming state,
The prescribed number of times is
It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to vary depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to repeat the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state up to a predetermined number of times, and this predetermined number of times varies depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means. It becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a prescribed number of times determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of lottery) that determines the prescribed number of times by lottery,
The prescribed number of times determining means includes:
The invention is characterized in that the lottery for determining the prescribed number of times is performed such that an expected value for the prescribed number of times is different depending on a set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the prescribed number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this prescribed number of times is a set value set by the setting change control means. Since it differs depending on the game, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the suitability determining means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if the number of times counted by the counting means is less than the specified number of times, the counting means a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without the number of times counted by the number reaching the specified number of times;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated without being controlled to the normal gaming state (i.e., the number of loops) does not reach the specified number of times (i.e., during the loop ), it may be determined whether the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the game information is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate, the game is configured so that the number of loops does not reach the specified number of times and the game cannot be played. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above first problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 37-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 37-7 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 that can execute the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) that can execute a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440); ,
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game (for example, the jackpot game control shown in FIG. The main CPU 101) that executes
performance control means (for example, sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of executing at least an opening performance performed at the start of the special game state and an ending performance performed at the end of the special game state;
Equipped with
The lottery means is
Performing the lottery in such a manner that the higher the setting value set by the setting change control means, the higher the advantage.
The performance control means is
The opening performance and the ending performance are executed such that at least one of the time required for the opening performance and the time required for the ending performance becomes longer as a setting value set by the setting change control means is higher. It is characterized by being configured to

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the lottery is conducted in such a manner that the higher the setting value is, the higher the advantage is, and at least one of the time required for the opening performance and the time required for the ending performance. can become longer as the set value is higher. Therefore, at a high setting, it is possible to suppress the number of prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the game's interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that displays a symbol variation based on the result of the lottery;
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
Furthermore,
The lottery means is
It is possible to extract a random number based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole regardless of whether or not it is controlled in the special gaming state, and
The appropriateness determination means is
Even when controlled in the special gaming state, it is configured to be able to determine whether the gaming information is appropriate or inappropriate;
The game control means is
When the suitability determining means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, game progress disallowance is controlled so that the game cannot be played even if the game is controlled to the special game state. It is characterized by having a means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even when the gaming machine is controlled to be in a special gaming state, determination as to whether gaming information is appropriate or inappropriate may be executed. In such a case, if the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate, the game will not be able to proceed even if it is controlled to a special game state, so security is ensured. At the same time, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In order to solve the above first problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 37-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 37-8 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
a plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., accessory continuous operation left gate 3100) and a second entrance (e.g., accessory continuous operation right gate 3110);
Entry allowing means (for example, sorting device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any one of the plurality of entrances;
There are different profits depending on when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance (for example, if the number of rounds is different, or if there is a starting opening below the entrance, the lottery will be held) A profit granting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 10) that can give the player a profit granting unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 10)
Equipped with
The entry permitting means is
The game ball is configured such that the ease with which the game ball enters the first entrance port and the second entrance port can vary depending on a setting value set by the setting change control means. do.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the benefit given to the player is different when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. The ease of entry of game balls into the first entry port and the second entry port is configured to be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball will enter, the state of the game elements can be adjusted according to the settings while improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to suitably change.

In addition, "a different profit can be given to the player when a game ball enters the first entrance port and when a game ball enters the second entrance port" means, for example, when a game ball enters the first entrance port. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is a starting entrance that triggers a lottery, and the other entrance is a lottery trigger. This corresponds to the case where it is a general winning opening that does not serve as an opportunity.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A starting port provided in the gaming area (for example, first starting port 5442, second starting port 440),
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that performs a lottery based on the game ball being received in the starting slot;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for displaying symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery;
Game information related to the progress of the game, including information on the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results for pending memories and variable displays, and setting values) A game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
Appropriateness determination means (for example, main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) that determines whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determining means, even if a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player cannot A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot be played without giving a profit,
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the game ball enters the first entry port or the second entry port but no profit has been awarded yet while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the game information is stored in the gaming information storage means. The appropriateness or inappropriateness of game information provided may be determined in some cases. In this case, even though there is a possibility that a profit may be given to the player, if the game information is determined to be inappropriate in determining whether it is suitable or not, the game is continued without giving any profit to the player. It is configured so that it is not possible. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, entry enabling means (for example, a main unit that operates a condition device further equipped with a CPU101),
The profit giving means are:
When the game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player, and
The present invention is characterized in that when a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R jackpot game state) having a higher profit than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, the player plays the game aiming at the second entrance where there is a possibility of being awarded a specific profit with a larger profit, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. becomes.

According to the gaming machines of Supplementary Notes 37-1 to 37-8 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming elements according to the settings while improving interest.

[Appendix 38]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is met, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is started and the jackpot opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability gaming state.

As this type of gaming machine, game setting values are input in advance by a predetermined setting input means to determine the state of gaming elements (structural elements and control elements) that affect the rate of balls entering the entrance and the tendency of balls to come out. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above has been disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2015-065977, the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine can be arbitrarily set, making it impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent the ball payout tendency from becoming uniform from game to game parlor or from game to game machine to game machine.

(Second issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine, for example, an abnormality may occur in the gaming setting value, etc., and security is not completely ensured. It's hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can change the state of gaming elements according to settings while improving security.

In order to solve the above second problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 38 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 38 is:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). a game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440);
A symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that displays a symbol variation based on the result of the lottery;
Appropriateness determination means (for example, main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) that determines whether the game information is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving a game ball into the first starting port 440); ,
If the game information stored in the game information is determined by the suitability determining means to be inappropriate while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, it is assumed that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, it may be determined whether the gaming information is appropriate or inappropriate. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game will not be allowed to proceed even if the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, so it is important to ensure security. It becomes possible to improve.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 38 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming elements according to the settings while improving security.

[Additional note 39]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is met, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is started and the jackpot opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability gaming state.

As this type of gaming machine, game setting values are input in advance by a predetermined setting input means to determine the state of gaming elements (structural elements and control elements) that affect the rate of balls entering the entrance and the tendency of balls to come out. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above has been disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2015-065977, the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine can be arbitrarily set, making it impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent the ball payout tendency from becoming uniform from game to game parlor or from game to game machine to game machine.

(Third issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball output tendency for each game machine, changing the ball output tendency according to the set value does not necessarily require a light design load. It's hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a game machine that can suitably change the state of game elements according to settings while reducing the design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 39 is provided having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 39 is:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Random number generation means that generates random numbers in a predetermined width (for example, the main CPU 101 that generates random numbers by executing a program);
Random number extraction means (for example, main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3073) that extracts random numbers based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) that stores a lottery table (for example, jackpot random number determination table) that defines total random numbers (for example, range of random numbers for jackpot determination) and specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data); ,
A lottery is performed using the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means (for example, the process of step S3118), and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, jackpot judgment value data), a special gaming state is controlled. possible special game state control means;
Equipped with
The table storage means includes:
storing a lottery table in which at least the total random number differs according to the setting value set by the setting change control means,
The random number generation means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to generate a total random number of the number specified in the lottery table according to the setting value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot judgment) that has more digits than the numerator (number of jackpot judgment value data), the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (i.e. Compared to a method where the range of random numbers for jackpot judgment is a fixed value and the number of jackpot judgment value data is changed according to the set value, it is easier to set the jackpot probability for each set value in detail. It becomes possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that displays a symbol variation based on the result of the lottery;
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
When the random numbers are extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, before the fluctuating display of the symbols is started, appropriateness determining means (step A main CPU 101) that performs the processing of S3072 and S3082,
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed if the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, when it is determined that the total random number generated by the random number generating means is inappropriate, the game cannot be played, so the set value can be set while ensuring security. It becomes possible to set the jackpot probability for each game in detail.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 39 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming elements according to the settings while reducing the design load.

[Appendix 40, Appendix 41]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is met, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is started and the jackpot opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability gaming state.

As this type of gaming machine, game setting values are input in advance by a predetermined setting input means to determine the state of gaming elements (structural elements and control elements) that affect the rate of balls entering the entrance and the tendency of balls to come out. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above has been disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2015-065977, the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine can be arbitrarily set, making it impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent the ball payout tendency from becoming uniform from game to game parlor or from game to game machine to game machine.

(Fourth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, while it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine, players may become suspicious due to the ability to arbitrarily set the ball payout tendency. , there is a risk that interest will decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably suppress a decline in interest while changing the state of gaming elements according to settings. There is a particular thing.

In order to solve the fourth problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 40 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 40 is:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of winning holes provided in the gaming area and including a starting hole (for example, a first starting hole 5442, a second starting hole 440, general winning holes 53 to 56),
A benefit granting means (for example, payout device 350) that grants a benefit (for example, a prize ball) based on a game ball being accepted into one of the plurality of winning holes;
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that can execute a lottery based on the game ball being received in the starting slot;
a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which at least a variation effect of the symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery;
When the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning hole among the plurality of winning holes a setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information regarding the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the acceptance of the game ball;
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the setting change control is performed based on the fact that a game ball is received in a specific winning hole when a variation effect of symbols is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since setting value information regarding the setting value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce doubts on the part of the player. Furthermore, if a variation effect of the symbols is performed in a specific manner, there is a risk that the player will stop shooting the game ball, but such a situation can also be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a prescribed number of times determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of lottery) that determines the prescribed number of times by lottery,
A specific mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3078) that determines whether or not to perform the variation effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect);
When the specific mode determining means determines that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific mode, specific winning hole determining means randomly determines one of the plurality of winning holes to be the specific winning hole. (For example, main CPU 101) and
It is characterized by further comprising:

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific winning hole is not a fixed winning hole but is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning holes, so it is possible to increase the interest in the game. In addition, it is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning hole is kept secret without being disclosed. This makes it more interesting for the player to decide which winning opening to aim for.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means, even if a game ball is accepted in the specific winning hole, the setting change control means may cause the game ball to be set. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting setting value information about the set value that has been set;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a variation effect of symbols is being performed or when a gaming ball is accepted into a specific winning hole but no set value information has been suggested yet, the gaming information is stored. It may be determined whether game information stored in the means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if there is a possibility that setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in determining whether it is appropriate or inappropriate, the setting value set by the setting change control means will be changed. The game is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting setting value information. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 41 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 41 is:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting port provided in the gaming area (for example, first starting port 5442, second starting port 440),
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) that performs a lottery based on the game ball being received in the starting slot;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for displaying symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the lottery;
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game (for example, the jackpot game control shown in FIG. The main CPU 101) that executes
Settings for setting values set by the setting change control means based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition related to acceptance of game balls into the starting port (for example, the overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.) Setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the current setting value (the setting value set by the setting change control means) is determined based on the fulfillment of the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port. Since setting value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce doubts on the part of the player. In addition, execution of the game is encouraged so that the game ball is received in the starting hole. In addition, "meeting the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of game balls into the starting slot" means, for example, that even though the gaming balls were accepted at the starting slot, they were held because the holding limit was reached. It is assumed that there are cases where the game balls are accepted at the starting slot but are not held because the holding limit has been reached and the points are accumulated and the points reach a predetermined point. However, it is not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means, lottery results regarding pending memories and variable displays, and setting values). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
Furthermore,
The game control means is
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determining means, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting port ( For example, even if the overflow point reaches a predetermined point, etc.), the game progress disallowing means (for example, , a main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S3722.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, it may be determined whether the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the predetermined conditions will be met if the game ball is accepted into the starting port, in determining whether the game information is appropriate or not based on the game ball being received into the starting port, If it is determined that the setting value is inappropriate, the game is not allowed to proceed without suggesting setting value information regarding the setting value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 40 and the gaming machine of appendix 41 of the present invention having the above configurations, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming elements according to the settings.

[Additional note 42]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is met, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is started and the jackpot opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability gaming state.

As this type of gaming machine, game setting values are input in advance by a predetermined setting input means to determine the state of gaming elements (structural elements and control elements) that affect the rate of balls entering the entrance and the tendency of balls to come out. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to the above has been disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2015-065977, the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine can be arbitrarily set, making it impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent the ball payout tendency from becoming uniform from game to game parlor or from game to game machine to game machine.

(Fifth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine, there is a risk that ball payout management will not be easy.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can easily manage ball output.

In order to solve the fifth problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 42 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 42 is:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data related to the progress of the game is a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
a game control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the setting values set by the setting change control means;
A payout means (for example, payout device 350) that pays out game media based on winnings as a result of the game;
A special game execution means (for example, a special game execution means (for example, A main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control in FIG.
a data aggregation means (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 300) capable of aggregating data related to game media paid out by the payout means;
data display control means (main CPU 101) for displaying data aggregated by the data aggregation means in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
Equipped with
The data aggregation means is
All history aggregation means for aggregating the data based on all gaming history;
a setting value-specific history aggregation means for aggregating the data based on the gaming history for each setting value;
The data display control means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to display data aggregated by the total history aggregation means and/or data aggregated by the setting value-specific history aggregation means.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to display either or both of the data aggregated by the total history aggregation means and the data aggregated by the setting value-specific history aggregation means. It becomes possible to manage balls easily.

According to the gaming machine according to appendix 42 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can easily manage the ball output.

[Additional note 43]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is met, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is started and the jackpot opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability gaming state.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed has been disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so it is possible to easily change the storage means that stores the performance data necessary for executing the performance. is no longer necessary, and it is possible to eliminate waste.

(Sixth issue)
However, although it is possible to eliminate waste according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2011-010833, there is a risk that the game will lack interest if only the specifications are changed.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

In order to solve the above-mentioned sixth problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 43 having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 43 is:
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game quality is adjusted according to the set value. a setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that can set the setting value to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
a game control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls the progress of the game based on the setting values set by the setting change control means;
Equipped with
The game control means is
a lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, the processes of step S3073, step S3083, and step S3118) based on the game nature according to the setting value set by the setting change control means;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, jackpot game control in FIG. 10) in which a benefit is given according to the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the result of the lottery;
It is characterized by having at least the following.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, it becomes possible to execute games with different game characteristics based on the setting values set by the setting change control means, and the game machine management manager etc. It becomes possible to have more flexibility in how the gaming machine is utilized.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game control means is
When set to the first setting value among the plurality of setting values, in a high probability state where the lottery is held with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state is set. a first game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes the game under a game characteristic (for example, ST specification) that ends the game;
When set to the second setting value among the plurality of setting values, in a high probability state in which the lottery is held with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. a second game control device (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes the game under a continuous game nature (for example, a variable loop specification);
It is characterized by having at least the following.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, although both the game characteristics by the first game control means and the game characteristics by the second game control means are controlled to a high probability game state, the first game control means In the game style by the second game control means, the high probability game state may end midway without continuing until the next jackpot game state, and in the game style by the second game control means, the high probability game state is controlled to the next special game state. The major difference is that it continues to run until the end. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game features, it is possible to increase the flexibility in how pachinko machines can be used by game machine managers and others. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 43 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest.

[Appendix 44 to Appendix 56]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols variably based on the results of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set, and from then on, A gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above setting values can be set by an authorized person, such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Seventh issue)
However, in gaming machines where the progress of the game is controlled based on the set values, for example, the set values may be changed or checked illegally by an unauthorized person, or the set values may be changed due to noise etc. There are concerns that various problems may occur, such as changes in the

Further, since the above setting values are important factors for both the hall and the players, they should be strictly managed by an authorized person, and convenience is also required for the management.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can deal with problems related to setting values.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 44 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine specified in appendix 44 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
A transmitting means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
The present invention is characterized by comprising display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on which the history information is shown based on a predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view the information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It becomes possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Note that the setting operation information is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting value has been set. Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means includes:
an information screen that is capable of displaying the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and that restricts display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game; It is characterized by having a restriction means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that terminates the hall menu task when the determination is NO in step S3301, and the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when the determination is YES in step S3314).

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and during the execution of the game, it is assumed that a predetermined operation has been performed. This is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the information screen will not be displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 45 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 45 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed, and regarding the one setting value. a transmission means (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055) capable of transmitting the setting value information of
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the set value information and the setting value information as history information;
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen in which the history information is shown based on a predetermined operation,
The display control means includes:
a first screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 223) on which history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is shown based on the predetermined operation; (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen in FIG. 223),
a second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 225) on which history information including at least the setting value information is shown, on the condition that the first screen is displayed; (For example, a sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 225).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view an information screen in which setting operation information, time information related to the setting operation information, and setting value information are shown as history information. This makes it possible to deal with various problems related to setting values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, the first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen in FIG. 223) is displayed that shows history information that does not include setting value information among the history information, and the first The configuration is such that, on the condition that the screen is displayed, a second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen in FIG. 225) on which history information including setting value information is displayed is displayed.

Note that the transmitting means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately. Setting operation information is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second screen display control means includes:
The second screen is characterized in that it is configured to be displayed only when specific conditions are met.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the second screen showing history information including setting value information is displayed only when specific conditions are met, so that setting value information can be easily viewed. This prevents setting value information from being viewed for fraudulent purposes. Note that the specific condition is, for example, a case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The display control means includes:
Information that allows the information screen to be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and that restricts display of the information screen during game play even if the predetermined operation is performed. It is characterized by having a screen restriction means.

According to the gaming machine (3) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, and during the execution of the game, it is assumed that a predetermined operation has been performed. This is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the information screen will not be displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 46 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 46 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
A transmitting means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) are a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as historical information;
a display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on which the history information is shown based on a predetermined operation;
After the information screen is displayed, it is possible to display the information screen until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until a command to generate a production control object is received); however, when the predetermined condition is met, the information The present invention is characterized by comprising an information screen display restriction means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the hall menu display prohibition process in step S3316) that restricts screen display.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view the information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It becomes possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, although the displayed information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is met, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is met. Therefore, once the predetermined conditions are met, the information screen cannot be viewed, so even if an unauthorized person attempts to do so, it will not be possible to do so, ensuring security. becomes.

Note that the setting operation information is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting value has been set. Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 47 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 47 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
A transmitting means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
A normal screen (e.g., initial guide image) that can be viewed by unspecified persons (e.g., the player), and a normal screen (e.g., the initial guide image) that can be viewed by unspecified persons (e.g., the gaming machine administrator); display control means (e.g., display control circuit 204) capable of displaying any one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (e.g., setting change/confirmation history screen) showing history information on the display means; , has
The display control means includes:
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen can be displayed at least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state). It is characterized by being configured to be displayed on the screen.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a gaming machine administrator). An information screen that can only be viewed is displayed. While the normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, the information screen will not be displayed just when the power is turned on, but at least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated. It is configured so that it will not be displayed if it is not available. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by unspecified persons without authority, and unauthorized viewing can be prevented.

By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being viewable by unspecified persons if, for example, only players who have registered as members can view it, but as long as they register as members, Since anyone can view the screen (that is, as long as there is an intention to view it), it can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can only be viewed by a person with authority, such as a gaming machine administrator, for example.

Furthermore, on the information screen that can only be viewed by a specific person, setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information, making it possible to deal with various problems related to setting values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Note that the setting operation information is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting value has been set. Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means includes:
When the power is turned on with the setting operation means being operated, the information screen can be displayed, and information screen restriction means (for example, if NO is selected in step S3301) that restricts the display of the information screen while the game is being played. It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201 that terminates the hall menu task when the determination is made, and a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when the determination is YES in step S3314.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and during the execution of the game, it is assumed that a predetermined operation has been performed. This is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the information screen will not be displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 48 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 48 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
A transmitting means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on which the history information is shown based on a predetermined operation;
information erasing means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes processes such as step S3306 and step S33160) that erases the history information from the second storage means when a specific operation is received;
The information erasing means is
The device is characterized in that it is configured to accept the specific operation only when specific conditions are met.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view the information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It becomes possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, pressing the main button 662 after selecting the "Clear" item) is accepted, the history information is erased. Acceptance is possible only when conditions are met (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to erase the history of changing, checking, or viewing setting values for fraudulent purposes, such erasure will not be possible unless certain conditions are met. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent history from being intentionally deleted. Further, for those who have authority, the history information can be deleted, which increases convenience.

Note that the setting operation information is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting value has been set. Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means includes:
It is further possible to transmit setting value information regarding the first setting value,
The second storage means is
The setting value information can also be stored as the history information, and
The display control means includes:
It is possible to display an information screen in which the setting value information is included in the history information (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen in FIG. 225);
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to delete history information including the setting value information from the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, it becomes possible to view more useful information such as setting value information. Moreover, since such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, convenience can be improved.

Note that the transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The information erasing means is
In erasing the history information from the second storage means, only a part of the history information stored in the second storage means as history information can be deleted.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, convenience is improved because an authorized person can select which historical information to delete from among the historical information stored in the second storage means. For example, in the history information, one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information are displayed in association with each other (for example, see FIG. 225). The information erasing means may erase the associated history information (for example, for each No. shown in FIG. 225), or may erase each item among multiple items of information included in the history information ( For example, all of the date and time items, operation type items, and setting value items shown in FIG. 225 may be deleted.

In order to solve the above seventh problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 49 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine specified in appendix 49 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
A transmitting means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen in which the history information is shown based on a predetermined operation,
The setting operation information is
The information is information that can distinguish the type of operation, such as information indicating that the first setting value has been changed or information indicating that the first setting value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means includes:
a list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are shown as history information, regardless of the type of the setting operation information;
It is possible to selectively display a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information corresponding to a specific type of the setting operation information are shown as history information. It is characterized by being composed of the following.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view the information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It becomes possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Moreover, regardless of the type of setting operation information, an information screen with a list showing all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information as history information, and a screen corresponding to a specific type of setting operation information, Since the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information can be selectively displayed on a specific information screen in which the setting value information is shown as history information, convenience for the operator (for example, a gaming machine manager) can be improved. I can do it.

Note that the setting operation information is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting value has been set. Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means includes:
The present invention is characterized in that the information screen in the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when specific conditions are met.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the list information screen and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when specific conditions are met, so history information cannot be viewed for fraudulent purposes. This can be suppressed. Note that the specific condition is, for example, a case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The transmitting means includes:
It is further possible to transmit setting value information regarding the first setting value,
The second storage means is
The setting value information can also be stored as the history information, and
The display control means includes:
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to display an information screen in which the setting value information is included in the history information.

According to the gaming machine (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it becomes possible to view more useful information such as setting value information. Moreover, since such useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, convenience can be improved.

Note that the transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 50 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 50 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
A transmitting means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) on which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen) on which the history information is displayed can be displayed. For example, display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen);
Although the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until YES is determined in step S3312, step S3313, or step S3314), when the predetermined condition is met, the display of the information screen is restricted. information screen display restriction means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when the determination is YES in step S3312, step S3313, or step S3314);
The second storage means is
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a viewing history indicating that the information screen was viewed can be stored as one of the history information,
Even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is restricted, it will be treated as one viewing history. It is characterized by being configured to memorize.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view the information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It becomes possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Further, although the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is met, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is met. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

Further, the information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the viewing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing certain operations on the normal screen until the information screen display is restricted, it will be recorded as one setting history information. be done. This makes it difficult for a person who has changed settings, confirmed settings, viewed information screens, etc. for fraudulent purposes to intentionally create a large number of viewing histories. In particular, in the case of viewing history, unlike changing or checking setting values, it can be viewed multiple times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state). The effect is great because it is possible to create a large number of histories intentionally.

Note that the setting operation information is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting value has been set. Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 51 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 51 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, a transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 or a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055) capable of transmitting a setting operation command);
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information;
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) on which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen) on which the history information is displayed can be displayed. For example, a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen);
The second storage means is
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, viewing history information indicating that the information screen has been viewed can be stored as one of the history information,
Furthermore, when the power is turned on with the setting operation means being operated,
When the first setting value is confirmed and the information screen is viewed, both the setting confirmation history information and the viewing history information are displayed;
When the first setting value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the viewing history information of the setting change history information and the viewing history information is displayed. Features.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view the information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It becomes possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

By the way, when fraud involving setting changes is committed, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the gaming machine manager. It is difficult to detect the possibility of fraud just by looking at the configuration confirmation history. Furthermore, it is thought that those who commit fraud mainly view the site after confirming the settings, rather than viewing the site after changing the settings. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting operation means being operated and the first setting value is confirmed and the information screen is viewed, both the setting confirmation history information and the viewing history information is displayed, and when one setting value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the viewing history information of the setting change history information and viewing history information is displayed. This makes it possible to minimize the amount of history information displayed on the display means, and prevents the total number of histories from increasing unnecessarily and making it difficult to discover fraud.

Note that "When the first setting value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the viewing history information of the setting change history information and the viewing history information is displayed" means " By storing only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, it is possible to display a mode in which only the browsing history information is displayed and a mode in which both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it is stored in the second storage means, only the viewing history information among these pieces of information is displayed under the control of the display control means. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means Therefore, the former is preferable.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 52 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 52 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
A transmitting means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on which the history information is shown based on a predetermined operation;
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, history deletion means (for example, , a sub CPU 201) that executes the process of step S3306.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view the information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It becomes possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the work RAM 203), but since there is an upper limit to the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means, the history information is stored in the second storage means. If the amount of history information increases, there is a risk that a situation may occur in which history information cannot be recorded in the second storage means when it is desired to be recorded. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, new history information is recorded by erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means. This prevents situations in which it is not possible to do so.

Note that "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" refers to the second storage means. The history information may be erased as a result by overwriting the history information already stored in the storage means with new history information, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. If there is a possibility that the predetermined amount will be exceeded, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be erased before storing the history information. Further, even if new history information is not stored in the second storage means, when there is a risk that the upper limit will be exceeded if more history information is stored in the second storage means, the new history information is stored in the second storage means. At least a portion of the historical information may be deleted.

In addition, the setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting value has been set. Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means includes:
Information that allows the information screen to be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and that restricts the display of the information screen during game play even if the predetermined operation is performed. It is characterized by having a screen restriction means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that ends the hall menu task when the determination is NO in step S3301, and the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when the determination is YES in step S3314). .

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and during the execution of the game, it is assumed that a predetermined operation has been performed. This is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the information screen will not be displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 53 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 53 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting change state in which the first set value can be changed or the first set value is confirmed. a setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
a transmitting means (e.g., It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
An information screen (for example, a settings change/confirmation history screen) in which the history information is shown in the settings change state and/or the settings confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the settings change state and/or the settings a display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of restricting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state ends;
The display control means includes:
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without restricting the display of the information screen until a predetermined period of time has passed even if the setting change state ends (for example, step S3310, step S311 ), and
Even if the setting change state ends, as long as a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen can be controlled so as not to be restricted ( The process of steps S311 to S3314 can be repeated).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to view at least an information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information, so various problems related to setting values can be solved. It becomes possible to correspond to In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in a setting change state and/or a setting confirmation state, security is ensured such that, for example, an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. Moreover, at least when controlled to change the settings state, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the settings change state, as long as a predetermined operation on the information screen is performed. , it is also possible to improve convenience for the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means includes:
When at least the one setting value is changed, setting value information regarding the one setting value can also be transmitted;
The display control means includes:
In the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, an information screen in which setting value information regarding the one setting value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, when displaying the history screen, setting value information regarding the first setting value is also displayed, allowing an authorized person to view more detailed history information. . In particular, since the setting value information regarding the first setting value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display control means includes:
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means, the information screen The present invention is characterized in that it has a forced termination means (for example, the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S3315 when the determination in step S3314 is YES).

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means, the information screen is forced to be displayed. Since the game ends automatically, the execution of the game is not hindered. Therefore, while ensuring the state in which games can be played, it is possible to ensure the convenience of operations by authorized persons and to suppress fraud by unauthorized third parties.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any of (1) to (3) above,
The information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed is configured such that it can be recognized that the game can be executed without interfering with the predetermined operation on the information screen (e.g. , while the LED 25 is fully lit in white while changing or confirming the settings, the LED 25 is fully lit in red when changing or confirming the settings is completed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, the game can be executed without hindering the predetermined operation on the information screen. Since it is possible to understand that the game is executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the game is not executed because the player is unable to grasp it even though the game can be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 54 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 54 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), setting state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024 or step S3026),
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
a transmitting means (e.g., It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying on the display means an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen, a hall menu item screen) on which various information can be shown in the setting state; death,
The information screen is
A history screen where the history information is shown (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen), and a non-history screen where the history information is not shown but the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation (for example, a hall screen). a plurality of information screens including at least a menu screen);
The display control means includes:
Screen updating means (for example, step A sub CPU 201) that executes processes such as S33051, step S33057, and step S33073;
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, if the hall menu display process in step S302 is executed), the non-history screen is displayed. (If no item is selected in the process of step S3303, the hall menu screen continues to be displayed.) On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or more. For example, the present invention is characterized in that it has a specific display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when the determination in step S33072 is YES) that controls the display of the history screen to be terminated.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, it is possible to view at least a history screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information, so that various problems related to setting values can be solved. It becomes possible to correspond to In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value has been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the history screen can confirm whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Additionally, non-history screens that do not display history information will continue to be displayed even if no specific operations are performed, but history screens that display historical information will end if a specific operation is not performed for a predetermined period of time. do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent history information from being continuously displayed and being viewed by an unauthorized third party. Note that the above-mentioned "continuous display" includes temporarily terminating the display and re-displaying it. That is, it is important whether the display is displayed or not displayed even if a predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined period of time or more.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means includes:
When at least the one setting value is changed, setting value information regarding the one setting value can also be transmitted;
The display control means includes:
When the history screen is displayed on the display means in the setting state, setting value information regarding the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, when displaying the history screen, setting value information regarding the first setting value is also displayed, allowing an authorized person to view more detailed history information. . In particular, since the setting value information regarding the first setting value is useful information for business, it can be useful for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 55 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 55 is:
A controller capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values, and capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including setting value information regarding the one setting value. a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having one storage means;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used to erase information stored in the first storage means;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the specific operation means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, a setting key is in the ON state), the setting change state is entered in which the first setting value can be changed. A setting change state control means to control (for example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024),
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting change information (for example, a setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is to be changed, and a setting value for the one setting value. When an erasing process for erasing information (for example, setting value information after changing the setting value) and information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. a transmitting means (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055) capable of transmitting information indicating that the
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting change information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
information display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen in which the history information is shown at least in the setting change state on the display means;
Erasure execution information notification means capable of informing that the erasure process has been executed (for example, display control circuit 104, audio control circuit 205 that controls the audio output of speaker 24, and LED control circuit 206 that controls the lighting mode of LED 25) and,
The erasure execution information notification means includes:
A first aspect (for example, a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) in which when the erasure process (for example, backup clear process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, it can be recognized that the erase process has been executed. a first notification means (sub CPU 201) that provides notification by text display such as "RAM has been cleared", voice output such as "RAM has been cleared", and all red lights of the LED 25;
When the erasing process is executed as a result of being controlled to the setting change state, the second aspect is such that when the erasing process is executed as a result of being controlled to the setting change state, it is more difficult to recognize that the erasing process has been executed than the first aspect so as not to obstruct the visibility of the information screen. A second notification means (for example, only an audio output such as "Settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized" and all red lights of the LED 25 without displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16) It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201).

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, it is possible to view at least an information screen in which setting change information and time information related to the setting change information are displayed as history information, so that various problems related to setting values can be solved. It becomes possible to correspond to In particular, if there is a possibility that settings have been changed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to trace whether or not the fraud has occurred by viewing the information screen. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, erasing processing (for example, backup clearing processing) for erasing information stored in the first storage means may be executed without being controlled by the setting change state, or when it is controlled by the setting change state. There are cases where it is executed. When the erasing process is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, it is notified in the first mode that allows you to understand that the erasing process has been executed, so for example, the erasing process is executed by a third party without authority. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed in response to being controlled to change settings, the main purpose is to change the first setting value, and the erasing process is only executed in conjunction with that. Therefore, the notification is made in the second mode, which is more difficult to understand than the first mode. Furthermore, when the erasing process is executed as a result of being controlled to change settings, an information screen showing history information is displayed, but in the second aspect, the information screen is designed so that visibility of the information screen is not obstructed. Since execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can also be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising an audio output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined audio,
The second control means
further comprising a voice control means (for example, voice control circuit 206) capable of controlling the voice output from the voice output means,
The first notification means includes:
Notifying that the erasing process has been executed using both the display means and the audio output means;
The second notification means includes:
It is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the erasing process has been executed using only the audio outputting means of the displaying means and the audio outputting means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, it is notified using both the display means and the audio output means. Therefore, it becomes possible to clearly understand that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed as a result of being controlled to a setting change state, only the audio output means of the display means and audio output means is used for notification, which obstructs the visibility of the information screen. This makes it possible to understand the execution of the erasing process while preventing the user from performing the erasing process, thereby making it possible to prevent the erasing process from being executed by, for example, a third party who does not have the authority, while increasing convenience.

According to the gaming machine of appendices 44 to 55 of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can deal with problems related to setting values.

[Additional note 56]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols variably based on the results of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set, and from then on, A gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above setting values can be set by an authorized person, such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Eighth issue)
However, in gaming machines where the progress of the game is controlled based on the set values, for example, the set values may be changed or checked illegally by an unauthorized person, or the set values may be changed due to noise etc. There are concerns that various problems may occur, such as the control board being changed or the control board being illegally replaced.

Furthermore, the above set values are important elements for both the hall and the players, and therefore should be strictly managed by a person with authority.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can deal with problems related to setting values.

In order to solve the eighth problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 56 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 56 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
At least when the setting operation means is operated, the setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024 or step S3026) controls the setting state to a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed )and,
a storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information regarding at least the one setting value;
Transmitting means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means, and capable of transmitting setting value information regarding at least the one setting value (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055) and,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving the setting value information transmitted from the transmitting means;
Based on the reception of the setting value information by the receiving means, determining the suitability of the one setting value using the received setting value information and the setting value information received prior to the setting value information. a setting determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that determines whether or not the previous setting value and the current setting value match);
and an abnormality processing execution means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes a setting value abnormality processing) that executes an abnormality processing when the one setting value is determined to be inappropriate by the setting determination means. Features.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability of the one setting value using the setting value information about the one setting value transmitted multiple times from the first control means. becomes possible. That is, even if it is possible to determine the suitability of one set value in the first control means, if the first control means is illegally replaced, for example, one set value may be normal. Regardless of whether the first set value is abnormal or not, the first control means determines that the first set value is normal. Therefore, by making it possible for the second control means to determine the suitability of one set value, even if the first control means is illegally replaced, This makes it possible to immediately discover suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means includes:
It is also possible to send setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the first setting value has been changed or confirmed,
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, a storage separate from the storage means capable of storing at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information as history information. means (for example, work RAM 203);
and display control means (e.g., display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (e.g., setting change/confirmation history screen) on which the history information is shown on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view the information screen in which setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information. It becomes possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved.

In addition, when transmitting both setting operation information and setting value information, the transmitting means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means may transmit these information together or separately. Setting operation information is setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and setting value change information that indicates that the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the Further, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information regarding one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is setting value confirmation information, setting value information regarding the first setting value that has been set may be sent to the second control means, but the first setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

Further, "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information was transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or time information when the setting operation information was received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 56 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with problems related to setting values.

[Additional note 57]

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which a lottery is drawn based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that has multiple functions in one device has been proposed. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-170505 discloses that when pressed by a player, the device jumps out to a position that greatly protrudes from the main body of the gaming machine, regardless of the player's operation, in order to give an impact to the player. A push button is disclosed.

(9th issue)

By the way, when checking the operation of accessories, various sensors, etc., the maintainability of devices that have multiple functions in one device, such as the push button described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2012-170505, decreases. There are concerns that this may occur.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the maintainability of a device that has multiple functions in one device. be.

In order to solve the above ninth problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 57 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 57 is:
A gaming machine that can perform a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and execute a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery,
an accessory (for example, accessory 1000) that can be operated based on the result of the lottery;
A composite means having multiple functions (for example, a production button 62);
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, first starting port switch 421, etc.),
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
At least maintenance item determining means (for example, the process of step S33084 executable sub CPU 201),
In determining the maintenance items, a selection screen (for example, the selection screen shown in FIG. maintenance screen display control means (for example, sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S33083);
Equipped with
The maintenance item determining means includes:
a maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means;
The maintenance screen display control means includes:
The composite means, which is one but has multiple functions, is configured so that it can be displayed on the selection screen so that items can be selected for each function (for example, the item "Production Button 1" in FIG. 231 and Displayed so that you can select one of the items in "Production Button 2")
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, for complex means that have one but multiple functions, items can be selected for each function on the selection screen where one of multiple maintenance items can be selected. Since the information is displayed, it is possible to improve maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The composite means is
It has at least an operation function and a performance function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery,
The maintenance item determining means includes:
On the selection screen, when the operation function item (for example, production button 1) is selected, it is determined as a maintenance item related to the operation function, and when the production function item (for example, production button 2) is selected. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine maintenance items related to the performance function.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when an operation function item is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the production function item is selected, the maintenance item related to the production function is determined. Since it is configured to be determinable, it is possible to appropriately maintain both the operation function and the presentation function.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 57 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the maintainability of a single device having multiple functions.

[Additional note 58]
Conventionally, among gaming machines that execute games advantageous to players based on the results of a lottery that is held based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, gaming machines that are equipped with movable accessories that operate based on the results of the lottery have been known. There is.

As a gaming machine of this type, a gaming machine is disclosed that includes a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory each having a different driving source as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of a lottery (for example, (Refer to Publication No. 2018-15273).

(10th issue)
By the way, in the game machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-15273, which includes a plurality of movable accessories with different drive sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is particularly noticeable when there is a possibility that a plurality of movable accessories having different driving sources may interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessories with different drive sources are provided. Our goal is to provide gaming machines.

In order to solve the tenth problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 58 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 58 is:
A gaming machine that can perform a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and execute a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery,
A first accessory and a second accessory that can be operated based on the result of the lottery and have different driving sources,
Various sensors used for the progress of the game (for example, first starting port switch 421, etc.),
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
Maintenance item determining means (for example, step A sub CPU 201) capable of executing the process of S33084,
In determining the maintenance items, a selection screen (for example, , maintenance screen display control means (for example, sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S33083), which displays at least the maintenance screen of FIG. 231);
Equipped with
The maintenance item determining means includes:
a maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means;
The maintenance screen display control means includes:
Not only can you check the operation of the first accessory and the second accessory, but also check the operation when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated by selecting on the selection screen. (For example, items such as "performance accessories 1+2" in FIG. 231 are displayed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, not only can the first accessory object and the second accessory object be checked individually, but also the operation can be checked when both the first accessory object and the second accessory object are operated. can also be selected on the selection screen, making it possible to reduce the hassle of maintenance work.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The maintenance screen display control means includes:
The configuration is such that an operation confirmation when the second accessory is activated after the first accessory is activated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Production Accessory 1→2" in FIG. 231). items, etc. will be displayed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the start timing of the operation of the first accessory and the start timing of the operation of the second accessory may be different, the second accessory is activated after the first accessory is activated. Since it is possible to select on the selection screen whether to check the operation when the system is operated, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work and further improve maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
further comprising a third accessory that can be operated based on the result of the lottery and has a different driving source from both the first accessory and the second accessory,
The maintenance screen display control means includes:
If there is a possibility that the first accessory object and/or the second accessory object and the third accessory object may interfere with each other when both operate, the first accessory object and/or the second accessory object may interfere with each other. The selection screen is configured such that the selection screen can be displayed in a manner that neither the nor the third accessory can be operated. )
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, if there is a possibility that the first accessory and/or the second accessory and the third accessory may interfere with each other when they operate, the Since it is not possible to select the manner in which any of the first role object and/or the second role object and the third role object are operated, it is possible to improve maintainability.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 58 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the maintainability of a single device having multiple functions.

[Appendix 59, Appendix 60]

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols variably based on the results of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set, and from then on, A gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above setting values can be set by an authorized person, such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Eleventh issue)

By the way, in a gaming machine where the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important element for both the hole and the players, since it is related to the ball output. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to the occurrence of, for example, a power outage.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine in which set values can be maintained appropriately.

In order to solve the above-mentioned eleventh problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 59 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 59 is:
A memory capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of a plurality of setting values, and capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including setting value information regarding the one setting value. A control means (e.g., main control circuit 100) having means (e.g., main RAM 103);
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used to erase information stored in the storage means;
power supply means (for example, power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the state control means (for example, , has a main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S3024,
The state control means includes:
When the supply of power is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing an ON operation of the setting operation means and/or an ON operation of the specific operation means, the control remains in the setting change state. Possible or power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped (for example, when the determination in step S3021 is NO, the process in step S3024 is executed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if, for example, a power outage occurs while the gaming machine is being controlled to the settings changing state, when the power is turned on afterwards, the gaming machine will be controlled to the settings changing state or the power supply will be turned off. Since the power is restored in the changed setting state when the supply was stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is maintained appropriately. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a setting value is not set due to an unintended power outage or the like in a setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The control means includes:
When the setting operation means is turned off after the first setting value has been changed in the setting change state, setting value determining means (for example, , further comprising a main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S32480,
The set value determining means includes:
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped, the setting operation means is turned on. The device is characterized in that the first set value is fixed to the changed set value when the OFF operation is performed after the change.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or if the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped, the setting Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to confirm one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped, complicated operations can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of a situation where a set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 60 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 60 is:
A memory capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of a plurality of setting values, and capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including setting value information regarding the one setting value. a control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used to erase information stored in the storage means;
power supply means (for example, power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
A setting change state in which the first set value can be changed to a state after the power is turned on, and the first setting, depending on the operating state of the setting operating means and the operating state of the specific operating means. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that can execute processes such as step S3024, step S3026, and step S3028) that can control any one of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state in which the value can be confirmed. death,
The state control means includes:
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, control is performed to any one of the plurality of states depending on the operating state of the setting operating means and the operating state of the specific operating means. (for example, execute the processes from step S3022 to step S3028),
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state and then the power is turned on, control is possible or the power supply is stopped in the setting change state regardless of the operation state of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. Power can be restored in the current setting change state (for example, when the determination in step S3021 is NO, the process in step S3024 is executed).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where a set value is not set due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., while ensuring operator convenience. In other words, the setting confirmation state is a state where you can only check the set value but cannot change the set value, so even if an unintended power outage occurs, the set value will not be changed. It is unlikely that this would affect the On the other hand, since the setting change state is a state in which one set value can be changed, for example, if an unintended power outage or the like occurs, there is a possibility that the one set value will be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is turned on afterwards, it will be in one of multiple states depending on the operating state of the setting operating means and the operating state of the specific operating means. If the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is turned on afterwards, the control will be in the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped. By ensuring that the power is restored, the operator's convenience is ensured while preventing the occurrence of a situation in which a set value is not set due to an unintended power outage or the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The state control means includes:
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the setting change state is controlled;
The control means includes:
further comprising set value determining means for determining the first set value to the changed set value when the setting operation means is turned off after the first set value is changed in the setting change state; have,
The set value determining means includes:
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped, the setting operation means is turned on. The device is characterized in that the first set value is fixed to the changed set value when the OFF operation is performed after the change.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or if the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped, the setting Although it is necessary to turn on the operating means once, it is possible to confirm one set value by performing the same operation as usual, such as turning off the setting operating means. As a result, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped, complicated operations can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of a situation where a set value is not set.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 59 and the gaming machine of appendix 60 having the above configurations, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be maintained appropriately.

[Additional note 61]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols variably based on the results of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set, and from then on, A gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above setting values can be set by an authorized person, such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Twelfth task)
By the way, in a gaming machine where the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important element for both the hole and the player, since it is related to the payout of the ball. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine in which set values can be maintained appropriately.

In order to solve the above-mentioned twelfth problem, a gaming machine according to appendix 61 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 61 is:
A memory capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of a plurality of setting values, and capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including setting value information regarding the one setting value. A control means (e.g., main control circuit 100) having means (e.g., main RAM 103);
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, backup clear switch 330) used to erase information stored in the storage means;
power supply means (for example, power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The control means includes:
Setting change state control means for controlling to a setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed when the specific operation means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned ON; (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3024),
Appropriateness determining means (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3721) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is appropriate or not;
If it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is inappropriate, the abnormality control means (processing from step S3722 to step S3727) controls to an abnormal state (for example, a state in which the processing from step S3722 to step S3727 is executed). a main CPU 101) that executes
In the case where the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state, if the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation to erase the information stored in the storage means is performed. Control is performed so that the game cannot be played (for example, when the determination in step S31770 is NO, the process in step S31790 is not executed), and control is performed so that the game can be executed when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on (for example, the process in step S31790 is not executed). The game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S17) executes the process of step S31790 when the determination is YES in S31770 and YES in step S31780.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, if an abnormal state occurs due to the occurrence of noise or fraudulent activity, etc., and the power supply is stopped in such abnormal state, the machine will not be controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on. In this case, even if an operation is performed to erase information stored in the storage means, the game cannot be played, and the game can be played only when the power is turned on and the settings are changed. . When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that the first set value information stored in the storage means is abnormal, so only when the first set value information is controlled to be changed so that the first set value is always changed. This allows games to be played and set values to be maintained appropriately.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 61 of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which setting values can be maintained appropriately.

[Additional note 62]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that perform a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and display symbols variably based on the results of the lottery. Then, when a specific display result indicating that the lottery result is a specific result is displayed, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set, and from then on, A gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values is known (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above setting values can be set by an authorized person, such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Thirteenth issue)
However, in gaming machines where the progress of the game is controlled based on the set values, for example, the set values may be changed or checked illegally by an unauthorized person, or the set values may be changed due to noise etc. There are concerns that various problems may occur, such as changes in the

Furthermore, the above set values are important elements for both the hall and the players, and therefore should be strictly managed by a person with authority.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can deal with problems related to setting values.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem described above, a gaming machine according to appendix 62 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in appendix 62 is:
a first control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A predetermined display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16),
a second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least controlling the display of images displayed on the display means;
a setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means being turned on (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), a state control means for controlling the setting state to a setting state in which the first setting value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 that can execute processes such as step S3024, step S3026, and step S3028),
Although the game cannot be executed in the setting state, the game execution means is controllable so that the game can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, the game is executed in the setting process of step S3020 when the game return process of step S3030 has not been executed yet). If the setting process in step S3020 is completed even though the setting process in step S3020 is completed, the game return process in step S3030 is executed and the main CPU 101 executes the power-on process to enable the game to be played;
A transmitting means (e.g., It has a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 that can execute the process of step S3055,
The second control means
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, the setting operation effect execution means (for example, , a sub CPU 201) that executes control to fully light up the LEDs 25 in red via the LED control circuit 206,
The setting operation performance execution means is
Even if the setting state ends and the game can be played, the game device is configured to be able to perform an effect indicating that the first setting value has been changed or confirmed until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the receiving means receives the setting operation information, an effect indicating that one setting value is to be changed or confirmed is executed in a setting state in which a game cannot be executed. Furthermore, even if the setting state is completed and the game can be played, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is performed until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to easily discover fraud in cases where setting values are changed or checked in an unauthorized manner, and it is also possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The setting operation performance execution means is
After the setting state is completed and the game can be played, an effect indicating that the first set value has been changed or confirmed is displayed so that it can be visually understood that the game can be played. It is characterized by being configured to be executable.

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, an effect indicating that the first set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner that allows the user to visually understand that the game is ready for execution. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered even though the effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed is executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The state control means includes:
It has a setting change state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3024) that controls a setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed;
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command was received) and a storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the information as historical information;
An information screen in which the history information is shown in the setting state (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is arranged so that the information screen is not displayed when the setting state ends. further comprising display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of restricting display;
The display control means includes:
When the receiving means receives setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined period of time has passed even if the setting change state has ended. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to display an information screen (for example, to be able to execute the processes in steps S3310 to S3314).

According to the gaming machine (3) above, in the setting state, an information screen showing history information can be displayed on the display means, and when the setting state ends, the display of the information screen is restricted. Therefore, in the setting state, by viewing the information screen showing history information, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting values. In particular, if there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, viewing the information screen will show whether or not the above fraud has occurred. This makes it possible to track the following. Furthermore, by viewing past history information, it can be used for hall sales, for example, and convenience can be improved. Furthermore, when the display of the information screen is restricted when the setting state ends, if setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen will be restricted. can display an information screen. Therefore, even if fraud is committed, it is possible to easily discover such fraud, and it is also possible to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the gaming machine of appendix 62 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with problems related to setting values.

[Appendix 63-1 to Appendix 63-26]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that variably display a first special symbol when a game ball enters a first starting hole, and variably display a second special symbol when a game ball enters a second starting hole. Then, when it is displayed that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a specific result, the special game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

As a gaming machine of this type, a gaming machine that utilizes a function of simultaneously variable displaying a first special symbol and a variable displaying a second special symbol has been disclosed. For example, a variable display of the specified number of times is performed in a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state in which the small winning probability of the second special symbol is higher than that of the first special symbol, the lottery probability is high, and winning in the first starting slot is facilitated. Disclosed is a gaming machine that is capable of ending the facilitation of winning a prize in the first starting slot and shifting to a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, thereby making it easy to execute a small winning game, and increasing the number of balls that come out. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800).

The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800 has a new gaming feature that utilizes a function that simultaneously displays variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol. There is a demand for a gaming machine with even newer gameplay features.

Each of the inventions in Supplementary Notes 63-1 to 63-26 was made in view of such points, and the purpose thereof is to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-1 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. ) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) in which the game ball is easily accepted into a prize opening where a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. main CPU101) and
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
a production control means capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
Although the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific manner, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port, An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state) because acceptance of game balls into the mouth is inhibited. and,
Since the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning slot is easier than in the advantageous gaming state, when the game ball is launched in the specific manner, the game ball is released per unit time. a specific gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of fired balls is larger than both the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state;
controllable to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state at a timing that can be different each time when the game is controlled to be in the advantageous gaming state;
The performance control means is
When the specific game is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the timing of transition to the specific gaming state (the number of time-saving games that have been used, the number of time-saving games that have been used from the specified number of times) The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a performance that suggests the remaining number of time-saving games after subtracting the number of time-saving games.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in an advantageous gaming state, even though the specific game is executed with high frequency based on the acceptance of gaming balls into the second starting opening, the number of gaming balls entering the winning opening is Since acceptance is inhibited, players may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when a specific game is executed in an advantageous gaming state, by using the time dedicated to executing the specific game to perform an effect that suggests the timing to shift to the specific gaming state, it is possible to avoid disadvantages that may be caused to the player. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties such as reducing pleasure.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

In addition, "a performance that suggests the timing of transition to a specific gaming state" is, for example, the number of time-saving games remaining after subtracting the number of time-saving games that have been completed from the specified number of times (determined number of time-saving games). The mode is not limited as long as the timing of transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state can be grasped.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-2 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
(a first holding means capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first starting memories based on the game ball being received in the first starting port;)
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. ) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) in which the game ball is easily accepted into a prize opening where a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. main CPU101) and
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
a production control means capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
Although the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific manner, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port, An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state) because acceptance of game balls into the mouth is inhibited. and,
Since the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning slot is easier than in the advantageous gaming state, when the game ball is launched in the specific manner, the game ball is released per unit time. a specific gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of fired balls is larger than both the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state;
controllable to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state at a timing that can be different each time when the game is controlled to be in the advantageous gaming state;
The performance control means is
performance determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) for determining whether or not to execute a timing suggestion performance that suggests the timing of transition to the specific gaming state when the specific game is executed in the advantageous gaming state;
When the performance determining means decides to execute the timing suggestion performance, a timing suggestion performance is executed that suggests the timing to shift to the specific game state using the time provided for the execution of the specific game. It has an execution means (for example, sub CPU 201),
The performance determining means is
The present invention is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to perform the timing suggestion performance so that the frequency of execution of the timing suggestion performance can vary depending on the transition timing (for example, the number of time reductions).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in an advantageous gaming state, even though the specific game is executed with high frequency based on the acceptance of gaming balls into the second starting opening, the number of gaming balls entering the winning opening is Since acceptance is inhibited, players may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when a specific game is executed in an advantageous gaming state, by using the time dedicated to executing the specific game to perform an effect that suggests the timing to shift to the specific gaming state, it is possible to avoid disadvantages that may be caused to the player. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties such as reducing pleasure.

By the way, in the specific game state, the specific game is executed with high frequency based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port, so if the execution frequency of the timing suggestion effect is high, it may actually cause a decrease in interest. Therefore, if the execution frequency of the execution lottery of the timing suggestion effect is the transition condition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state (for example, if the transition condition is the consumption of time-saving games, the specified number of times (determined) that can be different each time) By varying the number of time reductions)), it is possible to perform a well-balanced timing suggestion performance. In addition, players can now estimate the prescribed number of times based on the frequency of execution of the timing suggestion performance, and enjoy the fun of comparing the timing of transition to a specific gaming state suggested by the timing suggestion performance with the prescribed number of times they have estimated themselves. You can also give.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

In addition, "a performance that suggests the timing of transition to a specific gaming state" is, for example, the number of time-saving games remaining after subtracting the number of time-saving games that have been completed from the specified number of times (determined number of time-saving games). The mode is not limited as long as the timing of transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state can be grasped.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-3 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding a prize ball or data in place of the prize ball as a result of a game played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. ) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) in which the game ball is easily accepted into a prize opening where a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. main CPU101) and
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
a production control means capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
Although the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific manner, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state) in which the number of prize balls or the expected value of prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1 because acceptance of game balls into the mouth is inhibited. ,
Since the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning slot is easier than in the advantageous gaming state, when the game ball is launched in the specific manner, the game ball is released per unit time. a specific gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of fired balls is larger than both the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state;
controllable to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least
It has a state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state at a timing that can be different each time when the game is controlled to be in the advantageous gaming state;
The performance control means is
When the advantageous gaming state is controlled, an indicator (for example, the determined number of time reductions) that may suggest the timing of transition to the specific gaming state is displayed, and when the advantageous gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state, the Index display means (for example, sub CPU 201) that changes the index (for example, subtracts display) so that the index approaches the specific format each time the variable display is performed so that the index takes on a specific format (for example, 0) ).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the gaming machine is controlled to be in an advantageous gaming state, it is not known at what timing it will shift to a specific gaming state, which may make players suspicious and reduce their interest. Therefore, an indicator that can indicate the timing of transition to a specific gaming state is displayed, and so that the indicator approaches a specific mode each time a variable display is performed so that the indicator becomes a specific mode when transitioning from an advantageous gaming state to a specific gaming state. By changing the indicator, the player can understand that when the indicator changes to a specific state, the player will enter a specific gaming state, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The index display means includes:
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, an indicator that can suggest a timing different from the timing of transition to the specific gaming state is displayed as an initial indicator, and apart from the variable display, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, The present invention is characterized in that it includes a specific indicator display means (for example, sub CPU 201) that changes the indicator so that the indicator approaches the specific mode even when a mission is accomplished (e.g., when a mission is accomplished).

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, not only is the variable display performed and the indicator approaches a specific state, but also the indicator changes when a specific condition is met, so that the player can move from an advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible to increase the interest in the game until the transition to a specific game state.

In addition, "timing different from the timing of transition to a specific gaming state" means, for example, when shifting to a specific gaming state when variable display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times (for example, a determined number of time saving times), The number of times means a false number of times different from the number of times.

Furthermore, "changing the index" includes not only a change approaching a specific aspect (for example, a change approaching 0) but also a change moving away from a particular aspect (for example, a change moving away from 0). For example, when a specific condition is met (for example, when a mission is accomplished), the index is changed to approach the specific mode, and when the specific condition is not met (for example, when the mission is failed), the index is changed to move away from the specific mode. The distance indicator may be changed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
In the advantageous gaming state, before the transition timing, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived, and based on the fact that the special result is derived. When the executed special game is finished and further controlled to the advantageous game state,
The specific indicator display means is
The present invention is characterized in that, instead of the initial index, the index that was displayed when the special result was derived can be continuously displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, a special result is derived and a special game is executed before the transition timing is reached in an advantageous gaming state (for example, before the determined time-saving game is exhausted), and this special game When the game is controlled to be in an advantageous gaming state again after the completion of the game, the indicator that was displayed when the special result was derived is continued to be displayed. Therefore, it can be shown to the player that the indicator changes from where it left off the previous time, and losses that may occur due to a special game being executed before the indicator changes to a specific pattern in the previous advantageous gaming state. It is possible to reduce the feeling.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-4 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed variably and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, a production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) controls so that a specific production is performed. and,
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
When the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the game ball is fired in the specific manner, the specific game is executed based on the reception of the game ball into the second starting port. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy, time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1 because the acceptance of game balls into the prize opening is inhibited. )and,
Since the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning slot is easier than in the advantageous gaming state, when the game ball is launched in the specific manner, the unit time a specific gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls fired per hit is larger than both the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state;
controllable to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least
When the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the game machine has a state transition control means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift to the specific gaming state after the variable display is performed a prescribed number of times which may vary each time. ,
The performance control means is
When the second special symbol is variable displayed as the last variable display of the specified number of times, and the special result (for example, jackpot) is derived during the variable display of the second special symbol. The present invention is characterized in that it has a specific performance execution means that executes a performance that is the same as the specific performance that may be performed or a performance that is difficult to distinguish (for example, a reach performance).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when controlled to an advantageous gaming state, the variable display is performed a prescribed number of times, and then the gaming machine can be controlled to shift to a specific gaming state. In addition, when the second special symbol is variable displayed as the last variable display of the specified number of times, a specific performance that can be performed when a special result is derived during the variable display of the second special symbol. It is possible to provide a game machine with new gaming properties, such as a performance that is the same as the above or a performance that is difficult to distinguish from a specific performance. In particular, the variable display at the end of the specified number of times suggests that there is a possibility of transitioning to a specific gaming state, making it possible to stimulate the player's desire to play. In addition, although there is usually no guarantee that a specific performance will always be executed in an advantageous gaming state or a specific gaming state, the same performance as the specific performance or a performance that is difficult to distinguish may be performed in the variable display at the end of the specified number of times. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a prescribed number of times determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that determines a time saving number of times) that determines the prescribed number of times to be one of a plurality of prescribed times,
The specific performance execution means is
Not limited to the prescribed number of times determined by the prescribed number of times determining means, but during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at at least one prescribed number of times among the plurality of prescribed times, the specific performance may be performed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times is determined to be one of the plurality of specified times. In addition, a performance that is the same as a specific performance or a performance that is difficult to distinguish is not limited to the predetermined number of times determined, but is executed during the variable display of the special symbol at least one of a plurality of predetermined times, so it is executed each time. , it becomes possible to provoke the players, and the prescribed number of games can be a very exciting game for the players.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The special game includes:
A first special game (e.g., 8R jackpot game) in which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data is given as a special game executed when the first special result is derived;
As a special game to be executed when the second special result is derived, a second special game with fewer prize balls or prize ball data awarded than the first special game (for example, a 2R jackpot) games) are included,
The performance control means is
a first special effect execution means capable of executing a first special effect when there is a possibility that the first special result is derived;
a second special performance execution means capable of executing a second special performance when there is a possibility that the second special result is derived;
has
The specific performance execution means is
The specific performance may be performed in the same manner as the second special performance or in a manner that is indistinguishable in appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when transitioning from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state, the specific game is executed in the same manner as when the second special game may be executed or in a manner that is indistinguishable in appearance. Since the performance is executed, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may arise due to the fact that the game is not a special game when the advantageous game state is shifted to the specific game state.

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 63-5 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
A game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first drawing and/or the second drawing, the Pre-determination means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific manner, the frequency of execution of the specific game that is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port is the A specific gaming state that is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state),
The player is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of game states including at least
The performance control means is
In the specific gaming state, for one second starting memory stored by the second holding means and another second starting memory stored next to the one second starting memory, the specific When the preliminary determination means determines that the condition can be satisfied and that the special result can be derived, making the specific game and the special game appear as if they are one advantageous game. The present invention is characterized by having a series of performance execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that can execute a series of performances (for example, premiere performance) that can perform a series of performances (for example, a premiere performance).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the advance determination means determines that the specific game and the special game will be executed in the specific game state, the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties, such as a series of performances that can be shown as if it were a game. When this series of performances is performed, the number of prize balls or prize ball data that is the sum of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in the special game. As a result, a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data awarded in one special game, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

Furthermore, the statements "a specific condition may be met" and "a special result may be derived" are statements that include the possibility that the specific condition may not be met and the possibility that a special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this means that when a special result (for example, a "jackpot") is derived from either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, even if the other lottery result is a "special result". This takes into consideration the possibility that a loss may be displayed even if the

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance control means is
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and there is a possibility that the special result is derived, the special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Special performance execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes a performance (for example, reach performance);
After the special game is started, an interval performance execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an interval performance between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
has
The series of performance execution means is
After the specific game is executed, the special effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which it has been determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform a performance in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that is visually indistinguishable from the above-mentioned interval performance without performing the interval performance.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which it has been determined by the advance determination means that a special result will be derived, the special effect would normally not be displayed. When executed, the series performance execution means is during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which the preliminary determination means has determined that a special result will be derived after the specific game is executed. , without performing a special performance, the performance is performed in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that cannot be distinguished in appearance, so it is possible to reduce unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 63-6 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
A game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first drawing and/or the second drawing, the Pre-determination means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific manner, the frequency of execution of the specific game that is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port is the A specific gaming state that is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state),
The player is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of game states including at least
The performance control means is
In the specific gaming state, a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means, and among the plurality of second starting memories, there is a second starting memory in which the specific condition can be satisfied and the special starting memory. When the pre-determination means determines that the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, The present invention is characterized by having a series of performance execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can execute a series of performances (for example, a premiere performance) that can be shown.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means in a specific gaming state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second starting memories. Prior to the second lottery, it is determined whether or not the lottery can be held and whether or not a specific condition can be met. The plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means include both starting memories for which a specific condition can be satisfied and starting memories from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties, in which when it is determined that the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, a series of performances are performed that make it appear as if the specific game and special game are one advantageous game. becomes. When this series of performances is performed, the number of prize balls or prize ball data that is the sum of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in the special game. As a result, a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data awarded in one special game, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

In addition, "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that when the first lottery is held, the specific condition is met. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

Further, the second starting memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and the second starting memory in which a special result can be derived do not need to be stored consecutively in the second holding means. A starting memory that has been determined in advance to be a loss may be included between a starting memory that can be established and a starting memory from which a special result can be derived.

Furthermore, the statements "a specific condition may be met" and "a special result may be derived" are statements that include the possibility that the specific condition may not be met and the possibility that a special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this means that when a special result (for example, a "jackpot") is derived from either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, even if the other lottery result is a "special result". This takes into consideration the possibility that a loss may be displayed even if the

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance control means is
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and there is a possibility that the special result is derived, the special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Special performance execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes a performance (for example, reach performance);
After the special game is started, an interval performance execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an interval performance between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
has
The series of performance execution means is
After the specific game is executed, the special effect is displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which it has been determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform a performance in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that is visually indistinguishable from the above-mentioned interval performance without performing the interval performance.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which it has been determined by the advance determination means that a special result will be derived, the special effect would normally not be displayed. When executed, the series performance execution means is during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which the preliminary determination means has determined that a special result will be derived after the specific game is executed. , without performing a special performance, the performance is performed in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that cannot be distinguished in appearance, so it is possible to reduce unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 63-7 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
A game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first drawing and/or the second drawing, the Pre-determination means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific manner, the frequency of execution of the specific game that is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port is the A specific gaming state that is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state),
The player is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of game states including at least
The performance control means is
In the specific gaming state, a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means, and among the plurality of second starting memories, there is a second starting memory in which the specific condition can be satisfied and the special starting memory. When the pre-determination means determines that the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, It has a series of performance execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that can execute a series of performances (for example, premiere performance) that can be shown,
The series of performance execution means is
When the preliminary determining means determines that the first starting memory stored by the first holding means does not include a starting memory from which the special result can be derived, the series of performances characterized in that it is configured to execute.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means in a specific gaming state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second starting memories. Prior to the second lottery, it is determined whether or not the lottery can be held and whether or not a specific condition can be met. The plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means include both starting memories for which a specific condition can be satisfied and starting memories from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties, in which when it is determined that the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, a series of performances are performed that make it appear as if the specific game and special game are one advantageous game. becomes. When this series of performances is performed, the number of prize balls or prize ball data that is the sum of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in the special game. As a result, a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data awarded in one special game, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

By the way, when performing a series of performances that can make it appear as if a specific game and a special game are one advantageous game, although the series of performances has started, regarding the second starting memory from which a special result can be derived. There is a possibility that a situation may occur where the first special symbol is variably displayed and a special result is derived before a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, when the preliminary determination means determines that the first starting memory stored by the first holding means does not include a starting memory from which a special result can be derived, a series of effects is executed. , efforts are being made to prevent such situations from occurring.

Note that the second starting memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and the second starting memory in which a special result can be derived do not need to be stored consecutively in the second holding means. A starting memory that has been determined in advance to be a loss may be included between a starting memory that can be established and a starting memory from which a special result can be derived.

Furthermore, the statements "a specific condition may be met" and "a special result may be derived" are statements that include the possibility that the specific condition may not be met and the possibility that a special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this means that when a special result (for example, a "jackpot") is derived from either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, even if the other lottery result is a "special result". This takes into consideration the possibility that a loss may be displayed even if the

In addition, "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that when the first lottery is held, the specific condition is met. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance control means is
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and there is a possibility that the special result is derived, the special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Special performance execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes a performance (for example, reach performance);
After the special game is started, an interval performance execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an interval performance between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
has
The series of performance execution means is
After the specific game is executed, the special effect is displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which it has been determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform a performance in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that is visually indistinguishable from the above-mentioned interval performance without performing the interval performance.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which it has been determined by the advance determination means that a special result will be derived, the special effect would normally not be displayed. When executed, the series performance execution means is during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which the preliminary determination means has determined that a special result will be derived after the specific game is executed. , without performing a special performance, the performance is performed in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that cannot be distinguished in appearance, so it is possible to reduce unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 63-8 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the second startup memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
A game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first drawing and/or the second drawing, the Pre-determination means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific manner, the frequency of execution of the specific game that is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port is the A specific gaming state that is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state),
The player is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of game states including at least
The special results include:
After the special game is executed, a first special result that is controlled to a gaming state in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low; and after the special game is executed, the special result is A second special result is included in which the game state is controlled to have a relatively high probability of derivation, and
The pre-determination means is
When it is determined that the special result is derived, it can also be determined whether the special result is the first special result or the second special result,
The performance control means is
In the specific gaming state, a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means, and among the plurality of second starting memories, there is a specific second starting memory in which the specific condition can be satisfied, and the second starting memory. When the preliminary determination means determines that both the special game and the special second starting memory from which a special result can be derived are included, whether the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It has a series of performance execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that can execute a series of performances (for example, premiere performance) that can make it look like
The series of performance execution means is
When the special second starting memory is determined to be the second special result by the preliminary determination means, first, an effect indicating that the special second starting memory is the first special result. and is configured to be able to perform a promotion effect indicating that the first special result has been promoted to the second special result during the variable display of the second special symbol for the special second starting memory. It is characterized by being done.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means in a specific gaming state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second starting memories. Prior to the second lottery, it is determined whether or not the lottery can be held and whether or not a specific condition can be met. The plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means include both starting memories for which a specific condition can be satisfied and starting memories from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties, in which when it is determined that the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, a series of performances are performed that make it appear as if the specific game and special game are one advantageous game. becomes. When this series of performances is performed, the number of prize balls or prize ball data that is the sum of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in the special game. As a result, a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data awarded in one special game, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

By the way, if a series of performances are performed that can make it appear as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, the special game in particular will be derived between the specific game and the special game. Since the second special symbol is sometimes displayed in a variable manner, this variable display may result in an unnatural state in which there is a time period between the specific game and the special game. Therefore, when the second starting memory that has been determined to be a special result by the pre-discrimination means is the second special result, even though the special second starting memory is the second special result, the second starting memory is the second special result. performs a performance indicating that it is the first special result, and during the variable display of the second special symbol for the special second starting memory, the first special result is promoted to the second special result. We are trying to execute a promotion effect that indicates this. This makes it possible to suppress unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game.

Note that the specific second starting memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and the special second starting memory in which a special result can be derived do not need to be stored consecutively in the second holding means. A starting memory that has been previously determined to be a loss may be included between the specific second starting memory where the condition can be satisfied and the special second starting memory where a special result can be derived.

Furthermore, the statements "a specific condition may be met" and "a special result may be derived" are statements that include the possibility that the specific condition may not be met and the possibility that a special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this means that when a special result (for example, a "jackpot") is derived from either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, even if the other lottery result is a "special result". This takes into consideration the possibility that a loss may be displayed even if the

In addition, "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that when the first lottery is held, the specific condition is met. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-9 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
A game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first drawing and/or the second drawing, the a preliminary determination unit (for example, main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result is derived and whether the specific condition is satisfied;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific manner, the frequency of execution of the specific game that is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port is the A specific gaming state that is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state),
The player is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of game states including at least
The second special symbol variable control means is
The variable display of the second special symbol is divided into a normal variable display that is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, and super reach B for high start) and a normal variable display that is variably displayed for a predetermined time, The display is performed using any one of a plurality of variable display times, including a short-time variable display (for example, ultra-fast fluctuation) that is displayed variably for a shorter time than
The performance control means is
In the specific gaming state, for one second starting memory stored by the second holding means and another second starting memory stored next to the one second starting memory, the specific When the pre-discrimination means determines that the condition can be satisfied and that the special result can be derived, making the specific game and the special game appear as if they are one advantageous game. It has a series of performance execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that can execute a series of performances (for example, premiere performance) that can perform
The series of performance execution means is
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to execute the series of effects when the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second starting memory is performed in the short time variable display.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the advance determination means determines that the specific game and the special game will be executed in the specific game state, the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties, such as a series of performances that can be shown as if it were a game. When this series of performances is performed, the number of prize balls or prize ball data that is the sum of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given in the specific game and the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in the special game. As a result, a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data awarded in one special game, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

By the way, if a series of performances are performed that can make it appear as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, the special game in particular will be derived between the specific game and the special game. Since the second special symbol is sometimes displayed in a variable manner, this variable display may result in an unnatural state in which there is a time period between the specific game and the special game. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for another second starting memory (the second starting memory for which the pre-discrimination means has determined that a special result is derived), the second special symbol is displayed as a variable display for a short time. , I am trying to execute a series of performances. This makes it possible to suppress unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

Furthermore, the statements "a specific condition may be met" and "a special result may be derived" are statements that include the possibility that the specific condition may not be met and the possibility that a special result may not be derived, respectively. However, this means that when a special result (for example, a "jackpot") is derived from either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, even if the other lottery result is a "special result". This takes into consideration the possibility that a loss may be displayed even if the

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance control means is
The game machine further includes an opening effect execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes an opening effect for a predetermined period of time when execution of the special game is started;
The second special symbol variable control means is
In the specific gaming state, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the special result is derived, the variable display of the second special symbol is set at a predetermined probability (for example, 50% probability). and can be executed for a short time (for example, 1000 msec of ultra-fast fluctuations) shorter than the predetermined time,
The series of performance execution means is
When the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second starting memory is performed for the short time, the series of variable displays of the second special symbol performed for the one second starting memory It is characterized by being configured to perform a performance.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result is derived, the second special symbol is variably displayed for a short time shorter than the predetermined time. When the game is played, a series of performances are executed during the variable display of the second special symbol that is performed for the second starting memory, so that it is possible to reduce unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. It becomes possible.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The performance control means is
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and there is a possibility that the special result is derived, the special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Special performance execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes a performance (for example, reach performance);
After the special game is started, an interval performance execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes an interval performance between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
has
The series of performance execution means is
After the specific game is executed, the special effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which it has been determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform a performance in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that is visually indistinguishable from the above-mentioned interval performance without performing the interval performance.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which the pre-discrimination means has determined that a special result will be derived, the special effect is normally not displayed. When executed, the series performance execution means is during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second starting memory for which the preliminary determination means has determined that a special result will be derived after the specific game is executed. , without performing a special performance, the performance is performed in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that cannot be distinguished in appearance, so it is possible to reduce unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The gaming machine set forth in Supplementary Note 63-10 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, a special game in which a round game in which a predetermined movable member is opened and closed is played for a predetermined number of rounds. A special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes the game,
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) is activated. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
A game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first drawing and/or the second drawing, the Pre-determination means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is fired in the specific manner, the frequency of execution of the specific game that is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port is the A specific gaming state that is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state),
The player is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of game states including at least
The pre-determination means is
When the special game is being executed, it is determined whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied, at least with respect to the second start memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the second lottery. and
The performance control means is
When the special game is controlled to the specific game state after the special game ends, the specific condition is satisfied for the second start memory stored in the second holding means during the execution of the special game. When the pre-determination means determines that the game will be played, a specific effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) performs a specific effect suggesting that the number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the special game has increased in a pseudo manner. It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the special game is controlled to the specific gaming state after the special game ends, the second holding means is activated during the execution of the special game before being controlled to the specific gaming state. A specific performance that suggests that the number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the special game has been increased in a pseudo manner when the pre-determining means determines that a specific condition can be satisfied regarding the stored second start memory. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features, such as the ability to play. When such a specific effect is performed, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the number of rounds has increased, although the round game executed in the special game remains the same, and the number of rounds executed in the special game is increased. By making the player think that a round game will be played over several rounds, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

In addition, the statements "a special result may be derived" and "a specific condition may be met" are statements that include the possibility that a special result may not be derived and the possibility that a specific condition may not be met, respectively. However, this means that when a special result (for example, a "jackpot") is derived from either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, even if the other lottery result is a "special result". This takes into consideration the possibility that a loss may be displayed even if the

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance control means is
comprising an end effect control means for performing an end effect (for example, an ending effect) indicating the end of the special game when the special game ends;
The end effect control means is
When the specific performance is performed, the ending performance is not performed when the special game ends, but is performed when the specific game that can be executed after the special game ends. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when a specific performance is performed, the end performance that would normally be performed when the special game ends is not performed when the specific performance is performed, but is performed after the special game ends. Since this is performed when the specified game ends, it is possible to increase the credibility of the increase in the number of rounds.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-11 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100) is operated. a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball into a prize opening where a prize ball or prize ball data is provided when the game ball is accepted; ,
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
Prior determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the special result can be derived for at least the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the second lottery;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
It is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means in parallel;
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
A first gaming state in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal gaming state), and the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
It is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one of a plurality of gaming states, and to be able to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state,
The performance control means is
In the first gaming state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, a performance suggesting the determination result by the preliminary determining means regarding the second starting memory is performed under a predetermined condition. It is characterized by being configured to be executable based on what has been established.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first gaming state, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing the game ball in the normal manner. Furthermore, in the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Because it is large, games are played by firing the game ball in a specific manner. Then, when the second gaming state shifts to the first gaming state, the second starting memory may be stored by the second holding means. In the first gaming state, since the expected number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed and interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, an effect suggesting the determination result by the preliminary determining means regarding the second starting memory is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features, such as execution based on certain events. Thereby, even if the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the determination result by the advance determination means is suggested, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In particular, even if a plurality of second starting memories are stored in the second holding means when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the second starting conditions for all of the plurality of second starting memories are Since the determination result by the preliminary determination means is suggested without waiting for the establishment of , it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Among these, the effect is remarkable when the second start memory stored in the second holding means when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state is a predetermined number which is the upper limit.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

In addition, the statement "a special result may be derived" is a statement that includes the possibility that a special result may not be derived, but this does not mean that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol This takes into account the fact that when one side derives a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), a loss may be displayed even if the other lottery result is a "special result." .

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance control means is
The predetermined means for determining the second starting memory based on the predetermined condition that the game ball fired in the normal manner is received in a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform a performance that suggests the discrimination result by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball launched in the normal manner into the predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port, and the second An effect suggesting the determination result by the preliminary determination means regarding the starting memory is executed. Therefore, even if the second game state in which game balls are fired in a specific manner is transferred to the first game state in which game balls are fired in a normal manner, it is possible to promote the game.

Note that the above predetermined conditions may be established based on one game ball fired in a normal manner being received in a predetermined receiving port, or may be established based on one game ball being fired in a normal manner. It may be established based on a plurality of game balls being received into a predetermined receiving port. Furthermore, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighted condition.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-12 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100) is operated. a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball into a prize opening where a prize ball or prize ball data is provided when the game ball is accepted; ,
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
Prior determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the special result can be derived for at least the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the second lottery;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
It is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means in parallel;
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
A first gaming state in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal gaming state), and the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
It is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one of a plurality of gaming states, and to be able to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state,
The performance control means is
In the first gaming state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, the pre-discrimination means determines a specific second starting memory among the stored second starting memories. A second starting result pre-presentation means (for example, a sub CPU201) and
When the result of the first lottery is at least the special result, a first reach effect indicating that the special result may be derived after the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. A reach effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes
has
The reach performance execution means is
Even though the special suggestion performance is executed by the second starting result preliminary performance means, the first reach performance is performed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is the special result, When the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second starting memory is started during execution of the first reach effect, the first reach effect indicates that the result of the first lottery is a loss. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform a second ready-to-reach presentation different from the first ready-to-reach presentation after temporarily stopping in a loss mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first gaming state, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing the game ball in the normal manner. Furthermore, in the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Because it is large, games are played by firing the game ball in a specific manner. Then, when the second gaming state shifts to the first gaming state, the second starting memory may be stored by the second holding means. In the first gaming state, since the expected number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed and interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when a specific second starting memory from which a special result is derived is stored by the second holding means, the determination result by the prior determining means regarding the specific second starting memory is It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features, such as executing a suggested performance based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition. Thereby, even if the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the determination result by the advance determination means is suggested, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

By the way, the special suggestion performance is performed at a stage where the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the specific second starting memory has not yet started. Therefore, the first reach effect is executed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result, and during the execution of this first reach effect, the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second starting memory is performed. may be started. Therefore, the first reach effect is executed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result, and during the execution of this first reach effect, the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second starting memory is performed. When started, the first ready-to-win presentation is temporarily stopped in a losing manner, and then a second ready-to-win presentation, which is different from the first ready-to-win presentation, is started. This second reach effect is carried over from the first reach effect and is performed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result, but the first reach and second reach are different reach effects. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the second reach effect is based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result. This makes it possible to control the special gaming state based on the result of the first lottery, rather than the result of the second lottery, without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

In addition, the statement "a special result may be derived" is a statement that includes the possibility that a special result may not be derived, but this does not mean that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol This takes into account the fact that when one side derives a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), a loss may be displayed even if the other lottery result is a "special result." .

Further, from the viewpoint of promoting gaming, it is preferable that "a predetermined condition is met" is, for example, a condition that can be met as a result of a player playing a game. For example, a prize may be established based on winning in a general winning hole where a prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball wins, or it may be based on winning a predetermined number or more of game balls in the general winning hole. It may be established based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The reach performance execution means is
Although the second reach effect is performed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is the special result, the second reach effect is performed based on the fact that the result of the second lottery is the special result. It is characterized by a performance that appears to be based on the fact that

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the second reach effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the result of the second lottery is a special result, so it is more appealing to the player. It becomes possible to control the special game state based on the result of the first lottery without giving a sense of discomfort.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The second start result pre-presentation means includes:
The predetermined means for determining the second starting memory based on the predetermined condition that the game ball fired in the normal manner is received in a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform a performance that suggests the determination result by.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball launched in the normal manner into the predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port, and the second An effect suggesting the determination result by the preliminary determination means regarding the starting memory is executed. Therefore, even if the second game state in which game balls are fired in a specific manner is transferred to the first game state in which game balls are fired in a normal manner, it is possible to promote the game.

Note that the above predetermined conditions may be established based on one game ball fired in a normal manner being received in a predetermined receiving port, or may be established based on one game ball being fired in a normal manner. It may be established based on a plurality of game balls being received into a predetermined receiving port. Furthermore, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighted condition.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-13 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100) is operated. a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball into a prize opening where a prize ball or prize ball data is provided when the game ball is accepted; ,
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
It is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means in parallel;
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
A first gaming state in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal gaming state), and the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
It is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one of a plurality of gaming states, and to be able to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state,
The performance control means is
When controlled in the first gaming state, an effect image based on the result of the first lottery is displayed in a predetermined display area,
In the first gaming state, when the result of the second lottery is the special result, in a manner that does not impede visibility of an effect image based on the result of the first lottery displayed in the predetermined display area, comprising a suggestion effect means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that performs a suggestion effect to suggest in a manner that the player can understand that the result of the second lottery is the special result;
The suggestion producing means is
When the variable display of the first special symbol that is being performed when the variable display of the second special symbol is started is based on the special result, a non-execution process is performed so that the suggestion effect is not always performed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first gaming state, the effect image based on the result of the first lottery is displayed in the predetermined display area, so that it is assumed that the result of the second lottery is a special result. However, it is extremely difficult for the player to detect this. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the result of the second lottery is a special result, the result of the second lottery is a special result in a manner that does not hinder the visibility of the effect image based on the result of the first lottery. A suggestive performance is performed that suggests the following in a manner that the player can understand. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the result of the second lottery is a special result. However, when starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display of the first special symbol may be a variable display based on a special result. In such a case, it is possible for the sub CPU 201 to provide a gaming machine with new playability by performing a process of not executing the suggestion effect so that the suggestion effect is not always performed. Become. As a result, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, without the player being aware that there is a possibility that a special result may be derived, and based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result. This makes it possible to control the game to a special gaming state.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-14 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of first start memories based on reception of a game ball in the first start port;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first startup memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second holding means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of second starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the second starting port;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) regarding the second start memory based on the establishment of a second start condition;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100) is operated. a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball into a prize opening where a prize ball or prize ball data is provided when the game ball is accepted; ,
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Equipped with
It is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means in parallel;
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
A first gaming state in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal gaming state), and the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state)
It is configured to be able to control one of a plurality of gaming states including at least one of a plurality of gaming states, and to be able to shift from the second gaming state to the first gaming state,
The performance control means is
In the first game state, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and the specific condition is satisfied, an effect that suggests the execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the fulfillment of the specific condition. The present invention is characterized by having a timing suggestion performance execution means that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first gaming state, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by firing the game ball in the normal manner. Furthermore, in the second gaming state, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Because it is large, games are played by firing the game ball in a specific manner. Then, when the second gaming state shifts to the first gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol may be in progress. In the first game state, since the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, the variable display of the second special symbol in progress does not finish easily, and the result of the second lottery There is a risk that the derivation of the information will be delayed and interest will decline. In particular, if a result indicating that a specific condition has been met is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the first game state, when the second special symbol is displayed variably and a specific condition is satisfied, an effect that suggests the execution timing of a specific game to be executed based on the establishment of the specific condition is created. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features, such as execution based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition. As a result, even if a result indicating that a specific condition has been met is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the execution timing of the specific game is suggested, so it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

Further, from the viewpoint of promoting gaming, it is preferable that "a predetermined condition is met" is, for example, a condition that can be met as a result of a player playing a game. For example, a prize may be established based on winning in a general winning hole where a prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball wins, or it may be based on winning a predetermined number or more of game balls in the general winning hole. It may be established based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
It further comprises a preliminary determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied, prior to the second lottery, with respect to at least the second start memory stored in the second holding means. ,
The timing suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means and the pre-determining means for the second starting memory determines that the specific condition can be satisfied, the specific condition The present invention is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific game to be executed is suggested based on the establishment of .

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state, not only is the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, but also the second special symbol is displayed by the second holding means. It is possible that the starting memory is stored. In the first gaming state, since the expected number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed and interest may be reduced. In particular, if a result indicating that a specific condition has been met is derived after the derivation of the second lottery result is delayed, interest in the game is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, if it is determined by the advance determination means regarding the second starting memory that a specific condition can be satisfied, this By suggesting the execution timing of a specific game to be executed based on the establishment of a specific condition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to a delay in deriving the result of the second lottery.

In addition, the statement "a specific condition may be met" is a statement that includes the possibility that the specific condition may not be met, but this does not mean that either of the first special symbol and the second special symbol This takes into account that when one party derives a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), a loss may be displayed even if the other lottery result is a "specific result." be.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The timing suggestion performance execution means includes:
As the predetermined condition, the second special symbol is variably displayed based on the game ball fired in the normal manner being received in a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute an effect that suggests the execution timing of the specific game to be executed when the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball launched in the normal manner into the predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port, and the second A performance suggesting the execution timing of a specific game to be executed when a specific condition is established by variable display of special symbols is executed. Therefore, even if the second game state in which game balls are fired in a specific manner transitions to the first game state in which game balls are fired in a normal manner, the game ball is specified based on reception of the game ball into a predetermined receiving port. Since the execution timing of the game is suggested, it is possible to encourage the promotion of the game.

Note that the above predetermined conditions may be established based on one game ball fired in a normal manner being received in a predetermined receiving port, or may be established based on one game ball being fired in a normal manner. It may be established based on a plurality of game balls being received into a predetermined receiving port. Furthermore, in addition to the above conditions, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighted condition.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-15 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
A first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) and a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving game balls fired toward the gaming area;
A first starting memory is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four) based on the fact that a game ball is received in the first starting port, and a first starting memory is stored based on that a game ball is accepted in the second starting port. a holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) that stores up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of 2-start memories;
A first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first starting memory is conducted based on the first starting condition being met, and a first lottery regarding the second starting memory is conducted based on the second starting condition being met. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery);
special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery and variably displays a second special symbol based on the result of the second lottery;
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result is derived;
Equipped with
The lottery means is
Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed, as long as the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol corresponding to the established starting condition will be displayed. A normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a lottery,
a specific lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs both the first lottery and the second lottery in a predetermined order when both the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied;
has
The specific lottery means is
When both the first lottery and the second lottery are held in a predetermined order, but the result of one of the first lottery and second lottery that was held first is the special result; The present invention is characterized in that a non-winning process is executed so that the result of another lottery does not become the special result.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since both the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed in a predetermined order, the control load can be reduced while the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special lottery can be performed in a predetermined order. It becomes possible to perform variable display of symbols in parallel. Moreover, in order to prevent the results of both the first lottery and the second lottery from becoming special results at the same time, if the result of either lottery is a special result, the other lottery is executed as a non-winning process. By doing so, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience in which it is possible to prevent special results from occurring in both the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal variable display pattern in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is relatively large and the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time are relative. storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing at least a small long-term variable display pattern;
variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol to be one of the plurality of variable display patterns;
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls one of a plurality of gaming states;
Furthermore,
The gaming state control means includes:
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is smaller than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the number of balls fired per unit time a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls is smaller than 1;
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the ball launches per unit time. a second gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls is larger than the first gaming state;
can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states, including
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined to be the normal variable display pattern at least in the first gaming state, and the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is It is characterized in that the display pattern is configured to be able to determine the long-term variable display pattern based on a special result.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the first special symbol is variably displayed in a long-term variable display pattern. Moreover, if the result of the first lottery is a special result, a non-winning process is executed in which the result of the second lottery is not a special result, so the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a variable display pattern for a long time. During this period, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is guaranteed to be played in the first game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The storage means is
As the long-term variable display pattern, a plurality of long-term variable display patterns having different expected values of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time are stored,
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
A variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol determined based on the fact that the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is the special result, is set to one of the plurality of long-term variable display patterns. It is characterized by being configured to decide on one of the following.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is set to the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display per unit time. Since one of a plurality of different long-term variable display patterns is determined, the period during which gaming in the first gaming state is guaranteed differs depending on which one of the plurality of long-term variable display patterns is determined. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-16 is
A gaming machine capable of giving prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game played by firing game balls toward a gaming area,
A first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) and a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving game balls fired toward the gaming area;
A first starting memory is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four) based on the fact that a game ball is received in the first starting port, and a first starting memory is stored based on that a game ball is accepted in the second starting port. a holding unit (for example, main CPU 101) that stores up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of 2-start memories;
A first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) regarding the first starting memory is conducted based on the first starting condition being met, and a first lottery regarding the second starting memory is conducted based on the second starting condition being met. A lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery);
special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery and variably displays a second special symbol based on the result of the second lottery;
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result is derived;
Even if the special result is not derived, if a specific condition is met (for example, winning a small win), a specific game (for example, a small win game) with a lower profit level than when the special game is executed is executed. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) to be executed;
Equipped with
The said lottery means is
Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed, as long as the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol corresponding to the established starting condition will be displayed. A normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a lottery,
a specific lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs both the first lottery and the second lottery in a predetermined order when both the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied;
has
The specific lottery means is
When both the first lottery and the second lottery are held in a predetermined order, but the result of either the first lottery or the second lottery that was held first is the special result. , execute a non-winning process so that the results of other drawings do not become the special results,
When the specific conditions are met in either the first lottery or the second lottery, the results of the other lottery are changed to the special one without executing the non-winning process. It is characterized by drawing lots to determine the possible outcome.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since both the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed in a predetermined order, the control load can be reduced while the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special lottery can be performed in a predetermined order. It becomes possible to perform variable display of symbols in parallel. Moreover, in order to prevent the results of both the first lottery and the second lottery from becoming special results at the same time, if the result of either lottery is a special result, the other lottery is executed as a non-winning process. By doing so, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience in which it is possible to prevent special results from occurring in both the first lottery and the second lottery at the same time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal variable display pattern in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is relatively large and the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time are relative. storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing at least a small long-term variable display pattern;
variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol to be one of the plurality of variable display patterns;
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls one of a plurality of gaming states;
Furthermore,
The gaming state control means includes:
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is smaller than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the number of balls fired per unit time a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls is smaller than 1;
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time, and the number of shots per unit time is greater. a second gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls is larger than the first gaming state;
can be controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states, including
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined to be the normal variable display pattern at least in the first gaming state, and the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is The method is characterized in that the display pattern is configured such that the long-term variable display pattern can be determined based on a special result.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the first special symbol is variably displayed in a long-term variable display pattern. Moreover, if the result of the first lottery is a special result, a non-winning process is executed in which the result of the second lottery is not a special result, so the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a variable display pattern for a long time. During this period, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is guaranteed to be played in the first game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The storage means is
As the long-term variable display pattern, a plurality of long-term variable display patterns having different expected values of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time are stored,
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
A variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol determined based on the fact that the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is the special result, is set to one of the plurality of long-term variable display patterns. It is characterized by being configured to decide on one of the following.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is set to the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display per unit time. Since one of a plurality of different long-term variable display patterns is determined, the period during which gaming in the first gaming state is guaranteed differs depending on which one of the plurality of long-term variable display patterns is determined. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-17 is
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 270) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery (for example, first special lottery). and,
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 4401 in FIG. 270) capable of receiving a game ball launched in the predetermined manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which variable display patterns for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are prepared;
Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, a main CPU 101) that executes time determination table setting processing;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, "jackpot") is derived, special game execution means (for example, , main CPU 101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 270) is activated. is activated to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball into a prize opening (for example, small winning prize opening 5400) where a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101),
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The storage means is
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns are prepared in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small (for example, the variation time of the special symbol for low start in Figure 258 determination table), and a second table in which a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are prepared (for example, the high start pattern shown in FIG. 259). Special symbol fluctuation time determination table)
at least remembers
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
The variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, and the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting hole. The present invention is characterized by comprising a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means capable of determining a variable display pattern using the second table instead of the first table based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied when the display is performed. .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port. , it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features such as changing from the first table to the second table. Moreover, it is also possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game that may occur when, for example, a game ball cannot be won in the prize opening even though a specific game is executed.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-18 is
A gaming machine in which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (for example, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 268) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (for example, second starting port 4401 in FIG. 268) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result is derived;
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 268) is activated. 268, to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball is accepted (e.g., small hit prize hole 5400 in FIG. 268). a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a game);
A game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
a normal gaming state in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low (for example, a "normal gaming state");
An advantageous gaming state in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1 (for example, "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state") )and,
The probability of deriving the special result is relatively high, and the execution of the specific game increases the frequency of receiving game balls into the specific prize opening, so that the number of prize balls or prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is increased. a specific gaming state in which the expected value of the number of data is greater than both the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state (for example, a “high-precision non-time-saving gaming state”);
controllable to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least
When the variable display of special symbols is performed a prescribed number of times (for example, a determined time saving number) in the advantageous gaming state, state transition control means (for example, It is characterized by having a main CPU 101).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times in an advantageous gaming state, the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time is changed to the normal game state. and transition to a specific gaming state that is greater than any of the advantageous gaming states. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties, in which even if a special result is not derived in an advantageous gaming state, a decline in interest can be suppressed by shifting to a specific gaming state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
By determining the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified times (for example, 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times), it is possible to change from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state. A transition timing determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can change the transition timing each time;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs a predetermined effect without specifying the specified number of times determined by the transition timing determining means;
It is characterized by further comprising:

According to the gaming machine described in (2) above, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the timing of transition from an advantageous gaming state to a specific advantageous gaming state, thereby further increasing interest. becomes possible.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern used for variable display of at least the second special symbol;
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns are prepared in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small (for example, the variation of the special symbol for a low start in Fig. 258). time (variable display time) determination table) and a second table with a plurality of relatively large variable display patterns (for example, the variable time (variable display time) determination table for special symbols for high start in Figure 259). At least a storage means for storing (for example, main ROM 102),
Furthermore,
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the first table at least in the advantageous gaming state, and the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the first table, and the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the first table, and the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the first table, based on the second table instead of the first table,
The second lottery means is
The present invention is characterized in that the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is conducted.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, based on the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state, the variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is changed to the second special symbol per unit time. A variable display pattern with a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable symbol display is now determined, and a specific condition is met with a higher probability in the second lottery than in the first lottery. Therefore, the specific game will be executed with high frequency. In this way, it is possible to realize a specific game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is larger than both the normal game state and the advantageous game state.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-19 is
a special starting port that facilitates or enables the reception of game balls when a predetermined movable member is activated;
a normal starting area (for example, passage gate 49 in FIG. 274) capable of receiving the game ball;
Normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of conducting a normal lottery in such a manner that all or most of the lottery results are normal wins based on the game ball passing through the normal starting area;
Based on the result of the normal lottery being the normal win, a movable control means (for example, the main CPU 101 )and,
a holding unit (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of starting memories based on the reception of the game ball in the special starting port;
A special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a special lottery regarding the startup memory based on the establishment of the startup condition;
When a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived by variable display of special symbols, a special game (for example, a special game that allows the game ball to be accepted into a special winning hole (for example, the big winning hole 540 in FIG. 274)) is performed. For example, a special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a jackpot game),
Based on the fact that the result of the special lottery is a specific result (for example, a small win) that is all or most of the results when the special lottery result is not the special result, a specific movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100) A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that activates a specific winning opening (for example, the small winning opening 5400 in FIG. )and,
The gaming state after the special game ends is an advantageous gaming state (unless the result of the special lottery is not the special result, all or most of the results are the specific result, and the specific movable member is approximately in the operating state ( For example, a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the time saving state);
At least, when a game ball is received in the special winning hole and when a game ball is received in the specific winning hole, a prize giving means (for example, from the main CPU 101) that can give a prize ball or prize ball data. (a payout/launch control circuit that pays out prize balls according to the commands of);
Equipped with
At least while the special game is being executed, the starting memory is stored by the holding means based on the acceptance of the game ball into the special starting port, but the starting condition is not satisfied;
The normal starting region is
During the execution of the special game, the game ball is received in the special prize opening, thereby making it difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area, and while the special game is being executed, Even if the specified movable member is in an operating state, the game ball is received in the specified winning opening, thereby making it difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area. It is characterized by becoming.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area while the special game is being executed, and even if the special game is not being executed, the specific movable member If it is in the operating state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area. Therefore, until a special lottery is executed regarding the starting memory stored in the holding means when the special game ends, the specific movable member is approximately in the operating state, and during the execution of the specific game, the specific movable member is in the normal starting area. When a special game is executed due to difficulty or impossibility of passing the game ball, the prize ball or prize ball data given during the execution of the special game and the starting memory number stored in the holding means It is now possible to award both the prize ball or prize ball data that is awarded when a specific game is executed, and the number of prize balls or prize ball data that is awarded when a special game is executed once. The expected value of numbers can be increased. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game machine further includes an interval control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls to an interval state after the special game is finished and until it is controlled to the advantageous game state,
The starting conditions are:
Even if the starting memory is stored in the holding means when the special game ends, it is configured so that it will not be established as long as the interval state is controlled;
The specific winning opening is provided downstream of the special winning opening, and
The ball path of the game ball between the special winning hole and the specific winning hole is
The game ball that was not accepted into the special winning slot will win the special prize for a period longer than the total time of the time controlled by the interval state and the time until the specific movable member operates due to the establishment of the starting condition. It is characterized by being configured so that it takes a longer time to reach the mouth.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the game machine is not accepted into the special winning slot for a period longer than the total time of the time during which the interval state is controlled and the time until the specific movable member is activated due to the establishment of the starting condition. The time it takes for the game ball to reach the specific winning hole becomes longer. Therefore, when the game ball that could not enter the special winning hole because it reached the special winning hole immediately after the special game ended reaches the special winning hole, the specific movable member will be activated, so it will not be able to enter the special winning hole. As the game ball is accepted, passage of the game ball into the normal starting area becomes difficult or impossible. As a result, during the execution of the specific game for the number of starting memories stored in the holding means at the time the special game ends, the game ball will be surely accepted in the specific winning opening, and the gaming ball will enter the specific winning opening. It becomes possible to guarantee an opportunity to be given a prize ball or prize ball data based on the following.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-20 is
A gaming machine in which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5443 in FIG. 275) that facilitates or enables reception of a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of conducting a first special lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a first special symbol and deriving the result of the first special lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving game balls that are fired toward the gaming area in the predetermined manner and are not received in the first starting port;
a second special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of conducting a second special lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving the result of the second special lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result is derived, special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) controls the special game state to be advantageous to the player. ,
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 275) is activated. 275, to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball is accepted (e.g., small hit prize hole 5400 in FIG. 275). a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a game);
A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
Equipped with
The gaming state control means includes:
A first gaming state in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal gaming state),
a second gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) in which receiving the gaming ball into the first starting port is easier than in the first gaming state; and receiving the gaming ball into the first starting port is easier than the first gaming state; It is more difficult than the second game state, and a larger amount of game balls can flow down toward the specific winning hole than in the second game state, and the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time in the first gaming state (for example, in a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state),
controllable to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least
State transition control means capable of executing control for transitioning from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when variable display of special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a determined time saving number) in the second gaming state. (for example, main CPU 101),
The second special symbol variable control means is
Even when the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol can be variably displayed, and when the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived. , while the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol is variably displayed so that the special result is not derived;
The first special symbol variable control means is
When the result of the first special lottery in at least the second gaming state is the special result, the first special symbol is variable in a long fluctuation pattern over a certain period of time (for example, long fluctuation D to F in FIG. 276). By making it possible to derive the special result after displaying, in the third gaming state transferred from the second gaming state, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the long variation pattern. The number of balls fired per unit time can be increased by increasing the chances of awarding prize balls or prize ball data by executing the specific game based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port while The expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the game is configured to be higher than either of the first game state and the second game state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the result of the first special lottery held in the second gaming state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol can be performed for a long time. When the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that the special result is not derived until the special result is derived. When variable display of special symbols is performed a prescribed number of times in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is shifted to the third gaming state. In this third game state, a larger amount of game balls flow down toward the specific winning hole than in the second game state. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a long period of time, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed for a long period of time, the second starting gate When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of game balls into the game ball, the game balls that flow down toward the specific winning hole can be accepted into the specific winning hole, so you can get unlimited prize balls or prize ball data. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features such as being given opportunities.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol that performs a symbol variation effect using a plurality of identification symbols in synchronization with a variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and controls the result of the first special lottery or the second special symbol to be displayed. Further comprising a production control means (for example, sub CPU 201),
The symbol presentation control means is
When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a special result, a plurality of reach effect patterns (for example, normal reach for low start, super reach A for low start, super reach B for low start in FIG. 277) ) has a ready-to-reach effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs the symbol variation effect in any one of the ready-to-reach effect patterns;
The long fluctuation pattern over a certain period of time is
The pattern is characterized in that the first special symbol is variably displayed for a longer time than any of the plurality of ready-to-reach effect patterns.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a special result, the symbol variation performance is performed using any of the multiple reach performance patterns. However, when the result of the first special lottery held in the second gaming state is a special result, the first special symbol is variablely displayed for a longer time than any of these multiple reach effect patterns. By executing a specific game that can be easily accepted into a specific winning slot, it is possible to more securely secure an opportunity to receive a prize ball or prize ball data, and to further increase interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
By determining the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified times (24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, 100 times), the second gaming state is changed to the third gaming state. A transition timing determining means (for example, main CPU 101) that can change the transition timing each time;
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs a predetermined production without specifying the prescribed number of times determined by the transition timing determining means (for example, the determined number of time reductions);
It is characterized by further comprising:

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to make the relationship between the timing at which the first special lottery result becomes a special result and the timing of transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state interesting. becomes. In other words, it is not necessarily the case that the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes a special result in the third game state is as early as possible. For example, if the timing of transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is late, if the result of the first special symbol becomes a special result at an early timing, the period of the second gaming state may be shortened. Also, if the timing of transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is early, the sooner the result of the first special symbol becomes a special result, the longer you can enjoy the benefits of the second gaming state. can. In this way, the predetermined number of times that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed in the third game state can be varied each time, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The performance control means is
When shifting from the second gaming state to the third gaming state while the first special symbol is being variably displayed in the long variation pattern, a series of advantageous games are played in conjunction with the special gaming state. The present invention is characterized in that it further includes a specific effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a specific effect indicating that the specific effect is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific state is entered, a game advantageous to the player is executed that exceeds the prize balls paid out in one special gaming state, even though the special gaming state has not yet been controlled. This makes it possible to further increase the player's interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-21 is
A gaming machine in which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area,
When a predetermined movable member (for example, movable member 4653 in FIG. 280) is actuated, a first starting port (for example, in FIG. 280) that makes it easy or possible to receive a game ball launched in a predetermined manner toward the game area. a first starting port 5443);
a movable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that operates the predetermined movable member to facilitate or enable reception of the game ball into the first starting port;
a first special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of conducting a first special lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a first special symbol and deriving the result of the first special lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 280) capable of receiving game balls that are fired toward the gaming area in the predetermined manner and are not received in the first starting port;
a second special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of conducting a second special lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving the result of the second special lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, "jackpot") is derived, special game execution means (for example, , main CPU 101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a specific movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 280) is activated. Execute a specific game in which a specific game ball is easily accepted into a specific winning hole (for example, the small winning winning hole 5400 in FIG. 280) where a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. means (for example, main CPU 101);
Equipped with
The second special lottery means is
The second special lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first special lottery was conducted,
The second special symbol variable control means is
Even when the first special symbol is being variably displayed, it is possible to variably display the second special symbol, and when the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived. , while the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol is variably displayed so that the special result is not derived;
The first special symbol variable control means is
When the result of the first special lottery is the special result, the first special symbol is variably displayed in a long fluctuation pattern over a certain period of time (for example, long fluctuation D to F in FIG. 276), and then the By making it possible to derive a special result, while the first special symbol is being variably displayed in the long variation pattern, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port. The present invention is characterized in that the game ball is sometimes configured to be able to receive game balls into the specific winning opening, thereby increasing the chances of awarding prize balls or prize ball data.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the first special symbol can be variably displayed for a long time. When the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that the special result is not derived until the special result is derived. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a long period of time, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed for a long period of time, the second starting gate When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of game balls into a specific winning slot, the chances of awarding a prize ball or prize ball data increases, and the chances of receiving a prize ball or prize ball data increase. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features, such as being given unlimited opportunities to acquire data.

Note that "the second special lottery is conducted so that the specific conditions are met with a higher probability than when the first special lottery was held" means that when the first special lottery is held, It is not essential that the following conditions be met (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first special lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning the small winning is 0) (a mode) and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a game state control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
The predetermined movable member is
It always operates in a certain regular manner,
The specific winning opening is
It is configured to be able to accept game balls that are fired toward the gaming area in the predetermined manner and are not received in either the first starting port or the second starting port,
The gaming state control means includes:
A first gaming state in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal gaming state),
the second starting port so that all or most of the game balls that are launched toward the gaming area in the predetermined manner and are not received in the first starting port can be received in the second starting port; A second gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) in which accepting game balls is easier than in the first gaming state, and the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is as described above. This is larger than in the first gaming state, and it is more difficult to accept game balls into the second starting opening than in the second gaming state, so that a larger amount of gaming balls than in the second gaming state are directed toward the specific winning opening. A third gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) in which it is possible to play
controllable to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least
comprising a state transition control means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of executing control for transitioning from the second gaming state to the third gaming state when variable display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times in the second gaming state; It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of special symbols is performed a prescribed number of times in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is shifted to the third gaming state. In this third gaming state, it is more difficult to accept game balls into the second starting port than in the second gaming state, so a larger amount of game balls flow down toward the specific winning port compared to the second gaming state. do. Since the specific prize opening is configured to be able to accept game balls that are fired in a predetermined manner towards the gaming area and are not received in either the first starting opening or the second starting opening, the third game In this state, during the variable display of the first special symbol which is carried out over a long period of time, prize balls or prize ball data can be acquired as much as you like, making it possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-22 is
A gaming machine in which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area,
A game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing game information related to the progress of the game;
data clearing means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S23) capable of clearing the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, the main RAM 103) when a predetermined operation is performed;
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 270) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 4401 in FIG. 270) that can easily receive a game ball launched in the predetermined manner (e.g., left-handed) towards the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which variable display patterns for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are prepared;
variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using one of the plurality of tables; ,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, "jackpot") is derived, special game execution means (for example, , main CPU 101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 270) is activated. A specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The storage means is
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns are prepared in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small (for example, the variation time of the special symbol for low start in Figure 258 determination table), and a second table in which a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are prepared (for example, Special symbol fluctuation time determination table)
at least remembers
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
Although the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, the game information stored in the game information storage means is cleared by the data clearing means. Only in some cases, the present invention is characterized by having a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means that can be determined using the second table.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is changed from the first table based on the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means being cleared. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features such as changing to a second table. In particular, for example, if the gaming machine manager clears the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means before the opening of the hall, the number of second special symbols per unit time when fired in a predetermined manner toward the gaming area is Since the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display can be increased, it is also possible to adjust the ball output.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A game control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player;
A production control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined production;
Furthermore,
The performance control means is
When the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined using the second table, and the first set value is a specific set value, a specific effect that allows a specific effect to be executed. It is characterized by having a performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the player can guess the first set value from the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol, thereby further increasing the interest in the game. be able to.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-23 is
A gaming machine in which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (for example, first starting port 5443 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (for example, second starting port 440 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables in which variable display patterns for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are prepared;
variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using one of the plurality of tables; ,
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a combination of jackpot symbols) is derived, a special game execution means (for executing a special game advantageous to the player) For example, the main CPU 101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the lottery result is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100) is operated. A specific game in which a specific game (for example, a small winning game) is executed in which the game ball is easily accepted into a winning hole (for example, small winning winning hole 5400) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted. Execution means (for example, main CPU 101),
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted, and
The second special symbol variable control means is
Even when the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the second special symbol can be variably displayed, and when the special result is derived by the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol can be variably displayed. In the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is variable displayed so that the special result is not derived,
The storage means is
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns are prepared in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small (the special symbol variable time determination table for low start in Figure 277 ), and a second table in which a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are prepared (variation of special symbol for high start in Figure 278 time determination table)
at least remembers
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol from which the special result is derived is determined to be a specific variable display pattern that is longer than a specified time (for example, long variation G in FIG. 277). Possible first special symbol display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1832),
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started with the specific variable display pattern. and a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1834) that can determine the second special symbol variable display pattern based on the second table instead of the first table. .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, normally the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the first table, but the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be a fluctuation pattern that is longer than the specified time. By changing from the first table to the second table based on the fact that the first special symbol has been changed, the specific game is guaranteed while the first special symbol variation time continues, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the specific variable display pattern, a series of advantageous games are executed using the specific game and the special game before the special game has been executed yet. The present invention is characterized in that it further includes a performance control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a specific performance indicating that a specific performance is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol is determined to be a specific variable display pattern and the specific game is executed, the special game has not yet been executed. Since it is shown that a game more advantageous to the player will be executed than the special game executed once, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 63-24 is
a first starting port (e.g., first starting port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a normal manner (e.g., left-handed) toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of conducting a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable shutter 4650 in FIG. 254) is actuated, a second starting port (for example, in FIG. 254 second starting port 440),
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of conducting a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU101) and
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small win), a specific movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100) is operated. , A specific game in which a specific game (for example, a small winning game) is executed that facilitates acceptance into a specific winning hole (for example, small winning winning hole 5400) where a prize ball or prize ball data is given when a game ball is accepted. Execution means (for example, main CPU 101),
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls the game state after the special game is executed to one of a plurality of game states;
Equipped with
The second lottery means is
The second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was conducted,
The gaming state control means includes:
A normal gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) in which the probability that the special result is derived is relatively low and the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1. ,
The probability that the special result is derived is relatively high, the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port is relatively easy, and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time. An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of is less than 1 (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state),
The probability that the special result is derived is relatively high, the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port is relatively difficult, and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time. a specific gaming state (for example, a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) in which the expected value of is larger than both the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state;
controllable to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least
In a gaming state in which it is relatively easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state),
When the game ball is fired in the normal manner and received in the first starting port, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived, it is assumed that the special game has been executed. controlling the current gaming state to the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state;
When the game ball is fired in the specific manner and received in the second starting port, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the special result is derived, it is determined that the special game has been executed. The present invention is characterized in that it is configured to control the current gaming state to the advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even though the game ball is in a gaming state where it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the game ball is fired in a normal manner, and the first special symbol is When a variable display is performed and a special result is derived, the degree of profit for the player is relatively high after the special game is executed (the number of prize balls or prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time). The expected value of the number is controlled to be a specific gaming state (larger than both the normal gaming state and the advantageous gaming state). In addition, in a gaming state where it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the game ball is fired in a specific manner, and the second special symbol is variablely displayed to derive a special result. Then, after the special game is executed, an advantageous game state in which the degree of profit for the player is relatively low (the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1) controlled by. That is, if the game ball is launched in a normal manner in a gaming state in which it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the player will benefit from the fact that it is easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port. Although it has the disadvantage that it cannot be played, it may be controlled to a specific gaming state. On the other hand, if the game ball is launched in a specific manner in a gaming state in which it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, you will benefit from the fact that it is easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port. Although the player can enjoy the advantage of being able to play games, the player may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state rather than a specific gaming state. In this way, the game ball launch mode (right-handed or It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features, such as giving the player the right to choose by playing left-handed.

Note that "the second lottery is conducted so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery was held" means that the specific condition is met when the first lottery is held. It is not essential that the winning occur (for example, winning a small prize). For example, the first lottery is a mode in which it is determined whether a specific condition is met, but the probability of the specific condition being met is 0 (for example, a mode in which a small winning lottery is conducted, but the probability of winning a small winning is 0) ), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In a gaming state where it is relatively easy to receive the game ball into the second starting port, the unit is determined by the number of units when the game ball is fired in the normal manner and when the game ball is fired in the specific manner. The present invention is characterized in that the ratio of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data to the number of balls fired per time is approximately the same.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired per unit time when the game balls are fired in a normal manner and when the game balls are fired in a specific manner. Since they are substantially the same, the player can decide the firing mode of the game ball according to his/her wishes without considering the advantages and disadvantages.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 63-25 is
A gaming machine in which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (for example, first starting port 5443 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving a game ball launched in a specific manner toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery;
A specific winning opening (for example, a small winning opening shown in FIG. 282) that can accept game balls that were not accepted in the first starting opening, and that gives a predetermined number of prize balls or prize ball data when the game balls are accepted. 5400) and
a second starting port (e.g., second starting port 440 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving a game ball launched in the specific manner (e.g., right-handed) toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
When the variable display of at least the first special symbol is performed and a special result (for example, a "jackpot") is derived, the first condition (for example, a condition device) that is a special game execution condition advantageous to the player is a first condition establishing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that satisfies only the first condition among the second condition (for example, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device);
Temporary retention means (for example, accessory device 3500 in FIG. 282 )and,
a specific opening (for example, specific opening 3540 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving game balls retained in the temporary retention means;
a second condition establishing means (for example, main CPU 101) that satisfies the second condition when the game ball is received in the specific opening;
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player based on the first condition being satisfied and the second condition being satisfied;
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a result of "small hit" is derived), a specific movable member (for example, the small A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that operates a winning shutter (6100) to execute a specific game that can be easily accepted into the specific winning hole;
A first state in which it is easy to accept a game ball into the first starting port (for example, a "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state"), and a first state in which it is more difficult to receive a game ball into the first starting port than in the first state. a state control means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of controlling the state to either a second state (e.g., "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state") or a second state that is impossible;
Equipped with
The state control means may shift the state from the first state to the second state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first state (for example, when a determined number of time-saving games are completed). configured to allow
During the period from when the first condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting hole until the second condition is satisfied, and in the second state, the second starting hole is opened. When the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of game balls into the specific winning slot, the game balls fired in the specific manner are easily accepted into the specific prize opening, thereby increasing the number of prize balls fired per unit time. It is characterized by being configured so that the expected value of the number or the number of prize ball data is increased.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the first state in which it is easy to receive the game ball into the first starting port, even if the specific movable member is operating, the game ball is fired in a specific manner. There is no or low possibility that the item will be accepted into a specific winning slot. On the other hand, in the second state where it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball into the first starting port, if the specific movable member is operating, the game ball launched in a specific manner will be accepted into the specific winning port. It can be done. In addition, in a state where the first condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first special symbol and the derivation of a special result, even if the game ball is accepted into the second starting port, the special result will not be displayed. The second special symbol is variably displayed so that a specific condition can be satisfied without a result being derived. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port, until the second condition is satisfied, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second starting port until the second condition is satisfied. When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of game balls, you can acquire as many prize balls or prize ball data as you like, and it is possible to increase the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features such as

In addition, in the gaming machine of (1) above, the second special symbol is displayed variably and the specific game is executed when a specific condition is met, but the variable display of the first special symbol is When played, the specific game is executed with an extremely lower probability (for example, 1 in 320) than the probability (for example, 1 in 5) that the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the specific game is executed. This is not intended to exclude aspects that may be implemented.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that stores a plurality of tables in which variable display patterns for variable display of at least the second special symbol are prepared;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines a variable display pattern for variable display of at least the second special symbol by referring to any one of the plurality of tables;
Furthermore,
The storage means is
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns are prepared in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small (for example, the variation time of the special symbol for low start in Figure 258 determination table), and a second table in which a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are prepared (for example, the high start pattern shown in FIG. 259). Special symbol fluctuation time determination table),
at least remembers
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
In a normal game state (for example, "normal game state"), a variable display pattern for variable display of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the first table, and when the special game is executed. In other gaming states (for example, "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" and "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state"), it is possible to determine a variable display pattern for variable display of the second special symbol by referring to the second table. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table, so The variable time of the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, in the game state after the special game is executed, the variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the second table, so the second special symbol is displayed in a relatively short time. A variable display of symbols is performed. Therefore, in the gaming state after the special game has been executed, it is possible to increase the frequency of small winning games compared to the normal gaming state, and it is also possible to suppress the frequency of small winning games in the normal gaming state. becomes. Then, when the first condition is satisfied in the game state after the special game is executed, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port until the second condition is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to obtain as many prize balls or prize ball data as you like, making it possible to increase interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The temporary retention means is
The present invention is characterized in that the time for which the entered game ball is temporarily retained can vary each time.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the time during which the game balls are retained in the retention means may vary each time. In other words, since the time from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied is different each time, it is difficult to determine how large the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data is for the number of balls fired per unit time. It becomes difficult for the player to predict whether the game will continue, and it becomes possible to further increase the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machines listed in Supplementary Note 63-26 are:
A gaming machine in which a prize ball or prize ball data can be given as a result of a game played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area,
a first starting port (for example, first starting port 5442 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the gaming area;
a first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery;
a second starting port (for example, second starting port 440 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the gaming area;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a second special symbol and derives the result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that stores a plurality of tables in which variable display patterns for variable display of at least the second special symbol are prepared;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) that determines a variable display pattern for variable display of at least the second special symbol by referring to any one of the plurality of tables;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variablely displayed and a special result (for example, a "jackpot") is derived, a first condition that is a special game execution condition advantageous to the player is established. (for example, the operation of a condition device) and a second condition (for example, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device), a first condition establishing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that satisfies only the first condition;
Temporary retention means (for example, accessory device 3500 in FIG. 281 )and,
a specific opening (for example, specific opening 3540 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving game balls retained in the temporary retention means;
a second condition establishing means (for example, main CPU 101) that satisfies the second condition when the game ball is received in the specific opening;
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player based on the first condition being satisfied and the second condition being satisfied;
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of "small hit" is derived), the specific movable member (for example, the small When a game ball is accepted by operating the winning shutter 6100), it is easy to accept the game ball into a specific winning opening (for example, the small winning opening 5400 in FIG. 281) where a predetermined number of winning balls or prize ball data are given. A specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a specific game,
Equipped with
The storage means is
As a table used for determining a variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table in which a plurality of variable display patterns are prepared in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is relatively small (for example, the variation time of the special symbol for low start in Figure 258 determination table), and a second table in which a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively large expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time are prepared (for example, the high start pattern shown in FIG. 259). Special symbol fluctuation time determination table),
at least remembers
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
a first pattern determining means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of determining a variable display pattern for variable display of the second special symbol by referring to the first table in a normal gaming state; a second pattern determination capable of determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the second special symbol by referring to the second table during a period from when the condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied; means (for example, main CPU 101),
has
During the period from when the first condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port until when the second condition is satisfied, the above based on the receiving of the game ball into the second starting port. The present invention is characterized in that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data relative to the number of balls fired per unit time is increased by increasing the frequency of execution of a specific game.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table, so The variable time of the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, from the time when the first condition is met until the second condition is met, the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the second table. A relatively short-time variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting hole, the second special symbol is displayed in a relatively short period of time, so the second condition is not satisfied until the second condition is satisfied. During this period, the frequency of execution of specific games based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting slot will be increased, and you will be able to acquire as many prize balls or prize ball data as you like, and the number of prize balls or prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time will be increased. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties, such as the ability to increase the expected value of numbers.

In addition, in the gaming machine of (1) above, the second special symbol is displayed variably and the specific game is executed when a specific condition is met, but the variable display of the first special symbol is When played, the specific game is executed with an extremely lower probability (for example, 1 in 320) than the probability (for example, 1 in 5) that the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the specific game is executed. This is not intended to exclude aspects that may be implemented.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The temporary retention means is
The present invention is characterized in that the time for which the entered game ball is temporarily retained can vary each time.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the time during which the game balls are retained in the retention means may vary each time. In other words, since the time from when the first condition is satisfied to when the second condition is satisfied is different each time, it is difficult to determine how large the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data is for the number of balls fired per unit time. It becomes difficult for the player to predict whether the game will continue, and it becomes possible to further increase the interest in the game.

According to each of the inventions recited in appendices 63-1 to 63-26, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[Additional notes 64-1 to 64-4]
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which various winning devices, such as a general winning opening and a starting opening, are provided in a gaming area. When the game balls fired toward the game balls win in various winning devices, prize balls corresponding to the winning devices are paid out.

This type of gaming machine has a distribution system that distributes and releases game balls that enter a predetermined ball entry hole among game balls fired into a specific area toward a first location or a second location. A gaming machine is disclosed that is equipped with a device and provides different benefits depending on whether the device is released toward a first location or the second location (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-047336 (see official bulletin).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-047336, the magnitude of the profit obtained when the ball is released toward the first location is different from that obtained when the game is released toward the second location. In addition to sorting the falling routes of game balls released by the sorting device, it is also possible to sort out profits.

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for gaming machines with even newer gameplay features.

Each of the inventions in Supplementary Notes 64-1 to 64-4 has been made in view of such points, and the purpose thereof is to provide a gaming machine with new gaming properties.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 64-1 is
A game board (for example, transparent panel 172) on which a game area is formed;
The game ball has a rolling surface on which it can roll (for example, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 in FIG. 283), and the normal position where the rolling surface is located behind the game board (for example, in the grand prize opening in FIG. 283) 5401 is a closed state) and an advanced position where the rolling surface is located in front of the game board (for example, the grand prize opening 5401 in FIG. 283 is an open state). (e.g., shutter 6020 in FIG. 282); and
a special winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 5401 in FIG. 283) that can receive game balls rolling on the rolling surface when the special movable member operates toward the advanced position;
A first flow path (for example, the first flow path 5901 in FIG. 283) and a second flow path (for example, the second flow path 5902 in FIG. 283) are the flow paths of the game balls that were not accepted into the special winning opening. )and,
a discharge port (for example, the out port 57 in FIG. 283) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the first flow path;
a normal winning hole (for example, general winning hole 560 in FIG. 283) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the second flowing path;
When a game ball is received in the ejection port, no prize ball or prize ball data is given, and when a game ball is received in at least the special winning hole or the normal winning hole, the special winning hole and the normal winning hole A prize giving means (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 300 that pays out prize balls according to a command from the main CPU 101) that can give a prescribed amount of prize balls or prize ball data to each of them;
When a special result is derived as a result of a game, a round game is performed in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advancing position, thereby making it easy to receive the game ball into the special prize opening. A special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game,
Equipped with
When the special movable member is in the normal position, the game ball flowing down the game area flows down the first flow path,
When the special movable member operates from the advanced position to the normal position while the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface moves to the second position. It is characterized by being configured so that it can flow down the flow path.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the special movable member operates from the advanced position to the normal position while rolling on the rolling surface of the special movable member, the special movable member rolls on the rolling surface. The game ball is configured to be able to flow down the second downstream path. In addition, all or most of the game balls flowing down the second flow path are configured to enter the normal winning hole. In this way, by simply arranging the positions of various structural members, each time a round game is played, prize balls or prize ball data can be awarded based on winnings in the regular winning slot, providing new gameplay features. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines. In addition, when a special game is executed, in addition to the prize balls or prize ball data that are awarded based on winnings in the special winning slot, prize balls or prize ball data are awarded based on winnings in the regular winning slot. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special game execution means is
A round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advance position is executed over a plurality of round games, and
In at least one round game among the plurality of round games, the normal position and the It is characterized by being configured to be operated multiple times between the advance position and the advance position.

According to the game machine of (2) above, in the first round game, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is given multiple opportunities to flow down the second flow path, so that the game ball is given multiple chances to flow down the second flow path. The number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data awarded based on winnings can be increased, making it possible to further increase the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 64-2 is
A game board (for example, transparent panel 172) on which a game area is formed;
The game ball has a rolling surface on which it can roll (for example, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 in FIG. 284), and the normal position where the rolling surface is located behind the game board (for example, in the grand prize opening in FIG. 284) 5401 is a closed mode) and an advanced position where the rolling surface is located in front of the game board (for example, a large prize opening 5401 in FIG. 284 is an open mode). (e.g., shutter 6020 in FIG. 284); and
a special winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 5401 in FIG. 284) that can receive game balls rolling on the rolling surface when the special movable member operates toward the advanced position;
A first downstream path (for example, the first downstream path 5903 in FIG. 284) and a second downstream path (for example, the second downstream path 5904 in FIG. 284) are the downstream paths of the game balls that were not accepted into the special winning opening. )and,
When a predetermined movable member (for example, movable member 5602) is activated, a general prize opening (for example, general prize opening 560) that can receive game balls flowing down the first flow path;
When a game ball is received in at least the special winning hole or the general winning hole, a prize awarding means (for example, A payout/launch control circuit 300 that pays out prize balls according to instructions from the main CPU 101);
When a special result is derived as a result of a game, a round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advance position is performed over multiple rounds, thereby causing the game ball to enter the special winning hole. special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game that is easy to accept;
A normal area (for example, passage gate 49 in FIG. 284) through which game balls flowing down the second downstream path can pass;
It is possible to operate the predetermined movable member based on the passage of the game ball to the normal area, and by operating the predetermined movable member, it is possible to accept the game ball into the general winning hole. A movable control means (for example, main CPU 101),
Equipped with
When the special movable member is in the normal position, the game ball flowing down the gaming area is configured so as not to reach the normal area by flowing down the first flowing path,
When the special movable member operates from the advanced position to the normal position while the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface moves to the second position. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to reach the normal area by flowing down the flow path.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the special movable member operates from the advanced position to the normal position, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface flows down the second flow path and passes through the normal area. Therefore, the movable member is operated between round games so that the general winning hole is in an open mode. That is, at least while the general winning hole is in the open mode due to the operation of the movable member, the special winning hole is in the closed mode, so the game ball hit right flows down the first downstream path, and all or most of it will be entered into the general prize pool. In this way, by simply arranging the positions of various structural members, in addition to the prize ball or prize ball data that is paid out based on winnings in the special winning hole, the prize balls or prize balls can be distributed based on winnings in the general winning hole. It becomes possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features such as being provided with ball data. In addition, when a special game is executed, in addition to the prize balls or prize ball data that are awarded based on winnings in the special winning slot, prize balls or prize ball data are awarded based on winnings in the general winning slot. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 64-3 is
A normal starting area (for example, passage gate 49 in FIG. 285) through which game balls fired toward the gaming area can pass;
normal holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for holding the normal starting memory up to a predetermined number based on passage of the game ball to the normal starting area;
Normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a normal lottery for the normal start memory so that a predetermined result is almost always or approximately achieved based on the establishment of the normal start condition;
A normal symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs variable display of normal symbols and derives the result of the normal lottery;
By operating a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable member 5602 in FIG. 285), a general winning opening (for example, , general prize opening 560 in FIG. 285),
storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of operation patterns as the operation patterns of the predetermined movable member;
When the variable display of the normal symbol is performed and a predetermined result (for example, a hit) is derived, the predetermined movable member is actuated in any one of the plurality of actuation patterns, and the closing mode is activated. a movable control means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of changing from the state to the possible open state;
When the general winning hole is in the open mode, almost no game balls are accepted, and when the general winning hole is in the closed mode, the special starting hole can only accept game balls that have not been accepted into the general winning hole. (for example, second starting port 440),
A special lottery means that performs a special lottery so that a specific result (for example, a small win) is obtained based on the acceptance of game balls into the special starting slot;
special symbol variable control means for variably displaying special symbols and deriving the result of the special lottery;
When the special symbols are variably displayed and a specific result is derived, a specific movable member (for example, the opening/closing member 5603 in FIG. 285) is operated to open a specific prize opening (which can accept game balls). For example, specific port 777),
A special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game advantageous to the player based on the game ball being accepted in the specific winning hole;
Equipped with
The normal starting conditions are:
As long as the normal start memory is held in the normal holding means, this is established on the condition that the general prize opening is in the closed state,
The storage means is
an opening time from when the predetermined result is derived until the general winning slot becomes the open mode, and an ending time from when the general winning slot becomes the closed mode until the normal starting condition is satisfied. A normal operation pattern (e.g., a first pattern) in which both are relatively short; and a special operation pattern (e.g., a second pattern) in which at least one of the opening time and the ending time is relatively long.
at least remembers
The movable control means is
Usually, by operating the predetermined movable member in the normal operation pattern, reception of the game ball into the special starting hole is inhibited, and when a special condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation pattern of the normal symbol is in the second receiving the game ball into the specific winning port by operating the predetermined movable member in the special operation pattern so that the game ball is received in the special starting port It is characterized by making it possible.

According to the gaming machine described in (1) above, since the normal lottery always or generally results in a predetermined result, the general winning slot is almost fully open except for the opening time and the ending time. When the general winning hole is in the open mode, almost all the game balls are accepted into the general winning hole, so the reception of game balls into the special starting hole is inhibited. However, when specific conditions are met, a predetermined movable member operates in a special operation pattern in which at least one of the opening time and ending time is relatively long, so the general prize opening is closed during that time. Game balls can be accepted into the special starting port. Then, based on the acceptance of the game ball into the special starting hole, a specific movable member is activated, making it possible to accept the game ball into the specific prize winning hole, and executing a special game, creating an unprecedented new game. It becomes possible to play games based on sex.

(1) The gaming machine specified in Supplementary Note 64-4 is
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the shutter 6310 in FIG. 286) is actuated, a first special starting port (for example, in FIG. 286 first starting port 5443),
A movable device that operates the predetermined movable member to facilitate receiving the game ball into the first special starting port based on a predetermined condition being established (for example, the result of normal symbol determination is a hit). A control means (for example, main CPU 101),
a first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of conducting a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of game balls into the first special starting slot;
a first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
a second special starting port (for example, second starting port 440 in FIG. 286) configured to accept only game balls that were not accepted in the first special starting port;
a second lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of conducting a second lottery (e.g., first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the second special starting slot;
a second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of variably displaying a second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a special result (for example, a jackpot) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) executes a special game advantageous to the player. )and,
If a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game (when entering a probability-variable attacker), the game state after the special game is changed to a specific game state in which the probability of deriving the special result is increased (for example, a high-probability time-saving a specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that controls the game state);
A first state (for example, electric support state) in which it is relatively easy to accept the game ball into the first special starting port, and a second state in which it is relatively difficult to receive the game ball into the first special starting port. state (e.g., non-electric support state), and state control means (e.g., main CPU 101) that can control either of the following states;
Equipped with
The expected value at which the specific condition is met during the execution of the special game (for example, the ease of entering a probability-variable attacker) is different between when the first lottery is held and when the second lottery is held. are configured differently,
When the state control means is controlled to the first state (for example, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), it becomes relatively easy to receive the game ball into the first special starting port, so that the first state 2. It is more difficult to accept the game ball into the special starting port than the first special starting port, and
When the state is controlled by the state control means to the second state (for example, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state), it becomes relatively difficult to accept the game ball into the first special starting port. The present invention is characterized in that the game ball is configured to be easier to receive into the second special starting port than in the first state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to change the probability of being controlled to a specific gaming state that increases the probability of deriving a special result without changing the manner in which the game ball is launched toward the gaming area. This makes it possible to provide a unique gameplay experience.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The expected value at which the specific condition is met during execution of the special game is configured to be higher when the second lottery is held than when the first lottery is held,
The state control means includes:
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times) in the first state, the first state is shifted to the second state. It is characterized by having state transition control means that can execute control.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times in the first state where it is more difficult to accept the game ball into the second special starting port than the first special starting port, the second A transition is made to a second state in which it is easier to accept game balls into the special starting port than in the first state. That is, when the state is shifted from the first state to the second state, the second lottery is performed more frequently than in the first state. The expected value for the specific condition to be met during the execution of the special game is higher when the second lottery is held than when the first lottery is held, so it is difficult to derive a special result in the first state. Even if this happens, the players will not be discouraged but will be more interested in the game.

According to each of the inventions in appendices 64-1 to 64-4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new gaming features.

[Other expansion examples, etc.]

Note that all the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. can.

In addition, each of the above-described embodiments, examples, and modifications, including the above-mentioned supplementary notes, are merely examples. It goes without saying that each configuration shown in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be partially replaced or combined in other embodiments, other examples, and other modifications. stomach. That is, each component described in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

16 LCD display 24 Speaker 35 Power switch 49 Passage gate 101 Main CPU
103 RWM (main RAM)
104 Sub SPU
203 Work RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 440 Second starting opening 540 Big winning opening 560 General winning opening 610 Shutter 662 Main button 664 Select button 5400 Small winning opening 6100 Small winning shutter

Claims (1)

A display means for displaying a special symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information related to the special symbol as a starting memory;
display control means capable of controlling a variable display of the special symbol for one starting memory stored by the holding means;
Effect control means capable of performing a variable display effect while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed;
performance mode determining means capable of determining performance modes for a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means;
Equipped with
The performance mode determining means includes:
A plurality of starting memories are stored by the holding means, and if a predetermined starting memory for which a predetermined expected performance is to be performed is not included in the plurality of starting memories, the starting memory is stored by the holding means. For all starting memories, it can be determined to perform a specific performance mode that is performed multiple times in the variable display performance,
The performance control means is
The performance that can be displayed in the specific performance mode performed for all the starting memories stored by the holding means is divided into the second half of the variable display of the special symbol performed for one starting memory and the next one of the starting memory. It is possible to perform this over the variable display of the special symbol that is performed regarding the starting memory,
A predetermined effect indicating that the predetermined expected effect will be performed even though the last start memory stored among all the start memories stored by the holding means is not the predetermined start memory. It is possible to do
The performance mode determining means includes:
If a plurality of starting memories are stored by the holding means and a predetermined starting memory in which a predetermined expected performance is to be performed is included in the plurality of starting memories, at least after the predetermined starting memory. With respect to the stored starting memory, it can be determined not to execute a displayable effect in the specific effect mode,
The predetermined performance is
Executed when the performance that is performed across the latter half of the variable display of the special symbol performed for the one starting memory and the variable display of the special symbol performed for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is not performed. The game machine is characterized in that it is an effect that is easily executed in a variable display in a starting memory that is earlier than the last stored starting memory and later than the first starting memory stored.

Images